Hydraulic Pump PDF

Product catalog
Industrial hydraulics
Part 1: Pumps
1
Product catalog
Industrial hydraulics
Part 1: Pumps
Product catalogs Industrial hydraulics of Bosch Rexroth at a glance:
Part 1: Pumps RE 00112-01
Part 2 Motors RE 00112-02
Part 3: Cylinders RE 00112-03
Part 4: On/off valves RE 00112-04
Part 5: Proportional servo valves RE 00112-05
Part 6: Electronics RE 00112-06
Part 7: Systems RE 00112-07
Part 8: Power units, Manifolds and plates, Accumulators RE 00112-08
Part 9: Filters RE 00112-09
Part 10: ATEX units for potentially explosive atmospheres RE 00112-10

For the latest product information from Bosch Rexroth, please visit our website:
www.boschrexroth.com/ics
RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

2
Publisher Bosch Rexroth AG

Zum Eisengießer 1
97816 Lohr, Germany
Phone +49(0)9352/18-0
Fax +49(0)9352/18-40
info@boschrexroth.de
www.boschrexroth.com
Catalog No. Document no.: RE 00112-01

Material no.: R999000302
Edition: 2013-08
Replaces: 2008-11
Reprints and translation, in whole or in part, only with the publisher´s prior consent.
Subject to revision.
Should you have queries with regard to the products in this catalog, please contact the
Rexroth sales partner in your vicinity.
www.boschrexroth.com/contact
Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08

3
Contents | Pumps
Contents
General 5 1
Axial piston pumps 69 2
External gear pumps 1023 3
Internal gear pumps 1317 4
Gerotor pumps 1379 5
Vane pumps 1393 6
Radial piston pumps 1463 7
Electro-hydraulic pumps 1489 8

4

5
Contents | General | Pumps
General
Designation Data sheet Page
Installation, commissioning and maintenance

1
Installation, commissioning, maintenance of hydraulic systems 07900 7
Installation, commissioning and servicing of hydraulic pumps and motors 07080 13
Hydraulic fluids
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons 90220 15
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids 90221 31
Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids (HFDR/HFDU) 90222 45
2
Rating of hydraulic fluids for Rexroth hydraulic components (pumps and motors) 90235 61

6

7
RE 07900/10.06 1/6
Installation, commissioning and Replaces: 08.06
maintenance of hydraulic systems
1. General • For hydraulics fluids:

1.1 Long service life and functional reliability of hydraulic Take care of contamination and humidity; contamination
systems and their components depend on correct from the environment must not enter the tanks! Fill oil
handling. tanks only through filters, preferably system filters or
Ensure trouble-free operation by observing the following portable filter stations with fine filters.
points: Internal protective coatings, if any, must be resistant to
the hydraulic fluid used!
– The specific installation and operating instructions for the
relevant components • For parts taken from stock:
– Special instructions in individual cases The storage of parts that were not filled or treated with
anti-corrosion fluid can lead to the formation of resin.
– Technical data in the data sheet.
Solve the resin using a grease solvent and renew the
In addition, we would like to draw your attention to the fol- lubricating film.
lowing regulations:
– Check to see that all of the parts required for the installa-
– German standard “Hydraulic systems“ DIN 24346 tion are available!
– ISO standard ISO 4413 – Take note of any transport damage!
2. Installation 2.2 Carrying out the montage
2.1 Preparatory work for the installation – Use lifting lugs and transport facilities!
– Sauberkeit der Anlage gewährleisten! – Do not apply force to prevent transverse forces and tensi-
• For the surroundings: on on pipes and components. The valve mounting sur-
Keep power units, line connections and components faces must be perfectly even. The fixing screws must be
clean or clean them (e.g. pickling after, for example, pro- tightened evenly at the specified torque.
cesses have been carried out that involve heat, i.e. wel- Take care that pipes are adequately fixed!
ding, hot bending, etc.)! – When selecting pipes, hoses and fittings/flanges, obser-
ve the correct pressure stage (wall thickness, material).
Use only seamless precision steel pipes.
8
2/6 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Installation, commissioning and maintenance of hydraulic systems RE 07900/10.06
– Do not use hemp or putty as sealing materials! This may As the hydraulic fluids often do not comply with the re-
cause contamination and thus malfunction. quired cleanliness, the fluids must be filled through a fil-
– To prevent external leakage, observe the installation ins- ter. The absolute filter rating of the filling filter should be at
tructions of the pipe fittings’ manufacturer. We recom- least that of the filters installed in the system.
mend the use of fittings with elastic seals. 3.2 Trial run
– Make sure that hoses are properly laid! Rubbing and – For safety reasons, only personnel of the machine ma-
abutting of the lines must be prevented. nufacturer and, if required, maintenance and operating
– Provide the correct hydraulic fluids personnel should be present.
• Mineral oils: – All pressure relief valves, pressure reducing valves,
HLP hydraulic oils according to DIN 51524 part 2 are pressure controllers of pumps must be unloaded. An
generally suitable for standard systems and compo- exemption to this are TÜV-set valves.
nents. – Open isolator valves completely!
• Fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids: – Switch the system on briefly and check whether the di-
VDMA 24568. rection of rotation of the drive motor matches the pre-
For these fluids, the system and components must be scribed direction of rotation of the pump.
matched. – Check the position of the directional valves and, if ne-
• Hardly inflammable hydraulic fluids: cessary, move the spool to the required position.
VDMA 24317. For these fluids, the system and com- – Set the control spool to by-pass.
ponents must be matched. (Before filling in the spe- – Open suction valves of the pump. If required for design
cial media, check, whether the system is compatible reasons, fill pump housing with hydraulic fluids to pre-
with the intended fluid.) vent bearings and parts of the rotary group from run-
The following points must be observed in accordance ning dry.
with the relevant requirements: – If a pilot oil pump is provided, commission it1).
– Viscosity of the hydraulic fluid – Start up the pump, swivel it from its zero position and
– Operating temperature range listen for any noises.
– Type of seals used on the components fitted – Swivel the pump slightly out (ca. 5°)1).
– Bleed the system
3. Commissioning Carefully loosen fittings or bleed screws at high points
in the system. When the escaping fluid is free from bub-
When the installation has been carried out correctly, pro-
bles, then the filling process is completed. Re-tighten
ceed with commissioning and functional testing.
fittings.
3.1 Preparations for trial run
– Flush the system; if possible, short-circuit actuators.
– Tank cleaned? Flush the system until the filters remain clean; check
– Lines cleaned and properly installed? the filters!
– Fittings, flanges tightened? With servo-systems, the servo-valves must be remo-
ved and replaced by flushing plates or direction
– Lines and components correctly connected in line with
valves of the same size. Short-circuit the actuators.
installation drawings and circuit diagram?
During flushing, the hydraulic fluid in the complete hy-
Is the accumulator filled with nitrogen? Fill in nitrogen un- draulic system should reach temperatures that are at
til the pre-charge pressure p0 as specified in the cicuit least as high as later during operation. Change the fil-
di agram is reached. (On the fluid side the system must ter elements as required.
be pressureless!). It is recommended that the gas pre- Flushing continues until the required minimum cleanli-
charge pressure is marked on the accumulator itself (e.g. ness is reached. This can only be achieved by conti-
self-adhesive label) and in the hydraulic circuit so that a nuous monitoring using a particle counter.
comparative check is possible, if required.
– Check the system functions under no-load conditions, if
Caution! Use only nitrogen as pre-charge gas! possible, by hand; cold-test the electrohydraulic control.
Accumulators must comply with the safety regulations va- – When the operating temperature has been reached,
lid at the place of installation. test the system under load; slowly increase the pressu-
– Are the drive motor and pump properly installed and re.
aligned? – Monitor control and instrumentation equipment!
– Is the drive motor correctly connected? – Check the housing temperature of hydraulic pumps and
– Are filters with the prescribed filter rating used? hydraulic motors.
– Are filters fitted in the correct direction of flow? – Listen for noises!
– Has the specified hydraulic fluid filled up to the upper – Check the hydraulic fluid level; if required, top up!
marking?
1) As far as possible with the control elements fitted; otherwise,
start up at full displacement. In conjunction with combustion
engines, start up at idle speed.
9
RE 07900/10.06 Installation, commissioning and maintenance of hydraulic systems Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/6
– Check the setting of pressure relief valves by loading or The most common faults are:
braking the system. – The fluid tank is not inspected.
– Inspect the system for leaks. – The hydraulic fluid is not filtered before being filled in.
– Switch off the drive. – The installation is not checked before commissioning
– Retighten all fittings, even if there is no evidence of lea- (subsequent conversion with loss of fluid!).
kage. – System components are not bled.
Caution! Only tighten fittings when the system is 1
– Pressure relief valves are set only slightly higher than
depressurised! the operating pressure (closing pressure differential is
– Is the pipe fixing adequate, even under changing pres- not observed).
sure loads? – Pressure controllers of hydraulic pumps are set higher
– Are the fixing points at the correct positions? or to the same pressure as the pressure relief valve.
– Are the hoses laid so that they do not chamfer, even un- – The flushing time of servo systems is not adhered to.
der pressure load? – Abnormal pump noise is ignored (cavitation, leaking 2
– Check the fluid level. suction lines, too much air in the hydraulic fluid).
– Test the system for all functions. Compare measured – Transversal loads on cylinder piston rods are not obser-
values with the permissible or specified data (pressure, ved (installation error!).
velocity. Adjust further control components). – Hydraulic cylinders are not bled (damage to seals!)
– Jerky movements indicate, amongst other things, the – Limit switches are set too low.
presence of air in the system. By briefly swivelling the
– The switching hysteresis of pressure switches is not ta- 3
pump in one or both directions with the actuator being
ken into account when settings are made.
loaded or braked, it is possible to eliminate certain air
pockets. The system is completely bled when all func- – Hydraulic pump and hydraulic motor housings are not
tions are performed jerk-free and smoothly and the sur filled with hydraulic fluid prior to commissioning.
face of the hydraulic fluid level is free from foam. Expe- – Settings are not documented.
rience has shown that foaming should have ceased one – Adjustment spindles are not secured or sealed.
hour after start-up at the latest.
– Unnecessary personnel present during commissioning
– Check the temperature. 4
of the system.
– Switch off the drive.
– Remove filter elements (off-line and full-flow filters) and 4. Maintenance
inspect them for residues. Clean filter elements or re-
According to DIN 31 051 the term “maintenance” in-
place them, if required. Paper or glass fibre elements
cludes the following fields of activity:
cannot be cleaned.
– Inspection
– If further contamination is found, additional flushing is 5
required to prevent premature failure of the system Measures to recognise and assess the actual situation,
components. i.e. recognise how and why the so-called wear reserve
continues to decrease.
– All the adjustments made are to be recorded in an ac-
ceptance report. – Maintenance
3.3 Commissioning of fast running systems Measures to preserve the nominal conditions, i.e. to
take precautions in order that the reduction in the wear
Such system can often not be commissioning using the
reserve during the useful life is kept as low as possible. 6
normal measuring instruments (such as pressure gauges,
thermometers, electrical multimeters, etc.) and standard – Repair
tools. Optimization is also not possible. Measures to restore the nominal condition, i.e. compen-
These systems include, for example, forging presses, sate for reduction in performance and restore the wear
plastics injection moulding machines, special machine reserve.
tools, rolling tools, crane controls, machines with electro- Maintenance measures must be planned and taken in ac-
hydraulic closed-loop control systems. cordance with the operating time, the consequences of a
Commissioning and optimization of these systems often failure and the required availability. 7
require more comprehensive measuring equipment to al-
4.1 Inspection
low several measurements to be taken at a time (e.g. se-
veral pressures, electrical signals, travel, velocities, flows, The individual points to be inspected should be summa-
etc.). rised for a specific system in so-called inspection lists in
order that the inspections can be carried out adequately
3.4 The most common faults occurring during commissioning
by employees with different qualification levels.
Apart from servicing, commissioning is very decisive for
Important points of inspection are: 8
the service life and functional reliability of a hydraulic sys-
tem. – Checking the hydraulic fluid level in the tank.
For this reason, faults during commissioning must be avo- – Checking the heat exchanger (air, water) for effec-
ided as far as possible. tiveness.
10
– Checking the system for external leakage (visual inspec- • daily during the first week and replace them as re-
tion). quired.
– Checking the hydraulic fluid temperature during operati- • After one week, the filters should be cleaned as re-
on. quired.
– Checking pressures • Maintenance of suction filters:
– Amount of leakage Suction filters require particularly thorough servicing.
– Checking the cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid After the running-in period, they must be inspected at
least once a week and cleaned, if necessary.
Caution!
– Service the system fluid
Visual inspections can only give an approximation (clou-
ding of the hydraulic fluid, darker appearance than at • Maintenance intervals depend on the following opera-
the time of filling, sediments in the fluid tank). ting factors:
If conventional particle counting is impossible, the fol- - Hydraulic fluid condition (e.g. water in oil, strongly
lowing three methods can be used for establishing the aged oil)
fluid cleanliness: - Operating temperature and oil fill
• Particle counts using electronic counting and sorting We recommend that the fluid be changed in depen-
equipment. dence upon an oil analysis. With systems whose oil
• Microscopic examination. is not analysed at regular intervals the fluid should be
replaced every 2000 to 4000 operating hours at the
• Gravimetric establishment of solids by means of finest
latest.
filtration of a certain fluid volume (e.g. 100 ml) and
weighing of the filter paper before and after the filtra- • Drain the system fluid at operating temperature and
tion process. This allows the establishment of the change it.
amount of solid particles in mg/l. • Severely aged or contaminated system fluid cannot
– Check the contamination of filters. A visual inspection be improved by adding new fluid!
of deep filters, which are widely used today, is no lon- • Only fill in oil via filters that have at least the same se-
ger possible. paration capacity as the filters installed in the system,
– Analyse the chemical properties of the hydraulic fluid. or use a system filter.
– Check the temperature at points where bearings are lo- • Take samples of the system fluid to have the type, size
cated. and amount of particles analysed in the lab. Record
the results.
– Check the generation of noise.
– Check the accumulator for its pre-charge pressure; for
– Test performance and velocity.
this, the accumulator must be depressurised on the flu-
– Inspect pipes and hoses. id side.
Caution! Caution!
Damaged pipes and hoses must be immediately re- Work on systems that include accumulators may
placed. only be carried out after the fluid pressure was un-
– Inspect accumulator stations. loaded.
4.2 Maintenance Welding or soldering work or any mechanical work on
In practice, inspection, maintenance and repair work is accumulators is not permitted.
not as strictly separated as the definitions may suggest. Improper repairs can lead to severe accidents. Repairs
Servicing is often done in conjunction with inspections. on hydraulic accumulator may therefore only be carried
For safety reason, pipe fittings, connections and compo- out by Rexroth Service service personnel.
nents must not be loosened or removed as long as the – The operating temperature must be measured. An in-
system is pressurised. crease in the operating temperature indicates increa-
Important service work is: sing friction and leakage.
– Create a maintenance book – Leakage in the pipework
We recommend that a maintenance book is created to Leakage, especially with underfloor piping, represents,
lay down the parts to be inspected. apart from loss of fluid, a risk for equipment and concre-
te floors.
– Check the hydraulic fluid level
For safety reasons, sealing work on the pipes may only
• continuously during commissioning
be carried out when the system is depressurised. Lea-
• shortly after commissioning kage at points that are sealed with soft seals (O-rings,
• later, at weekly intervals form seal rings, etc.) cannot be eliminated by tightening
– Inspect filters as these sealing elements are either destroyed or har-
dened. Sealing can only be achieved by replacing the
• during commissioning every two to three hours and, if
sealing elements.
necessary, replace them.
11
RE 07900/10.06 Installation, commissioning and maintenance of hydraulic systems Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/6
– Check main and pilot pressure Generally, defective components should not be repaired
• Check interval: One week on site, since for the proper repair, the required tooling
and the required cleanliness are usually not given on site.
• Document pressure corrections in the maintenance
On site, only complete components should be changed
book.
whenever possible, in order
• Frequent pressure adjustments indicate, among other
• to keep the time for which the opened system is expo-
things, wear of the pressure relief valve.
sed to ambient influences to a minimum,
4.3 Repair 1
• to keep the fluid loss as low as possible,
Locate and eliminate malfunction and damage.
• to ensure the shortest possible downtime through the
– Fault localisation use of overhauled and tested components.
A precondition for system repairs is successful, i.e. sys- After failed components are located, it is essential to
tematic fault search. check whether the entire system or parts of the system
This requires in any case detailed knowledge of the have been contaminated by broken parts or larger
structure and the operating principle of the individual amounts of abraded metal.
components as well as of the entire system. The req- 4.4 Repair and major overhaul of hydraulic components
uired documentation should be available and easily ac-
Generally, it can be said that only the component manu-
cessible.
facturer can carry out major overhauls in the most effici-
The most important measuring instruments (thermome- ently and reliably (same quality standard, trained person-
ter, electrical multimeter, industrial stethoscope, stop nel, test facilities, warranty, etc.).
watch, rpm counter, etc.) should also be available in the
vicinity of the system, especially in the case of large
systems.
– Fault correction
When carrying out any work, observe strictest cleanli-
ness. Before loosening fittings, clean the surrounding
area.
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Zum Eisengießer 1 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
documentation@boschrexroth.de the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.de remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.
12
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
documentation@boschrexroth.de the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
www.boschrexroth.de remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.
13
RE 07080/07.05 1/2
Installation, commissioning and servicing Replaces: 02.03
of hydraulic pumps and motors

(vane pumps, internal gear pumps, radial piston motors,
internal gear pumps)
1. General – Suction vacuum pressure or feed pressure must be

1.1 To ensure proper operation of pumps and motors, please within the limits specified by the manufacturer; filters and
observe the following information: valves possibly installed must be taken into account.
– Technical data in the data sheet – Take care that the suction lines are leak-free.
– General notes on commissioning of hydraulic systems – The flow velocity in suction lines should not exceed
0.5 m/s.
– The following notes on installation and operation
– Cut the pipe ends at an angle of less than 45° and install
2. Installation
them at a distance of at least 2.5 x the pipe diameter
2.1 Flushing from the tank floor in order to prevent the aspiration of
– On pumps taken from stock, resin may have formed. This deposits from the tank floor.
must be removed by means of solvents. Then, the lubricat- 2.3.2 Leakage drain lines
ing film must be renewed. In the case of hardly inflamma-
– Use sufficiently large nominal widths in order to keep the
ble fluids, no special measures have to be taken.
backpressure in the housing within the permissible limits.
2.2 Installation
– When installing the lines, make sure that the housing
– Observe drawings and/or instructions is completely filled with fluid, while taking care that a
– Ensure stress-free installation siphoning effect is avoided.
– In the case of prime movers, ensure that foundations are – Pressureless return flow to the tank
level – Sufficient cooling and settling of the hydraulic fluid is
2.3 Lines and connections achieved by directing the fluid to the tank wall.
2.3.1 Suction lines – Ensure a sufficient distance to temperature switches.
– Design and assemble lines according to the manufactur-
er’s instructions.
14
2/2 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Installation, commissioning and servicing RE 07080/07.05
2.3.3 Installation instructions 3.3 Filling

– All lines have to be submerged at least 2.5 x the pipe – Pump types V3, V4, PV7, PVV, PVQ are self-priming,
diameter below the lowest permissible fluid level, but at the housings need not to be filled. Internal gear pumps
least 100 mm in order to prevent foaming. must be filled prior to commissioning! For all other
– Install the leakage drain line higher than the suction line pumps, verify, whether the housing must be filled.
and take precautions that the returning oil cannot be 3.4 Start-up
directly re-aspired. – Observe specific component instructions.
– The ends of the suction, return and leakage drain lines – Set all valves, especially on the suction and supply
must therefore be installed with a distance of at least side, to the free-flow position.
200 mm from each other.
– Switch the motor briefly on and off several times in
– We recommend seamless precision steel pipes to order to facilitate bleeding. Only operate the pump
DIN 2391 and pipe connections that can be loosened. under full load when it runs properly and smoothly.
2.4 Filters – During initial start-up, bleed the pressure line to allow
– Whenever possible, use return line or pressure filters. complete filling of the pump.
– Use suction filters only in conjunction with underpres- Exceptions to this are pump with automatic bleed
sure switches/clogging indicators. valve.
– Depending on the pump type, the required filter rating is – When the system starts up, the fluid level in the tank
25 μm to 40 μm. must not fall below the minimum suction level.
Recommendation: 10- μm filters prolong the service life 3.5 Pressure limitation / pressure control
under high load conditions. – Always select the lowest settings for commissioning.
2.5 Hydraulic media – Carefully increase the pressure to the required values,
2.5.1 Mineral oils but do not set to unnecessarily high values.
– When HL oils without wear-reducing additives are used, – If required, secure settings against unwanted adjust-
vane pumps (V3, V4, PV7, PVV, PVQ) may only be oper- ment.
ated at reduced pressure. 3.6 Temperature
– Oils containing polar additives (slide way oils) must not – Check the fluid temperature under normal operating
be used for pumps with plain bearings, as the additives conditions.
precipitate at 70 °C and thus impair cooling and lubrica-
4. Routine maintenance
tion of the bearings.
4.1 Frequency
2.5.2 HFC fluid (water glycol)
– Loads and operating conditions determine regular
– Internal gear pumps of types PGF and PGH are suitable
maintenance intervals.
for operation with HFC fluids.
4.2 Mounting
Please note the information in the data sheets!
– Check the correct orientation of the pumps, motors,
When using hydraulic media, which are not listed in the
cylinders, further energy converters and lines at normal
technical data, please consult us.
operating pressure and operating temperature.
3. Commissioning
4.3 Filters
3.1 Electrical open and closed-loop control elements
– Observe clogging indicators and check suction filters
– Observe voltages and current intensity for operability according to the operating instructions.
3.2 Direction of rotation of drive/output shafts 4.4 Servicing
– Observe the arrow of direction of rotation – We recommend regular servicing of the complete
– Testing of a unit filled with hydraulic fluid: system by Bosch Rexroth!
Switching the unit briefly on and off prevents damage in
the case of the wrong direction of rotation.
Hydraulics set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
Zum Eisengießer 1 be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
can be derived from our information. The information given does not
documentation@boschrexroth.de
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
www.boschrexroth.de must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.
15
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral RE 90220/05.12

Replaces: 05.10
1/16
oils and related hydrocarbons
Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components
Hydraulic fluids
Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Title on mineral oils and acceptable hydraulic water-free water-containing
related hydrocarbons fluids hydraulic fluids hydraulic fluids
Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922
RE 90223
Data sheets RE 90220 RE 90221 RE 90222
(in preparation)
HL
HEPG
HLP HFDR HFC
HEES partially saturated
HLPD HFDU (ester base) HFB
Classification HEES saturated
HVLP HFDU (glycol base) HFAE
HEPR
HLPD and more HFAS
HETG
and more
16
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils RE 90220/05.12
Contents
1 Basic information .................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 General instructions ...................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels ....................................................................................................................................4
3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid ..........................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid .................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior........................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.3 Wear protection capability ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.4 Material compatibility..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.5 Aging resistance .................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.6 Air separation ability (ASA)...............................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.7 Demulsifying ability and water solubility .........................................................................................................................................6
3.1.8 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.9 Corrosion protection ..........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.10 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Classification and fields of application ................................................................................................................................................7
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.2 Storage and handling ...............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.3 Filling of new systems...............................................................................................................................................................................9
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ......................................................................................................................................................................9
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .........................................................................................................................9
4.6 Re-additivation............................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.7 Foaming behavior .......................................................................................................................................................................................9
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration .......................................................................................................................................10
5 Disposal and environmental protection ........................................................................................................................................................11
6 Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons .................................................................................................12
7 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................15
17
RE 90220/05.12 Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16
1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions Notes:
In the market overview RE 90220-01, hydraulic fluid based on
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic mineral oil are described which, according to the information of
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and the lubricant manufacturer, feature the respective parameters
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the of the current requirements standard DIN 51524 and other
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. parameters which are of relevance for suitability in connection 1
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in with Rexroth components.
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol- These specifications are not checked or monitored by Bosch
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country- Rexroth. The list in the market overview does not therefore
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of represent a recommendation on the part of Rexroth or approval
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137). of the respective hydraulic fluid for use with Rexroth compo-
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations nents and does not release the operator from his responsibility
2
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of hydraulic regarding selection of the hydraulic fluid.
fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons in the Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
application of Rexroth hydraulic components. for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of notes below.
classification are the responsibility of the operator.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate 1.3 Safety instructions
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to 3
Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
ensure compliance with statutory regulations. The recommen- environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
dations of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
given in the safety data sheet are to be observed when using safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
hydraulic fluid. that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid
4
for his system. He is to ensure that the selected fluid meets the
minimum requirements of the relevant fluid standard during the
whole of the period of use.
Other regulations and legal provisions may also apply. The
operator is responsible for their observance, e.g. EU directive
2004/35/EG and their national implementations. In Germany
the Water Resources Act (WHG) is also to be observed. 5
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact
with lubricant manufacturers to support you in the selection,
maintenance, care and analyses.
When disposing of used hydraulic fluids, apply the same care
as during use.
6
1.2 Scope
This data sheet must be observed when using hydraulic fluids
based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons in Bosch
Rexroth hydraulic components.
Please note that the specifications of this data sheet may be
restricted further by the specifications given in the product
7
data sheets for the individual components.
The use of the individual hydraulic fluids in accordance with
the intended purpose can be found in the safety data sheets or
other product description documents of the lubricant manufac-
turers. In addition, each use is to be individually considered.
Rexroth hydraulic components may only be operated with
hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons 8
according to DIN 51524 if specified in the respective compo-
nent data sheet or if Rexroth approval for use is furnished.
18
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
particles cause continuous elevated wear. facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over
For hydraulic fluids, the cleanliness level is given as a three-
the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
digit numerical code in accordance with ISO 4406. This
If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
numerical code denotes the number of particles present in
as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water
a hydraulic fluid for a defined quantity. Moreover, foreign solid
separation.
matter is not to exceed a mass of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric
examination according to ISO 4405). Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of
container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
20/18/15 in accordance with ISO 4406 or better is to be main-
transport and storage.
tained in operation. Special servo valves demand improved
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli- Further information about contamination with solid matter and
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
and thus greater cleanliness. Lower numbers in cleanliness
levels should always be striven for and extend the service life
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest
cleanliness requirements determines the required cleanliness
of the overall system. Please also observe the specifications in
table 1: "Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406" and in the
respective data sheets of the various hydraulic components.
Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406
Particles per 100 ml

Up to and Scale number
More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 μm > 6 μm > 14 μm
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6
19
3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

The use of hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils for Rexroth If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
hydraulic components is based on compliance with the operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me-
minimum requirements of DIN 51524. chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not
be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached, 1
The specified limit values for all components employed in the which may lead to cavitation damage.
hydraulic system, for example viscosity and cleanliness level,
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
must be observed with the hydraulic fluid used, taking into
operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to
account the specified operating conditions.
contamination and a shorter component life cycle will result.
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the
following factors: 3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior
2
For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T
3.1.1 Viscosity
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined the temperature drops; see Fig. 1 "Viscosity temperature chart
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components for HL, HLP, HLPD (VI 100)". The interrelation between viscos-
and it is to be observed for each individual component. ity and temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI).
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the The viscosity temperature diagram in Fig. 1 is extrapolated 3
response characteristics of closed control loops, stability and in the < 40 °C range. This idealized diagram is for reference
damping of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of purposes only. Measured values can be obtained from your
wear. lubricant manufacturer and are to be preferred for design
purposes.
We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range
of each component be kept within the permissible temperature
range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness 4
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component
concerned.
Fig. 1: Viscosity-temperature chart for HL, HLP, HLPD (VI 100, double logarithmic representation) 5
40° 20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°

1600
1000
600
400
6
VG 68
VG
VG 00
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG 6
1
15
15
10
32
22
200
0
100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
60
40 7
20
10 8
5
40° 25° 10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115°
Temperature t [°C]
20
3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.6 Air separation ability (ASA)

Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids
The wear protection capability is described in DIN 51524-2,-3 contain approx. 7 to 13 percent by volume of dissolved air
via test procedures "FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and (with atmospheric pressure and 50 °C). Hydraulic fluids
"Mechanical test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). From always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air
ISO VG 32 DIN 51524-2,-3 prescribes a rating of at least may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation
10 (FZG test). At present, the FZG test cannot be applied damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and
to viscosity classes < ISO VG 32. design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation
3.1.4 Material compatibility capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid and
aging.
The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials
It cannot be improved by additives.
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals,
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The According to DIN 51524 for instance, an ASA value d 10
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data minutes is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46,
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material 6 minutes are typical, lower values are preferable.
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to
be checked by the user. 3.1.7 Demulsifying ability and water solubility
The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined
Table 2: Known material incompatibilities
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614
Classification Incompatible with: defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids.
HLxx classifications with EPDM seals For larger systems with permanent monitoring, a demulsifying
Zinc- and ash/free fluid with good water separation capability (WSC) is recom-
with bronze-filled PTFE seals
hydraulic fluids mended. The water can be drained from the bottom of the
reservoir. In smaller systems (e.g. in mobile machines), whose
3.1.5 Aging resistance fluid is less closely monitored and where water contamination
The way a hydraulic fluid ages depends on the thermal, into the hydraulic fluid, for instance through air condensation,
chemical and mechanical stress to which it is subjected. Aging cannot be ruled out completely, an HLPD fluid is recom-
resistance can be greatly influenced by the chemical composi- mended.
tion of the hydraulic fluids. The demulsifying ability up to ISO-VG 100 is given at 54 °C,
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 °C) result in a approxi- and at 82 °C for fluids with higher viscosity.
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 °C temperature Water emulsifying HLPD hydraulic fluids have no, or a very
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the poor, demulsifying ability.
fluid service life results from the application of the Arrhenius
equation (see Glossary). 3.1.8 Filterability
Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
aging of the hydraulic fluid through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
fluids used require a good filterability, not just when new, but
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle also during the whole of their service life. Depending on the
80 °C 100 % basic fluid used and the additives (VI enhancers) there are
90 °C 50 % great differences here.
100 °C 25 % The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Filterability is tested with the
new hydraulic fluid and after the addition of 0.2 % water. The
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocar-
underlying standard (ISO 13357-1/-2) stipulates that filterability
bons are tested with 20% water additive during testing of
must have no negative effects on the filters or the hydraulic
aging resistance according to ISO 4263-1.
fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".
The calculated fluid service life is derived from the results of
tests in which the long-term characteristics are simulated in 3.1.9 Corrosion protection
a short period of time by applying more arduous conditions
Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
(condensed testing). This calculated fluid service life is not to
on steel components, they must also be compatible with
be equated to the fluid service life in real-life applications.
non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water different metals and metal alloys are described in DIN 51524.
content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water". Hydraulic fluids that are not compatible with the materials
listed above must not be used, even if they are compliant with
ISO 51524.
Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
they are delivered.
21
3.1.10 Additivation
The properties described above can be modified with the
help of suitable additives. A general distinction is made for
fluids between heavy metal-free and heavy metal-containing
(generally zinc) additive systems. Both additive systems are 1
most often incompatible with each other. The mixing of these
fluids must be avoided even if the mixing ratio is very low. See
chapter 4, "Hydraulic fluids in operation”.
Increasing additivation generally leads to deteriorated air
separation ability (ASA) and water separation capability
(WSC) of the hydraulic fluid. According to the present state
of knowledge, all hydraulic fluids described in this document, 2
independently of the actual additivation, can be filtered using
all filter materials with all known filtration ratings t 1 μm without
filtering out effective additives at the same time.
Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive system.
3.2 Classification and fields of application 3
Table 4: Classification and fields of application

Typical field of
Classification Features Notes
application
HL fluids Hydraulic fluids HL fluids can be HL fluids may be used only for components whose product data
according to predominantly only used in hydraulic sheet specifically allows HL fluids. For components which have
DIN 51524-1 4
with additives for systems that do not not been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI = 100 oxidation and corro- pose any require- consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
sion protection, but ments as to wear
Hydraulic fluids that only comply with the requirements of classes
no specific additives protection.
HL and HR in accordance with ISO 11158 without proving that
for wear protection in
DIN 51524-1 is also met may be used only with written approval
case of mixed friction
of Bosch Rexroth AG.
Observe restrictions as to pressure, rotation speed etc. 5
HLP fluids Hydraulic fluid with HLP fluids are suit- For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to corrosion, oxidation able for most fields respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-2 and verified wear of application and been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI = 100 protection additives components provided consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
the temperature and
For the viscosity classes VG10, VG15 and VG22, DIN 51524
viscosity provisions
defines no requirements as to wear protection (DIN 51354 part 2
are observed. 6
and DIN 51389 part 2). Beyond the requirements of DIN 51524
part 2, we require the same base oil type, identical refining
procedure, identical additivation and identical additivation level
across all viscosity classes.
Continued on page 8
22
Table 4: Classification and fields of application (continued from page 7)

Typical field of
application
HVLP fluids HLP hydraulic fluid HVLP fluids are used For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to with additional in systems operated respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-3 improved viscosity over a wide tempera- been approved according to the product data sheet, please
VI > 140 temperature behavior ture range. consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
The same notes and restrictions as defined for HLP fluids apply
accordingly.
The effect on Rexroth components (e.g. compatibility with material
seals, wear resistance capacity) may differ when using related
hydrocarbons instead of mineral oils, cf. Table 6, line 8.
When using HVLP fluids, the viscosity may change on account of
the shear of the long-chain VI enhancers. The viscosity index, high
at the start, decreases during operation. This needs to be taken
into account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance with
DIN 51350 part 6. Please note that there are practical applications
that create a much higher shear load on such fluids than can be
achieved by this test. Up to VI < 160, we recommend a maximum
permitted viscosity drop of 15 %, viscosity at 100 °C.
The viscosity limits given by Bosch Rexroth for its components
are to be observed for all operating conditions, even after the
hydraulic fluids have sheared.
HVLP fluids should be used only if required by the temperature
ranges of the application.
HLPD fluids HLP and HVLP HLPD and HVLPD For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to hydraulic fluid with fluids are used in respective product data sheet. For components which have not
DIN 51524-2, additional detergent systems where been approved according to the product data sheet, please
and or dispersant deposits as well consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
HVLPD fluids in
additives as solid or liquid
accordance with Some of these fluids are able to absorb significant quantities of
contamination need
DIN 51524-3 water (> 0.1 %). This may have negative implications for the wear
to be kept temporarily
protection and the aging properties of the fluid.
suspended
The wetting ability of these fluids varies largely depending on the
product. Therefore it is not correct to say that they are generally all
very well able to prevent stick-slip.
In individual cases where higher water contamination is to be
expected (such as in steelworks or under humid conditions),
the use of HLPD/HVLPD fluids cannot be recommended as the
emulsified water does not settle in the reservoir but is evaporated
in heavily loaded positions. For such cases, we recommend using
HLP hydraulic fluids with particularly good demulsifying ability. The
water collected at the reservoir bottom is to be drained regularly.
If HLPD/HVLPD fluids are used, contamination does not settle. It
rather remains suspended and needs to be filtered out or removed
by appropriate draining systems. For this reason, the filter area
must be increased.
HLPD/HVLPD fluids may contain additives that in the long run
are incompatible with plastics, elastomers and non-ferrous metals.
Furthermore, these additives may lead to the premature clogging
of hydraulic filters. Therefore, test the filterability and the selection
of the filter material in consultation with the filter manufacturer.
23
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation

4.1 General For information on changing over hydraulic fluids with different
classifications please refer to VDMA 24314, VDMA 24569 and
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during ISO 15380 appendix A.
storage and operation.
Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its
Please note that the fluid standard DIN 51524 merely components resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid change- 1
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new overs!
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of a
hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. 4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different
hydraulic fluids
Deviations from the characteristic values are to be clarified with
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth. If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
Please note the following aspects in operation. 2
and deposits may occur. These, in turn, may cause foaming,
impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to
4.2 Storage and handling the hydraulic system.
Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers chapter 4.10 "Water".
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted. 3
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression This also includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking and from the market overview RE 90220-01. If individual lubri-
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to cant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or compatibility,
be properly resealed. this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant manufacturer.
Recommendation: Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
– Store containers in a dry, roofed place oil HLP before they are delivered.
4
– Store barrels on their sides Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
– Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly of the hydraulic fluids!
Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
4.3 Filling of new systems nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as
delivered do not meet the requirements of our components. 5
4.6 Re-additivation
Hydraulic fluids must be filtered using an appropriate filter
system to minimize solid particle contamination and water in Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
the system. reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the permissible.
risk of accidentally mixing the fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing
and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo- 6
the hydraulic medium at a later point represents significant nents resulting from re-additivation!
additional costs (see following chapter).
4.7 Foaming behavior
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
Changeovers, in particular between hydraulic fluids with fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
heavy metal-free and heavy metal-containing (generally zinc) quickly as possible. 7
additives, frequently lead to malfunctions, see chapter 3.1.10 Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with DIN 51524 are
"Additivation". sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
with the remainder of the previous hydraulic fluid. We recom- stable foam.
mend obtaining a written performance guarantee from the Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity 8
lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
of old fluid remaining should be minimized. Mixing hydraulic
fluids should be avoided, see following chapter. Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.
24
4.8 Corrosion 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration

The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the contamination will change the performance characteristics of
event of impermissible water contamination. hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.
During storage and operation, hydraulic fluid based on mineral To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life
oils with anti-corrosion additives protect components against for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
water and "acidic" oil degradation products. condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable.
4.9 Air The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
Under atmospheric conditions, the hydraulic fluid contains
as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in
contamination and cleanliness level".
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges,
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The When commissioning a system, please note that the required
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir
hours).
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and
separation can be positively influenced. The hydraulic fluid must be replaced in regular intervals and
tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized, accredited
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA)”.
test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
missioning.
4.10 Water The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct
– Viscosity at 40 °C and 100 °C
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air
due to temperature variations. – Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)
Water in the hydraulic fluid may result in wear or direct failure – Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content in
– Particle measurement with evaluation according to ISO 4406
the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability and
or mass of solid foreign substances with evaluation to
increases susceptibility to cavitation.
EN 12662
Undissolved water can be drained from the bottom of the
– Element analysis (RFA (EDX) / ICP, specify test method)
reservoir. Dissolved water can be removed only by using
appropriate measures. If the hydraulic system is used in humid – Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
conditions, preventive measures need to be taken, such as
– Assessment / evaluation for further use
an air dehumidifier at the reservoir vent. During operation, the
water content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according to – Also recommended: IR spectrum
the "Karl Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all hy-
Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid, the changed
draulic fluids must constantly be kept below 0.1% (1000 ppm).
neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
To ensure a long service life of both hydraulic fluids and
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid. This
components, Bosch Rexroth recommends that values below
value must be kept as low as possible. As soon as the trend
0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently maintained.
analysis notes a significant increase in the acid number, the
To ensure a long service life for the hydraulic fluids and the lubricant manufacturer should be contacted.
components, we recommend that values below 0.05 % (500
In case of warranty, liability or guarantee claims to Bosch
ppm) are permanently maintained. Detergent and or dispersant
Rexroth, service verification and/or the results of fluid analyses
hydraulic fluids (HLPD / HVLPD) are able to absorb (and keep
are to be provided.
suspended) more water. Prior to using these hydraulic fluids,
please contact the lubricant manufacturer.
25
5 Disposal and environmental

protection
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons
are hazardous for the environment. They are subject to a
special disposal obligation.
The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications 1
on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
ate adsorbents or by a technique that prevents it contaminating
water courses, the ground or sewerage systems.
It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g. 2
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase
disposal costs. Comply with the national legal provisions
concerning the disposal of the corresponding hydraulic
fluid. Comply with the local safety data sheet of the lubricant
manufacturer for the country concerned.
8
26
6 Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons

Table 6: Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils and related hydrocarbons
Serial
Hydraulic fluids Features / Typical field of application / Notes
number
1 Hydraulic fluids with – Can be used without confirmation provided they are listed in the respective product
classification data sheet and are compliant with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be
HL, HM, HV according verified in the technical data sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see Table
to ISO 11158 4: "Hydraulic fluid classification”.
– Fluids only classified in accordance with ISO 11158 may be used only with prior
written approval of Bosch Rexroth AG.
2 Hydraulic fluids with – May not be used.
classification
HH, HR, HS, HG ac-
cording to ISO 11158
3 Hydraulic fluids with – DIN 51502 merely describes how fluids are classified / designated on a national
classification level.
HL, HLP, HLPD, HVLP,
– It contains no information on minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids.
HVLPD to DIN 51502
– Hydraulic fluids standardized according to DIN 51502 can be used without confirma-
tion provided they are listed in the respective product data sheet and are compliant
with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be verified in the technical data
sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see Table 4: "Hydraulic fluid clas-
sification”.
4 Hydraulic fluids with – ISO 6743-4 merely describes how fluids are classified / designated on an interna-
classification tional level. It contains no information on minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids.
HH, HL, HM, HR, HV,
– Hydraulic fluids standardized according to ISO 6743 -4 can be used without
HS, HG according to
confirmation provided they are listed in the respective product data sheet and are
ISO 6743-4
compliant with DIN 51524. Conformity with DIN 51524 must be verified in the techni-
cal data sheet of the fluid concerned. For classification see table 4: "Classification
and fields of application".
5 Lubricants and regulator – Turbine oils can be used after confirmation and with limited performance data.
fluids for turbines to
– They usually offer lower wear protection than mineral oil HLP. Classification of
DIN 51515-1 and -2
turbine oils to DIN 51515-1 comparable to HL, turbine oils to DIN 51515-2 compa-
rable to HLP.
– Particular attention must be paid to material compatibility!
6 Lube oils C, CL, CLP – Lube oils in acc. with DIN 51517 can be used after confirmation and with limited
in accordance with performance data. They are mostly higher-viscosity fluids with low wear protection.
DIN 51517 Classification: CL similar to HL fluids and CLP similar to HLP fluids.
– Particular attention must be paid to material compatibility, specifically with non-ferrous
metals!
7 Fluids to be used in – There are medical white oils and synthetic hydrocarbons (PAO).
pharmaceutical
– Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application,
and foodstuff industries,
even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
in acc. with FDA /
USDA / NSF H1 – May be used only with FKM seals.
– Other fluids used in pharmaceutical and foodstuff industries may be used only after
confirmation.
– Attention is to be paid to material compatibility in accordance with the applicable food
law.
Caution! Fluids used in pharmaceutical and foodstuff industries should not be con-
fused with environmentally acceptable fluids!
Continued on page 13
27
(continued from page 12)
Serial
number
8 Hydraulic fluids of – Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application, 1
classes HVLP and even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
HVLPD based on
– Lower pour point than HLP
related hydrocarbons
– Other wetting (polarity)
9 Automatic Transmission – ATF are operating fluids for automatic gearboxes in vehicles and machines. In special
Fluids (ATF) cases, ATFs are also used for certain synchronous gearboxes and hydraulic systems
comprising gearboxes. 2
– To be used only after confirmation!

– Some of these fluids have poor air separation abilities and modified wear properties.
– Check material compatibility and filterability!
10 Multi-purpose oil – Multi-purpose oils (industry) combine at least two requirements for a fluid,
(MFO) – Industry for instance metal machining and hydraulics. 3
– Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, modified wear properties and
the reduced material life cycle.
11 Multi-purpose oils – Multi-purpose oils combine requirements for wet brakes, gearboxes, motor oil
4
(MFO) – Mobil (STOU only) and hydraulics.
UTTO, STOU
– Fluids of the types:
– UTTO (= universal tractor transmission oil) and
– STOU (= Super Tractor super tractor universal oil)
5
– Please pay particular attention to shear stability, air separation ability and modified
wear properties.
12 Single-grade engine – To be used only after confirmation!
oils 10W, 20W, 30W
– Please pay particular attention to the air separation ability and filtering ability.
13 Multi-grade engine oils – To be used only after confirmation! 6
0Wx-30Wx
– Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, changes in wear protection
capability, viscosity changes during operation, material compatibility, dispersant and
detergent properties and filterability.
Caution! Multi-grade engine oils have been adapted to specific requirements in com-
bustion engines and are suitable for use in hydraulic systems only to a limited extent.
14 Hydraulic fluids for – To be used only after confirmation! 7
military applications to
– Please pay particular attention to air separation ability, changes in wear protection
MIL 13919 or H 540,
capability, viscosity changes during operation, material compatibility, water separa-
MIL 46170 or H 544,
tion capability and filterability.
MIL 5606 or H 515,
MIL 83282 or H 537, Caution! Hydraulic fluids for military applications do not meet the current requirements
MIL 87257 for high-quality hydraulic fluids and are suitable for use only to a limited degree.
8
15 Motor vehicle transmis- – Motor vehicle transmission oil can be used after confirmation and with limited
sion oils performance data.
– Pay particular attention to wear protection, material compatibility, specifically with
non-ferrous metals, as well as viscosity!
Continued on page 14
28
(continued from page 13)
Serial
number
16 Diesel, test diesel in – Diesel / test diesel has poorer wear protection capabilities and a very low viscosity
acc. with DIN 4113 (< 3 mm2/s).
– May be used only with FKM seals
– Please note their low flash point!
– To be used only after confirmation and with limited performance data!
17 Hydraulic fluids for roller – Hydraulic fluids for roller processes have lower wear protection capabilities than
processes mineral oil HLP and a lower viscosity
– Please note their low flash point!
– Hydraulic fluids for roller processes with limited performance data can be used only
after confirmation.
18 Fluids for power – Can only be used after consultation and approval for use in the specific application,
steering, even if they are compliant with DIN 51524.
hydro-pneumatic sus-
– Please note the low viscosity!
pension,
active chassis etc. – In most cases they have poor water separation capability
– Check the material compatibility!
29
7 Glossary
Additivation Cavitation
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids to Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
achieve or improve specific properties. reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse-
quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
Aging
cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging 1
and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer
component surfaces.
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as
possible by careful filtration. Neutralization number (NN)
The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies
API classification
the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid
Classification of basic fluids by the American Petroleum
contained in one gram of fluid.
Institute (API) – the largest association representing the US oil
and gas industry. Pour point 2
The lowest temperature at which the fluid still just flows when
Arrhenius equation
cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature
in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation.
reference value for achieving this flow limit.
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance”. Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis 3
Related hydrocarbons
method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
Related hydrocarbons are hydrocarbon compounds that are
delivering fast results.
not classified as API class 1, 2 or 5.
Shearing/shear loss
Basic fluids
Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change the
In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, or
viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers. The
base oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives.
initially high viscosity index drops. This needs to be taken into
The proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%. 4
account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
Demulsifying
The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
Ability of a fluid to separate water contamination quickly;
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
achieved with careful selection of base oil and additives.
with DIN 51350 part -6. Please note that there are practical
Detergent applications that create a much higher shear load on such
Ability of certain additives to emulsify part of the water contami- hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
nation in the oil or to hold it in suspension until it has evapo-
Stick-slip effect (sliding) 5
rated with increasing temperature. Larger water quantities, in
Interaction between a resilient mass system involving friction
contrast (above approx. 2 %), are separated immediately.
(such as cylinder + oil column + load) and the pressure
Dispersant increase at very low sliding speeds. The static friction of the
Ability of certain additives to keep insoluble liquid and solid system is a decisive value here. The lower it is, the lower the
contamination in suspension in the fluid. speed that can still be maintained without sticking. Depend-
ing on the tribologic system, the stick-slip effect may lead to
Diesel effect
vibrations generated and sometimes also to significant noise 6
If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed
emission. In many cases, the effect can be attenuated by
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self-
replacing the lubricant.
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the Viscosity
hydraulic fluid. Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils
tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
Hydraulic fluids based on mineral oils are made from petroleum
describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid. 7
(crude oil).
Kinematic viscosity is the ratio of the dynamic viscosity and the
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy)
density of the fluid; the unit is mm²/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear
sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all
The reference temperature for this is 40 °C.
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this
method. Viscosity index (VI)
Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid.
Karl Fischer method 8
The lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature,
Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
the higher the VI.
coulometric determination procedure in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
measured values.
30
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany No statements concerning the suitability of a hydraulic fluid for a specific purpose
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release the
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 user from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
documentation@boschrexroth.de It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
www.boschrexroth.de wear and aging.
Subject to change.
31
Environmentally acceptable RE 90221/05.12 1/14

Replaces: 05.10
hydraulic fluids
Hydraulic fluids

RE 90223
(in preparation)
HL HEPG
HLP HEES partially satu- HFDR HFC
HLPD rated HFDU (ester base) HFB
Classification
HVLP HEES saturated HFDU (glycol base) HFAE
HLPD HEPR and more HFAS
and more HETG
32
2/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids RE 90221/05.12
Contents
1.2 Environmental compatibility .....................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels .....................................................................................................................................4
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3.1.6 Biological degradation .......................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) ...............................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility ........................................................................................................................................7
3.1.9 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.10 Corrosion protection ........................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.11 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.2 Storage and handling .............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.3 Filling of new systems.............................................................................................................................................................................10
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ....................................................................................................................................................................10
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .......................................................................................................................10
4.6 Re-additivation..........................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.7 Foaming behavior .....................................................................................................................................................................................10
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................11
6 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................13
33
RE 90221/05.12 Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 3/14
1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions – acute daphnia toxicity at least 100 mg/l
(according to ISO 5341)
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic
– acute bacteria toxicity at least 100 mg/l
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and
(according to ISO 8192)
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. The same amount of care should be taken when handling 1
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids as for mineral oils,
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in
leakage from the hydraulic system should be avoided. Environ-
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol-
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are designed so that in the
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country-
event of accidents and leakage,less permanent environmental
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of
damage is caused than by mineral oils, see also chapter 5
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137).
"Disposal and environmental protection".
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations
In comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP , the biological deg- 2
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of envi-
radation of environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids may
ronmentally compatible hydraulic fluids in the application of
change fluid aging, see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance", 3.1.6.
Rexroth hydraulic components.
"Biological degradation" and 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of
classification are the responsibility of the operator.
1.3 Scope
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate
This data sheet must be applied when using environmentally 3
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to ensure
acceptable hydraulic fluids with Rexroth hydraulic components.
compliance with statutory regulations. The recommendations
The specifications of this data sheet may be further restricted
of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications given in the
by the specification given in the data sheets for the individual
safety data sheet are to be observed when using hydraulic fluid.
components.
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying
The use of the individual environmentally acceptable hydraulic
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid
fluids in accordance with the intended purpose can be found in
the safety data sheets or other product description documents 4
minimum requirements of the relevant fluid standard during the
of the lubricant manufacturers. In addition, each use is to be
whole of the period of use.
individually considered.
Other regulations and legal provisions may also apply. The operator
is responsible for their observance, e.g. EU directive 2004/35/EG,
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids according to
2005/360/EG and their national implementation. In Germany the
ISO 15380 if specified in the respective component data
Water Resources Act (WHG) is also to be observed.
sheet or if a Rexroth approval for use is furnished.
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact 5
The manufacturers of hydraulic systems must adjust their
systems and operating instructions to the environmentally
acceptable hydraulic fluids.
Notes:
as during use.
In the market overview RE 90221-01, environmentally accept-
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids have been used able hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil are described which,
successfully for many years. In some countries, the use of envi- according to the information of the lubricant manufacturer, 6
ronmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids is already prescribed in feature the respective parameters of the current requirements
ecologically sensitive areas (e.g. forestry, locks, weirs). standard ISO 15380 and other parameters which are of rel-
evance for suitability in connection with Rexroth components.
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids may only be used
in the pharmaceutical and food industry subject to required These specifications are not checked or monitored by Bosch
certification to FDA/USDA/NSF H1. Rexroth. The list in the market overview does not therefore
represent a recommendation on the part of Rexroth or approval
of the respective hydraulic fluid for use with Rexroth compo- 7
1.2 Environmental compatibility
nents and does not release the operator from his responsibility
There is no unambiguous legal definition for environmentally regarding selection of the hydraulic fluid.
acceptable hydraulic fluids as different testing procedures can
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
be applied for biological degradation and toxicity.
for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
According to ISO 15380 the definition of "environmentally notes below.
acceptable" is as follows: Humans, animals, plants, air and soil
must not be endangered. With regard to hydraulic fluids in an 8
unused condition in the bin this mainly means:
1.4 Safety instructions
– biological degradation at least 60 % Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
(according to ISO 14593 or ISO 9439) environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
– acute fish toxicity at least 100 mg/l
safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
(according to ISO 7346-2)
that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.
34

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small separation.
particles cause continuous elevated wear.
Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
For mineral oils, the cleanliness level of environmentally accept- ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
able hydraulic fluids is given as a three-digit numerical code in container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
accordance with ISO 4406. This numerical code denotes the transport and storage.
number of particles present in a hydraulic fluid for a defined
Further information about contamination with solid matter and
quantity. Moreover, foreign solid matter is not to exceed a mass
cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric examination according to ISO 4405).
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli-
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest
Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over
Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 μm > 6 μm > 14 μm
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6
35

Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids for Bosch Rexroth If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
hydraulic components are assessed on the basis of their fulfill- operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to
ment of the minimum requirements of ISO 15380. contamination and a shorter life cycle will result.
Please ensure that the permissible temperature and viscosity
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid limits are observed for the respective components. This usually 1
requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The specified limit values for all components employed in the
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior
account the specified operating conditions. For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the
in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when
following factors:
the temperature drops. The interrelation between viscosity and 2
temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI).
3.1.1 Viscosity
If exposed to the cold for several days, viscosity may rise sig-
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible
nificantly (HETG and HEES). After heating, the characteristic
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined
values as specified on the data sheet are restored. Please ask
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components
your lubricant manufacturer for the " Flow capacity after 7 days
and it is to be observed for each individual component.
at low temperature" (ASTM D 2532) of fluid classifications
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the HETG and partially saturated HEES. 3
response characteristics of closed control loops, stability and
All known environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids have
damping of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of
better viscosity temperature behavior than mineral oil HLP and
wear.
generally feature greater shear stability than HVLP mineral
We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range of oils. This should be taken into consideration when selecting
each component be kept within the permissible temperature hydraulic fluid for the required temperature range. A lower
range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both. viscosity level can frequently be used to save any drive power
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness during a cold start and avoid viscosity being too low at higher 4
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component temperatures. The required viscosity and temperature limits
concerned. in the product data sheets are to be observed in all operating
conditions.
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me- Depending on the basic fluid types/classes, VI indices can be
chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage achieved of 140–220, see Fig. 1: "Examples: V-T diagrams in
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not comparison to HLP (reference values)" and Table 4: "Classifi-
5
be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic cation and fields of application of environmentally acceptable
pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached, hydraulic fluids".
which may lead to cavitation damage.
Fig. 1: Examples V-T diagrams in comparison to HLP (reference values, double-logarithmic representation) 6
40q 20q 0q 20q 40q 60q 80q 100q
1600 Typical viscosity data [mm2/s]
1000
600 Temperature –20 °C 40 °C 100 °C
400
HEES partially saturated 1250 46 9
200
HEES saturated 2500 46 8
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
100 7
60 HEPG 2500 46 10
40 HEPR 1400 46 10
20 For comparison HLP

4500 46 7
(see RE 90220)
HEPG
10 HEPR
8
HEES saturated
5 HLP
40q 25q 10q 0q 10q 30q 50q 70q 90q 115q
Temperature t [°C]
Detailed V-T diagrams may be obtained from your lubricant manufacturer for their specific products.
36
3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.5 Aging resistance

Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic The way an environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids ages
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. The depends on the thermal, chemical and mechanical stress to
wear protection capability is described in ISO 15380 via test which it is subjected. The influence of water, air, temperature
procedures"FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and "Mechani- and contamination may be significantly greater than for mineral
cal test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). From ISO VG 32, oils HLP/HVLP. Aging resistance can be greatly influenced by
ISO 15380 prescribes a rating of at least 10 (FZG test). At the chemical composition of the hydraulic fluids .
present, the FZG test cannot be applied to viscosity classes
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 °C) result in a approxi-
< ISO VG 32. The wear protection capability of environmen-
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 °C temperature
tally acceptable hydraulic fluids in relation to the two test
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the
procedures is comparable to that of mineral oil HLP/HVLP.
equation (see Glossary).
3.1.4 Material compatibility
The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals, aging of the hydraulic fluid
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material 80 °C 100 %
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to 90 °C 50 %
be checked by the user. 100 °C 25 %
A modified aging test (without adding water) is prescribed for
Table 2: Known material incompatibilities
fluid classifications HETG and HEES. Hydraulic fluids with
Classification Incompatible with: HEPG and HEPR classification are subjected to the identical
HE... general One-component color coatings, lead, galva- test procedure as mineral oils (with 20 % water added). The
nized zinc coatings, some non-ferrous metals, calculated fluid service life is derived from the results of tests in
seals made of NBR. In some cases, the which the long-term characteristics are simulated in a short pe-
latter show major increases in volume when riod of time by applying more arduous conditions (condensed
impermissibly aged hydraulic fluids come testing). This calculated fluid service life is not to be equated to
into contact with the material. NBR is only the fluid service life in real-life applications.
permitted by prior consent, please observe Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water
the customary seal and tube replacement content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water".
intervals. Do not use any hydrolysis/suscep-
tible polyurethane qualities. 3.1.6 Biological degradation
Note Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are ones which
Please check seals and coatings of control degrade biologically much faster than mineral oils. Biologi-
cabinets, outer coatings of hydraulic compo- cal degradation is a biochemical transformation effected by
nents and accessories (connectors, cables, micro-organisms resulting in mineralization. For environmentally
control cabinets) for resistance to vapors acceptable hydraulic fluids that make reference to ISO 15380,
issuing from hydraulic fluids. biological degradation according to ISO 14593 or ISO 9439
HETG/HEES Zinc, some non-ferrous alloys with zinc must be verified. 60% minimum degradation is defined as limit
HEPG Steel/aluminum tribocontacts, paper filters, value. Proof of biological degradation is furnished for the new,
polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA), NBR unmixed, ready-formulated hydraulic fluids. Aged or mixed
hydraulic fluids are less able to degrade biologically. Biological
Note degradation outside the defined test procedure is subject to a
Check plastics for resistance variety of natural influences. The key factors are temperature,
The material incompatibilities mentioned here do not automati- humidity, contamination, fluid concentration, type and quantity
cally result in function problems. However the elements of the of micro-organisms. Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids
materials are found in the hydraulic fluids after use. The biologi- require no extended maintenance in comparison to mineral oils,
cal degradation of hydraulic fluids is negatively influenced. please observe chapter 4 "Hydraulic fluids in operation".
37
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) 3.1.10 Corrosion protection

The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids on steel components, they must also be compatible with
always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation different metals and metal alloys are described in ISO 15380. 1
damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and Hydraulic fluids that are not compatible with the materials listed
design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell above must not be used, even if they are compliant with
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation ISO 15380.
capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid
Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
and aging. It cannot be improved by additives.
fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
According to ISO 15380, for instance, an ASA value d 10 minutes they are delivered.
is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46, 6 minutes are typical, 2
lower values are preferable. 3.1.11 Additivation
The properties described above can be modified with the help
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility
of suitable additives. Environmentally acceptable hydraulic
The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined fluids should never contain heavy metals. According to the
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614 present state of knowledge, all hydraulic fluids, regardless of
defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids. additivation, can be filtered with all customary filter materials
in all known filtration ratings (t 0.8 μm), without filtering out 3
Fluids classified HETG, HEES and HEPR separate from
effective additives at the same time.
water. HETG and HEES hydraulic fluids have a different
water separation ability to mineral oil HLP/HVLP. At 20 °C, in Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive system.
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP, a multiple ( > factor 3)
of water can separate in the hydraulic fluid. Water solubility is
also more temperature-dependent than for mineral oils. With
regard to water solubility, HEPR hydraulic fluids behave like
HVLP hydraulic fluids (see RE 90220). In the majority of cases, 4
HEPG-classified fluids HEPG dissolve water completely , see
chapter "4.10 Water".
3.1.9 Filterability
Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
5
also during the whole of their service life. Depending on the
different basic fluids (glycols, saturated and partially saturated
ester oils, hydrocrack oils, polyalpha olefins, triglycerides) and
additives (VI enhancers), there are great differences here.
The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Rexroth therefore requires 6
the same degree of filterability of environmentally acceptable
hydraulic fluids as for mineral oils HLP/HVLP to DIN 51524. As
ISO 15380 does not comment on the filterability of hydraulic
fluids, filterability comparable to that of mineral oils HLP/HVLP
must be requested of lubricant manufacturers.
Filterability is tested with the new hydraulic fluid and after the
addition of 0.2 % water. The underlying standard (ISO 13357- 7
1/-2) stipulates that filterability must have no negative effects
on the filters or the hydraulic fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic
fluids in operation".
8
38
3.2 Classification and fields of application

Typical field
of application
HEPG Basic fluid, glycols Systems on exposed For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to water courses respective product data sheet. For components which have not
ISO 15380 (locks, weirs, been approved according to the product data sheet, please
dredgers) consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at
15 °C: typically – Very good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear
> 0.97 kg/dm³ stability
VI: typical > 170 – Resistant to aging
– Incompatible with mineral oil (exceptions must be confirmed
by the lubricant manufacturer)
– Can be water-soluble
– Can be mixed with water
– Very good wear protection properties
– A higher implementation temperature with the same viscosity
in comparison to mineral oil is to be expected
– Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower suc-
tion pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce the
maximum speed as required and optimize suction conditions.
– Classified as insignificantly water-endangering (water hazard
class WGK 1)
– Prior to commissioning, contact the lubricant manufacturer,
as the components are tested with mineral oil HLP/corrosion
protection oil.
HEES Basic fluid: Ester Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
based on renew-
partially saturated fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not
according to able raw materials, and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
ISO 15380 synthetic esters, consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
mixtures of various
Density at – Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
esters, mixtures with
15 °C: typically rings and implementation temperatures under –15 °C.
polyalphaolefines
0.90–0.93 kg/dm³
(< 30%) – In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
VI: typical > 160 oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and
viscosity
Iodine count < 90
– Limit lower (depending on viscosity class) and upper imple-
mentation temperatures (maximum 80 °C due to aging)
– Good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear stability.
– Good corrosion protection, if correspondingly additivized
– Mostly classed as insignificantly water-endangering (water
hazard class WGK 1), in some cases as not water-endangering
– High dirt dissolving capacity on fluid changeovers
– In unfavorable operating conditions (high water content,
high temperature), HEES on ester basis have a tendency to
hydrolysis. The acidic organic decomposition products can
chemically attack materials and components.
Continued on page 9
39
Table 4: Classification and fields of application (continued from page 8)

Typical field
of application
HEES Basic fluid: Ester Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
saturated based on renew- fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not 1
according to ISO able raw materials, and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
15380 synthetic esters, Saturated HEES consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
mixtures of various should be preferred
Density at – Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
esters, mixtures with over partially
15 °C: typically rings and implementation temperatures under –15 °C.
polyalphaolefines saturated HEES
0.90–0.93 kg/dm³
(< 30%) and HETG for – In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
VI: components and oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and 2
typical 140–160 systems exposed to viscosity
high stress levels.
Iodine count <15 – Good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear stability
– Good corrosion protection, if correspondingly additivized
– Mostly classed as insignificantly water-endangering (water
hazard class WGK 1), in the case of low viscosity classes
(up to ISO VG 32) also classed as not water-endangering 3
HEPR Basic fluid: Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to synthetically fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have not
ISO 15380 manufactured hydro- and components. been approved according to the product data sheet, please
carbons (polyalpha HEPR should be consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 °C:
olefins PAO) partly preferred over
typically 0.87 kg/ – Behaves similarly to HVLP- hydraulic fluids, individual prod- 4
mixed with esters ( partially saturated
dm³ ucts comply with ISO 15380 HEPR and DIN 51524-3 HVLP
< 30 %) HEES and HETG
VI : for components and – Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire for shaft seal
typical 140–160 systems exposed to rings and implementation temperatures under –15 °C.
high stress levels.
– Good viscosity-temperature behavior
– Classified as insignificantly water-endangering (water hazard
class WGK 1) 5
Note:
Note shear stability (see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid
analysis and filtration" and chapter 6 "Glossary")
HETG Basic fluid: Not recommended Practical requirements are frequently not fulfilled by hydraulic
according to vegetable oils and for Rexroth compo- fluids in this classification. Use only permissible after consulta-
ISO 15380 triglycerides nents! tion.
6
Density at 15 °C: – Viscosity is not stable over time
typically 0.90-0.93
– Very fast fluid aging, very hydrolysis-susceptible
kg/dm³
(please observe neutralization number)
VI: typical > 200
– Tendency to gumming, gelling and setting.
Iodine count > 90
– Limit the lower (depending on viscosity class) and upper
implementation temperatures (see chapter 3.1.5) 7
– Only limited material compatibility

– Filterability problems at water ingress
– Mostly classed as not water-endangering
8
40

4.1 General manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during fluids should be avoided, see following chapter.
For information on changing over hydraulic fluids with different
Please note that the fluid standard ISO 15380 merely classifications, please refer to VDMA 24314, VDMA 24569
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new and ISO 15380 appendix A.
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of
a hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. components resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid change-
overs!
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth.
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for damage to its compo- hydraulic fluids
nents within the framework of the applicable liability legislation
insofar as the latter is due to non-observance of the following If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
instructions. types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
Please note the following aspects in operation. impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to the
hydraulic system.
4.2 Storage and handling If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is
Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing chapter 4.10 "Water".
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted.
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid This also includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression and from the market overview RE 90221-01. If individual lubri-
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking cant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or compatibility,
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant manufacturer.
be properly resealed.
Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
Recommendation: oil HLP before they are delivered.
– Store containers in a dry, roofed place Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
– Store barrels on their sides systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
of the hydraulic fluids!
– Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly
nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
4.3 Filling of new systems
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as 4.6 Re-additivation
delivered do not meet the requirements of our components.
Hydraulic fluids must be filtered using an appropriate filter Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
system to minimize solid particle contamination and water in reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
the system. affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and
the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should permissible.
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the
risk of accidentally mixing fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing and Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing the hy- nents resulting from re-additivation!
draulic medium at a later point represents significant additional
costs (see following chapter). 4.7 Foaming behavior
Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
In particular with the changeover from mineral oils to environ- quickly as possible.
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, but also from one environ- Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with ISO 15380 are
mentally acceptable hydraulic fluids to another, there may be sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
interference (e.g. incompatibility in the form of gelling, silting, tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
stable foam or reduced filterability or filter blockage). defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it stable foam.
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
with the remains of the previous hydraulic fluid. Bosch Rexroth lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
recommends obtaining verification of compatibility from the
Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.
41
4.8 Corrosion 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration

The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the contamination will change the performance characteristics of
event of impermissible water contamination. hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.
Environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids are tested for To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life 1
corrosion protection in the same way as mineral oil HLP/ for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
HVLP. When used in practice other corrosion mechanisms are condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
revealed in detail and in individual cases, for the most part in ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable.
contact with non-ferrous and white alloys.
The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
4.9 Air as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
2
contamination and cleanliness levels".
Under atmospheric conditions the hydraulic fluid contains
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in When commissioning a system, please note that the required
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges, minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. hours). 3
With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir The hydraulic fluid must be replaced at regular intervals and
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized accredited
separation can be positively influenced. test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
missioning.
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA)”.
The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
4.10 Water – Viscosity at 40 °C and 100 °C 4
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct – Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air
– Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
due to temperature variations.
– Particle measurement with evaluation according to
HEPG dissolves water completely. This means that any water
ISO 4406 or mass of solid foreign substances with
that has ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the
evaluation to EN 12662
sump of the reservoir. 5
In the case of hydraulic fluids classed HETG, HEES and
HEPR undissolved water can be drained off from the reservoir – Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
sump, the remaining water content is however too high to
– Assessment / evaluation for further use
ensure that the maximum permissible water limit values are
observed in the long term. – Also recommended: IR spectrum"
Water in the hydraulic fluid can result in wear or direct failure Differences in the maintenance and upkeep of environmentally
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content acceptable hydraulic fluids with the corresponding suitability 6
in the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability characteristics (as required in market overview RE 90221-01)
and increases susceptibility to cavitation. During operation, in comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP are not necessary.
the water content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according Attention is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3.
to the "Karl Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all
After changing over hydraulic fluids it is recommended that
environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids must constantly be
the filters be replaced again after 50 operating hours as fluid
kept below 0.1% (1000 ppm). To ensure a long service life of
aging products may have detached themselves ("self-cleaning
both hydraulic fluids and components, Bosch Rexroth recom- 7
effect").
mends that values below 0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently
maintained. Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid the changed
neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
Due to the higher water solubility (except for HEPR) in
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid. This
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP it is urgently advised
difference must be kept as low as possible. As soon as the
that precautions be taken when using environmentally accept-
trend analysis notes a significant increase in the values, the
able hydraulic fluids, such as a dehumidifier on the reservoir
lubricant manufacturer should be contacted. 8
ventilation.
A higher viscosity than that of new materials indicates that the
Water content has an affect particularly in the case of HETG
hydraulic fluid has aged. Evaluation by the test lab or lubricant
and partially saturated HEES in that it accelerates aging
manufacturers is however authoritative, whose recommenda-
(hydrolysis) of the hydraulic fluid and biological degradation,
tion should be urgently observed.
see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration".
42

On systems where the possibility of water contamination
protection
cannot be completely ruled out (also condensation), it should
All environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, are like mineral
be ensured via the hydraulic system circuit that fluid aging
oil-based hydraulic fluids, subject to special disposal obliga-
products are not accumulating in individual areas of the
tions.
hydraulic system, but are being removed from the system in
a controlled manner via the filtration system. This should be The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications
ensured via suitable hydraulic circuits (e.g. flushing circuit) or on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
system manufacturer's operating instructions/specifications. ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
are to be provided. It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g.
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase
43
6 Glossary
Additivation Iodine count
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids The iodine count is a yardstick for the quantity of single and
to achieve or improve specific properties. multiple unsaturated bonds between C atoms in the basic fluid.
A low iodine count indicates that the hydraulic fluid contains
Aging
few unsaturated bonds and is thus considerably more resistant
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging 1
to aging than a hydraulic fluid with a high iodine count. A
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer
statement about the position at which these multiple bonds are
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as
located and about how "stable" they are against influencing
possible by careful filtration. Please refer to Hydrolysis.
factors cannot be derived simply by stating the iodine count.
Arrhenius equation
Karl Fischer method
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature
Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation.
coulometric determination procedure in accordance with DIN
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature 2
EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see
combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance”.
measured values. For hydraulic fluids based on glycol, DIN EN
Basic fluids ISO 12937 is to be applied in conjunction with DIN 51777-1.
In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, or base
Cavitation
oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives. The
Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%.
reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse- 3
Diesel effect quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self- and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature component surfaces.
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the
Neutralization number (NN)
hydraulic fluid.
The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies
Saturated esters the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid 4
Esters differ by the number of C atoms (chain length) and contained in one gram of fluid.
position of the bonds between the C atoms. Saturated esters
Pour point
do not have double/multiple bonds between C atoms and are
therefore more resistant to aging than partially saturated esters.
cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
Partially saturated esters in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
In contrast to saturated esters, partially saturated esters have reference value for achieving this flow limit.
double/multiple bonds between C atoms. Rexroth defines 5
RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
partially saturated esters as unsaturated bonds and mixtures
Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
of esters with unsaturated and saturated bonds. Esters with
solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis
unsaturated bonds are produced on the basis of renewable
method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
raw materials.
delivering fast results.
Depending on their number and position, these unsaturated
Shearing/shear loss
bonds between the C atoms are instable. These bonds can
Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change the 6
detach themselves and form new bonds, thus changing the
viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers. The
properties of those liquids (an aging mechanism). One of the
initially high viscosity index drops. This needs to be taken into
underlying requirements for inclusion in the market overview
account when selecting the hydraulic fluid.
RE 90221-01 is an aging stability characteristic. Attention is
however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3. The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
Hydrolysis
Hydrolysis is the splitting of a chemical bond through the
applications that create a much higher shear load on such 7
reaction with water under the influence of temperature.
hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy)
Stick-slip
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear
Interaction between a resilient mass system involving friction
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all
(such as cylinder + oil column + load) and the pressure
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this
increase at very low sliding speeds. The static friction of the
method..
system is a decisive value here. The lower it is, the lower the
speed that can still be maintained without sticking. Depend- 8
ing on the tribologic system, the stick-slip effect may lead to
vibrations generated and sometimes also to significant noise
emission. In many cases, the effect can be attenuated by
replacing the lubricant.
44
Viscosity
Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid.
density of the fluid; the unit is mm²/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
The reference temperature for this is 40 °C.
Viscosity index (VI)
Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid. The
lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature, the
higher the VI.
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany No statements concerning the suitability of a hydraulic fluid for a specific purpose
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release the
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 user from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
documentation@boschrexroth.de It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
www.boschrexroth.de wear and aging.
Subject to change.
45
Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic RE 90222/05.12 1/16
fluids (HFDR/HFDU)
Hydraulic fluids

RE 90223
(in preparation)
HL
HEPG
HLP HFDR HFC
HLPD HFDU (ester base) HFB
HEPR
HLPD and more HFAS
HETG
and more
46
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids RE 90222/05.12
Contents
1.2 Fire resistance ............................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Scope ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4
2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels .....................................................................................................................................5
3.1.1 Viscosity .................................................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.6 Environmentally acceptable ..............................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) ...............................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility ........................................................................................................................................8
3.1.9 Filterability .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.10 Corrosion protection ........................................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.11 Additivation .........................................................................................................................................................................................8
4 Hydraulic fluids in operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................11
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.2 Storage and handling .............................................................................................................................................................................11
4.3 Filling of new systems.............................................................................................................................................................................11
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover ....................................................................................................................................................................11
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different hydraulic fluids .......................................................................................................................11
4.6 Re-additivation..........................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.7 Foaming behavior .....................................................................................................................................................................................11
4.8 Corrosion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.9 Air ................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.10 Water ........................................................................................................................................................................................................12
6 Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14
47
RE 90222/05.12 Fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16
1 Basic information
1.1 General instructions 1.2 Fire resistance
The hydraulic fluid is the common element in any hydraulic There is no clear legal definition of fire-resistant hydraulic fluids.
component and must be selected very carefully. Quality and There are great differences regarding fire resistance. The
cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid are decisive factors for the selection is the sole responsibility of the system operator with
operational reliability, efficiency and service life of a system. respect to requirements (application, construction and design 1
of the system, hottest source in the system, necessary fire
Hydraulic fluids must conform, be selected and used in
protection).
accordance with the generally acknowledged rules of technol-
ogy and safety provisions. Reference is made to the country- Different test procedures are applied for evaluating fire
specific standards and directives (in Germany the directive of resistance.
the Employer's Liability Insurance Association BGR 137).
Fire resistance test procedure according to ISO 12922:
This data sheet includes recommendations and regulations
– Ignition properties of spray according to ISO 15029-1 2
concerning the selection, operation and disposal of fire-resis-
(Spray flame persistence – hollow-cone nozzle method)
tant, water-free hydraulic fluids in the application of Rexroth
hydraulic components. – Ignition properties of spray according to ISO 15029-2
(Stabilized flame heat release)
The individual selection of hydraulic fluid or the choice of
classification are the responsibility of the operator. – Wick flame persistence of fluids according to ISO 14935
(average flame persistence)
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that appropriate
measures are taken for safety and health protection and to – Determination of the flammability characteristics of fluids 3
ensure compliance with statutory regulations. The recommen- in contact with hot surfaces, ignition process according to
dations of the lubricant manufacturer and the specifications ISO 20823 (ignition temperature, flame spread)
given in the safety data sheet are to be observed when using
In general, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are distinguished
hydraulic fluid.
between water-containing fire-resistant and water-free
This data sheet does not absolve the operator from verifying fire-resistant hydraulic fluids. Water-containing fire-resistant
the conformity and suitability of the respective hydraulic fluid hydraulic fluids are described in RE 90223.
4
Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid means hydraulic
minimum requirements of the relevant hydraulic fluid standard
fluids with a water-proportion of 0.1% by volume ("Karl Fischer
during the whole of the period of use.
method", see chapter 6 "Glossary"), measured at the time
The currently valid standard for fire-resistant hydraulic fluids is of filling in the transport container.
the ISO 12922. In addition, other, more detailed documents,
In Europe water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are not
guidelines, specifications and legislation may also be valid. The
approved for use in underground coal mining. The classification
operator is responsible for ensuring that such regulations are 5
HFDU is no longer included in the VDMA 24317: 2005.
observed, for example:
Note
– 7th Luxembourg Report: Luxembourg, April 1994, Doc.
In contrast to water-containing fluids, all water-free, fire-
No. 4746/10/91 EN "Requirements and tests applicable to
resistant hydraulic fluids have a flash point and a fire point.
fire-resistant hydraulic fluids for hydrostatic and hydrokinetic
Specific parameters for flash point and fire point can be found
power transmission and control"
in the technical and/or safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid
– VDMA 24314 (1981-11): "Changing hydraulic fluids – guide- concerned.
lines" 6
Just as much care should be taken when working with fire-
– VDMA 24317 (2005-11): "Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids – resistant hydraulic fluids are with other hydraulic fluids,
minimum technical requirements" e.g. mineral oils. A leak from the hydraulic system must be
avoided. The best and most cost-effective protection against
– FM Approval Standard 6930 (2009-04): "Flammability
fire and explosion is to prevent leakage with meticulous
Classification of Industrial Fluids" (only available in English)
service, maintenance and care of the hydraulic system.
– DIN Technical Report CEN/TR 14489 (2006-01): "Selection
7
guidelines for protecting safety, health and the environment"
We recommend that you maintain constant, close contact
as during use.
8
48
1.3 Scope 1.4 Safety instructions

This data sheet must be applied when using water-free, fire- Hydraulic fluids can constitute a risk for persons and the
resistant hydraulic fluids with Rexroth hydraulic components. environment. These risks are described in the hydraulic fluid
The specifications of this data sheet may be further restricted safety data sheets. The operator is to ensure that a current
by the specifications given in data sheets for the individual safety data sheet for the hydraulic fluid used is available and
components concerned. that the measures stipulated therein are complied with.
The use of the individual water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic
fluids in accordance with the intended purpose can be found in
the safety data sheets or other product description documents
of the lubricant manufacturers. In addition, each use is to be
individually considered.
water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids according to
ISO 12922 if specified in the respective component data
sheet or if a Rexroth approval for use is furnished.
The manufacturers of hydraulic systems must adjust their sys-
tems and operating instructions to the water-free, fire-resistant
hydraulic fluids.
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for its components
for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the
notes below.
49

Solid particle contamination is the major reason for faults oc- Hydraulic fluids frequently fail to meet these cleanliness
curring in hydraulic systems. It may lead to a number of effects requirements on delivery. Careful filtering is therefore required
in the hydraulic system. Firstly, single large solid particles during operation and in particular, during filling in order to
may lead directly to a system malfunction, and secondly small ensure the required cleanliness levels. Your lubricant manu-
particles cause continuous elevated wear. facturer can tell you the cleanliness level of hydraulic fluids
as delivered. To maintain the required cleanliness level over 1
For mineral oils, the cleanliness level of water-free, fire-resistant
the operating period, you must use a reservoir breather filter.
hydraulic fluids is given as a three-digit numerical code in
If the environment is humid, take appropriate measures, such
accordance with ISO 4406. This numerical code denotes the
as a breather filter with air drying or permanent off-line water
number of particles present in a hydraulic fluid for a defined
separation.
quantity. Moreover, foreign solid matter is not to exceed a mass
of 50 mg/kg (gravimetric examination according to ISO 4405). Note: the specifications of the lubricant manufacturer relat-
ing to cleanliness levels are based on the time at which the
In general, compliance with a minimum cleanliness level of 2
container concerned is filled and not on the conditions during
transport and storage.
cleanliness levels of at least 18/16/13. A reduction in cleanli- Further information about contamination with solid matter
ness level by one level means half of the quantity of particles and cleanliness levels can be found in brochure RE 08016.
of hydraulic components. The component with the highest 3
Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406 4

More than
including
8,000,000 16,000,000 24 20 / 18 / 15
4,000,000 8,000,000 23 > 4 μm > 6 μm > 14 μm
5
2,000,000 4,000,000 22
1,000,000 2,000,000 21
500,000 1,000,000 20
250,000 500,000 19
130,000 250,000 18
64000 130,000 17
6
32000 64000 16
16000 32000 15
8000 16000 14
4000 8000 13
2000 4000 12
1000 2000 11 7
500 1000 10
250 500 9
130 250 8
64 130 7
32 64 6
8
50

Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids for Bosch Rexroth We recommend that the optimum operating viscosity range of
hydraulic components are assessed on the basis of their fulfill- each component be kept within the permissible temperature
ment of the minimum requirements of ISO 12922. range. This usually requires either cooling or heating, or both.
The permissible viscosity range and the necessary cleanliness
level can be found in the product data sheet for the component
3.1 Selection criteria for the hydraulic fluid concerned.
The specified limit values for all components employed in the
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid used is above the permitted
operating viscosity, this will result in increased hydraulic-me-
chanical losses. In return, there will be lower internal leakage
account the specified operating conditions.
losses. If the pressure level is lower, lubrication gaps may not
Hydraulic fluid suitability depends, amongst others, on the be filled up, which can lead to increased wear. For hydraulic
following factors: pumps, the permitted suction pressure may not be reached,
which may lead to cavitation damage.
3.1.1 Viscosity
If the viscosity of a hydraulic fluid is below the permitted
Viscosity is a basic property of hydraulic fluids. The permissible operating viscosity, increased leakage, wear, susceptibility to
viscosity range of complete systems needs to be determined contamination and a shorter component life cycle will result.
taking account of the permissible viscosity of all components
Please ensure that the permissible temperature and viscosity
and it is to be observed for each individual component.
limits are observed for the respective components. This usually
The viscosity at operating temperature determines the response requires either cooling or heating, or both.
characteristics of closed control loops, stability and damping
of systems, the efficiency factor and the degree of wear.
Fig. 1: Examples V-T diagrams for water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids in comparison to
HLP and HFC (reference values, double-logarithmic representation)
40q 20q 0q 20q 40q 60q 80q 100q

1600
1000
600
400
200
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
100
60
40
20
HFC
10
HFDU
HLP46
5
40q 25q 10q 0q 10q 30q 50q 70q 90q 115q HFDR
Temperature t [°C]
Typical viscosity data [mm2/s] Detailed V-T diagrams may be obtained from your lubricant
manufacturer for their specific products. Descriptions of the
at temperature 0 °C 40 °C 100 °C individual classifications can be found in chapter 3.2 and in
HFDR 2500 43 5,3 Table 4.
HFDU (ester base) 330 46 9,2
HFDU (glycol base) 350 46 8,7
For comparison HLP
610 46 7
(see RE 90220)
For comparison HFC
280 46
(see RE 90223)
51
3.1.2 Viscosity-temperature behavior Table 2: Known material incompatibilities

For hydraulic fluids, the viscosity temperature behavior (V-T Classification Incompatible with:
behavior) is of particular importance. Viscosity is characterized HFD in Seals, plastics and coatings of control cabi-
in that it drops when the temperature increases and rises when general nets, outer coatings of hydraulic components
the temperature drops. The interrelation between viscosity and and accessory components (connectors, 1
temperature is described by the viscosity index (VI). wiring harnesses, control cabinets) are to be
tested for stability.
For cold testing over a period of several days, the viscosity
of ester-based HFDU can increase greatly. After heating, Note: hydraulic fluid vapors can also lead to
the characteristic values as specified on the data sheet are incompatibility!
restored. Please ask your lubricant manufacturer for the "Flow HFDR Individual component color coating, lead, gal-
capacity after seven days at low temperature" (ASTM D 2532) vanic zinc-plating, in part non-ferrous metals
for the fluid classification ester-based HFDU . with zinc, tin and aluminum in a tribological 2
HFDU fluid based on ester and glycol have better viscosity/ system. Sealing elements made of NBR. In
temperature characteristics than mineral oil HLP (see Fig. 1). some cases, the latter show major increases
This should be taken into consideration when selecting in volume when impermissibly aged hydraulic
hydraulic fluid for the required temperature range. The viscosity fluids come into contact with the material. Do
and temperature limits required in the product data sheets are not use any hydrolysis/susceptible polyure-
to be observed in all operating conditions. thane qualities.
HFDU based Single-component color coatings, lead, 3
Note
For ambient temperatures below 0 °C, fire-resistant, water- on ester galvanized zinc coatings, in part non-ferrous
containing hydraulic fluids of classification HFC are to be metals with zinc, tin, seals made of NBR. In
preferred because they observe the component-related some cases, the latter show major increases
viscosity ranges and because the have better pour points in volume when impermissibly aged hydraulic
(see RE 90223). fluids come into contact with the material. Do
not use any hydrolysis/susceptible polyure-
3.1.3 Wear protection capability thane qualities. 4
HFDU based Single-component color coatings, steel/alu-
Wear protection capability describes the property of hydraulic on glycol minum tribocontacts, paper filters, polymeth-
fluids to prevent or minimize wear within the components. The ylmethacrylate (PMMA). The compatibility of
wear protection capability is described in ISO 12922 via test NBR is to be examined for individual case.
procedures"FZG gear test rig" (ISO 14635-1) and "Mechani-
cal test in the vane pump" (ISO 20763). The wear protection
capability of water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids in relation The material incompatibilities mentioned here do not automati-
cally result in function problems. However the elements of 5
to the two test procedures is comparable to that of mineral oil
HLP/HVLP. the materials are found in the hydraulic fluids after use. The
material incompatibilities described here may lead to acceler-
3.1.4 Material compatibility ated aging of the hydraulic fluid and to reduced fire resistance.
The hydraulic fluid must not negatively affect the materials 3.1.5 Aging resistance
used in the components. Compatibility with coatings, seals,
hoses, metals and plastics is to be observed in particular. The The way a water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid ages de-
fluid classifications specified in the respective component data pends on the thermal, chemical and mechanical stress to which 6
sheets are tested by the manufacturer with regard to material it is subjected. The influence of water, air, temperature and
compatibility. Parts and components not supplied by us are to contamination may be significantly greater than for mineral oils
be checked by the user. HLP/HVLP. Aging resistance can be greatly influenced by the
chemical composition of the hydraulic fluids.
High fluid temperatures (e.g. over 80 °C) result in a approxi-
mate halving of the fluid service life for every 10 °C temperature
7
increase and should therefore by avoided. The halving of the
equation (see Glossary).
Table 3: Reference values for temperature-dependent

aging of the hydraulic fluid
Reservoir temperature Fluid life cycle 8
80 °C 100 %
90 °C 50 %
100 °C 25 %
52
A modified aging test (ISO 4263-3 or ASTM D943 – without 3.1.9 Filterability
the addition of water) is specified for fluid classification
Filterability describes the ability of a hydraulic fluid to pass
HFDU. Fluid classification HFDR is described with a special
through a filter, removing solid contaminants. The hydraulic
procedure with respect to oxidation stability (EN 14832) and
oxidation service life (ISO 4263-3). The calculated fluid service
also during the whole of their service life. This can differ greatly
life is derived from the results of tests in which the long-term
depending on the different basic fluids (glycols, esters) and
characteristics are simulated in a short period of time by
additives (VI enhancers, anti-fogging additives).
applying more arduous conditions (condensed testing). This
calculated fluid service life is not to be equated to the fluid The filterability is a basic prerequisite for cleanliness, servicing
service life in real-life applications. and filtration of hydraulic fluids. Rexroth therefore requires the
same degree of filterability of water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic
Table 3 is a practical indicator for hydraulic fluids with water
fluids as for mineral oils HLP/HVLP to DIN 51524.
content < 0.1%, cf. chapter 4.10. "Water".
As ISO 12922 does not comment on the filterability of hydrau-
lic fluids, filterability comparable to that of mineral oils HLP/
3.1.6 Environmentally acceptable
HVLP must be requested of lubricant manufacturers.
HFDU fluids based on ester and glycol are hydraulic fluids
Filterability is tested with the new hydraulic fluid and after the
which may also be classified as environmentally acceptable.
addition of 0.2 % water. The underlying standard (ISO 13357-
The main criteria for fire-resistant, water-free hydraulic fluids
1/-2) stipulates that filterability must have no negative effects
are the leak-free, technically problem-free use and the neces-
on the filters or the hydraulic fluid, see chapter 4 "Hydraulic
sary fire resistance. Environmentally acceptable is merely a
fluids in operation".
supplementary criterion. Notes on environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids can be found in RE 90221.
3.1.10 Corrosion protection
3.1.7 Air separation ability (ASA) Hydraulic fluids should not just prevent corrosion formation
on steel components, they must also be compatible with
The air separation ability (ASA) describes the property of a
non-ferrous metals and alloys. Corrosion protection tests on
hydraulic fluid to separate undissolved air. Hydraulic fluids
different metals and metal alloys are described in ISO 12922.
always contain dissolved air. During operation, dissolved air
may be transformed into undissolved air, leading to cavitation Rexroth components are usually tested with HLP hydraulic
damages. Fluid classification, fluid product, reservoir size and fluids or corrosion protection oils based on mineral oils before
design must be coordinated to take into account the dwell they are delivered.
time and ASA value of the hydraulic fluid. The air separation
capacity depends on the viscosity, temperature, basic fluid and 3.1.11 Additivation
aging. It cannot be improved by additives.
The properties described above can be modified with the help
According to ISO 12922 for instance, an ASA value d 15 min- of suitable additives.
utes is required for viscosity class ISO VG 46, practical values Bosch Rexroth does not prescribe any specific additive
on delivery are < 10 minutes, lower values are preferable. system.
3.1.8 Demulsifying ability and water solubility

The capacity of a hydraulic fluid to separate water at a defined
temperature is known as the demulsifying ability. ISO 6614
defines the demulsifying properties of hydraulic fluids.
The fluid classifications HFDU based on ester and HFDR
separate water, but HFD hydraulic fluids have a different
water separation ability to mineral oil HLP/HVLP. At 20 °C, in
comparison to mineral oil HLP/HVLP, a multiple (> factor 3) of
water can separate in the hydraulic fluid. Water solubility is also
more temperature-dependent than for mineral oils. The fluid
classification HFDU based on glycol usually dissolves water
completely, see chapter "4.10 Water".
53
3.2 Classification and fields of application

Typical field
of application 1
HFDU Base fluid: Mobile systems with For information on approved components, please refer to the
(glycol-based) Glycols high thermal loading respective product data sheet. For components which have
according to ISO not been approved according to the product data sheet,
12922 please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 °C: – Very good viscosity/temperature characteristics, shear
typically stability
> 0.97 kg/dm³ 2
– Resistant to aging
VI: typical > 170
– Can be water-soluble
– Can be mixed with water
The classification
– Very good wear protection properties
"HFDU" is no longer
listed in the current – A higher implementation temperature with the same viscos-
3
standard sheet ity in comparison to mineral oil is to be expected
VDMA 24317.
– Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower
suction pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce
the maximum speed as required and optimize suction
conditions.
– Prior to commissioning, contact the lubricant manufacturer,
as the components are tested with mineral oil HLP/corro- 4
sion protection oil.
– Incompatible with mineral oil (exceptions must be con-
firmed by the lubricant manufacturer).
HFDU (ester-based) Base fluid: Suitable for most For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to Ester based on fields of application respective product data sheet. For components which have
ISO 12922 regenerative raw and components. not been approved according to the product data sheet, 5
materials, synthetic please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 °C:
ester and mixtures
typically 0.90-0.93 – Preferred use of FKM seals. Please enquire about shaft
of different esters
kg/dm³ seal rings and implementation temperatures under –15 °C.
Because of the fire
VI: typical > 160 – Note shear stability (see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid
resistance, HFDU
analysis and filtration" and chapter 6 "Glossary")
Iodine count < 90 hydraulic fluids
based on ester are – Fire resistance is not stable over time 6
usually partially
– In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
The classification saturated esters
oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design
"HFDU" is no longer
and viscosity. Please check ATEX approvals for hydraulic
listed in the current
components.
standard sheet
VDMA 24317. – Limit the lower (see chapter 3.1.2) and upper implementa-
tion temperatures (see chapter 3.1.5)
7
– Good viscosity-temperature behavior
– Usually classified as insignificantly water-endangering
(water hazard class WGK 1)
high temperature), HFDU on ester basis have a tendency 8
to hydrolysis. The acidic organic decomposition products
can chemically attack materials and components.
54
Typical field
of application
HFDR Base fluid: phos- Turbine control For information on approved components, please refer to the
according to ISO phoric acid ester systems respective product data sheet. For components which have
12922 not been approved according to the product data sheet,
please consult your Bosch Rexroth sales partner.
Density at 15 °C:
typically 1.1 kg/dm³ – Classified as hazardous materials
(for transportation and storage)
VI : typical 140–160
– Hazardous working material
– Water-endangering (Water hazard class 2 – WGK2)
– Develops toxic vapors in case of fire
– Preferred use of FKM, and possibly PTFE seals. Please
enquire for shaft seal rings and implementation tempera-
tures under –15 °C.
– In operation, a higher temperature in comparison to mineral
oil HLP/HVLP is to be expected given identical design and
viscosity
– Phosphoric acid esters display a tendency to hydrolysis
when they come into contact with moisture. Under the
influence of water/moisture, they become unstable or form
highly aggressive, acidic components which could damage
the hydraulic fluid and component beyond repair.
– Poor viscosity/temperature characteristics
– Due to the higher density in comparison to HLP, lower
suction pressures are to be anticipated for pumps. Reduce
the maximum speed as required and optimize suction
conditions.
high temperature), HFDR have a tendency to hydrolysis.
The acidic inorganic decomposition products chemically
attack materials and components.
HFDU (continued) Based on triglycer- Not recommended Hydraulic fluids based on polyalphaolefines are not recom-
ides, mineral oils or for Rexroth compo- mended on account of their poor fire resistance. This clas-
related hydrocarbons nents! sification can usually be identified from: density < 0.89;
VI < 140 to 160
Hydraulic fluids based on triglycerides are not recommended
on account of their aging resistance. This classification can
usually be identified from: density > 0.92; VI > 190; iodine
count > 90
Consult your lubricant manufacturer or your Bosch Rexroth
sales partner if the classification of a hydraulic fluid is not
clear.
HFDS Based on haloge- Not approved for HFDS and HFDT have not been permitted to be manufac-
nated hydrocarbons Rexroth compo- tured or used since 1989 for environmental reasons.
HFDT
or mixtures with nents!
halogenated
hydrocarbons
55

4.1 General manufacturer or supplier of the new hydraulic fluid. The quantity
The properties of hydraulic fluids can change continually during fluids should be avoided, see following chapter.
Information about changing to a hydraulic fluid of a different
Please note that the fluid standard ISO 12922 merely classification can be found, for example, in VDMA 24314 and 1
describes minimum requirements for hydraulic fluids in new in ISO 7745. In addition, the information given in chapter 3.1.4
condition at the time of filling into the bins. The operator of a "Material compatibility" is also to be observed.
hydraulic system must ensure that the hydraulic fluid remains
in a utilizable condition throughout its entire period of use. Bosch Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its com-
ponents resulting from inadequate hydraulic fluid changeovers!
the lubricant manufacturer, the test labs or Bosch Rexroth.
4.5 Mixing and compatibility of different
Bosch Rexroth will accept no liability for damage to its compo- 2
hydraulic fluids
nents within the framework of the applicable liability legislation
insofar as the latter is due to non-observance of the following If hydraulic fluids from different manufacturers or different
instructions. types from the same manufacturer are mixed, gelling, silting
Please note the following aspects in operation. impaired air separation ability, malfunctions and damage to the
hydraulic system.
4.2 Storage and handling If the fluid contains more than 2 % of another fluid then it is 3
Hydraulic fluids must be stored correctly in accordance with considered to be a mixture. Exceptions apply for water, see
the instructions of the lubricant manufacturer. Avoid exposing chapter 4.10 "Water".
the containers to lengthy periods of direct heat. Containers Mixing with other hydraulic fluids is not generally permitted.
are to be stored in such a way that the risk of any foreign liquid This includes hydraulic fluids with the same classification. If
or solid matter (e.g. water, foreign fluids or dust) ingression individual lubricant manufacturers advertise miscibility and/or
into the inside of the container can be ruled out. After taking compatibility, this is entirely the responsibility of the lubricant
hydraulic fluids from the containers, these are immediately to manufacturer. 4
be properly resealed.
Bosch Rexroth customarily tests all components with mineral
Recommendation: oil HLP before they are delivered.
– Store containers in a dry, roofed place Note: With connectible accessory units and mobile filtering
– Store barrels on their sides systems, there is a considerable risk of non-permitted mixing
of the hydraulic fluids!
– Clean reservoir systems and machine reservoirs regularly 5
nents resulting from mixing hydraulic fluids!
4.3 Filling of new systems
Usually, the cleanliness levels of the hydraulic fluids as delivered 4.6 Re-additivation
do not meet the requirements of our components. Hydraulic fluids
must be filtered using an appropriate filter system to minimize solid Additives added at a later point in time such as colors, wear
particle contamination and water in the system. reducers, VI enhancers or anti-foam additives, may negatively
affect the performance properties of the hydraulic fluid and 6
As early as possible during test operation, new systems should the compatibility with our components and therefore are not
be filled with the selected hydraulic fluid so as to reduce the permissible.
risk of accidentally mixing fluids (see chapter 4.5 "Mixing and
compatibility of different hydraulic fluids"). Changing the hy- Rexroth will not accept liability for any damage to its compo-
draulic medium at a later point represents significant additional nents resulting from re-additivation!
costs (see following chapter).
4.7 Foaming behavior 7
4.4 Hydraulic fluid changeover Foam is created by rising air bubbles at the surface of hydraulic
Problems may be encountered in particular when changing fluids in the reservoir. Foam that develops should collapse as
over from water-containing, fire-resistant hydraulic fluid or quickly as possible.
mineral oils to water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids (e.g. Common hydraulic fluids in accordance with ISO 12922 are
incompatibilities in the form of gelling, silting, stable foam, sufficiently inhibited against foam formation in new condi-
reduced filterability or filter blockage). This may also happen tion. On account of aging and adsorption onto surfaces, the
when changing products within the same classification. 8
defoamer concentration may decrease over time, leading to a
In the case of changeovers of the fluid in hydraulic systems, it stable foam.
is important to ensure compatibility of the new hydraulic fluid Defoamers may be re-dosed only after consultation with the
with the remains of the previous hydraulic fluid. Bosch Rexroth lubricant manufacturer and with his written approval.
recommends obtaining verification of compatibility from the
Defoamers may affect the air separation ability.
56
4.8 Corrosion Water content has an affect particularly in the case of HEDU
hydraulic fluid on ester basis and HFDR in that it accelerates
The hydraulic fluid is to guarantee sufficient corrosion protec- aging (hydrolysis) of the hydraulic fluid and biological degra-
tion of components under all operating conditions, even in the dation, see chapter 4.11 "Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and
event of impermissible water contamination. filtration".
Water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids are tested for cor-
rosion protection in the same way as mineral oil HLP/HVLP. 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration
When used in practice other corrosion mechanisms are
revealed in detail and in individual cases, for the most part in Air, water, operating temperature influences and solid matter
contact with non-ferrous and white alloys. contamination will change the performance characteristics of
hydraulic fluids and cause them to age.
4.9 Air To preserve the usage properties and ensure a long service life
for hydraulic fluid and components, the monitoring of the fluid
Under atmospheric conditions the hydraulic fluid contains condition and a filtration adapted to the application require-
dissolved air. In the negative pressure range, for instance in ments (draining and degassing if required) are indispensable.
the suction pipe of the pump or downstream of control edges,
this dissolved air may transform into undissolved air. The The effort is higher in the case of unfavorable usage conditions,
undissolved air content represents a risk of cavitation and of increased stress for the hydraulic system or high expectations
the diesel effect. This results in material erosion of components as to availability and service life, see chapter 2 "Solid particle
and increased hydraulic fluid aging. contamination and cleanliness levels".
With the correct measures, such as suction pipe and reservoir When commissioning a system, please note that the required
design, and an appropriate hydraulic fluid, air intake and minimum cleanliness level can frequently be attained only by
separation can be positively influenced. flushing the system. Due to severe start-up contamination, it
may be possible that a fluid and/or filter replacement becomes
See also chapter 3.1.7 "Air separation ability (ASA)”. necessary after a short operating period (< 50 operating
hours).
4.10 Water The hydraulic fluid must be replaced at regular intervals and
Water contamination in hydraulic fluids can result from direct tested by the lubricant manufacturer or recognized accredited
ingress or indirectly through condensation of water from the air test labs. We recommend a reference analysis after com-
due to temperature variations. missioning.
HFDU hydraulic fluids on glycol basis are water-soluble or The minimum data to be tested for analyses are:
can be mixed with water. This means that any water that has – Viscosity at 40 °C and 100 °C
ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the sump
of the reservoir. – Neutralization number NN (acid number AN)
In the case of HDFU hydraulic fluids on ester basis, undis- – Water content (Karl-Fischer method)
solved water can be drained off from the reservoir sump, the – Particle measurement with evaluation according to
remaining water content is however too high to ensure that the ISO 4406 or mass of solid foreign substances with
maximum permissible water limit values are observed in the evaluation to EN 12662
long term.
With the fluid classification HFDR, the greater density of the
ester means that the any water that has ingressed will be on – Comparison with new product or available trend analyses
the surface of the hydraulic fluid. This means that any water – Assessment / evaluation for further use
that has ingressed into the system cannot be drained off in the
sump of the reservoir. – Also recommended: IR spectrum
Water in the hydraulic fluid can result in wear or direct failure No differences are needed in the maintenance and care of
of hydraulic components. Furthermore, a high water content in water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids with the appropriate
the hydraulic fluid negatively affects aging and filterability and suitability parameters compared to HLP/HVLP mineral oils.
increases susceptibility to cavitation. During operation, the water Attention is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3.
content in all hydraulic fluids, determined according to the "Karl After changing over hydraulic fluids it is recommended that the
Fischer method" (see chapter 6 "Glossary") for all water-free, filters be replaced again after 50 operating hours as fluid aging
fire-resistant hydraulic fluids must constantly be kept below 0.1% products may have detached themselves ("self-cleaning effect").
(1000 ppm). To ensure a long service life of both hydraulic fluids
and components, Bosch Rexroth recommends that values below Compared to the pure unused hydraulic fluid the changed
0.05% (500 ppm) are permanently maintained. neutralization number NN (acid number AN) indicates how
many aging products are contained in the hydraulic fluid.
Due to the higher water solubility in comparison to mineral oil This difference must be kept as small as possible. The lubricant
HLP/HVLP it is urgently advised that precautions be taken manufacturer should be contacted as soon as the trend
when using water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids, such as a analysis notes a significant increase in values.
dehumidifier on the reservoir ventilation.
57

A higher viscosity than that of new materials indicates that the
protection
hydraulic fluid has aged. Evaluation by the test lab or lubricant
All water-free, fire-resistant hydraulic fluids, are, like mineral oil-
manufacturers is however authoritative, whose recommenda-
based hydraulic fluids, subject to special disposal obligations.
tion should be urgently observed.
The respective lubricant manufacturers provide specifications
On systems where the possibility of water contamination 1
on environmentally acceptable handling and storage. Please
cannot be completely ruled out (also condensation), it should
ensure that spilt or splashed fluids are absorbed with appropri-
be ensured via the hydraulic system circuit that fluid aging
products are not accumulating in individual areas of the
hydraulic system, but are being removed from the system in
a controlled manner via the filtration system. This should be It is also not permitted to mix fluids when disposing of hydraulic
ensured via suitable hydraulic circuits (e.g. flushing circuit) or fluids. Regulations governing the handing of used oils stipulate
system manufacturer's operating instructions/specifications. that used oils are not to mixed with other products, e.g.
substances containing halogen. Non-compliance will increase 2
are to be provided.
8
58
6 Glossary
Additivation Karl Fischer method
Additives are chemical substances added to the basic fluids to Method to determine the water content in fluids. Indirect
achieve or improve specific properties. coulometric determination procedure in accordance with DIN
Aging EN ISO 12937 in connection with DIN 51777-2. Only the
Hydraulic fluids age due to oxidation (see chapter 3.1.5 "Aging combination of both standards will assure adequately accurate
resistance"). Liquid and solid contamination acts as a catalyzer measured values. For hydraulic fluids based on glycol, DIN EN
for aging, meaning that it needs to be minimized as far as ISO 12937 is to be applied in conjunction with DIN 51777-1.
possible by careful filtration. Please refer to Hydrolysis. Cavitation
Arrhenius equation Cavitation is the creation of cavities in fluids due to pressure
The quantitative relation between reaction rate and temperature reduction below the saturated vapour pressure and subse-
is described by an exponential function, the Arrhenius equation. quent implosion when the pressure increases. When the
This function is usually visualized within the typical temperature cavities implode, extremely high acceleration, temperatures
range of the hydraulic system. For a practical example, see and pressure may occur temporarily, which may damage the
chapter 3.1.5 "Aging resistance”. component surfaces.
Basic fluids Neutralization number (NN)

In general, a hydraulic fluid is made up of a basic fluid, The neutralization number (NN) or acid number (AN) specifies
or base oil, and chemical substances, the so-called additives. the amount of caustic potash required to neutralize the acid
The proportion of basic fluid is generally greater than 90%. contained in one gram of fluid.
Diesel effect Pour point

If hydraulic fluid that contains air bubbles is compressed cooled down under set conditions. The pour point is specified
quickly, the bubbles are heated to such a degree that a self- in the lubricant manufacturers' technical data sheets as a
ignition of the air-gas mix may occur. The resultant temperature reference value for achieving this flow limit.
increase may lead to seal damage and increased aging of the
hydraulic fluid. RFA (wavelength dispersive x-ray fluorescence analysis)
Is a procedure to determine nearly all elements in liquid and
Partially saturated esters solid samples with nearly any composition. This analysis
In contrast to saturated esters, partially saturated esters have method is suitable for examining additives and contamination,
double/multiple bonds between C atoms. Rexroth defines delivering fast results.
partially saturated esters as unsaturated bonds and mixtures
of esters with unsaturated and saturated bonds. Esters with Shearing/shear loss
unsaturated bonds are produced on the basis of renewable Shearing of molecule chains during operation can change
raw materials. the viscosity of hydraulic fluids with long chain VI enhancers
and anti-fogging additives. The initially high viscosity index
Depending on their number and position, these unsaturated drops. This needs to be taken into account when selecting the
bonds between the C atoms are instable. These bonds can hydraulic fluid.
detach themselves and form new bonds, thus changing the
properties of those liquids (an aging mechanism). Attention The only value at present that can be used to assess viscosity
is however drawn to the note in chapter 1.3. changes in operation is the result of the test in accordance
Hydrolysis applications that create a much higher shear load on such
Hydrolysis is the splitting of a chemical bond through the hydraulic fluids than can be achieved by this test.
reaction with water under the influence of temperature.
Viscosity
ICP (atomic emission spectroscopy) Viscosity is the measure of the internal friction of a fluid to
The ICP procedure can be used to determine various wear flow. It is defined as the property of a substance to flow under
metals, contamination types and additives. Practically all tension. Viscosity is the most important characteristic for
elements in the periodic system can be detected with this describing the load-bearing capacity of a hydraulic fluid.
method.
Iodine count density of the fluid; the unit is mm²/s. Hydraulic fluids are clas-
The iodine count is a yardstick for the quantity of single and sified by their kinematic viscosity into ISO viscosity classes.
multiple unsaturated bonds between C atoms in the basic fluid. The reference temperature for this is 40 °C.
A low iodine count indicates that the hydraulic fluid contains
few unsaturated bonds and is thus considerably more resistant Viscosity index (VI)
to aging than a hydraulic fluid with a high iodine count. A Refers to the viscosity temperature behavior of a fluid. The
statement about the position at which these multiple bonds are lower the change of viscosity in relation the temperature, the
located and about how "stable" they are against influencing higher the VI.
factors cannot be derived simply by stating the iodine count.
59
8
60
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
documentation@boschrexroth.de
www.boschrexroth.de It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.
Subject to change.
61
Rating of hydraulic fluids

for Rexroth hydraulic components
(pumps and motors) RE 90235
Edition: 01.2013
Bosch Rexroth offers the rating of hydraulic fluids as ser-

vice – inclusive assistance and consulting of experienced
engineers.
Hydraulic fluids
Hydraulic fluids based on Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Title mineral oils and related acceptable hydraulic water-free water-containing
hydrocarbons fluids hydraulic fluids hydraulic fluids
90223
Data sheets 90220 90221 90222
(in preparation)
HL
HEPG
HLP HFDR HFC
HLP(D) HFDU (ester base) HFB
HEPR
HVLP(D) and more HFAS
HETG
and more
RE 90235/01.2013, Bosch Rexroth AG

62
2 Rating of hydraulic fluids

Description
The safe and reliable operation of industrial and mobile When the requirements are fulfilled the corresponding
equipment is only possible if the hydraulic fluid used is hydraulic fluids will be listed on the following Bosch Rex-
selected with respect to the application. The main tasks of roth documents:
the hydraulic fluid are e.g. transmission of power, lubrica- ▶ 90240: Rexroth Basic Level List (HLP/HLP(D)/HVLP/
tion of the components, reduction of friction, corrosion HVLP(D))
prevention and heat dissipation. Unfortunately the common in preparation:
element “hydraulic fluid” is often disregarded during con- ▶ 90241: Rexroth Basic Level List (HExx)
ceptual design. ▶ 90242: Rexroth Basic Level List (HFDx)
Increased requirements on machines and equipment cons- ▶ 90243: Rexroth Basic Level List (HFxx)
tantly raise the quality requirements on the hydraulic fluid
used. For using a suitable hydraulic fluid, adequate know- Premium Level
ledge and experience of this are necessary. It is a precondition for the Premium Level to meet the Basic
Therefore Bosch Rexroth offers the rating of hydraulic fluids Level.
for Rexroth hydraulic components as service. The Premium Level contains specific fluid tests which show
Bosch Rexroth defines hydraulic fluids on the basis of the the suitability of the hydraulic fluid with defined Rexroth
illustration on page 1. Application notes and requirements components. According to the Rexroth components used
for Rexroth hydraulic components can be taken out of the the corresponding test has to be passed with respect to the
data sheets mentioned in this illlustration on page 1. oil category.
When the requirements are fulfilled the corresponding

1 Description hydraulic fluids will be listed on the following Bosch Rex-
roth document:
Minimum requirements ▶ 90245: Rexroth Premium Level List
At present the DIN/ISO conformity for the minimum requi-
rement on fluids is defined in our Bosch Rexroth compo- Note
nent data sheets. The fluid manufacturers’ technical data The fluid tests carried out in the Premium Level can not
sheets have to include that the specific standard is met. cover all machine and system-dependent conditions (see
The plausibility and correctness of the fluid data is not residual risk on rating scheme on page 3). Only single
reviewed by Bosch Rexroth. Rexroth components (type of pumps/motors used for the
fluid test) can be examined.
Basic Level Premium Level testing does not cover all systems and
Fluid data of the manufacturer has to be according to DIN / applications. Releases for special applications are exclu-
ISO and Bosch Rexroth requirements (tightened data of ded from the fluid rating.
standards, further Bosch Rexroth requirements). Bosch The responsibility for selection of the hydraulic fluid
Rexroth demands the data to be confirmed in writing. The remains with the equipment/machinery operator and the
plausibility and correctness of the fluid data is reviewed by lubricant manufacturer.
Bosch Rexroth. By means of the fluid test contained in the Premium Level
Furthermore retained samples (finished fluid, base oils) are the risk in combination with Rexroth hydraulic compo-
stored. nents can be considerably reduced and the reliability
No special Rexroth fluid test with Rexroth hydraulic compo- significantly increased.
nents will be done.
Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 90235/01.2013

63
Rating of hydraulic fluids 3

Description
hydraulic components
Risk in combination with Rexroth
Technical data sheets of the fluid
manufacturers:
Minimum requirements 1
DIN / ISO conformity for the minimum
DIN 51524 part 2 / 3 requirement on fluids is defined in the Bosch
ISO 15380 Rexroth component data sheets
ISO 12922
▶ Not reviewed by Bosch Rexroth
(plausibility / correctness of the data)
Requirements on fluid manufacturer:

Basic Level
Fluid data according to DIN / ISO
Review of manufacturer´s data
and Bosch Rexroth requirements
DIN 51524 part 2 / 3
ISO 15380 ▶ Reviewed by Bosch Rexroth
ISO 12922 ▶ Listed on Rexroth Basic Level List 3
+ Bosch Rexroth requirements

Fluid rating
Special fluids are rated separately
Rexroth fluid tests:

Premium Level Specific fluid tests with defined 4
fluid rating level
Rexroth hydraulic components

Prerequisite: Basic Level passed
▶ Reviewed by Bosch Rexroth
Reliability
▶ Suitability of the fluid for Rexroth hydraulic

+ Component-related
components
Bosch Rexroth requirements
▶ Listed on Rexroth Premium Level List
Special fluids are rated separately
5
Residual risk
RE 90235/01.2013 Bosch Rexroth AG

64

Process
2 Process
The process of a fluid rating includes the following steps:
(BR* Contacting fluid manufacturer)
Registration for “fluid rating” on website of Bosch Rexroth

FM**
(www.boschrexroth.com/fluidrating)
BR Reviewing registration data of the fluid manufacturer for plausibility
Assignation of registration number to fluid manufacturer

BR
Activating of fluid manufacturer´s access to download area of “fluid rating” on the website of Bosch Rexroth
Information to fluid manufacturer:

Basic Level
BR 1) Registration number (=user name for login download area “fluid rating“)
◀
2) Activating for download area is done

◀
FM Download of all documents (conditions, applications) necessary for “fluid rating” (Basic Level)
◀
Submitting of all documents and retained samples necessary for “fluid rating” (Basic Level) to
FM
Process fluid rating
Bosch Rexroth
BR Reviewing of the manufacturer´s data, testing of specific fluid data, storing of retained samples
BR when the requirements are fulfilled - hydraulic fluid will be listed on the Rexroth Basic Level
List (HLP/HLP(D)/HVLP/HVLP(D): 90240, lists for other fluid categories in preparation)
→ rated@Rexroth4Basic.HLP → rated@Rexroth4Basic.HVLP validity period:

→ rated@Rexroth4Basic.HLP(D) → rated@Rexroth4Basic.HVLP(D) 3 years
◀
◀
◀
FM Request for quotation for fluid test by Bosch Rexroth
FM Commissioning of fluid test, supply of fluid for fluid test

Premium Level
RFT-APU-CL RFT-APU-OL-HFC
BR Implementation of specific fluid
Rexroth Fluid Test - Rexroth Fluid Test - further fluid tests in
test using defined Rexroth
Axial Piston Unit - Axial Piston Unit - preparation
components
Closed Loop Open Loop-HFC
BR when the requirements are fulfilled - hydraulic fluid will be listed on the Rexroth Premium Level List 90245
→ rated@Rexroth4Premium.RFT-APU-CL
→ rated@Rexroth4Premium.RFT-APU-OL-HFC
*BR: Bosch Rexroth **FM: fluid manufacturer

65
Rating of hydraulic fluids 5

Fluid tests
3 Fluid tests
3.1 Rexroth fluid test RFT-APU-CL Technical data of the test components
(Rexroth Fluid Test Axial Piston Unit Closed Loop) Type A4VG045EP A6VM060EP 1
Data sheet 92004 91610
Fluid test for closed loops using a combination unit existing Operation mode pump motor
of a hydraulic pump A4VG045EP and a hydraulic motor Nominal volume 45 cm3 62 cm3
A6VM060EP. This fluid test represents the requirements on Maximum speed (at Vg max) 4300 min-1 4450 min-1
a hydrostatic transmission. Maximum pressure 500 bar 500 bar
Control electric (EP) electric (EP) 2
Features of the fluid test
The suitability of the hydraulic fluid is tested at high stress
Operating data
under laboratory conditions. The fluid test consists of a
break-in test, swivel cycle test and a corner power test. 1. Break-in test
Speed 2000 min-1
Rating criteria Operating pressure 250 bar

3
▶ Examination of the interaction fluid to component Viscosity 10 to 15 mm2/s
– Measurement of the component weight change Operating time 10 h
respectively dimensional change

2. Swivel cycle test
– Material compatibility
Speed 4000 min-1
– Visual inspection of components/component Operating pressure 450 bar
surfaces Viscosity 5 to 7 mm2/s 4
– Oil analysis (SOT, during test, EOT) Operating time 300 h
▶ Evidence of endurance performance
▶ Determination of efficiency (SOT, EOT)
▼ Swivel cycle (schematic diagram)
Test bench 50
45 5
▼ Schematical hydraulic circuit diagram of the RFT-APU-CL
40
35
Displacement [cm3]
30
25
A6VM060 6
EP 20
M
15
A4VG045 10
EP
5
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7
Time[s]
Displacement A4
Displacement A6
3. Corner power test

Speed 4000 min-1
8
Operating pressure 500 bar
2
Viscosity 5 to 7 mm /s
Operating time 200 h
RE 90235/01.2013 Bosch Rexroth AG

66

Fluid tests
3.2 Rexroth fluid test RFT-APU-OL-HFC Technical data of the test components
(Rexroth Fluid Test Axial Piston Unit Open Loop-HFC) Type A4VSO125DR A4VSO125DFE
Data sheet 92053 92053
Fluid test for open loops using a A4VSO swashplate axial Operation mode pump, motor
piston combination unit (hydraulic pump and hydraulic self-priming
motor). This fluid test represents the requirements on Nominal volume 125 cm3 125 cm3
applications demanding water-containing, fire-resistant Maximum speed 2200 min-1 2200 min-1
hydraulic fluids of the classification HFC. Maximum pressure 400 bar 400 bar
Features of the fluid test

Operating data
The suitability of the hydraulic fluid is tested at high stress
1. Constant test
under laboratory conditions. The fluid test consists of a
Speed 1800 min-1
constant and swivel cycle test.
Operating pressure 350 bar
Displacement Vg max, Vg min
Rating criteria
Temperature 40°C
▶ Examination of the interaction fluid to component
Operating time 200 h
– Wear and cavitation behaviour
– Material compatibility 2. Swivel cycle test
– Visual inspection of components/component Speed 1800 min-1
surfaces Operating pressure 350 bar
– Measuring records of functional relevant component Displacement 0,5 sec Vg min / 0,5 sec Vg max
surfaces Temperature 40/50 °C
– Oil analysis (SOT, during test, EOT) Operating time 800 h
▶ Evidence of endurance performance
▼ Swivel cycle (schematic diagram)
Test bench
100 500
▼ Schematical hydraulic circuit diagram of the RFT-APU-OL-HFC
90 450
80 400
Operating pressure [bar]

70 350
Swivel angle [%]
60 300
A4VSO125
DFE 50 250
M
40 200
A4VSO125
DR 30 150
20 100
10 50
0
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2
Time [s]
A4 Pump
A4 Motor Operating pressure
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
Mobile Applications set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
Glockeraustraße 4 An den Kelterwiesen 14 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent. No statements
89275 Elchingen, Germany 72160 Horb, Germany concerning the suitability of a hydraulic fluid for a specific purpose can be
Tel. +49 7308 82-0 Tel. +49 7451 92-0 derived from our information. The information given does not release the
info.brm@boschrexroth.de user from the obligation of own judgment and verification.
www.boschrexroth.com Subject to change.

67
Pumps
Axial piston pumps Internal gear pumps

Axial piston pumps are available in swash plate or bent Internal gear pumps can be used for continuous pressures
axis design for medium and high pressure applications. of up to 315 bar (depending on the frame size). This pump
Variable pumps facilitate tailored flows for the realization principle features a compact design with particularly high
of energy-efficient drives. Different versions, performance energy density.
ranges and control options ensure optimum solutions for
stationary applications. Vane pumps
Vane pumps are available in a wider range of sizes. They
External gear pumps are used in applications requiring medium operating pres-
External gear pumps are cost-effective displacement sures and low noise emissions.
pumps. They are available in many different versions.
A selected range of single and multiple pumps is available Radial piston pumps
on short notice. For special noise requirements, the Radial piston pumps provide high power density and round
SILENCE version with low pulsation as well as the off the product range for high-pressure applications with
SILENCE PLUS versions with very low background noise operating pressures of up to 700 bar.
and low pulsation are available.
Gerotor pumps
Gerotor pumps are designed for low-pressure applications
of up to 15 bar as economic oil pumps for cooling, filtering
or lubrication circuits.

68

69
Contents | Axial piston pumps | Pumps
Axial piston pumps

Component pmax
Designation Type Size series in bar Data sheet Page
Displacement pumps
1
Open circuit, series 6 A2FO 5 … 1000 450 91401 71
Open circuit, series 1 and 3 A4FO 16 … 500 450 91455 105
Variable-Speed drive with Fixed displacement unit A10FZO, A10FZG, 6 … 180 91485 121
or Variable displacement unit A10VZO, A10VZG
Variable displacement pumps

Variable-Speed drive with Fixed displacement unit A10FZO, A10FZG, 6 … 180 91485 121 2
or Variable displacement unit A10VZO, A10VZG
Open circuit A4VSO 40 … 1000 400 92050 181
Open circuit, for HFC Fluids A4VSO 125 … 250 400 92053 249
Open circuit A4VBO 71 … 450 500 92122 257
Open circuit A10VO 10 … 100 315 92703 325 3
Open circuit A10VSNO 63 250 92740 473
Open circuit A7VO 28 … 160 400 92202 489
Open circuit A7VO 250 … 500 400 92203 525
Open circuit A1VO 35 280 92650 577
Open and closed circuit, Metering pump for polyure- A7VK 12 … 107 315 94010 597
4
thane components
Closed circuit A4VSG 40 … 1000 400 92100 621
Closed circuit, Compact unit A4CSG 250 … 750 400 92105 689
Controller / adjustment devices for type A4VS…
Closed-loop speed control, secondary controlled DS2 40 … 1000 1X/3X 400 92057 721
Hydraulic adjustment device, HD 40 … 1000 400 92080 751 5
pilot pressure dependent
Control devices DR, DP, FR, DFR 40 … 1000 400 92060 803
Power controllers with hyperbolic characteristic LR, LR.N 40 … 1000 400 92064 835
Control and adjustment device HM, HS, HS4, EO 40 … 1000 400 92076 903
Control and adjustment device EPA, EPGA, EPB, 40 … 1000 400 92084 955
EPGB, EPD, EPG
Control and adjustment device DFE1 125 … 355 400 92088 971 6
Controller / adjustment devices for type A10V..
Control and adjustment device EF, LA 18 … 140 350 92709 983
Accessories
Scavenging and Pressure relief valve blocks SDVB 16 … 50 95533 991
Power limiting valves LV06 6 95546 1003
Universal through drive 95581 1011 7

70

71
RE 91401/06.2012 1/34
Axial Piston Fixed Pump Replaces: 03.08
A2FO
Data sheet
Series 6
Size Nominal pressure/Maximum pressure
5 315/350 bar
10 to 200 400/450 bar
250 to 1000 350/400 bar
Open circuit
Features
Contents
– Fixed pump with axial tapered piston rotary group of
Ordering code for standard program 2 bent-axis design, for hydrostatic drives in an open circuit
Technical data 4 – For use in mobile and stationary applications
Dimensions size 5 11 – The flow is proportional to the drive speed and displacement
Dimensions sizes 10, 12, 16 12 – The drive shaft bearings are designed for the bearing service
life requirements usually encountered in these areas
Dimensions sizes 23, 28, 32 14
– High power density
Dimensions size 45 16
– Small dimensions
Dimensions sizes 56, 63 18
– High total efficiency
– Economical design
– One-piece tapered piston with piston rings for sealing
Installation instructions 32
General instructions 34
72
2/34 Bosch Rexroth AG A2FO Series 6 RE 91401/06.2012
Ordering code for standard program

A2F O / 6 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Hydraulic fluid
Mineral oil and HFD. HFD for sizes 250 to 1000 only in combination with long-life bearings "L" (without code)
01 HFB, HFC hydraulic fluid Sizes 5 to 200 (without code)
Sizes 250 to 1000 (only in combination with long-life bearings "L") E-
Axial piston unit

02 Bent-axis design, fixed A2F
Drive shaft bearing 5 to 200 250 to 500 710 to 1000

Standard bearing (without code) –
03
Long-life bearing – L
Operating mode
04 Pump, open circuit O
Sizes (NG)
Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 7
05
5 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
Series
06 6
Index
NG10 to 180 1
07 NG200 3
NG5 and 250 to 1000 0
Directions of rotation
Viewed on drive shaft clockwise R
08
counter-clockwise L
Seals
09 FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) V
Drive shafts 5 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 to 1000

Splined shaft – – – A
DIN 5480 – – – – – – – – Z
10 Parallel keyed shaft – – B
DIN 6885 – – – – – – – – P
Conical shaft1) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – C
Mounting flanges 5 to 250 355 to 1000

ISO 3019-2 4-hole – B
11
8-hole – H
= Available ❍ = On request – = Not available = Preferred program
1) Conical shaft with threaded pin and woodruff key (DIN 6888). The torque must be transmitted via the tapered press fit.
73
RE 91401/06.2012 A2FO Series 6 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/34

A2F O / 6 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Port plates for service lines2) 5 10 to 16 23 to 250 355 to 1000 1

SAE flange port A/B at side and
– – – 05
SAE flange port S at rear
12 Threaded port A/B at side and threaded port S at rear – – – 06
SAE flange ports A/B and S at rear – – – 11
Threaded ports A/B and S at side – – – 07
Standard / special version 2

Standard version (without code)
13 Standard version with installation variants, e. g. T ports against standard open or closed –Y
Special version -S
= Available ❍ = On request – = Not available = Preferred program
2) Fastening thread or threaded ports, metric

74
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid Details regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data The correct choice of hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of the
sheets RE 90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (environmentally operating temperature in relation to the ambient temperature:
acceptable hydraulic fluids), RE 90222 (HFD hydraulic fluids) in an open circuit, the reservoir temperature.
and RE 90223 (HFA, HFB, HFC hydraulic fluids) for detailed The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating
information regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid and applica- viscosity in the operating temperature range is within the
tion conditions. optimum range (Qopt see shaded area of the selection diagram).
The fixed pump A2FO is not suitable for operation with HFA We recommended that the higher viscosity class be selected
hydraulic fluid. If HFB, HFC or HFD or environmentally accept- in each case.
able hydraulic fluids are used, the limitations regarding technical Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C, an operating tem-
data or other seals must be observed. perature of 60 °C is set in the circuit. In the optimum operating
viscosity range (Qopt., shaded area), this corresponds to the
Selection diagram viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68; to be selected: VG 68.
-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
1600 1600 Note
1000
600 The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure and
400 speed, can be higher than the reservoir temperature. At no
200 point of the component may the temperature be higher than
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
10
2
100
115 °C. The temperature difference specified below is to be
0
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
taken into account when determining the viscosity in the bear-

60
ing.
40 36
νopt.
If the above conditions cannot be maintained due to extreme
20 operating parameters, we recommend flushing the case at
16
port U (sizes 250 to 1000).
10
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115°
Temperature t [°C]
tmin = -40°C Hydraulic fluid temperature range tmax = +115°C
Viscosity and temperature of hydraulic fluid

Viscosity [mm2/s] Temperature Comment
Transport and storage Tmin t -50 °C factory preservation: up to 12 months with standard,
at ambient temperature Topt = +5 °C to +20 °C up to 24 months with long-term
(Cold) start-up1) Qmax = 1600 TSt t -40 °C t d 3 min, without load (p d 50 bar),
n d 1000 rpm (for sizes 5 to 200),
n d 0.25 • nnom (for sizes 250 to 1000)
Permissible temperature difference 'T d 25 K between axial piston unit and hydraulic fluid
Warm-up phase Q 1600 to 400 T = -40 °C to -25 °C at p d0.7 • pnom, n d0.5 • nnom and t d 15 min
Operating phase
Temperature difference 'T = approx. 12 K between hydraulic fluid in the bearing and at port T.
Maximum temperature 115 °C in the bearing
103 °C measured at port T
Continuous operation Q = 400 to 10 T = -25 °C to +90 °C measured at port T,
Qopt = 36 to 16 no restriction within the permissible data
Short-term operation2) Qmin t 7 Tmax +103 °C measured at port T, t 3 min, p 0.3 • pnom
FKM shaft seal1) T d +115 °C see page 5
1) At temperatures below -25 °C, an NBR shaft seal is required (permissible temperature range: -40 °C to +90 °C).
2) Sizes 250 to 1000, please contact us.
75
Technical data
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid Sizes 250 to 1000
Finer filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic 5

fluid, which increases the service life of the axial piston unit. NG250
Differential pressure 'p [bar]

To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit, a gra- 4
NG355 1
vimetric analysis of the hydraulic fluid is necessary to determine NG710, 1000
the amount of solid contaminant and to determine the cleanli-
3
ness level according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness level of at
least 20/18/15 is to be maintained. NG500
2
At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum
115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according to
ISO 4406 is necessary. 1
2
If the above classes cannot be achieved, please contact us.
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Shaft seal Speed n [rpm]
Permissible pressure loading The values are valid for an ambient pressure pabs = 1 bar.
The service life of the shaft seal is influenced by the speed of 3
Temperature range
the axial piston unit and the case drain pressure (case pres-
sure). The mean differential pressure of 2 bar between the The FKM shaft seal may be used for case drain temperatures
case and the ambient pressure may not be enduringly exceed- from -25 °C to +115 °C.
ed at normal operating temperature. For a higher differential
Note
pressure at reduced speed, see diagram. Momentary pressure
For application cases below -25 °C, an NBR shaft seal is
spikes (t < 0.1 s) of up to 10 bar are permitted. The service life
required (permissible temperature range: -40 °C to +90 °C).
of the shaft seal decreases with an increase in the frequency of
State NBR shaft seal in plain text when ordering. 4
pressure spikes.
Please contact us.
The case pressure must be equal to or higher than the ambient
pressure.
Direction of flow
Sizes 10 to 200 Direction of rotation, viewed on drive shaft
5 clockwise counter-clockwise
NG10, 12, 16
5
S to B S to A
4 NG23, 28, 32
NG80, 90 NG45 Long-life bearing
3 Sizes 250 to 1000
NG107, 125 For long service life and use with HF hydraulic fluids. Identical
2 external dimensions as motor with standard bearings. Subse-
NG160, 180 NG56, 63 quent conversion to long-life bearings is possible. Bearing and 6
case flushing via port U is recommended.
1
NG200 Flushing flow (recommended)
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 NG 250 355 500 710 1000
Speed n [rpm] qv flush (L/min) 10 16 16 16 16
7
8
76
Technical data
Operating pressure range Definition
(operating with mineral oil) Nominal pressure pnom
The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design
Pressure at service line port A or B pressure.
Size 5 Maximum pressure pmax

The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operat-
Nominal pressure pnom __________________ 315 bar absolute ing pressure within the single operating period. The sum of the
Maximum pressure pmax ________________ 350 bar absolute single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
Single operating period _____________________________ 10 s period.
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Minimum pressure at the high-pressure side (A or B) which is
Sizes 10 to 200 required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 400 bar absolute Minimum pressure (inlet)
Maximum pressure pmax ________________ 450 bar absolute Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) which is required in
Single operating period _____________________________ 10 s order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h pressure is dependent on the speed of the axial piston unit
(see diagram on page 7).
Sizes 250 to 1000 Rate of pressure change RA
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 350 bar absolute Maximum permissible rate of pressure rise and reduction dur-
ing a pressure change over the entire pressure range.
Maximum pressure pmax ________________ 400 bar absolute
t2
Single operating period _____________________________ 10 s Single operating period t1 tn
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h
Maximum pressure pmax
Nominal pressure pnom
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) ___25 bar absolute
Rate of pressure change RA max
Pressure p
Without pressure-relief valve _________________ 16000 bar/s
pnom
't
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Pressure p
'p
Time t
Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn
Time t
Pressure at suction port S (inlet)

Minimum pressure pS min __________________ 0.8 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pS max __________________30 bar absolute
Note
Values for other hydraulic fluids, please contact us.
77
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without efficiency and tolerances; values rounded)
Size NG 5 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80
Displacement geometric, Vg cm3 4.93 10.3 12 16 22.9 28.1 32 45.6 56.1 63 80.4
per revolution
Speed maximum1) 1
nnom rpm 5600 3150 3150 3150 2500 2500 2500 2240 2000 2000 1800
nmax2) rpm 8000 6000 6000 6000 4750 4750 4750 4250 3750 3750 3350
Flow at nnom qV L/min 27.6 32 38 50 57 70 80 102 112 126 145
Power at 'p = 350 bar P kW 14.54) 19 22 29 33 41 47 60 65 74 84
'p = 400 bar P kW – 22 25 34 38 47 53 68 75 84 96
Torque3)
2
at Vg and 'p = 350 bar T Nm 24.74) 57 67 89 128 157 178 254 313 351 448
'p = 400 bar T Nm – 66 76 102 146 179 204 290 357 401 512
Rotary stiffness c kNm/rad 0.63 0.92 1.25 1.59 2.56 2.93 3.12 4.18 5.94 6.25 8.73
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kgm2 0.00006 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0012 0.0012 0.0012 0.0024 0.0042 0.0042 0.0072
Maximum angular acceleration D rad/s2 5000 5000 5000 5000 6500 6500 6500 14600 7500 7500 6000
Case volume V L 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.33 0.45 0.45 0.55 3
Mass (approx.) m kg 2.5 6 6 6 9.5 9.5 9.5 13.5 18 18 23
Size NG 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
Displacement geometric, Vg cm3 90 106.7 125 160.4 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
per revolution
Speed maximum1) nnom rpm 1800 1600 1600 1450 1450 1550 1500 1320 1200 1200 950
4
nmax2) rpm 3350 3000 3000 2650 2650 2750 1800 1600 1500 1500 1200
Flow at nnom qV L/min 162 171 200 233 261 310 375 469 600 852 950
Power at 'p = 350 bar P kW 95 100 117 136 152 181 219 273 350 497 554
'p = 400 bar P kW 108 114 133 155 174 207 – – – – –
Torque3)
at Vg and 'p = 350 bar T Nm 501 594 696 893 1003 1114 1393 1978 2785 3955 5570 5
'p = 400 bar T Nm 573 679 796 1021 1146 1273 – – – – –
Rotary stiffness c kNm/rad 9.14 11.2 11.9 17.4 18.2 57.3 73.1 96.1 144 270 324
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kgm2 0.0072 0.0116 0.0116 0.0220 0.0220 0.0353 0.061 0.102 0,178 0.55 0.55
Maximum angular acceleration D rad/s2 6000 4500 4500 3500 3500 11000 10000 8300 5500 4300 4500
Case volume V L 0.55 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 2.7 2.5 3.5 4.2 8 8
Mass (approx.) m kg 23 32 32 45 45 66 73 110 155 325 336 6
1) The values are valid: 4

- at an absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at suction port S
NG250 to 1000
Inlet pressure pabs [bar]
- for the optimum viscosity range from

Qopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s 3
- with hydraulic fluid based on mineral oils
2) Maximum speed (limiting speed) with increased inlet pressure 2 NG5 to 200 7
pabs at suction port S, see adjacent diagram.
3) Torque without radial force, with radial force see page 8
4) Torque at 'p = 315 bar 1
Note
0
Operation above the maximum values or below the minimum val- 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.8 2.0
1.4
ues may result in a loss of function, a reduced service life or in the Speed n / nnom 8
destruction of the axial piston unit. Other permissible limit values,
with respect to speed variation, reduced angular acceleration as a
function of the frequency and the permissible start up angular ac-
celeration (lower than the maximum angular acceleration) can be
found in data sheet RE 90261.
78
Technical data
Permissible radial and axial forces of the drive shafts
(splined shaft and parallel keyed shaft)
Size NG 5 53) 10 10 12 12 16 23 23
Drive shaft ø mm 12 12 20 25 20 25 25 25 30
Maximum radial force1) Fq Fq max kN 1.6 1.6 3.0 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.2 5.7 5.4
at distance a
(from shaft collar) a mm 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
a
with permissible torque Tmax Nm 24.7 24.7 66 66 76 76 102 146 146
९ permissible pressure 'p 'p perm bar 315 315 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
Maximum axial force2) +Fax max N 180 180 320 320 320 320 320 500 500
Fax+
– –Fax max N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Permissible axial force per bar operating pressure ±Fax perm/bar N/bar 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.2 5.2
Size NG 28 28 32 45 56 564) 56 63 80
Drive shaft ø mm 25 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35
at distance a
a
with permissible torque Tmax Nm 179 179 204 290 357 294 357 401 512
Fax+
– –Fax max N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Size NG 804) 80 90 107 107 125 160 160 180

Drive shaft ø mm 35 40 40 40 45 45 45 50 50
at distance a
a
with permissible torque Tmax Nm 488 512 573 679 679 796 1021 1021 1146
Fax+
– –Fax max N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Size NG 200 250 355 500 710 1000

Drive shaft ø mm 50 50 60 70 90 90
Maximum radial force1) Fq Fq max kN 20.3 1.26) 1.56) 1.96) 3.06) 2.66)
at distance a
(from shaft collar) a mm 25 41 52.5 52.5 67.5 67.5
a
with permissible torque Tmax Nm 1273 5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
९ permissible pressure 'p 'p perm bar 400 5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
Maximum axial force2) +Fax max N 1600 2000 2500 3000 4400 4400
Fax+
– –Fax max N 0 0 0 0 0 0
Permissible axial force per bar operating pressure ±Fax perm/bar N/bar 16.7 5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
1) With intermittent operation 6) When at a standstill or when axial piston unit operating in non-
2) Maximum permissible axial force during standstill or when the axial pressurized conditions. Higher forces are permissible when under
piston unit is operating in non-pressurized condition. pressure, please contact us.
3) Conical shaft with threaded pin and woodruff key (DIN 6888) Note
4) Restricted technical data only for splined shaft Influence of the direction of the permissible axial force:
5) Please contact us. +Fax max = Increase in service life of bearings
–Fax max = Reduction in service life of bearings (avoid)
79
Technical data
Effect of radial force Fq on the service life of bearings Determining the operating characteristics
By selecting a suitable direction of radial force Fq, the load on
Vg • n • Kv
the bearings, caused by the internal rotary group forces can be Flow qv = [L/min]
reduced, thus optimizing the service life of the bearings. Rec- 1000
ommended position of mating gear is dependent on direction 1
of rotation. Examples: Vg • 'p
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • S• Kmh
Toothed gear drive V-belt output
NG Mopt. Mopt. 2S•T•n qv • 'p
5 to 180 ± 70° ± 45° Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt
200 to 1000 ± 45° ± 70°
t Mo 2
M op pt Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3
'p = Differential pressure in bar
t M
op
M op t
n = Speed in rpm
Kv = Volumetric efficiency
Kmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
3
Kt = Total efficiency (Kt = Kv • Kmh)
Clockwise Counter-clockwise Clockwise

direction direction direction
of rotation of rotation of rotation
Pressure at Pressure at Pressure at
4
port B port A port B
8
80
81
Before finalizing your design, request a binding

Dimensions size 5 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Port plate 07 – Threaded ports A/B and S at side

Illustration: cw direction of rotation (on version "ccw direction of rotation" the port plate is rotated through 180°)
1
521) 24
10 45° 45°
Y
View Y
T1, T2 T2
S
ø60 -0.046
56
70
2
25°
75
6.4
48.5
62
70
T1
4 8
61
B, S
B 3
51 80
Drive shafts
4
B Parallel keyed shaft C Conical shaft with threaded pin and woodruff key, 3x5
DIN 6885, A4x4x20 (DIN 6888), (tapering 1:10)
10
ø12 +0.001
M10x13)4)
+0.012
M4 x 0.72)3)
ø12.8
3.2
4
5
13.5
ø15
7.3
ø15
9.5
24
10.5
22.5
6
Ports
Designation Port for Standard6) Size3) Maximum pressure [bar]5) State7)
B (A) Service line DIN 3852 M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 O
S Suction line DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 30 O
T1 Drain line DIN 3852 M10 x 1; 8 deep 3 O 7
T2 Drain line DIN 3852 M10 x 1; 8 deep 3 O
1) To shaft collar
2) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13)
3) Observe the general instructions on page 34 for the maximum tightening torques.
4) Thread according to DIN 3852, maximum tightening torque: 30 Nm
5) Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and 8
fittings.
6) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate standard.
7) O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery)
82

Dimensions sizes 10, 12, 16 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Port plate 06 – Threaded port A/B at side and threaded port S at rear
45°
201) 95 45°
6 12 95
T1
29
40°
ø80 -0.019
95
0
10
48
9
54
56
69
91
R
T2
18.2 24
60
131
Y
147
166
Flange
similar to ISO 3019-2
View Y
S
B (A)
85
42.5 16
1) To shaft collar
83

Drive shafts
Sizes 10, 12, 16 NG10, 12 Sizes 10, 12, 16 NG10, 12
A Splined shaft DIN 5480 Z Splined shaft DIN 5480 B Parallel keyed shaft P Parallel keyed shaft
W25x1.25x18x9g W20x1.25x14x9g DIN 6885, AS8x7x32 DIN 6885, AS6x6x32
1
22 16 22
ø25+0.002
16
ø20+0.002
+0.015
+0.015
Key
M10x1.51)2)
Key
M10x1.51)2)
M6x11)2)
7.5 5 7.5 width 8 5 width 6
M6x11)2)
2
ø28
ø28
22.5
ø28
28
ø28
22 22 40 40
28 34
3
Ports
Designation Port for Standard5) Size2) Maximum pressure [bar]3) State6)
B (A) Service line DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 450 O
S Suction line DIN 3852 M33 x 2; 18 deep 30 O
T1 Drain line DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 X4)
T2 Drain line DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 O4) 4
R Air bleed DIN 3852 M8 x 1; 8 deep 3 X
3) Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and
fittings.
4) Depending on installation position, T1 or T2 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 32 and 33).
5) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate standard. 5
X = Plugged (in normal operation)
8
84

Port plate 05 – SAE flange port A/B at side and SAE flange port S at rear
45°
251) 106 45°
8 18 118
T1
ø100 -0.022
40°
25
18
.2
118
5
12
11
56
61
13 .5
70
40
88
117
R T2
23.2 9
42
144 Y
166
190
Flange
ISO 3019-2
View Y
47.6
19
S
B (A)
106
22.2
60 14
1) To shaft collar
85

Drive shafts
Sizes 23, 28, 32 NG23, 28 Sizes 23, 28, 32 NG23, 28
W30x2x14x9g W25x1.25x18x9g DIN 6885, AS8x7x40 DIN 6885, AS8x7x40
1
22 19 19
ø25+0.002
22
ø30+0.002
+0.015
M8x1.251)2)
+0.015
M10x1.51)2)
Key Key
M8x1.251)2)
M10x1.51)2)
7.5 6 7.5 width 8 6 width 8
2
ø35
ø35
ø35
ø35
33
28
27 28 50 50
35 43
3
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size2) Maximum pressure State7)
[bar]3)
B (A) Service line SAE J5185) 1/2 in 450 O
Fastening thread B/A DIN 13 M8 x 1.25; 15 deep
S Suction line SAE J5185) 3/4 in 30 O
Fastening thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep 4
T1 Drain line DIN 38526) M16 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 X4)
T2 Drain line DIN 38526) M16 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 O4)
R Air bleed DIN 38526) M10 x 1; 12 deep 3 X
fittings.
5) Only dimensions according to SAE J518, metric fastening thread is a deviation from standard.
6
8
86

45° 45°
321) 108
12 20 150
T1
ø125 -0.025
28
40°
150
23 0
16
13.5
.8
63
19 .8
78
80
50
100
133
R T2
30 11
42
155 Y
179
207
Flange
ISO 3019-2 View Y
52.4
25
S
B (A) 118
26.2
64 20
1) To shaft collar
87

Drive shafts
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480 P Parallel keyed shaft
W30x2x14x9g DIN 6885, AS8x7x50
1
M12x1.751)2)
28 28
ø30+0.002
+0.015
M12x1.751)2)
Key
9.5 9.5 width 8
ø35
ø35
33
2
27 60
35
Ports
3
[bar]3)
S Suction line SAE J5185) 1 in 30 O
Fastening thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep
T1 Drain line DIN 38526) M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 X4) 4
R Air bleed DIN 38526) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 X
fittings. 5
8
88

Dimensions sizes 56, 63 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
321) 45°
117 45°
10 20 150
T1
ø125 -0.025
31
40°
150
23 0
.8 16
13.5
70
78
.8
87
50
107
19
142
R T2
30 11
50
171 Y
195
225
Flange
ISO 3019-2
View Y
52.4
25
S
B (A) 128
26.2
68 23
1) To shaft collar
89

Drive shafts
NG56, 63 NG56 NG56, 63 NG56
W35x2x16x9g W30x2x14x9g DIN 6885, AS10x8x50 DIN 6885, AS8x7x50
1
M12x1.751)2)
M12x1.751)2)
28 28 28
ø35+0.002
+0.018
28
ø30+0.002
M12x1.751)2)
+0.015
M12x1.751)2)
Key Key
9.5 9.5 9.5 width 10 9.5 width 8
2
ø40
ø40
ø40
38
ø40
33
32 27 60 60
40 35
3
Ports
[bar]3)
fittings.
6
8
90

321) 132 45° 45°

10 20 165
T1
ø140 -0.025
41
40°
165
0
27 18
13.5
.8
83
86
99
25 2
.
122
57
162
R T2
29 11
63
196
Y
224
257
Flange
ISO 3019-2
View Y
58.7
32
S
B (A)
138
30.2
73 25
1) To shaft collar
91

Drive shafts
NG80, 90 NG80 NG80, 90 NG80
1
M12x1.751)2)
28 28
ø35+0.002
36 36
ø40+0.002
+0.018
M12x1.751)2)
+0.018
Key Key
M16x21)2)
M16x21)2)
12 9.5 12 width 12 9.5 width 10
ø45
ø45
ø45
ø45
38
43
37 32 70 70
45 40
3
Ports
[bar]3)
B (A) Service line SAE J5185) 1 in 450 O
S Suction line SAE J5185) 1 1/4 in 30 O
fittings.
6
8
92

401) 140 45° 45°

10 23 190
T1
ø160 -0.025
40
40°
190
0
20
ø17.5
85
98
110
136
174
R T2
36.5 12
65
213 Y
245
275
Flange
ISO 3019-2
View Y
Detail: port A/B 69.9

(dimensions in brackets for size 107) 38
S
31.8(27.8) B (A)
150
66.7(57.2)
32(25)
35.7
89 20
1) To shaft collar
93

Drive shafts
NG107, 125 NG107 NG107, 125 NG107
1
36
ø45+0.002
28
ø40+0.002
M12x1.752)3)
+0.018
M12x1.751)2)
+0.018
36 28 Key Key
M16x21)2)
M16x21)2)
12 9.5 12 width 14 9.5 width 12
48.5
ø50
ø50
43
ø50
2
ø50
42 37 80 80
50 45
3
Ports
[bar]3)
B (A) Service line SAE J5185) 1 in (size 107) 450 O
1 1/4 in (size 125)
Fastening thread B/A DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 17 deep (size 107)
M14 x 2; 19 deep (size 125) 4
1) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13) 5
fittings.
7) O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery) 6
8
94

401) 158 45° 45°
10 25 210
T1
ø180 -0.025
47
40°
210
31 4
.8 22
17.5
96
108
121
32 7
149
.
66
188
R T2
37.2 13
72
237
Y
271
294
Flange
ISO 3019-2
View Y
69.9
42
S
B (A)
180
35.7
101 15
1) To shaft collar
95

Drive shafts
NG160, 180 NG160 NG160, 180 NG160
1
36
ø50+0.002
36
+0.018
36 36
ø45+0.002
Key Key
+0.018
M16x21)2)
M16x21)2)
M16x21)2)
width 14
M16x21)2)
12 12 12 width 14 12
53.5
48.5
ø60
ø60
ø60
ø60
44 42 90 90
55 50
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size2) Maximum pressure State7) 3
[bar]3)
B (A) Service line SAE J5185) 1 1/4 in 450 O
Fastening thread B/A DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
T1 Drain line DIN 38526) M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 3 X4) 4
fittings.
4) Depending on installation position, T1 or T2 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 32 and 33). 5
8
96

45° 45°
401) 156
9 32 236
T1
31.8
77
ø200 -0.029
25°
236
0
25
66.7
75
102.5
100
32
121
22
169
R T2 Y
32 16
89
265
319 Detail Y
Flange
ISO 3019-2 351
69.9
Drive shafts
A Splined shaft DIN 5480 B Parallel keyed shaft
W50x2x24x9g DIN 6885, AS14x9x80
S
120.7
211
90
36 36
ø50+0.002
+0.018
Key
M16x22)3)
M16x22)3)
12 12 width 14 B (A)
53.5
ø70
ø70
108
44 100
55
Ports
[bar]4)
Fastening thread DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
1) To shaft collar
fittings.
97

501) 82 45° 45°

30°
9 22 1
U T1
124
105
31. 25
8 0
0´
ø224 -0.029
26°3
246
0 2
28
66.7
82
103
105
32
22
172
T2 Y
48 25 6
M1
82 246 3
267
309
Flange
329 Detail Y
ISO 3019-2
88.9
Drive shafts
4
W50x2x24x9g DIN 6885, AS14x9x80
50.8
210
ø63
36 36 S
ø50+0.002
+0.018
Key
M16 x 22)3)
M16x22)3)
12 12 width 14 B (A)
5
53.5
ø60
ø60
118 12
49 82
58
6
Ports
[bar]4)
U Bearing flushing DIN 38527) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 3 X
1) To shaft collar
3) Observe the general instructions on page 34 for the maximum tightening torques. 8
fittings.
98

Port plate 11 – SAE flange ports A/B and S at rear

501) 83 22°30'
14 23.5 45° 18 8x4
5°
U T1
18
(=
M
36
0°
)
171
128
36
0
0´
ø280 -0.081
26°3
335
102
0
128
32
T2 198
Y
48 28 335
83
320
Flange Detail Y
350
ISO 3019-2
36.5 88.9
Drive shafts
W60x2x28x9g DIN 6885, AS18x11x100 MB (MA) MS
79.4
50.8
245
63
42
40
42
+0.030
M20x2.52)3)
M20x2.52)3)
ø60+0.011
Key
15 15 width 18
B (A) S
ø70
64
ø70
60 50
245
71 105
250
82
Ports
[bar]4)
T1 Drain line DIN 38527) M33 x 2; 18 deep 3 O5)
T2 Drain line DIN 38527) M33 x 2; 18 deep 3 X5)
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure DIN 38527) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
MS Measuring suction pressure DIN 38527) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 30 X
1) To shaft collar
fittings.
99


501) 98 22°30'
34° 8x4
14 27.5 0 5°
M2 1
(=
U T1
36
0°
)
192
40
142
0
0´
ø315 -0.081
26°3
375
2
112.5
0
36
142
220
22
Y
T2
30
3
48 111 375
362
Flange
396 Detail Y
ISO 3019-2
36.6 106.4
Drive shafts
Splined shaft DIN 5480 4
Z P Parallel keyed shaft
W70x3x22x9g DIN 6885, AS20x12x100
MB (MA) MS
79.4
270
42
62
40
75
42
+0.030
ø70+0.011
Key
M20x2.52)3)
M20x2.52)3)
15 15 width 20
B (A) S 5
74.5
ø80
ø80
65 55
67 270
105
276
80
6
Ports
[bar]4)
fastening thread B/A DIN 13 M16 x 2; 21 deep
fastening thread DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep 7
MA, M B Operating pressure measurement DIN 38527) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
MS Suction pressure measurement DIN 38527) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 30 X
8
1) To shaft collar
fittings.
100


501) 131 22°30'
14 41.5 45° 8x4
5°
U T1
24
(=
M
36
0°
)
236
50
183
0
0´
ø400 -0.089
18°3
465
102
0
45
183
249
22
Y
T2
35 465
47 156
485
Flange
507
ISO 3019-2 Detail Y
44.5 130.2
Drive shafts
W90x3x28x9g DIN 6885, AS25x14x125 MB (MA) MS
77.8
96.8
340
100
50
50 50
+0.035
ø90+0.013
Key
M24x32)3)
M24x32)3)
18 18 width 25
B (A) S
ø100
ø100
95
85 70
340
91 130
344
105
Ports
[bar]4)
B (A) Service line SAE J5186) 2 in 400
Fastening thread DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
1) To shaft collar
fittings.
101


501) 131 22°30'

14 41.5 45° 8x4
5° 1
U T1
24
(=
M
36
0°
)
236
50
183
0´ 0
ø400 -0.089
26°3
465
2
0
45
143
183
277
22
T2
Y
35
3
47 156 465
468
Flange
511
ISO 3019-2
Detail Y
Drive shafts 44.5 130.2
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480 P Parallel keyed shaft 4

W90x3x28x9g DIN 6885, AS25x14x125
MB (MA) MS
96.8
77.8
340
50
100
50
+0.035
50
ø90+0.013
Key
M24x32)3)
M24x32)3)
18 18 width 25
B (A) S
5
ø100
ø100
95
85 70
91 130 340
105 344
6
Ports
[bar]4)
B (A) Service line SAE J5186) 2 in 400
fastening thread B/A DIN 13 M20 x 2.5; 30 deep
fastening thread DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep 7
1) To shaft collar 8
fittings.
102
Installation instructions
General Installation position
During commissioning and operation, the axial piston unit must See the following examples 1 to 8.
be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled. This must also be Further installation positions are possible upon request.
observed following a relatively long standstill as the axial piston
Recommended installation positions: 1 and 2.
unit may drain back to the reservoir via the hydraulic lines.
Below-reservoir installation (standard)
Particularly in the installation position "drive shaft upwards"
filling and air bleeding must be carried out completely as there Below-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is
is, for example, a danger of dry running. installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
The case drain fluid in the motor housing must be directed to 1 2
the reservoir via the highest available drain port (T1, T2).
SB SB
For combinations of multiple units, make sure that the respec-
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of ht min ht min
pressure differences at the drain ports of the units, the shared amin hmin hmin amin
drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible
T1
case pressure of all connected units is not exceeded in any
T2
situation. If this is not possible, separate drain lines must be S
laid if necessary.
To achieve favorable noise values, decouple all connecting
lines using elastic elements and avoid above-reservoir installa- S
tion.
3 4
In all operating conditions, the suction and drain lines must flow SB SB
into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The permissible
suction height hS results from the overall loss of pressure; it must ht min ht min
not, however, be higher than hS max = 800 mm. The minimum suc- hmin amin hmin amin
tion pressure at port S must also not fall below 0.8 bar absolute S
during operation and during cold start. R(U)
T1
T2
Installation position Air bleed Filling

1 – T1
2 – T2
3 – T1
4 R (U) T2
103
Above-reservoir installation
Above-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is
installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir.
Recommendation for installation position 8 (drive shaft
upward): A check valve in the drain line (cracking pressure 1
0.5 bar) can prevent draining of the pump housing.
5 6
L1 L1
T1 S
T2
2
S hS max
hS max
amin amin
ht min ht min
SB hmin hmin SB
3
7 8
L1 L1
S R(U)
T1
0.5 bar
T2
hS max
4
amin hS max amin

S
ht min ht min
hmin SB
SB hmin
5
5 L1 T1 (L1)
6 L1 T2 (L1)
7 L1 T1 (L1)
8 R (U) T2 (L1)
6
L1 Filling / air bleed
R Air bleed port
U Bearing flushing / air bleed port
S Suction port
T1, T2 Drain port
ht min Minimum required immersion depth (200 mm) 7
hmin Minimum required spacing to reservoir bot-
tom (100 mm)
SB Baffle (baffle plate)
hS max Maximum permissible suction height (800 mm)
amin When designing the reservoir, ensure adequate
space between the suction line and the drain line. 8
This prevents the heated, return flow from being
drawn directly back into the suction line.
104
General instructions
– The pump A2FO is designed to be used in open circuits. – The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to.
– The project planning, installation and commissioning of the – The product is not approved as a component for the safety
axial piston unit requires the involvement of qualified person- concept of a general machine according to ISO 13849.
nel.
– A pressure-relief valve is to be fitted in the hydraulic system.
– Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corre-
– The following tightening torques apply:
sponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly. If
necessary, these can be requested from Bosch Rexroth. - Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding tighten-
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns
ing torques of the fittings used.
on the axial piston unit. Take appropriate safety measures
(e. g. by wearing protective clothing). - Mounting bolts:
For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston
DIN 13 or with thread according to ASME B1.1, we recom-
unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteris-
mend checking the tightening torque in individual cases in
tic may shift.
accordance with VDI 2230.
– Service line ports:
- Female threads in the axial piston unit:
- The ports and fastening threads are designed for the The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are
specified maximum pressure. The machine or system maximum values for the female threads and must not be
manufacturer must ensure that the connecting elements exceeded. For values, see the following table.
and lines correspond to the specified application condi-
- Threaded plugs:
tions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, temperature) with the
For the metallic threaded plugs supplied with the axial pis-
necessary safety factors.
ton unit, the required tightening torques of threaded plugs
- The service line ports and function ports can only be used MV apply. For values, see the following table.
to accommodate hydraulic lines.
Ports Maximum permissible Required WAF

tightening torque of the tightening torque of the hexagon socket in the
Standard Size of thread female threads MG max threaded plugs MV1) threaded plugs
DIN 3852 M8 x 1 10 Nm 7 Nm 3 mm
M10 x 1 30 Nm 15 Nm2) 5 mm
M12 x 1.5 50 Nm 25 Nm2) 6 mm
M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M16 x 1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M33 x 2 540 Nm 225 Nm 17 mm
M42 x 2 720 Nm 360 Nm 22 mm
1) The tightening torques apply for screws in the "dry" state as received on delivery and in the "lightly oiled" state for installation.
2) In the "lightly oiled" state, the MV is reduced to 10 Nm for M10 x 1 and 17 Nm for M12 x 1.5.
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set
Mobile Applications forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be repro-
Glockeraustrasse 4 An den Kelterwiesen 14 duced or given to third parties without its consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 72160 Horb, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel.: +49-7308-82-0 Tel.: +49-7451-92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Fax: +49-7308-72-74 Fax: +49-7451-82-21 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
info.brm@boschrexroth.de
products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
www.boschrexroth.com/axial-piston-pumps
Subject to change.
105
Industrial Electric Drives Linear Motion and Service Mobile

Hydraulics and Controls Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Automation Hydraulics
Fixed Displacement Pump A4FO RE 91 455/04.00

replaces: 01.94
for open circuits
Sizes 16...500
Series 1, Series 3
Nominal pressure up to 400 bar
Peak pressure up to 450 bar
Index Features
Features 1 – A4FO axial piston fixed displacement pumps of swashplate design

Ordering Code 2...3 are used for hydraulic drives in open loop circuits.
Technical Data 4...6 – Flow is proportional to the drive speed and to the displacement.
Input Power and Flow 7 – Good suction characteristic
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 16, 22, 28 8 – Low noise level
Unit Dimensions, Size 40 9 – Long service life
Unit Dimensions, Size 71 10 – Pump combinations possible
Unit Dimensions, Size 125 11 – Through drive for mounting other pumps
Unit Dimensions, Size 250 12
Unit Dimensions, Size 500 13 – Further Informations:
Unit Dimensions, Through Drives 14 Variable Pump A4VSO RE 92 050
Permissible Input and Through Drive Rotation Torques 15
Installation and Commissioning Guidelines 16
106
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics A4FO | RE 91 455/04.00
Ordering Code
Fluid / Design 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500

Mineral oil, HFD-Fluid
HFA-, HFB-, HFC-Fluid – – – – E-
High-Speed Design – – – – – – H-
Axial piston unit

Fixed swashplate design A4F
Operation
Pump in open circuits O
Size
Displacement Vg (cm3) 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500
Series
sizes 16...40, 125...500 3
size 71 1
Index
sizes 16...40 2
sizes 71...500 0
Direction of rotation
viewed on shaft end clockwise R
anti-clockwise L
Seals
NBR (nitril-caoutchouc), sizes 16...40 N
shaft seal in FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) sizes 71...500 P
FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) sizes 71...500 V
Shaft end 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500

splined shaft SAE – – – – – S
splined shaft SAE – – – – – – – T
Splined shaft DIN 5480 – – – – Z
parallel shaft, with key DIN 6885 – – – – P
Mounting flange 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500

SAE 2-hole – – – – C
ISO 4-hole – – – – – B
ISO 8-hole – – – – – – – H
Service line connections sizes 16...40 sizes 71...500

Pressure and suction port SAE at side (opposite side) (metric fixing screws) – 12
Pressure and suction port SAE at side, rotated by 90° (metric fixing screws)
– 25
2nd pressure port B1 opposite B - when delivered plugged with a flange
= available
= in preparation
– = not available
107
RE 91 455/04.00 | A4FO Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16
Ordering Code
A4F O / –
Fluid
1
Axial piston unit
Operation
Size
Series
Index
Direction of rotation 2
Seals
Shaft end
Mounting flange
Service line connections
Through Drive 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500

flange hub for mounting
4
– – – N00
SAE A, 2-hole SAE A G2, A10VSO 10 – – – – K01
SAE B, 2-hole SAE B A4FO 16...28 – – – – – – K02
ISO 80, 2-hole SAE A-B A10VSO 18 – – – – KB2
ISO 100, 2-hole SAE B A10VSO 28 – – – – KB3
ISO 100, 2-hole SAE B-B A10VSO 45 – – – – KB4
5
ISO 125, 2-hole SAE C A10VSO 71 – – – – KB5
ISO 125, 2-hole SAE C-C A10VSO 100 – – – – – KB6
ISO 180, 4-hole SAE D A10VSO 140 – – – – – – KB7
ISO 125, 4-hole N32 (DIN 5480) A4VS 40 – – – – K31
ISO 140, 4-hole N40 (DIN 5480) A4FO 71 / A4VS 71 – – – – K33
ISO 160, 4-hole N50 (DIN 5480) A4FO 125 / A4VS 125, 180 – – – – – K34
6
ISO 224, 4-hole N60 (DIN 5480) A4FO 250 / A4VS 250 – – – – – – K35
ISO 315, 8-hole N80 (DIN 5480) A4FO 500 / A4VS 500 – – – – – – – K43
with through drive shaft, without hub, without adapter flange, with cover plate – – – – K99
8
108
Technical Data
Fluid
To review the application of A4FO pumps with the selected hydraulic Notes on the selection of the hydraulic fluid
fluid, detailed fluid compatibility and application data can be found In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the operating
in data sheets RE 90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (environmentally temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to the ambient
acceptable hydraulic fluids) and RE 90223 (fire resistant fluids, HF). temperature.
When using HF- or environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the operating
possible limitations for the technical data have to be taken into temperature range, the operating viscosity lies within the optimum
consideration. If necessary please consult our technical department range (νopt) (see shaded section of the selection diagram). We
(please indicate type of the hydraulic fluid used for your application recommend that the highest possible viscosity range should be chosen
on the order sheet). in each case.
Sizes 16...40 of fixed pump A4FO are not suitable for operation with Example: At an ambient temperature of X°C the operating
HFA, HFB or HFC-fluids. temperature is 60°C. Within the operating viscosity range (νopt;
shaded area), this corresponds to viscosity ranges VG 46 or VG 68.
Operating viscosity range VG 68 should be selected.
In order to optain optimum efficiency and service life, we recommend Important: The leakage oil (case drain oil) temperature is influenced
that the operating viscosity (at operating temperature) be selected by pressure and pump speed and is always higher than the tank
from within the range: temperature. However, at no point in the circuit may the temperature
νopt = operating viscosity 16...36 mm2/s exceed 115°C for sizes 16…40 or 90°C for sizes 71…500.
referred to the tank temperature (open circuit). If it is not possible to comply with the above conditions because of
extreme operating parameters or high ambient temperatures please
Viscosity limits consult us.
The limiting values for viscosity are as follows:
Sizes 16...40 Filtration
νmin = 5 mm2/s, The finer the filtration the better the achieved cleanliness level of the
short term at a max. permissible temperature of tmax = 115°C pressure fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston unit.
νmax = 1600, short term on cold start (tmin = -40°C) To ensure the functioning of the axial piston unit a minimum
cleanliness level of
Sizes 71...500
νmin = 10 mm2/s, 9 to NAS 1638
short term at a max. permissible leakage oil temp. of tmax = 90° 18/15 to ISO/DIS 4406 is necessary.
νmax = 1000 mm2/s, short term on cold start (tmin = -25°C) At very high temperatures of the hydraulic fluid (90°C to max. 115°C,
not permissible for sizes 71…500) at least cleanliness level
Please note that the max. fluid temperature is also not exceeded in
certain areas (for instance bearing area). 8 to NAS 1638
17/14 to ISO/DIS 4406 is necessary.
At temperatures of -25°C up to -40°C special measures may be
required for certain installation positions. Please contact us. If above mentioned grades cannot be maintained please consult us.
Selection diagram 2500-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°

1600 1600
1000
600
400
V 68
VG
V 32
V 46
V 2
200
Viscosity ν in mm2/s
G
G
G
G
10
2
100
60
40 36
νopt.
20
16
10
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115°
temperature t in °C
tmin = -40°C fluid temperature range tmax = +115°C
109
Technical Data
valid for operation with mineral oils
Sizes 16...40 Sizes 71...500

Working pressure range inlet Working pressure range inlet
Absolut pressure at port S (suction port) Absolut pressure at port S (suction port)
pabs. min ____________________________________________________ 0,8 bar pabs. min ____________________________________________________ 0,8 bar 1
pabs. max _______________________________________________________ 2 bar pabs. max _____________________________________________________ 30 bar
Working pressure range outlet Working pressure range outlet

Maximum pressure at port A or B (pressure data to DIN 24312) Maximum pressure at port A or B (pressure data to DIN 24312)
Nominal pressure pN ______________________________________ 400 bar Nominal pressure pN ______________________________________ 350 bar
Peak pressure pmax ________________________________________ 450 bar Peak pressure pmax ________________________________________ 400 bar 2
Note:
When mounting further pumps at the through drive of the A4FO the Flushing of the bearings (Sizes 125...500)
max. input torque of the drive shaft has not to be exceeded (as to For informations about operating conditions, flushing quantities
page 15). This may necessitate a limitation of the max. admissible and notes on bearing flushing see data sheet RE 92 050
pressure values. (A4VSO).
3
Direction of flow Direction of flow
clockwise operation anti-clockwise operation clockwise operation anti-clockwise operation
Sizes 16...40 S to B S to A Sizes 71...500 S to B S to B
Symbol B(A) x3 Symbol B1 B MB 4

A, B service line port B, B1 service line port
S suction port S suction port
T1, T2 drain port T, R(L) drain port
(plugged) (1 port plugged)
x3 gauge port MB gauge port working pressure
MS gauge port suction pressure
S T 1 T2 U flushing port (sizes 125...500) U MS S T R(L) 5
Case drain pressure Leakage pressure

Perm. case drain pressure (housing pressure) The max. permissible leakage pressure (housing pressure) is
pL _______________________________________________________ 2 bar abs. dependent on speed (see diagram). The pressure in the housing must
be equal to or greater than the external pressure on the shaft sealing
The leakage oil chamber is connected to the suction chamber. A case 6
ring.
drain line is therefore not necessary.
Max. leakage pressure (housing pressure)
pL _______________________________________________________ 4 bar abs.
A case drain line to the tank is necessary.
5
2
4
7
leakage pressure pabs (bar)
2 8
size 500 size 71
size 250 size 125
1
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
speed n (rpm)
110
Technical Data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering ηmh and ηv: values rounded)
Size 16 22 28 40 71 125 250/H* 500/H*
Displacement Vg cm3 16 22 28 40 71 125 250 500
Max. speed 1) nmax rpm 4000 3600 3000 2750 2200 1800 1500 / 1900 1320 / 1500
Max. permissible speed (speed limit) nmax perm. rpm 4800 4500 3750 3400 2700 2200 1800 / 2100 1600 / 1800
with increased inlet pressure
Output flow at nmax2) qV max L/min 62 77 81 107 152 218 364 / 461 640 / 728
Power at qV max; Δp = 400 bar Pmax kW 43 53 56 73 91 3) 131 3) 219 / 277 3) 385 / 437 3)
Max. torque at Δp = 400 bar Tmax Nm 102 140 178 254 395 3) 696 3) 1391 3) 2783 3)
Case volume L 0,3 0,3 0,3 0,4 2,0 3,0 7,0 11,0
Moment of inertia, about drive axis J kgm2 0,0017 0,0017 0,0017 0,0030 0,0121 0,0300 0,0959 0,3325
Weight (approx.) m kg 13,5 13,5 13,5 16,5 34 61 120 220
1) Thevalues shown are valid for an absolute pressure (pabs) of 1 bar at the suction inlet S and when operated on mineral oil.
2) 3 % volumetric loss included 3) Δp = 350 bar H*: High-speed-design
Maximum permissible speed (speed limit) Calculation of size

Maximum permissible speed with increased inlet pressure pabs at Vg • n • ηv
suction port S (note: max. perm. speed nmax perm (speed limit)) Flow qv = in L/min
1000
1,25 1,59 • Vg • Δp Vg • Δp
Torque T= = in Nm
1,2 100 • ηmh 20 • π • ηmh
speed n / nmax
T•n 2π•T•n q • Δp
Power P= = = v in kW
1,1 9549 60 000 600 • ηt
Vg = displacement per revolution in cm3

1,0
Δp = differential pressure in bar
n = speed in rpm
0,9 ηv = volumetric efficiency
0,8 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 ηmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
ηt = overall efficiency
Inlet pressure pabs (bar)
Input drive
Permissible axial and radial force on drive shaft
Size 16 22 28 40
Fq
Distance of Fq (from shaft collar) a mm 17,5 17,5 17,5 17,5
b mm 30 30 30 30
a, b, c c mm 42,5 42,5 42,5 42,5
max. permissible radial force at distance a Fq max N 2800 2500 2050 3600
b Fq max N 1600 1400 1150 2891
c Fq max N 1150 1000 830 2416
max. permissible axial force - - Fax max N 1557 1557 1557 2120
Fax
+ + Fax max N 417 417 417 880
Size 71 125 250 500

Fq
Max. axial force at housing pressure pmax 1 bar abs. ± Fax max N 1400 1900 3000 4000
± Fax
Max. axial force at housing pressure pmax 4 bar abs. + Fax max N 810 1050 1850 2500
X/2 X/2 – Fax max N 1990 2750 4150 5500
Max. shearing force X Fq max N 1700 2500 4000 5000
111
Input Power and Flow
Size 71 Size 250

500 250
n = 2200 rpm n = 1500 rpm n = 1500 rpm n = 1000 rpm
150 150
Drive power P (kW)

flow qV (L/min)
Drive power P (kW)
1
flow qV (L/min)
qV 400 200
100 100 qV
Pq 300 150
V max
Pq V max
2
50 50
Pq V null
200 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 350
100 50
operating pressure p (bar)
Pq 3
V null
0 0
0 100 200 300 350

4
Size 125 Size 500
300 n = 1800 rpm n = 1500 rpm 150 n = 1320 rpm

800 400
n = 1000 rpm
flow qV (L/min)
flow qV (L/min)
Drive power P (kW)

Drive power P (kW)
qV 700 350
200 100 5
Pq V max
600 qV 300
100 50
Pq 500 250
V null
6
0 0
0 100 200 300 350 400 200
Pq V max
300 150
7
200 100
qV • p
Total efficiency: ηt =
PqV max • 600 100 Pq V null 50
qV 8
Volumetric efficiency: ηv = 0 0
qV, theor 0 100 200 300 350
(Fluid: hydraulic oil ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50°C)

112
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 16, 22, 28

Prior to finalising your design, please obtain a certified drawing.
Clockwise operation
(port plate is rotated via 180° for anti-clockwise operation)
M10; 17 deep
(SAE B)
View W
Connections
B (A) Service line ports SAE 3/4" 420 bar
(6000 psi) high pressure series
S Suction port SAE 11/2" 35 bar
(500 psi) standard series
T1, T2 Case drain port, oil filling M18x1,5; 12 deep
x3 Gauge port M14x1,5; 12 deep
M12; 18 deep
33
5/16-18UNC-2B
Shaft ends
25
ø17,7
S 6
Splined shaft SAE 7/8"(SAE B),
pressure angle 30°,
ø55
13 teeth, 16/32 Pitch,

flat root, side fit,
tolerance class 5
ANSI B92.1a-1976
19
41,3
113
Unit Dimensions, Size 40

Clockwise operation
(port plate is rotated via 180° for anti-clockwise operation)
1
x3 x3
(SAE B)
3
M10; 17 deep
View W
4
Connections
B (A) Service line ports SAE 3/4" 420 bar
(6000 psi) high pressure series
S Suction port SAE 11/2" 35 bar
(500 psi) standard series
5
T1, T2 Case drain port, oil filling M18x1,5; 12 deep
x3 Gauge port M14x1,5; 12 deep
M12; 20 deep
6
Shaft ends
T
Splined shaft SAE 11/4"(SAE C) 8
pressure angle 30°,
14 teeth, 12/24 Pitch
flat root side fit,
tolerance class 5
ANSI B92.1a-1976
114

Clockwise and anti-clockwise operation
34 R (L) 27.8 ø15

M12; 17 deep
83.5
12h9
170
B
ø140h8
57.2
ø25
43
B1 80
61
ø1 B
87
45° 45°
T T
20 83.5 85 (Port B)
8 132 MB X MS 170
232 182
276 106
View X
77.8
ø50
S
Connections
B Service line port SAE 1" (high pressure series) 42.9 M12; 20 deep
B1 2nd service line port SAE 1" (high pressure series)
(plugged with a flange)
S Suction port SAE 2" (standard series)
R (L) Case drain port, oil filling M27x2
T Oil drain (plugged) M27x2
MB Gauge port operating pressure (plugged) M14x1,5
MS Gauge port suction pressure (plugged) M14x1,5
Shaft ends
1,5 68 45
P Z 37
9,5 9,5
Parallel shaft with key Splined shaft
AS 12x8x68 W40x2x30x18x9g
ø40k6
DIN 6885 DIN 5480

M12
M12
28
,6
R1
66
70 28
80 55
115

36 102
29 R (L) 31.8 ø20
1
M14; 19 deep
98.5
U
102
14h9
ø160h8
14
53.5
66.7
ø32
200
B 0
2
B1 ø20
74
45° 45°
(102)
B
102
T
T
24 98.5 102 (Port B)
8 156 MB X MS 200 3
276 206
321 124
View X
4
ø63 S
88.9
Connections 5
50.8 M12; 17 deep
B Service line port SAE 1 1/4" (high pressure series)
B1 2nd service line port SAE 1 1/4" (high pressure series)
S Suction port SAE 2 1/2" (standard series)
T Oil drain (plugged) M33x2 6
U Flushing port (bearing flushing) (plugged) M14x1,5
Shaft ends 1,5 80 54

P Z 45
12 12
Parallel shaft with key Splined shaft 8
14x9x80 W50x2x30x24x9g
ø50k6
DIN 6885 DIN 5480

M16
M16
36
,5
R2
78
36
82
64
92
116

48
16 R (L) 36.5
129
ø24
M16; 24 deep
18h9
131
U 0 U
ø28
ø224h8
34.5
79.4
265
ø38
B
64
91 B1
B
138
45° 45°
T T
30 124.5 130 (Port B)
8 203 MB X MS 260
346 268
401 176
View X
106.4
ø75
S
Connections 61.9 M16; 24 deep

B Service line port SAE 1 1/2" (high pressure series)
B1 2nd service line port SAE 1 1/2" (high pressure series)
Shaft ends 3 100 70

P Z 59
15 15
Parallel shaft with key Splined shaft
AS 18x11x100 W60x2x30x28x9g
ø60m6
M20
M20
DIN 6885 DIN 5480
42
R4
101
42
105
115 80
117

80 158
R (L) 44.5
1
M20; 24 deep B1
ø24
190
U
161
40
5 22h9
20
ø315h8
96.8
85
B
50
16
B
103
2
0
8x45
36
180
190
°=
T
360
°
45
°
MB MS T 22°30
30 ´
16 255 X 155 158
3
411 190 190
489 200
View X
152.4
4
125
S
92.1 M16; 23 deep
Connections
B Service line port SAE 2" (high pressure series) 5
B1 2nd service line port SAE 2" (high pressure series)
6
Shaft ends 3 125 90

P Z 76
15 15
Parallel shaft with key Splined shaft 8
AS 22x14x125 W80x3x30x25x9g
ø80m6
M20
M20
DIN 6885 DIN 5480
42
R4
125
42
130
180 140
118
Unit Dimensions, Through Drives

Through drive SAE A (K01)

Sizes 16, 22, 28
Splined hub SAE A
M10; 15 deep (N5/8-9T 16/32 DP)
suitable for connection of:

– gear pump G2 (RE 10030)
– variable pump A10VSO10 (RE 92713)
Size 40
M10; 15 deep Splined hub SAE A (N5/8-9T 16/32
DP)
ø17,5
ø82.55 +0.025

10
12
17
209
Through drive SAE B (K02)

Sizes 16, 22, 28 splined hub SAE B
(N7/8-13T 16/32 DP)
M12; 18 deep

– fixed pump A4FO 16, 22, 28
– variable pump A10VG18 (RE 92750)
– variable pump A10VO28 (RE 92701/
RE 92703)
Through drive sizes 71...500 (see RE 92050, A4VSO)
Size 71 125 250 500

A1 194 231 293 335
Through drive
dimensions see
A1 RE 92050 (A4VSO)
119
Permissible Input and Through Drive Rotation Torques
Size 16 22 28 40
Corner torque (at Δp = 400 bar) 1) Tmax Nm 102 140 178 254
Max. perm. through drive torque 2) TD perm. Nm 192 192 192 314
Max. perm. input shaft end S TE perm. Nm 192 192 192 – 1
torque 3) (SAE J744) (SAE B, W7/8") (SAE B, W7/8") (SAE B, W7/8")
shaft end T TE perm. Nm – – – 602

(SAE J744) (SAE C, W11/4")
Size 71 125 250 500

Corner torque (at Δp = 350 bar) 1) Tmax Nm 395 696 1391 2783 2
Max. perm. through drive torque 2) TD perm. Nm 395 696 1391 2783
Max. perm. input shaft end Z TE perm. Nm 790 1392 2782 5566
torque3) (DIN 5480) (W40) (W50) (W60) (W80)
shaft end P TE perm. Nm 700 1392 2300 5200

(keyed shaft, DIN 6885) (AS12x8x68) (AS14x9x80) (AS18x11x100) (AS22x14x125) 3
1) efficiency not taken into consideration
2) note: max. perm. input torque T
E perm. may not be exceeded
3) drive shaft without side load
Code explanations
TD perm. = max. permissible through drive torque in Nm 4
TE perm. = max. permissible input torque at the drive shaft in Nm
1,59 • Vg1 • Δp1
T1 = take off torque at 1st pump = in Nm
100 • hmh
1,59 • Vg2 • Δp2
T2 = take off torque at 2nd pump = in Nm
100 • hmh
5
Vg1 = pump displacement per rev. 1st pump in cm3
Vg2 = pump displacement per rev. 2nd pump in cm3
Δp1 = differential pressure 1st pump in bar
Δp2 = differential pressure 2nd pump in bar
ηmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Single pump Combination pump 6
T1 T2
T1
TE
TE 1. Pumpe
7
1st pump 1st pump 2nd
2. pump
Pumpe
TD TD
8
120
Installation and Commissioning Guidelines, Sizes 16...40
General Installation on top of tank level

At start-up and during operation the pump housing has imperatively Pump on top of min. oil level in the tank
to be filled up with hydraulic fluid (filling of the case chamber). Start- ➔ Actions as installation below tank level
up has to be carried out at low speed and without load till the system
➔ Installation positions ”shaft to the top” and ”shaft horizontally,
is completely bleeded.
suction port at bottom” are not admissible (at standstill the pump
At a longer standstill the case may discharge via operating line. At case is bleeding via suction line).
new start-up a sufficient filling of the housing has to be granted.
➔ note: - max. perm. suction pipe lenght hmax = 800 mm
The min. suction pressure at port S should not fall below 0,8 bar - min. admissible presssure at port S (min. suction pressure)
absolute.
S
Installation position
Shaft horizontally resp. to the bottom. When mounting on top of the S
tank the installation position ”shaft horizontally, suction port to the
bottom” is not admssible!
Installation below tank level

Pumps below min. oil level in the tank (standard)
➔ Fill up axial piston pump before start-up via highest positioned
case drain port
➔ Recommendation: Fill up suction lines
➔ Operate pump at low speed (igniton speed) till pump system is
completely filled up Installation and Commissioning Guidelines,
➔ Minimum immersion depth of the suction line or drain line in Sizes 71...500
the tank: 200 mm (relative to the min. oil level in the tank).
see RE 92050 (A4VSO)
Bosch Rexroth AG © 2003 by Bosch Rexroth AG, Mobile Hydraulics, 89275 Elchingen
Mobile Hydraulics All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored,
Product Segment Axial Piston Units processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or by
Horb Plant any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG. In the
Elchingen Plant
event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is obliged
Glockeraustrasse 2 An den Kelterwiesen 14
to pay compensation.
89275 Elchingen, Germany 72160 Horb, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Telephone +49 (0) 73 08 82-0 Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Facsimile +49 (0) 73 08 72 74 Facsimile +49 (0) 74 51 82 21 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
info.brm-ak@boschrexroth.de from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
www.boschrexroth.com/brm that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
121
Electric Drives Linear Motion and

and Controls Hydraulics Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Service
Variable-Speed Drive with RE 91485/06.11 1/60

Fixed Displacement Unit A10FZO/G
Variable Displacement Unit
A10VZO/G
Data sheet
A10FZO A10VZO
Series 10
Size 6 to 180
For nominal pressure, maximum pressure, see Technical data,
pages 9 to 11
Open and closed circuits A10FZG A10VZG
Contents Features
Function and assembly of variable-speed drives 2 – Suitable for variable-speed operation with
synchronous and asynchronous motors
Type codes for standard program, A10FZO, A10FZG 3
– Suitable for start/stop operation
Type codes for standard program, A10VZO, A10VZG 5
– Suitable for long pressure retention operation
Technical data 8
– Proven A10 rotary group technology
Technical data, A10FZO, A10FZG 12
– Through-drive option
Technical data, A10VZO 16
– High efficiency
DR-Pressure control, (A10VZO) 18
– For use in single-, double- and four-quadrant operation
DRG-Pressure control, remotely operated (A10VZO) 19
LA.D-Pressure/torque controller (A10VZO) 20
LA.D-Pressure/torque controller (A10VZO) 21
EZ-Two-point control, electric (A10VZO, A10VZG) 22
Dimensions, A10FZO, A10FZG 24
Dimensions, A10VZO 28
Through drive dimensions 50
Overview of attachments 53
Combination pumps 54
Connector for solenoids 55
Installation notes 56
General information 60
122
2/60 Bosch Rexroth AG A10FZO/G, A10VZO/G Series 10 | RE 91485/06.11
Function and assembly of variable-speed drives

Rexroth has developed the proven axial piston units of the A10 The proven axial piston units have been developed further for
product family further for use in energy-efficient variable-speed use in speed-controlled drives. These are approved for start/
drive systems and optimized the interplay between the electric stop operation and for changing directions of rotation. At the
motor and the pump. The especially robust units are employed lowest speeds, between 0 and 200 rpm, they provide a con-
for small to medium sizes and satisfy individual requirements stant pressure and are characterized by very high efficiency in
with their numerous combination options. pressure retention operation. Efficiency is achieved optimized
Variable-speed pump drives featuring Rexroth BlueHydraulics by either a fixed or variable displacement, depending on the re-
technology reduce energy consumption in industrial applica- quirements of the cycle. The A10 units can be used as pumps
tions and at the same time avoid medium-level noise emissions. and as motors in single-, double- or four-quadrant operation.
At the same time, the familiar performance is retained or even For the implementation of variable-speed drives, the new axial
improved. The extensive spectrum of different variable-speed piston units offer numerous options for combination. The axial
pump drives from Rexroth includes ready-to-use solutions that piston fixed displacement units A10FZO and A10FZG cover
are finely scalable in both function and power. The energy-effi- the sizes 6 to 63 cm3. The axial piston variable displacement
cient hydraulic drive can be realized with internal gear pumps, units are available in the sizes 10 to 180 cm3 (A10VZO).
fixed or variable axial piston units. Equipped with a suitable Equipped with a torque controller and 2-point control, they are
controller, exactly the required flow and pressure are provided employed for dimensioning smaller servomotors. The numerous
which are needed at the machine. combination options allow a wide range of different customized
system requirements to be satisfied.
A10FZO Axial piston fixed displacement units in open circuit

with changing direction of rotation and unchanging pressure
side (depends on the principal direction of rotation of the
pump).
f
U M Single- or double-quadrant operation
For type codes, see page 3.
For technical data, see pages 12 and 13.
Axial piston fixed displacement unit in closed circuit

A10FZG with changing direction of rotation and two pressure sides.
Four-quadrant operation
f
U M For type codes, see page 4.
Axial piston variable displacement units in open circuit

A10VZO
Regler
Controller with changing direction of rotation and unchanging pressure
side (depends on the principal direction of rotation of the
pump).
f
U M Single- or double-quadrant operation
For type codes, see pages 6 and 7.
A10VZG
Regler
Controller Axial piston variable displacement unit in closed circuit
with changing direction of rotation and two pressure sides.
Four-quadrant operation
f
U M For type codes, see page 5.
Technical data on request.
123
RE 91485/06.11 | A10FZO/G, A10VZO/G Series 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/60
Type codes for standard program, A10FZO

A10F Z O / 10 — V S C
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Axial piston unit

1
01 Swashplate design, fixed, nominal pressure 315 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar A10F
Type of operation
02 Variable-speed drives Z
Type of operation
03 Pump/motor, open circuit1) O
2
Size (NG)
Geometric displacement
04 006 008 010 011 014 016 018 021 023 028 037 045 058 063
(see table of values on page 12)
Series
05 Series 1, Index 0 10
3
Direction of rotation1)
With view on drive shaft clockwise R
06
counter-clockwise L
Seal
07 FKM (fluoro-rubber) V
4
Drive shaft
08 Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a S
Mounting flange
09 ISO 3019-1 – 2-hole C
Service line ports 006 008 010 011 014 016 018 021 023 028 037 045 058 063 5
SAE flange port A and B, opposite sides,
10 ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 02
metric fixing thread
Through drive 006 008 010 011 014 016 018 021 023 028 037 045 058 063
Without through drive N00
Flange ISO 3019-1 Coupling for splined shaft2)
6
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ K01
11
3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ K52
101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – – – – – – – ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ K68
1 in 15T 16/32DP – – – – – – – ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ K04
1) Changing direction of rotation permissible with same pressure side (e.g. pressure drain)
2) 30° pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, tolerance class 5 7
= Available ❍ = On request – = Not available

124
Type codes for standard program, A10FZG

A10F Z G / 10 W — V C N00
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, fixed, nominal pressure 315 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar A10F
Application area
Type of operation
03 Pump/motor in closed circuit G
Size (NG)
04 Geometric displacement (see table of values on page 14) 006 008 010 011 018 028 045 063
Series
06 With view on drive shaft, alternating W
Seal
Drive shaft 006 008 010 011 018 028 045 063
Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a ● ● ● – – ❍ ❍ – S
08
Splined shaft for higher torque, ANSI B92.1a – – – ❍ ❍ – – ❍ R
Mounting flange
09 ISO 3019-1 – 2-hole C
Service line ports 06 08 010 011 018 028 045 063

10 ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 02
Through drive
11 Without through drive N00

125
Type codes for standard program, A10VZG

A10V Z G / 10 W — V S C 20 N00 H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Axial piston unit

1
01 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 280 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar A10V
Application area
Type of operation
03 Pump/motor in closed circuit G
2
Size (NG)
04 Geometric displacement Vg max in cm3 010 018 028 045 063
Control and adjustment device1)

Two-point control, electric U = 12V ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ EZ1
05
U = 24V ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ EZ2 3
Series
07 With view on drive shaft, alternating W
Minimum displacement 010 018 028 045 063 4

Vg min (in cm3) steplessly adjustable from 8 12 16
– – 1
State default setting in clear text to 28 25 38
08
from 26 40
– – – 2
to 45 42
Seal
5
Drive shaft
10 Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a– S
Mounting flange
11 ISO 3019-1 – 2-hole C
6
Service line ports
12 02
Through drive
13 Without through drive N00
7
Connectors for solenoids2)
14 HIRSCHMANN connector – without suppressor diode H
1) Other controllers on request
2) Connectors for other electric components can deviate.

126
Type codes for standard program, A10VZO

A10V Z O / 10 — V S
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Axial piston unit 010 018 028 045 071 100 140 180
Swashplate design, variable A10V
01 Nominal pressure 250 bar, maximum pressure 315 bar ● – – – – – – –
Nominal pressure 280 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Application area
Type of operation
03 Pump/motor, open circuit O
Size (NG)
04 Geometric displacement (see table of values on page 16) 010 018 028 045 071 100 140 180
Control device
Pressure control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DR1)
hydraulic, remotely operated ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DRG1)
Torque controller size 10 size 18 to 180
Beginning of
10 to 35 bar up to 50 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LA5D
control
05 36 to 70 bar 51 to 90 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LA6D
71 to 105 bar 91 to 160 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LA7D
106 to 140 bar 161 to 240 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LA8D
141 to 230 bar more than 240 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LA9D
Two-point control, electric U = 12V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EZ32)
U = 24V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EZ42)
Series
Direction of rotation3)
07
counter-clockwise L
Seal
Drive shaft
09 Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a S
1) For DR and DRG in conjunction with changing direction of rotation, Please contact us
2) If a mechanical flow limitation is required, please refer to item 11, port plate 12.
3) Changing direction of rotation permissible with unchanging pressure side (e.g. pressure drain)

127
Type codes for standard program, A10VZO

A10V Z O / 10 — V S
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Mounting flange 010 018 028 045 071 100 140 180 1
ISO 3019-1 – 2-hole ● ● ● – – – – – C
10
ISO 3019-1 – 4-hole – – – ● ● ● ● ● D
Service line ports 010 018 028 045 071 100 140 180
SAE flange port, top and bottom, opposite sides,
– – – ● ● ● ● ● 22
metric fixing thread, with universal through drive
SAE flange port, top and bottom, opposite sides, metric fixing thread, 2
11 size 45 to 140 without through drive – ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ 121)
DIN metric threaded ports, rear, not for through drive ● – – – – – – – 14

DIN threaded ports, opposite sides ● – – – – – – – 7
Through drive 010 018 028 045 071 100 140 180
With through-drive shaft, without coupling, without intermediate flange, 3
– – – ● ● ● ● ● U002)
sealed with functionally reliable cover; only port plate 223)
Without through drive; only port plate 123) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N00
Flange ISO 3019-1 Coupling for splined shaft4)
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP ● ● ● – – – – – K01
12 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● – – – – – K52
101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – – ● – – – – – K68 4
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP – – – ● ● ● ● ● U01
3/4 in 11T 16/32DP – – – ● ● ● ● ● U52
101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – – – ● ● ● ● ● U68
1 in 15T 16/32DP – – – ● ● ● ● ● U04
Connectors for solenoids5)

5
13 HIRSCHMANN connector – without suppressor diode H
1) A mechanical flow limitation mechanism is only fitted as standard on the version 12 N00 with EZ control, sizes 18 to 140
Vg max: setting range Vg max up to 50% Vg max stepless
Vg min: setting range Vg min up to 50% Vg max stepless
State settings values in clear text.
6
Vg max and Vg min limitations for through drives with port plates 12K.. and 22U.. can only be made with permanently defined
values. Again here, state in clear text.
2) See RE 95581 Universal through drive
3) When ordering sizes 45 to 180 with port plate 22U, please order the corresponding through drive without "K"
Example: A10VO180DRS/32R-VSD22U01
When ordering sizes 18 to 28 with port plate 12, please order the corresponding through drive with "K"
Example: A10VO18DRS/32R-VSD12K01
4) Coupling for splined shaft as per ANSI B92.1a (splined shaft assignment as per SAE J744) 7
5) Connectors for other electric components may differ.

128
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid Notes on the selection of the hydraulic fluid
Prior to project design, please see our data sheets RE 90220 In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally acceptable operating temperature in the reservoir (open circuit) in relation
hydraulic fluids) for detailed information on hydraulic fluid and to the ambient temperature: in an open circuit, the reservoir
operating conditions. temperature; in a closed circuit, the circuit temperature.
When using environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that the viscosity in
the limitations regarding technical data and seals must be the operating temperature range is within the optimum range
observed. Please contact us. When ordering, indicate the (Qopt), see shaded area of the selection diagram. We recom-
hydraulic fluid that is to be used. mended that the higher viscosity class be selected in each
case.
Operating viscosity range
Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C, an operating tem-
We recommend you to choose the operating viscosity
perature of 60 °C is set in the circuit. In the optimum operating
(at operating temperature) in the optimum range for efficiency
viscosity range (Qopt, shaded area), this corresponds to the
and useful life of
viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68. VG 68 should be selected.
Qopt = opt. operating viscosity 16 ... 36 mm2/s
Note
taking into account the reservoir temperature (open circuit) or The case drain temperature, which is influenced by pressure
circuit temperature (closed circuit). and speed, is always higher than the reservoir temperature.
Limits of viscosity range However, at no point in the component may the temperature
exceed 90 °C. The temperature difference specified on the left
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: is to be taken into account when determining the viscosity in
Qmin = 10 mm2/s the bearing.
for short periods (t d 1 min) If the above conditions cannot be met due to extreme operat-
at a max. perm. case drain temperature ing parameters, please contact us.
of 90 °C.
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid
Note that the maximum case drain temperature of 90 °C may The finer the filtration, the better the hydraulic fluid cleanliness
not be exceeded even locally (e.g. in the bearing area). The class, and the longer the service life of the axial piston unit.
temperature in the bearing area is approx. 5 K higher than the
average case drain temperature. In order to guarantee the functional reliability of the axial piston
unit, it is necessary to carry out a gravimetric evaluation of the
Qmax = 1600 mm2/s hydraulic fluid to determine the particle contamination and the
for short periods (t d 1 min) cleanliness class according to ISO 4406. The minimum cleanli-
on cold start ness class to be observed is 20/18/15.
(p d 30 bar, n d 1000 rpm, tmin -25 °C) At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum
Depending on the installation situation, special measures are 115 °C), a cleanliness class of at least 19/17/14 according to
necessary at temperatures between -40 °C and -25 °C. ISO 4406 is necessary.
Please contact us. If the above classes cannot be maintained, please contact us.
For detailed information about operation with low temperatures,
see RE 90300-03-B.
Selection diagram
2500-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
200
10
2
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
100
60
40 36
Qopt.
20
16
10
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90°
Temperature t in °C
tmin = -40 °C tmax = +90 °C
Hydraulic fluid temperature range

129
Technical data
Operating pressure range, A10FZO Operating pressure range, A10FZG
Pressure at service line port B Pressure at service line port A or B
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 315 bar absolute Nominal pressure pnom __________________ 315 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute
1
Individual operating period __________________________ 2.0 s Individual operating period __________________________ 2.0 s
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 10 bar Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 10 bar
Minimum pressure (low-pressure side) ___ 0.8 bar absolute
Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16,000 bar/s Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16,000 bar/s
2
pnom pnom
Pressure p
Pressure p
't 't
'p 'p
Time t Time t
Pressure at suction port A (inlet)

4
Minimum pressure pS min __________________ 0.8 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pS max ____________________ 5 bar absolute
Case drain pressure Case drain pressure

Maximum permissible case drain pressure Maximum permissible case drain pressure
(at port L, L1): (at port L, L1): 5
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than inlet pressure at port S, Maximum 0.5 bar higher than inlet pressure at port A or B,
but not higher than 2 bar absolute. but not higher than 2 bar absolute.
pL max abs _________________________________________2 bar pL max abs _________________________________________2 bar
Flow direction Flow direction

6
Direction of rotation, with view on drive shaft Direction of rotation, with view on drive shaft
Type of operation clockwise counter-clockwise Type of operation clockwise counter-clockwise
Pump mode A to B B to A Pump mode A to B B to A
Motor mode A to B B to A Motor mode A to B B to A
For pressure definitions, see page 11
8
130
Technical data
Operating pressure range, A10VZO size 10 Operating pressure range, A10VZO,
size 18 to 180
Pressure at service line port B Pressure at service line port B
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 250 bar absolute Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 280 bar absolute
For 10% actuated time ____________________________ 315 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pmax ________________ 315 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute
Individual operating period __________________________ 2.0 s Individual operating period __________________________ 2.5 s
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 10 bar Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 10 bar
Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16,000 bar/s Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16,000 bar/s
pnom pnom
Pressure p
Pressure p
't 't
'p 'p
Time t Time t
Pressure at suction port S (inlet) Pressure at suction port S (inlet)

Minimum pressure pabs min _________________ 0.8 bar absolute Minimum pressure pabs min _________________ 0.8 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pabs max ___________________ 5 bar absolute Maximum suction pressure pabs max ___________ 10 bar absolute
Case drain pressure Case drain pressure

Maximum permissible case drain pressure Maximum permissible case drain pressure
(at port L, L1): (at port L, L1):
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than inlet pressure at port S, Maximum 0.5 bar higher than inlet pressure at port S,
but not higher than 2 bar absolute. but not higher than 2 bar absolute.
pL max abs _________________________________________2 bar pL max abs _________________________________________2 bar
Flow direction Flow direction

Direction of rotation, with view on drive shaft Direction of rotation, with view on drive shaft
Type of operation clockwise counter-clockwise Type of operation clockwise counter-clockwise
Pump S to B S to B1) Pump S to B S to B1)
Pressure drain B to S1) B to S Pressure drain B to S1) B to S
1) Note: Comply with installation drawings for counter-clock-
wise rotation
For pressure definitions, see page 11

131
Technical data
Definition
Nominal pressure pnom t2
The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design Individual operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
pressure.
Nominal pressure pnom 1
The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operating
pressure within the individual operating period. The sum of the
individual operating periods must not exceed the total operat-
ing period.
Minimum pressure on high-pressure side (A or B) that is re- 2
quired to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Minimum pressure (inlet) open circuit
Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) that is required to Time t
prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum pressure
depends on the speed and displacement of the axial piston
unit.
Minimum pressure (low-pressure side) closed circuit 3
Minimum pressure on the low-pressure side (A or B) that is
required to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Rate of pressure change RA
Maximum permissible rate of pressure build-up and pressure
reduction with a pressure change over the entire pressure
range.
4
8
132
Technical data, A10FZO

Table of values (theoretical values, without efficiency levels and tolerances; values rounded)
Size NG 6 8 10
Displacement, geometric 6 8.1 10.6
Vg cm3
(per revolution)
Speed, maximum at Vg
Suction speed, pump mode1) n nom rpm 3600 3600 3600
Max. speed, pressure drain mode2) n nom rpm 3600 3600 3600
Flow
at n nom qvol max l/min 21.6 28.8 38.2
at nE = 1500 rpm qvE max l/min 9 12 15.9
Power, pump mode
at n nom, 'p = 315 bar Pmax kW 11.3 15.3 20
at nE = 1500 rpm Pmax kW 4.7 6.4 8.3
Torque
at Vg and 'p = 315 bar Tmax Nm 30 40.5 53
'p = 100 bar T Nm 9.5 12.7 16.8
Torsional stiffness Drive shaft S c Nm/rad 8100 8100 8100
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kgm2 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006
Angular acceleration3) D rad/s2 14000 14000 14000
Filling capacity V L 0.14 0.14 0.14
Mass (without filling capacity) approx. m kg 6.4 6.4 6.4
1) The values are applicable:

- for absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at suction port S
- for the optimum viscosity range of Qopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s
- for mineral-based operating materials with a specific mass of 0.88 kg/l.
2) Higher values on request
3) Values are only permissible if a pressure of 1 bar absolute is maintained at the suction port, and only for single pumps.
Multiple-pump configurations on request.
Important
Exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a reduction in operational
service life or the total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend checking the loading through tests or calculation /
simulation and comparison with the permissible data.
Determination of size
Flow V g • n • KV Displacement per
Vg =
(absorbed qv = [l/min] revolution in cm3
volume flow) 1000 • (KV)
Torque, 1.59 • Vg • 'p • (Kmh) n = Speed in rpm
pump mode T = [Nm]
KV = Volumetric efficiency
(pressure drain mode) 100 • Kmh
Power, 2S • T • n qV • 'p • (Kt) Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
pump mode P = = [kW]
(pressure drain mode) 60000 600 • Kt
Drive speed qV • 1000 • (KV)

n = [rpm]
(output speed) Vg • KV
133
Technical data, A10FZO

Permissible radial and axial loading on drive shaft
Size 06 to 10
Fq
Radial force,
maximum
at a/2 Fq max N 250 1
a/2 a/2
X
Axial force,
maximum
r Fax Fax max N 400
Permissible input and through-drive torques

Size NG 6 to 10 3
Torque
Tmax Nm See table of values on page 12
at Vg and 'p = 315 bar1)
Input torque at drive shaft, maximum2)
TE max Nm 126
S
Ø drive shaft in 3/4
Through-drive torque at drive shaft, maximum
4
S TD max Nm 42
1) Without considering efficiency

2) For drive shafts free of radial load
Distribution of torque
5
T1 T2
TE
1.Pump
Pumpe
1 2. Pumpe
Pump 2
6
TD
8
134
Technical data, A10FZG

Size NG 6 8 10
Displacement, geometric
Vg cm3 6 8.1 10.6
(per revolution)
Speed, maximum at Vg
Suction speed, pump mode1) n nom rpm 3000 3000 3000
Maximum speed, motor mode2) n nom rpm 3000 3000 3000
Flow, pump mode
at n nom qvol max l/min 18 24.3 32
Displacement, motor mode
at n nom qvol max l/min 18 24.3 32
Power, pump mode
at n nom, 'p = 315 bar Pmax kW 9.4 12.8 16.7
at nE = 1500 rpm Pmax kW 4.7 6.4 8.3
Power, motor mode
at n nom, 'p = 315 bar Pmax kW 9.4 12.8 16.7
at nE = 1500 rpm Pmax kW 4.7 6.4 8.3
Torque
at Vg and 'p = 315 bar Tmax Nm 30.1 40.5 53.1
'p = 100 bar T Nm 9.5 12.7 16.8
Torsional stiffness S c Nm/rad 9370 9370 9370
of drive shaft R c Nm/rad – – –
Angular acceleration3) D rad/s2 14000 14000 14000
Filling capacity V L 0.14 0.14 0.14
Mass (without filling capacity) approx. m kg 6.4 6.4 6.4

- for absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at ports A or B
2) Higher values on request (could possibly cause an increase in low pressure)
3) Values are only permissible if a pressure of 1 bar absolute is maintained at the suction port,
and only for single pumps. Multiple-pump configurations on request.
Note
135
Technical data, A10FZG

Determining the size
Absorbed Vg • n • (KV) Displacement per

volume flow qv = [l/min] Vg =
revolution in cm3
(flow) 1000 • KV
'p = Differential pressure in bar 1
Torque, 1.59 • Vg • 'p • Kmh
motor mode T = [Nm] n = Speed in rpm
(pump mode) 100 • (Kmh) KV = Volumetric efficiency
Power, 2S • T • n qV • 'p • Kt Kmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
motor mode P = = [kW] Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
(pump mode) 60000 600 • (Kt)
Output speed qV • 1000 • KV 2

n = [rpm]
(drive speed) Vg • (KV)

Size 06 08 10 3
Radial force, Fq
maximum
at a/2 Fq max N 250 250 250
a/2 a/2
X
Axial force,
maximum 4
r Fax Fax max N 400 400 400
8
136
Technical data, A10VZO

Size NG 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180
Displacement, geometric 10.5 18 28 45 71.1 100 140 180
Vg max cm3
(per revolution)
Speed, maximum at Vg max
Suction speed, pump mode1) n nom rpm 3600 3300 3000 3000 2550 2300 2200 1800
Maximum speed,
n nom rpm 3600 3300 3000 3000 On request
pressure drain mode2)
Flow
at n nom qvo max l/min 38 59 84 135 181 230 308 324
at nE = 1500 rpm qvE max l/min 15 27 42 68 106.6 150 210 270
Power, pump mode
250 bar Pmax kW 16 – – – – – – –
at n nom and 'p =
280 bar Pmax kW – 27.7 39 63 84.5 107 143 151
at nE = 1500 rpm Pmax kW 7.5 12.5 20 31 50 70 98 125
Torque
250 bar Tmax Nm 42 – – – – – – –
at Vg max and 'p =
280 bar Tmax Nm – 80 125 200 317 445 623 801
'p = 100 bar T Nm 17 29 45 72 113 159 223 286
Torsional stiffness Drive shaft S c Nm/rad 8100 10000 21500 35000 71884 121142 169537 171107
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kg/m2 0.0006 0.00093 0.0017 0.0033 0.0087 0.0185 0.0276 0.033
Angular acceleration3) D rad/s2 14000 12600 11200 9500 7500 6200 5000 4000
Filling capacity V L 0.2 0.25 0.3 1.0 1.6 2.2 3.0 2.7
Mass (without filling) approx. m kg 8 12 15 30 47 69 73 78

- for absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at the suction port S
2) Higher values on request.
3) Values are only permissible if a pressure of 1 bar absolute is maintained at the suction port,
and only for single pumps. Multiple-pump configurations on request.
Note
Flow Vg • n • K V Displacement per

(absorbed qv = [l/min] Vg =
revolution in cm3
volume flow) 1000 • (KV)
Torque, 1.59 • Vg • 'p • (Kmh) n = Speed in rpm
pump mode T = [Nm]
(pressure drain mode) 100 • Kmh KV = Volumetric efficiency
Power, 2S • T • n qV • 'p • (Kt)
pump mode P = = [kW] Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
(pressure drain mode) 60000 600 • Kt
Drive speed qV • 1000 • (KV)

n = [rpm]
(output speed) Vg • KV
137
Technical data, A10VZO

Size 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180
Fq
Radial force,
maximum
at a/2 Fq max N 250 250 1200 1500 1900 2300 2800 2300 1
a/2 a/2
X
Axial force,
maximum
r Fax Fax N 400 400 1000 1500 2400 4000 4800 800

Size NG 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180
Torque 3
Tmax Nm 50 90 140 225 356 500 701 901
at Vg max and 'p = 280 bar1)
TE max Nm 126 124 198 319 626 1104 1620 1620
ANSI B92.1a S
Ø drive shaft in 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 1 3/4
Through-drive torque at drive shaft, maximum
S TD max Nm 42 108 160 319 492 778 1266 1266 4

Distribution of torque
5
T1 T2
TE
1.Pump
Pumpe
1 2. Pumpe
Pump 2
6
TD
8
138
DR-Pressure control, A10VZO

The pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the pump
Schematic, A10VZO; size 18 to 180
output within the pump control range. The variable pump
port plate 22
only supplies as much hydraulic fluid as is required by the
consumers. If the operating pressure exceeds the pressure
setpoint set at the integrated pressure valve, the pump will
adjust towards a smaller displacement. The pressure can be
set steplessly at the control valve. L MB B
Please contact us with respect to applications with pressure
control and changing direction of rotation.
Static characteristic
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
Hysteresis and pressure rise 'pmax
290
Operating pressure pB [bar]
Setting range
L1 S
25 Port for
B Service line
Displacement/ Suction line
S
absorbed volume flow qv [cm3]
L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged)
MB Measuring operating pressure (plugged)
Schematic, A10VZO; size 10
Control data
L L1 Hysteresis and repeatability 'p _________________ max. 3 bar

B
Pressure rise, max.
NG 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180

'p bar 6 6 6 6 8 10 12 14
Control fluid consumption, ___________ max. approx. 4.5 l/min
L2 S
Ports for
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain (L1, L2 plugged)
139
DRG-Pressure control, remotely operated

The DRG control valve overrides the function of the Static characteristic
DR pressure control, see page 18.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
A pressure-relief valve can be externally connected to

port X as a remote control. This pressure-relief valve is
included in the delivery contents of the DRG control. 290
1

The differential pressure at the control valve is set as standard
Setting range
to 20 bar. The pilot oil flow at port X is approx. 1.5 l/min.
If another setting is required (range 10 to 22 bar), please
state in clear text.
As a separate pressure-relief valve we recommend:
DBDH 6 (hydraulic) as per RE 25402 or 2
DBETR-SO 381 with orifice Ø 0.8 mm in P (electric) to 20
RE 29166.
The maximum line length must not exceed 2 m. Displacement/
Please contact us with respect to applications with remotely absorption volume qv [cm3]
operated pressure control and changing direction of rotation.
Schematic, A10VZO; size 18 to 180 3
port plate 22
Schematic, A10VZO; size 10
not in delivery contents
not in delivery contents
X
X
L B
L L1 B
5
6
L1 S
L2 S
Port for
Port for B Service line
B Service line S Suction line
S Suction line L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged) 7
L, L1,2 Case drain (L1, L2 plugged) X Pilot pressure (plugged)
X Pilot pressure (plugged) MB Measuring operating pressure (plugged)
Control data
Hysteresis and repeatability 'p _________________ max. 3 bar
8
Pressure rise, max.
NG 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180

'p bar 6 6 6 6 8 10 12 14
Control fluid consumption____________ max. approx. 4.5 l/min
140
LA.D-Pressure/torque controller (A10VZO)

Pressure control equipment as DR, see page 18. The torque characteristics are set at the plant. Please state in
clear text, e.g. T = 50 Nm.
In order to achieve a constant drive torque with varying operat-
ing pressure, the swivel angle and with it the output flow from Control data
the axial piston pump is varied so that the product of flow and
For data and notes about the DR pressure control, see page 18.
pressure remains constant.
For data and notes about the remotely operated DRG pressure
control, see page 19.
Schematic, A10VZO LAxD with pressure cut-off,

size 18 to 180
L B
L1 S
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1, Case drain (L1, L2 plugged)
141
LA.D-Pressure/torque controller, characteristic curve (A10VZO)

Torque characteristic fields in Nm
Size 18 Size 28
280 280
45 75 70 117
Operating pressure p [bar]
250 LA9 LA9

250
52
1
200 34 LA8 200 LA8
23 36
150 LA7 150 LA7
12 19
100 LA6 100 LA6
50 LA5 50 LA5
0 0
0 18 0 28 2
Displacement/ Displacement/
absorbed volume flow Vg [cm3] absorbed volume flow Vg [cm3]
Size 45 Size 140
280 280
225 LA9 LA9
250 701 3

250
202 629
134 LA8 418 LA8
200 200
76 237
150 LA7 150 LA7
42 132
100 LA6 100 LA6
50 LA5 LA5
50
0 0 4
0 45 0 140
Size 71 Size 180
280 280 5
355 LA9 901 LA9
250 250
319 810
213 LA8 540 LA8
200 200
121 302
150 LA7 150 LA7
67 167
100 LA6 100 LA6
50 LA5 50 LA5
6
0 0
0 71 0 180
Size 100
7
280
500 LA9
250
449
299 LA8
200
169
150 LA7
94
100 LA6
LA5 8
50
0
0 100
Displacement/
absorbed volume flow Vg [cm3]
142
EZ-Two-point control, electric (A10VZO, A10VZG)

The variable displacement unit is set to minimum swivel angle
by operating the switching solenoids. This supplies control
pressure to the stroke piston via the switching valve.
The control pressure is taken internally from the respective
high-pressure side, whereby a minimum operating pressure
differential of 'pA,B t 20 bar is required.
The axial piston unit can only be activated between
Vg max and Vg min.
Please state Vg min default setting in clear text when ordering.
Setting range via Q min stop
Activated
(12V/24V)
De-ener-
gized Vg min [cm3] Vg max
De-energized ^
= Vg max
Current energized ^
=V g min
Technical data, sole- EZ1/3 EZ2/4

noid
Voltage 12V (±15%) 24V (±15%)
Position Vg max De-energized De-energized
Position Vg min Current Current
energized energized
Rated current at 20 °C 1.5 A 0.8 A
Actuated time 100% 100%
Type of protection see connector design, page 55
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +60 °C.
If these temperatures cannot be achieved, please contact us.
For further information, please refer to page 55

143
EZ-Two-point control, electric (A10VZO, A10VZG)

Schematic, A10VZG EZ1/2,
L L1 A
3
B
Port for
A, B Service line
4
Schematic, A10VZO EZ3/4; size 18 to 140 Schematic, A10VZO EZ3/4; size 45 to 180
port plate 12 port plate 22
L B L B
L1 S L1 S
Port for Port for

8
B Service line B Service line
S Suction line S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged) L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged)
144
Before finalizing your design, request a certified

Dimensions, A10FZO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 06 to 10
Port plate 02: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
182.6
162.6
127.6
L
Ø 11
45
Ø 25
57.2
100
X
A
27.8 106.4
132.5
33 View X
Flange Y
12.6 B 139
ISO 3019-1
Ø 82.55 -0.054
0
101.6
6.4 View Y
A
Ø 25
57.2
B
27.8
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size 1) Maximum State
pressure
[bar] 2)
A, B Suction and Service line5) SAE J5183) 1 in 350 O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 17 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O
1) Please observe the general information on page 60 for the maximum tightening torques.
2) Short-term pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and
fittings.
3) Only dimensions complying with SAE J518. A metric fixing thread is a deviation from standard.
4) The countersink may be deeper that specified in the standard.
5) See table on side 9
O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery)
145

Dimensions, A10FZO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 3/4 in
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
1
30
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
14
5
22
38
3
1) ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, tolerance class 5
2) Thread according to ASME B1.1
8
146

Dimensions, A10FZG installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 06 to 10
Port plate 02: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
182.6
162.6
127.6
L
Ø 11
45
Ø 25
57.2
100
X
A
27.8 106.4
132.5
33 View X
Flange Y
12.6 B 139
ISO 3019-1
Ø 82.55 -0.054
0
101.6
6.4 View Y
A
Ø 25
57.2
B
27.8
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
A, B Service line SAE J5183) 1 in 350 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O
fittings.
147

Dimensions, A10FZG installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Drive shaft
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
1
30
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
14
5
22
38
3
8
148

Dimensions, A10VZO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 10
DR pressure control, hydraulic, port plate 14 – DIN threaded ports at rear, clockwise rotation
73 max. 110
11 L
56
Flange 6.4
103
ISO 3019-1
9
-0.054
Ø 11
45°
0
X
Ø 82.55
53.5
56
L1 106.4
24 134
148
180
View X View X
S B B S
28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6

51 51 51 51
For valve mounting and service line ports with clockwise rotation, For valve mounting and service line ports with counter-clockwise
please refer to notes on flow direction on page 10 rotation, please refer to notes on flow direction on page 10
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
B Service line DIN 3852-1 27 x 2; 16 deep 315 O
S Suction line DIN 3852-1 27 x 2; 16 deep 5 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 11968 4) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 11968 4) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 X 3)
fittings.
3) Depending on the installation position, L or L1 must be connected (see installation notes on page 56, 57)
X = Plugged in normal operation
149

Size 10
DR pressure control, hydraulic, port plate 07 – DIN threaded ports on opposite side, clockwise rotation
X 1
73
Flange 6.4 11
L
127
ISO 3019-1 L
-0.054
9
11
45°
56 2
0
X Y
Ø 82.55
53.5
67
S
L1
24
132 106.4 3
176 134
View X View X
max. 110 max. 110
X X
4
M10 x 1.5
16 tief M10 x 1.5
16 tief
Partial view Y
50 50 50 50
106.5 B 106.5
6
For valve mounting and service line ports with clockwise rotation, For valve mounting and service line ports with counter-clockwise
please refer to notes on flow direction on page 10 rotation, please refer to notes on flow direction on page 10
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2) 7
B Service line DIN 3852-1 27 x 2; 16 deep 315 O
S Suction DIN 3852-1 27 x 2; 16 deep 5 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 11968 4) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 11968 4) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 X 3)
2) Short-term pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and 8
fittings.
150

DRG DRG
Remotely operated pressure control, port plate 14 Remotely operated pressure control, port plate 7
max. 110 max. 110

146 40
113 40
X X
X
X
L
127
102
111
95
L1 180
For valve mounting with For valve mounting with

counter-clockwise rotation, counter-clockwise rotation,
see page 28 see page 29
Drive shaft
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
30
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
14
5
22
38
151

Size 18
DR pressure control, hydraulic, port plate 12: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
1
66
6.3 83
max.110
Flange L
11
ISO 3019-1
X
45° 45°
-0.054
2
0
X
Ø82.55
64
66
3
11.5 L1 Ø106.4
43 152
145 125.5
195.4
View X
Valve mounting for
Y
counter-clockwise
Partial view Y Detail Z rotation 4
B
X
22.2
63
B
S
47.6
Ø25
52.4
5
Ø20
63
26.2
S
Z
6
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
B Service line, SAE J5185) 3/4 in 350 O 7
S Suction line, SAE J5185) 1 in 10 O
fixing thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 11926 4) 9/16-18 UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 11926 4) 9/16-18 UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 X 3)
X Pilot pressure ISO 11926 4) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 11.5 deep 350 O 8
fittings.
152

DRG EZx
Pressure control, remotely operated Two-point control, electric
129
max. 110
L X X
108
X
40
L1 109
125.5 113
Valve mounting for Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise rotation counter-clockwise rotation
LAxD
Torque controller
188
max. 110
X
X
40
126
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise rotation
Drive shaft
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
30
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
14
5
21
38
153

Size 28
DR pressure control, hydraulic, port plate 12: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
45°
1
9.5 90
6.3
Ø 74
14
Flange
ISO 3019-1
max. 110
L
X
2
Ø101.6 -0.054
0
75
3
14 L1
146
40 164
164 83.5 135.9
206 View X
Y Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise 4
rotation
Partial view Y Detail Z
22.2 B
30.2
X
Ø20
80
58.7
Ø32
47.6
80
B
S
6
Z
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
B Service line, SAE J5185) 3/4 in 350 O 7
S Suction line, SAE J5185) 1 1/4 in 10 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 11926 4) 3/4-16 UNF-2B; 11 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 11926 4) 3/4-16 UNF-2B; 11 deep 2 X 3)
X Pilot pressure ISO 11926 4) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 11.5 deep 350 O 8
fittings.
154

DRG EZx
Pressure control, remotely operated Two-point control, electric
139
X L
max. 110.5
L
108
L
40
75
L1 119.4 L1 123
136
counter-clockwise counter-clockwise
rotation rotation
LAxD
Torque controller
198
X
max. 110
L
40
L1 119.4
135.86
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
rotation
Drive shaft
13T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
33.1
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
16
R1.6
25.1
41
155

Size 45
DRG pressure control, remotely operated, port plate 12/22: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
Port plate 12
1
9 164
6.3 95.3 X 8 9.5
ISO 3019-1 X
Ø14.3
L
4-hole flange
max. 110
57.
5°
90
X
Ø127 -0.054
113.2
10
40
2
146
0
78.5
90
View X L1
15.5 113.2
45 146
26.2 B
Ø25
184 93.5 129

224 3
146
33
52.4
Valve mounting for

W counter-clockwise
MB rotation
12
30 Port plate 22U

9 202
6.3 45
ISO 3019-1 L1 X 4
Ø14.3
L1
4-hole flange
max. 110
X
91
78.5
Ø127 -0.054
61
114.5
10
0
146
Z
57
.5°
91
5
L
15.5 .5
95 89
View W
184 114.5
S 242 24 146
93.5 146
69.9
40
W View Z 6
26.2 A
35.7
Ø25
X
40
33
52.4
82
7
12
M12
B
MB 124.5
124
30
187 B
8
Please refer to notes on flow direction on page 10

For dimensions of ports, please refer to page 36
156

Size 45
Ports

pressure
[bar] 2)
B Service line, SAE J5185) 1 in 350 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 7/8-14 UNF-2B; 13 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 7/8-14 UNF-2B; 13 deep 2 X 3)
X Pilot pressure ISO 119264) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 11.5 deep 350 O
MB Measuring, pressure B DIN 38524) G 1/4 in; 12 deep 350 X
fittings.
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 in
15T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
38
1/4-20UNC-2B2)3)
16
5
30
45.9
157

DR DR
Hydraulic pressure control, port plate 12 Hydraulic pressure control, port plate 22
Valve mounting for

counter-clockwise
rotation 1
max. 110
max. 110
X
X
2
146 146
Valve mounting for

counter-clockwise
rotation
3
LAxD LAxD
Torque controller, port plate 12 Torque controller, port plate 22
Valve mounting for

counter-clockwise
rotation
4
max. 110
114
X
5
141
146
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
rotation
EZx EZx 6
Two-point control, electric, port plate 12 Two-point control, electric, port plate 22
7
108
108
128
133 8
rotation rotation
158

Size 71
Port plate 12
12.7 183
6 115 X
ISO 3019-1
L X Ø14.3 57.
4-hole flange 5°
max. 110
104
13
X
Ø127 -0.063
69
.5
40
114.5
0
146
3
10
90.5
104
View X
52.4 114.5
Ø25 18.2 L1 146
53 107.5 143
26.2
217 160
257
Valve mounting for
38
W
12
MB B
30
Port plate 22U
12.7 193 11.5

ISO 3019-1 6 115
L X Ø14.3 57.
4-hole flange 5°
max. 110
104
13
X
Ø127 -0.063
77
.5
40
114.5
0
146
Z 3
10
90.5
104
18.2 L1 114.5
View W 53 146
217 105 137
S 277 24 154
77.8
50
W
View Z
26.2
42.9
X
25
52.4
104
37
M12
B
MB 158.4
30
217

159

Size 71
Ports
pressure 1
[bar] 2)
Fixing thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5 ; 17 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 7/8-14 UNF-2B; 12 deep 2 O 3) 2
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 7/8-14 UNF-2B; 12 deep 2 X 3)
fittings.
3
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in 6
14T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744)
5/16-18UNC-2B 2)3)
47.5
19
6
7
39.5
8
55.4
160

DR DR
max. 110
max. 110
X
EP
2434482
X
160 154
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise Valve mounting for
rotation counter-clockwise
rotation
LAxD LAxD
X X
126.5
126.5
160 154
Valve mounting for
Valve mounting for counter-clockwise
rotation
EZx EZx
108
108
147 141
rotation rotation
161

Size 100
1
Port plate 12
12.7 234
ISO 3019-1 X .5
4-hole flange
5.7 149.5 114
L X
max. 110
57.
5°
100
-0.063
20.6
15
X
86
2
161.6
200
0
40
Ø152.4
View X
100
103
99
31.8
Ø32
161.6
20 200
L1
66.7
80 119 148
260
46
165 3
314
B
MB
30 W Valve mounting for
Port plate 22U

12.7 249 4
ISO 3019-1 5.7 149.5 .5
X 114
20.6
4-hole flange L
max. 110
57.
5°
100
-0.063
86
15
X
161.6
200
0
40
Z
Ø152.4
100
103
5
99
20 161.6
80 L1 200
275 119 148
360 22 165
View W
W
6
View Z
88.9
Ø60
S 31.8
50.8
32
172.4
116.3
66.7
7
46
90
12
B M10
MB 116.3
172.4
30
275
8

162

Size 100
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
B Service line, SAE J5185) 1 1/4 in 350 O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14 x 2 ; 19 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 1 1/16-12 UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 1 1/16-12 UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 X 3)
MB Measuring pressure in B DIN 38524) G 1/4 in; 12 deep 350 X
fittings.
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/2 in
17T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744)
7/16-14UNC-2B2)3)
54
28
9.5
43.5
61.9
163

DR DR
107.2
max. 110
2
165 165
Valve mounting for
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
counter-clockwise
rotation
rotation
3
LAxD LAxD
X
4
X
133
133
165 165 5

rotation rotation
EZx EZx 6
7
108
108
152
152
8
rotation rotation
164

Size 140
Port plate 12
12.7 249 7.5

ISO 3019-1 6.4 173 X 12
4-hole flange L X Ø20.6
57.
max. 99
5
110
Ø152.4 -0.063
29
15
X
0
161.6
200
110
104
108
View X 161.6
24 L1 200
78 131 163
31.8 275 180
317
Ø32
337.5
66.7
Valve mounting for

W counter-clockwise rotation
B
Port plate 22U
12.7 259 12
ISO 3019-1 6.4 173
4-hole flange L X Ø20.6
max. 110
57.
5
110
Ø152.4 -0.063
X
15
71
40
0
161.6
200
Z
110
24 L1
161.6 104
200
78 131 163
275 180
View W 355 22
S
W
88.9
Ø60
31.8 View Z
50.8
32
172.4
116.3
66.7
12
50
90
B 116.3 M10
MB 172.4
290

165

Size 140
Ports
pressure 1
[bar] 2)
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14 x 2 ; 19 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 1 1/16-12 UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 O 3) 2
X Pilot pressure ISO 119264) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 deep 350 O
fittings.
3
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in 6
13T 8/16DP1) (SAE J744)
67
1/2-13UNC-2B2)3)
32
10
7
53
8
75
166

DR DR
max. 110
max. 99
X
EP
2434482
X
180
180
rotation rotation
LAxD LAxD
X
139.5
139.5
163 180
180
Valve mounting for
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
counter-clockwise
rotation
rotation
EZx EZx
108
97
166 167

rotation rotation
167

Size 180
DRG pressure control, remotely operated, port plate 22: SAE flange port on opposite side, clockwise rotation
12.7 266.5
ISO 3019-1 6.4 173
4-hole flange L X 20.6 57.
5°
max. 118
2
Ø152.4 -0.063
110
15
71
0
42
161.6
200
Z
104
110
161.6
24.2 L1 200
78 131 171 3
285 188
365 22
Valve mounting for
W
View W
4
S
88.9
63
50.8
View Z 5
31.8
32
172.4
116.3
66.7
50
90 6
B
116.3 M10
MB
172.4
300
8
168

Size 180
Ports
pressure
[bar] 2)
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119264) 1 5/16-12 UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 O 3)
X Pilot pressure ISO 119264) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 deep 350 O
fittings.
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in
13T 8/16DP1) (SAE J744)
67
1/2-13UNC-2B2)3)
32
10
53
75
169

DR DR
268 1
X MB
122
on request
2
188
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
rotation
3
LAxD LAxD
X 4
140
on request
188 5
Valve mounting for

counter-clockwise
rotation
EZx EZx 6
7
108
on request
167
8
Valve mounting for
counter-clockwise
rotation
170
Before finalizing your design, please request approved

Through drive dimensions installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
K01 Flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 5/8in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A))
A10FZO
A-B
A4 NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A52)
A3 06 - 10 M10x1.5;
162.6 20 35.5 41.5
A2 15 deep
106.5 10
11 - 18 on request
21 - 28
37 - 45
+ 0.05
+ 0.02
A B 58 - 63
Ø82.55
A10VZO
A5
NG A1 A2 A3 A4
10 on request
(to mounting flange) A1
U01 Flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 5/8in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A))
A10VZO
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) 22
A-B 15 NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
A 13
M12x25 45 264 31.8 19.3 M10x1.5;
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) 16 deep
Ø1
06 71 299 31.8 19.3 M10x1.5;
.5 16 deep
45°
+0.05
Ø82.55 +0.02
100 360 31.8 Inquiry M10x1.5;

16 deep
140 377 31.8 Inquiry M10x1.5;
16 deep
180 387 31.8 Inquiry M10x1.5;
16 deep
A3
B
A2
K52 Flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 3/4in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))
A10FZO
A-B
A4 NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A52)
A3 06 - 10 M10x1.5;
A2 162.6 20 35.5 41.5
15 deep
106.5 10
11 - 18 on request
21 - 28
37 - 45
+ 0.05
+ 0.02
A B 58 - 63
Ø82.55
A10VZO
A5 NG A1 A2 A3 A4
10 on request
1) 30° pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, tolerance class 5

2) Thread according to DIN 13, observe the general information on page 60 for the maximum tightening torques.
171

U52 Flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 3/4in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))
A10VZO
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) 22
A-B 15
A 13
NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
M12x25 1
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) 45 264 38 17.5 M10x1.5;
16 deep
Ø1
06 71 299 38 17.5 M10x1.5;
.5
16 deep
45°
+0.05
Ø82.55 +0.02
100 360 38 17.5 M10x1.5;
16 deep
140 377 38 17.5 M10x1.5; 2
16 deep
180 387 38 17.5 M10x1.5;
16 deep
A3
B A2
(to mounting flange)
A1
3
K68 Flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)
Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
A4
A10FZO
A3 NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A52)
21-28 on request
4
37-45
A B
+0.050
ø101. 6 +0.020
146
A5
5
10
A2
6
U68 Flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)
Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) 22 A10VZO
A-B 15
A M12x25 13 NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) 45 264 41 16.5 M12x1.75;
18 deep
7
71 299 41 16.5 M12x1.75;
Ø1
46
18 deep
Ø101.6 +0.02
+0.05
45°
100 360 41 16.5 M12x1.75;

18 deep
140 377 41 16.5 M12x1.75;
18 deep
180 387 41 16.5 M12x1.75; 8
A3 18 deep
B
A2

172

K04 Flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
A4 A10FZO
A3 NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
21-28 on request
37-45
A B
ø101.6 +0.050
+0.020
146
A5
10
A2
U04 Flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)

Coupling for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) 22 A10VZO
A-B 15
A 13 NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) 45 264 45.9 16.9 M12x1.75;
18 deep
71 299 45.9 16.9 M12x1.75;
Ø1
46
18 deep
+0.02
Ø101.6 +0.05
45°
100 360 45.9 16.9 M12x1.75;

18 deep
140 377 45.9 16.9 M12x1.75;
18 deep
180 387 45.9 16.9 M12x1.75;
18 deep
A3
B A2

173
Overview of attachments
Through drive - A10FZO Attachment of 2nd pump Through
drive
Flange Coupling for Short code A10FZO A10VZO External gear pump Available
splined shaft Size (shaft) Size (shaft) for size
Size (NG)
1
ISO 3019-1
82-2(A) 5/8 in K01 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) F (5 to 22) 11 to 63
3/4 in K52 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) – 06 to 63
101-2(B) 7/8 in K68 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) N/G (26 to 49) 21 to 63
1 in K04 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) – 21 to 63
2
Through drive - A10VZO Attachment of 2nd pump Through

drive
Flange Coupling for Short code A10FZO A10VZO External gear pump Available
Size (NG)
ISO 3019-1 3
82-2(A) 5/8 in K01 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) F (5 to 22) 18 to 28
3/4 in K52 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) – 18 to 28
101-2(B) 7/8 in K68 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) N/G (26 to 49) 28
1 in K04 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) – 28
82-2(A) 5/8 in U01 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) F (5 to 22) 45 to 180 4
3/4 in U52 06 to 10, 11 to 18 (S) 10, 18 (S) – 45 to 180
101-2(B) 7/8 in U68 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) N/G (26 to 49) 45 to 180
1 in U04 21 to 28 (S) 28 (S) – 45 to 180
The A10VZO in sizes 45 to 180 is equipped with a flexible universal through-drive (U..). This allows the through drive to be
exchanged without having to machine the port plate. Details of the add-on parts can be found in data sheet RE 95581.
5
8
174
Combination pumps A10VZO + A10VZO; A10FZO + A10FZO

When using combination pumps, it is possible to have multiple, independent hydraulic circuits without the need for a splitter
gearbox.
When ordering combination pumps, the model codes of the 1st and 2nd pumps must be joined by a "+".
Order example: A10VZO45DR/32R-VPD22U01 + A10VZO45DR/32R-VSD22U00
A10FZO 28/10R-VSC12K01 + A10FZO 28/10R-VSC11N00
Permissible moments of inertia
The arrangement of two single pumps in line is permissible up to the same size (tandem pump), taking into account a dynamic
mass acceleration of max. 10 g (98.1 m/s2) without additional support.
A10VZO
NG 10 18 28 45 71 100 140 180

Permissible moment of inertia on request
Static Tm Nm 500 880 1370 3000 4500 4500 4500
Dynamic at 10 g (98.1m/s2) Tm Nm 50 88 137 300 450 450 450
Ground m1 kg 18 18 30 47 69 73 78
Distance of center of gravity l1 mm 90 110 130 142 169 172 196
A10FZO
NG 06-10 11-18 21-28 37-45 58-63

Permissible moment of inertia
Static Tm Nm
Dynamic at 10 g (98.1m/s2) Tm Nm on request
Ground m1 kg
Distance of center of gravity l1 mm
m1, m2, m3 mass of pumps [kg]
l1, l2, l3 Distance of center of gravity [mm]
m1 m2 m3
1
l1 Tm = (m1 • l1 + m2 • l2 + m3 • l3) • [Nm]
l2 102
l3
175
Connector for solenoids

HIRSCHMANN DIN EN 175 301-803-A /ISO 4400 Changing connector position
Without bidirectional suppressor diode ____________________ H If necessary, you can change the position of the connector by
type of protection as per DIN/EN 43650 _________________IP65 turning the solenoid.
The sealing ring in the screw cable fitting is suitable for line To do this, proceed as follows:
diameters of 4.5 mm to 10 mm. 1
1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid.
The line connector is not included in the delivery contents. To do this, turn the mounting nut (1) one revolution
This can be supplied by Rexroth on request. counter-clockwise.
Rexroth material number: R902602623
2. Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired position.
Fixing screw M3 Cable fitting M16x1.5 3. Retighten the mounting nut of the solenoid.
Tightening torque: tightening torque: Tightening torque of the mounting nut: 5+1 Nm.
2
MA = 0.5 Nm MA = 1.5 - 2.5 Nm (size WAF26, 12-pt DIN 3124)
On delivery, the position of the connector may differ from that
shown in the brochure or drawing.
WAF 26, 12-pt

65.4
(2) DIN 3124 (1)

3
Ø37
50
68.5
4
Equipment connector Line connector

as per DIN 43650 DIN EN 175301-803-A
Wiring screw connector
M 16x1.5
5
PE PE
A A
1 2 1 2
Control Electronics function Electronics Further information

Electric two point control Controlled power outlet RA Analog RE 95 230
VT2000 Analog RE 29 904 7
RC2-2/21 1) Digital RE 95 201
1) Power outlets for 2 valves, can be actuated separately
8
176
Installation notes
General Below-reservoir installation (standard)
The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air Below-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is in-
bled during commissioning and operation. This must also be stalled outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
observed following a longer standstill as the axial piston unit
empty via the hydraulic lines.
Especially with the installation position "drive shaft upwards" 1 2
or "drive shaft downward", attention must be paid to a com-
plete filling and air bleeding since there is a risk, for example, amin 200 mm amin 200 mm
of dry running. F F
ht min ht min
The case drain fluid in the case interior must be directed to the 200 mm SB
200 mm SB
h min h min
reservoir via the highest case drain port (L1, L2, L3).
100 mm 100 mm
For combinations comprising several units, make sure that the L
respective case pressure is not exceeded. If there is a pressure L L1
difference at case drain port L, each pump is to be fitted with a S
separate case drain line. S
L1
lines using elastic elements and avoid above-reservoir installa-
tion.
3 4
In all operating states, the suction line and case drain line
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level .
The permissible suction height hS is a result of the overall amin 200 mm amin 200 mm
pressure loss, but may not be greater than hS max = 800 mm. F F
The minimum suction pressure at port S of pS min = 0.8 bar ht min ht min
200 mm SB 200 mm SB
absolute must not be exceeded in operation. h min h min
Installation position 100 mm 100 mm
L1 S S
See the following examples 1 to 12.
Additional installation positions are available upon request.
L
L1
L

1, 3 F S + L, L1 (F)
2, 4 F S + L, L1 (F)
Key, see page 51.
177
Installation notes
Above-reservoir installation Inside-reservoir installation
Above-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is Inside-reservoir installation means the pump is installed within
installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. the minimum reservoir fluid level.
To prevent the axial piston unit from draining, a height differ-
ence hES min of at least 25 mm is required in installation 9 1
10
position 6
Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm. amin 200 mm amin 200 mm
A check valve in the case drain line is only permissible in indi-
vidual cases. Consult us for approval.
L
ht min
SB
ht min
5 6 SB
L1 2
S
L
F F L1
hES min 25 mm S
L
100 mm
100 mm
h min
h min
L L1
S
S
L1
hs max hs max
800 mm 800 mm 11 12 3
ht min 200 mm ht min 200 mm SB amin 200 mm amin 200 mm

SB
h min 100 mm h min 100 mm
amin 200 mm amin 200 mm
L1 S
ht min
ht min
S
7 8 L1 4
F
L L
F SB SB
100 mm
100 mm
L1 S S
h min
h min
L
L1
L
hs max hs max 5
800 mm 800 mm Installation position Air bleed Filling
ht min 200 mm SB ht min 200 mm SB 9, 11 L, L1 L, L1
h min 100 mm h min 100 mm 10, 12 L, L1 S + L, L1
amin 200 mm amin 200 mm
S Filling / air bleeding

Installation position Air bleed Filling F Air bleed port 6
5, 7 F L, L1 (F) S Suction port
6, 8 F S + L, L1 (F) L, L1 Case drain port
ht min Minimum necessary immersion depth (200 mm)
hmin Minimum necessary spacing to reservoir base 7
(100 mm)
hES min
Minimum necessary height needed to protect the
axial piston unit from draining (25 mm).
distance between the suction line and the case
8
drain line. This prevents the heated, return flow
from being drawn directly back into the suction
line.
178
Notes
179
Notes
8
180
General information
– The axial piston units A10FZO and A10VZO are designed to be used in open circuits.
The axial piston unit A10FZG and A10VZG is specified for use in closed circuits.
– Project planning, assembly and commissioning of the axial piston unit require the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Before operating the axial piston unit, please read the appropriate operating instructions thoroughly and completely.
If necessary, request these from Rexroth.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids.
Take appropriate safety measures (e.g. by wearing protective clothing).
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteristics may
shift.
- The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must
ensure that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified operating conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid,
temperature) with the necessary safety factors.
- The service line ports and function ports are only designed to accommodate hydraulic lines.
– Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to be
provided in the hydraulic system.
– The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to.
– The product is not approved as a component for the safety concept of a general machine according to DIN EN ISO 13849.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer's instruction regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Fixing screws:
For fixing screws with metric ISO thread according to DIN 13 or thread according to ASME B1.1, we recommend checking the
tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230.
- Female threads in axial piston unit:
The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are maximum values for the female threads and must not be exceeded.
For values, see the following table.
Threaded plugs:
For the metal threaded plugs supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of the threaded plugs MV
apply. For values, see the following table.
Ports Maximum permissible
Required tightening torque WAF hexagon socket for
tightening torque for
for threaded plugs MV threaded plugs
Standard Thread size female threads MG max
ISO 11936 7/16-20 UNF-2B 40 Nm 15 Nm 3/16 in
9/16-18UNF-2B 80 Nm 25 Nm 1/4 in
3/4-16UNF-2B 160 Nm 62 Nm 5/16 in
7/8-14UNF-2B 240 Nm 127 Nm 3/8 in
1 1/16-12 UNF-2B 360 Nm 147 Nm 9/16 in
DIN 3852 G 1/4 in 70 Nm – –
M14x1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M16x1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18x1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22x1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27x2 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
Hydraulics forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be repro-
Axialkolbeneinheiten duced or given to third parties without its consent.
An den Kelterwiesen 14 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
72160 Horb a.N., Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Tel.: +49-7451-92-0 derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered
Fax: +49-7451-82-21
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
info.brm-ak@boschrexroth.de
Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.com/axialkolbenpumpen
181

RE 92050/04.09 1/68
Axial piston variable pump Replaces: 03.09
A4VSO
Data sheet
Series 10, 11 and 30

Size 40...1000
Nominal pressure 350 bar
Peak pressure 400 bar
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for Standard program 2 – Axial piston pump in swash plate design for hydrostatic
Technical data 5 drives in open circuit operation
– The flow is proportional to the input drive speed and dis-
Characteristics 10
placement. By adjusting the swash plate angle it is possible
Summary of controls 13 to infinitely vary the output flow.
Dimensions, size 40 18 – Excellent suction characteristics
Dimensions, size 71 20 – Low noise level
Dimensions, size 125 22 – Long service life
Dimensions, size 180 24 – Modular design
– Short response times
Dimensions, size 250 26
– Variable through drive options
– Visual swivel angle indicator
– Optional mounting position
Dimensions, size 750 32 – Operation on HF-fluids under reduced operational data
Dimensions, size 1000 36 possible
Through drive 38 A special version is available for operation with
HFC-fluid see data sheet RE 92053
Summary mounting options on A4VSO 39
Permissible mass bending moment 40
Dimensions combination pumps 41
Dimensions through drive 43 For the descriptions of the control devices see the separate
RE data sheets
Installation notes 66 RE 92056, RE 92060, RE 92064,
General information 68 RE 92072, RE 92076, RE 92080, RE 92088
182
2/68 Bosch Rexroth AG A4VSO Series 10, 11 and 30 | RE 92050/04.09
Type code for Standard program

A4VS O / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Hydraulic fluid / Version 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Mineral oil and HFD-fluids (no code)
HFA-, HFB- and HFC-Fluids – – – – – – E
01 For operation on HFC-special performance version
see RE 92053 (HFA and HFB see RE 90223)
High-Speed-Version – – – – – – H
Axial piston unit

02 Swash plate design, variable A4VS
Boost pump (Impeller)

without boost pump (no coden)
03 with boost pump (Impeller)
– – – – – – – – L
only with port plate 25 (service port connections)
Type of operation
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

05 Displacement Vg max [cm3] 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control devices
Pressure control DR DR..
Pressure control for parallel operation DP DP..
(RE 92060)
Flow control FR – – – FR..
Pressure and flow control DFR – – – DFR..
Power control with hyperbolic curve (RE 92064) LR LR..1)
Manual control MA – – MA..
(RE 92072)
Electric motor control EM – – EM..
06
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent HM HM..
Hydr. control, with servo/proportional valve (RE 92076) HS HS..1)
Electronic control EO EO..1)
2 2
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent (RE 92080) HD ) ) HD..1)
Secundary speed control (RE 92056) DS1 DS1..1)
Electro-hydraulic control system DFE1 (RE 92088)
– – – DFE1..1)
System solution SYHDFEE (RE 30035)
Series
– – – – – – – 10(11)2)
07
– – 30
available in preparation – not available = preferred program
1
) when operating on HF-fluids, observe the limitations as shown in the relevant data sheets of the control devices and the
mounted valves
2
) Versions with HD-controls only in series 11
183
RE 92050/04.09 | A4VSO Series 10, 11 and 30 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/68

A4VS O / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
with view on shaft end right hand R
08
left hand L
Seals 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

NBR (Nitrile-rubber),
P
Shaft seal FKM (Fluoro-rubber)
09 2
FKM (Fluoro-rubber) / for operation on HFD V
HFC-special performance version see RE 92053 – – – – – F
Shaft end
Keyed parallel shaft to DIN 6885 P
10
Splined shaft to DIN 5480 Z
3
Mounting flange 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
similar to ISO 3019-2 metric 4-hole – – – B
11
8-hole – – – – – – H

Port B and S: SAE flange on side, 90° offset,
– – – 13 1) 4
metric fixing screws
12 Port B and S: SAE flange on side, 90° offset,

metric fixing screws
25
2. pressure port B1, opposite B –
closed with blanking plate on delivery
5
available in preparation = preferred program
1
) only with through drive code N00 and K..
continuation of type code see page 4 6
8
184

A4VS O / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Through drive 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

without auxiliary pump, without through drive N00
with through drive for mounting an axial piston unit, gear
– – – – K...
or radial piston pump
Universal through drive, can be adapted – – – – – U...
Flange splined shaft coupler 1) to mount
125, 4-hole (ISO2)) 32x2x14x9g A4VSO/G 40 31
140, 4-hole (ISO2)) 40x2x18x9g A4VSO/G 71 – 33
160, 4-hole (ISO2)) 50x2x24x9g A4VSO/G 125 – – 34
160, 4-hole (ISO2)) 50x2x24x9g A4VSO/G 180 – – – 34
224, 4-hole (ISO2)) 60x2x28x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 250 – – – – 35
224, 4-hole (ISO2)) 70x3x22x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 355 – – – – – 77
315, 8-hole (ISO2)) 80x3x25x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 500 – – – – – – 43
400, 8-hole (ISO2)) 90x3x28x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 750 – – – – – – – 76
400, 8-hole (ISO2)) 100x3x32x9g A4VSO/G 1000 – – – – – – – – 88
80, 2-hole (ISO2)) 3/4in 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10/52, 18/31 B2
100, 2-hole (ISO2)) 7/8in 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO 28/31 B3
13 100, 2-hole (ISO2)) 1in 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO 45/31 B4
125, 2-hole (ISO2)) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71/31 – B5
160, 4-hole (ISO2)) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71/32 – B8
125, 2-hole (ISO2)) 1 1/2in 38-4(SAE C-C) A10VSO 100/31 – – B6
180, 4-hole (ISO2)) 1 1/2in 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO 100/32 – – B9
180, 4-hole (ISO2)) 1 3/4in 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO 140/31/32 – – – B7
82-2 (SAE A) 5/8in 16-4 (SAE A) AZ-PF-1X-004...022 01
82-2 (SAE A) 3/4in 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10, 18/31/52(3) 52
101-2 (SAE B) 7/8in 22-4 (SAE B) AZ-PN-1X-020...032,
68
A10VO 28/31/52(3)
101-2 (SAE B) 1in 25-4 (SAE B-B) PGH4, A10VO45/31 04
127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO 71/31 – 07
127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/2in 38-4 (SAE C-C) PGH5, A10VO100/31 – – 24
152-4 (SAE D) 1 3/4in 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO 140/31 – – – 17
Ø 63, metr.4-hole for keyed shaft Ø 25 R4 57
with through drive shaft, without coupler, without adapter flange,
99
closed with cover plate
Filtration (only with HS- and DS-control)

without filter N
14
Sandwich plate filter (with HS- and DS-control see RE 92076 and RE 92056) Z
1 2
) Keyed shaft coupler on K/U 57 through drive ) to ISO 3019-2 metric
Combination pumps
1. Combination pumps consisting of axial piston units – ordering example see page 38; overview mounting options see page 39
2. if delivery with mounted gear or radial piston pump is desired, please consult us.
available in preparation – not available = preferred program
185
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid
For extensive information on the selection of hydraulic fluids and Selection diagram
application conditions please consult our data sheets RE 90220
(mineral oils), RE 90221 (ecologically acceptable fluids) and RE –20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1000 1000
90223 (HF-fluids). 1
600
The variable pump A4VSO is suitable for operation on HF-fluids. 400
(HFA, HFB, and HFC: EA4VSO or A4VSO....F
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG
200
22
Viscosity Q (mm2/s)
32
46
68
10
HFD: standard version A4VSO with FKM seals)
0
100
However, limitations to the technical data, according to 80
RE 90223 must be observed. 60
On certain selected HFC-fluids, pump sizes 125...355, exe- 40

36 2
cuted in accordance to RE 92053 can be operated with the
Qopt
same pressures and speeds as on mineral oil. 20
On operation with HFA and HFB-fluids, limitations of the tech- 16
nical data must be observed according to RE 90223.
10 10
On operation with rolling oil please consult us. –25 –10 10 30 50 70 90 Temperature
t (°C)
When ordering, please state the fluid to be used. t min = –25°C Fluid temperature range t max = + 90°C 3
Operating viscosity range Notes on the selection of hydraulic fluid

Within the operating viscosity range between 16...100 mm2/s In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
the units can be operated without limitations of the technical operating temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to
data. the ambient temperature.
In order to obtain optimum efficiency and service life, we
The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the ope- 4
recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating tempera-
rating temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum
ture) be selected in the range
range (Qopt ); see shaded section in the selection diagram. We
recommend, that the higher viscosity grade is selected in each
Qopt = opt. viscosity range 16...36 mm2/s case.
referred to tank temperature (open circuit).
Temperature range (see selection diagram)
Limit of viscosity range tmin = – 25° C 5
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: tmax = + 90° C
Qmin = 10 mm2/s Example: at an ambient temperature of X° C the operating

for short periods (t < 3 min) temperature in the tank is 60° C. In the optimum viscosity range
at max. permissible case drain temperature (Qopt ; shaded area), this corresponds to grades VG 46 or VG 68;
tmax = +90°C. select: VG 68.
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s Important: The case drain temperature is influenced by pres- 6
for short periods (on cold start, operating viscosity sure and speed and is always higher than the tank temperature.
should be below 100 mm2/sec within 15 minutes) However the max. temperature at any point in the system may not
tmin= –25°C exceed 90° C.
For detailed information on operation with low temperatures see
RE 90300-03-B.
8
186
Technical data
Bearing flushing Case drain pressure
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is The permissible case drain pressure (housing pressure) is
required for a safe, continuous operation: dependent on the drive speed (see diagram).
– Applications with special fluids (non mineral oils) due to
1000
355
750
250180
500
limited lubricity and narrow operating temperature range
40
125
71
– Operation at critical conditions of temperature and viscosity Size
with mineral oil 4
Flushing is recommended with vertical mounting (drive shaft
facing upwards) in order to ensure lubrication of the front
3
Case drain pressure

bearing and shaft seal.
Flushing is carried out via port „U“, located in the front flange
area of the pump. The flushing fluid flows through the front be-
aring and leaves the pump together with the case drain flow. 2
pL abs [bar]
Depending on pump size, the following flushing flows are
recommended:
1
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Size 40 71 125 180 250
speed n [rpm]
recommended
qSp L/min 3 4 5 7 10
flushing flow Max. case drain pressure (housing pressure)
Size 355 500 750 1000 pL abs max 4 bar absolute
recommended
qSp L/min 15 20 30 40 These are approximate values; under certain operating condi-
flushing flow
tions a reduction in these values may be necessary.
These recommended flushing flows will cause a pressure drop
of approx. 2 bar (series 1) and 3 bar (series 3) between the
entrance to port„U“ and the pump case (including the pipe Direction of flow
fittings).
S to B.
Notes regarding series 30
When using external bearing flushing the throttle screw at port
U must be turned in to the end stop.
Filtration of the fluid (Axial piston unit)

The finer the filtration, the better the achieved cleanliness of
the fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston pump.
To ensure a reliable functioning of the axial piston unit, a mini-
mum cleanliness class of
20/18/15 acc. to ISO 4406 is necessary.
187
Technical data
Pressure at service line port (pressure port) B The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design
Nominal pressure pnom__________________ 350 bar absolute pressure.
1
Peak pressure pmax ____________________ 400 bar absolute Peak pressure pmax
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h The peak pressure corresponds the maximum operating pres-
Single operating period _____________________________ 1 s sure within the single operating period. The sum of the single
operating periods must not exceed the total operating period.
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) ___________15 bar
For lower pressures please consult us. Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Minimum pressure on the high-pressure side (B) that is re-
Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16000 bar/s quired in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit. 2
pnom Rate of pressure change RA

Maximum permissible rate of pressure build-up and pressure
Pressure p
't reduction during a pressure change over the entire pressure

range.
'p t2
Single operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
3
Peak pressure pmax
Time t
4
Minimum suction pressure pS min _________ 0.8 bar absolute
Maximum suction pressure pS max ________ 30 bar absolute Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Minimum pressure (inlet)
In order to avoid damage to the axial piston unit, a minimum Time t
pressure must be ensured at the suction port S (inlet). The mi- Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn
nimum pressure is dependent on the speed and displacement 5
of the axial piston unit.
1,25
1,2 1,6
Speed no max
1,1 1,4
1,2
n
1,0 1,0
6
0,9 0,8
0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

Vg
Displacement Vg max
The inlet pressure is the static feed pressure or the minimum

7
dynamic value of the boost pressure.
Please note:
Max. permissible drive speed no max. perm. (speed limit) see page 8
Please contact us if these conditions cannot be satisfied.
8
188
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering efficiencies and tolerances; values rounded off)
Size 40 71 125 180 250/ 355/ 500/ 750 750 1000
with
H 1) H 1) H 1) Impeller
Displacement Vg max cm3 40 71 125 180 250/ 355/ 500/ 750 750 1000
250 355 500
Speed 2)
max. at Vg max no max rpm 2600 2200 1800 1800 1500/ 1500/ 1320/ 1200 1500 1000
1900 1700 1500
max. at Vg dVg max no max zul. rpm 3200 2700 2200 2100 1800/ 1700/ 1600/ 1500 1500 1200
(speed limit) 2100 1900 1800
Flow
at no max qvo max L/min 104 156 225 324 375/ 533/ 660/ 900 1125 1000
475 604 750
at nE = 1500 rpm qVE max L/min 60 107 186 270 375 533 5813) 7703) 1125 –
Power 'p = 350 bar
at no max Po max kW 61 91 131 189 219/ 311/ 385/ 525 656 583
277 352 437
at nE = 1500 rpm PE max kW 35 62 109 158 219 311 3393) 4493) 656 –
Torque
bat Vg max 'p = 350 bar Tmax Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 4174 5565
'p = 100 bar T Nm 64 113 199 286 398 564 795 1193 1193 1590
Rotary stiffness
Shaft end P c kNm/rad 80 146 260 328 527 800 1145 1860 1860 2730
Shaft end Z c kNm/rad 77 146 263 332 543 770 1136 1812 1812 2845
Moment of inertia
JTW kgm2 0,0049 0,0121 0,03 0,055 0,0959 0,19 0,3325 0,66 0,66 1,20
rotary group
Angular acceleration max.4) D rad/s2 17000 11000 8000 6800 4800 3600 2800 2000 2000 1450
Case volume V L 2 2,5 5 4 10 8 14 19 22 27
Weight (with press. contr.) approx. m kg 39 53 88 102 184 207 320 460 490 605
1
) High-Speed-Version
2
) Values are valid with inlet pressure pabs 1 bar at inlet port S, with increased speed up to speed limit please observe diagram,
page 7
3
) Vg < Vg max
4
) – The range of validity lies between zero and the maximum permissible drive speeds.
Valid for external excitation (eg. diesel engine 2- to 8-fold rotary frequency, cardan shaft 2-fold rotary frequency).
– The limiting value is only valid for a single pump.
– The loading capacity of the connecting parts must be considered.
Notes
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit.
The permissible values can be determined through calculation.
Determination of pump size

V g • n • KV Vg = geometr. displacement per rev. in cm3
Flow qV = [L/min]
1000 'p = pressure difference in bar
Vg • 'p n = speed in rpm
Drive torque T = [Nm]
20 • S • Kmh KV = volumetric efficiency
2S • T • n qV • 'p Kmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
189
Technical data
Permissible radial and axial forces on the drive shaft
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750* 1000
Radial force, max. Fq
at X/2 Fq max N 1000 1200 1600 2000 2000 2200 2500 3000 35001
X/2 X/2
X
Axial force, max.

r Fax ± Fax max N 600 800 1000 1400 1800 2000 2000 2200 2200
2
* also valid for versions with boost pump
8
190
Characteristics
Drive power and flow
(Fluid: Hydraulic oil ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50°C)
qv • p qv
Overall efficiency: Kt = Volumetric efficiency: Kv =
Pqv max • 600 qv theor
Size 40 Size 180
150 75
400 200
Flow qv [L/min]
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]
Drive power P [kW]

qv
100 50
qv Pqv max 300 150
50 25
200 Pqv max 100
Pqv Null
0 0
0 100 200 300 350 100 50
Operating pressure p [bar] Pqv Null
n = 2600 rpm
0 0
n = 1500 rpm 0 100 200 300 350
Size 71
n = 1800 rpm
n = 1500 rpm
150 150
qv
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]
Size250
100 100 500 250
Pqv max
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]

50 50 400 200
Pqv Null
qv
0 0
0 100 200 300 350 300 150
Pqv max
n = 2200 rpm
200 100
n = 1500 rpm
Size 125 100 50

Pqv Null
300 150
0 0
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]
0 100 200 300 350
200 qv 100 Operating pressure p [bar]

n = 1500 rpm
Pqv max n = 1000 rpm
100 50
Pqv Null
0 0
0 100 200 300 350
n = 1800 rpm
n = 1500 rpm
191
Characteristics
qv • p qv
Pqv max • 600 qv theor 1
Size 355 Size 500
700 350
800 400
Drive power P [kW]

Flow qv [L/min]
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]

600 300
2
700 350
500 250
qv 600 300
qv
400 P qv max 200

500 250 3
300 150
400 200
200 100 Pqv max

300 150 4
100 Pqv Null 50

200 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 350 Pqv Null
100 50 5
n = 1500 rpm
0 0
n = 1000 rpm 0 100 200 300 350
n = 1320 rpm 6
n = 1000 rpm
8
192
Characteristics
qv • p qv
Size 750 Size 1000
1100 550
1600 800
Drive power P [kW]

Flow qv [L/min]
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]

1000 500
1400 700
900 450
1200 600
qv qv
800 400
1000 500
700 350
800 400
Pqv max
600 300
600 300
500 250
400 200
400 Pqv max 200

200 Pqv Null 100
300 150
0 0
0 100 200 300 350
200 100 Operating pressure p [bar]
Pqv Null n = 1200 rpm

n = 1000 rpm
100 50
0 0
0 100 200 300 350
n = 1200 rpm
n = 1000 rpm
193
Summary of controls
Pressure control DR (see RE 92060)
The DR- pressure control limits the maximum pres-
sure at the pump outlet within the pump‘s control
range. This max. pressure level can be steplessly B1 B MB
set at the control valve. 1
Setting range 20...350 bar
p
Optional:
Remote control (DRG)
qv min qv max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
2
Pressure control for parallel operation DP (see RE 92060) not in scope of supply
Suitable for pressure control with multiple A4VSO
axial piston pumps in parallel operation.
Mst 3
Optional: XD
Flow control (DPF)
p B 1 B MB
4
qv min qv max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
not in scope of supply

Flow control FR (see RE 92060) B 5
XF
Maintains a constant flow in a hydraulic system.
Optional:
B 1 B MB
Remote pressure control (FRG) p
connection between XF and tank closed
(FR1, FRG1)
6
qv min qv max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Pressure and flow control DFR (see RE 92060) not in scope of supply
B
This control maintains a constant flow from the 7
XF
pump even under varying operating conditions.
Overriding this control is a mechanically adjustable
pressure control.
Optional:
connection between XF and tank closed (DFR1) p
B1 B MB
qv min qv max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
194
Summary of controls
Power control LR2 with hyperbolic characteristic (see RE 92064)
The hyperbolic power control maintains a constant RKV
preset drive power at the same input speed.
Optional:
Pressure control (LR2D), remotely controlled (LR2G); B1 B MB
p
Flow control (LR2F, LR2S);
Hydraulic stroke limiter (LR2H);
Mechanical stroke limiter (LR2M);
Hydraulic two-point control (LR2Z);
with electric unloading valve for easy start (LR2Y). Vg min Vg max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Power control LR3 with remote control of power characteristics (see RE 92064)
This power control maintains a constant preset drive
power, with remote control of the power characte- RKV
XLR
ristics.
Optional:
Pressure control (LR3D), remotely controlled B1 B MB
p
(LR3G);
Flow control (LR3F, LR3S);
Hydraulic stroke control (LR3H);
Mechanical stroke control (LR3M);
Hydraulic two-point control (LR3Z). Vg min Vg max
with electric unloading valve for easy start (LR3Y)
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Hydraulic control LR2N and LR3N pilot pressure dependent, initial position Vg min (see RE 92064)
With overriding power control. shown in shifted position
MSt
i.e. P pressurized
The pump displacement is proportional to a pilot
P
pressure signal in PSt. pSt
The additional hyperbolic power control overrides
the pilot pressure signal and holds the preset drive
power constant. PSt
Optional: Vg
Remote control of power characteristics (LR3N) B1 B MB
Vg max
Pressure control (LR.DN),
Remote pressure control (LR.GN)
p
Electric control of pilot pressure signal (LR.NT)
Vg min Vg max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
195
Summary of controls
Manual control MA (see RE 92072)
Stepless adjustment of displacement by means of B1 B M B
a handwheel. s
smax
1
Vg
Vg max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Electric motor control EM (see RE 92072)

Stepless adjustment of displacement via an elec- B1 B MB
3
tric motor.
s
Various intermediate displacement values can be M
smax
selected with a programmed sequence control, by Poti
means of built on limit switches and an optional
potentiometer for feedback signal. Vg
Vg max U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
4
5
Hydraulic control HD pilot pressure dependent (see RE 92080)
Stepless adjustment of displacement proportional to P X2
a pilot pressure signal. The displacement is propor-
tional to the applied pilot pressure (Difference bet-
ween pilot pressure level and pump case pressure).
Optional: pSt B 1 B MB
6
Pilot pressure curves (HD1, HD2, HD3)
Pressure control (HD.B),
Remote pressure control (HD.GB)
Power control (HD1P) Vg
with electric control of pilot pressure (HD1T)
Vg max
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) 7
8
196
Summary of controls
Hydraulic control HM 1/2, control volume dependent (see RE 92076)
The pump displacement is infinitely variable in rela- X2 X1
B 1 B MB
tion to the control oil volume in ports X1 and X2.
Application:
– 2-point control
– basic control device for servo or proportional valve control
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Control system HS, HS4, with servo or proportional valve (see RE 92076)
The stepless displacement control is accomplis-
hed by by means of servo or proportional valve
with electrical feedback of the swivel angle.
The HS4P-control system is fitted with a built on
pressure transducer so that it can be utilized for U SP
; pHD RKV
electrical pressure and power control. Umax
B 1 B MB P
Optional:
S
Servo valve (HS); Vg U
Proportional valve (HS4);

Short circuit valve (HSK, HS4K, HS4KP); Vg max
Without valves (HSE, HS4E).
For oil-immersed use (HS4M)
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Control system EO1/2 (see RE 92076)

The stepless adjustment of the displacement is
accomplished by means of a proportional valve b a
with electrical feedback of the swivel angle.

This control can be utilized as an electric control of
U SP
displacement. B1 B MB RKV
P
Umax
Optional:
Control pressure range (EO1, EO2) S
U
Short circuit valve (EO1K, EO2K) Vg
Without valves (EO1E, EO2E) Vg max
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2
197
Summary of controls
Speed control DS1, secundary controlled (see RE 92056)
The speed control DS1 controls the secundary
unit (motor) in such a manner, that this motor
delivers sufficient torque to maintain the required
output speed. When connected to a constant 1
pressure system, this torque is proportional to T T B A P
SP
motor displacement and thus also proportional to n (+) B1 B M B RKV
P
the swivel angle.
-1
n2(min )
n2(min-1)
2
n (-)
U S MS1 MS2 K1 K2 T R(L)
3
Electro hydraulic control system DFE1 (see RE 92088)
The power, pressure and swivel angle control of the P
I/U
variable pump A4VSO...DFE1 is accomplished by
means of an electrically controlled proportional val-
ve. A current signal to the proportional valve moves
the control piston and determines via an integrated
positional transducer the cradle‘s swivel angle and 4
thus the pump flow. When the electric drive motor
is switched off and the system is pressureless, the
bias spring in the control chamber will swivel the p U
pump to max. displacement (Vg max). S
In scope of supply
B1 B MB 5
A
S
U
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 6
8
198
Before finalising your design please request a

Dimensions, size 40 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Series 1
(Example: pressure control; for exact dimensions of the control devices see separate data sheets)
R(L) 147
R(L)
(260)
18
140
135
K2 ø1
60 K1
150
B
ø15
80
85
91
T MB MS 150
8 52
90 X S 45°
45°
227
266
Y
Control valve mounting
for right hand rotation
Flange 125, 4-hole
similar to B1 (2. outlet port on version 25)
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
(on version 25)
80
ø125h8
15 0 15
L R
30
79
80
R(L)
U
30
144 Control valve mounting
25
for left hand rotation
Y
View Y View X
ø20.5
69.9
50.8
ø40
B (B1 on version 25, S SAE 1 1/2 in,

shown without blanking plate) standard pressure series
SAE flange 3/4 in, high pressure series M12; 20 deep
M10; 17 deep 23.8 35.7
For dimensions of shaft ends and ports see page 19

199

Shaft ends
P Keyed to DIN 6885 Z Splined to DIN 5480 1
AS10x8x56 W32x2x14x9g
1.5 56 10h9
ø32k6
M10 1)2)
M10 1)2)
22
35-0,2
22
58 36
68 46
Ports max. tightening torque 2) 3

S Suction port (standard pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 1/2 in
Fixing thread DIN 13 M12x1,75; 20 deep 2)
K1, K2 Flushing port DIN 3852 M22x1,5;14 deep (plugged) 210 Nm
T Drain DIN 3852 M22x1,5;14 deep (plugged) 210 Nm
MB Measuring port outlet pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5;12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
4
MS Measuring port suction pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5;12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
R(L) Fill and bleed DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep 210 Nm
(case drain port)
U Flushing port DIN 3852 M14x1,5;12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
on version 13
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 3/4 in 5
B1 Additional port DIN 3852 M22x1,5;14 deep (plugged) 210 Nm
on version 25
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 3/4 in
B1 2. press. port (high pressre series) SAE J518 3) 3/4 in (closed with blanking plate) 6
1
) Center bore to DIN 332 (threaded to DIN 13)
2
) for the max. tightening torques please observe the manufacturer‘s information on the used fittings and the general information
on page 68
3
) Caution: metric thread deviates from standard 7
8
200

Series 1
(Example: pressure control; for exact dimensions of control devices see separate data sheets)
R(L) R(L)
(298)
18
157
152
K2 ø18
0
K1
170
B
ø15
92.5
106
97
T MB MS 170
8 61
101
X S 45°
45°
254
295
Y Control valve mounting

Flange 140, 4-hole
similar to B1 (2. pressure port on version 25)
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
(on version 25)
92.5
ø140h8
15 0 15
L R
34
92.5
92
R(L)
U
27 Control valve mounting
166 27 for left hand rotation
Y
View Y View X
57.2
77.8
ø50
ø25
B (B1 on version 25, S SAE 2 in

M12; 20 deep SAE 1 in high pressure series M12; 20 deep

27.8
42.9
For dimensions of shaft ends or ports see page 21

201

Shaft ends
1.5 68 12h9
ø40k6
M12 1)2)
M121)2)
28
43-0,2
28
70 45
80 55
S Suction port (standard pressure series) SAE J518 3) 2 in

K1, K2 Flushing port DIN 3852 M27x2;16 deep (plugged) 330 Nm
T Drain DIN 3852 M27x2;16 deep (plugged) 330 Nm
MB Measuring port outlet pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5;12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
4
MS Measuring port suction pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5;12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
R(L) Fill + air bleed (case drain port) DIN 3852 M27x2; 16 deep 330 Nm
on version 13
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 in
Fixing thread DIN 13 M12x1,75; 20 deep 2) 5
B1 Additional port DIN 3852 M27x2;16 deep (plugged) 330 Nm
on version 25
B1 2. pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 in (closed with blanking plate)
Fixing thread DIN 13 M12x1,75; 20 deep 2) 6
1
) Center bore to DIN 332 (thread to DIN 13)
2
on page 68
3
) Caution: metric thread deviates from standard
7
8
202

Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(354)
22
191
186
K2 ø20 K1
0
200
B
112.5
114.5
121
ø20
T MB MS 200
8 70
45°
125 X S 45°
310
355
Y
Flange 160, 4-hole
similar to M2 B1 (2. pressure port on version 25)
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
(on version 25)
112.5
ø160h8
15 0 15
L R
50
112.5
112
R(L)
U B
M1 Control valve mounting
33 14 14
203 for left hand rotation
Position R(L) on HD- and EP-control Y

View Y View X
66.7
88.9
ø63
ø31
B (B1 on version 25, S SAE 2 1/2 in

shown without blanking plate standard pressure series
M14; 19 deep SAE 1 1/4 in high pressure series M12; 17 deep

31.8
50.8

203

Shaft ends
1.5 80 14h9
ø50k6
2
M16 1)2)
M16 1)2)
36 36
53.5-0,2
82 54
92 64
S Suction port (standard pressure series) SAE J518 3) 2 1/2 in

K1, K2 Flushing port DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (plugged) 540 Nm
T Drain DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (plugged) 540 Nm
MB Measuring port outlet pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
4
MS Measuring port suction pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
R(L) Fill + air bleed (case drain port) DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 540 Nm
U Flushing port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
M1, M2 Measuring port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
on version 13 5
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 1/4 in
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14x2; 19 deep 2)
B1 Additional port DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (plugged) 540 Nm
on version 25
6
B1 2. pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 1/4 in (closed with blanking plate)
1
2
) for the max. tightening torques please observe the manufacturer‘s information on the used fittings and the general information 7
on page 68
3
8
204

Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(354)
22
191
186
K2 ø20 K1
0
200
B
114.5
121
116
ø20
T MS S MB 200
8 70
45°
125 X 45°
318
375
Y
Flange 160, 4-hole
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
(on version 25)
120
ø160h8
15 0 15
L R
50
112
120
R(L)
U B
33 M1
14 14 Control valve mounting
203 for left hand rotation

View Y View X
66.7
106.4
ø31
ø75


31.8
61.9

205

Shaft ends
1.5 80 14h9
ø50k6
M16 1)2)
M16 1)2)
36 36
53.5-0,2
82 54
92 64

4
R(L) Fill + air bleed DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 540 Nm
(case drain port)
M1, M2 Measuring port control chamber pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
5
on version 13
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 3) 1 1/4 in deep 2)
B1 Additional port DIN 3852 M33x2;18 deep (plugged) 540 Nm
on version 25 6

1
) Center bore to DIN 332 (thread to DIN 13) 7
2
on page 68
3
8
206

Dimensions, size 250 certified installation drawing. Dimension in mm.
Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(424)
30
238
233
ø28
K2 0 K1
265
B
145
144
153
ø24
T MB S MS 265
8 90 45°
150 45°
X
380
435
Y
Flange 224, 4-hole for right hand rotation
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
(on version 25)
144
ø224h8
15 0 15
L R
55
144
144
R(L)
U M1 B
43 17 17 Control valve mounting for
248 left hand rotation
View Y View X
106.4
79.4
ø75
ø40


36.5
61.9
For dimensions on shaft ends and ports see page 27

207

Shaft ends
AS18x11x100 W60x2x28x9g
3 100 18h9
ø60m6
64-0.2
2
M20 1)2)
M20 1)2)
42 42
105 70
115 80

Fixing thread DIN 13 M16x2; 24deep 2)
4
(case drain port)
5
on version 13
on version 25 6

1
2
on page 68
3
) Caution: thread deviates from standard
8
208

Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(424)
30
238
233
K2 ø2
80 K1
265
B
144.5
144
153
ø24
T MS S MB 265
45°
8 90 45°
150 X
393
464
Y Control valve mounting

Flange 224, 4-hole M2 for right hand rotation
similar to
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
B1 (2. pressure port on version 25)
(on version 25)
148
ø224h8
15 0 15
L R
55
144
148
R(L)
U M1 B
40 17 17 Control valve mounting on
248 left hand rotation
View Y View X
130.2
ø100
79.4
B (B1 on version 25,

ø40
S SAE 4 in
SAE 1 1/2 in high pressure series
M16; 25 deep M16; 21 deep
36.5 77.8

209

Shaft ends
AS20x12x100 W70x3x22x9g
4.5 100 20h9
74.5-0.2
ø70m6
M20 1)2)
M20 1)2)
42 42 13
105 82
115 92

MB Measuring port outlet pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12deep (plugged) 80 Nm
4
(case drain port)
5
on version 13
on version 25 6

Fixing thread DIN 13 M16x2; 25 deep2)
1
2
on page 68
3
8
210

Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(510)
16+5
13
283
280
190
ø3
K2 K1
60
B
05
180
190
ø4
ø24
8x
45
45
(=
°
36
T 0° 22° 30
80 MB S MS ) '
47 155 X
441 190 190
520
Thread for eye bolts

M16x2; 27 deep DIN 580 Y
control valve mounting for
right hand rotation
16 U M2
B1
189
158
ø230+5
ø315h8
ø225
15 0 15
L R
50
R(L)
158
M1 B
Flange 315, 8-hole 30 Control valve mounting for
similar to 279 50 left hand rotation
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
Y
View Y View X
152.4
ø125
96.8
ø50
B and B1(shown without blanking plate) S SAE 5 in

standard pressure series
SAE 2 in high pressure series
44.5 92.1

211

Shaft ends
AS22x14x125 W80x3x25x9g
3 125 22h9
ø80m6
85-0,2
2
M20 1)2)
M20 1)2)
42
42
130 90
180 140

4
(case drain port)
or dependent on control device DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
5
1
2 6
on page 68
3
8
212

Series 3
(Example: pressure control; for exact dimensions of control devices see separate dData sheets)
R(L) R(L)
(582)
16+5
13
322
317
232
MB K2 K1
B
95
200
ø4
232
ø4
50
ø22
8x
45
45
T (=
°
°
MS 36
S 0° 22° 30
'
89 )
X
47 161
473 232 232
560

16 U for right hand rotation
M2
B1
231
182
ø263+5
ø400h8
ø255
15 0 15
L R
50
182
R(L)
M1 B
Flange 400, 8-hole
similar to 32 Control valve mounting for
ISO 3019-2 (metric) 301 50 left hand rotation
Y
View Y View X
152.4
ø125
96.8
B und B1(shown without blanking plate)

ø50
S SAE 5 in
SAE 2 in high pressure series standard pressure series
44.5
92.1

213

Dimensions , size 750 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Shaft ends
AS25x14x125 W90x3x28x9g
4.5 125 25h9

ø90m6
95-0,2
2
M24 1)2)
M24 1)2)
50
50
130 105
180 155
Ports max. tightening torques 23

)
4
(case drain port)
M1, M2 Measuring port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
5
1
2 6
on page 68
3
8
214

with boost pump (Impeller)

Series 3
R(L) R(L)
(582)
16+5
13
MB
322
317
232
K2 K1
B
95
ø4
210
232
ø4
50
ø22
8x
45
45
T (=
°
°
ML 36
0° 22° 30
89 ) '
X
47 161
457 232 232
530
614
640
16 U for right hand rotation
M2
B1
231
182
ø263+5
ø400h8
ø255
15 0 15
L R
50
182
R(L)
M1 B
Flange 400, 8-hole Control valve mounting
similar to 32
301 50 for left hand rotation
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
Y
View Y View X
MS
152.4
ø125
B and B1(shown without blanking plate)

96.8
ø50
S SAE 5 in
SAE 2 in high pressure series standard pressure series
44.5
92.1
215

with boost pump (Impeller)
Shaft ends
AS25x14x125 W90x3x28x9g
4.5 125 25h9

ø90m6
95-0,2
2
M24 1)2)
M24 1)2)
50
50
130 105
180 155

4
ML Measuring port boost pressure DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
(case drain port)
M1, M2 Measuring port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm 5
3
B Pressure port (high pressure series) SAE J518 ) 2 in
1
2
on page 68
3
8
216

Series 3
R(L) (622)
R(L)
16+5
13
344
350
232
ø4
50
MB K2 K1
95
225
ø4
ø22
8x
45
45
T (=
°
°
S MS 36 22° 30
0° '
98 )
47 203 X
548 232 232
633
Thread for eye bolts Y

M20x2,5; 30 deep DIN 580 Control valve mounting
16 U M2 B1 MB1
231
210
ø333+5
ø400h8
ø322
15 0 15
L R
55
210
R(L)
Flange 400, 8-hole M1 B MB

similar to 35
ISO 3019-2 (metric) 360 51 Control valve mounting for
left hand rotation
Y
View Y View X
M20; 30 deep
B and B1(shown without blanking plate)
152.4
ø125
96.8
ø50
S SAE 5 in
standard pressure series
44.5
44.5 M16; 24 deep

92.1
96.8 SAE 2 in high pressure series

217

Shaft ends
AS28x16x160 W100x3x32x9g
4,5 160 28h9

ø100m6
106
2
M24 1)2)
M24 1)2)
50
50
165 105
215 155
Ports max. tightening torque 3

2
)
M B, M B1 Measuring port outlet pressure DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
4
(case drain port)
M1, M2 Measuring port control chamber press.or DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
dependent on control device DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 80 Nm
5
1
2 6
on page 68
3
8
218
Through drive
The axial piston unit A4VSO can be equipped with a through drive, as shown in the type code on page 4.
The through drive execution is designated by the code K/U 31...99.
We recommend, that no more than three pumps be coupled together.
Permissible input and through drive torques
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Splined shaft
Max. perm. total input torque at shaft of pump 1
(Pump 1 + pump 2) Ttot max Nm 446 790 1392 2004 2782 3952 5566 8348 11130
TD1 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
A Perm.through drive torque
TD2 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
TD1 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
B Perm. through drive torque
TD2 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
Keyed shaft
Max. perm. total input torque at shaft of pump 1
(Pump 1 + pump 2) Ttot max Nm 380 700 1392 1400 2300 3557 5200 7513 9444
TD1 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
A Perm. through drive torque
TD2 max Nm 157 305 696 398 909 1581 2417 3339 3879
TD1 max Nm 157 305 696 398 909 1581 2417 3339 3879
B Perm. through drive torque
TD2 max Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
Distribution of torques
A B
TGes TGes
TD1 TD2 TD1 TD2
Single pump with through drive

If no further pumps are factory-mounted the simple type code is sufficient.
included in this case are:
on all through drives except K/U 99
shaft coupler, mounting screws, seal and if required an adapter flange
on K/U 99
with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange; unit is closed with pressure tight cover.
Universal through drive

On pump sizes 125...355 all through drives are supplied as universal through drives „U“ .
These have the advantage, that they can be adapted later on.
Simply by exchanging the adapter flange and the shaft coupler it is possible to convert the through drive option.
The conversion sets must be ordered separately, see RE 95581.
Combination pumps
Independent circuits are available for the user when further pumps are built on.
1. If the combination consists of 2 Rexroth axial piston pumps, and if this must be factory mounted, the two individual type
codes must be joined by a „+“ .
Ordering example:
A4VSO 125 DR / 30 R – PPB13K33 + A4VSO 71 DR / 10 R – PZB13N00
2 If a gear or a radial piston pump must be factory mounted as the second pump please consult us.
219
Overview of A4VSO through drive options

Through drive - A4VSO Mounting option 2. pump Through drive
Flange Coupler for splined Code A4VSO/G A4CSG A10V(S)O/31(2) 5) A10V(S)O/52(3) External/internal available
shaft 6) size (shaft) size (shaft) size (shaft) size (shaft) gear pump for size
Flange ISO 3019-2 (metric) 1
80, 2-hole 19-4 (3/4in, 11T) 3) K/UB2 – – 18 (S)/31 10 (S) – 71
100, 2-hole 22-4 (7/8in, 13T) 3) K/UB3 – – 28 (S)/31 – – 40...180
25-4 (1in, 15T) 3) K/UB4 – – 45 (S)/31 – – 40...500
125, 2-hole 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T) 3) K/UB5 – – 71 (S)/31 – – 71...355
38-4(1 1/2in, 17T) 3) UB6 – – 100 (S)/31 – – in preparation
2
125, 4-hole W 32x2x14x9g 2) K/U31 40 (Z) – – – – 40...500
140, 4-hole W 40x2x18x9g 2) K/U33 71 (Z) – – – – 71...750
160, 4-hole W 50x2x24x9g 2) K/U34 125 (Z) – – – – 125...750
180 (Z) – – – – 180...750
32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T) 3) UB8 – – 71 (S)/32 – – 250
180, 4-hole 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T) 3) K/UB7 – – 140 (S)/31/32 – – 180... 500 3
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T) 3) UB9 – – 100 (S)/32 – – in preparation
224, 4-hole W 60x2x28x9g 2) K/U35 250 (Z) 250 (Z) – – – 250...750
W 70x3x22x9g 2) K/U77 355 (Z) 355 (Z) – – – 355, 500
315, 8-hole W 80x3x25x9g 2) K43 500 (Z) 500 (Z) – – – 500, 750
400, 8-hole W 90x3x28x9g 2) K76 750 (Z) 750 (Z) – – – 750 4
W 100x3x32x9g 2) K88 1000 (Z) – – – – 1000
Flange SAE J 744 (ISO 3019-1)
82-2 (A) 1) 16-4 (5/8in, 9T) 3) K/U01 – – – – AZ-PF-1X- 40...750
004...022 4)
19-4 (3/4in, 11T) 3) K/U52 – – 18 (S)/31 10, 18 (S) – 40 u. 71
101-2 (B) 1) 22-4 (7/8in, 13T) 3) K/U68 – – 28 (S)/31 28 (S) AZ-PN-1X- 40...500 5
020...032 4)
25-4 (1in, 15T) 3) K/U04 – – 45 (S)/31 45 (S) PGH4 40...500
127-2 (C) 1) 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T) 3) K/U07 – – 71 (S)/31 – – 71...500
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T) 3) K/U24 – – 100 (S)/31 85 (S) PGH5 125...500
152-4 (D) 1) 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T) 3) K/U17 – – 140 (S)/31 – – 180...500
6
Dia 63-4, metr. Keyed dia 25 K/U57 – – – – R4 40 u. 71
1
) 2 = 2-hole, 4 = 4-hole
2
) to DIN 5480
3
) Splined shafts acc. to SAEJ744 OCT83
4
) Rexroth recommends special executions of the gear pumps. Please consult us.
5
) If a through drive for an A10V(S)O with R-shaft is desired, please consult us. 7
6
) Keyed shaft on through drive code K/U57
8
220
Permissible mass moment of inertia

referred to the mounting flange of the main pump
m1 m2 m1, m2 [kg] Weight of pump
l1, l2 [mm] Distance center of gravity
1 1
Tm = m 1 • l 1 • + m 2 • l2 • [Nm]
102 102
l1
l2
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Perm. mass moment of inertia Tm perm. Nm 1800 2000 4200 4200 9300 9300 15600 19500 19500
Perm. mass moment at
dynam. acceleration of Tm perm. Nm 180 200 420 420 930 930 1560 1950 1950
10 g ^
= 98,1 m/sec2
Weight (A4VSO...DR) m kg 39 53 88 102 184 207 320 460 605
Distance center of gravity l1 mm 120 140 170 180 210 220 230 260 290
221

Dimensions combination pumps certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSO + A4VSO
A4VSO A4VSO
(1.Pumpe) (2.Pumpe)
Overall lenght A 3
A4VSO A4VSO..DR..N00 (2. pump)
(1. pump) Size 40 Size 71 Size 125 Size 180 Size 250 Size 355 Size 500 size 750 Size 1000
Size 40 554 – – – – – – – –
Size 71 582 611 – – – – – – –
Size 125 635 664 724 – – – – – –
4
Size 180 659 688 748 768 – – – – –
Size 250 719 748 808 828 904 – – – –
Size 355 748 777 837 857 933 962 – – –
Size 500 771 800 860 880 976 1005 1110 – –
Size 750 821 850 910 930 1026 1055 1160 1214 –
5
Size 1000 * * * * * * * * 1368
* on request
8
222

Dimensions combination pumps certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSO + A10VSO
A4VSO A10VSO
(1.Pumpe) (2.Pumpe)
Overall lenght A
A4VSO A10VSO.../31 (2. pump)
(1. pump) Size 18 Size 28 Size 45 Size 71 Size 100 Size 140
Size 40 458 496 514 – – –
Size 71 486 497 540 580 – –
Size 125 564 575 593 628 698 –
Size 180 588 599 617 652 722 744
Size 250 648 659 677 712 782 791
Size 355 * * 706 741 * 820
Size 500 700 711 729 764 857 868
Size 750 750 761 779 812 907 917
Size 1000 * * * * * *
* on request
223

Dimensions through drives certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
K31 Flange ISO 3019-2 125, 4-hole

Shaft coupler to DIN 5480 N32x2x14x8H
for mounting an A4VSO/G 40 splined shaft
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2) 1
M-N 40 288 12,5 40 9 M12
71 316 12,5 33,6 9 M12
500 505 12,5 38,5 9 M12
A4 A3
M 750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
A6 2
1) Size A7 A8
40 – –
71 – –
+0.07
ø125+0.02
500 15 240
A8
0 750 in preparation
ø16
1000 in preparation 3
45º
A5
4
A1 to mounting flange A7
N
U31 Flange ISO 3019-2 125, 4-hole

5
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2)
M-N 125 369 12,5 35,6 9 M12
180 393 12,5 35,6 9 M12
250 453 12,5 38 9 M12
A4 A3 355 482 12,5 38 9 M12
M
6
A6
1)
+0.07
ø125+0.02
0 7
ø16
45º
A5 8
A1 to mounting flange
N
1
) Mounting screws and O-ring seal are included with supply
2
) Thread to DIN 13, for the max. tightening torques observe the general information on page 68
224


Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N
71 316 11,5 42,8 9 M12
500 505 12,5 57 9 M12
A4 A3 750 555 12,5 44,5 9 M12
M 750 * in preparation
A6 1000 in preparation
1)
Size A7 A8
71 – –
500 15 240
+0.07
ø140+0.02
A8
750 – –
0
ø18 750 * in preparation
1000 in preparation
* with boost pump
45º
A5
A1 to mounting face A7
N

Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 125 369 12,5 43,8 9 M12
180 393 12,5 43,8 9 M12
250 453 12,5 48,9 9 M12
A4 A3
M 355 482 12,5 48 9 M12
A6
1)
+0.07
ø140+0.02
0
ø18
45º
A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
225


for mounting an A4VSO/G 125 or 180 splined shaft
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 ) 1
M-N 500 505 13,5 54,5 9 M16
750 555 12,5 55,5 9 M16
M A4 A3 750 * in preparation
1)
* with boost pump
2
ø160 +0.02
+0.07
00
ø2
3
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
4
N

5
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 125 369 12,5 51,6 9 M16
180 393 12,5 51,6 9 M16
M A4 A3 250 453 12,5 54 9 M16
355 482 12,5 54 9 M16
A6
6
1)
ø160 +0.02
+0.07
00
ø2 7
45º A5
8
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
226


for mounting an A4VSO/G or A4CSG 250 splined shaft
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N
500 541 12,5 74 9 M20
A4 A3 750 591 12,5 74 9 M20
M A6
750* in preparation
1)
1000 in preparation
* with boost pump
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2
A5
45º
A1to mounting face

Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 250 469 12,5 75 9 M20
A4 A3 355 498 12,5 75 9 M20
M A6
1)
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2
A5
45º
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
227


Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 ) 1
M-N 500 541 12,5 76 9 M20
750 in preparation
M A4 A3 1000 in preparation
A6
1)
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2
3
A5
45º
A1 to mounting face
4
N

5
Size 355
M-N
M 75 12,5
M20 2)
1)
6
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2 7
9
45º
498 to mounting face 8
1
2
228


Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
500 590 53,5 71,9 19 M20
M-N 750 640 53,5 71,9 19 M20
750* in preparation
M A4 A3
1) 1000 in preparation
* with boost pump
A6
ø315 +0.03
+0.10
60
ø3
8x4
5º
(=
45
36
º
0º
)
22º30 A5
´
A1 to mounting face
N

Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
750 655 104 53 19 M20
M-N
750* in preparation
1000 in preparation
M A4 A3 1)
* with boost pump
A6
ø400+0.03
+0.10
50
ø4
8x4
5º
(=
45 º)
36
º
0
22º30 A5
´
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
229


Size 1000 1
M-N
M 99 53
1)
M20 2) 2
ø400+0.03
+0.10
50
ø4 3
8x4
5º
(=
45 º)
36
º
0
22º30 19
´
728 to mounting face
N 4
KB2 Flange ISO 3019-2 80, 2-hole

Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 19-4 SAE A-B, 3/4 in, 16/32 DP; 11T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 18/31 shaft S – see RE 92712 or an
A10VSO 10/52 shaft S – see RE 92703 5
M-N 40 in preparation
71 291 21,5 19 10 M10
M A4 A3
500 in preparation
A6
750 in preparation
6
1000 in preparation
1)
Size A7 A8
40 in preparation
+0.05
ø80+0.02
A8
71 2 140
500 in preparation
7
750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
Sizes 125...355 with U-through drive in
ø109
preparation
45º A5
A1 to mounting face 8
A7
N
1
2
3
) To ANSI B92.1a-1976, 30° pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, fit class 5
230


Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 22-4 SAE B, 7/8 in, 16/32 DP; 13T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 28/31 splined shaft S (see RE 92711)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N
40 290 20,3 23 10 M12
A4 A3 71 291 20,4 23 10 M12
M in preparation
A6 500
750 in preparation
1) 1000 in preparation
Size A7 A8
40 – –
ø100 +0.02
+0.05
A8
71 2 140
500 in preparation
750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
ø140
45º A5
UB3 Flange ISO 3019-2 100, 2-hole

Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 22-4 SAE B, 7/8 in, 16/32 DP; 13T 3)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 369 20,5 24,9 10 M12
125
180 393 20,5 24,9 10 M12
A4 A3
A6
355 in preparation
1)
ø100 +0.02
+0.05
ø140
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1
) 2 mounting screws and O-ring seal are included with supply
2
3
) To ANSI B92.1a-1976, 30°pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, fit class 5
231


Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 25-4 SAE B-B, 1 in, 16/32 DP; 15T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 45/31 splined shaft S – see RE 92711
M-N Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2) 1
40 290 20,8 27,5 10 M12
A4 A3 71 316 20,8 27,5 8 M12
M 500 505 20,4 28,9 10 M12
A6
750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
1)
2
Size A7 A8
40 – –
ø100 +0.02
+0.05
71 – –
A8
500 15 240
750 in preparation
ø140
45º A5
4
N

Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 25-4 SAE B-B, 1 in, 16/32 DP; 15T 3)
5
M-N 125 369 18,9 29,5 10 M12
180 393 18,9 29,5 10 M12
A4 A3
M 250 453 20,9 29,5 10 M12
A6
355 482 20,9 29,5 10 M12
6
1)
ø100 +0.02
+0.05
ø140
45º A5
N
1
2
3
232


Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 32-4 SAE C, 1 1/4 in, 12/24 DP; 14T 3)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
71 321 23 38 10 M20
M-N
500 in preparation
750 in preparation
M
A6 A4 A3 1000 in preparation
1)
ø125 +0.02
+0.05
80
ø1
45º A5
A1 to mounting face

Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N
125 369 20 38 9 M16
A4 A3 180 393 20 38 9 M16
M 250 453 20,9 37,9 9 M16
A6
355 482 20,9 37,9 9 M16
1)
ø125 +0.02
+0.05
ø180
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
3
233


Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2) 1
180 in preparation
M A4 A3 250 453 20,9 38 9 M16
355 in preparation
A6
1)
2
+0.05
ø160 +0.02
00
ø2
3
45º A5
N
1
2
3
5
8
234


Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in, 8/16 DP; 13T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 140/31(32) splined shaft S – see RE 92711 (RE 92714)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 500 530 10,4 63,6 10 M16
750 in preparation
A4 A3
1000 in preparation
M A6
1)
+0.07
ø180 +0.02
24
ø2
45º
A5
N A1 to mounting face

Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in, 8/16 DP; 13T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 140/31(32) splined shaft S – see RE 92711 (RE 92714)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
180 406 10,6 62 9 M16
M-N
250 453 10,6 64 9 M16
A4 A3 355 482 10,6 64 9 M16
M A6
1)
+0.07
ø180 +0.02
24
ø2
45º
A5
1
2
3
235

K01 Flange ISO 3019-1 82-2 (SAE A)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 16-4 SAE A, 5/8 in, 16/32 DP; 9T 3)
for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PF-1X-004 ... 022 (see RE 10089)
Rexroth recommends a special execution of the gear pump, please consult us
1
M-N 40 263 10,3 25,9 10 M10
71 291 10,3 24,6 10 M10
A4 A3
500 505 10,3 32,7 10 M10
M 555 10,3 32,7 10 M10
A6 750
+0.05
ø82,55 +0.02
750* in preparation 2
1000 in preparation
NG A7 A8
40 – –
A8
71 2 140
500 15 240
3
750 – –
1)
750* in preparation
only on 1000 in preparation
ø106,5 size 40 and 500 * with boost pump
45º A5
A1 to mounting face A7 4
N
U01 Flange ISO 3019-1 82-2 (SAE A)
Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 16-4 SAE A, 5/8 in, 16/32 DP; 9T 3)
for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PF-1X-004 ... 022 (see RE 10089)
Rexroth recommends a special execution of the gear pump, please consult us 5
M-N
125 369 16 19,4 13 M10
A4 A3 180 393 16 19,4 13 M10
M 250 453 16 19,4 13 M10
A6
+0.05
ø82,55 +0.02
355 482 16 19,4 13 M10

6
7
1)
ø106,5
45º A5
N
1
2
3
236


Shaft coupler for splined shaft, 19-4 SAE A-B, 3/4 in, 16/32 DP; 11T 3)
for mounting an A10VSO 18/31 splined shaft S (see RE 92711) or
A10VSO10 or 18/52 splined shaft S (see RE 92703)
M-N 40 263 10,5 33,8 10 M10
A4 71 315 10,5 30 10 M10
A3
A6
+0.05
ø82,55 +0.02
750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
preparation
1)
ø106,5
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
1
2
3
237

Dimensions through drives certified installation drawing. Dimensionse in mm.
K68 Flange ISO 3019-1 101-2 (SAE B)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 22-4 SAE B, 7/8 in, 16/32 DP; 13T 3)
for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PN-1X020...032 (see RE 10091 or an
A10VO 28/31 and 52(53) splined shaft S (see RE 92701 and 92703)
Rexroth recommends a special excution of the gear pump, please consult us 1
M-N 40 290 20,4 23,1 10 M12
only on 71 322 10,4 35,1 10 M12
size 500 A4 A3
M 500 505 19,5 25 10 M12
1)
Size A7 A8
40 – –
+0.02
+0.05
71 – –
A8
15 240
ø101,5
500
750 in preparation
ø146
45º A5
A1 to mounting face A7 4
U68 Flange ISO 3019-1 101-2 (SAE B)

for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PN-1X020...032 (see RE 10091 or an
A10VO 28/31 and 52(53) splined shaft S (see RE 92701 and 92703) 5
Rexroth recommends a special execution of the gear pump, please consult us
M-N
125 369 28 25 13 M12
A4 A3 180 393 28 25 13 M12
M 250 453 19,5 23,1 13 M12
A6
355 482 19,5 23,1 13 M12 6
1)
+0.02
+0.05
ø101,5
ø146 only on
size 125 and 180
45º A5
N
1
2
3
238


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 25-4 SAE B-B, 1 in, 16/32 DP; 15T 3)
for mounting an A10VO 45/31 and 52 (53) splined shaft S (see RE 92701 and 92703) or an
internal gear pump PGH4 (see RE 10223)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 40 290 10,4 37,9 10 M12
71 322 10,3 35,7 10 M12
A4 A3
M 500 505 10,3 28,9 10 M12
1000 in preparation
1)
Size A7 A8
+0.02
+0.05
40 – –
A8
71 – –
ø101,6
500 15 240
750 in preparation
1000 in preparation
ø146
45º A5
U04 Flange ISO 3019-1 101-2 (SAE B)

for mounting an A10VO 45/31 and 52 (53) splined shaft S (see RE 92701 and 92703) or an
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 125 369 18,9 29,4 13 M12
180 393 18,9 29,4 13 M12
A4 A3
M 250 453 18,9 29,4 13 M12
A6 355 482 18,9 29,4 13 M12
1)
+0.02
+0.05
ø101,6
ø146 only on
size 125 and 180
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
3
239

K07 Flange ISO 3019-1 127-2 (SAE C)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 32-4 SAE C, 1 1/4 in, 12/24 DP; 14T 3)
for mounting an A10VO 71/31 splined shaft S (see RE 92701)
1
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 71 321 10,4 47,6 13 M16
A4 A3 500 505 11,3 40,2 13 M16
A6
1000 in preparation
1)
Size A7 A8 2
71 – –
500 15 240
+0.02
+0.05
750 in preparation
A8
ø127
1000 in preparation
ø181
45º A5
4
N
U07 Flange ISO 3019-1 127-2 (SAE C)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 32-4 SAE C, 1 1/4 in, 12/24 DP; 14T 3)
5
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
M-N 125 369 20,9 37,9 13 M16
180 393 20,9 37,9 13 M16
A4 A3
M 250 453 20,9 37,9 13 M16
A6 355 482 20,9 37,9 13 M16
6
1)
+0.02
+0.05
ø127
ø181
45º A5
N
1
2
3
240


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 38-4 SAE C-C, 1 1/2 in, 12/24 DP; 17T 3)
for mounting an A10VO 100/31 splined shaft S (see RE 92701) or an A10VO 85/52(53) splined shaft S
(see RE 92703) or an internal gear pump PGH5 (see RE 10223)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
500 505 10,3 56,7 13 M16
M-N
750 in preparation
A4 A3 1000 in preparation
M
A6 1)
+0.02
+0.05
1
ø127
ø18
A5
U24 Flange ISO 3019-1 127-2 (SAE C)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 38-4 SAE C-C, 1 1/2 in, 12/24 DP; 17T 3)
(see RE 92703) or an internal gear pump PGH5 (see RE 10223)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 )
125 369 10,4 50 13 M16
M-N 180 393 10,4 50 13 M16
A4 A3 250 453 12,4 55 13 M16
M 355 482 12,4 55 13 M16
A6 1)
+0.02
+0.05
1
ø127
ø18
45º
A5
1
2
3
241

K17 Flange ISO 3019-1 152-4 (SAE D)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in, 8/16 DP; 13T 3)
1
500 505 10,4 59,6 13 M16
1000 in preparation
A4 A3
M A6
1) 2
ø152,4+0.02
+0.05
8,5
ø22
3
45º
A5
N
U17 Flange ISO 3019-1 152-4 (SAE D)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in, 8/16 DP; 13T 3)
5
180 406 10,4 62 13 M16
M-N 250 453 10,6 62 13 M16
355 482 10,6 62 13 M16
A4 A3
M A6 6
1)
ø152,4+0.02
+0.05
8,5
ø22 7
45º
A5
8
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
3
242

K57 dia. 63 metric, 4-hole

Shaft coupler for keyed shaft dia. 25
for mounting a radial piston pump R4 (see RE 11263)
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 2 ) A 7
M-N 40 288 11 56 8 M8 9
M 71 319 10,9 42 8 M8 9
A4 A3
500 in preparation
8JS8 A7 750 in preparation
preparation
28,3+0,2
1)
ø63H7
ø80
A6
ø25H7
45º
A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1
2
243

K99 Sizes 40 and 71

with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange, closed with pressure tight cover
M-N
shown without cover
A17 A4
M A16
A10 2
A7 A7
A11
A8
1)
20°
A6
A14
A13
A12
A15
A6
spline profile to 4x A5
N DIN 5480
4
see table
A9
A1 to mounting face
A2 to mounting face
depiction shows
size 71 5
Size
Main pump A1 A2 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
40 263 280 51.3±1 M12x25 37±0.2 37±0.2 0 18 9 2.3+0.1 ø118 ø105g6
71 291 310 48±1 M12x25 42,3 ±0,15 45 ±0,15 15.4±0.15 18 9 2.7+0.1 ø130 ø116g6
6
1
Size Spline profile ) O-Ring for retrofitting
Main pump A14 A15 A16 A17 to DIN 5480 (not in supply)
40 ø97.6–0.4 ø52 44 14 W25x1,25x18x9g 99 x 3

71 ø106.4–0.4 ø63 38 16 W30x1,25x22x9g 110,72 x 3,53
Sizes 125...1000 see pages 65 and 66 7
8
244

U99 Sizes 125...355

shown without cover

M-N
M
A8 A8 A17 A4
A6 A6 A16
A7
A5 1)
A9
A8
20°
A6
A10
A14
A15
A6
A8
A9
only on spline profile

A18 A18 sizes 250 to DIN 5480
and 355 see table A13
N A12
A1 to mounting face
A2 to mounting face
Size
Main pump A1 A2 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A12 A13
125 347 368 49.7±1 M14; 15 deep 33,2+0.15 M12; 18 deep – 79,2+0.15 ø118H7 9 2,8+0,2
180 371 392 49.7±1 M14; 15 deep 33,2+0.15 M12; 18 deep – 79,2+0.15 ø118H7 9 2,8+0,2
250 431 455 61.4±1 M20; 22 deep 44,5+0.15 M10; 15 deep 58,15+0.15 86,2+0.15 ø160H7 9 2,8+0,2
355 460 487 61.4±1 M20; 22 deep 44,5+0.15 M10; 15 deep 58,15+0.15 86,2+0.15 ø160H7 9 2,8+0,2
1
Size Spline profile ) O-Ring for retrofitting
Main pump A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 to DIN 5480 (included in supply)
125 ø121+0.1 ø70 46 22 – W35x1,25x26x9g 118 x 2

180 ø121+0.1 ø70 46 25 – W35x1,25x26x9g 118 x 2
250 ø163+0.1 ø87 64 30,5 86,2+0,15 W42x1,25x32x9g 160 x 2
355 ø163+0.1 ø87 64 34 86,2+0,15 W42x1,25x32x9g 160 x 2
Sizes 500...1000 see page 66

245

K99 Sizes 500...1000

shown without cover
M M-N
+0.2 +0.2
112 —0.2 112 —0.2
72 +0.2 M16; 24 tief O-Ring

—0.2
A7 165 x 3 2
72 +0.2
—0.2 included in supply
70.7 +0.2
—0.2
60 +0.2
—0.2
47 +0.2
—0.2
100 +0.2
—0.2
20°
ø169 +0.4
ø160 +0.2
+0.7
A6
3
100 +0.2
—0.2
+0.2
47 —0.2
60 +0.2
—0.2
70.7 +0.2
—0.2
4xM16x30
spline profile
70.7 +0.2
—0.2 to DIN 5480
+0.2
70.7 —0.2 A5 see table 2.3
88 +0.2
—0.2 10 4
+0.2
88 —0.2 11
A4 A3
A2 to mounting face
Size Spline profile

Main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 to DIN 5480
500 505 527 73 41 M20; 24 deep ø115 75 W55x1,25x42x9g
750 555 577 73 41 M20: 24 deep ø115 75 W55x1,25x42x9g
6
750* in preparation
1000 628 650 77 66,5 M20; 30 deep ø138 65 W65x1,25x50x9g
* with boost pump
Sizes 40 and 71 see page 64 and sizes 125...355 see page 65
8
246
Installation notes
Mounting position:
Optional. The pump case must be filled with fluid during com- 2. Horizontal installation
missioning and remain full when operating. The highest situated of the ports»T«,»K1«, »K2« or »R/L« must
In order to reduce the operating noise level, all connecting lines be used for filling/bleeding and subsequently to connect the
(suction, pressure and case drain lines) must be de-coupled case drain line.
from the tank, using flexible elements.
2.1 Installation inside the reservoir
The use of check valves in the case drain line must be avoided.
a) When the minimum fluid level is equal to or lies above the
The case drain line must be returned directly to tank without a
upper edge of the pump: case drain port and suction port
reduction in cross section.
»S« open (see fig. 3).
Exceptions maybe possible, please consult us first.
1. Vertical installation (shaft end pointing upwards)
With a vertical installation, bearing flushing is recommended R(L)
to provide lubrication for the front bearing, see page 6.
The following installation conditions must be taken into
account:
1.1 Installation into the reservoir
K1(K2)
a) When the minimum fluid level is equal to or above the
pump mounting flange area: ports »R/L«, »T« and »S« open T S
(see fig. 1).
Fluid Fig. 3
b) When the minimum fluid level lies below the upper edge
T of the pump: case drain port and possibly port »S« must be
U piped, see fig. 4. Observe conditions as shown in point 1.2.
Fill pump housing prior to commissioning.
R(L)
2.2 Installation outside the reservoir
S Fill the pump housing before commissioning.
a) Mounting above the reservoir see fig. 4.
Fig. 1 Observe conditions as shown in point 1.2.
b) Mounting below the reservoir
b) When the minimum fluid level is below the mounting Case drain port and port »S« must be piped (see fig. 5).
flange area: ports»R/L«,»T« und possibly »S« must be piped
as shown in fig. 2. Also observe the conditions as shown in R(L)
point 1.2.
Filling point
U
T
U
T S
hmax = 800
R(L)
S htmax = 200
hmax = 800
htmax = 200 Fig. 4
Fig. 2
1.2 Installation outside the reservoir R(L)
Before installation, fill the pump housing with the pump in a
horizontal position.
Pipe port »T« to tank, »R/L« plugged.
Filling in mounted condition: fill via »R« and bleed via»T«, U
afterwards plug port»R«.
Conditions: A minimum pump inlet pressure (suction pres-
T S
sure) of 0,8 bar abs. is necessary. Avoid mounting above
the reservoir in order to reduce the noise level. Fig. 5
247
Notes
8
248
General information
– The pump A4VSO was designed for operation in open loop circuits.
– Systems design, installation and commissioning requires trained technicians or tradesmen.
– All hydraulic ports can only be used for the fastening of hydraulic service lines.
– Tightening torques:
- All tightening torques mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and may not be exceeded
(Maximum values for the female threads in the castings).
Please comply with the manufacturer‘s information regarding the max. permissible tightening torques for the used fittings.
- For fastening screws to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torque in each individual case acc. to
VDI 2230 issue 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot. Take suitable safety
measures (e.g. wear protective clothing).
– All given data and information has to be adhered to.
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set
Hydraulics forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reprodu-
Axial Piston Units ced or given to third parties without its consent.
An den Kelterwiesen 14 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
72160 Horb a.N., Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Telefon +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
249

RE 92053/03.09 1/8
Axial Piston Variable Pump A4VSO Supplementary to RE 92050
Replaces: 02.05
for HFC Fluids
Data sheet

Size NG71 to 355
Open circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for standard program 2 – Axial piston pump in swash plate design for hydrostatic
drives in open circuit operation
Technical data 3
– Especially suitable for operation with HFC fluids
– With the approved HFC fluids the units can be operated with
Safety information 8
the same speeds and pressures as on mineral oil
– The flow is proportional to the input drive speed and dis-
placement. By adjusting the swash plate angle it is possible
to infinitely vary the output flow.
– Good suction characteristics
– Low noise level
– Long service life
– High power/weight ratio
– Drive shaft capable of absorbing axial and radial loads
– Modular design
Note
– Short control times
This data sheet shows only the particular information which
is valid for operation of the axial piston pump with HFC- – Through drive and pump combinations possible
fluids. – Swivel angle indicator
All fundamental details on the A4VSO must be taken from
the main data sheet RE 92050. – Optional mounting position
250
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG A4VSO for HFC fluids | RE 92053/03.09

A4VS O / – F
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, variable A4VS
Type of operation
Size 71 125 180 250 355

03 Displacement Vg max in cm3 71 125 180 250 355
Control device
Pressure control DR ❍ DR..
Pressure control for parallel operation DP ❍ DP..
(RE 92060)
Flow control FR ❍ FR..
Pressure and flow control DFR ❍ DFR..
Power control with hyperbolic curve (RE 92064) LR ❍ LR..1)
Manual control MA ❍ MA..
(RE 92072)
04 Electric motor control EM ❍ EM..
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent HM ❍ HM..
Hydr. control, with servo/proportional valve (RE 92076) HS ❍ HS..1)
Electronic control EO ❍ EO..1)
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent (RE 92080) HD ❍ HD..1)
Electro-hydraulic control system DFE1 (RE 92088)
❍ DFE1..1)
System solution SYHDFEE (RE 30035)
Series
❍ – – – – 10(11)2)
05
– 30
06
counter clockwise L
Seals and fluid

07 NBR Nitrile-rubber, shaft seal PTFE Teflon, special version for HFC-fluids F
08 Shaft end
09 Mounting flange For further details see:
RE 92050 – A4VSO
10 Ports for service connections index number 10 to 14
11 Through drive
12 Filtration
1)
On operation with HFC-fluids make sure to observe the limitations in the individual data sheets of the control devices or the
mounted control valves
2)
Versions with HD-controls only in series 11
= available ❍ = in preparation – = not available

251
RE 92053/03.09 | A4VSO for HFC fluids Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid
For extensive information on the selection of hydraulic fluids Selection diagram and notes on the selection of hydraulic fluid
and for application conditions, please consult our data sheet
see RE 92050
RE 90223 (HF fluids).
In comparison with mineral oil based fluids, HFC fluids demons- 1
Temperature range
trate other, at times unfavourable properties. The following
guidelines will show how these special properties may be taken tmin t –10 °C
into account in the project design, operation and servicing of tmax d +50 °C
hydraulic systems.
topt +40 °C
The following fluids, with a water content of approx. 35 to 55%
in weight, are approved without any restrictions for speed and Higher temperatures are not permissible since this will result in
a substantial loss of water content. 2
pressure in comparison with operation on mineral oil based
fluids. When meeting the limits of viscosity and temperature, operation
– Fuchs Hydrotherm 46M on HFC-fluids is also allowed at low temperatures.
– Petrofer Ultrasafe 620 Important: The case drain fluid temperature is influenced by
speed and pressure, and is always higher than the tank tempe-
– Fuchs Renosafe 500 rature. However the max. temperature at any point in the system
– Houghton Houghto Safe 620 may not exceed 50 °C. 3
– Union Carbide HP 5046

Filtration of the hydraulic fluid
Operation on HFC-fluids is only possible when their properties
and values correspond to ISO 12922. Filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid,
which, in turn, increases the service life of the axial piston unit.
For HFC-fluids, other than the above mentioned ones, limi-
tations of the technical data according to RE 90223 must be To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit, a gravi-
observed. metric evaluation (weight of filtrations membranes) is necessary 4
for the hydraulic fluid to determine the amount of contamination
For operation on rolling oils and HFA-fluids, please consult us. by solid matter and to determine the cleanliness level similar
The notes on filtration, limit of viscosity and temperature range to ISO 4406. A cleanliness level of at least –/18/15 is to be
must also be observed. maintained.
Operating viscosity range Case drain pressure

5
see RE 92050 The permissible case drain pressure (housing pressure) depen-
ds on drive speed (see diagram).
Limit of viscosity range 180 Size
355 250 125
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: 4
Qmin = 10 mm2/s
Case drain pressure
for short periods (t < 1min), 6

tmax < +50 °C 3
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s
pL abs [bar]
only during start (cold start, within 15 min an operating

viscosity below 100 mm2/s should be reached) 2
tmin > –10 °C
1 7
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Speed n [rpm]
Maximum case drain pressure (housing pressure)
pL abs max _________________________________ 4 bar absolute
These are approximate values; under certain operating condi- 8

tions a reduction in these values may be necessary
Direction of flow
S to B (like in RE 92050)
252
Technical data
Bearing flushing
Operating with HFC-fluids requires external bearing flushing. Notes for setting and checking the flushing flow:
The flushing flow is carried out via port „U“, located in the front The flushing flow is dependent on the pressure difference 'p
flange of the axial piston pump. The flushing fluid flows through between U-port inlet and housing ('p = pU – phous).
the front bearing and leaves the housing together with the case This correlation is depicted, independently of the pump size, in
drain flow. the following diagram.
Important
Flushing flow through the U-port
1. Minimum required flushing flow qfl min in port U see table
2.0
2. Maximum permissible pressure pmax in port U see table
Flushing flow qSp / qSp bez

3. Reference flushing flow qfl ref to check the minimum required
flushig flow (see example) 1.5
Size 125 180 250 355

1.0 range of dispersion
qfl min L/min 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
pmax bar 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
0.5
qfl ref L/min 3.5 5.0 6.5 10.0
0.0
Note 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Make sure that the throttle screw in port U is turned in all the Pressure drop $p [bar]
way.
Example:
Type: A4VSO 250...F
Housing pressure: phous= 1 bar
Pressure in port U: pU = 3 bar
'p = 2 bar
– The table on the left side of this page shows a reference
flushing flow qfl ref = 6.5 L/min
– The above diagram shows the limits of the flushing flow range
qfl 1 = 0.56 • qfl ref = 3.6 L/min
qfl 2 = 0.94 • qfl ref = 6.1 L/min
– with this pressure drop of 2 bar the minimum required
flushing flow of qfl min = 2 L/min is reached. A flow check
should confirm a flushing flow within this range
253
Technical data
Operating pressure at pump inlet Operating pressure range outlet
Absolute pressure at port S (inlet port) see RE 92050
pabs min _________________________________ 0.8 bar absolute
pabs max __________________________________30 bar absolute 1
The density of almost all HF-fluids is higher than the density of
mineral oil. It is therefore absolutely necessary to ensure, that
the inlet pressure pabs min does not fall below the min. permissi-
ble 0.8 bar value.
All measures, which could obstruct the suction performance
must be avoided (eg. suction filter). 2
Determination of inlet pressure pabs at the inlet port S or

reduction of displacement with increase of drive speed
1.25
1.2

1.6
1.1 1.4
no max
1.2 3
n
1.0 1.0
Speed
0.9 0.8
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Vg
Displacement Vg max 4
The inlet pressure is the static feed pressure or the minimum
Important:
Observe the maximum permissible drive speed no max. zul. (speed
limit) see page 6
5
8
254
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering efficiencies and tolerances; values rounded)
Size 125 180 250 355
Displacement Vg max cm3 125 180 250 355
Speed 1)
maximum at Vg max no max rpm 1800 1800 1500 1500
maximum at Vg dVg max (speed limit) no max zul. rpm 2200 2100 1800 1700
minimum no min rpm 800 800 800 800
Flow
at no max qvo max L/min 225 324 375 533
at nE = 1500 rpm qVE max L/min 186 270 375 533
Power 'p = 350 bar
at no max Po max kW 131 189 219 311
at nE = 1500 rpm PE max kW 109 158 219 311
Torque
at Vg max 'p = 350 bar Tmax Nm 696 1002 1391 1976
'p = 100 bar T Nm 199 286 398 564
Torsional stiffness
Shaft end P c kNm/rad 260 328 527 800
Shaft end Z c kNm/rad 263 332 543 770
Moment of inertia
JTW kgm2 0.03 0.055 0.0959 0.19
Rotary unit
Angular acceleration maximum 2) D rad/s2 8000 6800 4800 3600
Case volume V L 4 5 10 8
Weight (with pressure control) approx. m kg 88 102 184 207
1
) Values are valid with inlet pressure pabs 1 bar at inlet port S, with increased speed up to speed limit please observe diagram, page 5
2
) – The range of validity lies between the minimum required and the maximum permissible drive speeds.
Valid for external excitation (eg. diesel engine 2- to 8-fold rotary frequency, cardan shaft 2 fold rotary frequency).
– The limiting value is only valid for a single pump.
– The loading capacity of the connecting parts must be considered.
Caution: Exceeding the maximum or minimum permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a reduction in operational service
life or total destruction of the axial piston unit.
The permissible values can be determined through calculation.
Determination of pump size

V g • n • KV Vg = geometr. displacement per rev. in cm3
Flow qV = [L/min]
1000 p = pressure difference in bar
1,59 • Vg • 'p n = speed in rpm
100 • Kmh KV = volumetric efficiency
2S • T • n T•n qV • 'p Kmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = = [kW]
60000 9549 600 • Kt Kt = overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)

see RE 92050
255
Installation notes
General check on components
It must be checked, that every component in the system is sui-
table for the chosen hydraulic fluid. At the same time it must be
ascertained, that seal and hose materials and casings, as well
as paint finishes are compatible with the hydraulic fluid. 1
Reservoir
HF fluids feature poor air and contamination seperating propor-
ties.
The seperating capacity can be improved by a longer dwell
2
time in the tank, thus by using a larger reservoir. In addition,
baffles may be installed, either with openings or as weirs, with
meshes fitted in the openings (settling of the fluid).
The lower temperature limits require a controlled cooling of
the fluid. A large reservoir surface improves the natural cooling
capacity of the sysrem.
Evaporation losses may be considerably reduced by using a tank 3
breather.
No restrictions in comparison with the A4VSO (RE 92050).
4
Commissioning
Following correct filling with the operating fluid, start the sy-
stem under partial load and gradually increase to full load. After
operation of all components, the system must carefully bled.
Filters and fluid must be carefully monitored, especially during
the first few days of operation. Paint deposits and any remai- 5
ning old fluid must be removed.
Literature references
ISO 12922 similar to the 7. Luxembourg report
VDMA standard 24314 (Conversion guidelines) 6
8
256
General information
– The pump A4VSO was designed for operation in open loop circuits.
- All tightening torques mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and may not be exceeded.
(Maximum values for the female threads in the castings).
Please comply with the manufacturer‘s information regarding the max. permissible tightening torques for the used fittings.
- For fastening screws to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torque in each individual case acc. to
VDI 2230 issue 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot. Take suitable safety
measures (e.g. wear protective clothing).
– All given data and information has to be adhered to.
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
257
RE 92122/04.12 1/28
Axial Piston Variable Pump Replaces: 06.10
A4VBO
Data sheet
Series 10, 30
Size 71, 125, 450
Maximum pressure 500 bar
Open circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for standard program 2 – Axial piston variable pump in swash plate design for hydro-
static drives in open circuit as well as operation with boosted
Technical data 4
inlet
Characteristics 9
– The flow is proportional to the input drive speed and dis-
Control devices 11 placement. By adjusting the swash plate angle it is possible
to infinitely vary the output flow.
– Slot-controlled swash plate design
– Infinitely variable displacement
– Low noise level
Overview of attachments 22
– Axial and radial loading on the drive shaft
– Excellent power to weight ratio
– Modular design
– Visual swivel angle indicator
– Bearing flushing
258
2/28 Bosch Rexroth AG A4VBO Series 10 and 30 RE 92122/04.12

A4VB O / V – 25
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Axial piston unit

01 Swash plate design, variable, nominal pressure 450 bar, maximum pressure 500 bar A4VB
Type of operation
Size
03 | Displacement Vg max in cm3 071 125 450
Control devices 071 125 450

Hydraulic control with proportional valve (see RE 92076) ● ● ● HS4
04
Electro-hydraulic control system DFE1 (see RE 92088) ● ● – DFE1
Series 071 125 450

Series 1, Index 0 ● – – 10
05
Series 3, Index 0 – ● ● 30
Viewed from drive shaft clockwise R
06
counter clockwise L
Seals
Drive shaft 071 125 450

Splined shaft DIN 5480 without clearance groove – – ● R
08
Splined shaft DIN 5480 ● ● – Z
Mounting flange 071 125 450

Similar to ISO 3019-2 metric 4-Loch ● ● – B
09
8-Loch – – ● H

Port B and S on side 90° off set, fixing thread metric,
10 25
2. outlet port B1 opposite B - closed with blind plate on delivery
● = Available ❍ = On request – = Not available = Preferred program

259
RE 92122/04.12 A4VBO Series 10 and 30 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/28

A4VB O / V – 25
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Through drive 071 125 450

1
With through drive for mounting an axial piston pump or gear unit ● ● ● K...
Flange Coupler for splined shaft to mount
140, 4-bolt (ISO1)) 40x2x18x9g A4VBO, A4VSO, A4VSG 71 ● – – 33
A4VBO, A4VSO, A4VSG 125; – ● ❍
160, 4-bolt (ISO1)) 50x2x24x9g 34
A4VSO, A4VSG 180
315, 8-bolt (ISO1)) 80x3x25x9g A4VBO 450 – – ● 97 2
11 82-2 (SAE A) 5/8in 16-4 (SAE A) AZ-PF-1X-004...022 ❍ ❍ ❍ 01
101-2 (SAE B) 7/8in 22-4 (SAE B) A10V(S)O 28/31(2)/52(3), ❍ ❍ ❍
68
AZ-PN-1X-020...032
101-2 (SAE B) 1in 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10V(S)O 45/31, A10V(S)O ❍ ❍ ❍
04
45/52(3), PGH4
127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/2in 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10V(S)O 100/31, A10V(S)O – ❍ ❍ 3
24
85/52(3), PGH5
With through drive shaft, without coupler, without adaptor flange, closed with cover ● ● ● 99
1) To ISO 3019-2 metric
● = Available ❍ = On request – = Not available = Preferred program

260
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid Selection diagram
For extensive information on the selection of hydraulic fluids –20 0 20 40 60 80 100

1000 1000
and application conditions please consult our data sheet RE
600
90220 (mineral oils) prior to system design. 400
The variable pump A4VBO is not suitable for operation on
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG
200
Viscosity Q (mm2/s)
22
32
46
68
10
HFA, HFB and HFC fluids. For operation on HFD or ecologi-
0
cally acceptable fluids please consult us. 100
80
60
40
36
Within the operating viscosity range between 16...100 mm2/s
Qopt
the unit can be operated without limitations of the technical
data. 20
16
In order to obtain optimum efficiency and service life, we
recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating tempera- 10 10
ture) lies in the range –25 –10 10 30 50 70 90 Temperature
t (°C)
t min = –25 °C Fluid temperature range t max = + 90 °C
Qopt = opt. viscosity range 16...36 mm2/s
referred to tank temperature (open circuit). Notes on the selection of hydraulic fluid
In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
Limit of viscosity range
operating temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: the ambient temperature.
Qmin = 10 mm2/s The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the ope-
for short periods (t < 3 min) rating temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum
at max. permissible case drain temperature range (Qopt); see shaded section in the selection diagram. We
tmax = +90° C. recommend, that the higher viscosity grade is selected in each
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s case.
for short periods (on cold start maximum operating
viscosity of 100 mm2/s should be reached within 15 Temperature range (see selection diagram)
min)
tmin = – 25° C
tmin= –25° C
tmax = + 90° C
For detailed information on operation with low temperatures
see RE 90300-03-B. Example: at an ambient temperature of X° C the operating
temperature in the tank is 60° C. In the optimum viscosity
range (Qopt; shaded area), this corresponds to grades VG 46 or
VG 68; select: VG 68.
Important: The case drain temperature is influenced by pres-
sure and speed and is always higher than the tank temperature.
However the max. temperature at any point in the system may not
exceed 90° C.
261
Technical data
Bearing flushing Filtration of the fluid (axial piston unit)
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is The finer the filtration, the better the achieved cleanliness of the
required for a safe, continuous operation: fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston unit.
– Operation at critical conditions of temperature and viscosity To ensure a reliable functioning of the axial piston unit, a
1
with mineral oil minimum cleanliness class of 20/18/15 acc. to ISO 4406 is
necessary.
Flushing is recommended with vertical mounting (drive shaft
facing upwards) in order to ensure lubrication of the front bear-
ing and shaft seal ring. Case drain pressure
Flushing is carried out via port U, located in the front flange The permissible case drain pressure (housing pressure) de-
area of the pump. The flushing fluid flows through the front pends on the drive speed (see diagram).
bearing and leaves the pump together with the case drain flow. 2
71
450
125
Depending on pump size, the following flushing flows are
recommended: 4
Case drain pressure pabs (bar)

Size 71 125 450
recommended 3
qSp L/min 4 5 20
flushing flow
3
These recommended flushing flows will cause a pressure 2
drop of approx. 2 bar (series 10) and approx. 3 bar (series 30)
between the entrance to port U and the pump case (including
the pipe fittings. 1
0 1000 2000 3000
Note regarding size 125 Speed n (rpm)
When using external bearing flushing the throttle 4
screw at port U must be turned in to the end stop. Max.case drain pressure (housing pressure)
pL abs max 4 bar absolute
These figures are approx. values; under special operating con-

ditions restrictions may be necessary.
Flow direction 5
S to B
Turn throttle Temperature range for the shaft seal ring

screw in to The FKM-shaft seal ring is suitable for case drain temperatures
end stop between -25 °C to +90 °C.
6
Note regarding size 450 Hinweis
In the size 450, the flushing fluid is taken out of the existing For applications below -25 °C a NBR-shaft seal ring must
boost pressure source. When using an external flushing flow be used (permissible temperature range: -40 °C to +90 °C).
source, the throttle screw in port U must be turned out to a NBR-shaft seal ring must be stated in clear text when ordering.
dimension of 20 mm. Please consult us.
8
20
Turn throttle screw

out to a dimension
of 20 mm
262
Technical data
Operating pressure range
Pressure at service line (pressure port) B Boost pressure (at size 450 compulsory)
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 450 bar absolute 7
Boost pressure [bar]

Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 500 bar absolute
Single operating period _____________________________ 1 s
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h 6
Minimum pressure (high pressure side) ___________15 bar

At lower pressures, please consult us. 5
Rate of pressure change RA ________________ 16000 bar/s 1000 1500 1800
Drive speed [rpm]
pnom
Pressure p
't The inlet pressure is the static feed pressure or the minimum
'p Please note:

Max. permissible speed no max. zul. (speed limit) see
page 7
If the above conditions cannot be met, please consult us.
Time t Definition
Size 71/125: pressure at suction port S (inlet) The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design
Minimum inlet pressure pS min _____________ 0.8 bar absolute pressure.
Maximum inlet pressure pS max ______________30 bar absolute
Size 71/125: minimum pressure (inlet) The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operat-
In order to avoid damage to the axial piston unit, a minimum ing pressure within the single operating period. The sum of the
pressure must be ensured at the inlet suction port S (inlet). single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
This minimum pressure is dependent on the speed and dis- period.
placement of the axial piston unit.
1,25 required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
1,2 1,6
Speed no max
1,1 1,4 Rate of pressure change RA

1,2 Maximum permissible rate of pressure build-up and pressure
n
1,0 1,0 reduction during a pressure change over the entire pressure
0,9 0,8 range.
t2
0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 Single operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
Vg Maximum pressure pmax

Displacement Vg max Nominal pressure pnom
Size 450: pressure at suction port S (inlet)

Minimum suction pressure pS min _____________ 5 bar absolute
Maximum suction pressure pS max ___________30 bar absolute
Minimum pressure (high pressure side)
Time t
263
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without efficiencies and tolerances; values rounded)
Size 71 125 450
Displacement Vg max cm3 71 125 450
1
Speed 1)
max. at Vg max no max min–1 2200 1800 1800
max. at Vg dVg max
no max zul. min–1 2700 2200 1800
(speed limit)
Flow
at no max qvo max L/min 156 225 810
at nE = 1500 rpm qVE max L/min 107 188 675 2
Power 'p = 450 bar
at no max Po max kW 117 169 608
at nE = 1500 min–1 PE max kW 80 141 506
Torque
at Vg max 'p = 450 bar Tmax Nm 508 894 3220
'p = 100 bar T Nm 113 199 716 3
Torsional stiffness shaft R c kNm/rad – – 1234
shaft Z c kNm/rad 146 263 –
Moooment of inertia
JTW kgm2 0.0121 0.03 0.3325
rotary group
Angular acceleration max.2) D rad/s2 11000 8000 2800
Filling capacity V L 2.5 5 14 4
Weight (with HS4) approx. m kg 65 100 390
1) The values are valid for sizes 71 and 125 with an inlet pressure of pabs 1 bar at suction port S, for increase of speed up to the
speed limit observe the diagram on page 6. For the size 450 observe the diagram „Compulsory boost requirements“ on page 6.
2) The range of validity lies between the minimum required and the maximum permissible drive speeds.
Valid for external excitation (eg. diesel engine 2-8 fold rotary frequency, cardan shaft 2 fold rotary frequency).
The limiting value is only valid for a single pump.
The loading capacity of the connecting parts must be considered. 5
Note
Exceeding the maximum or minimum permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a reduction in operational service life or
total destruction of the axial piston unit. The permissible values can be determined through calculation.
Determining the operating characteristics
Vg • n • K V Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3 6

Flow qV = [L/min]
1000 'p = Differential pressure in bar
Vg • 'p n = Speed rpm
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • S • Kmh KV = Volumetric efficiency
2S • T • n qV • 'p Kmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Total efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
7
8
264
Technical data
Size NG 71 125 450
Radial force maximum Fq
X/2 X/2
Fq max N 1200 1600 3000
X
Axial force maximum

r Fax
± Fax max N 800 1000 2200
Note
Special requirements apply in the case of belt drives. Please contact us.
Force transfer direction of the permissible axial force:
+ Fax max = Increase in service life of bearings
– Fax max = Reduction in service life of bearings (avoid)

Size NG 71 125 450
Torque
Tmax Nm 508 894 3220
at Vg max and 'p = 450 bar)1)
Input torque for shaft end, maximum2)
R TE max Nm – – 6440
Z TE max Nm 790 1392 –
Through drive torque maximum TD max 395 696 3220
1) Efficiency not considered
2) For drive shafts with no radial force
Torque distribution
TA1 TA2
TE
1st pump 2nd pump
TD
265
Characteristics
Drive power and flow
(Fluid: hydraulic oil ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50 °C)
qv • p qv
Overall efficiency: Kt = Volumetric efficiency: Kv = 1
Size 71 Size 125
400 200
150 150
qv 2
Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]

Flow qv [L/min]
Drive power P [kW]

300 150
100 100
Pqv max
200 qv 100
50 50
3
Pqv Null
Pqv max
100 50
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 450
Pqv Null
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 450
n = 1800 rpm Operating pressure p [bar] 4
n = 1500 rpm
n = 1800 rpm
n = 1500 rpm
8
266
Characteristics
(Fluid: hydraulic oil ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50 °C)
qv • p qv
Overall efficiency: Kt = Volumetric efficiency: Kv =
Size 450
800 800
Drive Power P [kW]

Flow qv [L/min]
qv
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
Pqv max
200 200
100 Pqv Null 100
100 200 300 400 450

n = 1800 rpm
n = 1500 rpm
267
Control devices
Control system HS4, with proportional valve (see RE 92076)
Size 71
The stepless displacement adjustment is achieved
p
with a proportional valve and an electric feedback of T P
the swivel angle. With an external pressure signal, the b a 1
bB A a
HS4-control device can be completed into a pressure-
power control system.
Sp
α B 1 B MB Rkv
P
S
U
2
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Size 125 Size 450
T P T P
a b a
b a
bB A a bB A
Sp Mp 4
B 1 B MB Rkv Rkv P
P B1 B MB1 MB2 MA
S
U S
U
U S MS M1 R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2
U S MS R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2
Size 71 125 450

Control pressure pmin bar 130 130 190
pmax bar 315 315 315
8
268
Control devices
Electro hydraulic control system DFE1
(see RE 92088)
p
The power, pressure and swivel angle control of the
variable displacement pump A4VBO...DFE1 is ac-
complished with an electrically driven proportional α
valve. Through a swivle angle feedback the current
signal to the proportional valve determines via the
control piston the swivel angle and thus the pump
displacement. B1 B M B
S
U
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
269

HS4 - hydraulic control, with proportional valve

134 332
83
Solenoid a Solenoid b
261
18
152
143
2
123
K1
ø18
12
K2
170
ø15
92.5
97
106
45° 45°
3
8 T MS 170
10 61 S 92 92
101 X
248
291
Y
4
MB
B1
Name plate
Partial view W
169
5
92.5
Rkv
ø140h8
34
P Sp
92.5
92
R(L) 30
48 48
27 U 6
B
166 27 Y
253.5
20
.9
Partial view X Partial view Y
S SAE 1 1/2" 45° 45°

16.9
Standard pressure range

B, B1
2 deep
69.9
ø67
ø50
ø40
8
M12
35.7 M12 18 deep
20 deep
270

DFE1 - Electro hydraulic control system

157 148
R(L)
264.5
18
GDM
12
B
154
ø18
K2 K1
12
170
92.5
97
MS 45° 45°
106
45
ø15
55
8 T S
170
61 93 93
X
101
248
291 15
342
Y
253.5
MB
B1
95
34
140 h8
15 0 15
L
92
95
45 U
55 B
Name plate MS
Y
27
166 27
248
M12 45°° 45°°

20 deep
°16.9
B, B1
+0.2
-0.2
2 deep
ø40
°ø67
°ø50
S SAE 1 1/2"
69.9

M12
18 deep
+0.2
35.7 -0.2
271

Drive shaft
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480
W40x2x18x9g
1
M12
ø140 h8
28 2
45
Ports 3
Designation Port for Standard Size1) Maximum State
pressure ab-
solute [bar]2)
Service line ISO/DIS 6164-3 DN-16 500 O
B
Fixing thread B DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
Additional port ISO/DIS 6164-3 DN-16 500 X 4
B1
Fixing thread B1 DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
Suction port SAE J5183) SAE 1 1/2 in 30 O
S
Fixing thread S DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 20 deep
K1, K2 Housing flushing ISO 61494) M27 x 2; 19 deep 4 X
MB Measuring pressure B ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 500 X
MS Measuring suction pressure ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 30 X 5
P, Sp Control pressure DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 15.5 deep 315 O
Rkv Return line control fluid DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 15.5 deep 210 O
Fluid filling and air bleed
R(L) ISO 61494) M27 x 2; 19 deep 4 O
(case drain port)
T Fluid drain ISO 61494) M27 x 2; 19 deep 4 X
U Bearing flushing ISO 61494) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 4 X 6
fittings.
3) Note: metric thread deviates from standard
O = Must be connected (on delivery closed with a plastic plug or flange cover)
X = Plugged (in normal operation) 7
Note
The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must ensure
that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified operating conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, tempera-
ture) with the necessary safety factors. 8
272

HS4 - Hydraulic control, with proportional valve, clockwise rotation

147
107 401
Information plate P
for flushing (Sp) R2 R5
Rkv R3 Solenoid a Solenoid b
R6
22
279.5
186
156
148
R4 R7
ø20
22
K2 K1
53.5-0.2
B
200
K
114.5
121
117 MB 45° 45°
ø20
8 T MS S 200
70 111.5 111.5
125 X
310
M2 B1
Name plate
37
117
ø160h8
15° 0 15°
L
50
117
112
R(L)
33 U
M1 B
203 14 Y
310
362.5
ø20.4
B, B1
2 deep
88.9
ø63
ø84
ø63
S SAE 2 1/2"
90

M12 45° 45° M16
50.8 17 deep 24 deep
273

DFE1 - Electro hydraulic control system

354
1
R(L)
Information plate
22
298
for flushing
GDM
12
B
186
2
ø20
22
B K2 K1
200
K
U
114.5
117
117
121
45° 45°
ø20
T 200 3
8 70 MS
111.5 111.5
125
310 X S
391
B1
Name plate
#
164
117
5
ø160 h8
15 0 15
L
50
112
117
U 6
B
33
203 14 Y

ø20.4
2deep
88.9
90
ø84
ø63
ø63
S SAE 2 1/2" B, B1
Standard pressure range 8
M12 45° 45° M16
50.8 17 deep 24 deep
274

Drive shaft
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480
W50x2x24x9g
M16
ø160 h8
36
54
64
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size1) Maximum pressure State
absolute [bar]2)
B
Fixing thread B DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
Additional port ISO/DIS 6164-3 DN-20 500 X
B1
Fixing thread B1 DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
Suction line SAE J5183) SAE 2 1/2´´ 30 O
S
Fixing thread S DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
K1, K2 Housing flushing ISO 61494) M33 x 2; 18 deep 4 X
MB Measuring pressure B ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 500 X
MS Measuring suction pressure ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 30 X
M1, M2 Measuring control pressure ISO 61494) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 315 X
P, Sp Control pressure DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 15.5 deep 315 O
Rkv Return line control fluid DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 15.5 deep 210 O
R(L) ISO 61494) M33 x 2; 18 deep 4 O
(case drain port)
R2-R7 Air bleed control unit DIN 3852 M10 x 1; 10 deep 315 X
T Fluid drain ISO 61494) M33 x 2; 18 deep 4 X
U Bearing flushing ISO 61494) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 7 X
fittings.
Note
that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified operating conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, tempera-
ture) with the necessary safety factors.
275
8
276

HS4 - Hydraulic control, with proportional valve

555
122
119 R(L) 110 110
MP MB2 R2 R5
MB1 R3 R6
16+5
13
361
280
274
281
"ø24
245
R7
205
190
R4
11
B
W K2
1 K1
45°"
184
20
161
5
"ø3
0
"ø4
0 6
U
U
8x4
15 T S 155 155
5°"
45 360°
MS 190 190
(=
°" ")
90 47 80
153 155 X 22°"30'
455
545
568
For eye bolt

M16-DIN5480 Y
Information plate
for flushing 113 B1
48 109 MA
Rkv
283
30°"
185
10°
"ø230 +5
"
50 50
"ø315h8
"ø225
15° 0 15°
L
185
P
0
R1
Name plate B
279 50 Y
455

45°" 45°"
S SAE 5" B, B1
2 deep
"ø168
152.4
"ø125
"ø125
"ø50
M30
M16 45 deep
92.1 23 deep
277

Drive shaft
R Splined shaft DIN 5480 without
clearance groove W80x3x25x9g
1
M20
42 2
90
153
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size1) Maximum State 3
pressure abso-
lute [bar]2)
B
Fixing thread B DIN 13 M30 x 3.5; 45 deep
Additional port ISO/DIS 6164-3 DN-50 500 X
B1
Fixing thread B1 DIN 13 M30 x 3.5; 45 deep 4
Suction SAE J5183) SAE 5 in 30 O
S
Fixing thread S DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
K1, K2 Housing flushing DIN 3852 M48 x 2; 22 deep 4 X
M B1 Measuring pressure B1 ISO 6149 M18 x 1.5; 14.5 deep 500 X
MS Measuring suction pressure ISO 6149 M18 x 1.5; 14.5 deep 30 X
MA, M B2, M P Measuring control pressure DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 315 X 5
P Control pressure DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 19 deep 315 X
Rkv Return line control fluid DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 19 deep 210 O
R (L) DIN 3852 M48 x 2; 22 deep 4 O
(case drain port)
R2-R7 Air bleed control device DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 315 X
T Fluid drain DIN 3852 M48 x 2; 22 deep 4 X 6
U Bearing flushing ISO 61494) M18 x 1.5; 14.5 deep 8 X

fittings.
4) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate standard. 7
Note
that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified operating conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, tempera- 8
ture) with the necessary safety factors.
278
Overview of attachments
Through drive - A4VBO Mounting option 2nd pump Through drive
Flange Coupler for splined Code A4VBO A4VSO/G A4CSG A10V(S) A10V(S) External/ Available
shaft O/31(2)1) O/52(3) internal for size
size size size size size gear pump
(shaft) (shaft) (shaft) (shaft) (shaft)
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
140, 4-bolt W 40x2x18x9g3) K33 71 (Z) 71 (Z) – – – – 71/In preparation
160, 4-bolt W 50x2x24x9g3) K34 125 (Z) 125 (Z) – – – – In preparation
– 180 (Z) – – – – In preparation
315, 8-bolt W 80x3x25x9g3) K97 450 (R) – – – – – 450
ISO 3019-1 (SAE J744)
K01 AZ-PF-1X-
82-2 (A)4) 16-4 (5/8in, 9T)2) – – – – – In preparation
004...0225)
K68 AZ-PN-1X-
101-2 (B)4) 22-4 (7/8in, 13T)2) – – – 28 (S)/31 28 (S) 71/In preparation
020...0325)
25-4 (1in, 15T)2) K04 – – – 45 (S)/31 45 (S) PGH4 In preparation
38-4 (1 1/2in, K24 100
127-2 (C)4) – – – 85 (S) PGH5 In preparation
17T)2) (S)/31
1) If a through drive for an A10V(S)O with R-shaft is desired, please consult us.
2) Allocation of drive shafts to SAEJ744 OCT83
3) Acc. to DIN 5480
4) 2 = 2-bolt, 4 = 4-bolt
5) Rexroth recommends a special execution of the gear pumps. Please consult us.
279

K33 Size 71
Flange ISO 3019-2 140, 4-bolt
for mounting an A4VSO/G 71 with splined shaft
1
M M-N 2)
1)
M12
ø18
0
149.6 +0.4
+0.02
140 +0.07
2
45° 45°
2.7 +0.1
N 9
42.8 11.5 3
316 to mounting flange face
K34 Size 125 and 450

Flange ISO 3019-2 160, 4-bolt 4
for mounting an A4VSO/G 125 or 180 with splined shaft
In preparation
1) Thread according to DIN 13, observe the general instructions on page 28 for the maximum tightening torques.
2) Fixing screws and O-ring seal are included with supply.
8
280

K97 Size 450

Flange ISO 3019-2 315-8-bolt
M
M-N
1)
M20 ø40
190
ø327.5+0.5
ø315+0.03
+0.10
0
ø36
190
8x4
5° (
45 0° )
=3
4
°
6
22° 30'
19
20
65.5
N 155.5
K99 Size 71
with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adaptor flange, closed with pressure tight cover
M-N
M +1
16 48 -1
43.5 43.5 20.2
31.8 31.8 18
4xM12x20
1)
84.5
0000
31.8
106.4 -0.4
20º
116 g60
130
50
10
92.5
W30x1.25x22x9g
DIN 5480
+0.1
2.7 000
95 95 MB 9
N
1) Thread according to DIN 13, observe the general instructions on page 28 for the maximum tightening torques
281

K99 Size 125

with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adaptor flange, closed with pressure tight cover (shown
without cover)
1
M-N
M 57.7
+0.15 22 60
54 -0.15 54 +0.15
-0.15 8
+0.15 M14
1) 22
40+0.-0.1155 40 -0.15 18 4x
21 deep 1)
M12x18
2
86 +0.-0.1155
66+0.-0.1155
ø175
ø66
20°
86 +0.-0.1155
66+0.-0.1155
3
N
362.5 to mounting flange face
4
K99 Size 450
with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adaptor flange, closed with pressure tight cover
75 75 M-N 5
63 63
42 42 M20 75
24 deep
20°
102
89
70
ø171 +0.02
+0.07
ø109
6
70
102
89
15°
M16 W 55x1.25x42x9g 3.4

24 deep MS
DIN 5480 10 7
N 11
59.6 73
1) Thread according to DIN 13, observe the general instructions on page 28 for the maximum tightening torques
8
282
Mounting position: 2. Horizontal installation
The highest situated of the ports»T«,»K1«, »K2« or »R/L«
Optional. The pump case must be filled with fluid during com- must be used for filling/bleeding and subsequently to con-
missioning and remain full when operating. nect the case drain line.
In order to reduce the operating noise level, all connecting lines
(suction, pressure and case drain lines) must be de-coupled 2.1 Installation inside the reservoir
from the tank, using flexible elements. a) When the minimum fluid level is equal to or lies above
The use of check valves in the case drain line must be avoided. the upper edge of the pump (only possible for sizes 71 and
The case drain line must be returned directly to tank without a 125): case drain port and suction port »S« open (see
reduction in cross section. fig. 3).
Exceptions maybe possible, please consult us first.
R(L)
1. Vertical installation (shaft end pointing upwards)
With a vertical installation, bearing flushing is recommended
to provide lubrication for the front bearing, see page 5.
The following installation conditions must be taken into ac- K1(K2)
count:
1.1 Installation into the reservoir
a) When the minimum fluid level is equal to or above the T S
pump mounting flange area (only possible for the sizes 71
and 125): ports »R/L«, »T« and »S« open (see fig. 1). Fig. 3
b) When the minimum fluid level lies below the upper edge
Fluid of the pump: case drain port and possibly port »S« must be
piped, see fig. 4. Observe conditions as shown in point 1.2.
T U Fill pump housing prior to commissioning.
R(L) Fill the pump housing before commissioning.
a) Mounting above the reservoir see fig. 4.
S Observe conditions as shown in point 1.2.
Fig. 1 b) Mounting below the reservoir
Case drain port and port »S« must be piped (see fig. 5).
b) When the minimum fluid level is below the mounting
R(L)
flange area: ports»R/L«,»T« and possibly »S« must be piped
as shown in fig. 2. Also observe the conditions as shown in
point 1.2.
Filling
U
T
U Boost pump T S
only at size 450 hmax = 800
R(L)
S htmax = 200
hmax = 800 Boost pump only

at size 450
Fig. 4
htmax = 200
Fig.2
R(L)
Before installation, fill the pump housing with the pump in a
horizontal position. Pipe port »T« to tank, »R/L« plugged.
Filling in mounted condition: fill via »R« and bleed via»T«,
afterwards plug port»R«. U
Conditions: A minimum pump inlet pressure (suction
pressure) of 0.8 bar absolute for size 71/125 is necessary
(of 5 bar absolute for size 450). Avoid mounting above the T S
reservoir in order to reduce the noise level. Fig. 5
283
Notes
8
284
– The A4VBO pump is designed to be used in open circuit.
– Before operating the axial piston unit, read the appropriate operating instructions thoroughly and completely. If needed, request
these from Rexroth.
– The service line ports and function ports are only designed to accommodate hydraulic lines.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids. Take
appropriate safety measures (e. g. by wearing protective clothing).
shift.
– Pressure ports:
The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer‘s instructions regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Fixing screws:
For fixing screws according to DIN 13, we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230.
- Locking screws:
For the metal locking screws, supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of locking screws MV apply.
Ports Maximum permissible

Required tightening torque of WAF hexagon socket of the
tightening torque of the
Standard Thread size the locking screws MV locking screws
threaded holes MG max
ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 45 Nm 6 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 70 Nm 8 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 170 Nm 12 mm
M33 x 2 540 Nm 310 Nm 17 mm
DIN 3852 M10 x 1 30 Nm 15 Nm1)2) 5 mm
M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm1) 6 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm1) 10 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 135 Nm1) 12 mm
M48 x 2 900 Nm 400 Nm1) 24 mm
1) The tightening torques apply for screws in the „dry“ state as received on delivery and the „lightly oiled“ state for installation.
2) In the “lightly oiled” state, the MV is reduced to 10 Nm for M10 x 1.
Axial Piston Units forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be repro-
An den Kelterwiesen 14 duced or given to third parties without its consent.
72160 Horb, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
info.brm-ak@boschrexroth.de products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
Subject to change.
285
RE 92800/05.12 1/40
A15VSO
Data sheet
Series 10
Sizes 175 to 280
Open circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for standard program 2 – Variable axial piston pump of swashplate design for
hydrostatic drives in open circuit
Technical data 5
– Employment preferably in stationary applications
Power controller 10
– The flow is proportional to the drive speed and displacement.
Stroke limiter 13
– The flow can be infinitely varied by adjusting the swashplate
Pressure controller 17
angle.
– 100 % mooring function possible depending on specific
Dimensions size 210 26 controller (swivel mode, motor mode).
Dimensions size 280 30 – A wide range of highly adaptable control devices with
different control and regulating functions, for all important
applications.
Overview of mounting options 35
– The universal through drive is suitable for mounting gear
Combination pumps A15VSO + A15VSO 36 pumps and axial piston pumps up to the same size, i.e.
100 % through drive.
– Compact design
– High efficiency
– High power density
– Low noise
286
2/40 Bosch Rexroth AG A15VSO Series 10 RE 92800/05.12

A15VS O V / 10 M V E4 1 E 0 –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 350 bar, maximum pressure 420 bar A15VS
Operating mode
Size (NG)
03 Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 8 175 210 280
Control device: basic controller1) 175 210 280

Power controller fixed setting ● ● ● LR
Override electric, proportional negative U = 24 V DC ❍ ❍ ❍ L4
high pressure,
proportional negative with stop ❍ ❍ ● CR
(summation hp-control)
Stroke limiter electric, proportional positive U = 24 V DC ● ● ● E2
electric, two-point positive U = 24 V DC ● ● ● E6
04 pilot pressure, proportional negative ● ● ● H5
'p = 35 bar
positive ❍ ❍ ❍ H6
Pressure controller with fixed setting ● ● ● DR
one-sided deflection hydraulic, remote controlled positive
● ● ● DG
(external)
for parallel operation positive ❍ ❍ ● DP2)
Pressure controller with fixed setting
❍ ❍ ❍ MD3)
mooring function
Auxiliary controller: pressure controller1) 175 210 280

Without auxiliary controller (without symbol) ● ● ●
Pressure controller with fixed setting ● ● ● DR4)
05 onesided deflection hydraulic, remote controlled positive
● ● ● DG5)
(external)
for parallel operation positive ❍ ❍ ● DP2)6)
Auxiliary controller: stroke limiter or bleed-off1) 7) 175 210 280

Without auxiliary controller stroke limiter (without symbol) ● ● ●
Stroke limiter electric, proportional positive U = 24 V DC ● ● ● E2
06 electric, two-point positive U = 24 V DC ● ● ● E6
pilot pressure, proportional negative ● ● ● H5
'p = 35 bar
positive ❍ ❍ ❍ H6
Auxiliary controller: load sensing1) 175 210 280

Without auxiliary controller load sensing (without symbol) ● ● ●
07
Load sensing pump pressure, internal fixed setting ● ● ● S0
1) The basic controller (04) can be combined with a maximum of two auxiliary controllers (05, 06, 07)
2) Cannot be combined with E2, E6 and H5, H6 from auxiliary controller stroke limiter (06A)
3) Cannot be combined with E2, E6 and H5, H6 from auxiliary controller stroke limiter (06). All combinable auxiliary controller are
suitable for mooring function.
4) Cannot be combined with basic pressure controller DR, DG, DP (04)
5) Cannot be combined with basic pressure controller DG and DP (04)
6) Cannot be combined with basic pressure controller DP (04)
7) Cannot be combined with basic controllers stroke limiter and pressure controller (04)
287
RE 92800/05.12 A15VSO Series 10 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/40

A15VS O V / 10 M V E4 1 E 0 –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Depressurized basic setting and external control pressure supply8) 175 210 280 1
Maximum swivel angle (Vg max), without external control pressure supply
● ● ● A
(standard for power and pressure control)
Maximum swivel angle (Vg max), with external control pressure supply
08 ● ● ● B
(integrated shuttle valve) (standard for negative stroke limiter)
Minimum swivel angle (Vg min), with external control pressure supply
● ● ● C
(integrated shuttle valve) (standard for positive stroke limiter)
2
Connector for solenoids9) 175 210 280
Without (only with hydraulic controls) ● ● ● 0
09
HIRSCHMANN connector ● ● ● H
Swivel angle indicator

10 With visual swivel angle indicator V
3
Series
11 Series 1, index 0 10
Configuration of ports and fastening threads

12 Metric, port threads with O-ring seal according to ISO 6149 M
Direction of rotation 175 210 280 4

Viewed on drive shaft clockwise ● ● ● R
13
counter-clockwise ● ● ● L
Seals
Mounting flange 5
15 SAE J744 165-4 E4

Splined shaft DIN 5480 W50x2x24x9g ● ● – A2
W60x2x28x9g – – ● A4
16
Parallel keyed shaft Ø50 ● ● – B2 6
DIN 6885 Ø60 – – ● B4
Service line ports

17 SAE flange port A: on side (45°) 1
Rotary group version

18 Noise-optimized for n = 1500 / 1800 rpm (standard) E 7
8) For description, see control device

9) Connectors for other electric components can deviate. 8
288

A15VS O V / 10 M V E4 1 E 0 –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Through drive
Flange SAE J744 Coupling for splined shaft10)
Mounting variant
Diameter Symbol11) Designation Diameter Designation 175 210 280
Prepared for through drive, with pressure-proof plugged cover ● ● ● U000
82-2 (A) A1 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP S2 ● ● ❍ A1S2
A2 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP S2 ❍ ❍ ❍ A2S2
101-2 (B) B3 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP S4 ❍ ❍ ❍ B3S4
1 in 15T 16/32DP S5 ❍ ❍ ❍ B3S5
127-2 (C) C3 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP S7 ❍ ❍ ❍ C3S7
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP S9 ❍ ❍ ❍ C3S9
152-4 (D) D4 W45x2x21x9g A1 ❍ ❍ ❍ D4A1
W50x2x24x9g A2 ❍ ❍ ❍ D4A2
165-4 (E) E4 W50x2x24x9g A2 ● ● ● E4A2
W60x2x28x9g A4 ❍ ❍ ● E4A4
19
Flange, ISO 3019-2 (metric) Coupling for splined shaft10)

Mounting variant
80-2 K1 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ❍ ❍ ❍ K1S3
K2 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ● ❍ ❍ K2S3
K5 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ● ● ❍ K5S3
100-2 L5 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP S4 ● ● ❍ L5S4
160-4 P4 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP S7 ❍ ❍ ❍ P4S7
180-4 R4 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP S9 ● ● ❍ R4S9
1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP T1 ❍ ❍ ❍ R4T1
125-4 M4 1 in 15T 16/32DP S5 ❍ ❍ ❍ M4S5
W32x2x14x9g Z7 ❍ ❍ ❍ M4Z7
140-4 N4 W40x2x18x9g Z9 ❍ ❍ ❍ N4Z9
Sensors
20 Without 0
Standard / special version

Standard version 0
21
Special version S
Note
Short designation X on a feature refers to a special version not covered by the ordering code.
10) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a (30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5) or to DIN 5480
11) Mounting drillings pattern viewed on through drive with control at top
289
Technical data
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data sheet The correct selection of hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of
RE 90220 (mineral oil) for detailed information regarding the the operating temperature in relation to the ambient tempera-
choice of hydraulic fluid and application conditions. ture: in an open circuit, the reservoir temperature.
The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating 1
The variable pump A15VSO is currently approved for operation
with mineral oil. viscosity in the operating temperature range is within the
optimum range (Qopt see shaded area of the selection diagram).
Please contact us about operation with environmentally We recommended that the higher viscosity class be selected
acceptable or HF hydraulic fluids. in each case.
Selection diagram Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C, an operating tem-

perature of 60° C is set in the circuit. In the optimum operating
-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100° 2
1600 1600 viscosity range (Qopt, shaded area), this corresponds to the
1000 viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68; to be selected: VG 68.
600
400
Note
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
200 The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure and

10
2
100 speed, is always higher than the reservoir temperature. At no

Viscosity Q in mm2/s

40 115 °C, however. The temperature difference specified below 3
36
is to be taken into account when determining the viscosity in
νopt the bearing.
20
16
10 operating parameters, please contact us.
5 5 4
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115°
tmin = -40 °C Hydraulic fluid temperature range tmax = +115 °C

Transport and storage Tmint -50 °C factory preservation: up to 12 months with standard,
6
t d 3 min, low load (20 bar d p d 50 bar),
(Cold) start-up1) Qmax = 1600 TStt-40 °C
n d 1000 rpm
Permissible temperature difference 'T d25 K between axial piston unit and hydraulic fluid
Warm-up phase Q= 1600 to 400 T = -40 °C to -25 °C at pnom, 0.5 • nnom and t d 15 min
Operating phase
Temperature difference 'T = approx. 5 K between hydraulic fluid in the bearing and at port T
115 °C in the bearing 7
Maximum temperature 110 °C measured at port T
Q= 400 to 10 measured at port T,
Continuous operation T = -25 °C to + 90 °C
Short-term operation Qmin < 10 to 5 Tmax +110 °C measured at port T, t 3 min, p 0.3 • pnom
FKM shaft seal1) T d+115 °C see page 6
1) At temperatures below -25 °C, an NBR shaft seal is required (permissible temperature range: -40 °C to +90 °C). 8
290
Technical data
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid Case drain pressure
Finer filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic The case drain pressure at ports T1 to T3 may be a maximum of
fluid, which increases the service life of the axial piston unit. 1.2 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S but not higher than
To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit, a pL max ___________________________________ 4 bar absolute.
gravimetric analysis of the hydraulic fluid is necessary to de-
A case drain line to the reservoir is required.
termine the amount of solid contaminant and to determine the
cleanliness level according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness level
of at least 20/18/15 is to be maintained. Shaft seal
Temperature range
115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according to
ISO 4406 is necessary. The FKM shaft seal may be used for case drain temperatures
from -25 °C to +115 °C.
Note
State NBR shaft seal in plain text when ordering. Please con-
tact us.
291
Technical data
(operating with mineral oil) Nominal pressure pnom
Pressure at service line port A pressure.
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 350 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax 1
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 420 bar absolute The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operating
Single operating period _____________________________ 10 s pressure within the single operating period. The sum of the
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
period.
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) ___________15 bar
for lower pressure, please contact us. Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Minimum pressure on the high-pressure side (A or B) which is
Rate of pressure change RA max _____________ 16000 bar/s 2
required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
pnom Minimum pressure (Inlet)

Pressure p
Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) which is required in

't order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum
pressure is dependent on the speed and displacement of the
axial piston unit.
'p
Rate of pressure change RA 3
Maximum permissible rate of pressure rise and reduction
during a pressure change over the entire pressure range.
t2
Pressure p
Time t
Pressure at suction port S (Inlet) Nominal pressure pnom
4
Minimum pressure pS min _________________t0.8 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pS max ________________ d30 bar absolute
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) 5
Time t
8
292
Technical data
Size NG 175 210 280
Displacement geometric, Vg max cm3 175.0 210.0 280.0
per revolution Vg min cm3 01) 01) 01)
Maximum speed2)
at Vg max nnom rpm 2150 2100 1800
at Vg dVg max3) nmax rpm 2500 2500 2300
Volume flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max L/min 376 441 504
Power
at nnom, Vg max and 'p = 350 bar Pmax kW 219 257 294
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 350 bar Tmax Nm 970 1170 1560
Rotary stiffness W50 A2 c kNm/rad 357 381 –
drive shaft W60 A4 c kNm/rad – – 664
ø50 B2 c kNm/rad 349 372 –
ø60 B4 c kNm/rad – – 620
Maximum angular acceleration4) D rad/s2 5609 5014 4200
Case volume V L 3.6 4 6.5
Mass (approx.) m kg 97 111 143
1) Mooring function (swivel mode) possible up to –100% Vg max

2) The values are valid:
- for the optimum viscosity range from Qopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s
- with hydraulic fluid on the basis of mineral oil
- for an absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at suction port S
3) Maximum speed (limiting speed) with increased inlet pressure pabs at suction port S and Vg < Vg max, see the
following diagram
1.2
1.2
Speed n / nnom
1.1
1.0 1.0
0.8
0.9
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Displacement Vg / Vg max
4) The data are valid for values between the minimum required and maximum permissible speed.
Valid for external excitation (e. g. engine 2 to 8 times rotary frequency; cardan shaft twice the rotary frequency).
The limit value applies for a single pump only.
The load capacity of the connection parts must be considered.
Note
Operation above the maximum values or below the minimum values may result in a loss of function, a reduced service life or in
the destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend testing the loads by means of experiment or calculation / simulation and
comparison with the permissible values.
293
Technical data
Permissible radial and axial forces of the drive shaft
Size NG 175 175 210 210 280 280
Drive shaft ø50 W50 ø50 W50 ø60 W60
Maximum radial force Fq Fq max N 14000 13500 17000 16000 20000 17500 1
at distance a
(from shaft collar)
a a mm 41 27 41 27 52.5 29
Maximum axial force + Fax max N

Fax +
– ± 850 ± 900 ± 1000
– Fax max N
Note 2
Influence of the direction of the permissible axial force:
3
Size NG 175 210 280
Torque
Tmax Nm 975 1170 1560
A2 W50x2x24x9g TE max Nm 2600 2600 – 4
A4 W60x2x28x9g TE max Nm – – 3500
B2 ø50 TE max Nm 1500 1500 –
B4 ø60 TE max Nm – – 2800
Maximum through-drive torque TD max Nm 1500 1500 1950
2) For drive shafts without radial force 5
Torque distribution
TA1 TA2
6
TE
1st pump 2nd pump
TD
Determining the operating characteristics 7
Vg • n • Kv Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3

Volume flow qv = [L/min]
1000
Vg • 'p [Nm] n = Speed in rpm

Torque T =
20 • S • Kmh Kv = Volumetric efficiency
8
2S•T•n = qv • 'p
Power P = [kW] Kt = Total efficiency (nt = nv • nmh)
60000 600 • Kt
294
Power controller
LR - Power controller, fixed setting
The power control regulates the displacement of the pump de- Schematic LR
pending on the operating pressure so that a given drive power
is not exceeded at constant drive speed.
pB = operating pressure
pB • Vg = constant
Vg = displacement
The precise control with a hyperbolic control characteristic,
provides an optimum utilization of available power.
The operating pressure acts on a rocker via a measuring piston
which moves with the control. An externally adjustable spring
force counteracts this, it determines the power setting. The
depressurized basic setting is Vg max.
If the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the
control valve will be actuated by the rocker and the pump will MA A P
swivel back from the basic setting Vg max toward Vg min. This
shortens the leverage at the rocker, allowing the operating pres-
Vg min
sure to rise at the same ratio as the displacement is reduced
(pB • Vg = fixed).
The hydraulic output power (characteristic LR) is influenced by
the efficiency of the pump.
When ordering, state in plain text:
Vg max
– Drive power P in kW
– Drive speed n in rpm S MS M T1 T2 T3
– Maximum flow qV max in L/min

After clarifying the details, we can prepare an updated
power diagram.
Characteristic LR
350 bar
Setting range
Beginning of
control
50 bar
Vg min Displacement Vg max

295
Power controller
L4 – Power controller, electric, proportional (negative control)
A control current acts against the mechanical power control Schematic L4

adjustment spring via a proportional solenoid.
The mechanically adjusted basic power setting can be reduced 1
by means of different control current settings.
Increase in control current = decrease in power.
The following amplifiers are available for controlling the propor-
tional solenoids. Recommended amplifier for stationary applica-
tions:
– Analog amplifier VT-VSPA1-1 __________________RE 30111 2
– Digital amplifier VT-VSPD-1 __________________ RE 30523
Further information can also be found on the internet at
www.boschrexroth.com/industrial-hydraulics-catalog/ MA A P
Technical data, solenoid
Vg min
L4 3
Voltage 24 V (±20 %)
Control current
Beginning of control 200 mA
Vg max
End of control 600 mA
Limiting current 0.77 A
4
Nominal resistance (at 20 °C) 22.7 : S MS M T1 T2 T3
Dither frequency 100 Hz

Duty cycle 100 % Change in beginning of control in bar when control current is
Type of protection see connector design page 37 changed from minimum to maximum.
Size 'p start of control
When ordering, state in plain text: in control range from 200 to 600 mA 5
175 232 bar
– Drive power P in kW at start of control
210 218 bar
– Drive speed n in rpm
280 198 bar
Note
For de-energized operating state:
Start of control increase +50 bar 6
Effect of power overrides at rising current

7
I
50
L4
8

296
Power controller
CR – Summation hp-control of two power-controlled pumps, high-pressure-related override (with stop)
With two A15VSO units of the same size working in different Schematic CR
circuits, the CR controller limits the overall power.
CR
The CR works like the normal LR with a fixed maximum power
setting along the power hyperbola. The high-pressure-related
override reduces the power setpoint in dependence on the op-
erating pressure of the other pump. That happens proportional-
ly below the start of control and is blocked by a stop when the
minimum power is reached. Here, the CR port of the one pump
has to be connected to the MA port of the other pump.
The maximum power of the first pump is reached when the
second pump is working at idle when depressurized. When de-
fining the maximum power, the idle power of the second pump
has to be taken into account.
The minimum power of each pump is reached when both
pumps are working at high pressure. The minimum power MA A P
usually equates to 50% of the total power.
Vg min
Power that in unused through activated pressure controls or
other overrides remains unconsidered.
When ordering, please state separately for each pump:
– Maximum drive power Pmax in kW
– Minimum drive power Pmin in kW
Vg max
– Maximum flow qV max in L/min S MS M T1 T2 T3
Effect of power override with increasing pressure
Characteristic CR
pHD
300 bar
(2nd pump)
50
Setting range CR
Beginning of
control
50 bar

297
Stroke limiter
E2 – Stroke limiter, electric, proportional (positive control)
With the electrical stroke limiter with proportional solenoid, the Characteristic E2
pump displacement is steplessly adjusted in proportion to the 770
current by means of magnetic force.
1
Control current I [mA]

Basic setting without pilot signal is Vg min. This includes the me- 600
chanically depressurized basic setting Vg min (see ordering code
digit 08).
400
With increasing control current the pump swivels to a higher
displacement (from Vg min to Vg max).
The necessary control power is taken from the operating pressure 200
2
or the external control pressure applied to port P.
To enable the pump to be adjusted from the zero basic setting
or from a low operating pressure, port P must be supplied with an 0 0.5 1.0
external control pressure1) of at least 30 bar, maximum 50 bar. Vg min Displacement Vg max
Note
If no external control pressure is connected to P, the version Schematic E2
"Maximum swivel angle (Vg max), without external control pressure 3
supply" is to be ordered (see ordering code digit 08, A).

E2
Voltage 24 V (±20 %)
Control current 4
Beginning of control at Vg min 200 mA
End of control at Vg max 600 mA2)
Nominal resistance (at 20 °C) 22.7 :
MA A P
Duty Cycle 100 % Vg min
Type of protection see connector design page 37 5
The following amplifiers are available for controlling the pro-

portional solenoids. Recommended amplifier for stationary
applications:
Vg max
– Analog amplifier VT-VSPA1-1 __________________RE 30111

– Analog amplifier module VT-MSPA1 ___________ RE 59497 MS S M T1 T2 T3 6
– Digital amplifier VT-VSPD-1 __________________ RE 30523
Further information can also be found on the internet at Note
www.boschrexroth.com/industrial-hydraulics-catalog/
The spring return feature in the controller is not a safety
When ordering, state in plain text: device
– Drive speed n in rpm The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal
7
– Maximum flow qV max in L/min contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, abrasion or
residual contamination from system components). As a result,
– Minimum flow qV min in L/min
the control will no longer respond correctly to the operator's
commands.
Check whether the application on your machine requires ad-
ditional safety measures, in order to bring the driven actuator
into a controlled and safe position (e. g. immediate stop). 8
1) With an external supply of control pressure, it is possible for the pump to swivel slightly beyond the zero position
(to the mechanical stop).
2) Because of the controller hysteresis, a control current of up to 650 mA may be required for the Vg max position.
298
Stroke limiter
E6 – Stroke limiter, electric, two-point (positive control)
With the electric stroke limiter with switching solenoid, the dis- Schematic E6
placement of the pump is adjusted between Vg min and Vg max.
Basic setting without current is Vg min. This includes the
mechanically depressurized basic setting Vg min (see ordering
code digit 08).
When the solenoid is energized, the pump swivels from Vg min
to Vg max.
The necessary control power is taken from the operating pres-
sure or the external control pressure applied to port P.
or from a low operating pressure, port P must be supplied
with an external control pressure1) of at least 30 bar, maximum
50 bar.
Note MA A P
If no external control pressure is connected to P, the version
"Maximum swivel angle (Vg max), without external control pres-
Vg min
sure supply" is to be ordered (see ordering code digit 08, A).

E6
Voltage 24 V
Vg max
Nominal power 26.5 W
Test current 0.67 A MS S M T1 T2 T3
Duty Cycle 100 %

Type of protection see connector design page 37
Note
device
The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal
– Minimum flow qV min in L/min contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, abrasion or
commands.
into a controlled and safe position (e. g. immediate stop).
299
Stroke limiter
H5 – Stroke limiter, pilot pressure, proportional (negative control)
With pilot-pressure-related control, the pump displacement is Schematic H5
adjusted in proportion to the pilot pressure applied at port H5.
H5
Basic setting without pilot signal is Vg max. This includes the 1
mechanically depressurized basic setting Vg max (see ordering
code digit 08).
Maximum permissible pilot pressure pSt max = 100 bar
With increasing pilot pressure the pump swivels to a smaller
displacement (from Vg max to Vg min).
Beginning of control Vg max: 10 bar 2
The necessary control power is taken from the operating
pressure or the external control pressure applied to port P.
To enable the pump to be adjusted at low operating pressure,
port P must be supplied with an external control pressure1) of
at least 30 bar, maximum 50 bar. MA A P
Note 3
Vg min
Characteristic H5 (negative)
Control pressure characteristic Vg max to Vg min ____'p = 35 bar
Vg max
4
45 S MS M T1 T2 T3
40
Pilot pressure pSt [bar]
35
Note
30
The spring return feature in the controller is not a safety 5
25
device
20
The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal
15 contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, abrasion or
10 residual contamination from system components). As a result,
4 commands.
6
0 0.5 1.0 ditional safety measures, in order to bring the driven actuator
Vg min Displacement Vg max into a controlled and safe position (e. g. immediate stop).

– Drive speed n in rpm 7

(to the mechanical stop). 8
300
Stroke limiter
H6 – Stroke limiter, pilot pressure, proportional (positive control)
With pilot-pressure-related control, the pump displacement is Schematic H6

adjusted in proportion to the pilot pressure applied at port H6.
H6
Basic setting without pilot signal is Vg min. This includes the
mechanically depressurized basic setting Vg min (see ordering
code digit 08).
Maximum permissible pilot pressure pSt max = 100 bar
With increasing pilot pressure the pump swivels to a larger
displacement (from Vg min to Vg max).
Beginning of control Vg min: 10 bar
sure or the external control pressure applied to port P.
or from a low operating pressure, port P must be supplied
with an external control pressure1) of at least 30 bar, maximum MA A P
50 bar.
Vg min
Note
Characteristic H6 (positive)
Vg max
Control pressure increase Vg min to Vg max ________'p = 35 bar
MS S M T1 T2 T3
45
40
Note
35
30 device
25 The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal
15 the control will no longer respond correctly to the operator's
10 commands.
4
into a controlled and safe position (e. g. immediate stop).
0 0.5 1.0

301
Pressure controller
DR - Pressure controller with one-sided deflection, fixed setting
The pressure controller keeps the pressure in a hydraulic Schematic DR

system constant within its control range even with varying
volume flow. The variable pump only moves as much hydraulic
1
fluid as is required by the consumers. If the operating pressure
exceeds the setpoint value set at the integral pressure valve,
the pump control will shift toward a smaller displacement and
the control deviation will decrease.
Basic position in depressurized state: Vg max
Setting range from 50 to 350 bar.
2
Characteristic DR
max
350 MA A P
Vg min
3
Vg max
4
50 S MS M T1 T2 T3
min
0
qV min Flow qV [L/min] qV max
Hydraulic Vg min stop

5
The hydraulic Vg min stop opens the valve outlet to the case
drain chamber when a minimum position is reached, damping the
controller and reducing overshoot. This can cause a connec-
tion from high pressure or external control pressure via the con-
troller and the hydraulic Vg min stop to the case drain chamber.
– Pressure setting p in bar 6
8
302
Pressure controller
DRS0 - Pressure controller with load sensing
The load sensing control is a flow control option that oper- Characteristic DRS0
ates as a function of the load pressure to regulate the pump
displacement to match the actuator flow requirement.
max
350
The flow depends here on the cross section of the external
sensing orifice (1) fitted between the pump outlet and the

actuator. The flow is independent of the load pressure below
the pressure controller setting and within the control range of
the pump.
The sensing orifice is usually a separately arranged load sens-
ing directional valve (control block). The position of the direc-
tional valve piston determines the opening cross section of the
sensing orifice and thus the flow of the pump.
The load sensing control compares pressure before and after
the sensing orifice and maintains the pressure drop across the
14 min
orifice (differential pressure 'p), and with it the flow, constant.
0
If the differential pressure 'p increases at the sensing orifice,
the pump is swiveled back (towards Vg min), and, if the differen-
tial pressure 'p decreases, the pump is swiveled out (towards
Vg max) until equilibrium at the sensing orifice is restored.
Schematic DRS0
'psensing orifice = ppump – pconsumer
Setting range for 'p _________________________14 to 30 bar X
(please state in plain text )
Standard adjustment _____________________________14 bar
The standby pressure in zero stroke operation (sensing orifice
plugged) is slightly above the 'p setting. (1)
drain chamber when a minimum position is reached, damping the
MA A P
– Pressure setting DR
– Differential pressure load sensing controller 'p in bar
Vg min

Vg max
S MS M T1 T2 T3
(1) The sensing orifice (control block) is not included in the
delivery contents.
303
Pressure controller
DG – Pressure controller with one-sided deflection, hydraulic remote control (positive control)
The remote controlled pressure control has a fixed-setting 'p Characteristic DG

value. A separately connected pressure relief valve at port X (1)
enables the pressure control to be remotely controlled.
1
350

Setting range '14 to 25 bar
Recommended value 20 bar
Control volume at X: approx 1.6 l L/min (static) at 'p 20 bar
In addition a separately configured 2/2 directional valve (2)
van be operated to start the pump with low operating pressure
(standby pressure). 2
Both functions can be used individually or in combination
(see schematic).
'p pressure control valve
The external valves are not included in the delivery contents. 14
As a separate pressure relief valve (1) we recommend:
0
For DBD.6, see RE 25402 3
The hydraulic Vg min stop opens the valve outlet to the case For function and description of pressure control DR, see page 17.
drain chamber when a minimum position is reached, damp-
ing the controller and reducing overshoot. This can cause a
connection from high pressure or external control pressure via
Schematic DG
the controller and the hydraulic Vg min stop to the case drain
chamber. 4
– Operating pressure p in bar (test pressure for DG)
– Differential pressure 'p in bar X
(2) (1)
5
Note for setting remote controlled pressure control
The setting value for the external pressure relief valve plus
the differential pressure value at the pressure control valve
determines the level of pressure control.
Example:
External pressure relief valve _____________________ 330 bar 6
Differential pressure at pressure control valve ________ 20 bar
MA A P
Pressure control at ___________________330 + 20 = 350 bar
Vg min
Vg max
S MS M T1 T2 T3
8
304
Pressure controller
DP – Pressure controller with one-sided deflection for parallel operation (positive control)
The pressure control DP is suitable for pressure control of sev- Characteristic DP

eral axial piston pumps A15VSO in parallel operation pumping
into a common pressure line.
The pressure control has a pressure increase of approx. 7 bar 350
from qv max to qv min . The pump regulates therefore to a pres-

343
sure dependent swivel angle. This means a parallel or synchro-
Maximum 7 bar
nous control behavior of several pumps.
The DP controller has a fixed 'p value which is overridden, 207
depending on the swivel angle. Reference operating point 200
External pressure
is zero stroke.
relief valve
Setting value for 'p in zero stroke 27 bar.
With the externally installed pressure relief valve (1) the nominal
pressure setting of all pumps connected to the system is ad- 57
justed to the same value. 50
Setting range from 50 to 350 bar. 0

Control volume at DP: approx 1.9 L/min (static) at 'p 27 bar.
Each pump can be individually unloaded from the system by
a separately installed 2/2-way directional valve (2) and set to Schematic DP
a standby position.
The check valve in the service line (port A) is generally to be
provided by the customer. The check valve in the control line
(port DP) is included in the delivery contents.
DP
The external valves are not included in the delivery contents.
As a separate pressure relief valve (1) we recommend:
(1)
DBD.6 (manual actuation), see RE 25402
drain chamber when a minimum position is reached, damping the DP1 (2)
When ordering, state in plain text: MA A P
– Maximum operating pressure p in bar
Vg min
Vg max
S MS M T1 T2 T3
305
8
306

LRDRS0 – Power controller with pressure control and load sensing

(clockwise rotation)
111.7
X T1
-1 1
2 +
14
5
176.6
182.5
45°
122
224.5
262.5
134.5
.6
20
224.5
262.5
282.5(T3)
279.5(P)
25
P
0
0
216.2
15.9-0.5
X T3 T3
123
141.5
69.7
105
ø165.1 -0.05
0
0
118
129
140
MA
T1 A M S T2
269.5(S)
308.5(M)
36(T2)
327.5
0
0
117.5
270.5
M10 x 1.5; 20 deep

Thread for ring screw
14
W A MA
0
(additional thread on
11
133.7
9
underside of case)
13
P
°
45
M T2 S
Optical swivel angle indicator
53(M)
6(T2)
43(S)
0
Detail W Detail X
X
A
61.9
.8
31
32
74 MS
66
. 7
106.4
307

Drive shafts
B2 Parallel keyed shaft A2 Splined shaft, DIN 5480
DIN 6885 W50x2x24x9g
54
82 1
36
36 12
M161)2)
+0.018
ø50 +0.002
12
M161)2)
ø60
53.5
2
ø60
46.1
90 62
3
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
A Service line SAE J5184) 1 1/4 in 420 O
Fastening threads DIN 13 M14 x 2; 22 deep 4
Fastening threads DIN 13 M16 x 2; 24 deep
T1 Drain line ISO 61495) M33 x 2; 19 deep 10 O6)
T2 Drain line ISO 61495) M33 x 2; 19 deep 10 X6)
T3 Drain line ISO 61495) M33 x 2; 19 deep 10 X6)
M Measuring control pressure ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 420 X 5
MA Measuring pressure A ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 420 X
MS Measuring suction pressure ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 30 X
P Control pressure
(ordering code B, C with external control ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O
pressure supply)
Control pressure 6
(ordering code A without external control ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 X
pressure supply)
CR Pilot signal (only on CR) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O
DP, DP1 Pilot pressure (only on DP) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O
H5, H6 Pilot pressure (only on H5, H6) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 100 O
X Pilot signal ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O 7
fittings.
4) Metric fastening thread is a deviation from standard.
6) Depending on installation position, T1, T2 or T3 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 38 and 89).
8
308

LR L4
Power controller, fixed setting Power controller, override electric, proportional
324.8 133.7 324.8 133.7

143.2 9.7 70.8 9.7
192.5
192.5
CR E2, E6
Summation hp-control, override high-pressure-related Stroke limiter, override electric,
(with stop) proportional (E2), two-point (E6)
284.2
34.5
324.8 139.7
206.5
137.7 69.7
64.2 40.2
CR CR
220.4
206.5
279.5 P
139.7
135.5
19.2
H5, H6 DR
Stroke limiter, override pilot pressure, proportional Pressure controller with one-sided deflection, fixed setting
281.1
105.7
58.7 H5-6
206.5
305.1 133.7
143.5
143.2 9.7
192.4
279.5
P
139.7
20.2
135.5
H1-6
45.2
309

DG DP
Pressure controller with one-sided deflection, Pressure controller with one-sided deflection,
hydraulic remote control for parallel operation
305.1 1
109.4
37.4
DP
307.2 133.7
206.5
216.2 111.7
143.5
143.2 9.7
X X
2
192.4
176.5
DP1 DP
49.7
139.7
89.2
3
3.6
4
8
310

LRDRS0 - Power controller with pressure control and load sensing

116 T1
X
-1 1
2 +
15
184.3
8
200.2
45°
128
224.5
262.5
137.4
.6
20
224.5
262.5
299.6(T3)
293.6(P)
25.8
0
230.7
P
15.9-0.5
0
T3
X T3
127
149
109
74
ø165.1 -0.05
0
0
128
130
145.5
MA
T1 A M S T2
327.8(M)
282.5(S)
0
344.8
43.5
285.6
0
120
M12 x 1.75; 22 deep

14 29
Thread for ring screw W

7
138 1
0
(additional thread on A MA
underside of case) P
18
°
45
M T2 S
4.5
45
56
X
Detail W Detail X
69.9
.5
36
38
90 MS
79
.4
120.7
311

Drive shafts
B2 Parallel keyed shaft A2 Splined shaft,
DIN 6885 DIN 5480
W50x2x24x9g
54 1
82
36
36 12
M161)2)
+0.018
ø50 +0.002
12
M161)2)
ø60
2
53.5
ø60
46.1
90 62
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)

T1 Drain line ISO 61495) M42 x 2; 19.5 deep 10 O6)
T2 Drain line ISO 61495) M42 x 2; 19.5 deep 10 X6)
5
M Measuring control pressure ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 420 X
MA Measuring pressure A ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 420 X
P Control pressure
pressure supply)
6
Control pressure
pressure supply)
DP, DP1 Pilot pressure (only on DP) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O
H5, H6 Pilot pressure (only on H5, H6) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 100 O
fittings.
6) Depending on installation position, T1, T2 or T3 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 38 and 39). 8
312

LR L4
339.3 138 339.3 138

157.7 14 85.3 14
200.2
200.2
CR E2, E6
298.6
48.9
339.3 144
152.2 74
214.2
78.7 44.5
CR CR
228.1
214.2
293.6
P
23.5
144
137
H5, H6 DR
295.6
120.2
73.2 H5-6
319.6 138
214.2
157.7 14
151.2
200.1
293.6
P
24.5
144
137
49
H5-6
313

DG DP
319.6 1
123.9
51.9 DP
321.7 138
214.2
230.7 116
151.2
157.7 14 2
X X
200.1
184.2
DP1 DP
144
93.5
0.7
54
4
8
314

LRDRS0 - Power controller with pressure control and load sensing

122
X T1
-1 1
5 +
16
192.4
208.3
10
45°
140
262.5
224.5
156.4
224.5
262.5
332(T3)
329(P)
34
0
261.4
P
0
15.9 -0.5 X T3 T3
140
158
80
121
ø165.1 -0.05
0
0
154.5
135
138
MA
T1 A M S T2
0
65.9
140
317
324(S)
365(M)
387
43(T2)
0
M12 x 1.75; 22 deep W

16 42
Thread for ring screw A MA

2
1
144
(additional thread on
underside of case)
15
P
45°
M T2 S
50
62
5
0

X
Detail W Detail X
.5
36
69.9
38
79
90
MS
.4
120.7
315

Drive shafts
B4 Parallel keyed shaft A4 Splined shaft, DIN 5480
DIN 6885 W60x2x28x9g
58
105 1
42
42
M20 x 2.51)2)
+0.011
+0.030
M20 x 2.51)2)
15
15
ø60
ø70
ø90.4
ø90.4
ø70
64
47
112.9
66
3
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
T1 Drain line ISO 61495) M42 x 2; 19.5 deep 10 O6)
M Measuring control pressure ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 X 5
MA Measuring pressure A ISO 61495) M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 X
P Control pressure
pressure supply)
Control pressure 6
pressure supply)
DP, DP1 Pilot signal (only on DP) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 420 O
H5, H6 Pilot signal (only on H5, H6) ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 100 O
fittings.
6) Depending on installation position, T1, T2 or T3 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 38 and 39).
8
316

LR L4
368.5 144 368.5 144

184.9 20 110.9 20
208.3
208.3
CR E2, E6
327.9
84.9
368.5 144
181.4 80
222.4
107.9 20
CR CR
222.8
319.5
P 146.5
150
39
H5, H6 DR
327.9
149.4
102.9
H5-6
349.8 144
184.9 20
222.4
159.4
208.3
319.5
P
146.5
29.5
150
55
H5-6
317

DG DP
350.3
154.6 1
82.6
DP
350.9 144
222.3
259.9 122
159.3
184.9 20
X
X 2
208.3
192.7
DP1 DP
150
3
99.5
6.7
60
4
8
318

Flange SAE J744 Coupling for splined shaft1)

Mounting variant
Prepared for through drive, with pressure-proof plugged cover ● ● ● U000
82-2 (A) A1 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP S2 ● ● ❍ A1S2
A2 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP S2 ❍ ❍ ❍ A2S2
101-2 (B) B3 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP S4 ❍ ❍ ❍ B3S4
1 in 15T 16/32DP S5 ❍ ❍ ❍ B3S5
127-2 (C) C3 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP S7 ❍ ❍ ❍ C3S7
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP S9 ❍ ❍ ❍ C3S9
152-4 (D) D4 W45x2x21x9g A1 ❍ ❍ ❍ D4A1
W50x2x24x9g A2 ❍ ❍ ❍ D4A2
165-4 (E) E4 W50x2x24x9g A2 ● ● ● E4A2
W60x2x28x9g A4 ❍ ❍ ● E4A4
Flange, ISO 3019-2 (metric) Coupling for splined shaft1)

Mounting variant
80-2 K1 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ❍ ❍ ❍ K1S3
K2 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ● ❍ ❍ K2S3
K5 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP S3 ● ● ❍ K5S3
100-2 L5 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP S4 ● ● ❍ L5S4
160-4 P4 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP S7 ❍ ❍ ❍ P4S7
180-4 R4 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP S9 ● ● ❍ R4S9
1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP T1 ❍ ❍ ❍ R4T1
125-4 M4 1 in 15T 16/32DP S5 ❍ ❍ ❍ M4S5
W32x2x14x9g Z7 ❍ ❍ ❍ M4Z7
140-4 N4 W40x2x18x9g Z9 ❍ ❍ ❍ N4Z9
165-4 (E) E4A4 NG A1 A2 A4 A53)

A5 175 363.5 17 68 M20 x 2.5; 30 tief
O-ring4) 210 380.8 17 68 M20 x 2.5; 30 tief
280 423 17 74.1 M20 x 2.5; 30 tief
+0.07
ø165 +0.02
224.5
224.5 A2
A4
A1 (to mounting flange)
1) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a (30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5) or to DIN 5480
2) Mounting drillings pattern viewed on through drive with control at top.
4) O-ring included in the delivery contents.
319
Overview of mounting options

Through drive1) Mounting option for 2nd pump
Flange Coupling for Short A15VSO A10VSO/31 A10VSO/32 A10VO/53
SAE J744 splined shaft code NG (shaft) NG (shaft) NG (shaft) NG (shaft) Gear pump
82-2 (A) Series F
5/8 in A_S2 – – – 10, 18 (U) 1
NG4 to 222)
101-2 (B) 28 (S, R) Series N
7/8 in B_S4 – – –
45 (U, W) NG20 to 322)
45 (S, R)
1 in B3S5 – – – –
60, 63 (U, W)
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in C_S7 – – – 85 (U, W) –
1 1/2 in C_S9 – – – 85 (S) PGH5 2
165-4 (E) W50 E4A2 175, 210 (A2) – – – –
W60 E4A4 280 (A4) – – – –
Flange
ISO 3019-2
(metric)
80-2 3/4 in K_S3 – 18 (S, R) – 10 (S) –
3
100-2 7/8 in L5S4 – 28 (S, R) – – –
160-4 1 1/4 in P4S7 – – 71 (S, R) – –
180-4 1 1/2 in R4S9 – – 100 (S) – –
1 3/4 in R4T1 – 140 (S) 140, 180 (S) – –
125-4 1 in M4S5 – – 45 (S, R) – –
1) Further through drives on request 4
2) Bosch Rexroth recommends special versions of the gear pumps. Please contact us.
8
320

Combination pumps A15VSO + A15VSO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Total length A
A15VSO A15VSO (2nd pump)
(1st pump) Size 175 Size 210 Size 280
Size 175 691 – –
Size 210 708 726 –
Size 280 752.45 770 810
By using combination pumps, it is possible to have independent circuits without the need for splitter gearboxes.
When ordering combination pumps, the type designations of the 1st and 2nd pumps must be linked by a “+”.
Ordering example:
A15VSO280LRDRA0V/10MRVE4A41EE4A40-0+
A15VSO280LRDRA0V/10MRVE4A41EU0000-0
A tandem pump consisting of two equal sizes is permissible without additional supports assuming that the dynamic acceleration does
not exceed maximum 10 g (= 98.1 m/s2).
For combination pumps consisting of more than two pumps, the mounting flange must be rated for the permissible mass torque.
A15VSO A15VSO
(1st pump) (2nd pump)
A
321

Connector for solenoids installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
HIRSCHMANN DIN EN 175 301-803-A /ISO 4400

Without bidirectional suppressor diode___________________H
There is the following type of protection with mounted mating
connector:
1
IP65 ___________________________________DIN/EN 60529
(2)
(1)
2
29.7
ø37
50
68.5
3
Changing connector orientation

If necessary, you can change the connector orientation by
turning the solenoid housing.
To do this, proceed as follows: 4
1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this, turn
the mounting nut (1) one turn counter-clockwise.
2. Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired orientation.
3. Retighten the mounting nut. Tightening torque: 5+1 Nm.
(WAF26, 12-sided DIN 3124)
On delivery, the connector orientation may differ from that 5
8
322
During commissioning and operation, the axial piston unit Below-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is
must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled. This must also installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
unit may drain back to the reservoir via the hydraulic lines. 1 2
Particularly in the installation position "drive shaft upwards" SB SB
filling and air bleeding must be carried out completely as there ht min ht min
is, for example, a danger of dry running.
hmin hmin
The case drain fluid in the pump housing must be directed to amin
T1 amin T2
the reservoir via the highest available drain port (T1, T2, T3). S
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of T3
T3
pressure differences at the drain ports of the units, the shared T2 S
drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible T1
situation. If this is not possible, separate drain lines must be 3
laid if necessary.
SB
ht min
tion. hmin
T1
In all operating conditions, the suction and drain lines must amin
flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The per- T2
missible suction height hS results from the overall loss of pres-
sure; it must not, however, be higher than hS max = 800 mm. S
The minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall be- T3
low 0.8 bar absolute during operation and with cold start.
Installation Position Installation Air bleed Filling

position
See the following examples 1 to 9. 1 T1 S + T1
Further installation positions are possible upon request.
2 T2 S + T2
Recommended installation position: 1 and 2. T2 S + T2
3
Key, see page 39
323
Above-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is Inside-reservoir installation is when the axial piston unit is in-
installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. stalled in the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The axial
piston unit is completely below the hydraulic fluid.
Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm.
If the minimum fluid level is equal to or below the upper edge of 1
Recommendation for installation position 6 (drive shaft upward):
the pump, see chapter "Above-reservoir installation".
A check valve in the drain line (cracking pressure 0.5 bar) can
prevent from draining of the pump housing. Axial piston units with electrical components (e.g. electric
control, sensors) may not be installed in a reservoir below the
4 5 fluid level.
F
T1 F Exception
2
T2 Installation of the pump with E2-/E6 control, only with HIR-
S SCHMANN connector and mineral hydraulic fluids can be
T3 used and the fluid temperature is limited to maximum 80 °C.
T2 hs max
S T3
hs max 7 8
T1 ht min
ht min
T1
hmin amin T2 S 3
hmin amin
ht min ht min
T3 T3
6
T2 S amin T1
hmin amin hmin
F
T2
T1 9
T2 4
T1
hs max S ht min
T3
ht min
T3
amin hmin
hmin amin
5
Installation Air bleed Filling
Installation Air bleed Filling position
position
Automatically via the open port
4 F T1 (F) Via the highest
7 T1, by position below hydraulic
port T1
5 F T2 (F) fluid level
6 F T2 (F)
8 Automatically via the open port
Via the highest 6
T2, by position below hydraulic
port T2
9 fluid level
L Filling / air bleed

S Suction port
T Drain port 7

ht min Minimum required immersion depth (200 mm)
hmin Minimum required spacingt to reservoir bottom
(100 mm)
8
space between the suction line and the drain line.
This prevents the heated, return flow from being
324
– The pump A15VSO is designed to be used in open circuits.
– The project planning, installation and commissioning of the axial piston unit requires the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corresponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly. If necessary,
these can be requested from Bosch Rexroth.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids. Take appropriate
safety measures (e. g. by wearing protective clothing).
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteristic may shift.
- The ports and fastening threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must
- The service line ports and function ports can only be used to accommodate hydraulic lines.
– Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to be
– The product is not approved as a component for the safety concept of a general machine according to ISO 13849.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the tightening torques of the fittings used.
- Mounting bolts:
For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to DIN 13 or thread according to ASME B1.1, we recommend checking
the tightening torque in individual cases in accordance with VDI 2230.
The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are maximum values of the female threads and must not be exceeded.
- Threaded plugs:
For the metallic threaded plugs supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of threaded plugs MV apply.

tightening torque of the tightening torque of the hexagon socket of the
Standard Size of thread female threads MG max threaded plugs MV locking screws
ISO 6149 M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 45 Nm 6 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 70 Nm 8 mm
M33 x 2 435 Nm 310 Nm 17 mm
M42 x 2 580 Nm 330 Nm 22 mm
Axial piston units forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be repro-
rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21
Subject to change.
325
Electric Drives
Linear Motion and
and Controls Hydraulics Pneumatics Service
Assembly Technologies
RE 92703/08.11 1/56
RE 92708/03.08
A10VO and RE 92707/11.10
Data sheet
Series 52/53
Size 10 to 100
Nominal pressure 250 bar Series 52 Series 53
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for standard program 2 – Variable pump in axial piston swashplate design for
hydrostatic drives in an open circuit
Technical data 5
– The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displacement.
DR – Pressure control 10
The flow can be steplessly varied by adjusting the swash-
DRG – Pressure control remotely operated 11 plate angle.
DRF (DFR) DRS (DFR1) – Pressure and flow control 12 – Stable storage for long service life
LA... – Pressure, flow and power control 13 – High permissible drive speed
EP – Electro-proportional control 14 – Favorable power-to-weight ratio - compact dimensions
EK – Electro-proportional control 15 – Low noise
EP.. / EK.. – with pressure and flow control 16 – Excellent suction characteristics
ED – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 18 – Axial and radial load capacity of drive shaft
ER – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 19 – Pressure and flow control
Dimensions, size 10 to 100 20 – Electro-hydraulic pressure control
Dimensions, through drive 47 – Power control
Summary of mounting options 50 – Electro-proportional swivel angle control
Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO 51 – Short response times
326
2/56 Bosch Rexroth AG A10VO Series 52/53 | RE 92703/08.11
Type code for standard program

A10V(S) O / 5 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Axial piston unit 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100

Swashplate design, variable, ● – – – – – – – A10VS
01
nominal pressure 250 bar, maximum pressure 315 bar – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A10V
Operation mode
Size (NG)
03 Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 7 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100
Control device
Pressure control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DR
with flow control, hydraulic
X-T open ● – ● ● ● – ●3) – DFR
– ● – – – ● ●2) ● DRF
X-T plugged ● – ● ● ● – ●3) – DFR1
– ● – – – ● ●2) ● DRS
Electrically overridable (negative characteristic) – ❍ ❍ ❍ – ● ● ❍ EF.D.4)
with pressure cut-off, remotely operated
hydraulic ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DRG
electrical negative characteristic U = 12 V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ED71
U = 24 V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ED72
04
positive characteristic U = 12 V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ER715)
U = 24 V – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ER725)
Power control with pressure cut-off
Start of control 10 to 35 bar – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA5D
36 to 70 bar – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA6D
71 to 105 bar – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA7D
106 to 140 bar – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA8D
141 to 230 bar – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA9D
remotely operated Start of control see LA.D – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA.DG
Flow control, X-T plugged Start of control see LA.D – ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA.DS
Flow control, electrically overridable Start of control see LA.D
– ● ● ● – ● ● ● LA.S
(negative characteristic), X-T plugged
1) Series 52 units are delivered as standard with 60 cm3. Higher values on request.
2) Series 53 only with D flange
3) Series 52 only with C flange
4) See RE 92709
5) The following must be taken into account during project planning:
Excessive current levels (I > 1200 mA with 12 V or I > 600 mA with 24 V) to the ER solenoid can result in undesired increase
of pressure which can lead to pump or system damage:
- Use Imax current limiter solenoids.
- An intermediate plate pressure controller can be used to protect the pump in the event of overflow.
An accessory kit with intermediate plate pressure controller can be ordered from Bosch Rexroth under part number R902490825.
= available ❍ = on request – = not available
327
RE 92703/08.11 | A10VO Series 52/53 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/56

A10V(S) O / 5 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100 1
Electro-proportional control (positive characteristic) with
pressure control U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP1D
U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP2D
Pressure and flow control, U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP1DF
X-T open (load sensing) U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP2DF
Pressure and flow control, U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP1DS 2
X-T plugged (load sensing) U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP2DS
Electrohydraulic pressure control U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP1ED
04
U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EP2ED
Pressure and flow control with controller U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK1DF
cut-off, X-T open (load sensing) U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK2DF
3
Pressure and flow control with controller U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK1DS
cut-off, X-T plugged (load sensing)
U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK2DS
Electrohydraulic pressure control with U = 12 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK1ED
controller cut-off U = 24 V – ● ● ● – ● ● ❍ EK2ED
Series 4
Series 5, index 2 ● – ● ● ● – ● – 522)
05
Series 5, index 3 – ● ● ● – ● ● ● 533)4)
06
counter clockwise L 5
Seals
Drive shaft 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100

Splined shaft standard shaft ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● S
ANSI B92.1a similar to shaft „S“ however for higher input torque – ● ● ● ● ● – – R 6
08 reduced diameter, not for through drive ● ● – ● ● ● ● ● U
similar to shaft "U", however for higher torque – – – ● ● ● ● ● W
Parallel shaft key to DIN 6885, not for through drive ● ● – – – – – – P
2) Control DR, DFR, DFR1, DRG, ED and ER: delivery with size 10, 28, 45, 60 and 856) only in series 52
3) Control DR, DRF, DRS, DRG, ED and ER: delivery with size 18, 63, 855) and 100 only in series 53 8
4) Control EF., LA.., EP.. and EK.. Delivery with size 18 to 100 only in series 53
5) Control DRF and DRS: delivery with size 85 only with D flange in series 53
6) Control DFR, DFR1: delivery with size 85 only with C flange in series 52
328

A10V(S) O / 5 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Mounting flange 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100

ISO 3019-2 (DIN) 2-hole ● – – – – – – – A
09 ISO 3019-1 (SAE) 2-hole ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C
4-hole – – – – ● ● ●2) ● D
Service line port 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100

SAE flange port at rear, metric fixing thread
– ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 11
(not for through drive)
SAE flange port on opposite side, metric fixing thread
– ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 12
10 (for through drive)
SAE flange port at side, 90° offset, metric fixing thread
– – – ● – – – – 133)
(not for through drive and only available for counter-clockwise rotation)
Metric threaded ports, rear (not for through drive) ● – – – – – – – 14
Through drive 10 18 28 45 63 85 100 601)

Without through drive, standard for versions 11, 13 and 14 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N00
SAE J744 flange coupling for splined shaft4)
Diameter diameter
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● K01
3/4 in 11T 16/32DP – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● K52
11 101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – – ● ● ● ● ● ● K68
1 in 15T 16/32DP – – – ● ● ● ● ● K04
127-4 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – – – – ● ● ● ● K15
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – – – – – ● ● K16
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – – – – – – ● ● K07
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – – – – – ● ● K24
Connector for solenoids 10 18 28 45 601) 63 85 100

12 DEUTSCH molded connector, 2-pin – without suppressor diode – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● P
2) Only available in series 53. For controller designation and series assignment, please refer to positions 04, 05,
including footnotes.
3) Port plate 13 only available with counter-clockwise rotation.
4) Coupling for splined shaft as per ANSI B92.1a

329
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid Notes on the selection of the hydraulic fluid
Prior to project design, please see our data sheets RE 90220 In order to select the correct hydraulic fluid, it is necessary to
(mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally acceptable hy- know the operating temperature in relation to the ambient tem-
draulic fluids) for detailed information regarding the choice of perature. In an open circuit this is the reservoir temperature.
hydraulic fluid and application conditions. The fluid should be selected so that within the operating 1
When using environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum range
the limitations regarding technical data and seals must be (Qopt), see shaded section of the selection diagram. We recom-
observed. Please contact us. When ordering, indicate the mend to select the higher viscosity grade in each case.
hydraulic fluid that is to be used. Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C the operating
Operating viscosity range temperature in the reservoir is 60 °C . In the optimum operating
viscosity range (Qopt; shaded area) this corresponds to viscos-
For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the 2
ity grades VG 46 resp. VG 68; VG 68 should be selected.
operating viscosity (at operating temperature) be selected the
range Important
The case drain temperature is influenced by pressure and input
speed and is always higher than the reservoir temperature.
referred to reservoir temperature (open circuit). However, at no point in the component may the temperature
exceed 115 °C. The temperature difference specified on the left
Limits of viscosity range
is to be taken into account when determining the viscosity in 3
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: the bearing.
Qmin = 10 mm2/s Please contact us if the above conditions cannot be met due to
for short periods (t d 1 min) extreme operating parameters.
at max. perm. case drain temperature of 115 °C.
Filtration of the fluid
Please note that the max. case drain temperature of 115 °C is
The finer the filtration the better the fluid cleanliness class and
also not exceeded in certain areas (for instance bearing area).
the longer the service life of the axial piston unit. 4
The fluid temperature in the bearing area is approx. 5 K higher
than the average case drain temperature. In order to guarantee the functional reliability of the axial piston
unit it is necessary to carry out a gravimetric evaluation of the
Qmax = 1600 mm2/s
fluid to determine the particle contamination and the cleanli-
for short periods (t d 1 min)
ness class according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness class of at
on cold start
least 20/18/15 must be achieved.
(p d 30 bar, n d 1000 rpm, tmin -25 °C)
Depending on the installation situation, special measures are 5
115 °C), a cleanliness class of at least 19/17/14 according to
necessary at temperatures between -40°C and -25°C. Please
ISO 4406 is necessary.
contact us.
Please contact us if the above classes cannot be observed.
see data sheet RE 90300-03-B.
Selection diagram
6
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 6
VG 2
200
10
2
100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
60
7
40 36
Qopt.
20
16
10
5 5 8
-40 -25 -10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
tmin = -40 °C Fluid temperature range tmax = +115 °C
330
Technical data
Pressure at service line port B Definition

Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 250 bar absolute Nominal pressure pnom
Maximum pressure pmax ________________ 315 bar absolute
pressure.
Single operating period ___________________________ 2.5 ms
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Maximum pressure pmax
The maximum pressure corresponds to the operating pressure
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 10 bar
within the single operating period. The total of the single oper-
Rate of pressure change RA max ______________ 16000 bar/s ating periods must not exceed the total operating period.
pnom Minimum pressure on the high-pressure side (B) that is re-
Pressure p
't quired in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.

Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) that is required to
'p prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum pressure
depends on the speed and displacement of the axial piston
unit.
Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduc-
Time t tion speed with a pressure change over the entire pressure
range.
Minimum pressure pS min __________________ 0.8 bar absolute t2
Maximum pressure pS max ___________________ 5 bar absolute Single operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
Case drain pressure Maximum pressure pmax

Maximum permissible case drain pressure
(at port L, L1):
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S, how-
ever not higher than 2 bar absolute.
pL max abs __________________________________________2 bar
Maximum permissible speed (limit speed) Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)
Permissible speed by increasing inlet pressure pabs at suction

Time t
opening S or at Vg d Vg max .
1,2
1.6
1.4
Speed n/no max [min-1]
1,1
1.2
1,0 1.0
0.9
0,9 0.8
0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
Displacement Vg/Vg max [cm3]

331
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without efficiencies and tolerances: values rounded)
Size NG 10 18 28 45 601) 632) 85 100
Geometrical displacement
Vg max cm3 10.5 18 28 45 60 63 85 100
per revolution
Speed3) 1
maximum at Vg max nnom rpm 3600 3300 3000 26004) 2600 2600 2500 2300
maximum at Vg < Vg max nmax perm rpm 4320 3960 3600 3120 3140 3140 3000 2500
Flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max l/min 37 59 84 117 156 163 212 230
at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max qvE max l/min 15 27 42 68 90 95 128 150
Power at 'p = 250 bar 2
at nnom, Vg max Pmax kW 16 25 35 49 65 68 89 96

at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max PE max kW 7 11 18 28 37 39 53 62
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 250 bar Tmax Nm 42 71 111 179 238 250 338 398
'p = 100 bar T Nm 17 29 45 72 95 100 135 159
3
Rotary stiffness, S c Nm/rad 9200 11000 22300 37500 65500 65500 143000 143000
drive shaft R c Nm/rad – 14800 26300 41000 69400 69400 – –
U c Nm/rad 6800 8000 – 30000 49200 49200 102900 102900
W c Nm/rad – – – 34400 54000 54000 117900 117900
P c Nm/rad 10700 13100 – – – – – –
Moment of inertia rotary group JTW kgm2 0.0006 0.00093 0.0017 0.0033 0.0056 0.0056 0.012 0.012 4
Angular acceleration, maximum5) D rad/s2 8000 6800 5500 4000 3300 3300 2700 2700
Filling capacity V L 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.8 0.8 1 1
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 8 11.5 14 18 22 22 34 34
1) Only series 52
2) Only series 53
3) The values are applicable: 5
- for absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at the suction port S
4) Please contact us regarding higher speeds
5) The scope of application lies between the minimum necessary and the maximum permissible drive speeds.
Valid for external excitation (e.g. diesel engine 2- to 8-fold rotary frequency, cardan shaft 2-fold rotary frequency).
6
The loading capacity of the connecting parts must be taken into account.
Note
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend checking the loading with tests or calculations / simulations
and comparison with the permissible values.
7
Vg • n • KV Vg = Geometric displacement per revolution in cm3

Flow qV = [l/min]
Vg • 'p n = Speed in rpm
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • p • hmh KV = Volumetric efficiency 8
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Total efficiency (ht = hV • hmh)
332
Technical data
Size NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
at a/2
Fq max N 250 350 1200 1500 1700 2000 2000
a/2 a/2
a
Axial force maximum
Fax + Fax max N 400 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 3000

Size NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
Torque
Tmax Nm 42 71 111 179 250 338 398
Input torque for drive shaft, maximum2)
S TE max Nm 126 124 198 319 630 1157 1157
Ø in 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 1/2
R TE max Nm – 150 225 400 650 – –
Ø in – 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 – –
U TE max Nm 60 59 – 188 306 628 628
Ø in 5/8 5/8 – 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/4
W TE max Nm – – – 200 396 650 650
Ø in – – – 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/4
P TE max Nm 90 88 – – – – –
Ø mm 18 18 – – – – –
Maximum through-drive torque for drive shaft
S TD max Nm – 108 160 319 484 698 698
R TD max Nm – 120 176 365 484 – –
T1 T2
TE
1. Pumpe
Pump 1 2. Pumpe
Pump 2
TD
333
Technical data
Drive power and flow Size 60/63
Operating material: _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

Hydraulic fluid ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50 °C ______ n = 2600 rpm
Size 10 160 80
1
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm 140 70
qV
______ n = 3600 rpm 120 60
Drive power P [kW]

100 pqV max 50
Flow qV [l/min]
35 20 80 40
Flow qV [l/min]
Drive power P [kW]

25 qV 15 60 30
pqV max
15 10 40 pqV min 20 2
5 pqV min 5 20 10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
Operating pressure P [bar] Operating pressure P [bar]
Size 18 Size 85
3
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm
______ n = 3300 rpm ______ n = 2500 rpm

220 110
60 40 200 100
Flow qV [l/min]
qV
Drive power P [kW]
50 qV 30 180 90
40 20 160 80 4
Drive power P [kW]

pqV max
30 pqV min 10 140 70
Flow qV [l/min]
20 0
120 60
0 50 100 150 200 250
Operating pressure P [bar] 100 50
pqV max
Size 28 80 40
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm 60 30 5
______ n = 3000 rpm 40 20

pqV 0
20 10
90
80 40 0 0
Flow qV [l/min]
0 50
Drive power P [kW]
qV 100 150 200 250

60 pqV max 30
Operating pressure P [bar]
40 20 6
10
Size 100
20 pqV min
0 _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm
0 50 100 150 200 250 ______ n = 2300 rpm
Operating pressure P [bar] 230
220 110
Size 45
200 qV 100
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm 7
180 90
______ n = 2600 rpm
160 80
Drive power P [kW]
120 60
140 70
Flow qV [l/min]
100 qv 50
Drive power P [kW]
40 120 60
Flow qV [l/min]
80 Pqv max
pqV max
60 30 100 50
8
40 20 80 40
Pqv min
20 10 60 30
pqV 0
0 40 20
0 50 100 150 200 250
20 10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250
334
DR – Pressure control
The pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the pump Circuit diagram
output within the pump control range. The variable pump only
supplies as much hydraulic fluid as is required by the consum-
ers. If the operating pressure exceeds the target pressure set
at the pressure valve, the pump will regulate towards a smaller
displacement. The pressure can be set steplessly at the control
valve. L L1 B
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
250 Hysteresis / pressure rise 'pmax

Setting range1)
L2 S
25
Flow qv [l/min] Port for

B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1,2 Case drain fluid (L1,2 plugged)
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, this

setting range is the permissible setting range and must not Controller data
be exceeded.
Hysteresis and repeatability 'p _____________ maximum 3 bar
The range of possible settings at the valve are greater.
Pressure rise, maximum
NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
'p bar 6 6 6 6 8 12 14
Control fluid consumption__________ maximum approx. 3 l/min
Flow losses at qVmax see page 9.
335
DRG – Pressure control remotely operated

The DRG control valve overrides the function of the DR pres- Circuit diagram
sure controller (see page 10).
Not included in the delivery contents
A pressure relief valve can be externally piped to port X for
remote setting of pressure below the setting of the DR control
valve spool. This relief valve is not included in the delivery 1
contents of the pump. X
The differential pressure at the control valve is set as standard
to 20 bar. The control fluid volume at port X is approx. 1.5 l/
min. If another setting is required (range from 10 to 22 bar)
please state this in clear text.
As a separate pressure relief valve we can recommend:
2
DBDH 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402 or
DBETR-SO 381 with orifice dia. 0.8 mm in P (electric) to L L1 B
RE 29166.
The max. length of piping should not exceed 2 m.
3
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
Hysteresis / pressure rise 'pmax
250
L2 S
4
Setting range1)
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
20 5
X Pilot pressure
Flow qv [l/min]
Controller data
6
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, this Pressure rise, maximum
setting range is the permissible setting range and must not
be exceeded. NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
The range of possible settings at the valve is higher. 'p bar 6 6 6 6 8 12 14
Control fluid consumption________ maximum approx. 4.5 l/min
Flow losses at qVmax see page 9. 7
8
336
DRF (DFR) DRS (DFR1) – Pressure and flow control

In addition to the pressure control function (see page 10), a variable Circuit diagram
orifice (e.g. directional valve) is used to adjust the differential pres-
sure upstream and downstream of the orifice. This is used to control Plugged at DRS (DFR1) valve

the pump flow. The pump flow is equal to the actual required flow
by the consumer, regardless of changing pressure levels.
X
The pressure control overrides the flow control function.
Note
The DRS (DFR1) valve version has no connection between X
and the reservoir. Unloading the LS-pilot line must be possible
in the valve system.
Because of the flushing function sufficient unloading of the L L1
X-line must also be provided. B
Flow control at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
250
Setting range1)
L2 S
25 Port for
B Service line
Flow qv [l/min]
S Suction line
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, this L, L1,2 Case drain fluid (L1,2 plugged)
setting range is the permissible setting range and must not X Pilot pressure
be exceeded.
The range of possible settings at the valve is higher.
Differential pressure 'p
Static characteristic at variable speed Standard setting: 14 to 22 bar.
If another setting is required, please state in clear text.
qV max Relieving the load on port X to the reservoir results in a zero

stroke ("standby") pressure which lies about 1 to 2 bar higher
than the differential pressure 'p). No account is taken of sys-
tem influences.
Flow qv [l/min]
Controller data
Data pressure control DR, see page 10.
Maximum flow deviation measured with drive speed n = 1500
qV min rpm.
Speed n [rpm]
NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
Possible connections at port B 'qv max l/min 0.5 0.9 1.0 1.8 2.5 3.1 3.1
(not included in the delivery contents)
Control fluid consumption
LS mobile control blocks DRF (DFR) _________________maximum approx. 3 to 4.5 l/min
Mobile control blocks M4 - 12 (RE 64276) DRS (DFR1) ____________________ maximum approx. 3 l/min
Mobile control blocks M4 - 15 (RE 64283) Volume flow loss at qVmax, see page 9.
LUDV mobile control blocks
Mobile control blocks M6 - 15 (RE 64284)
Mobile control blocks M7 - 22 (RE 64295)
337
LA... – Pressure, flow and power control

Pressure control equipped as DR(G), see page 10 (11). When ordering please state the power characteristics to be set
Flow control equipped as DRF, DRS, see page 12. ex works in clear text, e.g. 20 kW at 1500 rpm.
In order to achieve a constant drive torque with varying operat- Controller data
ing pressures, the swivel angle and with it the output flow from
For pressure controller DR data, see page 10.
the axial piston pump is varied so that the product of flow and 1
For flow control FR data, see page 12.
pressure remains constant.
Controller data
Flow control is possible below the power control curve.
Maximum control fluid consumption, see page 12
Volume flow loss at qVmax, see page 9.
Start of Torque T [Nm] for size Order code

control 2
[bar] 18 28 45 63 85 100
10 to 35 3.8 - 12.1 6 - 19 10 - 30 15 - 43 20 - 57 24 - 68 LA5
36 to 70 12.2 - 23.3 19.1 - 36 30.1 - 59 43.1 - 83 57.1 - 112 68.1 - 132 LA6
71 to 105 23.4 - 33.7 36.1 - 52 59.1 - 84 83.1 - 119 112.1 - 160 132.1 - 189 LA7
106 to 140 33.8 - 45 52.1 - 70 84.1 - 112 119.1 - 157 160.1 - 212 189.1 - 249 LA8
3
141 to 230 45.1 - 74.8 70.1 - 117 112.1 - 189 157.1 - 264 212.1 - 357 249.1 - 419 LA9
Conversion of the torque values in power [kW]:
T 2S • T • n
P= [kW] ( at 1500 rpm) or P= [kW] (for speeds, see table on page 7)
6.4 60000
Static curves and torque characteristic Circuit diagram (LAXD) with pressure cut-off 4
300
250
200 LA9
150 LA8 Circuit diagram (LAXDG) with pressure cut-off, remotely operated
5
X
100 LA7
X
50 LA6
0 LA5 Not included
0 100 in the delivery
contents
6
ΔqV (see table
on page 12)
LA9
Circuit diagram (LAXDS) with pressure and flow control
LA8
Not included
X X
Torque T [Nm]
in the delivery
LA7
contents 7
LA6
LA5
L L1 B
0 100
Volume flow qv [%]
Port for 8
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1,2 Case drain fluid (L1,2 plugged) L2 S
X Control pressure
338
EP – Electro-proportional control
Electro-proportional control makes a stepless and reproduc- Technical data, solenoid EP1 EP2
ible setting of the pump displacement possible directly via the
swashplate. The control force of the control piston is applied Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
by a proportional solenoid. The control is proportional to the Control current
current (for start of control, see table right). Start of control at Vg min 400 mA 200 mA
In a depressurized state, the pump is swiveled to its initial posi- End of control at Vg max 1200 mA 600 mA
tion (Vg max) by an adjusting spring. If the operating pressure Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A
exceeds 14 bar, the pump will swivel from Vg max to Vg min with-
Nominal resistance (at 20 °C) 5.5 : 22.7 :
out control by the solenoid (control current < start of control).
A PWM signal is used to control the solenoid. Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
200 Hz 200 Hz
EP.D: The pressure control regulates the pump displacement
Actuated time 100 % 100 %
back to Vg min after the set target pressure has been reached.
For protection rating, please refer to "Socket version"
A minimum operating pressure of 14 bar is needed for control. on page 49
The necessary control fluid is taken from the high pressure.
Operating temperature range at valve -20 °C to +115 °C
Circuit diagram EP.D
Characteristic EP1/2
Hysteresis < 5 %
L1 L B 1400
1200
1000
EP1
800
L2 S 600
EP2
400
Port for
B Service line 200
S Suction line
0 0,5 1,0
X Control pressure Displacement [%]
Vg min Vg max
Note
The spring return at the controller is not a safety device
Dirt contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, wear or
residual dirt from system components) could cause the con-
troller to block in an undefined position. The volume flow of
the axial piston unit will then no longer follow the commands
of the operator.
Check whether remedial measures for your application are
needed on your machine in order to put the driven consumer
in a safe state (e.g. immediate stop).
339
EK – Electro-proportional control with controller cut-off

The variant EK... is based completely on the variant EP... Technical data, solenoid EK1 EK2
(see page 14).
Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
In addition to the electro-proportional control function, a con-
Control current
troller cut-off is integrated in the electric characteristic.
The pump then swivels to Vg max if the control signal is lost (e.g. Start of control at Vg min 400 mA 200 mA
1
cable break) and then works with the DRF settings (see page End of control at Vg max 1200 mA 600 mA
12). The controller cut-off is only intended for short-term use Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A
and not for permanent use if the control signal is lost. If the
control signal is lost, the pump swivel times will be reduced by
the EK valve. Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
A PWM signal is used to control the solenoid. 200 Hz 200 Hz
A minimum operating pressure of 14 bar is needed for control. 2
The necessary control fluid is taken from the high pressure. For protection rating, please refer to "Socket version"
on page 49
The Vg max position is maintained by the force of the adjusting
spring. To overcome the force of this spring, the solenoid must Operating temperature range at valve -20 °C to +115 °C
be subjected to excessive current (Ires).
Observe the instructions regarding the project design on Characteristic EK
page 2 3
Hysteresis < 5 %
1400
Circuit diagram EK.DF
1200 Ires
X
1000
EK1 4
800
L1 L B
600 Ires
EK2
Imin
400
Ioff
Imin 5
200
Ioff
L2 S 0 0,5 1,0
Displacement [%]
Vg min Vg max
Port for
B Service line 6
S Suction line
L, L1,2 Case drain fluid (L1,2 plugged) EK1. EK2.
X Control pressure Imin [mA] 400 200

Imax [mA] 1200 600
Ioff [mA] < 300 < 150
7
Note Ires [mA] > 1200 > 600
The spring return at the controller is not a safety device
For changes in current, ramp times of > 200 ms must be
Dirt contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, wear or observed.
residual dirt from system components) could cause the con-
troller to block in an undefined position. The volume flow of
the axial piston unit will then no longer follow the commands
of the operator. 8
Check whether remedial measures for your application are
needed on your machine in order to put the driven consumer
in a safe state (e.g. immediate stop).
340
EP(K).DF / EP(K).DS – EP(K) with pressure and flow control

A hydraulic pressure flow control is superimposed on the
electro-proportional control.
Circuit diagram EP.DF
The pressure control regulates the pump displacement back to
Vg min after the set target pressure has been reached. X Not included
This function is super-imposed on the EP or EK control, i.e. in the delivery
the control-current dependent function is executed below the contents
target pressure.
Setting range from 20 to 250 bar. For the pressure flow con-
trol, see page 12. L1 L B
Pressure control has priority over electro-proportional control
and flow control.
With flow control, the pump flow can be influenced in addition
to pressure control. The pump flow is thus equal to the actual
amount of hydraulic fluid required by the consumer. This is
achieved using the differential pressure at the consumer
(e.g. orifice).
The EP.DS or EK.DS version has no connection between X L2 S
and the reservoir (load sensing). Please refer to the notes on
page 12.
Port for
Circuit diagram EP.D B Service line
S Suction line
X Control pressure
L1 L B
Circuit diagram EP.DS
X
Not included
in the delivery
contents
L2 S
L1 L B
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
L2 S
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
X Control pressure
341
EP(K).ED – EP(K) with electro-hydraulic pressure control

The ED valve is set to a certain pressure by a specified variable Circuit diagram EP.ED
solenoid current.
X
When a change is made at the consumer (load pressure), the
position of the control piston will shift.
This causes an increase or decrease in the pump swivel angle 1
(flow) in order to maintain the electrically set pressure level.
The pump thus only delivers as much hydraulic fluid as the
consumers can take. The pressure can be set steplessly by the
L1 L B
solenoid current.
As the solenoid current signal drops towards zero, the pres-
sure will be limited to pmax by an adjustable hydraulic pressure 2
cut-off (negative characteristic, e.g. for fan drives ). A PWM
signal is used to control the solenoid.
For further information and technical data of the solenoids for
ED(ER) control please refer to pages 18 and 19.
Static current-pressure characteristic ED
(negative characteristic) L2 S
3
(measured with pump in zero stroke)
Port for
B Service line
250
S Suction line

Max. adjustable
X Control pressure 4
control pressure
140
Circuit diagram EK.ED

X
Min. adjustable control pressure 5
0 1
Amperage I/ I max
Hysteresis static current-pressure characteristic < 3 bar.
Static flow-pressure characteristic
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
L1 L B
6
250
Setting range
L2 S
Port for
25 B Service line
S Suction line 8
Flow qv [l/min] L, L1,2 Case drain fluid (L1,2 plugged)
Controller data
X Control pressure
Standby standard setting: 20 bar. Other values on request.
Hysteresis / pressure rise 'p 4 bar
342
ED – Electro-hydraulic pressure control

The ED valve is set to a certain pressure by a specified variable Circuit diagram ED..
solenoid current.
This causes an increase or decrease in the pump swivel angle
consumers can take. The desired pressure level can be set L B
steplessly by varying the solenoid current.
sure will be limited to pmax by an adjustable hydraulic pressure
cut-off (secure fail safe function in case of a loss of power, e.g.
for fan drives ).
The response time characteristic of the ED-control was opti-
mized for the use as a fan drive system.
When ordering, state the type of application in clear text.
L1 S

(measured at pump in zero stroke – negative characteristic)
250 Port for

ED Deactivation of control B Service line
S Suction line
Max. adjustable
control pressure
140
Technical data, solenoid ED71 ED72

Min. adjustable control pressure Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
0 1 Control current
Amperage I/ I max
Control begin at qv min 100 mA 50 mA
Hysteresis static current-pressure characteristic < 3 bar End of control at qv max 1200 mA 600 mA
Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A
Static flow-pressure characteristic Nominal resistance (at 20 °C) 5.5 : 22.7 :
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C) Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
200 Hz 200 Hz
Hysteresis / pressure rise 'p
max Actuated time 100 % 100 %

250
For protection rating, please refer to "Socket version"
on page 52
Setting range
140
min
Flow qv [l/min]
max min
Controller data
Standby standard setting 20 bar, other values on request.
Hysteresis and pressure rise __________________ 'p < 4 bar.
Control flow consumption ___________________ 3 to 4.5 l/min.
343
ER – Electro-hydraulic pressure control

The ER valve is set to a certain pressure by a specified variable Circuit diagram ER..
solenoid current.
This causes an increase or decrease in the pump swivel angle 1
consumers can take. The desired pressure level can be set
L B
sure will be limited to pmin (stand by). 2
Observe the project planning notes on page 2.
Static current-pressure characteristic ER

(measured with pump in zero stroke – positive characteristic)
350 3
L1 S
250
Max. adjustable
150 control pressure
Min. Port for
adjustable 4
B Service line
50 control
pressure S Suction line
0
0 1 Case drain (L1 plugged)
L, L1
Amperage I/Imax
Hysteresis static current-pressure characteristic < 3 bar

Influence of pressure setting on stand by ± 2 bar 5
Static flow-pressure characteristic
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C) Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
Control current
max
250 End of control at qv max 1200 mA 600 mA
Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A 6

Setting range

Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
200 Hz 200 Hz
140 For protection rating, please refer to "Socket version" on page
min 52 7
Flow qv [l/min] Operating temperature range at valve -20 °C to +115 °C
min max
Controller data
Hysteresis and pressure rise __________________ 'p < 4 bar.
Control flow consumption ___________________ 3 to 4.5 l/min. 8
344
Before finalizing your design request a certified

Dimensions, size 10 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DR – Hydraulic pressure controller

Centering flange SAE version
max. 110
73
56
11
6.4 L
Flange
45 °
ISO 3019-1
ø 11
ø 82.55 -0.054
45°
Y
0
53.5
56
L1
24 106.4
148 134
180
View Y clockwise rotation View Y counter-clockwise rotation
S B B S
28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6
51 51 51 51
DRG DFR / DFR1

Pressure and flow control, remote controlled Pressure and flow control
146 40 146 40
X X
X X
L L
102
102
95
95
L1 L1
179 179
For details of connection options and drive shafts, please refer to page 22
345


Centering flange metric version
max. 110
73 1
56
11
6.4 L
Flange
45°
ISO 3019-2
ø 11
-0.046
45°
Y 2
0
ø 80
53.5
56
L1
24 109
148 134
180 3
View Y clockwise rotation View Y counter-clockwise rotation
S B B S
28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6
51 51 51 51
DRG DFR / DFR1 6

Pressure control, remotely operated Pressure and flow control
max. 110 max. 110

131 40 131 40
X X
X X
L L 7
117
117
110
110
L1 L1
180 180 8
346

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 3/4 in U Splined shaft 5/8 in P Parallel shaft key
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 9T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) DIN 6885, A6x6x25
+ 0.3
30 28
0.009
0
1/4-20UNC-2B2) 3)
ø18 +- 0.004
14 23.8 2 25
5
20.5 -0.1
ø22
Centering4) Centering4)
R3 15 x 6.7 R3 15 x 6.7
21 DIN 332 15.8 DIN 332 36
38 31.8
Ports
pressure
[bar]5)
B Service line DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 16 deep 315 O
S Suction line DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 16 deep 5 O
Case drain fluid DIN 38526) M16 x 1.5; 2
L (metric) O7)
12 deep
Case drain fluid DIN 38526) M16 x 1.5; 2
L1 (metric) X7)
12 deep
L (SAE) Case drain fluid ISO 119266) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 O7)
L1 (SAE) Case drain fluid ISO 119266) 9/16-18UNF-2B; 10 deep 2 X7)
X with adapter Pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 11.5 deep 315 O
X without adapter Pilot pressure ISO 119265) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 11.5 deep 315 O
1) ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
3) For the maximum tightening torques the general instructions on page 56 must be observed.
4) Coupling axially secured, e.g. with a clamp coupling or radially mounted clamping screw
5) Depending on the application, momentary pressure spikes can occur. Consider this when selecting measuring equipment and
fittings.
6) The spot face can be deeper than as specified in the standard.
7) Depending on the installation position, L or L1 must be connected (please refer to pages 54 and 55)
347
Dimensions, size 181) Before finalizing your design request a certified

installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Clockwise rotation, series 53
Port plate 11
83
7.8 10 1
24.5
L1
L1
Flange
122
ISO 3019-1 L
2.
72
5
L 45° 2
Ø82.55 - 00.054
11
.5
.5
61
61
X
45°
63
L2
3
83 106.4
156 136
max. 183
View X
4
Ø32
58.7
Ø20
47.6
5
S B
30.2 22.2
32 33
Port plate 12 Detail Z
6
83
7.8 10 View Y
Ø20
47.6
24.5
L1
Flange B 22.2
ISO 3019-1 7
L
Ø82.55- 00.054
58.7
Ø32
Y Z
8
S
30.2 56.5 56.5
143
170
1)Dimensions of service line ports turned through 180° for counter-clockwise rotation
348

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 3/4 in R Splined shaft 3/4 in U Splined shaft 5/8 in
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 11T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744) 9T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744)
30
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
14 23.8
14
5 5
Centering5)
Usable R3 15 x 6.7
shaft length 21 DIN 332
21 15.8
38
38 31.8
P Parallel shaft key

DIN 6885, A6x6x25
+ 0.3
28
0.009
0
ø18 +- 0.004
2 25
20.5 -0.1
ø22
Centering5)
R3 15 x 6.7
DIN 332 36
Ports
pressure
[bar]6)
B Service line, SAE J5187) 3/4 in 315 O
L Case drain fluid ISO 119268) 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 2 O9)
L1, L2 Case drain fluid ISO 119268) 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 2 X9)
X Pilot pressure ISO 119268) 7/16-20UNF-2A; 11.5 deep 315 O
2) Splines according to ANSI B92.1a, run out of spline is a deviation from standard
4) For the maximum tightening torques the general instructions on page 56 must be observed
6) Depending on the application, momentary pressure spikes can occur. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring equipment
and fittings
7) Metric fixing thread is a deviation from standard
8) The spot face can be deeper than as specified in the standard
9) Depending on the installation position, L, L1 or L2 must be connected (please refer to installation instructions on pages 54, 55)
349
Before finalizing your design, please request ap-

Dimensions, size 18 proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DRG EP.D. / EK.D.

Pressure controller, remote controlled, series 53 Electro-proportional control, series 53
max. 183 1
113 62 218.5
113 62
X L1
L1 X
X
L L
122
106
122
106
2
S
S L2 L2
3
DRF/DRS EP.ED / EK.ED
Pressure and flow control, series 53 Electro-proportional control, series 53
max. 183
113 62 4
220
X
L1 L1
X
L
122
L
106
122
110
5
L2
S L2
LA.D. ED7. / ER7. 6

Pressure, flow and power control, series 53 Electro-hydraulic pressure control, series 53
225 214
113 X 62
L1 L1 7
122
106
L
113
L
1221)
L2 S L2 8
S
1) ER7.: 157 mm if using an intermediate plate pressure controller.

350
Dimensions, size 281)2) Before finalizing your design request a certified


Port plate 11
90
9.5 12
45°
6.3
Flange
123.5
ISO 3019-1 L
107
L
14.3
-0.054
69
0
X
ø101.6
66
73
7.9 27 L1 170 146
172
max. 209.5
View X
ø20
47.6
58.7
ø32
S B
30.2 22.2
33 33
Port plate 12
Detail Z
max. 209.5
90 View Y
12
47.6
ø20
9.5
6.3
Flange
B 22.2
ISO 3019-1
L
-0.054
0
Y Z
58.7
ø32
S B
ø101.6
27 L1 30.2 66 66
160
1) Dimensions of service line ports turned through 180° for counter-clockwise rotation (please refer to page 28)
2) Primary dimensions for pump apply for series 52 and 53
351

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 7/8 in R Splined shaft 7/8 in
13T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 13T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744)
33.1
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
16 1
16
5
5
Usable
shaft length 2
25
25.1
41
41
Ports
3
pressure
[bar]5)
fixing thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep 4
L1, L28) Case drain fluid ISO 119267) 3/4-16UNF-2B; 12 deep 2 X9)
X Control pressure ISO 119267) 7/16-20UNF-2B; 11.5 deep 315 O
2) Splines according to ANSI B92.1a, run out of spline is a deviation from standard.
3) Thread according to ASME B1.1 5
fittings.
6) Metric fixing thread is a deviation from standard.
8) Only series 53
6
8
352

DRG EP.D. / EK.D.

max. 209.5 224

139.5 140
63 63
L1
X
X
L
123.5
130
L
114
107
S S
L2
L1
DFR / DFR1 EP.ED / EK.ED

max. 209.5
139.5
63 240
L1
X
130
123.5
X L
117
L
107
L2
S
L1
LA.D. ED7. / ER7.

231
140 63
240
X
L1
X
130
L L
114
1301)
S
L2
L1
1)ER7.: 159 mm if using an intermediate plate pressure controller.

353


Port plate 11
99
12 1
9.5
6.3 30 45°
Flange L1
131.5
ISO 3019-1
L
77
Ø101.6 -0.054
14.3
2
78
0
68.5
189
max. 220.5 146 3
172
Port plate 12
max. 220.5
150.5
99
9.5 12 View X
6.3 30 4
Flange L1
ISO 3019-1 S
L
.9
69
Ø101.6 -0.054
0
69.9
Y
ø38
.4 ø25
ø38
52
S
35 26 B
35.7 .7 .2
30°
1782) 30°
2112) 38 38
Detail Z 6
Port plate 13 B
View Y
counter-clockwise rotation2)
52.4
Ø25
B
72
26.2 7
Z
S
S B
90 90 90 8
Dimensions of service line ports

turned through 180° for counter-clock-
wise rotation
1)Primary dimensions for pump apply for series 52 and 53
2)For dimensions of service line ports S and B for port plate 13, please refer to port plate 12, footnote 2).
354

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 in R Splined shaft 1 in U Splined shaft 7/8 in
38 33.1
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
16
16 16
5
5 5
Usable
shaft length 29.5
30 25.1
45.9
45.9 41
W Splined shaft 7/8 in

13T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
16
5
Usable
shaft length 25
41
Ports
pressure
[bar]5)
X Control pressure ISO 119267) 7/16-20UNF-2A; 11.5 deep 315 O
fittings.
8) Only for series 53
355

DRG EP.D. / EK.D.

1
max. 220.5 228
150.5 68 146 68 35
L1
X
X
131.5
L1 X
L
115
S
132.5
L
116
2
S
L2
3
max. 220.5 4
150.5 68 246 85 36
L1
X
131.5
L1 X
L
115
119
L S
133 5
S
L2
LA.D. ED7. / ER7. 6

235
146 68 250
L1 7
X X L1
X
L L
116.4
133
L
S
1321)
S
8
L2

356


Mounting flange C, clockwise rotation, series 52
Port plate 11
max. 220.5
117
9.5 40
X L1
L
Flange
137
ISO 3019-1
45°
87
14.3
-0.054
.5
0
78
X
Ø101.6
78
15 146
208 172
View X
S B
Ø25
Ø50
52.4
77.8
B
S
42.9 26.2
Port plate 12 33 46
Detail Z
max. 220.5
117
Ø25
52.4
View Y
9.5 40
6.3 X
B
26.2
Flange
ISO 3019-1
-0.054
0
Ø50
77.8
Y
B
Z
Ø101.6
15 42.9
201.5 72 72
239.5
357


Mounting flange D, clockwise rotation, series 52
Port plate 11
max. 220.5 1
117
12.7 40 X L1
6 L
Flange
137.4
ISO 3019-1
14
.3
45° 2
-0.063
87
0
.5
114.5
Ø127
78
148
X
78
3
114.5
15 146
208
View X
S 4
52.4
Ø50
Ø25
77.8
B
42.9 26.2
33 46
6
max. 220.5
117
52.4
View Y
Ø25
12.7 40 X
Flange B
ISO 3019-1 26.2
7
-0.063
Ø50
0
77.8
Y Z
B
S
Ø127
S 8
42.9
15 72 72
201.5
239.5
358


Port plate 11
max. 220.5
115.5
L1
L1
L
Flange
140.4
ISO 3019-1 43°
111
89
14.3
-0.054
79
0
X
Ø101.6
.5
77
45°
88
L2
115.5 146
208.2 172
View X
S B
Ø25
Ø50
52.4
77.8
S B
42.9 26.2
33 46
max. 220.5
115.5
52.4
Ø25
View Y
9.5 39
6.3 B
Flange 26.2
ISO 3019-1
-0.054
0
Ø50
Y Z
77.8
B
S
Ø101.6
S
15
115.5 42.9 72 72
201.5
239.5
359


Port plate 11
max. 220.5
151 1
115.5
12.7 39
6.3 L1 X L1
Flange L
ISO 3019-1
140
14
111
43°
45° 45° 2
89
Ø127 -0.063
0
114.5
79
X
146
.5
77
45°
88
15 L2
3
115.5 114.5
208 146
150
View X
Ø25
77.8
Ø50
52.4
5
B
S
42.9 26.2
33 46
Port plate 12
max. 220.5
Detail Z 6
151
115.5
View Y
12.7 39
Ø25
52.4
L1 X
6.3
Flange
ISO 3019-1 B
26.2
7
Ø127 -0.063
77.8
Ø50
0
Y Z
B
S
S
8
15
72 72
115.5 42.9
201.5
239.5
360

Dimensions, size 60 / 63 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in R Splined shaft 1 1/4 in U Splined shaft 1 in
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
47.5 33.1
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
19
19 16
5
5 5
Usable
shaft length 38
39.5 25
55.4
55.4 45.9
W Splined shaft 1 in
15 T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
16
5
Usable
shaft length 29
45.9
Ports
pressure
[bar]5)
fittings.
361

Dimensions, size 60 / 63 proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DRG EP.D. / EK.D.

max. 220.5 241 1

X 151
150.5 65 115.5 X 64.8 35.6
L1 L1 L1
X X
L
137
121
123.9
L
140.4
125
2
S L2
S
3
DFR / DFR1 (DRF/DRS) EP.ED / EK.ED
Pressure and flow control, series 52 (series 53) Electro-proportional control, series 53
max. 220.5
150.5 X 250.5
65 115.5 82 36 4
L1 L1 L1
X X
L
137
L
121
140.4
125
5
S
S L2
LA.D. ED7. / ER7. 6

247
150 X 65 251
7
X L1 L1
L
140
L
128
124
L1
1371)
L S
S 8
L2

362


Port plate 11
max. 242
130 L1
12.7 40
X L
Flange
ISO 3019-1
156
93.5
45°
Ø127 -0.063
95
0
17.5
87
20
181
245 210
View X
Ø32
88.9
Ø60
B 66.7
50.8 31.8
Port plate 12 50 45
Detail Z
max. 241.5
130
67.9
Ø32
View Y
12.7 40
X
Flange
B
ISO 3019-1 31.8
Ø127 -0.063
Ø63
0
88.9
Y Z
S
S
20 50.8 95 85
235.5
277
363


Port plate 11
1
max. 251.5
143
L1
12.7 36 X
L
Flange
ISO 3019-1
150
4
126
45° 2
101
-0.063
95
95
114.5
0
X
Ø127
102.5
45°
.3
14
4
3
130 L2
245 114.5
146
View X
4
Ø32
88.9
66.7
Ø60
5
S B
50.8 31.8
50 45
Port plate 12
Detail Z 6
Ø32
max. 251.5
143
66.7
12.7 36 View Y
X
Flange
B
ISO 3019-1 31.8 7
-0.063
0
88.9
Ø63
Y Z
S
B
Ø127
8
20 S
130 50.8 95 85
235
277
364

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/2 in U Splined shaft 1 1/4 in W Splined shaft 1 1/4 in
17T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 14T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 14T 12/24DP1)2) (SAE J744)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
47.5
7/16-14UNC-2B3) 4)
54
19
28 19
5
5 5
Usable
shaft length 33
43.5 35
55.4
61.9 55.4
Ports
pressure
[bar]5)
fixing thread DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
L Case drain fluid ISO 119267) 1 1/16-12UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 O9)
L1, L28) Case drain fluid ISO 119267) 1 1/16-12UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 X9)
fittings.
365

Dimensions, size 85, mounting flange C proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DRG EP.D. / EK.D.

max. 241.5 1
171.5 74 267
X 181.5 X 74 36
X
L1 L1
X
L
L
156
139.5
150
142
133
2
S S L2
3
max. 241.5
281
171.5 X 74 X 4
181.5 74
L1 L1
X
X
L L
156
139.5
150
133
5
S S L2
LA.D. ED../ ER.. 6

271 271.4
X 55
181.5 74 19.4
L1 7
X L1 X
L
1561)
149.9
133.4
145
S 8
S L2

366

Dimensions, size 85, mounting flange D proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DRF/DRS EP.D. / EK.D.

max. 251.5 267

181.5 X 74 181.5 74 36
L1
X L1 X
L L
150
150
142
133
133
126
S S L2
L2
LA.D. EP.ED / EK.ED

Pressure, flow and power control, series 53 Electro-proportional control, series 53
273 74
181.5 281 X
L1 L1
X X
L L
150
150
145
142
133
S L2 S L2
367


Port plate 11
max. 251.5 1
143 L1
12.7 36
X
Flange
3019-1
150
101
45°
2
Ø127 -0.063
95
0
X
95
17.5
102.5
45°
4
130 L2 3
245 181
210
View X
Ø32
88.9
66.7
Ø60
5
S B
50.8 31.8
50 45
Port plate 12
Detail Z
6
Ø32
max. 251.5
143
66.7
12.7 36 View Y
X
Flange
3019-1 B
31.8
7
Ø127 -0.063
88.9
0
Ø63
Y Z
S
20 S 8
130 50.8 95 85
235
277
368


Port plate 11
max. 251.5
143
L1
12.7 36 X
L
Flange
3019-1
150
4
126
45°
101
-0.063
95
95
114.5
0
X
Ø127
102.5
45°
.3
14
4
130 L2
245 114.5
146
View X
Ø32
88.9
66.7
Ø60
S B
50.8 31.8
Port plate 12
50 45
Detail Z
Ø32
max. 251.5
143
View Y
66.7
12.7 36
X
Flange
3019-1 B
31.8
-0.063
0
88.9
Ø63
Y Z
S
B
Ø127
20 S
130 50.8 95 85
235
277
369

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/2 in U Splined shaft 1 1/4 in W Splined shaft 1 1/4 in
17T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 14T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 14T 12/24DP1)2) (SAE J744)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 4)
47.5
7/16-14UNC-2B3) 4)
54
19 1
28 19
5
5 5
Usable
shaft length 33 2
43.5 35
55.4
61.9 55.4
Ports
3
pressure
[bar]5)
fixing thread DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
fixing thread DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 17 deep 4
L Case drain fluid ISO 119267) 1 1/16-12UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 O8)
L1, L2 Case drain fluid ISO 119267) 1 1/16-12UNF-2B; 15 deep 2 X8)
fittings.
6
8
370

DRG ED../ ER..

Pressure controller, remote controlled, series 53 Electro-hydraulic pressure control, series 53
max. 251.5
181.5 X 74 272
L1
X L1 X
L L
150
1561)
133
S L2 S L2
DRF/DRS
Pressure and flow control, series 53
max. 251.5
181.5 X 74
X L1
L
150
133
S L2
LA.D.
Pressure, flow and power control, series 53
271
X
181.5 74
L1
X
L
149.9
133.4
145
S L2

371

Dimensions through drive proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
K01 flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)

Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 5/8 in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A))
Cut A - B NG A1 A2 A3 A42)
18 182 9.3 43.3 M10 x 1.5, 14.5
Omitted for NG28 A3 1
deep
A2
28 204 9.9 47 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
45 229 10.7 53 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
45°
60/
255 9.5 59 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
+0.050
ø82.55 +0.020
A B 63
85 302 13.4 68 M10 x 1.5, 20
106 2
.5 deep
100 302 13.4 68 M10 x 1.5, 20
deep
A4
10
to mounting flange A1
Omitted for NG28
3
K52 flange SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)
Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))
Cut A - B NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A52)
Omitted for NG28 A4
A3 18 182 9.3 43.3 M10 x 1.5,
14.5 deep
28 204 39.3 18.8 47 M10 x 1.5, 4
45°
16 deep
+0.050
ø82.55+0.020
A B 45 229 39.4 18.9 53 M10 x 1.5,

16 deep
ø1
06 60/ 255 39.4 18.9 61 M10 x 1.5,
.5
63 16 deep
85 302 44.1 23.6 65 M10 x 1.5, 5
A5
20 deep
10 100 302 44.1 23.6 65 M10 x 1.5,
A2 20 deep
Omitted for NG28
6
K68 flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)
Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
Omitted for NG28, 45 A4
A3
28 204 42.3 17.8 47 M12 x 1.75,
18 deep
45 229 42.4 17.9 53 M12 x 1.75,
7
18 deep
45
°
A B 60/ 255 42.4 17.9 59 M12 x 1.75,

+0.050
ø101. 6 +0.020
63 18 deep
146
85 302 46.5 22 69 M12 x 1.75,
20 deep
100 302 46.5 22 69 M12 x 1.75,
A5 20 deep 8
10
Omitted for NG28, 45 A2

372

K04 flange SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)

Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
Omitted for NG45 A4
A3 45 229 47.9 18.9 53.4 M12 x 1.75,
18 deep
60/ 255 47.4 18.4 58.9 M12 x 1.75,
45°
63 18 deep
A B 85 302 51.2 22.2 69 M12 x 1.75,
ø101.6 +0.050
+0.020
20 deep
146
100 302 51.2 22.2 69 M12 x 1.75,
20 deep
A5
10
Omitted for NG45 A2
K15 flange SAE J744 - 127-4 (C)

Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 32-4 (C))
A4 60/ 255 8 59 M12 x 1.75,
A3 63 16 deep
A
85 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
through
100 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
+0.050
ø127 +0.020
through
114.5
114.5 A5 13
B to mounting flange A1
K16 flange SAE J744 - 127-4 (C)

A4 85 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
A3 through
A
100 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
through
+0.050
ø127 +0.020
114.5
114.5 A5 13.4

373

K07 flange SAE J744 - 127-2 (C)

45 A4 85 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
A
through 1
A3
100 301.5 13 67.9 M12 x 1.75,
through
A5
Ø127 +0.050
+0.020
1
Ø18
2
A5
B 13
A2
3
K24 flange SAE J744 - 127-2 (C)
Coupling for splined shaft in accordance with ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 38-4 (C-C))
45° A4 85 302 8 68 M16 x 2,
A 24 deep
A3
100 302 8 68 M16 x 2, 4
24 deep
+0.050
ø127 +0.020
1
ø18
A5 5
B
13

374
Summary mounting options

Through-drive1) Mounting option – 2nd pump
Flange Coupling Through
Short A10V(S)O/5x A10VO/31 Gear pump
for splined drive avail-
des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) design (NG)
shaft able for NG
82-2 (A) 5/8 in K01 10 (U) 18 (U) F (5 to 22) 18 to 100
3/4 in K52 10 (S) 18 (S, R) – 18 to 100
18 (U)
18 (S, R)
101-2 (B) 7/8 in K68 28 (S, R) 28 (S, R) N/G (26 to 49) 28 to 100
45 (U, W)1) 45 (U, W)
1 in K04 45 (S, R) 45 (S, R) – 45 to 100
60, 63 (U, W) 2) –
127-4 (C) 1 1/4 in K15 60, 63 (S, R) – – 63 to 100
1 1/2 in K16 85 (S) – – 85 to 100
100 (S)
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in K07 85 (U, W) 71 (S, R) – 85 to 100
100 (U, W)
1 1/2 in K24 85 (S) – – 85 to 100
100 (S)
1) Not for NG28 with K68
2) Not for NG28 with K04
375

Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
When using combination pumps it is possible to have multiple, mutually independent circuits without the need for a splitter
gearbox.
When ordering combination pumps the model codes for the first and the second pump must be joined by a "+".
Order example:
A10VO85DRS/53R-VSC12K04+ 1
A10VO45DRF/53R-VSC11N00
The tandem pump comprising two identical sizes is permissible without additional supports taking into account a maximum
dynamic mass acceleration of 10 g (= 98.1 m/s2).
For combination pumps comprising more than two pumps, the mounting flange must be calculated for the permissible moment of
inertia.
2
NG 10 18 28 45 60/63 85 100
static Tm Nm – – 890 900 1370 3080 3080 3
dynamic at 10 g (98.1 m/s2) Tm Nm – – 89 90 137 308 308
Mass with through-drive plate m kg – – 17 24 28 45 45
Mass without through drive (e.g. 2nd m kg 8 11.5 14 18 22 34 34
pump)
Distance center of gravity l mm – 82 81 95 100 122 122
4
m1, m2, m3 Mass of pumps [kg]
A10VO m1 A10VO m2
(1st pump) (2nd pump) Distance center
l1, l2, l3 [mm]
of gravity
5
Tm = (m1 • l1 + m2 • l2 + m3 • l3) • 1
l1
l2 102 [Nm]
8
376

Connector for solenoids proved installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DEUTSCH DT04-2P-EP04, 2-pin Changing connector position
Molded, without bidirectional suppressor diode __________ P If necessary, you can change the position of the connector by
Protection according to DIN/EN 60529 ______________ IP67 turning the solenoid.
Protection according to DIN 40050-9 _______________IP69K To do this, proceed as follows:
Circuit symbol 1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this, turn
the mounting nut (1) one revolution counter-clockwise.
Without bidirectional suppressor diode
3. Retighten the mounting nut of the solenoid. Tightening
torque: 5+1 Nm (size WAF 26, 12kt DIN 3124).
Mating connector
DEUTSCH DT06-2S-EP04
Bosch Rexroth Mat. No. R902601804
Consisting of: DT designation
– 1 case _______________________________DT06-2S-EP04
– 1 wedge _______________________________________W2S
– 2 sockets ____________________________ 0462-201-16141
The mating connector is not included in the delivery contents.
This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request.
36.7
(2)
(1)
36.7
Ø37
50
68.5
Electronic controls
Control Electronics function Electronics Further information

Electric pressure control Controlled power outlet RA analog RE 95230
RC2-2/21 1) Digital RE 95201
2) only 24V nominal voltage
377
Notes
8
378
The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air Below-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is in-
bled during commissioning and operation. This must also be stalled outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
amin amin
plete filling and air bleeding since there is a risk, for example,
of dry running.
SB SB
The case drain fluid in the case interior must be directed to the ht min ht min
reservoir via the highest case drain port (L1, L2, L3). h min h min
L1
For combinations of multiple units, make sure that the respec- L1 L X
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of L

S
pressure differences at the drain ports of the units, the shared S
X
drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible
situation. If this is not possible, separate drain lines must be
laid if necessary.
To achieve favorable noise values, decouple all connecting 3 4
tion. amin amin
In all operating conditions, the suction line and case drain line
SB SB
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The ht min ht min
permissible suction height hS is a result of the overall pres- h min h min
sure loss, but may not be greater than hS max = 800 mm. The
minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall below
L2 S S
0.8 bar absolute during operation.
Installation position L L1
See the following examples 1 to 12. L1 L
position
1 L S+L
2 L1 S + L1
31) L2 S + L2
4 L S+L
Key, see page 53
1) Only series 53
379
Axial piston units with electrical components (e.g. electric
To prevent the axial piston unit from draining, a height differ-
control, sensors) may not be installed in a reservoir below the 1
ence hES min of at least 25 mm is required in installation
fluid level.
position 6.
Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm. 9 10
A check valve in the case drain line is only permissible in indi- amin amin
vidual cases. Consult us for approval.
L1
L1 L 2
5 F 6 hES min
F X
LSB
L1 L SB ht min ht min
X
L1
X
S
L h min S h min
X
S S
hs max hs max
11 3
12
amin amin
ht min SB ht min SB
h min h min
L2 S
amin amin S
ht min ht min
SB
7 8 L L 4
L1
h min L1 SB h min
F F
L2 S S
L
L1 L Installation Air bleed Filling
L1
position
hs max 5
hs max 9 L1 L, L 1
10 L1 L, L 1
ht min SB ht min SB
h min h min
111) L2 S
amin amin 12 L S+L
S Suction port 6
position F Filling / air bleeding
5 F L, L1 (F) L, L1 Case drain port
6 F L1 (F) SB Baffle (baffle plate)
71) F S + L2 (F) ht min Minimum necessary immersion depth (200 mm)
8 F S + L (F) hmin Minimum necessary spacing to reservoir base 7
(100 mm)
hES min
1) Only series 53
8
line.
380
– The A10VO pump is designed to be used in open circuit.
– Project planning, installation and commissioning of the axial piston unit require the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Before operating the axial piston unit, please read the appropriate instruction manual thoroughly and completely. If necessary,
request these from Bosch Rexroth.
shift.
- The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must en-
sure that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified application conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid,
– Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve
is to be provided in the hydraulic system.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer's instruction regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Fixing screws:
- Threaded plugs:
Ports Maximum permissible Required Size of

tightening torque for tightening torque for hexagon socket of
Standard Thread size female threads MG max threaded plugs MV threaded plugs
DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 45 Nm 6 mm

M16 x 1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 170 Nm 12 mm
ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B 40 Nm 18 Nm 3/16 in
9/16-18UNF-2B 80 Nm 35 Nm 1/4 in
3/4-16UNF-2B 160 Nm 70 Nm 5/16 in
7/8-14UNF-2B 240 Nm 110 Nm 3/8 in
1 1/16-12UN-2B 360 Nm 170 Nm 9/16 in
72160 Horb a. N., Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel.: +49-7451-92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Fax: +49-7451-82-21 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Subject to change.
381
RE 92711/01.12 1/48
and RE 92707/11.10
A10VSO
Data sheet
Series 31
Sizes 18 to 140
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for standard program 2 – Variable pump in axial piston swashplate design for hydro-
static drives in an open circuit
Technical data 4
– The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displace-
Technical data, standard unit 6
ment
Technical data, high-speed version 7
– The flow can be steplessly varied by adjustment of the
DG – Two-point control, directly operated 10 swashplate angle.
DR – Pressure control 11 – 2 case drain ports
DRG – Pressure control, remotely operated 12 – Excellent suction characteristics
DFR, DFR1 – Pressure and flow control 13 – Low noise level
DFLR – Pressure, flow and power control 14 – Long service life
ED – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 15 – Axial and radial load capacity of drive shaft
ER – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 16 – Favorable power/weight ratio
Dimensions sizes 18 to 140 18 – Versatile controller range
Dimensions through drive 36 – Short control time
Summary mounting options 41 – The through drive is suitable for adding gear pumps and axial
piston pumps up to the same size, i.e., 100% through drive.
Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO 42
382
2/48 Bosch Rexroth AG A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

A10VS O / 31 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Version 18 28 45 71 100 140

Standard version (without symbol) ● ● ● ● ● ●
01 HFA, HFB, HFC hydraulic fluid (except for Skydrol) – ● ● ● ● ● E
High-speed version – – ● ● ● ● H
Axial piston unit

02 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 280 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar A10VS
Operation mode
Size (NG)
04 Geometric displacement, see table of values on pages 6 and 7 18 28 45 71 100 140
Control device
Two-point control, directly operated ● ● ● ● ● ● DG
Pressure control ● ● ● ● ● ● DR
with flow control, hydraulic
X-T open ● ● ● ● ● ● DFR

X-T closed ● ● ● ● ● ● DFR1
with swivel angle control, electric – ● ● ● ● ● FE11)
05 pressure and swivel-angle control, electric ● ● ● ● ● ● DFE11)
with pressure cut-off, remotely operated
hydraulic ● ● ● ● ● ● DRG
electrical negative characteristic 12V ● ● ● ● ● ● ED71
24V ● ● ● ● ● ● ED72
positive characteristic 12V ● ● ● ● ● ● ER712)
24V ● ● ● ● ● ● ER722)
Pressure, flow and power control – ● ● ● ● ● DFLR
Series
07
counter clockwise L
Seals
1) See RE 30030
2) The following must be taken into account during project planning:
Excessive current levels (I > 1200 mA with 12 V or I > 600 mA with 24 V) to the ER solenoid can result in undesired increase
of pressure which can lead to pump or system damage:
- Use Imax current limiter solenoids.
- A sandwich plate pressure reducing valve can be used to protect the pump in the event of overflow.
An accessory kit with pressure reducing sandwich plate can be ordered from Rexroth under part number R902490825.

383
RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/48

A10VS O / 31 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Drive shaft 18 28 45 71 100 140 1

Splined shaft standard shaft ● ● ● ● ● ● S
ANSI B92.1a similar to shaft "S" however for higher input torque ● ● ● ● – – R
09
Parallel keyed shaft not for through drive
● ● ● ● ● ● P
DIN 6885
Mounting flange 18 28 45 71 100 140

2
ISO 3019-2 2-hole ● ● ● ● ● – A
10
4-hole – – – – – ● B
Service line port 18 28 45 71 100 140

SAE flange ports on opposite side, metric fastening thread ● ● ● – ● ● 12
11
– – – ● – – 42
3
Through drive 18 28 45 71 100 140
without through drive ● ● ● ● ● ● N00
Flange ISO 3019-1 coupling for splined shaft1)
Diameter diameter
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● ● K01
3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● ● K52 4
101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – ● ● ● ● ● K68
1 in 15T 16/32DP – – ● ● ● ● K04
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – – – ● ● ● K07
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – – – ● ● K24
12
152-4 (D) 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP – – – – – ● K17
5
Ø 63, metric 4-hole shaft key Ø 25 – ● ● ● ● ● K57
Flange ISO 3019-2
Diameter
80, 2-hole 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● ● KB2
100, 2-hole 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP – ● ● ● ● ● KB3
1 in 15T 16/32DP – – ● ● ● ● KB4 6
125, 2-hole 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – – – ● ● ● KB5
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – – – ● ● KB6
180, 4-hole 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP – – – – – ● KB7
Connectors for solenoids2) 18 28 45 71 100 140

13 HIRSCHMANN connector – without suppressor diode ● ● ● ● ● ● H
7
1) Coupling for splined shaft as per ANSI B92.1a
2) Connectors for other electric components can deviate.

8
384
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid Notes on the choice of hydraulic fluid
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data In order to select the correct hydraulic fluid, it is necessary to
sheets RE 90220 (mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally know the operating temperature in the reservoir (open circuit)
acceptable hydraulic fluids) for detailed information regarding in relation to the ambient temperature.
the choice of hydraulic fluid and application conditions.
The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the operat-
When using environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, ing temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum
the limitations regarding technical data and seals must be range (Qopt), see shaded section of the selection diagram. We
observed. Please contact us. When ordering, indicate the recommend to select the higher viscosity grade in each case.
hydraulic fluid that is to be used.
Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C the operating
Operating viscosity range temperature is 60 °C. In the optimum operating viscosity range
(Qopt; shaded area) this corresponds to viscosity grades VG 46
For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the
resp. VG 68; VG 68 should be selected.
operating viscosity (at operating temperature) be selected in
the range Important:
Qopt = opt. operating viscosity 16 ... 36 mm2/s The case drain temperature is influenced by pressure and input
speed and is always higher than the reservoir temperature.
referred to reservoir temperature (open circuit). However, at no point in the component may the temperature
Limits of viscosity range exceed 90 °C. The temperature difference specified on the left
is to be taken into account when determining the viscosity in
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: the bearing.
nmin = 10 mm2/s If the above conditions cannot be met, due to extreme operat-
short-term (t d 1 min) ing parameters please contact us.
at max perm. case drain temperature of 90 °C.
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid
Please also ensure that the max. case drain temperature of The finer the filtration the better the cleanliness level of the
90 °C is not exceeded in localized areas (for instance, in the hydraulic fluid and the longer the service life of the axial piston
bearing area).The fluid temperature in the bearing area is unit.
approx. 5 K higher than the average case drain temperature.
In order to guarantee the functional reliability of the axial piston
nmax = 1000 mm2/s unit it is necessary to carry out a gravimetric evaluation of the
short-term (t d 1 min) hydraulic fluid to determine the particle contamination and the
on cold start cleanliness level according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness level of
(p d 30 bar, n d 1000 rpm, tmin -25 °C) at least 20/18/15 must be maintained.
Depending on the installation situation, special measures At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum
are necessary at temperatures between -40 °C and -25 °C. 115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according to
Please contact us. ISO 4406 is necessary.
For detailed information on operation with low temperatures If the above cleanliness levels cannot be maintained, please
see data sheet RE 90300-03-B. contact us.
Selection diagram
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100

1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 6
VG 2
200
10
2
100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
60
40 36
Qopt.
20
16
10
5 5
-40 -25 -10 0 10 30 50 70 90 115
385
Technical data
Pressure at service line port B Definition
The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design 1
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute
pressure.
Single operating period ___________________________ 2.5 ms
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Maximum pressure pmax
The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operat-
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) _____ 10 bar absolute1)
ing pressure within the single operating period. The total of the
Rate of pressure change RA max ______________ 16000 bar/s single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
period.
pnom 2
Pressure p
't Minimum pressure in the high-pressure side (port B) that is

The minimum pressure depends on the speed and displace-
'p ment of the axial piston unit.
Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduc- 3
tion speed with a pressure change over the entire pressure
range.
Time t t2
Pressure p

Minimum pressure pS min __________________ 0.8 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax
Maximum pressure pS max _________________10 bar1) absolute Nominal pressure pnom
4
Note
Please contact us for values for other hydraulic fluids.
Case drain pressure

Maximum permissible case drain pressure (at port L, L1):
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S,
however not higher than 2 bar absolute. Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) 5
pL max abs _________________________________2 bar absolute1)

Time t
1) Other values on request Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn
8
386
Technical data, standard unit

Size NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
Geometrical displacement per revolution
Vg max cm3 18 28 45 71 100 140
Speed1)
maximum at Vg max nnom rpm 3300 3000 2600 2200 2000 1800
maximum at Vg < Vg max nmax perm rpm 3900 3600 3100 2600 2400 2100
Flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max l/min 59 84 117 156 200 252
at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max qvE max l/min 27 42 68 107 150 210
Power at 'p = 280 bar
at nnom, Vg max Pmax kW 30 39 55 73 93 118
at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max PE max kW 12.6 20 32 50 70 98
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Tmax Nm 80 125 200 316 445 623
'p = 100 bar T Nm 30 45 72 113 159 223
Rotary stiffness, S c Nm/rad 11087 22317 37500 71884 121142 169537
drive shaft R c Nm/rad 14850 26360 41025 76545 – –
P c Nm/rad 13158 25656 41232 80627 132335 188406
Moment of inertial rotary group JTW kgm2 0.00093 0.0017 0.0033 0.0083 0.0167 0.0242
Angular acceleration, maximum2) D rad/s2 6800 5500 4000 3300 2700 2700
Filling capacity V L 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.6 2.2 3.0
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 12 15 21 33 45 60
- within the optimum viscosity range from Qopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s
- for mineral-oil based hydraulic fluid.
Note
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend to check the loading through tests or calculation / simula-
tion and comparison with the permissible values.
V g • n • KV Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3

Flow qV = [l/min]
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • p • hmh KV = Volumetric efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Total efficiency(Kt = KV • Kmh)
387
Technical data, high-speed version

Size NG 45 71 100 140
Geometrical displacement per revolution
Vg max cm3 45 71 100 140
1
Speed1)
maximum at Vg max nnom rpm 3000 2550 2300 2050
maximum at Vg < Vg max nmax perm rpm 3300 2800 2500 2200
Flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max l/min 135 178 230 287
Power at 'p = 280 bar 2
at nnom, Vg max Pmax kW 63 83 107 134
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Tmax Nm 200 316 445 623
'p = 100 bar T Nm 72 113 159 223
Rotary stiffness, S c Nm/rad 37500 71884 121142 169537
drive shaft R c Nm/rad 41025 76545 – – 3
P c Nm/rad 41232 80627 132335 188406
Moment of inertial rotary group JTW kgm2 0.0033 0.0083 0.0167 0.0242
Angular acceleration, maximum2) D rad/s2 4000 3300 2700 2700
Filling capacity V L 1.0 1.6 2.2 3.0
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 21 33 45 60
4
- within the optimum viscosity range from Qopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s
- for mineral-oil based hydraulic fluid.
The limiting value is only valid for a single pump. 5
Note
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend to check the loading through tests or calculation / simula-
tion and comparison with the permissible values.
6
Sizes 45, 71, 100 and 140 are optionally available in high-speed version.
External dimensions are not affected by this option.
8
388
Technical data
Permissible radial and axial loading on the drive shaft
Size NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
at a/2
Fq max N 350 1200 1500 1900 2300 2800
a/2 a/2
a
Axial force maximum
rFax + Fax max N 700 1000 1500 2400 4000 4800

Size NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
Torque
Tmax Nm 80 125 200 316 445 623
S TE max Nm 124 198 319 626 1104 1620
Ø in 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4
R TE max Nm 160 250 400 644 – –
Ø in 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 – –
P TE max Nm 88 137 200 439 857 1206
Ø mm 18 22 25 32 40 45
Maximum through-drive torque for drive shaft
S TD max Nm 108 160 319 492 778 1266
R TD max Nm 120 176 365 548 – –
P TD max Nm 88 137 200 439 778 1206
T1 T2
TE
1. Pumpe
1st pump 2.
2ndPumpe
pump
TD
389
Technical data
Operating material:
Hydraulic fluid ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50 °C
Size 18 Size 71
1
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm
______ n = 3300 rpm ______ n = 2200 rpm
160 80
60 30 140 70
Flow qV [l/min]
qv
Drive power P [kW]
Flow qV [l/min]
qv 120 60
Drive power P [kW]

40 Pqv max 20
100 50
20 Pqv zero 10 2
80 40
0 0 Pqv max
0 50 100 150 200 250 280 60 30
40 Pqv zero 20
20 10
Size 28 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm Operating pressure [bar]
3
______ n = 3000 rpm
Size 100
90 _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm
80 40
Flow qV [l/min]
Drive power P [kW]
60 30 ______ n = 2000 rpm

40 20 200 100
qv
Pqv max 180 qv 90
20 10 4
160 80
0 0
P
Drive power P [kW]

0 50 100 150 200qv zero 250 280 140 70
Flow qV [l/min]
120 Pqv max 60

100 50
80 40
Size 45 60 30
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm 40 Pqv zero 20 5
20 10
______ n = 2600 rpm
0 0
110 60
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
100 50 Operating pressure [bar]
Flow qV [l/min]
Drive power P [kW]
80 40
qv
60 30 Size 140
Pqv max
40 20 6
_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm
20 10
______ n = 1800 rpm
0 Pqv zero 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280 260 130
Operating pressure [bar] 240 qv 120

220 110
200 100
7
Drive power P [kW]
180 Pqv max 90

160 80
Flow qV [l/min]
140 70
120 60
100 50
80 40
8
60 Pqv zero 30
40 20
20 10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
390
DG – Two-point control, directly operated

The variable pump can be set to a minimum swivel angle by Circuit diagram
connecting an external control pressure to port X.
This will supply control fluid directly to the stroke piston; a X
minimum control pressure of pst t 50 bar is required.
The variable pump can only be switched between
Vg max or Vg min.
L B
Please note, that the required control pressure at port X is
directly dependent on the actual operating pressure pB in
port B. (See control pressure characteristic).
Control pressure pst in X = 0 bar Vg max
Control pressure pst in X t 50 bar Vg min
Control pressure characteristic
120
100
Req. control pressure pst [bar]
50 L1 S
Port for
0 50 70 140 210 280 B Service line
Operating pressure pB [bar] S Suction line
X Pilot pressure
391
The pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the pump Circuit diagram, sizes 18 to 100
supplies as much hydraulic fluid as is required by the consum-
ers. If the operating pressure exceeds the pressure setpoint set
at the integrated pressure valve, the pump will adjust towards a
smaller displacement and the control deviation will be reduced. L 1
B
The pressure can be set steplessly at the control valve.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)

280
Setting range1)
L1 S 3
Circuit diagram, size 140
25
4
Flow qv [l/min]
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system,

this setting range is the permissible setting range and must
not be exceeded. Port for
5
The range of possible settings at the valve are greater. B Service line
S Suction line
6
Control data
NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
'p bar 4 4 6 8 10 12
7
Control fluid consumption__________ maximum approx. 3 l/min
8
392
DRG – Pressure control, remotely operated

The DR-control valve (see page 11) is overriding this DRG- Circuit diagram, sizes 18 to 100
remote setting of max. outlet pressure.
valve spool. This relief valve is not included in the delivery con-
X
tents of the DRG control.
The differential pressure at the DRG control valve is set as
standard to 20 bar. This results in a pilot oil flow to the relief
valve of approx. 1.5 l/min at port X. If another setting is required
(range from 10-22 bar) please state in clear text.
As a separate pressure relief valve we can recommend: L B
DBDH 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402 or
DBETR-SO 381 with orifice Ø 0.8 mm in P (electric) to
RE 29166.
The max. length of piping should not exceed 2 m.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)
L1 S
280

Setting range1)
20
Flow qv [l/min] Port for

B Service line
S Suction line
this setting range is the permissible setting range and must L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged)
not be exceeded. X NG 18 to 100 Pilot pressure
The range of possible settings at the valve are greater. with adapter
X NG 140 Pilot pressure
without adapter
Control data
NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
'p bar 4 4 6 8 10 12
Control fluid consumption________ maximum approx. 4.5 l/min
393
DFR/DFR1 – Pressure and flow control

In addition to the pressure control function (see page 11), the Circuit diagram, sizes 18 to 100
pump flow may be varied by means of a differential pressure
With DFR1 plugged
over an adjustable orifice (e.g. directional valve) installed in
the service line to the actuator. The pump flow is equal to the

actual required flow by the actuator, regardless of changing
pressure levels. X 1

Note
The DFR1 version has no connection between X and the
reservoir. Unloading the LS-pilot line must be possible in the
valve system. L
Because of the flushing function sufficient unloading of the B 2
X-line must also be provided.
Flow control at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C) Hysteresis / pressure rise 'p max
280
3
Setting range1)
L1 S
25 4

With DFR1 plugged
Flow qv [l/min]
X
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, 5

this setting range is the permissible setting range and must
not be exceeded.
The range of possible settings at the valve are greater.
B
Static characteristic at variable speed
Port for 6
B Service line
Flow qv [l/min]
S Suction line
X Pilot pressure
7
Speed n [rpm] Control data
Differential pressure 'p Data for pressure control DR, see page 11.
Maximum flow deviation measured at drive speed n = 1500 rpm.
Standard setting: 14 to 22 bar.
If another setting is required, please state in clear text. NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
Relieving the load on port X to the reservoir results in a zero
'qv max l/min 0.9 1.0 1.8 2.8 4.0 6.0
stroke ("standby") pressure which lies about 1 to 2 bar higher 8
than the differential pressure 'p. System influences are not Control fluid consumption DFR maximum approx. 3 to 4.5 l/min
taken into account. Control fluid consumption DFR1 ____ maximum approx. 3 l/min
Volume flow loss at qVmax, see page 9.
394
DFLR – Pressure, flow and power control

Execution of the pressure control like DR(G), see page 11 (12). The power characteristic is set in the factory; when ordering,
Execution of the flow control like DFR, DFR1, see page 13. please state in clear text, e.g. 20 kW at 1500 rpm.
In order to achieve a constant drive torque with varying Control data
operating pressures, the swivel angle and with it the output
For pressure control DR data, see page 11.
flow from the axial piston pump is varied so that the product
For flow control FR data, see page 13.
of flow and pressure remains constant.
Flow control is possible below the power control curve.
Static curves and torque characteristic Circuit diagram, sizes 28 to 100
300
280 Maximum
power curve X
250 Not included
in the delivery
contents
200
150
100 L B
Maximum
50 power curve
ΔqV
(see table L1 S
on page 13)

Torque T [Nm]
X
Not included
in the delivery
contents
0 100
Volume flow qv [%]
L B
Control data
Beginning of control _____________________________ 50 bar
Control fluid consumption_______ maximum approx. 5.5 l/min
Flow loss at qv max, see page 9.
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged) L1 S
X Pilot pressure
395

The ED valve is set to a certain pressure by a specified, Influence of pressure setting on standby level
variable solenoid current. 30
If there is a change at the consumer (load pressure), 28
the position of the control piston changes. 26
Standby [bar]
This causes an increase or decrease in the pump swivel angle 24 1
(flow) in order to maintain the electrically set pressure level. 22
The pump thus only delivers as much hydraulic fluid as the 20

consumers can take. The desired pressure level can be set 18
steplessly by varying the solenoid current. 16
When the solenoid current signal drops towards a zero value, 14
120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
the maximum output pressure is limited to pmax by an adjust- 2
Maximum pressure setting [bar]
able hydraulic pressure cut-off (secure fail safe function in
case of a loss of power e.g. for use as fan drives). Circuit diagram ED..
The response time characteristic of the ED-control was
optimized for the use as a fan drive system.
3
(measured at pump in zero stroke – negative characteristic)
280
De-activation
ED L B
of control
Max. adjustable
control pressure 4
140
Min. adjustable control pressure

0 1
Amperage I/Imax
5
L1 S
Hysteresis of the static current-pressure characteristic < 3 bar
Port for
Static flow-pressure characteristic B Service line
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C) S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged) 6
max
280
Setting range

Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
Control current 7
140
min End of control at qv max 1200 mA 600 mA
Flow qv [l/min] Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A
min max Nominal resistance (at 20 °C) 5.5 : 22.7 :
Control data Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
Stand-by standard setting 20 bar, other values on request. 200 Hz 200 Hz 8
Hysteresis and pressure increase _______________ 'p < 4 bar Actuated time 100 % 100 %
Control fluid consumption___________________ 3 to 4.5 l/min. For type of protection, see plug design on page 43
For details on the control electronics, see page 16
396

The ER valve is set to a specific pressure by a specified, Circuit diagram ER..
variable solenoid current.
If there is a change at the consumer (load pressure),
the position of the control piston changes.
This causes an increase or decrease in the pump swivel angle
consumers can take. The desired pressure level can be set
L B
If the solenoid current drops to zero, the pressure is limited
to pmin (stand-by).
Observe the project planning note on page 2.
Static current-pressure characteristic ER

(measured at pump in zero stroke – positive characteristic)
350
280
250
Max. adjustable L1 S
control pressure
150
Port for
Min.
50 adjustable B Service line
control pressure S Suction line
0
0 1
Amperage L, L1 Case drain (L1 plugged)
I/Imax
Hysteresis of the static current-pressure characteristic < 3 bar

Influence of pressure setting on stand-by ±2 bar Technical data, solenoid ED71 ED72
Static flow-pressure characteristic Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C) Control current
End of control at qv max 1200 mA 600 mA

max
280 Limiting current 1.54 A 0.77 A

Setting range

200 Hz 200 Hz
For type of protection, see plug design on page 43
140 Operating temperature range at valve -20 °C to +115 °C
min
The following electric controllers and amplifiers are available for
Flow qv [l/min] controlling the proportional solenoids:
min max
Analog amplifier RA RE 95230
Control data Digital controller RC2-2/211) RE 95201
Standby standard setting 20 bar, other values on request. Analog amplifier VT20002) RE 29904
Hysteresis and pressure increase _______________ 'p < 4 bar Analog amplifier VT 11029/110302) RE 29741
Control fluid consumption___________________ 3 to 4.5 l/min.
2) Only 24V nominal voltage
397
Notes
8
398

DFR, DFR1 – Pressure and flow control, hydraulic

Clockwise rotation
V
Valve mounting for
ccw rotation
6.3 108 B
83
max. 110
Flange L X
11
L
ISO 3019-2
X
45° 45°
63
40
Ø80 -0.046
66
0
63
64
69
11.5 109
L1 152
43 S
145 109
195 126
View V View W
22.2
B S
52.4
Ø25
47.6
Ø20
26.2
Ports
pressure [bar]2)
fastening thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep
L Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M16 x 1.5; 12 deep 2 O5)
L1 Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M16 x 1.5; 12 deep 2 X5)
X Pilot pressure DIN 38524) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 O
X Pilot pressure with DG-control DIN ISO 2284) G 1/4 in 350 O
2) Depending on the application, short-term pressure spikes can occur. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring equipment
and fittings. Pressure values in bar absolute.
3) Only dimensions according to SAE J518, metric fastening thread deviating from the standard
4) The spot face can be deeper than as specified in the standard
5) Depending on the installation position, L or L1 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 44, 45)
399

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 3/4 in R Splined shaft 3/4 in P Parallel shaft key
11T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 11T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744) DIN 6885, A6x6x25
30 + 0.3 1
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
28
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 4)
0.008
0
ø18 +- 0.003
14
14
2 25
5 5
ø22 - 0.033
20.5 -0.1
0
2
Usable shaft 21 Centering5)
21 length R 3.15 x 6.7
38 DIN 332 36
38
3
8
400
Before finalizing your design request a certi-

Dimensions size 18 fied installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
DG DR
Two-point control, directly operated Pressure control
to flange surface

148 ccw rotation ccw rotation
max. 110
X
X
+0.4
3
G 1/4 in
25
12
89 126
97
DRG ED7., ER7.

Pressure control, remotely operated Electro-hydraulic pressure control
to flange surface
175.4
to flange surface
Valve mounting for
108 Valve mounting for
ccw rotation
140
ccw rotation
max. 110
X
X
40
109
126 1261)
1) ER7.: 161 mm if using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.

401

DFR/DFR1 – Pressure and flow control, hydraulic

Clockwise rotation
1
Valve mounting for
V
ccw rotation
118
9.5 90 B
Flange
ISO 3019-2 6.3 L X L
max. 110
14
45°
45°
X
80
2
-0.054
40
0
74
Ø100
Ø1
74
80
74
14 3
140
40 L1 S 164
164
206 83.5 119.3
136
W
Detail V Detail W 4
22.2
Ø20
58.7 S
Ø32
47.6
5
B
30.2
6
Ports
pressure [bar]2)
fastening thread DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep 7
X Pilot pressure with DG-control DIN ISO 2284) G 1/4in; 12 deep 350 O
2) Depending on the application, short-term pressure spikes can occur. Consider this when selecting measuring equipment and
8
fittings. Pressure values in bar absolute.
3) Only dimensions according to SAE J518, metric fastening thread deviating from the standard.
402

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 7/8 in R Splined shaft 7/8 in P Parallel shaft key
36 + 0.3
0.0
33.1 32
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)
16
16 16
5 2
5
M64), 5)
24.4 -0.2
ø22 +0.009
-0.004
Usable shaft 25
25.1 length
41 46
41
2) Spline according to ANSI B92.1a, run out of spline is a deviation from standard.
4) Thread according to DIN 13
403

DG DFLR
Two-point control, directly operated Pressure, flow and power control
to flange surface to flange surface Valve mounting for 1

Valve mounting for 198 ccw rotation
158
ccw rotation
max. 110
G 1/4 in
X
L
40
3
2
+0.4
X
25
12
99.5 119
103.5 135.5
3
DR DRG
Pressure control Pressure control, remotely operated
to flange surface

ccw rotation 118 ccw rotation 4
max. 110
max. 110
X
X
40
5
119
136 136
ED7. / ER7. 6
Electro-hydraulic pressure control
to flange surface
Valve mounting for

130
ccw rotation
7
140
X
8
135.51)
1) ER7.: 170.5 mm when using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.

For details of connection options and drive shafts, see also pages 21 and 22
404


Clockwise rotation
V
9.5 133
6.3 96
83
Flange L X
14 L
ISO 3019-2
max. 110
45°
45°
X
90
Ø100 -0.054
40
0
80.5
14.3 L1 90
Ø140
45
184 Ø184
219 93.5 129
224 146
Detail V View W
26.2
B
S
69.9
52.4
Ø40
Ø25
35.7
Ports
pressure [bar]2)
405

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 in R Splined shaft 1 in P Parallel shaft key
42 + 0.3
0.0
1
39
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)
38
1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)
16
16 19
5 3
5
M84), 5)
ø25 +0.009
-0.004
28 -0.2
2
Usable shaft 29.5
30 length
45.9 52
45.9
4
8
406

Dimensions
DG
size 45 DFLR
fied installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
to flange surface
Valve mounting for
to flange surface Valve mounting for 213 ccw rotation
173 ccw rotation
112
X
40
25 +0.4
3
G 1/4 in
12 129
110
146
117
DR DRG
Valve mounting for to flange surface

Valve mounting for
ccw rotation 133 ccw rotation
X
max. 110
max. 110
X
146 129 40
146
ED7. / ER7.
to flange surface
Valve mounting for
146
ccw rotation
140
L
X
145.51)
1) ER7.: 180.5 mm if using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.
407


Clockwise rotation
12.7 161 V
1
6 115
18 98
Flange L
ISO 3019-2 X
max. 110
45°
L 45°
104
X
-0.063
40
0
2
Ø125
92
104
18 L1 180 3
53
210
217
107.5 143
257
160
Valve mounting for
W ccw rotation
4
Detail V Detail W
52.4
Ø25
26.2
Ø50
77.8
5
S
B
42.9
Ports 6
pressure [bar]2)
7
8
408

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in R Splined shaft 1 1/4 in P Parallel shaft key
50
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 5)
5/16-18UNC-2B3) 5)
47.5
19 47.5
19
5 22
5
2.5
M104), 5)
+0.002
ø32+0.018
35 -0.2
Usable shaft 38
39.5 length
55.4
55.4 60
409

DG DFLR
to flange surface
1
to flange surface Valve mounting for
Valve mounting for 242 ccw rotation
201 ccw rotation
Ø25 +0.4
X
G 1/4in
124
L
X
40
3
2
12
123.5 143
127.5
159.5
3
DR DRG
Valve mounting for to flange surface

4
ccw rotation
Valve mounting for
161
max 110
L
ccw rotation
X
X
max 110
L
X
5
40
160
143
160
6
ED7. / ER7.
to flange surface
Valve mounting for
173 ccw rotation 7
140
L
X
1601)
1) ER7.: 195 mm if using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.

410


Clockwise rotation
Valve mounting for

ccw rotation
12.7 229
V
Flange 6 175
X
6
ISO 3019-2
10
max. 110
L 45°
Ø125 -0.063
100
X
17.5
40
0
152
100
95
20 L1 180
95 210
275
118 148.4
317
164.9
329
Detail V Detail W
B
88.9
66.7
Ø60
Ø32
S
31.8 50.8
Ports
pressure [bar]2)
fastening thread DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
L Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M27 x 2; 16 deep 2 O5)
L1 Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M27 x 2; 16 deep 2 X5)
411

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/2 in P Parallel shaft key
17T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) DIN 6885, A12x8x68 66
7/16-14UNC-2B2) 4) 69.5
54
28 1
28 1.5
5
M123), 4)
ø40 -0.002
+0.018
43 -0.2
2
43.5
80
61.9
8
412

DG DFLR

to flange surface ccw rotation
Valve mounting for 308 148
268 ccw rotation
X
X
129
+0.4
3
40
R 1/4in
25
12
128.5 164.5
132.5
DR DRG
to flange surface
Valve mounting for 228 Valve mounting for

ccw rotation X ccw rotation
max. 110
max. 110
X
148 40
165
165
ED7. / ER7.
to flange surface

ccw rotation
140
X
1651)
1) ER7.: 200 mm when using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.

413


Clockwise rotation
Flange 12.7 244 V

3019-2 6.4 173 X 20.6
L L
L 45°
126
110
26
Ø180 -0.063
158.4
5
0
200
8.
11
108
110
112
21 L1 158.4
78 200 3
275 131 183
337 209
4
Detail V Detail W
S
88.9
Ø32
66.7
Ø63
B
31.8 50.8 5
Ports 6
pressure [bar]2)
fastening thread DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep
7
X Pilot pressure with DG-control DIN 38524) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 O
MH Gauge port, high pressure DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5, 12 deep 350 X
1) For the maximum tightening torques the general instructions on page 48 must be observed. 8
414

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in P Parallel shaft key
13T 8/16DP1) (SAE J744) DIN 6885, A14x9x80 77
67 81.5
1/2-13UNC-2B2) 4)
36
32
1.5
5
M163), 4)
48.5 -0.2
ø45 -0.005
+0.011
53
92
75
415

DG DFLR

to flange surface 1
Valve mounting for ccw rotation
314
268 ccw rotation
X
139.5
L L
X
2.6
56
2
108
108
112
28
12 183
MH
153 209
158
3
DR DRG
to flange surface
Valve mounting for 4

ccw rotation
ccw rotation
L L X
126
126
26
56
5
170 144
170
ED7. / ER7. 6
to flange surface

ccw rotation 7
129
L
X
179

416

Dimensions through drive fied installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
K01 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 82-2 (A))

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 5/8 in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A))
A3 18 182 10 43.3 M10 x 1.5, 14.5
A 45° A2 deep
28 204 10 33.7 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
45 229 10.7 53.4 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
.5 71 267 11.8 61.3 M10 x 1.5, 20 deep
06
–0.020
Ø82.55 +0.050
Ø1 100 338 10.5 65 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
140 350 10.8 77.3 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
A4
B 10

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))
A3 18 182 18.8 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 14.5 deep
A 45° 10 28 204 18.8 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
45 229 18.9 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
71 267 21.3 41.4 M10 x 1.5, 20 deep
.5 100 338 19 38.9 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
06
–0.02
Ø82.55 +0.05
Ø1
140 350 18.9 38.6 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
A4
A2
B
K68 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 101-2 (B))

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
A A3 28 204 17.8 41.7 M12 x 1.75,

45° 10 continuous
omitted
for NG28 45 229 17.9 41.7 M12 x 1.75, 18 deep
71 267 20.3 44.1 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
100 338 18 41.9 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
6
Ø101.6 +0.05
–0.02
Ø14 140 350 17.8 41.6 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
omitted
A4 for NG28
A2
1) 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5

417

Dimensions through drive installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
K04 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 101-2 (B))

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
A A3 45 229 18.4 46.7 M12 x 1.75, 18 deep
45° 10 1
71 267 20.8 49.1 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
100 338 18.2 46.6 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
140 350 18.3 45.9 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
6
Ø101.6 +0.05
–0.02
Ø14
A4
A2
3
K07 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 127-2 (C))
Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 32-4 (C))
A3 71 267 21.8 58.6 M16 x 2,
45° 13 continuous
omitted A omitted
100 338 19.5 56.4 M16 x 2, 4
for NG71 for NG71
continuous
140 350 19.3 56.1 M16 x 2, 24 deep
–0.02
Ø127 +0.05
1
Ø18
A4
B A2
6
K24 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 127-2 (C))
Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 38-4 (C-C))
Cut A - B NG A1 A2 A33) A3a4) A42)
A3
45° 100 338 10.5 65 – M16 x 2,
A 13 continuous
140 350 10.8 75 – M16 x 2, 24 deep
7
350 10.3 – 69.1 M16 x 2, 24 deep
–0.02
Ø127 +0.05
1
Ø18
8
A4
B
A3a
A2

3) Coupling without stop
4) Coupling with stop
418


Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP1) (SAE J744 - 44-4 (D))
A3 140 350 11 77.3 M6 x 2,
13 continuous
A
–0.02
Ø152.4 +0.07
161.6
B A2
A4
161.6 to mounting flange A1
K57 Metric 4-hole flange for mounting an R4 radial piston pump (see RE 11263)
Coupling for metric shaft key
A4 28 232 8 10.6 58.4 M8
A
A3
8 +– 0.011
0.011 45 257 8 11 81 M8
28.3 +0.2
71 283 8 12.5 77 M10

100 354 8 10.5 81 M10
140 366 8 11 93 M8
Ø63 +0.032
Ø80
0
A5 A2
B
Ø25+ 00.025 to mounting flange A1

3) Screws for mounting the radial piston motor are included in the delivery contents.
419

KB2 flange ISO 3019-2 - 80A2SW

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))
A3 18 182 18.8 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 14.5 deep
A 10 1
45° 28 204 18.8 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
45 229 18.9 38.7 M10 x 1.5, 16 deep
71 267 21.3 41.4 M10 x 1.5, 20 deep
9 100 338 19 38.9 M10 x 1.5, 20 deep
Ø10
Ø80 +0.05
–0.02
140 350 18.9 38.6 M10 x 1.5, 20 deep
2
A4
A2
B
3
Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
A A3 28 204 17.8 41.7 M12 x 1.5,

45° 10 continuous
45 229 17.9 41.7 M12 x 1.5, 4
continuous
71 267 20.3 44.1 M12 x 1.5, 20 deep
0
Ø14
Ø100 +0.05
–0.02
100 338 18 41.9 M12 x 1.5, 20 deep

140 350 17.8 41.6 M12 x 1.5, 20 deep
A4
A2
6
Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
A3 45 229 18.4 46.7 M12 x 1.75,
A
45° 10 continuous
71 267 20.8 49.1 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
7
100 338 18.2 46.6 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
140 350 18.3 45.9 M12 x 1.75, 20 deep
0
Ø14
Ø100 +0.05
–0.02
8
A4
A2

420


Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 32-4 (C))
A3 71 267 21.8 58.6 M16 x 2,
45° 10 continuous
A
omitted omitted 100 338 19.5 56.4 M16 x 2,
for NG71 for NG71 continuous
140 350 19.3 56.1 M16 x 2, 24 deep
0
Ø125 +0.05
-0.02
Ø18
12
A4
B A2

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 38-4 (C-C))
Cut A - B NG A1 A2 A33) A3a4) A42)

A3 100 338 10.5 65 – M16 x 2,
45° 10
A continuous
140 350 10.8 75 – M16 x 2, 24 deep
350 10.3 – 69.1 M16 x 2, 24 deep
–0.02
Ø125 +0.05
1
Ø18
A4
B
A3a
A2
KB7 flange ISO 3019-2 - 180B4HW

Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP1) (SAE J744 - 44-4 (D))
A3 140 350 11.3 77.3 M16 x 2,
10 continuous
A
–0.02
Ø180 +0.05
158.4
B A2
A4
158.4 to mounting flange A1

3) Coupling without stop
4) Coupling with stop
421

SAE – mounting flange
Flange Coupling
Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x Gear pump Through drive
ISO 3019-1 for splined
des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) design (NG) available for NG
shaft 1
82-2 (A) 5/8 in K01 18 (U) 10 (U) F (5 to 22) 18 to 140
3/4 in K52 18 (S, R) 10 (S) – 18 to 140
18 (U)
18 (S, R)
101-2 (B) 7/8 in K68 28 (S, R) 28 (S, R) N/G (26 to 49) 28 to 140
45 (U, W)1) 45 (U, W)1)
2
1 in K04 45 (S, R) 45 (S, R) – 45 to 140
– 60, 63 (U, W) 2)
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in K07 71 (S, R) 85 (U, W)3) – 71 to 140
100 (U)3) 100 (U, W)
1 1/2 in K24 100 (S) 85 (S) – 100 to 140
100 (S)
152-4 1 3/4 in K17 140 (S) – – 140
3
(4-hole D)
1) Not for main pump NG28 with K68
ISO – mounting flange

4
Flange Coupling
Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x Gear pump Through drive
ISO 3019-2 for splined
des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) design (NG) available for NG
shaft
80-2 3/4 in KB2 18 (S, R) 10 (S) – 18 to 140
100-2 7/8 in KB3 28 (S, R) – – 28 to 140
1 in KB4 45 (S, R) – – 45 to 140 5
125-2 1 1/4 in KB5 71 (S, R) – – 71 to 140
1 1/2 in KB6 100 (S) – – 100 to 140
180-4 1 3/4 in KB7 140 (S) – – 140
(4-hole B)
Shaft key
Flange Coupling
Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x Radial piston pump Through drive
ISO 3019-2 for shaft
des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) available for NG
key
80-2 3/4 in K57 – – R4 28 to 140 7
8
422

Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
When using combination pumps it is possible to have multiple, mutually independent circuits without the need for a splitter
gearbox.
When ordering combination pumps the model codes for the first and the second pump must be joined by a "+".
Order example:
A10VSO100DFR1/31R-VSB12K04+
A10VSO45DFR/31R-VSA12N00
If no further pumps are to be factory-mounted, the simple type code is sufficient.Included in the delivery contents of the pump
with through drive are then: coupling and seal, with plastic cover to prevent penetration by dust and dirt.
It is permissible to use a combination of two single pumps of the same size (tandem pump), considering a dynamic mass
acceleration force of maximum 10 g (= 98.1 m/s2) without an additional support bracket.
Each through drive is plugged with a non-pressure-resistant cover. Before commissioning the units, they must therefore be
equipped with a pressure-resistant cover.
Through drives can also be ordered with pressure-resistant covers. Please specify in clear text.
For combination pumps comprising more than two pumps, the mounting flange must be calculated for the permissible moment
of inertia.
NG 18 28 45 71 100 140
static Tm Nm 500 880 1370 2160 3000 4500
dynamic at 10 g (98.1 m/s2) Tm Nm 50 88 137 216 300 450
Mass with through-drive plate m kg 14 19 25 39 54 68
Mass without through drive m kg 12 15 21 33 45 60
(e.g. 2nd pump)
Distance center of gravity l mm 90 110 130 150 160 160
m1, m2, m3 Mass of pumps [kg]

m1 m2 m3
Distance center of
l1, l2, l3 [mm]
gravity
l1
l2 Tm = (m1 • l1 + m2 • l2 + m3 • l3) • 1
l3
102 [Nm]
423

without bidirectional suppressor diode ___________________H If necessary, you can change the position of the connector by
turning the solenoid.
Type of protection according to DIN/EN 60529 ________ IP65
To do this, proceed as follows:
The sealing ring in the screw cable fitting is suitable for line 1
diameters of 4.5 mm to 10 mm. 1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this,
turn the mounting nut (1) one revolution counter-clockwise.
The line connector is not included in the delivery contents.
This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request. 2. Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired position.
Bosch Rexroth material number: R902602623 3. Retighten the mounting nut of the solenoid. Tightening
torque: 5+1 Nm. (size WAF26, 12-pt DIN 3124)
Mounting bolt M3 Cable fitting M16x1.5
Tightening torque: tightening torque: On delivery, the position of the connector may differ from that 2
MA = 0.5 Nm MA = 1.5 - 2.5 Nm shown in the brochure or drawing.
65.4
(2)
(1) 3
Ø37
50
68.5 4
Device plug on solenoid line connector

according to DIN 43650 DIN EN 175301-803-A
M 16x1.5
5
PE PE
A A
1 2 1 2 6
8
424
The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air Below-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is
bled during commissioning and operation. This must also be installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
a min a min
plete filling and air bleeding since there is a risk, for example,
of dry running. SB SB
ht min ht min
The case drain fluid in the motor housing must be directed to h min h min
the reservoir via the highest case drain port (L1, L2, L3).
L
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of L L1
pressure differences at the case drain ports of the units, the S S
shared case drain line must be changed so that the minimum L1
permissible case pressure of all connected units is not exceed-
ed in any situation. If this is not possible, separate case drain
lines must be laid if necessary.
tion. a min a min
In all operating conditions, the suction line and case drain line SB SB
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. ht min ht min
h min h min
The permissible suction height hS is a result of the overall
pressure loss, but may not be greater than hS max = 800 mm.
The minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall L1 S S
below 0.8 bar absolute during operation.
Installation position L
L1
See the following examples 1 to 12. L
1 L S + L1
2 L1 S+L
3 L1 S+L
4 L S + L1
Key, see page 45.
425
Above-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is Inside-reservoir installation is when the axial piston unit is
installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. nstalled in the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
To prevent the axial piston unit from draining, a height differ- The axial piston unit is completely below the hydraulic fluid.
ence hES min of at least 25 mm at port L 1 is required in installa- 1
If the minimum fluid level is equal to or below the upper edge
tion position 6.
of the pump, see chapter "Above-reservoir installation".
Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm.
Axial piston units with electrical components (e.g. electric con-
A check valve in the case drain line is only permissible in indi- trol, sensors) may not be installed in a reservoir below
vidual cases. Consult us for approval. the fluid level.
5 6 9 10 2
a min a min
F F
hES min
L
L L1 L
S SB ht min SB ht min
S L1
L1 L
S
hs max hs max L1
h min S h min 3
SB SB
ht min ht min
h min h min 11 12
a min a min
a min a min
7 8 4
F F L1 S
S
L1 S S SB ht min SB ht min
L1
L L L
h min h min
L1
L
hs max
hs max 5
SB SB Installation position Air bleed Filling
ht min ht min 9 L L, L1
h min h min
10 L1 L, L1
a min a min
11 L1 S + L, L1
12 L S + L, L1
Installation position Air bleed Filling 6
5 F L (F)
S Suction port
6 F L1 (F)
F Filling / air bleeding
7 F S + L 1 (F) Case drain port
L, L1
8 F S + L (F)
ht min Minimum necessary immersion depth (200 mm) 7
hmin Minimum necessary spacing to reservoir bottom
(100 mm)
hES min
Minimum necessary height needed to protect the axial
piston unit from draining (25 mm).
amin When designing the reservoir, ensure adequate 8
distance between the suction line and the case drain
line. This prevents the heated, return flow from being
426
Notes
427
Notes
8
428
– The A10VSO pump is designed to be used in open circuit.
– Project planning, installation and commissioning of the axial piston unit require the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Before operating the axial piston unit, please read the appropriate instruction manual thoroughly and completely.
If necessary, request these from Bosch Rexroth.
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteristics may shift.
ensure that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified application conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic
fluid, temperature) with the necessary safety factors.
– Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to
be provided in the hydraulic system.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer‘s instruction regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Mounting bolts: For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to DIN 13 or thread according to ASME B1.1,
we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230.
- Threaded plugs:
Ports Maximum permissible Required Size of

tightening torque for tightening torque for hexagon socket of
DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 45 Nm 6 mm

M16 x 1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
DIN ISO 228 G 1/4 in 70 Nm – –
Tel.: +49-7451-92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Fax: +49-7451-82-21 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Subject to change.
429
RE 92714/06.11 1/44
and RE 92707
A10VSO
Data sheet
Series 32
Size 45 to 180
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for standard program 2 – Variable axial piston pump in swash plate design for hydro-
static drives in open circuit systems
Type code for standard program 3
– The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displace-
Technical data – Standard rotary group 6
ment
Technical data – High-Speed-rotary group 7
– The flow can be steplessly varied by adjustment of the swash
Permissible input and through drive torques 8 plate angle.
DG – Two point control, directly operated 10 – Hydrostatic unloading of the cradle bearings
DR – Pressure control 11 – Port for pressure transducer in pump outlet
DRG – Pressure control remotely operated 12 – Low noise level
DRF/DRS – Pressure and flow control 13 – Low pressure pulsation
LA... – Pressure, flow and power control 14 – High efficiency
ED – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 15 – Highly resistant against cavitation,
sudden drop in suction pressure and housing pressure spikes
ER – Electro-hydraulic pressure control 16
– Universal through drive
Dimensions size 45 to 180 17
Dimensions through drive 32
Summary mounting options 37
Combination pumps A10VSO + A10VSO 38
Connector for solenoides 39
430

A10VS O / 32 – V B
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Axial piston unit

01 Swash plate design, variable, nominal pressure 280 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar A10VS
Type of operation
Size (NG)
03 Geometric displacement, (see table of values page 6) 045 071 100 140 180
Control device 045 071 100 140 180

Two point control, directly controlled ● ● ● ● ● DG
Pressure control ● ● ● ● ● DR
with flow control, hydraulic X-T open ● ● ● ● ● DRF
X-T closed ● ● ● ● ● DRS
with flow control, electric ❍ ● ● ● ❍ DFE11)
with pressure control, remotely operated hydraulic ● ● ● ● ● DRG
electrical negative characteristic ● ● ● ● ● ED.2)
positive characteristic ● ● ● ● ● ER. 2)
nominal voltage
12V ● ● ● ● ● 71
24V ● ● ● ● ● 72
04 Power control with pressure cut off
Control begin to 50 bar ● ● ● ● ● LA5D
from 51 to 90 bar ● ● ● ● ● LA6D
91 to 160 bar ● ● ● ● ● LA7D
160 to 240 bar ● ● ● ● ● LA8D
over 240 bar ● ● ● ● ● LA9D
with pressure cut off remotely operated
Control begin see above ● ● ● ● ● LA.DG
with pressure cut off, flow control, X-T closed
Control begin see above ● ● ● ● ● LA.DS
with separate flow control, X-T closed
Control begin see above ● ● ● ● ● LA.S
Series
06
counter clockwise L

1) See RE 30630, or http://www.boschrexroth.de/sydfe
2) At project design, the following must be considered:
Excessive current levels(I > 1200 mA at 12 V or I > 600 mA at 24 V) to the ER-solenoid can result in undesired increase of
pressure which can lead to pump or system damage:
- Use Imax -current limiter.
- An intermediate-plate pressure controller can be used to protect the pump in the event of overflow.
An accessory kit with pressure reducing sandwich plate can be ordered from Rexroth under part number R902490825.
431

A10VS O / 32 – V B
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Seals 1
07 FKM (Fluoro-rubber) ● ● ● ● ● V
Drive shaft 045 071 100 140 180

Parallel keyed shaft to DIN 6885, not for through drive ● ● ● ● ● P
08 Splined shaft standard shaft ● ● ● ● ● S
ANSI B92.1a similar to shaft „S“ however for higher input torque ● ● – – – R
2
Mounting flange
09 ISO 3019-2 - 4-bolt B
Ports for service lines1)

SAE-flange on top and at the bottom , opposite sides,
● ● ● ● ● 22U
10 Metric fixing thread, with universal through drive
3
Like 22U, with pulsation damping, not for High-Speed ● ● ● ● ❍ 32U
Through drive
Without through drive, with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange,
– ▲ ▲ ▲ – 99
with cover properly closed
Without through drive, with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange
● ● ● ● ● 00
with cover properly closed ( for new applications)
4
Flange ISO 3019-22) Coupler for splined shaft3)
Diameter Diameter
ISO 80, 2-bolt 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● B2
ISO 100, 2-bolt 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● B3
1 in 15T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● B4
ISO 125, 4-bolt 1 in 15T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● E1 5
ISO 160, 4-bolt 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – ● ● ● ● B8
ISO 180, 4-bolt 1 1/2 in 17T 24/24DP – – ● ● ● B9
11
1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP – – – ● ● B7
Flange ISO 3019-12)
82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● 01
3/4 in 11T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● 52 6
101-2 (B) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● 68
101-2 (B) 1 in 15T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● 04
127-4 (C) 1 in 15T 16/32DP ● ● ● ● ● E2
1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP – ● ● ● ● 15
127-2 (C) 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – ● ● ● 24
7
152-4 (D) 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP – – ● ● ● 96
1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP – – – ● ● 17
Rotary group version

Standard-rotary group (noise-optimized for n = 1500/1800 rpm) ● ● ● ● ● E
12
High-Speed (only with port plate 22U) ● ● ● ● ❍ S
8
Solenoid connectors
Without ● ● ● ● ● 0
13
HIRSCHMANN-plug - without suppressor diode (only for ED/ER control) ● ● ● ● ● H
= available ❍ = on request ▲ = not for new applications – = not available
1) See RE 95581 universal through drive
2) 2-bolt: mounting pump series 31; 4-bolt: mounting pump series 32. See page 37 Summary mouting options
3) Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a (drive shaft allocation to SAE J744)
432
Technical data
Fluids Notes on the selection of the hydraulic fluid
Prior to project design, please see our technical data sheets In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
RE 90220 (mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally ac- operating temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to
ceptable fluids) for detailed information on fluids and operating the ambient temperature.
conditions.
The fluid should be selected so that witin the operating tempe-
When using environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, rature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum range (Qopt),
the limitations regarding technical data and seals must be see shaded section of the selection diagram. We recommend
observed. Please contact us. to select the higher viscosity grade in each case.
Operating viscosity range Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C the operating tem-
perature in the tank is 60 °C . in the optimum viscosity range
For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the
(Qopt; shaded area) this corresponds to viscosity grades VG 46
operating viscosity (at operating temperature) be selected the
resp. VG 68; VG 68 should be selected.
range
Important: The leakage fluid (case drain fluid) temperature is
Qopt = optimum operating viscosity 16 ... 36 mm2/s
influenced by pressure and input speed and is always higher
referred to tank temperature (open circuit). than the tank temperature. However, at no point in the compo-
nent may the temperature exceed 90 °C. The temperature diffe-
Limit of viscosity range rence specified on the left is to be taken into account when
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: determining the viscosity in the bearing.
Qmin = 10 mm2/s If the above conditions cannot be met, due to extreme opera-
for short periods (t d1 min) ting parameters please consult us.
at max. perm. fluid temperature of 90 °C.
Filtration of the fluid
Please note that the max. leakage fluid temperature of 90 °C is
also not exceeded in certain areas (for instance bearing area). The finer the filtration the better the fluid cleanliness class and
The fluid temperature in the bearing area is approx. 5 K higher the longer the service life of the axial piston pump.
than the average leakage fluid temperature In order to guarantee the functional reliability of the axial piston
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s unit it is necessary to carry out a gravimetric evaluation of the
for short periods (t d1 min) fluid to determine the particle contamination and the cleanli-
on cold start ness class acc. to ISO 4406. A cleanliness class of at least is
(p d30 bar, n d 1500 rpm, tmin = -25 °C) necessary 20/18/15.
At very high fluid temperatures (90 °C to max. 115 °C) a clean-
At temperatures between -40 °C and -25 °C special measures liness class of at least 19/17/14 nach ISO 4406 is necessary.
are required, please consult us for further information.
If above classes cannot be maintained, please consult us.
see data sheet RE 90300-03-B.
Selection diagram
2500-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°

1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
200
10
2
100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
60
40 36
Qopt.
20
16
10
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90°
Temperature t in °C t in °C
433
Technical data
Pressure at outlet port (pressure port) B Nominal pressure pnom

Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 280 bar absolute pressure.
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax 1
Individual operating period ________________________ 2.5 ms The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum pressure
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h within the individual operating period. The total of the individual
Minimum pressure(high pressure side) __________ 10 bar2) operating periods must not exceed the total operating period.
Rate of pressure change RA max _____________ 16000 bar/s Minimum pressure (in pump outlet)
Minimum pressure in the pump outlet side (port B) that is
pnom required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
2
Pressure p

't
Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) that is required to
prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum pressure
'p depends on the speed and displacement of the axial piston
unit.
Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduc- 3
Time t range.
To safeguard against over pressure pump safety blocks to

RE 25880 and RE 25890 for direct mounting onto the SAE
flange port (B) can be ordered separately. t2
Individual operating period t1 tn 4
Pressure p

Nom. pressure pnom
Inlet pressure standard rotary group

Size 45 to100 at 1800 rpm 5
Minimum pressure pabs min ________________ 0.8 bar absolute
Size 140 to180 at 1800 min-1
Minimum pressure pabs min __________________ 1 bar absolute Min. pressure (high pressure side)
Maximum pressure pabs max ________________10 bar1) absolute
Time t
Inlet pressure high-speed-rotary group Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn
6
Minimum pressure pabs min __________________ 1 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pabs max ________________10 bar1) absolute 1) Other values on request
Case drain pressure 2) Lower pressure, depends on timeframe, please consult us.
(at port L, L1):
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S, how- 7
pL max abs _______________________________________ 2 bar1)
8
434
Technical data – Standard rotary group – Version E

Size NG 45 71 100 140 180
Vg max cm3 45 71 100 140 180
(per revolution)
Standard rotary group noise optimized
Speed
maximum at Vg max nmax rpm 18001) 18001) 18001) 18002) 18002)
Flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max L/min 81 128 180 252 324
at nE = 1500 rpm qvE max L/min 67.5 106.7 150 210 270
Power
at nnom and Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Pmax kW 38 59.7 84 118 151
at nE = 1500 rpm PE max kW 31 50 70 98 125
Torque1)
at Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Tmax Nm 200 317 446 624 802
'p = 100 bar T Nm 72 113 159 223 286
Torsional stiffness P c Nm/rad 34587 80627 132335 188406 213022
Shaft S c Nm/rad 29497 71884 121142 169537 171107
R c Nm/rad 41025 76545 – – –
Moment of inertial rotary group JTW kgm2 0.0035 0.0087 0.0185 0.0276 0.033
Case volume V L 1.0 1.6 2.2 3.0 2.7
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 30 47 69 73 78

- for absolute pressure pabs = 0.8 bar at suction port S
Important
Exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a reduction in operational-
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend to check the loading through tests or calculation / simulati-
on and comparison with the permissible data.
V g • n • KV Vg = Geometr. displacement per revolution in cm3

Flow qV = [L/min]
1000 'p = Pressure differential in bar
Torque T = [Nm]
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
435
Technical data – High-Speed-rotary group – Version S

Table of values (theoreticaal values, without efficiencies and tolerances: values rounded)
Size NG 45 71 100 140
Vg max cm3 45 71 100 140
(per revolution)
1
High-speed-rotary group
Speed
maximum at Vg max nmax rpm 30001) 25501) 23001) 22001)
Flow
at nnom and Vg max qv max L/min 135 181 280 308
at nE = 1500 rpm qvE max L/min 67,5 106,6 150 210 2
Power
at nnom, Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Pmax kW 62.8 85 107 144
at nE = 1500 rpm PE max kW 31 50 70 98
Torque1)
at Vg max and 'p = 280 bar Tmax Nm 200 317 446 624
'p = 100 bar T Nm 72 113 159 223 3
Torsional stiffness P c Nm/rad 34587 80627 132335 188406
Shaft S c Nm/rad 29497 71884 121142 169537
R c Nm/rad 41025 76545 – –
Moment of inertia rotary group JTW kgm2 0.0035 0.0087 0.0185 0.0276
Case volume V L 1.0 1.6 2.2 3.0
4
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 30 47 69 73

Important 5
8
436
Technical data
Size NG 45 71 100 140 180
at a/2
Fq max N 1500 1900 2300 2800 2300
a/2 a/2
a
Axial force maximum

r Fax ± Fax max N 1500 2400 4000 4800 800
Note
The direction of the permissible axial force:
+ Fax max = Increase of bearing service life
– Fax max = Reduction of bearing service life (avoid)

Size NG 45 71 100 140 180
Torque
Tmax Nm 200 317 446 624 802
P TE max Nm 200 439 857 1206 1206
DIN 6885 Ø mm 25 32 40 45 45
TE max Nm 319 626 1104 1620 1620
S
Ø in 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 1 3/4
TE max Nm 400 644 – – –
R
Ø in 1 1 1/4 – – –
Through drive torque for drive shaft, maximum
S TD max Nm 319 492 778 1266 1266
R TD max Nm 365 548 – – –

T1 T2
TE
1. Pumpe
1. Pumpe 2.
2. Pumpe
Pumpe
TD
437
Technical data
Fluid: hydraulic oil ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t= 50°C
Size 45 Size 140

_ _ _ __n = 1500 rpm _ _ _ __n = 1500 rpm 1
______ n = 1800 rpm ______ n = 1800 rpm
260 130
Drive power P [kW]

100 50
qV 240 120
Flow qV [L/min]
80 40 qV
220 110
60 30
200 100 2
PqV max
40 20
Drive power P [kW]

PqV 0 180 90
Flow qV [L/min]
20 10
160 PqV max 80
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280 140 70
Operating pressure p [bar] 120 60

100 50
3
80 40
Size 71
60 30
_ _ _ __n = 1500 rpm
40 20
PqV 0
______ n = 1800 rpm
20 10
160 80 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
140 70 4
Drive power P [kW]
120 qV 60
Flow qV [L/min]
100 50
Size 180
80 40 _ _ _ __n = 1500 rpm

PqV max
60 30 ______ n = 1800 rpm
40 20
PqV 0 330 165 5
20 10 320 160
0 0 300 qV 150
0 50 100 150 200 250 280 140
280
260 130
Size 100 240 120
Drive power P [kW]

_ _ _ __n = 1500 rpm 220 110 6
200 100
______ n = 1800 rpm
Flow qV [L/min]
180 90
220 110 160 80
PqV max
200 100
140 70
180 90 120 60
qV 7
160 80 100 50
140 70
Drive power P [kW]
80 40
Flow qV [L/min]
PqV max
120 60 60 30
100 50 40 20
PqV 0
80 40 20 10
60 30 0 0 8
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
40 20
PqV 0 Operating pressure p [bar]
20 10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 280
438
DG – Two point control, directly operated

The pump can be set to a minimum swivel angle by connecting Schematic
an external control pressure to port X.
This will supply control fluid directly to the stroking piston; a X
minimum pressure of pst t 50 bar is required.
The pump can only be switched between Vg max or Vg min.
Please note, that the required control pressure at port X is
L MB B
directly dependent on the actual operating pressure pB in port
B. (see control pressure diagram).
Control pressure diagram
120
Req. control pressure pst bar]
100
L1 S
50
Port for
0 50 70 140 210 280
B Service line
S Suction line
X Control pressure
MB Measuring operating pressure
439
The pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the pump Schematic
supplies as much hydraulic fluid as is required by the con-
sumers. If the operating pressure exceeds the pressure set-
point set at the integrated pressure valve, the pump will adjust
towards a smaller displacement and the control deviation will 1
L MB B
be reduced. The pressure can be set steplessly at the control
valve.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C)

2
280
Setting range
L1 S 3
35
Port for
Flow qv [L/min] Service line
B
S Suction line 4
Controller data 5
Hysteresis and repeatibility _________________ 'p max. 3 bar
Pressure rise, max
NG 45 71 100 140 180

'p bar 6 8 10 12 14
Control fluid consumption_____________ max. approx. 3 L/min 6
8
440

The DR-pressure control (see page 11) is overriding this DRG- Schematic
not included in supply
valve spool. This relief valve is not included in the pump supply.
X
The differential pressure at the DRG-control spool is set as
standard to 20 bar. This results in a pilot oil flow to the relief
valve of approx. 1,5 L/min. If another setting is required (range
from 10-22 bar) please state in clear text.
As a separate relief valve we can recommend:
DBDH 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402 or L B
DBETR-SO 381 with orifice dia. 0,8 mm in P (electric) to
RE 29166.
The max. lenght of piping should not exceed 2 m.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C)
L1 S
280
Setting range
Port for
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain(L1 verschlossen)
X Control pressure
20
Flow qv [L/min]
Controller data
Hysteresis and repeatibility __________________ 'p max. 3 bar
Pressure rise, max
NG 45 71 100 140 180

'p bar 6 8 10 12 14
Control fluid consumption____________ max.approx. 4.5 L/min
441
DRF/DRS – Pressure and flow control

In additon to the pressure control function, the pump flow may Schematic DRF
be varied by means of a differential pressure over an orifice
or valve spool installed in the service line to the actuator. The closed at DRS valve
pump flow is equal to the actual required flow by the actuator,
regardless of changing pressure levels.

X 1
Note
The DRS-valve version has no connection between X and the
tank (pump housing).
Unloading the LS-pilot line must be possible in the valve sys-
tem. L MB B
Because of the flushing function sufficient unloading of the 2
Flow control at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C)
3
280
Setting range
L1 S
35 Port for
B Service line
Flow qv [L/min] S Suction line
Static characteristic at variable speed 5
X Control pressure
qV max MB Measuring operating pressure

Flow qv [L/min]
Differential pressure 'p:

6
Standard setting: 14 to 22 bar.
qV min If another setting is required, please state in clear text.
Speed n [min-1] Unloading port X to tank (with outlet port B closed) results in
a zero stroke (standby) pressure which lies about 1 to 2 bar
higher than the 'p setting).
Controller data
7
Data pressure control DR see page 11.
Maximum flow deviation measured with drive speed n = 1500
rpm.
Size 45 71 100 140 180

'qv max L/min 1.8 2.8 4.0 6.0 8.0
8
Control fluid consumption DRF __ max. approx. 3 bis 4.5 L/min
Control fluid consumption DRS ________ max. approx. 3 L/min
442
LA... – Pressure, flow and power control

Execution of the pressure control like DR(G), see page 11 (12). When ordering please state the max. input torque in clear text,
Execution of the flow control like DRS, see page 13. e.g. 20 kW at 1500 min-1.
In order to achieve a constant drive torque with varying opera- Control data
ting pressures, the swivel angle and with it the output flow from
For technical Data of pressure control DR see page 11.
the axial piston unit is varied so that the product of flow and
pressure remains constant. For technical Data of flow control FR see page 13.
Flow control is possible below the power control curve. Controller data:
Control fluid consumption max. approx. 5.5 L/min
Torque T [Nm] for size

Control begin 45 71 100 140 180 Ordering
code
to 50 bar to 42.0 to 67.0 to 94.0 to 132.0 to 167.0 LA5
51 to 90 bar 42.1 - 76.0 67.1 - 121.0 94.1 - 169.0 132.1 - 237.0 167.1 - 302.0 LA6
91 to 160 bar 76.1 - 134.0 121.1 - 213.0 169.1 - 299.0 237.1 - 418.0 302.1 - 540.0 LA7
161 to 240 bar 134.1 - 202.0 213.1 - 319.0 299.1 - 449.0 418.1 - 629.0 540.1 - 810.0 LA8
over 240 bar over 202.1 over 319.1 over 449.1 over 629.1 over 810.1 LA9
Conversion of the torque values in power [kW] :
T 2S • T • n
P= [kW] ( at 1500 rpm) or P= [kW] (speeds see tables on page 6 and 7)
6.4 60000
Static curves and torque characteristic
Schematic (LAXD) with pressure cut off
300
280
X
250
LA9
200
LA8
B
150
LA7
Schematic (LAXDG) with pressure cut off, remotely operated
100
LA6
X
50
LA5
0 not included in
0 Flow qV [%] 100 supply
B
ΔqV Schematic (LAXS) with separate flow control
LA9 X not included in

supply
LA8
Torque T [Nm]
X
MB B
LA7
Schematic (LAXDS) with pressure and flow control

LA6
X
LA5
0 Flow qV [%] 100

L B not included in
Port for supply
B Service line
S Suction line
L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged)
X Control pressure
L1 S
443

The maximum pump output pressure is set through a command Influence of pressure setting on stanby level
current signal to the ED-valve solenoid
30
When system pressure (load pressure) reaches this pressure 28
level, the pump‘s control valve spool shifts and causes an
Standby [bar]
26
increase or decrease in the pump‘s swivel angle (flow) in order 24 1
to maintain this set pressure level.
22
The pump output flow matches the needed input flow to the 20
actuators. The desired pressure level can be set steplessly by 18
varying the solenoid current.
16
When the solenoid current signal drops towards a zero value, 14
the maximum output pressure is limited by an adjustable me- 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
Maximum pressure setting [bar] 2
chanical pressure cut off (secure fail safe function in case of a
loss of power e.g. for use as fan drives).
Schematic ED..
The response time characteristic of the ED-control was opti-
mized for the use as a fan drive system.
Static current-pressure characteristic

(negative characteristic) 3
(measured with pump in standby)
280
ED De-activation of L
control B
Max. adjustable
control pressure 4
140
Min. adjustable control pressure

0 1
Amperage I/Imax
Hysteresis of static current-press. characteristic < 3 bar 5
L1 S
Static flow-pressure characteristic Port for

(at n= 1500 min-1; tfluid = 50 °C) B Service line
max S Suction line

Hysteresise / pressure rise 'p
280 L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged) 6

operating pressure p [bar]
Setting range
Technical data, solenoids ED71 ED72

Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
Control current 7
35 Control begin at qv min 100 mA 50 mA
min
Flow qv [L/min] Limit current 1,54 A 0,77 A
min max
Nom. resistence (at 20 °C) 5,5 : 22,7 :
Control data Dither frequency 100 to 100 to
Standby standard settings (see diagramm at right), other 200 Hz 200 Hz 8
values on request. Duty cycle 100 % 100 %
Hysteresis and pressure rise 'p < 4 bar. Solenoide class of material see page 39
Pilot flow consumption: 3 to 4,5 L/min.
444

The maximum pump output pressure is set through a command Schematic ER..
current signal to the ED-valve solenoid
When system pressure (load pressure) reaches this pressure
level, the pump‘s control valve spool shifts and causes an
increase or decrease in the pump‘s swivel angle (flow) in order
to maintain this set pressure level.
The pump output flow matches the needed input flow to the
actuators. The desired pressure level can be set steplessly by
varying the solenoid current.
When the solenoid current signal drops towards a zero value,
L B
the pump‘s output pressure will also drop to the standby level.
Observe the instructions regarding the project design on
page 2
Static current-pressure characteristic

(positive characteristic)
(measured with pump in standby)
350
280
250 L1 S
Max. adjustable
control pressure
150 Port for
B Service line
Min. adjustable S Suction line
50
control pressure
0 L, L1 Caise drain (L1 plugged)
0 Amperage 1
I/Imax
Hysteresis static current-pressure characteristic < 3bar
Influence of pressure setting on stand by ± 2bar
Technical data, solenoids ED71 ED72
Voltage 12 V (±20 %) 24 V (±20 %)
Static flow-pressure characteristic Control current
(at n= 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C) Control begin at qv min 100 mA 50 mA
max Limit current 1,54 A 0,77 A

280
Nom. resistence (at 20 °C) 5,5 : 22,7 :

Setting range
200 Hz 200 Hz
Duty cycle 100 % 100 %
Solenoide class of material see page 39
140
min
Flow qv [L/min]
min max
Control data
Hysteresis and pressure rise 'p < 4bar.
Pilot flow consumption: 3 to 4,5 L/min.
445
Before finalising your design request a certified

Flange B 1
ISO 3019-2 9 95 MB .5
6.3 89
L
Ø14
max. 110
10
X
91
57
Ø125 - 00.063
61
.5°
40
113.2
146
2
78.5
91
15.5 L1 129
S
45 113.2 3
184 146
242 24 93.5 146
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation
S 26.2 4
25
B
33
Ø40
69.9
52.4
MB
12
35.7 30
5
(to mounting flange face) 187
8
446

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 in R Splined shaft 1 in P Parallel keyed shaft
15T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 15T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744) (DIN 6885) 42 + 0.3 0.0
38 39
1/4-20UNC-2B4)
16
1/4-20UNC-2B4)
16 19
5 5 3
M83), 5)
28 -0.2
ø25 j6
Usable spline lenght 29.5
30 45.9
52
45.9
Ports
pressure
[bar]6)
B Service line (standard pressure range) SAE J5188) 1 in 350 O
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J5188) 1 1/2 in 10 O
X Load-Sensing pressure DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 O
X Control press. DG control DIN 3852 G 1/4 in; 12 deep 120 O
MB Measuring pressure in B DIN 38529) G 1/4; 12 deep 350 X
1) ANSI B92.1a-1976, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
3) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13).
5) For the maximum tightening torques the general information on page 44 must be observed.
6) Depending on the application, momentary pressure spikes can occur. Consider this when selecting measuring devices and
fittings.
7) Depending on the installation postion, L or L1 must be connected (see also page 42, 43).
447

DG LA.D
Two point control, directly operated Pressure, flow and power control
222.6 1
12
182.8
X
40 114
3
X
X
2
X 110 124
117 141

counter clockwise counter clockwise
rotation rotation
3
DRG ED7./ER7.
Pressure control, remotely operated Electro hydraulic pressure control
4
133
X
max. 110
140
X
X
40
Valve mounting for

124 1411)
counter clockwise 141
Valve mounting for
rotation counter clockwise
rotation
DRF/DRS 6
Pressure and flow control
133
X
7
max. 110
X
40
124
141 8
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation
1) ER7.: 176mm when using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve.

448

Flange
M2
9 115 B
ISO 3019-2 Ø18
2x
L MB
1.5
107.2
57.
104
5°
77
0.000
Ø160 -0.063
40
141.4
180
13
3
.5
10
104
91
141.4
18
53
L1 S 180
107.5 137.3
217 12 153.8
277 24
Valve mounting for

counter clockwise
rotation
77.8
52.4
Ø25
Ø50
S B
26.2
42.9
449

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in R Splined shaft 1 1/4 in P Parallel keyed shaft
14T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 14T 12/24DP1)2) (SAE J744) (DIN 6885)
50
47.5 45
5/16-18UNC-2B 4)
5/16-18UNC-2B4)
19
19 22
6 2.5
6
M103), 5)
ø32 k6
35 -0.2
2
Usable spline 38
lenght
39.5 55.4 60
55.4
Ports
pressure
[bar]6)
B Service line (standard pressure range) SAE J5188) 1 in 350 O
4
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J5188) 2 in 10 O
X Load-Sensing pressure DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 O 5
X Control pressure DG-control DIN 3852 G 1/4 in ; 12 deep 120 O
fittings.
7
8
450

DG LA.D
251.6
12
212
X
126.5
40
3
X
X 117.5 137.3
121.5
Valve mounting for Valve mounting for 153.8
rotation rotation
DRG ED7./ER7.
172 12
X
140
107.2
X
40
137.3 1541)
153.8
rotation rotation
DRF/DRS
172 12
X
107.2
40
137.3
153.8
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation

451

Flange B 4.5
ISO 3019-2 9 149.5 11
L MB 1
107.2
100
Ø18
5°
86
15
-0.063
0.000
57.
158.4
200
Ø180
105.5
100
99
2
158.4
20
L1 S 200
80
275 12 118 164.9
338 22
counter clockwise
rotation
4
Ø32
66.7
Ø60
88.9
S B
31.8 5
50.8
8
452

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 1/2 in P Parallel keyed shaft(DIN 6885)
17T 12/24DP1) (SAE J744) 70
54 68
7/16-14UNC-2B3)4)
28
28 1.5
9.5
M122), 4)
ø40 k6
43 -0.2
43.5
80
61.9
Ports
pressure
[bar]5)
B Service line (high pressure range) SAE J5187) 1 1/4 in 350 O
fittings.
453
Before finalising your design request a certi-

DG LA.D
1
308
268 12
X
133
40
3
X 2
128.5 148.3
X 132.5 164.9
rotation rotation
3
DRG ED7./ER7.
228 12 4
X
140
107.2
X
40
5
148.4
164.9 1651)
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise Valve mounting for
rotation
DRF/DRS 6
228 12
X 7
107.2
40
148.4
164.9 8
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation

454

9 290
Flange 6.4 173
ISO 3019-2 7.5
L B MB Ø18 12
max. 110
57.
110
5°
X
Ø180 -0.063
0.000
71
158.4
200
15
110.5
104
110
158.4
L1 S
24 200
78 131 179.8
275 12
355 22
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation
Ø60
88.9
66.7
Ø32
S B
50.8 31.8
455

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in P Parallel keyed shaft
13T 8/16DP1) (SAE J744) (DIN 6885) 82
67 81.5
1
1/2-13UNC-2B3)4)
36
32 1.5
10
M162)4)
48.5 -0.2
ø45 k6
2
53
92
75
Ports
[bar]5)
4
L1 Case drain fluid DIN 38528) M33 x 2 2 X6)
X Control pressure DG-control DIN 3852 G 1/4 in ; 12 deep 120 O 5
5) Depending on the application, momentary pressure spikes can occur. Consider this when selecting measuring devices and 6
fittings.
7
8
456

DG LA.D
278 318
X
139.5
X
40
153 163.3
X 158 179.8
rotation rotation
DRG ED7./ER7.
238
X
140
X
X
40
EP
2434482
X
max. 110
163.3
179.8 1801)
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise Valve mounting for
rotation
DRF/DRS
238
X
X
40
EP
2434482
X
max. 110
163.3
179.8
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation

457

Flange 9 300
7.5 1
ISO 3019-2
6.4 173 MB 12
L
57.
5°
110
116
0.000
Ø 180 -0.063
18
71
15
158.4
200
2
110.5
104
110
24.2 158.4
L1
78 200
285 131 188
365 22 Valve mounting for 3
counter clockwise
rotation
31.8
S 32
Ø 63
88.9
66.7
50.8 B 5
8
458

Drive shaft
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in P Parallel keyed shaft
13T 8/16DP1) (SAE J744) (DIN 6885) 82
67 81.5
1/2-13UNC-2B3)4)
36
32 1.5
10
M162)4)
48.5 -0.2
53 ø45 k6
92
75
Ports
[bar]5)
fittings.
459

DG LA.D
1
288 327
X
140
X
71
42
104
171 2
X 153 188
counter clockwise
Valve mounting for rotation
counter clockwise
rotation
3
DRG ED7./ER7.
247 4
X MB
140
116
X
42
171 5
188 1801)
Valve mounting for
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
counter clockwise
rotation
rotation
DRF/DRS 6
247
MB 7
X
116
42
171
188 8
Valve mounting for
counter clockwise
rotation

460

Dimensions through drive fied installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
B2 Flange ISO 3019-2 - 80 2-bolt

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 3/4in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A-B))
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) Size A1 A2 A3 A42)
NG 100...180 22
M12x25 A-B 15 45 264 38 15.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
A DIN 912-10.9(4x) 9
NG 45...71 71 299 38 15.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
100 360 38 15.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
Ø
140 377 38 15.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep

10
9
45°
180 387 38 15.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
Ø80 +0.05
+0.02
A4 A3
B A2
(to mounting flange face) A1

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99

NG 100...180 22
M10x25 A-B 45 264 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
A 15
DIN 912-10.9(4x) 9 71 299 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
NG 45...71
100 360 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
140 377 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
Ø1
40
Ø100 +0.05
+0.02
180 387 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

45°
Thread of all NG at U00 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
A4 A3
B A2

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99

M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B 22
A 15 45 264 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
9
71 299 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
100 360 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
Ø1
140 377 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

40
Ø100 +0.05
+0.02
45°
180 387 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

A3
B A2

2) Thread according to DIN 13, for the maximum tightening torques the general information on page 44 must be observed.
461

E1 Flange ISO 3019-2 - 125 4-bolt

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
M10x25 Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99
A DIN 912-10.9 A-B 22
(8x) NG 100...180 15 45 264 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
13 1
71 299 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
A4 (4x)
100 360 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
140 377 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
+0.05
Ø125 +0.02
180 387 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
114.5
2
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 A3
114.5
(4x) NG 45...71 A2
B (to mounting flange face) A1
3

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/4in 14T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 32-4 (C))
M10x25 DIN 912-10.9 Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99

141.4 (8x) NG 100...180 22
A-B 15
71 299 55.4 17.9 M16 x 2; 20 deep
A 9
A4 (4x) 100 360 55.4 17.9 M16 x 2; 20 deep 4
140 377 55.4 17.9 M16 x 2; 20 deep
180 387 55.4 17.9 M16 x 2; 20 deep
Ø160 +0.05
+0.02
Thread of all NG at U00 M16 x 2; 22 deep

141.4
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 A3
B (4x) NG 71 A2
6
Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/2in 17T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 38-4 (C-C))
A4 (4x) Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99

158.4 M102)x25 22
DIN 912-10.9 (8x)
A-B 15
100 360 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 20 deep
A 9 140 377 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 20 deep
NG 100...180
180 387 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 20 deep 7
Ø180 +0.05
+0.02
158.4
8
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) A3
B NG 71 A2

462


Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 3/4in 13T 8/16 DP1) (SAE J744 - 44-4 (D))
A4 (4x) Size A1 A2 A3 A42) at U99

158.4 22
M102)x25 A-B 15 140 377 75 On request M16 x 2; 20 deep
A DIN 912-10.9(8x) 9
180 387 75 On request M16 x 2; 20 deep
NG 100...180
Ø180 +0.05
+0.02
158.4
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9(4x) A3
B NG 71 A2
(to mounting flange face)A1
01 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 82-2 (A)

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 5/8in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A))
M10x25 Size A1 A2 A3 A42)

DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B 22
15 45 264 31.8 19.3 M10 x 1.5;
A NG 100...180 13 16 deep
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 71 299 31.8 19.3 M10 x 1.5;
Ø (4x) 16 deep
10
6 .5 NG 45...71 100 360 31.8 On request M10 x 1.5;
+0.05
Ø82.55+0.02
45°
16 deep
140 377 31.8 On request M10 x 1.5;
16 deep
A4 (6x)
180 387 31.8 On request M10 x 1.5;
16 deep
A3
B
A2
52 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 82-2 (A)

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 3/4in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B))

DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B 22
15
45 264 38 17.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
A NG 100...180 13 71 299 38 17.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9
(4x) 100 360 38 17.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
Ø NG 45...71
10 140 377 38 17.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep
6 .5
Ø82.55+0.05
+0.02
180 387 38 17.5 M10 x 1.5; 16 deep

45°
A4 (6x)
A3
B A2
(to mounting flange face)A1

463

68 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 101-2 (B)

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))
DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B 22
15 45 264 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
A NG 100...180 13 1
M12x25 71 299 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
DIN 912-10.9
(4x) 100 360 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
NG 45...71
Ø
140 377 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

14
+0.02
Ø101.6 +0.05
45°
6
180 387 41 16.5 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

A4 (6x) 2
A3
B
A2
3
04 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 101-2 (B)
Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))
DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B 22
A 15 45 264 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
NG 100...180 13
M12x25 71 299 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep 4
DIN 912-10.9 100 360 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep
(4x)
Ø
NG 45...71 140 377 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

14
+0.02
Ø101.6 +0.05
45°
6
180 387 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 18 deep

A4 (6x) 5
A3
B A2
E2 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 127-4 (C) 6

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 25-4 (B-B))

A DIN 912-10.9 A-B 22 45 264 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
(8x) NG 100...180 15
13 71 299 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
A4 (4x)
100 360 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep 7
140 377 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
+0.05
Ø127 +0.02
180 387 45.9 16.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep

114.5
8
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 A3
114.5
(4x) NG 71 A2
B (to mounting flange face) A1

464

15 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 127-4 (C)

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 1/4in 14T 12/24 DP1) (SAE J744 - 32-4 (C))

A DIN 912-10.9 A-B 22 71 299 55.4 17.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
(8x) NG 100...180 15
13
100 360 55.4 17.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
A4 (4x)
140 377 55.4 17.9 M12 x 1.75; 15 deep
180 387 55.4 17.9 M12 x 1.75; 22 deep
+0.05
Ø127 +0.02
114.5
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 A3
114.5
(4x) NG 71 A2
B (To mounting flange face) A1
24 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 127-2 (C)

M10x25 22 Size A1 A2 A3 A42)

DIN 912-10.9 (8x) A-B A3
100 360 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
NG 100...180 NG 140
140 377 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
180 387 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
45°
+0.05
Ø127 +0.02
136 +0.2
180
A4 (4x)
9
15
A3
A2 NG 100
96 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 152-4 (D)

161.6 DIN 912-10.9 (8x) 22
NG 100...180
A-B 15
100 360 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
A 13 140 377 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
180 387 61.9 20.4 M16 x 2; 22 deep
A4 (4x)
Ø152.4 +0.05
+0.02
161.6
M12x25
DIN 912-10.9 (4x) A3
B NG 71 A2

465

17 Flange ISO 3019-1 - 152-4 (D)

Coupler for splined shaft to ANSI B92.1a-1996 1 3/4in 13T 8/16 DP1) (SAE J744 - 44-4 (D))
161.6 DIN 912-10.9 A-B 22
15 140 377 75 On request M16 x 2;
A (8x) NG 100...180
13 22 deep 1
180 387 75 On request M16 x 2;

A4 (4x) 22 deep
Ø152.4 +0.05
+0.02
161.6 2
M12x25
B DIN 912-10.9 A3
(4x) NG 71 A2
3

The A10VSO is equipped with a flexible universal through drive. This enables the utilisation of various through drive options wit-
hout any machining of the port plate. Details of the necessary adapter parts can be found in data sheet RE 95581.
4
Through drive - A10VSO Mounting option 2nd pump Through

drive
Flange Coupler for Code A10VSO A10VO External gear pump available
Series (size)
ISO 3019-2 5
ISO 80, 2-bolt 3/4 in B2 10, 18 series 52/31 71 to 180
(S, R)
ISO 100, 2-bolt 7/8 in B3 28 series 31 (S, R) 71 to 180
1 in B4 45 series 31 (S, R) 71 to 180
ISO 125, 4-bolt 1 in E1 45 (S, R) 71 to 180
6
ISO 160, 4-bolt 1 1/4 in B8 71 (S, R) 71 to 180
ISO 180, 4-bolt 1 1/2 in B9 100 (S) 100 to 180
1 3/4 in B7 140 (S) 140 to 180
ISO 3019-1
82-2(A) 5/8 in 01 F (5 to 22) 71 to 180
7
3/4 in 52 10, 18 series 52/31 71 to 180
(S)
101-2(B) 7/8 in 68 28 series 31 (S, R) N/G (26 to 49) 71 to 180
1 in 04 45 series 31 (S, R) 71 to 180
127-4(C) 1 in E2 45 (S, R) 45 to 180
127-4(C) 1 1/4 in 15 71 (S) 71 to 180 8
127-2(C) 1 1/2 in 24 100 (S) PGH 100 to 180

152-4(D) 1 1/2 in 96 100 (S) 100 to 180
1 3/4 in 17 140 (S) 140 to 180
466

Combination pumps A10VSO + A10VSO installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
When using combination pumps it is possible to have multiple, mutually independent circuits without the need for a splitter gear-
box.
When ordering combination pumps the model codes for the first and the second pump must be joined by a „+“.
Ordering example: A10VSO100DR/32R-VPB32UB8 + A10VSO71DRF/32R-VSB12N00
It is permissible to use a combination of two single pumps of the same size (tandempump), considering a mass acceleration force
of 10 g (98,1 m/s2) without an additional support bracket.
Size 45 71 100 140 180

Perm. mass moment of inertia
static Tm Nm 1370 3000 4500 4500 4500
dynamic at 10 g (98,1m/s2) Tm Nm 137 300 450 450 450
Weight m kg 30 47 69 73 78
Distance centre of gravity l mm 130 142 169 172 196
m1, m2, m3 Weight of pumps [kg]

m1 m2 m3
l1, l2, l3 Distance centre of gravity [mm]
l1
1
Tm = (m1 • l1 + m2 • l2 + m3 • l3) • [Nm]
l2 102
l3
467
Connector for solenoides

Without bidirectional suppressor diode ____________________ H If necessary, you can change the position of the connector by
type of protection as per DIN/EN 60529 _________________IP65 turning the solenoid.
The sealing ring in the screw cable fitting is suitable for line To do this, proceed as follows:
diameters of 4.5 mm to 10 mm. 1
1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid.
The line connector is not included in the delivery contents. To do this, turn the mounting nut (1) one revolution
This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request. counter-clockwise.
Bosch Rexroth material number: R902602623
Fixing screw M3 Cable fitting M16x1.5 3. Retighten the mounting nut of the solenoid.
Tightening torque: tightening torque: Tightening torque: 5+1 Nm. (size WAF26, 12-pt DIN 3124)
MA = 0.5 Nm MA = 1.5 - 2.5 Nm 2
65.4
(2)
(1)
3
Ø37
50
68.5
4
Equipment connector Line connector

as per DIN 43650 DIN EN 175301-803-A
M 16x1.5
5
PE PE
A A
1 2 1 2
6
Electronic controls 7
Control Electronics funktion Electronics Further information

VT2000 1) analog RE 29 904
Electric pressure control Controlled power outlet VT 11029 1);
analog RE 29741
VT 11030 1)
8
1) only 24V nomilal voltage
468
Notes
469
Notes
8
470
Installation notes
The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air Below-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is ins-
bled during commissioning and operation. This must also be talled outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
or "drive shaft downward", attention must be paid to a comple-
te filling and air bleeding since there is a risk, for example, a min 200 mm a min 200 mm
of dry running. F F
ht min ht min
The case drain fluid in the case interior must be directed to the 200 mm SB
200 mm SB
h min h min
reservoir via the highest case drain port (L1, L2, L3).
100 mm 100 mm
For combinations of multiple units, make sure that the respec- L
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of L L1
pressure differences at the drain ports of the units, the shared S
drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible S
L1
situation. If this is not possible, separate drain lines must be
laid if necessary.
tion.
a min 200 mm a min 200 mm
In all operating states, the suction line and case drain line F F
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level . ht min ht min
200 mm SB 200 mm SB
The permissible suction height hS is a result of the overall h min h min
pressure loss, but may not be greater than hS max = 800 mm. 100 mm 100 mm
The minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall
L1 S S
below 0.8 bar absolute during operation.
L
See the following examples 1 to 12. L1
L
1, 3 F S + L, L1 (F)
2, 4 F S + L, L1 (F)
Key, see page 43.
471
Installation notes
To prevent the axial piston unit from draining, a height diffe-
rence hES min of at least 25 mm is required in installation 9 1
10
position 6
Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm. a min 200 mm a min 200 mm
A check valve in the case drain line is only permissible in indivi-
dual cases. Consult us for approval.
L
ht min
SB
ht min
5 6 SB
L1 2
S
L
F F L1
hES min 25 mm S
L
100 mm
100 mm
h min
h min
L L1
S
S
L1
hs max hs max
800 mm 800 mm 11 12 3
ht min 200 mm ht min 200 mm SB a min 200 mm a min 200 mm

SB
h min 100 mm h min 100 mm
L1 S
ht min
ht min
S
7 8 L1 4
F
L L
F SB SB
100 mm
100 mm
L1 S S
h min
h min
L
L1
L
hs max hs max 5
800 mm 800 mm Installation position Air bleed Filling
ht min 200 mm SB ht min 200 mm SB 9, 11 L, L1 L, L1
h min 100 mm h min 100 mm 10, 12 L, L1 S + L, L1
S Filling / air bleeding

Installation position Air bleed Filling F Air bleed port 6
5, 7 F L, L1 (F) S Suction port
6, 8 F S + L, L1 (F) L, L1 Case drain port
ht min Minimum necessary immersion depth (200 mm)
hmin Minimum necessary spacing to reservoir base 7
(100 mm)
hES min
8
line.
472
General information
– The A10VSO pump is designed to be used in open circuit.
– Before operating the axial piston unit, please read the appropriate operating instructions thoroughly and completely.
If necessary, request these from Bosch Rexroth.
shift.
- The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must
- Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to
be provided in the hydraulic system.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer‘s instruction regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Fixing screws:
- Threaded plugs:
Ports Maximum permissible tigh-

Required tightening torque WAF hexagon socket of
tening torque
for the plugs MV the plugs
Standard Thread size for female threads MG max
DIN ISO 228 G 1/4 in 70 Nm – –
ISO 11926 7/16-20 UNF-2B 40 Nm 15 Nm 3/16 in
1 1/16-12 UNF-2B 360 Nm 147 Nm 9/16 in
DIN 3852 M14x1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M16x1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18x1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22x1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27x2 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
Axial Piston Units forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reprodu-
An den Kelterwiesen 14 ced or given to third parties without its consent.
Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Subject to change.
473

RE 92740/07.10 1/16
Axial Piston Variable Pump
A10VSNO
Data sheet
Series 32
Size 63
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for standard program 2 – Variable pump in axial piston swashplate design
Technical data 3 – The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displace-
ment
DG – Zweipunktverstellung direktgesteuert 7
– Hydrostatic unloading of the cradle bearings
DR – Pressure control 8
– Low noise level
DRG – Pressure control remotely operated 9
– Low pressure pulsations
DRS – Pressure and flow control 10
– High efficiency
– Compact design
– Excellent power to weight ratio
– Proven A10 rotary group technology
474
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG A10VSNO Series 32 | RE 92740/07.10

A10VSN O 63 / 32 — V B 12 N00
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 210 bar, maximum pressure 250 bar A10VSN
Type of operation
Size (NG)
03 Theoretical displacement Vg max in cm3 see table of values page 5 063
Control devices 063

Two point control directly operated ● DG
Pressure control ● DR
04 hydraulic remotely operated ● DRG
with flow control X-T closed
● DRS
hydraulic with flushing function
Series 063
05 Series 3, Index 2 ● 32

With view on drive shaft clockwise ● R
06 counter
● L
clockwise
Seals 063
07 FKM (Fluoro rubber) ● V
Drive shaft 063

Splined shaft for higher torques to SAE J744 ● R
08
Parallel keyed shaft to DIN 6885 ● P
Mounting flange
09 ISO 3019-2 – 4-bolt B
Ports for service lines 063

SAE flange on top and at the bottom, opposite,
● 12
Metric fixing threads
SAE flange on top and at the bottom, opposite,
10 ❍ 22U
Metric fixing thread, with universal through drive
Through drive1) 063

Without through drive ● N00
11
With through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange, closed with proper cover ❍ 00

1) For through drives and mounting options see RE 92714
475
RE 92740/07.10 | A10VSNO Series 32 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16
Technical data
Fluid Notes on the selction of hydraulic fluid
Prior to project design please observe the extensive informa- In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
tion on the selection of hydraulic fluids in our data sheets RE operating temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to
90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (ecologically acceptable fluids) the ambiet temperature.
and RE 90223 (HF-fluids) . The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the 1
When using HF- or ecologically acceptable fluids possible li- operating temperature range, the operating viscosity lies within
mitations on the technical data may be applicable, if necessary the optimum range (Qopt) (see shaded section of the selction di-
please consult us (when ordering please state the type of fluid agram). We recommend that the higher viscosity grade should
to be used in clear text). be selected in each case.
Operating viscosity range Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C the fluid tempe-

rature in the tank is 60 °C. In the optimum viscosity range (Qopt;
In order to obtain optimum efficiency and service life, we 2
shaded area) this corresponds to viscosity grades VG 46 or
recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating tempera- VG 68; VG 68 should be selected.
ture) be selected within the range
Important
The case drain temperature is influenced by pressure and
referred to the reservoir temperature (open circuit). speed and is typically higher than the tank temperature. Howe-
ver max. temperature at any point of the component may not
Limits of viscosity range
exceed 90 °C. 3
For extreme operating conditions the following limits apply:
If the above mentioned conditions cannot be kept due to
Qmin = 10 mm2/s extreme operating parameters or high ambient temperatures
short term (t d1 min) please consult us.
at max.permissible case drain temperature of 90 °C.
Filtration of fluid
Please note, that the max. case drain temperature of 90 °C
The finer the filtration, the better the achieved cleanliness of the
is also not exceeded in certain areas (eg. bearing area). The
fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston unit. 4
temperature in the bearing area is approx. 5 K higher than the
average case drain temperature. In order to guarantee a reliable function of the axial piston unit
a gravimetric evaluation of the fluid to determine the particle
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s
contamination and the cleanliness class to ISO 4406 is neces-
short term (t d 1 min)
sary. A cleanliness class of at least 20/18/15 is necessary.
on cold start
At very high fluid temperatures (90°C to maximum 115 °C) a
(tmin = p d30 bar, n d 1000 rpm, -25 °C)
cleanliness class of at least 19/17/14 to ISO 4406 is necessa-
At temperatures between -25 °C and -40 °C special mea- ry. 5
sures may be required for certain installation positions, please
If above mentioned cleanliness classes cannot be met please
contact us for further information.
consult us.
For detailed information on operation at very low temperatures
see RE 90300-03-B.
Selection diagram
6
2500-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
1600 1600
1000
600
400
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
200
10
2
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
100
60 7
40 36
Qopt.
20
16
10
8
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90°
tmin = -40 °C tmax = +90 °C
Fluid temperature range
476
Technical data
Pressure at outlet port (pressure port) B Nominal pressure pnom

Nominal pressure pnom __________________ 210 bar absolute pressure.
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 250 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax
Individual operating period ________________________ 2.0 ms The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum pressure
Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h within the individual operating period. The total of the individual
Minimum pressure(high pressure side) __________ 10 bar2) operating periods must not exceed the total operating period.
Rate of pressure change RA max _____________ 16000 bar/s Minimum pressure (in pump outlet)
Minimum pressure in the pump outlet side (port B) that is
pnom required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Pressure p
't Rate of pressure change RA

Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduc-
'p range.
t2
Time t Individual operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
To safeguard against over pressure pump safety blocks to RE Maximum pressure pmax
Nom. pressure pnom
25880 and RE 25890 for direct mounting onto the SAE flange
ports can be ordered separately.
Inlet pressure Min. pressure (high pressure side)

At 1800 rpm
Minimum suction pressure pabs min ___________ 0.8 bar absolute Time t
Maximum suction pressure pabs max ___________5 bar1) absolute Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn
Case drain pressure

1) Other values on request
(at port L, L1): 2) Lower pressure, depends on timeframe, please consult us.
Maximum 0.5 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S, how-
pL max abs _________________________________________ 2 bar1
477
Technical data
Tables of value (theoretical values, without efficiencies and tolerances: values rounded)
Size NG 63
Displacement Vg max cm3 63
Speed1)
1
maximum at Vg max no max rpm 1800
Flow
at no max and Vg max qvo max L/min 113
at nE = 1500 rpm qvE max L/min 94
Power
at no max, 'p = 210 bar Pmax kW 39 2
at nE = 1500 rpm Pmax kW 33
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 210 bar Tmax Nm 210
'p = 100 bar T Nm 100
Torsionsl stiffness Drive shaft P c Nm/rad 41232
Drive shaft R c Nm/rad 41025 3
Moment of inertia rotary group JTW kgm2 0.004
Case volume V L 1.0
Weight (without fluid fill) approx. m kg 30
1) The values are applicable for a pressure of 0,8 bar at suction port S and mineral hydraulic fluid.
4
Important
5
Vg • n • KV Vg = Geometr. displacement per revolution in cm3

Flow qV = [L/min]
1000 'p = Pressure differential in bar
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • S • Kmh KV = Volumetric efficiency
6
2S • T • n qV • 'p Kmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
Mechanical flow limitation

Versions with port plate 22 (optional through drive plate) are not available with mechanical flow limitation. The max. displacement
as stated in the order will be set to a fixed value . 7
Please state the desired Vg min or Vg max values in clear text.
8
478
Technical data
Size NG 63
Fq
Radial force, maximum at X/2 Fq max N 1000
x/2 x/2
X
Axial force, maximum Fax max N 1000

r Fax

Size NG 63
Torque, max. Tmax Nm 210
(at Vg max and 'p = 210 bar1))
Input torque with drive shaft maximum2)
P TE Nm 210
perm
DIN 6885 mm 25
R TE Nm 400
perm
SAE J744 (ANSI B92.1a-1996) in 1

Through drive torque, maximum
with drive shaft R TD Nm 365
perm

2) For drive shafts without radial load
T1 T2
TE
1. Pumpe
1. Pump 2. Pumpe
2. Pump
TD
479
DG – Zweipunktverstellung direktgesteuert
The pump can be set to a minimum swivel angle by connecting Schematic
an external control pressure to port X.
This will supply control fluid directly to the stroking piston; a
minimum pressure of pst t 50 bar is required.
X
The pump can only be switched between Vg max or Vg min. 1
Please note, that the required control pressure at port X is L B

directly dependent on the actual operating pressure pB in port
B. (see control pressure diagram).
2
The max. permissible control pressure amounts to pst = 120
bar.
Control pressure diagram
120
3
L1 S
Req. control press. pst
100
50
Port for
B Service line
[bar]
S Suction 4
0 50 70 140 210
Operating pressure pB [bar] L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged)
X Control pressure (plugged)
8
480
The DR-pressure control limits the maximum pressure at Schematic
the pump outlet within the pump‘s control range. The pump
therefore supplies only the amount of fluid as required by the
actuators. This maximum pressure level can be set steplessly at
the control valve.
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C) L B

210
Setting range1)
L1 S
35
Flow qv [L/min]
Port for
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system the B Service line
shown values in the pressure setting range are the maximum S Suction
permissible and may not be exceede.
L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged)
The valve is capable of higher settings.
Control data
Pressure rise, max
Size 63
'p bar 6
Control fluid consumption_____________ max. approx. 3 L/min
481

The DR-pressure control (see page 8) is overriding this DRG-
Schematic DRG
Not included in supply
valve spool. This relief valve is not included in the pump supply. 1
The differential pressure at the DRG-control spool is set as X
standard to20 bar. This results in a pilot oil flow to the relief
valve of approx. 1,5 L/min. If another setting is required (range
from 10-22 bar) please state in clear text.
As a separate relief valve we can recommend:
DBDH 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402 or 2
DBETR-SO 381 with orifice dia. 0,8 mm in P (electric)to L B
RE 29166.
The max. lenght of piping should not exceed 2 m.
Static characteristic 3
(at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C)
L1 S
Hysteresis and pressure rise'pmax
210
4
Setting range1)
Port for
B Service line
S Suction
L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged) 5
20 X Control pressure (plugged)
MB Measuring operating pressure (plugged)
Flow qv [L/min]
Control data 6
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system the Pressure rise, max
shown values in the pressure setting range are the maximum
permissible and may not be exceede. Size 63
The valve is capable of higher settings. 'p bar 6
Control fluid consumption____________ max. approx. 4.5 L/min 7
8
482
DRS – Pressure and flow control

In additon to the pressure control function (see page 8), the Schematic
pump flow may be varied by means of a differential pressure
over an orifice or valve spool installed in the service line to the
actuator. The pump flow is equal to the actual required flow by
the actuator, regardless of changing pressure levels. X

Note
The DRS-valve version has no connection between X and the
tank (pump housing).
Unloading the LS-pilot line must be possible in the valve
system. L B
Because of the flushing function sufficient unloading of the
Flow control at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50°C)
210
L1 S
Setting range1)
Port for
35 B Service line
S Suction
Flow qv [L/min] L, L1 Case drain fluid (L1 plugged)
X Control pressure (plugged)
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system the
shown values in the pressure setting range are the maximum
permissible and may not be exceede.
The valve is capable of higher settings.
Differential pressure 'p:
Static characteristic at variable speeds Standard setting: 14 to 22 bar.

If another setting is required, please state in clear text.
Unloading port X to tank (with outlet port B closed) results in
a zero stroke (standby) pressure which lies about 1 to 2 bar
qV max
higher than the 'p setting).
Flow qv [L/min]
Controller data
Data pressure control DR see page 8
Maximum flow deviation measured with drive speed
n = 1500 rpm.
qV min Size 63
Speed n [min-1] 'qv max L/min 1.8
Control fluid consumption DRF __ max. approx. 3 bis 4.5 L/min
Control fluid consumption DRS ________ max. approx. 3 L/min
483

Dimensions size 63 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
DRS Pressure and flow control
9 133
V .5 1
6.3 95.3 89
L X
ISO 3019/4 57.
5°
14
max. 110
90
X
-0.025
28 -0.2
10
40
0
113.2
Y 2
146
Ø125
78.5
90
L1 Valve mounting for 113.2
15.5 counter clockwise 146
3
45 rotation 93.5 129
184 146
224
W View Y
4
View V View W
26.2 B S
25
69.9
40
52.4
35.7
6
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size 1) Maximum pres- State

sure
[bar] 2)
B Service line (standard pressure SAE J518 1 in O
range) DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep 250
Fixing thread 7
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J518 1 1/2 in O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 20 deepf 5
L Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M 22 x 1.5; 14 deep 2 O 3)
L1 Case drain fluid DIN 38524) M 22 x 1.5; 14 deep 2 plugged 3)
X Load sensing pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 250 O
X Control pressure for DG control DIN 3852 G 1/4 in 250 O 8
fittings.
3) Depending on the installation postion, L or L1 must be connected
484

Dimensions size 63 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
DG - Two point control, directly operated DR - Pressure control
to mounting flange face Valve mounting for coun-

Valve mounting for coun-
ter clockwise rotation
ter clockwise rotation
173
max. 110
X
3
X
X 110 146
117
DRG - Pressure control, remotely operated
to mounting flange face

Valve mounting for counter
133 clockwise rotation
X
max. 110
X
40
129
146
Drive shaft
R Splined shaft 1 in 15T 16/32 DP1) P Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885
SAE J744 – 25-4 (B-B)
+ 0.3
42 0
1/4-20UNC-2B 3)
16 19
0.009
ø25 +- 0.004
5 6
M8
ø28 - 0.021
ø28 -0.021
28 -0.2
ø103
0
0
usable spline 29.5

lenght
45.9 52
1) ANSI B92.1a-1976, 30° pressure angle, flat base, flank centering, tolerance class 5
2) Thread in drive shaft „P“ to DIN 332.
485
Notes
8
486
Installation notes
General
The pump housing must be filled with fluid and deaerated during commissioning and operation. This is also to be observed, follow-
ing a longer standstill periode as the system may empty via the hydraulic lines.
Especially with the installation position „drive shaft upwards or drive shaft downwards“ attention must be paid to a complete filling
and deaeration, since there is a risk, that the bearings and shaft seal run dry and overheat therefore.
The highest of the case drain ports must be connected to tank with piping material for standard pressure rating suitable for the
port size. In order to obtain the lowest noise level, all connections (inlet, outlet, and case drain line) must be linked by flexible
members to the tank. Also, avoid above-tank installation.
In case of a combination pump with different case drain pressures make sure, that each pump has it‘s own case drain line to tank
In all operating conditions, the suction line and case drain line must flow into the tank below the minimum fluid level (ht min = 200
mm). The permissible suction height h is a result of the overall pressure loss, but may not be greater than hmax = 800 mm. Under
static and dynamic loading the suction pressure at port S may not be below pabs min = 0,8 bar absolute.
See the following examples 1 to 15. Recommended positions: 1 and 3.
Other installation positions are also possible, please consult us.
Mounting below the reservoir (standard)
Mounting below the reservoir means, that the pump is mounted below the minimum fluid level. The pump can be mounted next to
or below the reservoir.
1 2 3 4 5 min. 200 mm
min. 200 mm min. 200 mm min. 200 mm min. 200 mm
F F F F F
ht min ht min ht min ht min ht min
200 mm 200 mm SB 200 mm SB 200 mm SB 200 mm SB
h min SB h min h min h min h min
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
L
L1 S S L
X
L L1
S
S L
L1
L1
L S
L1
installation Air bleed Filling
position
1, 3 and 5 F S + L, L1 (F)
2 and 4 F S + L, L1 (F)
Installation above the reservoir
Installation above the reservoir means, that the pump is mounted above the minimum fluid level. A check valve in the case drain
line is only permissible in individual cases. Consult us for approval
6 7 F 8 9 10 F
F L
L
X
F F
L L1 L1 S S
S
S
L1 S
L
L1 hs max L1
hs max hs max L
800 mm 800 mm 800 mm
hs max hs max
800 mm 800 mm
ht min
ht min 200 mm SB ht min 200 mm SB ht min 200 mm SB ht min 200 mm SB 200 mm SB
h min 100 mm h min 100 mm h min 100 mm h min 100 mm h min 100 mm
min. 200 mm min. 200 mm min. 200 mm min. 200 mm min. 200 mm

position
6, 8 and 10 F L, L1 (F)
7 and 9 F S + L, L1 (F)
L/L1 = case drain port, F = air bleed or filling port, S = suction port, SB = Baffle, ht min = minimum permissible immersion depth,
hS max = maximum permissible suction height
487
Installation notes
Mounting inside the reservoir
Mounting inside the reservoir means, that the pump is mounted within the minimum fluid level.
11 min. 200 mm 12 min. 200 mm 13 min. 200 mm 14 min. 200 mm 15 min. 200 mm
L 1
X
L L1 S
ht min
ht min
ht min
ht min
SB S
ht min
SB SB
L1
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
S
L L1 S
L L
h min
h min
h min
L1
h min
h min
S SB SB L1
Installation Air bleed Filling 2

position
11, 13 und 15 L, L1 L, L1
12 und 14 L, L1 S + L, L1
L/L1 = case drain port, F = air bleed or filling port, S = suction port, SB = baffle, ht min = minimum permissible immersion depth, ht 3
max= maximum permissible suction height
8
488
General information
– The A10VSNO pump is designed to be used in open circuit.
– Project planning, assembly and commissioning of the axial piston unit require the involvement of qualified personnel
– Before operating the axial piston unit, read the appropriate operating instructions thoroughly and completely. If needed, request
these from Rexroth.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids. Take
appropriate safety measures (e. g. by wearing protective clothing).
shift.
– Pressure ports:
The ports and fixing threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must
– Pressure cut off and pressure control are not suitable for providing system protection against excessive pressures.A suitable
overall main line relief valve must be incorporated.
– The product is not approved as a component for the safety concept of a general machine according to DIN EN ISO 13849
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer‘s instructions regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings.
- Fixing screws:
For fixing screws according to DIN 13, we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230.
- Plugs:
For the metal plugs, supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of plugs MV apply.
For values, see the following table
Maximum permissible tigh-

Required tightening torque WAF hexagon socket of
Thread size of ports tening torque
for the plugs MV the plugs
for female threads MG max
G 1/4 in DIN 3852 70 Nm
7/16-20 UNF-2B ISO 11926 40 Nm 15 Nm 3/16 in
1 1/16-12 UNF-2B ISO 11926 360 Nm 147 Nm 9/16 in
M14x1,5 DIN 3852 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M16x1,5 DIN 3852 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18x1,5 DIN 3852 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22x1,5 DIN 3852 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27x2 DIN 3852 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21
Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.com/axial-piston-units
489
RE 92202/05.12 1/36
A7VO
Data sheet
Series 63
Size 28 to 160
Open circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for standard program 2 – Variable pump with axial tapered piston rotary group of bent-
axis design, for hydrostatic drives in open circuit
Technical data 4
– For use in mobile and stationary applications
LR – Power controller 9
– The flow is proportional to the drive speed and displacement.
DR – Pressure controller 12
– The flow can be infinitely varied by adjusting the bent axis.
HD – Proportional control hydraulic 15
– Wide selection of control devices
EP – Proportional control electric 17
– Compact, robust pump with long service life
490
2/36 Bosch Rexroth AG A7VO Series 63 | RE 92202/05.12

A7V O / 63 – V B 01
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Axial piston unit

01 Bent-axis design, variable, nominal pressure 350 bar, maximum pressure 400 bar A7V
Operating mode
Sizes (NG)
Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 7 28 55 80 107 160
03
Sizes 250, 355 and 500 See RE 92203
Control devices 28 55 80 107 160

Power controller LR
with pressure cut-off LRD
with stroke limiter negative control 'p = 25 bar – LRH1
with pressure cut-off and stroke limiter negative control 'p = 25 bar – LRDH1
Pressure controller DR
remote controlled DRG
with load sensing – DRS
04
Proportional control hydraulic positive control 'p = 10 bar HD1
'p = 25 bar HD2
with pressure cut-off, remote controlled positive control 'p = 10 bar HD1G
'p = 25 bar HD2G
Proportional control electric ,
positive control U = 24 V DC EP2
without manual override
with pressure cut-off, remote controlled positive control U = 24 V DC EP2G
Series
Directions of rotation 28 to 160

06
counter-clockwise L
Seals
Drive shafts 28 to 160

Splined shaft DIN 5480 Z
08
Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 P
Mounting flange
09 ISO 3019-2 – 4 hole B
Port plate for service lines

10 SAE flange port A and S at rear (fastening thread metric) 01
= Available – = Not available = Preferred program

491
RE 92202/05.12 | A7VO Series 63 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/36

A7V O / 63 – B 01
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Connector for solenoids (see page 33) 1

Without connector (without solenoid, only with hydraulic controls; without code)
11
DEUTSCH - molded connector, 2 pin – without suppressor diode1) P

Standard version (without code)
12
Special version -S
2

1) Other connectors on request
492
Technical data
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data The correct choise of hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of the
sheets RE 90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (environmentally operating temperature in relation to the ambient temperature:
acceptable hydraulic fluids), RE 90222 (HFD hydraulic fluids) in an open circuit the reservoir temperature.
and The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating vis-
RE 90223 (HFA, HFB, HFC hydraulic fluids) for detailed infor- cosity in the operating temperature range is within the optimum
mation regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid and application range (Qopt see the shaded area of the selection diagram). We
conditions. recommended that the higher viscosity class be selected in
The variable pump A7VO is not suitable for operation with each case.
HFA hydraulic fluid. If HFB, HFC and HFD or environmentally Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C, an operating tem-
acceptable hydraulic fluids are used, the limitations regarding perature of 60 °C is set in the circuit. In the optimum operating
technical data or other seals must be observed. viscosity range (Qopt, shaded area), this corresponds to the
viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68; to be selected: VG 68.
Selection diagram
-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100° Note
1600 1600 The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure and
1000
600 speed, can be higher than the reservoir temperature. At no
115 °C. The temperature difference specified below is to be
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 46
VG 2
200
10
2
taken into account when determining the viscosity in the bear-

0
100
ing.
60
40 36 If the above conditions cannot be maintained due to extreme
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
Qopt operating parameters, we recommend flushing the case at

20 port U.
16
10
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115°
Temperature t [°C]
tmin = -40 °C Hydraulic fluid temperature range tmax = +115 °C

Transport and storage Tmin t –50 °C factory preservation: up to 12 months with standard,
(Cold) start-up1) Qmax = 1600 TSt t –40 °C t d 3 min, without load (p d 50 bar), n d 1000 rpm
Permissible temperature difference 'T d 25 K between axial piston unit and hydraulic fluid
Warm-up phase Q < 1600 to 400 T = –40 °C to –25 °C at p d 0.7 • pnom, n d 0.5 • nnom and t d 15 min
Operating phase
Temperature difference 'T = approx. 12 K between hydraulic fluid in the bearing and at port R1/R2.
The bearing temperature can be reduced by flushing
via port U.
103 °C measured at port R1/R2
Continuous operation Q = 400 to 10 T = –25 °C to +90 °C measured at port R1/R2,
Qopt = 36 to 16 no restrictions within the permissible data
Short-term operation Qmin t 7 Tmax = +103 °C measured at port R1/R2, t < 3 min, p < 0.3 • pnom
1) At temperatures below –25°C, an NBR shaft seal is required (permissible temperature range: –40 °C to +90 °C).
493
Technical data
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid Shaft seal
Finer filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic
Permissible pressure loading
fluid, which increases the service life of the axial piston unit.
The service life of the shaft seal is influenced by the speed of
To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit, a gra-
the axial piston unit and the case drain pressure (case pres- 1
vimetric analysis of the hydraulic fluid is necessary to determine
sure). The mean differential pressure of 2 bar between the
case and the ambient pressure may not be enduringly exceed-
ed at normal operating temperature. For a higher differential
least 20/18/15 is to be maintained.
pressure at reduced speed, see diagram. Momentary pressure
At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum spikes (t < 0.1 s) of up to 10 bar are permitted. The service life
115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according to of the shaft seal decreases with an increase in the frequency of
ISO 4406 is necessary. pressure spikes. 2
If the above classes cannot be achieved, please contact us. The case pressure must be equal to or higher than the ambient
pressure.
Case drain fluid Speed n [rpm]
5
The case drain chamber is connected to the suction chamber.
NG28

A case drain line from the case to the reservoir is not required
(both ports "R" are plugged). 4
3
For versions with pressure controller or pressure cut-off, a case NG55
drain line for discharge from port T1 to the reservoir is abso- 3
lutely essential. NG107 NG80
2
Direction of flow NG160
Direction of rotation, view on drive shaft 1 4
clockwise counter clockwise
S to B S to A 0
0 2000 4000 6000
These values are valid for an ambient pressure pabs = 1 bar.
Temperature range
The FKM shaft seal may be used for case drain temperatures
5
from -25 °C to +115 °C.
Note
State NBR shaft seal in plain text when ordering. Please con-
tact us.
6
8
494
Technical data
(Operating with mineral oil) Nominal pressure pnom
Pressure at service line port A pressure.
Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 350 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 400 bar absolute The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operat-
Single operating period ____________________________ 10 s ing pressure within the single operating period. The sum of the
Total operating period at nnom ______________________ 300 h single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
period.
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) ___ 10 bar absolute
Rate of pressure change RA max _____________ 16000 bar/s Minimum pressure at the high-pressure side (A or B) which is
pnom
Minimum pressure (Inlet)
Δt Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) which is required in
order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum
Pressure p
pressure is dependent on the speed and displacement of the

Δp axial piston unit (see diagram on page 7).
Maximum permissible rate of pressure rise and reduction dur-
ing a pressure change over the entire pressure range.
Time t
t2
Pressure at suction port S (Inlet) Single operating period t1 tn
Minimum pressure pS min _________________ 0.8 bar absolute
Maximum pressure pS max ___________________ 2 bar absolute Maximum pressure pmax
Note
Pressure p
Values for other hydraulic fluids, please contact us.
Time t
Please contact us if these conditions cannot be satisfied.
495
Technical data
Size NG 28 55 80 107 160
Displacement geometric, per revolution Vg max cm3 28.1 54.8 80 107 160
Speed maximum1) at Vg max nnom rpm 3150 2500 2240 2150 1900
1
at Vg < 0.74 • Vg max2) nmax1 rpm 4250 3400 3000 2900 2560
Speed maximum2) nmax2 rpm 4750 3750 3350 3200 2850
Flow at nnom and Vg max qV L/min 89 137 179 230 304
Power at nnom, Vg max and 'p = 350 bar P kW 52 80 105 134 177
Torque at Vg max and 'p = 350 bar T Nm 156 305 446 596 891
Rotary stiffness Vg max to Vg/2 cmin Nm/rad 5546 10594 15911 21469 36073 2
Vg/2 to 0 (interpolated) cmax Nm/rad 16541 32103 48971 67666 104622
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kgm2 0.0042 0.0042 0.0080 0.0127 0.0253
Maximum angular acceleration D rad/s2 35900 31600 24200 19200 15300
Case volume V L 0.5 0.75 1.2 1.5 2.4
Mass approx. m kg 17 25 40 49 71
3
1) The values are valid:
- at an absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at suction port S
- for the optimum viscosity range from Qopt = 36 to 16 mm2/s
- with hydraulic fluid based on mineral oils
2) Maximum speed (limiting speed) with increased inlet pressure pabs at the suction port S and Vg < Vg max,
see the following diagram.
1.5 2.3
4
1.4 2.0
1.9
1.8
1.3 1.7
Speed n / nnom
1.6
1.2 1.5
1.4
1.3
1.1 1.2
1.1 5
1.0 1.0
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
6
Note
Operation above the maximum values or below the minimum values may result in a loss of function, a reduced service life or in the
destruction of the axial piston unit. Other permissible limit values, with respect to speed variation, reduced angular acceleration as
a function of the frequency and the permissible start up angular acceleration (lower than the maximum angular acceleration) can
be found in data sheet RE 90261.
Determining the operating characteristies 7
Vg • n • K v
Flow qv = [L/min] Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3
1000
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • S • Kmh Kv = Volumetric efficiency 8

2S•T•n qv • 'p
Power P = = [kW] Kt = Total efficiency (Kt = Kv• Kmh)
60000 600 • Kt
496
Technical data
Size NG 28 55 80 107 160
Drive shaft Ø mm 25 30 35 40 45
Maximum radial Fq max N 5696 9280 11657 13580 18062
Fq
force
at distance a a mm 12.5 15 17.5 20 22.5
a
(from shaft collar)
Maximum axial + Fax max N 315 500 710 900 1120
Fax +
–
force1) – Fax max N 0 0 0 0 0
Permissible axial force per bar
±Fax per /bar N/bar 4.6 7.5 9.6 11.3 15.1
of operating pressure
1) Maximum permissible axial force during standstill or when the axial piston unit is operating in non-pressurized condition.
Note
Influence of the direction of the permissible axial force:
Effect of radial force Fq on the service life of bearings

By selecting a suitable direction of radial force Fq, the load on the bearings, caused by the internal rotary group forces can be
reduced, thus optimizing the service life of the bearings. Recommended position of mating gear is dependent on direction of rota-
tion. Example:
Toothed gear drive V-belt drive
o Jop =
= 45 t 45 0o Jo
t
J op o =7 pt =7
t 0
J op
o
Clockwise Counter-clockwise Clockwise

direction of rotation direction of rotation direction of rotation
Pressure at port B Pressure at port A Pressure at port B
497
LR – Power controller
The power controller regulates the displacement of the pump Characteristic LR
depending on the operating pressure so that a given drive
power is not exceeded at constant drive speed.

pB • Vg = constant
pB = operating pressure; Vg = displacement 1
220 bar
The precise control with a hyperbolic control characteristic,
provides an optimum utilization of available power.
The operating pressure acts on a rocker via a measuring
piston. An externally adjustable spring force counteracts this, 50 bar
it determines the power setting.
2
If the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the Vg min Displacement Vg max
control valve is actuated by the rocker, the pump swivels back
(direction Vg min). The lever length at the rocker is shortened
and the operating pressure can increase at the same rate as Schematic LR
the displacement decreases without the drive powers being
exceeded (pB • Vg = constant).
When depressurized, the pump is swiveled to its initial position 3
Vg max by a return spring.
Setting range for beginning of control _________ 50 to 220 bar U R1
B(A)
The hydraulic output power (characteristic LR) is influenced by
the efficiency of the pump. A1
– Drive power P in kW 4

– Maximum flow qv max in L/min
Vg min
After clarifying the details a power diagram can be created by
our computer. Vg max
X3
5
T1
S
R2
M1
8
498
LRD – Power controller with pressure cut-off Characteristic LRD
The pressure cut-off corresponds to a pressure control which

adjusts the pump displacement back to Vg min, when the pres- max
350
sure setting is reached.

This function overrides the power control, i. e. below the preset
pressure value, the power function is effective.
The pressure cut-off is preset to a specified value at the
factory. 200
min
Setting range for pressure cut-off ___________ 200 to 350 bar
Please state the pressure cut-off setting in plain text when
ordering.
Note
– The pressure setting for the pressure cut-off must be at
least a factor of 5 higher than the beginning of control of the
power control. Vg min Displacement Vg max
Example: Beginning of control of the power controller:
50 bar Schematic LRD
Minimum setting for pressure cut-off:
5 • 50 = 250 bar
Higher settings for pressure cut-off are always possible.
– On versions with pressure cut-off, a case drain line from port
T1 to the reservoir is required.
For a plugged case drain port the allowable actuated time for U R1
pressure cut-off is d 2 min for treservoir d 50 °C. B(A)
– Any pressure-relief valve included in the system to limit the A1

maximum pressure must be set to a cracking pressure at
least 20 bar above the pressure cut-off setting.
Vg min
Vg max
X3
T1
S
R2
M1
499
LR... – Power controller with stroke limiter Schematic LRH1
The hydraulic stroke limiter, the displacement of the pump X1

can be continuously varied or limited over the entire allowable
range.The displacement is set proportionally by the pilot pres-
sure pSt (maximum 40 bar) applied at port X1. 1
The power controller overrides the hydraulic stroke limiter, i. e.
Y3
below the hyperbolic power characteristic, the displacement U R1
is controlled by the pilot pressure.When exceeding the power B(A)
characteristic with a set flow or operating pressure, the power
control overrides and reduces the displacement following the A1
hyperbolic characteristic.
2
A control pressure of 40 bar is required to swivel the pump
from its initial position Vg max to Vg min.
sure or the external control pressure applied to port Y3. Vg min
To ensure functioning of the stroke limiter even at low operat- Vg max
ing pressure < 40 bar, port Y3 must be supplied with external X3
control pressure of approx. 40 bar. 3
T1
LRH1 – Hydraulic stroke limiter S
(negative control) R2
Control from Vg max to Vg min M1
With increasing pilot pressure the pump swivels to a smaller Schematic LRDH1
4
displacement. X1
Beginning of control (at Vg max), adjustable ________4 to 15 bar
Please state the beginning of control in plain text when
ordering.
Initial position without control signal (pilot pressure): Vg max Y3
U R1
B(A) 5
Characteristic LRH1
Pilot pressure increase (Vg max – Vg min) __________'p = 25 bar A1
40
35
30
6
25
Vg min
20
Vg max
15 X3
T1
10
4 S 7
R2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 M1
8
500
DR – Pressure controller
The pressure controller limits the maximum pressure at the Schematic DR
pump outlet within the control range of the pump. The variable
pump only delivers as much hydraulic fluid as the consumers
actually need. If the operating pressure exceeds the pressure
setpoint set at the integrated pressure valve, the pump will
regulate to a smaller displacement to reduce the control devia-
tion. U R1
In a non-pressurized state, the pump is swiveled to its initial B(A)
position to Vg max by a return spring.
A1
Setting range for pressure control ____________ 50 to 350 bar
Please state the pressure control setting in plain text when
ordering.
Note
– On versions with DR controller, a case drain line from port T1
Vg min
to the reservoir is essential.
Vg max
– Any pressure-relief valve included in the system to limit the X3
maximum pressure must be set to a cracking pressure at T1
least 20 bar above the controller setting.
Characteristic DR S
R2
max. 10 bar
M1
max
350
Zero stroke operation
The standard version is designed for intermittent, constant-

pressure operation. Short-term (< 1 min), zero-stroke operation
is permissible up to an operating pressure pmax = 315 bar with
reservoir temperature d 50 °C.
In the case of longer zero-stroke operation, the bearings should
be flushed by way of the flushing port U.
Flow port
50
min U R1
T1
qv min Flow rate qv [L/min] qv max

S
R2
Flushing flow (Recommended)

NG 28 55 80 107 160
qv flush L/min 3 4 6 8 12
Temperature of the flushing fluid d reservoir temperature

501
DRG – Pressure controller remotely controlled Schematic DRG
A separate sequence valve with port plate provides the pres- 1)

sure control functionality. The valve is mounted away from the
pump, whereby the length of the line should not exceed 5 m.
The valve is supplied with high pressure from port A1 of the 2) 1
pump. The control power of the valve is returned to the pump P A T
U R1
via port X3 which retards the pump down to Vg min. Care should
be taken that the ports T on the sequence valve and T1 on the A
pump are connected to the reservoir (cooler). A1
Setting range for pressure control ____________50 to 315 bar
Please state the pressure control setting in plain text when 2
ordering.
Note
– On versions with DRG controller, a case drain line from port Vg min
T1 to the reservoir is essential.
Vg max X3
– Any pressure-relief valve included in the system to limit the
T1
least 20 bar above the controller setting. 3
S
Sequence valve and port plate must be ordered separately.
Sequence valve (1): DZ5DP2-1X/315YMSO21 R2
M1
(Mat.No. R900495604)
Port plate (2): G 115/1 (Mat.No. R900424379) Positions (1) and (2) are not included in the delivery contents
for the pump.
Characteristic DRG 4
max. 10 bar
max
315
50
min 6
qv min Flow qv [L/min] qv max
8
502
DRS – Pressure controller with load sensing Characteristic DRS
The load sensing controller is a flow control option that oper-
max. 10 bar
ates as a function of the load pressure to regulate the pump max
350
displacement to match the consumer flow requirement.

The flow of the pump depends here on the cross section of
the external sensing orifice (1) fitted between the pump and
the consumer. Below the setting for the pressure control and
within the control range of the pump, the flow is independent
of load pressure.
The sensing orifice is usually a separately mounted load-
sensing directional valve (control block). The position of the
directional valve piston determines the opening cross section
of the sensing orifice and thus the flow of the pump. 50
min
The load sensing controller compares pressure before and af-
ter the sensing orifice and keeps the pressure drop (differential
pressure 'p) and with it the pump flow constant. qv min Flow qv [L/min] qv max
If the differential pressure 'p at the sensing orifice increases,
the pump is swivelled back (towards Vg min) and if the differen- Schematic DRS
tial pressure 'p decreases, the pump is swivelled out (towards
Vg max) until equilibrium is at the sensing orifice is restored.
'psensing orifice = ppump – pconsumer
Setting range for 'p _________________________14 to 25 bar
X4
Standard setting _________________________________18 bar U R1
(1)
A
Please state the 'p setting in plain text when ordering.
The stand-by pressure during zero-stroke operation (sensing A1
orifice closed) is slightly above the 'p setting.
Note
On versions with DRS controller, a case drain line from port T1
to the reservoir is essential.
The pressure controller overrides the load sensing controller, Vg min
i. e. the load sensing function operates below the set pressure.
Vg max
X3
T1
R2 M1
(1) The sensing orifice (control block) is not included in the

delivery contents.
503
HD – Proportional control hydraulic

The proportional hydraulic control provides infinite setting of Schematic HD
the displacement, proportional to the pilot pressure applied to
port X1. U R1 M1
B(A)
Maximum permissible pilot pressure pSt = 40 bar
A1 1
Adjustment from Vg min to Vg max (positive control) T1
Vg min
With increasing pilot pressure the pump swivels to a higher X3
Vg max
displacement.
Beginning of control (at Vg min), adjustable ______ 4 to 15 bar
Please state the beginning of control in plain text when
ordering.
2
from its initial position Vg min to Vg max.
sure or the external control pressure applied to port Y3.
S
In order to ensure control function even at low operating R2
pressures < 40 bar, port Y3 must be supplied with an external Y3 3
control pressure of approx. 40 bar.
Characteristic HD1 positive control

Control pressure increase Vg min to Vg max _______ 'p = 10 bar X1
40
35 4
Pilot pressure ppilot [bar]
Note
30
25 device.
20 The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal
10 the control will no longer respond correctly to the operator's 5
4 commands.
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 ditional safety measures, in order to bring the driven actuator
Displacement Vg / Vg max into a controlled and safe position (e. g. - immediate stop).
Characteristic HD2 positive control 6
Control pressure increase Vg min to Vg max _______ 'p = 25 bar

40
35
30
7
25
20
15
10
4
8
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
504
HD – Proportional control hydraulic

HD.G – Hydraulic control Schematic HD.G
with pressure cut-off, remotely controlled 1)
A separate sequence valve with port plate provides the pres-
sure cut-off functionality. The valve is mounted away from the
pump, whereby the length of the line should not exceed 5 m. 2)
The valve is supplied with high pressure from port A1 of the U R1 M1 P A T
pump. By way of port X3 the control power of the pump is B(A)
transmitted to the valve and into the reservoir at port A of the A1
port plate of the sequence valve whereby the pump is retarded
to Vg min, if the target pressure value is exceeded. Vg min T1
X3
Setting range for pressure cut-off _____________50 to 315 bar Vg max
Please state the pressure cut-off setting in plain text when

ordering.
Note
– Port A of the sequence valve must be connected to the
reservoir (cooler).
– Any pressure-relief valve included in the system to limit the
least 20 bar above the controller setting. S
Sequence valve and port plate must be ordered separately. R2
Y3
Sequence valve (1): DZ5DP2-1X/315XYMSO20
(Mat.No. R900490554)
Port plate (2): G 115/1 (Mat.No. R900424379)
X1
Characteristic HD.G positive control
Positions (1) and (2) are not included in the delivery contents
max. 10 bar
for the pump.

max
315
50
min

505
EP – Proportional control electric

The proportional electric control provides infinite adjustment of Schematic EP2
the displacement, proportional to the control current applied to
the solenoid. U R1 M1
B(A)
Adjustment from Vg min to Vg max (positive control)
A1
With increasing control current the pump swivels to a higher 1
Vg min T1
displacement. X3
Vg max
from its initial position Vg min to Vg max.
sure or the external control pressure applied to port Y3.
2
In order to ensure control function even at low operating
pressures < 40 bar, port Y3 must be supplied with an external
control pressure of approx. 40 bar.
Characteristic EP2 positive control

S
800 R2
Y3
700 3
600
500
400
300 EP2G – Electric control
200 with pressure cut-off, remotely controlled 4
100 See HD.G
Note
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
device.
Technical data, solenoid The controller can stick in an undefined position by internal 5
EP2 contamination (contaminated hydraulic fluid, abrasion or
Voltage 24 V (±20 %) the control will no longer respond correctly to the operator's
Control current commands.
Beginning of control 200 mA Check whether the application on your machine requires ad-
End of control 600 mA ditional safety measures, in order to bring the driven actuator
into a controlled and safe position (e. g. - immediate stop). 6
Duty cycle 100 %
Type of protection see connector design page 33
The following electronic controllers and amplifiers are available
7
for controlling the proportional solenoids:
– BODAS controller RC
Series 20 _________________________________ RE 95200
Series 21__________________________________ RE 95201
Series 22 _________________________________ RE 95202
Series 30 _______________________ RE 95203, RE 95204
and application software
8
– Analog amplifier RA _________________________ RE 95230
Further information can also be found on the Internet at
www.boschrexroth.com/mobile-electronics
506

Note: All versions of the controller are illustrated for clockwise direction of rotation (View Y).
215
209 (A1)
207
16 T1 A1
261) U R1 45°
45°
X3
92
ø100 -0.022
33
11
20
ø62
118
5
29
12
18
'
30
Y
°
12
119
118
7
R2
13.4 max
25 198
Flange 209 (X3)
ISO 3019-2 View Y
clockwise
direction of rotation
View Y 71 79
counter-clockwise 49 60
direction of rotation 52
T1 X3 X3 T1
A1 A1
S S
LR LR
69.9
50.8
38
19
24
A B
23.8 35.7
49
108.5
1) To shaft collar
507

Drive shafts
W25x1.25x18x9g DIN 6885, AS8x7x40
1
M8 x 1.251)2)
19
M8 x 1.251)2)
19
ø25+0.002
+0.015
6
6 Key width 8
ø35
ø35
28
2
28
50
43
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size2) Maximum State6)
3
pressure [bar]3)
A Service line (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 3/4 in 400 O
S Suction line (standard series) SAE J5184) 1 1/2 in 2 O
Air bleed DIN 38525) M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 2 X 4
R1, R2
A1 Measuring high pressure DIN 38525) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
T1 Pilot fluid drain DIN 38525) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
T1 Pilot fluid drain (only DR, ..D..) DIN 38525) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 O
X3 Override DIN 38525) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
Y3 External pilot pressure DIN 38525) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 40 X 5
X1 Pilot pressure DIN 38525) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 40 O
M1 Measuring control pressure DIN 38525) M12 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
fittings. 6
8
508

LRD
Power controller with pressure cut-off
D 236
124
LR
108.5
DR/DRG
Pressure controller / pressure controller remotely controlled
DR 236
DRG
132 (DR)
92 (DRG)
HD1, HD2/HD1G, HD2G EP2/EP2G

Proportional control hydraulic, positive control Proportional control electric, positive control
and variants with pressure cut-off, remotely controlled and variants with pressure cut-off, remotely controlled
216 216
85
85
76 (X3)
76 (X3)
78 (A1)
78 (A1)
153
153
170
199
A1 X3 A1 X3
264
X3 A1 X3 A1
Y3 Y3
X1
Y3
4.5 15 155 (X1) Y3
49 159 (Y3) X1
187 (A1) 49 15 159 (Y3)
188 (X3) 187 (A1)
188 (X3)
509

1
262
241 (T1)
232
20
321)
45° 45°
U R1 T1 2
A1
140
X3
ø125 -0.025
13.5
36
35
150
ø70
12
35
0
16
0'
3
3
Y
12°
142 150
7.5 R2
14.6 max
31 241 (A1) 4
Flange 242 (X3)
ISO 3019-2
View Y
clockwise
View Y 5
57 62
LR LR
12
T1 A1 A1 T1
6
S X3 X3 S
50.8
77.8
49
19
32
7
A B
23.8 42.9
49 8
100
1) To shaft collar
510

Drive shafts
W30x2x14x9g DIN 6885, AS8x7x50
M12 x 1.751)2)
M12 x 1.751)2)
28 28
ø30+0.002
+0.015
9.5 9.5 Key width 8
ø45
ø45
33
27 60
35
Ports
pressure [bar]3)
A Service line (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 3/4 in 400 O
S Suction line (standard series) SAE J5184) 2 in 2 O
Fastening thread DIN 13 M12 x 1.75; 20 deep2)
R1, R2 Air bleed DIN 38525) M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 2 X
Y3 External pilot pressure DIN 38525) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 40 X
X4 Load pressure DIN 38525) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 O
fittings.
511

LRD LRDH1
Power controller with pressure cut-off Power controller with pressure cut-off and stroke limiter
262
12 257 (X1)
D 1
252 (Y3)
X1 D X1
Y3 Y3
128
170
LR
127
105
LR
2
119
119
3
DR/DRG DRS
Pressure controller / pressure controller remotely controlled Pressure controller with load sensing
6 300
DR X4 DR 238
DRG X4
135 (DR)
4
114 (DRG)
151
141
S

6
256 256 100
100
82
7
101
82
101
170
170
192
221
A1 X3
286
A1 X3
X3 Y3 A1
X3 Y3 A1
X1
8
12 12 186 (X1) Y3
Y3
57 190 (Y3) X1 12 12 190 (Y3)
209 (A1) 57 209 (A1)
221 (X3) 221 (X3)
512

287
270 (T1)
253
23
45° 45°
321)
U R1 T1
A1
144
X3
13.5
165
ø140 -0.025
40
38
0
ø83
18
17
37
30'
12°
Y
157
165
7.5 R2
14.6 max
31 265 (X3)
Flange 270 (A1)
ISO 3019-2 View Y
clockwise
View Y 80 102
direction of rotation 22 64
LR LR
T1 A1 A1 T1
S X3 X3 S
88.9
57.2
62
25
34
A B
27.8 50.8
57
111
1) To shaft collar
513

Drive shafts
W35x2x16x9g DIN 6885, AS10x8x56
1
M12 x 1.751)2)
28
M12 x 1.751)2)
28
ø35+0.002
+0.018
9.5
9.5 Key width 10
ø50
ø50
38
2
32
70
40
Ports
3
pressure [bar]3)
A Service line (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 1 in 400 O
R1, R2
fittings.
8
514

LRD LRDH1
290
14 284 (X1)
D 279 (Y3)
X1 D X1
Y3 Y3
132
182
LR
138
116
LR
130
130
DR/DRG DRS
6 327
DR X4 DR 265 X4
DRG
125 (DRG)
139 (DR)
161
151
S

287 287
114
114
92
92
113
113
187
209
187
240
A1 X3 A1 X3
305
X3 Y3 A1 X3 Y3 A1
X1
22 14 207 (X1) Y3 Y3
62 212 (Y3) X1
237 (A1) 22 14 212 (Y3)
241 (X3) 62 237 (A1)
241 (X3)
515

307 1
286 (T1)
272
25
45° 45°
401)
U R1
A1 2
150
X3
17.5
ø160 -0.025
46
37
190
ø90
18
41
0
30'
20
12°
Y 3
170
190
R2
7.5
14.6 max
39 284 (X3)
4
Flange 289 (A1)
ISO 3019-2
View Y
clockwise
View Y 88 105
counter-clockwise 5
70 74
direction of rotation 22 72
LR LR
T1 T1
A1 A1
S X3 S 6
X3
88.9
57.2
25
62
36
A B 7
27.8 50.8
55
115 8
1) To shaft collar
516

Drive shafts
Z Splined shaft, DIN 5480 P Parallel keyed shaft
W40x2x18x9g DIN 6885, AS12x8x63
M12 x 1.751)2)
28
M12 x 1.751)2)
28
ø40+0.002
+0.018
9.5
9.5 Key width 12
ø60
43
ø60
37
80
45
Ports
pressure [bar]3)
A Service line (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 1 in 400 O
R1, R2 Air bleed DIN 38525) M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 2 X
Y3 External pilot pressure DIN 38525) M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 40 X
fittings.
517

LRD LRDH1
309
18 300 (X1)
D 1
295 (Y3)
X1 D X1
Y3 Y3
138
189
LR
144
122
LR
2
134
134
3
DR/DRG DRS
352
DR
X4 DR 290 X4
DRG
132 (DRG)
145 (DR)
167
154
S

6
306
306
122
122
7
100
119
100
119
199
199
221
252
A1 X3
316
A1 X3 Y3 A1
X3 Y3 A1 X3
X1
Y3 8
22 18 220 (X1) Y3
70 225 (Y3) X1
22 18 225 (Y3)
254 (A1) 70 254 (A1)
259 (X3) 259 (X3)
518

349
328 (T1)
310
28 45°
45°
401)
U R1 T1
A1
160
X3
17.5
ø180 -0.025
55
46
210
ø100
27
47 22
4
0'
12°3
193 Y
210
7.5
R2
14.9 max
39
327 (X3)
Flange 331 (A1)
ISO 3019-2
View Y
clockwise
View Y 100 126

counter-clockwise
78 84
direction of rotation LR
LR 22
T1 A1 A1 T1
S X3 X3 S
106.4
66.7
32
75
40
A B
31.8 61.9
66
1) To shaft collar
519

Drive shafts
W45x2x21x9g DIN 6885, AS14x9x70
1
36
M16 x 21)2)
36
ø45+0.002
+0.018
12
M16 x 21)2)
12 Key width 14
ø70
48.5
ø70
2
42
50 90
Ports
3
pressure [bar]3)
A Service line (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 1 1/4 in 400 O
S Suction line (standard series) SAE J5184) 3 in 2 O
R1, R2
fittings.
8
520

LRD LRDH1
351
19 340 (X1)
D
334 (Y3)
X1 D X1
Y3
Y3
150
207
LR
162
140
LR
145
145
DR/DRG DRS
392
DR X4 DR 329 X4
DRG
150 (DRG)
155 (DR)
185
172
S

348 348
137
137
120
120
139
139
225
225
248
278
343
A1 X3 A1 X3
X3 Y3 A1 X3 Y3 A1
X1
22 19 249 (X1) Y3 Y3
78 253 (Y3) X1
290 (A1) 22 19 253 (Y3)
294 (X3) 78 290 (A1)
294 (X3)
521

Connector for solenoids installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Molded, 2-pin, without bidirectional suppressor diode
There is the following type of protection with mounted mating
connector:
IP67 ___________________________________DIN/EN 60529 1
and IP69K _______________________________ DIN 40050-9
Circuit symbol
Mating connector
Bosch Rexroth Mat. No. R902601804
Consisting of: DT designation 3
– 1 housing ____________________________ DT06-2S-EP04

– 1 wedge ______________________________________ W2S
– 2 sockets ___________________________ 0462-201-16141
The mating connector is not included in the delivery contents.
This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request. 4
36.7
(2)
(1)
36.7
5
ø37
50
68.5

6
If necessary, you can change the connector orientation by turn-
ing the solenoid housing.
To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this, turn
the mounting nut (1) one turn counter-clockwise.
2. Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired orientation. 7
3. Retighten the mounting nut. Tightening torque: 5+1 Nm.
(WAF26, 12-sided DIN 3124)
On delivery, the connector orientation may differ from that
8
522
During commissioning and operation, the axial piston unit Below-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is
must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled. This must also installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
Particularly in the installation position "drive shaft upwards"
filling and air bleeding must be carried out completely as there SB SB
is, for example, a danger of dry running. ht min ht min
hmin
The case drain chamber is internally connected to the suction U R1 amin hmin amin
R2
chamber. A case drain line from the case to the reservoir is not S
required. Exception: for operation with pressure controller or T1 1)
pressure cut-off, a case drain line from port T1 to the reservoir
is required. S T11)
R2 R1 U
lines using elastic elements.
3 4
In all operating conditions, the suction and case drain lines
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The SB SB
minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall below ht min ht min
0.8 bar absolute during operation.
amin hmin hmin amin
T11)
Installation position S R2
U
See the following examples 1 to 4. R1
Further installation positions are possible upon request. R1
Recommended installation position: 1 and 2. U R2
Note S T11)
Axial piston units with electric components (e.g. electric con-
trols, sensors) must not be installed in a reservoir below the Installation
Air bleed Filling
fluid level. position
1 R1 S
2 R2 S
3 T1 S
4 U S
R1, R2 Air bleed port

U Bearing flushing
S Suction port
T1 Drain port
hmin Minimum required spacing to reservoir bottom
(100 mm)
space between the suction line and the case drain
line. This prevents the heated, return flow from being
1) Only for versions with pressure controller or pressure cut-off,
a case drain line form port T1 to the resorvoir is essential.
523
Notice
8
524
– The pump A7VO is designed to be used in open circuit. – Pressure cut-off and pressure controller do not provide secu-
rity against pressure overload. A pressure-relief valve is to be
– The project planning, installation and commissioning of the
axial piston unit requires the involvement of qualified person-
nel. – The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to.
– Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corre- – The product is not approved as a component for the safety
sponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly. If concept of a general machine according to ISO 13849.
necessary, these can be requested from Bosch Rexroth.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on
- Fittings:
the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids. Take
Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the
appropriate safety measures (e. g. by wearing protective
tightening torques of the fittings used.
clothing).
- Mounting bolts:
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston
For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to
unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteris-
DIN 13 or thread according to ASME B1.1, we recommend
tic may shift.
checking the tightening torque in individual cases in accor-
– Service line ports: dance with VDI 2230.
- The ports and fastening threads are designed for the speci- - Female threads in the axial piston unit:
fied maximum pressure. The machine or system manufac- The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are
turer must ensure that the connecting elements and lines maximum values of the female threads and must not be
correspond to the specified application conditions (pres- exceeded. For values, see the following table.
sure, flow, hydraulic fluid, temperature) with the necessary
- Threaded plugs:
safety factors.
For the metallic threaded plugs supplied with the axial pis-
- The service line ports and function ports can only be used ton unit, the required tightening torques of threaded plugs
to accommodate hydraulic lines. MV apply. For values, see the following table.

Standard Size of thread female threads MG max threaded plugs MV1) threaded plugs
DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5 50 Nm 25 Nm2) 6 mm
M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M16 x 1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M26 x 1.5 230 Nm 120 Nm 12 mm
1) The tightening torques apply for screws in the "dry" state as
received on delivery and in the "lightly oiled" state for instal-
lation.
2) In the "lightly oiled" state, the MV is reduced to 17 Nm for
M12 x 1.5.
Mobile Applications forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be repro-
Glockeraustraße 4 duced or given to third parties without its consent.
89275 Elchingen, Germany The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
Tel. +49 7308 82-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Fax +49 7308 7274 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
info.brm@boschrexroth.de the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
Subject to change.
525

RE 92203/06.09 1/52
Axial piston variable pump Replaces: 05.99
A7VO
Data sheet
Series 63
Sizes NG250 to 500
Open circuit
Contents Features
Type code for Standard program 2 – Variable axial piston pump with tapered piston rotary group in
Technical data 4 bent axis design for hydrostatic drives in open circuits
Dimensions size 250 10 – For operation in mobile and industrial applications
Dimensions size 250 High-Speed-Version 12 – The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displace-
Dimensions size 355 14 ment and steplessly variable from qv max to qv min = 0
– Wide range of controls and adjustment devices
DR Pressure control 18
– Compact, robust bearing system for long service life
DRG remote pressure control 20
LRD Power control with integrated pressure control 22 – Available with Long Life bearings for special fluids and
extreme service life requirements
LRG with remote pressure control 26
LRDH with hydraulic stroke limiter 28 – Pressure control is standard
LRDN with hydraulic stroke limiter 31 – Optical or electric swivel angle indicator available
HD.D Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent 34
HD.D with intrgrated pressure control 37
HD.G with remote pressure control 38
EP.D Electric control with proportional valve 40
EP.D with integrated pressure control 42
EP.G with remote pressure control 43
Plug 45
Optical swivel angle indicator 46
Electric swivel angle indicator 47
Installation instructions standard program 48
Installation instructions High-Speed-Version 49
526
2/52 Bosch Rexroth AG A7VO Baureihe 63 | RE 92203/06.09

A7V O / 63 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Fluid / Version 250 355 500

Mineral oil and HFD. HFD only in conjunction with Long-Life-Lagerung „L“ (no code) ● ● ●
01 For operation on HFC, special high performance version A4VSO...F see RE 92053 ● ● –
High-Speed-Version (only mineral oil) ● – – H 1)
Axial piston unit

02 Bent axis design, variable, nominal pressure 350 bar, peak pressure 400 bar A7V
Drive shaft bearings 250 355 500

Mechanical bearings (no code) ● ● ●
03
Long-Life-bearings ● ● ● L
Type of operation
Size
Displacement Vg max [cm3] 250 355 500
05
NG28 to160 see RE 92202
Control devices 250 355 500

Pressure control ● ● ● DR
Pressure control, remotely adjustable ● ● ● DRG
Power control
with integrated pressure control (fixed setting) ● ● ● LRD
hydraulic stroke limiter Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● LRDH1
initial position Vg max Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● LRDH2
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● LRDH3
hydraulic stroke limiter Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● LRDN1
initial position Vg min Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● LRDN2
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● LRDN3
with pressure control remotely adjustable ● ● ● LRG
hydraulic stroke limiter Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● LRGH1
initial position Vg max Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● LRGH2
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● LRGH3
06 hydraulic stroke limiter Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● LRGN1
initial position Vg min Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● LRGN2
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● LRGN3
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent,
with integrated pressure control (fixed setting) Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● HD1D
Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● HD2D
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● HD3D
with pressure control, remotely adjustable Δp = 10 bar ● ● ● HD1G
Δp = 25 bar ● ● ● HD2G
Δp = 35 bar ● ● ● HD3G
Hydraulic control, with electric proportional valve 2)
with integrated pressure control (fixed setting) Control voltage 12 V ● ● ● EP1D
Control voltage 24 V ● ● ● EP2D
with pressure control, remotely adjustable Control voltage 12 V ● ● ● EP1G
control voltage 24 V ● ● ● EP2G
1)
recommended for new projects
2)
for operation on HFD-fluids please observe RE 29181 (proportional pressure reducing valve type DRE4K)
527
RE 92203/06.09 | A7VO Baureihe 63 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/52

A7V O / 63 – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Series 250 355 500 1

Direction of rotation 250 355 500

with view on drive shaft clockwise R
08
counter clockwise L
Seals 250 355 500 2

09 FKM (Fluoro-rubber) V

Splined shaft to DIN 5480 Z
10
Keyed parallel shaft to DIN 6885 P
Mounting flange 250 355 500 3

Similar to ISO 3019-2 4-hole – – B
11
8-hole – H
Service line connections 250 355 500

SAE-flanged port B or A, at rear (metric fixing bolts)
01
SAE flanged port S, at rear(metric fixing bolts)
12 4
SAE- flanged ports B or A, on opposite side (metric fixing bolts)
02
SAE- flanged port S, on opposite side (metric fixing bolts)
Swivel angle indicator 250 355 500

Without swivel angle indicator (no code)
13 With optical swivel angle indicator V
With electric swivel angle indicator E 5
Note
Exact value for Vg min and Vg max (displacement) must be stated in clear text when ordering (Vg min ......cm3/rev., Vg max .....cm3/rev.)
Setting range Vg min: 0 to 0.2 • Vg max
Vg max: Vg max down to 0.8 • Vg max
6
8
528
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid
For extensive information on the selection of hydraulic fluids Selection diagram
and application conditions please consult our data sheets RE
90220 (mineral oils), RE 90221 (ecologically acceptable fluids) –20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
1000 1000
and RE 90223 (HF-fluids).
600
The variable pump A7VO is not suitable for operation on HFA 400
fluids. When operating on HFD or ecologically acceptable
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG
200
68
10
32
46
22
fluids, limitations to the technical data and seals according to
0
RE 90223 and RE 90221 must be observed. 100
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
80
For the sizes 250 and 355 with operation on HFC-fluids, the 60
A4VSO..F must be used. For certain selected HFC fluids the 40
36
same pressures and speeds are permissible as for operation
Qopt
on mineral oil. See RE 92053.
20
When ordering, state the fluid to be used in clear text. 16
15
Operating viscosity range 10 10

–25° 50° 70° 90° Temperatur
–10° 10° 30°
In order to obtain optimum efficiency and service life, we t (°C)
Fluid temperature range tmax = + 90°C
recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating tempera- tmin = –25°C
ture) be selected in the range
Notes on the selection of hydraulic fluids
Qopt = opt. viscosity range 16...36 mm2/s
In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
referred to tank temperature (open circuit). operating temperature in the tank (open circuit) in relation to the
ambient temperature.
Limit of viscosity range
The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the ope-
For critical operating conditions the following values apply: rating temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum
Qmin = 10 mm2/s range (Qopt) see shaded section in the selection diagram. We
for short periods (t < 3 min) recommend, that the higher viscosity grade is selected in each
at max. permissible case drain temperature case.
tmax = +90°C. Example: at an ambient temperature of X° C the operating
Qmax = 1000 mm2/s temperature in the tank is 60° C. In the optimum viscosity range
for short periods (on cold start maximum operating (Qopt ; shaded area), this corresponds to grades VG 46 or VG 68;
viscosity of 100 mm2/s should be reached within select: VG 68.
15 min)
tmin= –25°C
Important:
Note, that the maximum fluid temperature of 90°C may not be The case drain temperature is influenced by pressure and speed
exceeded at any point (e.g. around the bearings). The fluid tem- and is always higher than the tank temperature. However the max.
perature in the bearing area is influenced by drive speed and temperature at any point in the system may not exceed 90° C.
pressure, and is typically 12 K higher than the average case
If the above conditions cannot be met, due to extreme operating
drain temperature.
parameters we recommend a housing flushing via port U.
Temperature range Filtration

(see selection diagram) The finer the filtration, the better the achieved cleanliness of the
tmin = –25°C fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston pump.
tmax = +90°C
To ensure a reliable functioning of the axial piston unit, a mini-
For detailed information on operation with low temperatures mum cleanliness class of
see RE 90300-03-B.
20/18/15 acc. to ISO 4406 is necessary.
.
529
Technical data
Depending on the operating fluid, limitations may apply, see the The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design
chapter on hydraulic fluids, page 4. pressure.
Peak pressure pmax 1
Pressure at the outlet ports (pressure ports) A or B
The peak pressure corresponds to the maximum pressure
Nominal pressure pnom _______________________________ 350 bar absolute within the individual operating period. The total of the individual
Peak pressure pmax _____________________________________ 400 bar absolute operating periods must not exceed the total operating period.
Total operating period ___________________________________________________ 300 h Minimum pressure (in pump outlet)
Individual operating period ________________________________________________ 1 s Minimum pressure in the pump outlet side (port A or B) that is
Minimum pressure (in pump outlet) __________________________ 10 bar required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
2
For a lower pressure, please consult us. Rate of pressure change RA
Rate of pressure change RA _____________________________ 16000 bar/s Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduc-
pnom range.
Pressure p
't
t2
Individual operating period t1 tn
Pressure p
3
Peak pressure pmax
'p Nominal pressure pnom
Time t
4
Under pulsating load conditions above 315 bar we recommend
the use of a splined shaft (to DIN 5480).
Minimum pressure (in pump outlet)
Pressure at the inlet port S (Suction)
Minimum inlet pressure pS min _________________________0.8 bar absolute
Maximum inlet pressure pS max __________________________ 8 bar absolute Time t
Minimum inlet pressure Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn

In order to avoid damage to the axial piston pump a certain 5
minimum inlet pressure at the pump‘s suction port S is necessa-
ry This minimum inlet pressure is dependent on the drive speed
and the displacement of the axial piston unit. Direction of flow
1.25 1.8 Direction of rotation, with view on shaft end
1.2
Inlet pressure pS [bar]
1.6 clockwise counter clockwise

1.1 1.4
6
nnom
1.2 S to B S to A
n
1.0 1.0
0.9 0.8
Speed
0.8
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Vg
Displacement
Vg max
7
Note
– Maximum speed nmax
(Speed limit, see table of values, page 8)
– Minimum and maximum pressure at port S
– Permissible values for the shaft seal
(see diagram on page 7)
An increase in inlet pressure results in a higher control begin of 8
the LR-control curve as well as a rise of the LR.H- and LR.N-
pilot pressure characteristics.
Factory setting of the control begin is done at an inlet pressure
pS. =1 bar absolute.
Exact details of the shifts in the control curves on request.
530
Technical data
Long-Life-Bearings (L) Operation in standby (in pressure control mode)
For long service life requirements and when using HFD-fluids. Operation in standby, without external flushing via port U is
Identical external dimensions as units with standard bearings. only permissible for short periods:
A retroactive conversion to Long-Life Bearings is possible. It
A7VO maximum 15 min at 200 bar
is recommended, that the bearings and housing be flushed via
3 min at 350 bar
port U.
HA7VO maximum 5 min at 200 bar
1 min at 350 bar
Bearing flushing
For other pressure levels information on request
Flushing flows (recommended)
Influence of drive speed can be neglected
NG 250 355 500
At tank temperature d 50° C
qflow (L/min) 10 16 16
For longer periods of standby operation it is necessary to
implement housing flushing vie port U.
Flushing port
U R
Flushing flows for A7VO same as bearing flushing
Flushing flows HA7VO (High-Speed-version)

50
40
Flushing-resp. remaining
30
pump flow [L/min]
20
10
0
0 100 200 300 350

531
Technical data
Shaft seal FKM (Fluoro-rubber)
Permissible case pressure

The service life of the shaft seal is influenced by pump drive
speed and case pressure. It is recommended not to exceed the 1
continuous averaged case pressure of 3 bar abs. (max. perm.
case pressure 4 bar abs. at reduced speed, see diagram).
The case pressure must be equal to or higher than the external
pressure on the shaft seal (in case of the standard version). For
the High-Speed-version please consult us.
4
2
NG250
3.5
NG355
Perm. case pressure
3
NG500
2.5
pS. max. [bar]
2 3
1.5
1
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
-1
Speed n [min ] 4
Special operating conditions may make it necessary to restrict
these values .
Important:
– maximum permissible drive speed of variable pump
(see table of values, page 8)
– max. permissible case pressure pS max___________________________ 4 bar 5
– an increase in case pressure results in a higher control begin
of the HD- and DR- controls.
Exact details of the shift in control characteristics on request.
Factory setting of the control begin at pS = 1 bar.
Temperature range 6
The FKM shaft seal is suitable for case temperatures of -25° C
to +90°C.
8
532
Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering Kmh and Kv; values rounded off)
Size NG 250 355 500
High-Speed-Version 250H
Displacement Vg max1) cm3 250 250 355 500
Vg min1) cm3 0 0 0 0
Speed maximum 2)4) at Vg max nnom rpm 1500 1800 1320 1200
Speed maximum 3)4) at Vg d Vg max nmax rpm 1800 – 1600 1500
Maximum flow 4) at nnom (Vg max) qv max nom L /min 375 450 469 600
Maximum power 4) at qv nom and 'p = 350 bar Pnom kW 219 262 273 350
Torque 4) at Vg max and 'p = 350 bar Tmax Nm 1391 1391 1978 2785
(continuous operation)
Rotary stiffness Vg max to 0.5 • Vg max cmin Nm/rad 59500 59500 74800 115000
0.5 • Vg max to 0(interpolated) cmax Nm/rad 181000 181000 262000 391000
Moment of inertia rotary group JTW kgm2 0.061 0.061 0.102 0.178
Angular acceleration maximum D rad/s2 10000 10000 8300 5500
Case volume V L 3 3 5 7
Weight approx. m kg 102 102 173 234
1)
Standard setting for limitation of the swivel angle. If another setting is required, please state in clear text.
Setting range Vg max: Vg max to 0.8 • Vg max
Vg min: 0 to 0.2 • Vg max
2)
Nominal speed in self priming operation with an absolute pressure (pS) of 1 bar at inlet port S and mineral oil with a density of
0,88 kg/L
3)
The values apply for Vg d Vg max or an increase in inlet pressure pS at the inlet port S (see diagram page 5)
4)
Depending on the type of fluid, restrictions may be necessary, see chapter hydraulic fluids page 4
Important
service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. More details on limiting values for speed fluctuations, reduction in angular ac-
celeration dependent on the frequency and the permissible starting angular acceleration (below the maximum angular acceleration)
can be found in data sheet RE 90261.
V g • n • KV
Flow qV = [L/min]
1000
Vg • 'p
20 • S • Kmh
2S • T • n qV • 'p
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt
Vg = Geometr. displacement per revolution in cm3

Δp = Differential pressure in bar
n = Speed in rpm
KV = Volumetric efficiency
Kt = Overall efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
533
Technical data
Size NG 250 355 500

Radial force, maximum 1) Fq
(at pA,B = 1bar) 1
Fq max N 1200 1500 1900
X/2 X/2
X
Axial force, maximum 2)

+ Fax max N 4000 5000 6250
(at pA,B = 1bar)
r Fax
– Fax max N 1200 1500 1900 2
1)
When at standstill or pressureless circulation of the axial piston unit. Under pressurized condition higher forces are permissible,
please consult us
2)
Maximum permissible axial force at standstill or pressureless circulation of the axial piston unit
Regarding the permissible axial force, the direction of the force must be taken into consideration: 3
– Fax max = increase of bearing life
+ Fax max = decrease of bearing life
Influence of the radial force Fq on the bearing life 4

Through a favourable direction of the actuating radial force Fq,the internal load on the bearings can be compensated for and in
this manner an optimum on bearing life can be obtained, please consult us.
8
534

Ports A (B) and S on opposite sides (02), clockwise rotation

(without control devices)
385*
82 246
22
Vgmin 30° 45°
U R1
4x9
161 *
0°
105
120
80
= 360
ø2
ø224 h8
3 1 .8
Y
246
°
ø 32
44
57
´
89
5
ø22
°1
6 6 .7
105
ø25
13
m ax. 275 *
0
5
R2
R2 B M1
6
9 25
82 M14x2, 19 deep
Vgmax MB
276
287
* see control devices
344
with ports at rear (01)

View Y
61.9
44
ø 75
106.4
S
M16x2, 24 deep
View Z clockwise rotation View Z counter clockwise rotation
B S Y S A
MB MA
73 73
112 130 130 112
535

Ports A (B) and S at rear (01)

1
112 112
B1 S1 S1 A1
31.8 61.9 61.9 31.8
106.4
106.4
66.7
66.7
ø75
ø75
B S S A 2
M33x2
M33x2
M16x2, 24 deep M16x2, 24 deep

MB 68 68
MA
3
73 60 130 130 60 73
119 151 151 119
Drive shafts
W50x2x24x9g DIN 6885, AS14x9x80 4
M16x2 1)2)
M16x2 1)2)
ø49.6
ø45
53.5
5
ø50k6
36 36
58 82
108 132 1)
Centering bore to DIN 332
(Thread to DIN 13)
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size2) 6
Peak pressure State
3)
[bar]
A, (B) Pressure outlet (high pressure range) SAE J5184) 1 1/4in
Fixing thread DIN 13 400 O
M14x2; 19 deep
4)
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J518 3 in
Fixing thread DIN 13 7 O
M16x2; 24 deep
U Flushing DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 3 X 7
R1 Case drain DIN 3852 M22x1.5; 14 deep 3 O
R2 Case drain DIN 3852 M22x1.5; 14 deep 3 X
MA, M B Measuring pressure A, B DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 X
2)
For the max. tightening torques the general information on page 52 must be observed
3)
Depending on the application, momentary pressure spikes can occur. Take this into consideration when selecting the measuring 8
devices and fittings.
4)
Only dimensions to SAE J518
O = Must be connected (closed on delivery)
536
Dimensions size 250 High-Speed-Version Before finalizing your design, request a binding

384* 246
82
22 Vgmin 30° 45°
U R1
4x9
158 *
0°
105
120
80
= 360
ø2
ø224 h8
31.8
eep
246
°
d
44
57
2, 18
´
88
5
ø22
°1
66.7
105
ø25
Z
13
max. 247*
M33x
0
5
B
R2
6
R2 M1
9 25
82 M14x2, 19 deep
Vgmax
276 MB
287
342
* siehe Verstellgeräte
Location A1, B1 and S1 * see control devices
Ansicht Y
61.9
44
ø 75
106.4
S
M16x2, 24 deep

Ansicht Z Drehrichtung rechts Ansicht Z Drehrichtung links
B B1 S1 S Y S S1 A1 A
MB MA
68 60 60 68
73 73
112 130 130 112
Ports A1, B1 and S1 closed pressure tight with plug or flange plate, Dimensions like A, B and S
537

Dimensions size 250 High-Speed-Version installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
112 112 1
B1 S1 S1 A1
31.8 61.9 61.9 31.8
106.4
106.4
18 tief 66.7
66.7
ø75
ø75
B S S A 2
M33x2
M33x2
18 tief

MB 68 68
MA
3
73 60 130 130 60 73
119 151 151 119
Drive shafts
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480 P Parellel keyed shaft
W50x2x24x9g DIN 6885, AS14x9x80
4
M16x2 1)2)
M16x2 1)2)
ø49.6
ø45
53.5
ø50k6
36 36
58 82 5
1)
Centering bore to DIN 332
108 132 (Thread to DIN 13)
Ports
) 3)
Designation Port for Standard Size2 Peak pressure [bar] State
A, (B) Pressure outlet (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 1 1/4in
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14x2; 19 deep 400 O 6
A1, (B1) 2. Pressure outlet (high pressure series) SAE J5184) 1 1/4in
400 X 5)
Fixing thread DIN 13 M14x2; 19 deep
S Suction (standard pressure series) SAE J5184) 3 in
36) O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M16x2; 24 deep
S1 2. Suction (standard pressure series) SAE J5184) 3 in 6)
Fixing thread 3 X7)
DIN 13 M16x2; 24 deep
U Flushing DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 3 X
7
R1, R2 Case drain DIN 3852 M22x1.5; 14 deep 3 X8)
MA, M B Measuring outlet pressure A, B DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 X
2)
3)
Depending on the application momentary pressure spikes can occur. Take this into consideration when selecting the measuring
4)
5)
8
Closed pressure tight with plug M33x2
6)
Note: suction chamber and leakage chamber are connected inside pump housing, observe permissible pressure load on
shaft seal, see page 7
7)
Closed pressure tight with flange plate
8)
Both ports are plugged. Leakage chamber is connected with suction chamber. Separate case drain line to tank is not necessary.
538


432 * 335
95 22°30
5° ´
23.5 4 ø18 8x4
Vg min
5 °
U R1
=
36
0°
181*
166
128
36.5
ø280 h8
335
ø40
49
ø3
64
103
5´
60
128
°1
79.4
0
13
2
ø3
max. 300 *
Z
R2 B
16
14 28
M
95 M16x2, 21 deep
Vg max
310
315
MB
387
* see control devices
with ports at rear (01)
View Y
69.9
49
120.7
ø90
S
M16x2, 24 deep
B S Y S A
MB MA
82 82
135 150 150 135
539


1
36.5 69.9 69.9 36.5
120.7
120.7
ø90
79.4
79.4
ø40
ø90
B S S A 2
ø40
M16x2, 21 deep M16x2, 24 deep M16x2, 24 deep M16x2, 21 deep
MB MA
3
82 75 75 82
143 171 171 143
Drive shafts
W60x2x28x9g DIN 6885, AS18x11x100 4
1)2)
1)2)
M20x2.5
M20x2.5
ø59.6
ø55
64
5
ø60 m6
42 42
82 105
1)
132 155 Centering bore to DIN 332
(Thread to DIN 13)
Ports 6
Designation Port for Standard Size2) Peak pressure State
3)
[bar]
DIN 13 400 O
Fixing thread M16x2; 21 deep
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J5184)) 3 1/2 in
DIN 13 7 O
Fixing thread M16x2; 24 deep
7
U Flushing DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 3 X
R1 Case drain DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 3 O
R2 Case drain DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 3 X
2)
3)
Depending on the application momentary pressure spikes can occur. Take this into consideration when selecting the measuring 8
4)
540


492* 375
110 22°30
45´ ´
27.5 33° 24 8x
Vg min ø22 45
U R1 °
=
36
0°
196 *
200
186
141
36.5
ø315h8
375
ø40
55
71
ø4
5´
109
00
141
°1
79.4
13
60
Z
ø3
max. 325*
R2 B
14 30 M16x2, 21 deep 0
110 Vg max M2
357
370
439
with ports at rear (01) * see control devices
View Y
77.8
55
ø100
130.2
S
M16x2, 21 deep
B S Y S A
MB MA
95 95
149 164 164 149
541


1
36. 5 77.8 77. 8 36.5
130.2
130.2
ø100
79.4
79.4
ø100
ø40
B S S A 2
ø40
M16x2, 21 deep M16x2, 21 deep M16x2, 21 deep M16x2, 21 deep
MB MA
82 3
95 82 95
157 185 185 157
Drive shafts
W70x3x22x9g DIN 6885, AS20x12x100 4
1)2)
1)2)
M20x2.5
M20x2.5
ø69.6
ø62.7
74,5
5
ø70m6
42 42
80 105
1)
130 155 Centering bore to DIN 332
(Thread to DIN 13)
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Size2) 6
Peak pressure State
3)
[bar]
400 O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M16x2, 21 deep
S Suction (standard pressure range) SAE J5184) 4 in
7 O
Fixing thread DIN 13 M16x2, 21 deep
U Flushing DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep 3 X 7
R1 Case drain DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 3 O
R2 Case drain DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 3 X
2)
3)
8
4)
542
DR Pressure control
Initial position: Vg max in pressureless condition
The pressure control limits the maximum pump output pressure Characteristic
within the control range of the pump. This max. pressure level
$pmax 10 bar
can be set at the integrated control valve. When reaching this
preset level, the pump destrokes and supplies only the amount 350
of flow as needed by the users (actuators).
integr. press. control

Setting range
Setting range of the pressure control _______50 to 350 bar
Standard setting is 350 bar.
If another setting is required please state in clear text.
Important 50
– A recommended main line relief valve in the system to q Vmin q Vmax

safeguard against excessive pressure spikes must have a cra-
cking pressure at least 20 bar above the DR control setting. Flow
– The control begin and the DR-control characteristic is influ-
enced by housing pressure. An increase in housing pressure
results in a higher control begin and thus a parallel shifting of Schematic
the control curve (see page 7).
MB B R1 R2
– Operation in standby see page 6.
Vgmax Vgmin
1
M
U S
Sub assemblies
1 Integrated pressure control valve
Ports for
M Measuring pressure on control piston (plugged)
543

Dimensions DR installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
For general dimensions see pages 10 to 17
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
250 385 161 248 297 227
Pressure control 1
355 430 175 279 333 257
A1 to mounting flange face
500 490 200 306 382 284
A2
2
A5
A3
B
M
A4 to mounting flange face M 3
Counter clockwise rotation
Pressure control 4
A2
5
A5
A3
M
Ports
3)
[bar] 7
M Measuring pressure on control piston DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 X
2)
3)
8
544
DRG Pressure control remotely adjustable

In order to obtain a remote adjustment of the pressure control Characteristic
level a separate pilot pressure relief (item 2) valve must be con-
nected to port X3. This relief valve is not included in the supply
$pmax 10 bar
of the DRG control. 350

Setting range of the pressure control _________ 50 to 350 bar
Setting range
The spring force on the pressure compensator spool causes a
differential pressure between pump output pressure and pres-
sure at X3 (as soon as the relief valve opens and the pressure
control function takes place). Standard setting of this differenti-
al pressure 25 bar.
As long as the the pressure is below the set pressure of the 50
relief valve, the pressures on both sides of the pressure com-
pensator spool are equal and the additional spring force keeps q Vmin q Vmax
this spool in a shifted position (Spool in equilibrium).
Flow
As soon as the set pressure of the relief valve is reached, this
valve will start to open and the pilot flow will result in a differen-
tial pressure over the compensator spool, which causes this Schematic
spool to shift and brings the pump to a smaller displacement.
Vg min. MB B R1 R2
The differential pressure at the pressure compensator spool
(item 1) is normally set at 25 bar, which results in a pilot flow at
X3 of approx. 2 L/min.
In case another setting (range 14 to 50 bar) is required, please
state in clear text when ordering.
As a seperate pilot relief valve we recommend: Vgmax Vgmin
DBD 6 (hydraulic) see RE 25402 1

DBETR-SO 437 with dampened spool M
(electric) see RE 29166
The max. line lenght should not exceed 2 m.
Note
– The beginning of control and the DRG control characteristic U S X3
are influenced by housing pressure. An increase in housing
pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see page 7) 2
and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic.
– Standby operation see page 6.
Sub assemblies
1 Integrated pressure compensator
2 Separate pilot pressure relief valve
(not in scope of supply)
Ports for
X3 Separate pressure relief valve
545

Dimensions DRG installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
General dimensions see page 10 to 17
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
Differential 250 385 161 248 380 74
A6 A1 to mounting flange face pressure 1
355 430 175 279 425 82
X3 500 490 200 306 483 96
X3
A2
NG A6 A7 A8
A5
250 112 297 227
355 131 333 257 2
500 142 382 284
A8
A3
B
M
Differential 4
A6 A1 to mounting flange face pressure
X3
X3
A2
A5
5
A8
A3
M
A7 to mounting flange face M
A4 to mounting flange face 6
Ports
Designation Ports for Standard Size2) Peak pressure State
3)
[bar]
7
X3 Separate pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 O
2)
For the max. tightening torques the general information on 52 must be observed
3)
devices or fittings.
8
546
LRD Power control with integrated pressure control

Power control Characteristic
The power control adjusts the pump displacement in relation
to the operating pressure in such a manner, that a given drive 350
power at constant drive speed is not exceeded .

300
(Control begin)
pB • Vg = constant (drive power)
Power control
Setting range
Setting range
pB = operating pressure; Vg = displacement
This precise control along the hyperbolic control characteristic

permits an optimum utilisation of drive power.
50
The operating pressure acts on a lever mechanism via the mea-
suring spool in the displacement control piston. It is offset by
q Vmin q Vmax
the externally set spring force which acts on the pilot valve and
determines the power setting. Flow
When the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the
power control pilot valve is actuated via the lever mechanism Schematic
and the pump swivel towards a smaller displacement Vg min. This
in turn reduces the effective moment on the lever mechanism Power control with integrated pressure control
and the operating pressure can increase in the same ratio by
which the pump output flow is reduced, without exceeding the MB B R1 R2
installed drive power (pB • Vg = constant).
Setting range for the control begin of the power control
from _____________________________________50 to 300 bar.
Note Vg min Vg max

– The control begin and the LR-power control characteristic
are influenced by pump inlet pressure. An increase in pump
3
inlet pressure results in a higher control begin (see page 5)
M
– The hydraulic output power (LR-characteristic) is influenced 1
by pump efficiency
When ordering please state in clear text:

– Drive power P in kW U S
– Maximum flow qv max in L/min
Sub assemblies
The integrated pressure control is standard and overrides 1 Pressure control
the power control, description see page 24
3 Power control
Port for
Dimensions see page 25

547
LRD Power control with integrated pressure control

Initial position Vg max
Power control characteristics in kW
NG 250 NG 500
at 1500 rpm at 1000 rpm 1
350 350
20 25
0 0
16

300
300 0 20
13 0
2 16
250 11 250 0
0 13
90
75 2
200 200 11
90
0 2
5
4 5 150 75
150 37 5
30 55
100 100 37
50 50
0 0 3
0 100 200 300 375 0 100 200 300 400 500
Flow qv [L/min] Flow qv [L/min]
NG 355
at 1500 rpm
350
25 4
0
300
20
0
250 16
13 0
11 2
200 90 0
75
150 5
4 5 5
37 5
100
50
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 532
Flow qv [L/min] 6
8
548
LRD with integrated pressure control

The pressure control is overriding the power control. Characteristic
It protects the pump against excessive pressure and conse-
quential damage.
350
The pressure control valve is integrated into the port plate and

can be set externally.
Upon reaching the set pressure level the pump will destroke
Setting range
towards lower displacement.
$pmax 10 bar
Setting range of the pressure control _______ 50 to 350 bar
Standard setting: 350 bar.
If another setting is required please state in clear text. 50
Note q Vmin q Vmax

– A recommended main line relief valve in the system to Flow
safeguard against excessive pressure spikes must have a
cracking pressure at least 20 bar above the pressure control
setting. Schematic
– The control begin and the pressure control characteristic Power control with integrated pressure control
pressure results in a higher control begin (see page 7) and MB B R1 R2
thus a parallel shift of the characteristic.
– Standby operation see page 6.
Vg min Vg max
3
M
U S
Sub assemblies
1 Pressure control
3 Power control
Port for
549

Dimensions LRD installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
250 385 170 248 297 227
Power control 1
355 430 175 279 333 257
A1 to mounting flange face Pressure control 500 490 200 306 382 284
A2
2
A5
A3
B
M 3
4
A1to mounting flange face
A2
5
A5
A3
M
6
Ports
3)
[bar] 7
2)
For the max. tightening torques the general information on page 52 must be ovserved
3)
8
550
LRG with remotely adjustable pressure control

The remotely adjustable pressure control overrides the power Characteristic
control.
In order to obtain a remote adjustment of the pressure control
level a separate pilot pressure relief (item 2) valve must be con- 350

nected to port X3. This relief valve is not included in the supply of
Setting range
the DRG control.
$pmax 10 bar
control function takes place). Standard setting of this differential 50
pressure 25 bar.
q Vmin q Vmax
As long as the the pressure is below the set pressure of the
relief valve, the pressures on both sides of the pressure com- flow
pensator spool are equal and the additional spring force keeps
this spool in a shifted position (Spool in equilibrium).
Schematic
As soon as the set pressure of the relief valve is reached, this
valve will start to open and the pilot flow will result in a differential Power control with remotely adjustable pressure control
pressure over the compensator spool, which causes this spool to
shift and brings the pump to a smaller displacement Vg min. MB B R1 R2
Upon reaching the set pressure control level (set pressure at
pilot relief valve plus differential pressure at pressure control
compensator) the pump will go over to the pressure control
mode.
The differential pressure at the pressure compensator spool
Vgmin Vgmax
X3 of approx. 2 L/min. 3
state in clear text when ordering. M
As a seperate pilot relief valve we recommend:
1
DBD 6 (hydraulic) see RE 25402
DBETR-SO 437 with dampened spool
(electric) see RE 29166
U S X3
2
Note
– The beginning of control and the DRG control characteristic
pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see page 7) Sub assemblies
– Standby operation see page 6. 1 Integrated pressure control compensator
2 Separate pressure relief valve
3 Power control
Ports for
551
Dimensions LRG Before finalizing your design, request a binding

Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
Power control 250 385 170 248 380 74
1
A6 A1to mounting flange face 355 430 175 279 425 82
Differential
pressure 500 490 200 306 483 96
X3
X3 NG A6 A7 A8
A2
250 112 297 227
A5
355 131 333 257 2
500 142 382 284
A8
A3
B
M
Power control 4
A6 A1 to mounting flange face
Differential
pressure
X3
X3
A2
A5
5
A8
A3
M 6
Ports
3)
[bar] 7
X3 Separate pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 O
2)
3)
O = Must be connected (closed on delivery) 8
552
LRDH with hydraulic stroke limitation

The hydraulic stroke limitation is used for infinite adjustment of Schematic
the displacement from Vg max bis Vg min.
Power control with integrated pressure control and hydraulic
It is overridden by the power control. stroke limitation H
The displacement is set by the pilot pressure applied at port X1
Maximum permissible pilot pressure ____________ 100 bar MB B X1 4 R1 R2
The hydraulic stroke limitation takes the required control pres-

sure from the pump output pressure. It must be noted, that X2
the pump operating pressure must be at least 40 bar.
If the pressure is lower, the pump must be supplied with an
external control pressure of at least 40 bar into port X2. Vgmin Vgmax
The control begin is adjustable. 3
Control begin (bar), please state in clear test when ordering.
M
Note
– The control begin and the LRDH-control characteristic are 1
influenced by pump inlet pressure. An increase in pump inlet
pressure results in a higher control begin (see page 5) and
thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic.
U S
Sub assemblies
1 Pressure control
3 Power control
4 Hydraulic stroke limitation H
Ports for
X1 Pilot pressure
X2 External control pressure (plugged)
M Measuring pressure on control piston(plugged)

553
LRDH with hydraulic stroke limitation

Characteristics
H1 'pSt for hydraulic stroke limitation ___________ 10 bar
Control begin adjustable ___________________ 2 to 20 bar
Standard setting of control begin ________________ 5 bar
1
30
25
Pilot pressure pSt at X1 [bar]
20
15
$pSt = 10 bar
2
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax 3
H2 'pSt for hydraulic stroke limitation __________ 25 bar
Standard setting of control begin _______________ 10 bar
120
100 4
80
60
40
$pSt = 25 bar
5
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement Vgmax
H3 'pSt for hydraulic stroke limitation ___________ 35 bar 6

120
100
7
80
60
$pSt = 35 bar
40
20 8
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement Vgmax
554

Dimensions LRDH installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
250 385 188 248 370 144
A1 to mounting flange face hydraulic
A8 stroke limitation H 355 432 203 279 416 157
X2 A4 to mounting flange face
X1 A6 to mounting flange face 500 490 215 306 470 169
X2
X1
NG A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
max. A2
250 327 123 49 297 227
A5
A7
355 366 137 54 333 257
500 417 148 61.5 382 284
A10
A3
B
M

Port X1, showing NG250 Port X1, showing NG355 and 500
hydraulic
A1 to mounting flange face stroke limitation H
63 4 A to mounting flange face
X1 X2 335 to mounting flange face X1 A8 A6 to mounting flange face
X1 X2
X1
max. A2
157
A5
A7
A10
A3
S S
M M
Ports
3)
[bar]
X1 Pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 O
X2 External control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep (NG250 a. 355) 400 X
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 X
2)
3)
555
LRDN with hydraulic stroke limitation

Initial position: Vg min in pressureless condition
The hydraulic stroke limitation is used for infinite adjustment of Schematic
the displacement from Vg min to Vg max.
Power control with integrated pressure control and hydraulic
It is overridden by the power control. stroke limitation N
1
Displacement is set by the pilot pressure applied at port X1.
Maximum permissible pilot pressure p______________ 100 bar MB B X1 5 R1 R2
A minimum pressure of 40 bar is required for hydraulic stroke
limitation. The necessary control fluid is taken from the pump X2
outlet pressure side.
An external control pressure is not required when the operating 2
pressure > 40 bar and Vg min > 0. In this case the port X2 must
Vgmax Vgmin
be plugged prior to commissioning. Otherwise an external
control pressure source of at least 40 bar must be connected 3
to port X2.
M
The control begin is adjustable.
Control begin (bar), please state in clear text when ordering. 1
3
Note
– The control begin and the LRDN-control characteristic are
influenced by pump inlet pressure. An increase in pump inlet U S
pressure results in a higher control begin (see page 5) and
thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic. Sub assemblies
1 Pressure control 4
3 Power control
5 Hydraulic stroke limitation N
Ports for
X1 Pilot pressure 5
X2 External control pressure
M Measuring of pressure on control piston (plugged)

6
8
556
LRDN with hydraulic stroke limitation

Characteristics
N1 'pStfor hydraulic stroke limitation ____________ 10 bar
30
25
20
15
$pSt = 10 bar
10
5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
N2 'pSt for hydraulic stroke limitation ___________ 25 bar

120
100
80
60
40
$pSt = 25 bar
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
N3 'pSt for hydraulic stroke limitation ___________ 35 bar

Standard setting of control begin ______________ 10 bar
120
100
80
60
$pSt = 35 bar
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
557

Dimensions LRDN installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
M A11 A1 to mounting flange face 250 385 170 275 276 248 248
1
A9 to mounting flange face 355 430 175 300 315 275 278
500 492 200 325 359 300 322
M
A2
NG A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
A10
250 210 49 377 116 14
355 234 54 425 132 20 2
500 258 61.5 483 144 20
A7
max. A3
A5
B
X 2 A8 X1 X1
A6 to mounting flange face X2 3
stroke limitation N
M A11 A1 to mounting flange face 4

M
A2
A10
5
max. A3
A7
A5
X2 A8 X1 X1
A6 to mounting flange face X2
6
stroke limitation N
Ports
3)
[bar] 7
X2 External control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep (NG250 a. 355) 400 O 4)
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 O 4)
2)
3)
4)
If no external control pressure is connected, port X2 must be plugged
558
HD.D Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent

The hydraulic pilot pressure dependent control enables an Schematic
infinite adjustment of the pump displacement in accordance
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent with integrated
with the applied pilot pressure signal. The displacement setting
pressure control
is proportional to the pilot pressure in port X1.
A minimum control pressure of 40 bar is required. The neces- MB B R1 R2
sary control fluid is taken from the pump outlet pressure side.
An external control pressure is not required when the operating X2
be plugged prior to commissioning. Otherwise an external con-
trol pressure of at least 40 bar must be connected to port X2.
Vgmax Vgmin
Maximum permissible pilot pressure pSt ________________ 100 bar
6
The control begin is adjustable.
Control begin (bar), please state in clear text when ordering. M
Note 1
– The beginning of control and the HD control characteristic
pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see page 7)
and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic. U S X1
Integrated pressure control is standard. Description see

page 37 Sub assemblies
1 Pressure control
Note
6 HD-pilot valve
The spring return feature in the control unit is not a safety
device Ports for
The spool valve inside the control unit can get stuck in an X1 Pilot pressure
undefined position by internal contamination (contamina-
ted hydraulic fluid, abrasion or residual contamination from X2 External control pressure
system components). As a result, the axial piston unit can no M Measuring pressure on control piston
longer supply the flow specified by the operator.
Check whether your application requires that remedial mea-
sures be taken on your machine in order to bring the driven Dimensions see page 36
consumer into a safe position (e.g. immediate stop).
559
HD.D Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent

Characteristics
HD1D 'pSt ________________________________________________________ 10 bar
Control begin adjustable _________________________________ 2 to 20 bar

Standard setting of control begin _____________________________ 5 bar
1
30
25
20
15
ΔpSt = 10 bar
2
10
5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
3
HD2D 'pSt ________________________________________________________ 25 bar
Control begin adjustable _________________________________ 5 to 50 bar

Standard setting of control begin ___________________________ 10 bar
120
100 4
80
60
40
ΔpSt = 25 bar
20
5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement V
gmax
HD3D 'pSt ________________________________________________________ 35 bar
Control begin adjustable _________________________________ 7 to 50 bar 6

Standard setting of control begin ___________________________ 10 bar
120
100
80
7
60
ΔpSt = 35 bar
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg 8
Displacement V
gmax
560

Dimensions HD.D installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
M 250 385 161 275 49 210
M 355 432 181 300 54 234
500 492 200 325 61.5 258
A2
A13
NG A6 A7 A8
250 248 248 276
355 278 275 315
max. A3
A5
500 322 300 359
A7
B
X1 NG A12 A13 A14
X2 A4 X1 250 377 116 14
A6 to mounting flange face 355 425 132 20
X2
Control begin 500 483 144 20
HD-pilot valve
A14 A1to mounting flange face

M
M
A2
A13
max. A3
A5
A7
S
X1
X2 A4 X1
A6to mounting flange face X2
A8to mounting flange face Control begin
HD-pilot valve
Ports
3)
[bar]
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 O 4)
2)
3)
4)
561
HD.D with integrated pressure control

The pressure control overrides the HD-function i.e. below the Characteristic
setting of the pressure control the HD-function can be operated
It protects the pump against excessive pressure and subse-
Δpmax 10 bar
1
quential damage. 350

Setting range
Upon reaching the set pressure control level the pump will
swivel towards a lower displacement.
Setting range of the pressure control _______ 50 to 350 bar 2
Standard setting at 350 bar.
50
If a different setting is required, please state in clear text.
A recommended main line relief valve in the system to safe- q Vmin q Vmax
guard against excessive pressure spikes must have a cracking
pressure at least 20 bar above the pressure control setting. Flow
Schematic 3
Note
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent with integrated
– The beginning of control and the pressure control characte- pressure control
ristic are influenced by housing pressure. An increase in
housing pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see MB B R1 R2
page 7) and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic
– Standby operation see page 6. X2
4
Vgmax Vgmin
6
M
5
1
U S X1
Sub assemblies 6
1 Pressure control
6 HD-Pilot valve
Ports for
X1 Pilot pressure 7

8
562
HD.G with remotely adjustable pressure control

The pressure control overrides the HD function. Characteristic
$pmax 10 bar
nected to port X3. This relief valve is not included in the supply of

the DRG control.
Setting range
pressure 25 bar.
As long as the the pressure is below the set pressure of the q Vmin q Vmax
pensator spool are equal and the additional spring force keeps Flow
this spool in a shifted position (Spool in equilibrium). Schematic
As soon as the set pressure of the relief valve is reached, this Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent with integrated
valve will start to open and the pilot flow will result in a differential pressure control

pilot relief valve plus differential pressure at pressure control X2
mode.
The differential pressure at the pressure compensator spool Vgmax Vgmin
(item 1) is normally set at 25 bar, which results in a pilot flow at 6
X3 of approx. 2 L/min.
M
As a seperate pilot relief valve we recommend: 1
(electric) see RE 29166 U S X1 X3
2
Note
– The beginning of control and the pressure control characte-
ristic are influenced by housing pressure. An increase in Sub assemblies
housing pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see 1 Integrated pressure control compensator
page 7) and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic. 2 Separate pressure relief valve (not in scope of supply)
– Standby operation see page 6. 6 HD-pilot valve
Ports for
X1 Pilot pressure
(for HDG)
M Measuring of pressure on control piston (plugged)

563
Dimensions HD.D and HD.G Before finalizing your design, request a binding
Clockwise rotation
Pressure control NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
(or differential pressure HDG) 250 385 161 275 49 210
A10 1
A14 355 432 181 300 54 234
M A1 to mounting flange face
A12 to mounting flange face 500 492 200 325 61.5 258
X3 M X3
NG A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
A2
A13
250 248 248 276 380 112
A11
355 278 275 315 425 131 2
500 322 300 359 483 142
max. A3
A5
A7
B
NG A11 A12 A13 A14
X1 250 74 377 116 14
X2 A4 X1 355 82 425 132 20
X2 500 96 483 144 20 3
Pressure control
(or differential pressure HDG)
A10 A14 4
M
X3 A12 to mounting flange face M X3
A2
A13
A11
5
max. A3
A5
A7
S
X1
X2 A4 X1
X2 6
Ports
3)
[bar]
X1 Pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 O 7
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 O 4)
X3 (for HDG) Separate pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 O
M Measuring of pressure on control piston DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 X
2)
3)
4)
564
EP.D Electric control with proportional valve

The electro-hydraulic control with proportional valve enables a Technical data proportional-press. reducing
stepless adjustment of the pump displacement dependent on valve
an electric current signal.
EP1 EP2
The displacement is proportional to the current signal to the
solenoid of a proportional pressure reducing valve DRE4K Operating valtage (DC) 12V(±20%) 24V (±20%)
(see RE 29181), i.e. an increasing current signal results in an Control current
increasing displacement.
Control begin at Vg min 900 mA 450 mA
A minimum control pressure of 40 bar is required. The neces- Control end at Vg max 1400 mA 700 mA
sary control fluid is taken from the pump outlet pressure side.
Current limit 2,2 A 1,0 A
An external control pressure is not required when the operating
Nom. resistance (at 20°C) 2,4 : 12 :
be plugged prior to commissioning. Otherwise an external con- Duty cycle 100 % 100 %
trol pressure of at least 40 bar must be connected to port X2. Type of protection
A pilot pressure of 30 bar is required at port P to actuate the (HIRSCHMANN) IP65 IP65
proportional valve DRE4K. to DIN EN 60529
Pilot pressure at port P Various amplifiers for control of the proportional valve are
available in the Rexroth program, see RE 29181.
Required pmin 30 bar
Integrated pressure control EP.D is standard and overrides
pmax 100 bar the EP function. Description see page 43.
Important
– For operation on HF-fluids please observe the information in
RE 29181
(Proportional-pressure reducing valve Type DRE4K).
– The beginning of control and the pressure control characte-
housing pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see
page 7) and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic.
– Type of protection proportional valve to IP65
Note
The spring return feature in the control unit is not a safety
device
The spool valve inside the control unit can get stuck in an
undefined position by internal contamination (contamina-
ted hydraulic fluid, abrasion or residual contamination from
system components). As a result, the axial piston unit can no
longer supply the flow specified by the operator.
Check whether your application requires that remedial mea-
sures be taken on your machine in order to bring the driven
consumer into a safe position (e.g. immediate stop).
565
EP.D Electric control with proportional valve

Characteristic
EP2 EP1
800 1600
600 1200 1
400 800
200 400
2
0 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Vg
Displacement V
gmax
Schematic
Electric control with proportional pressure reducing valve
3
MB B R1 R2
X2
Vgmax Vgmin 4
7 M
P
1 8
5
U S MSt
Sub assemblies
1 Pressure control
7 Pilot valve 6
8 Proportional pressure reducing valve (see RE 29181)

incl. conductor box (Hirschmann plug without
suppressor diode) see page 50
Ports for 7
P Pilot pressure
MSt Measuring pilot pressure (plugged)
8
566

Dimensions EP.D installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
M A15 A1 to mounting flange face
250 385 161 275 115 248 276
M 355 432 181 300 116 275 315
500 492 200 325 123 300 359
A2
A14
NG A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
250 238 241 36 112 380 74
355 268 286 36 131 425 82
A17
max. A3
A7
500 294 328 43 142 483 96
A5
B
MSt NG A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18
1)
P X2 250 377 116 14 248 210 49
A9 P
A4 A18 X2 MSt 355 425 132 20 278 234 54
A8 to mounting flange face 500 483 144 20 322 258 61.5
A16 to mounting flange face 1)
Cable connection M16x1.5 for cable
diameter 4.5 to 10 mm
Plug description and dimensions
Counter clockwise rotation see page 50

M A13 to mounting flange face
M
A2
A14
A17
max. A3
A7
A5
S
MSt 1)
P X2
A9 P
A4 A18 X2 MSt
Ports
3)
[bar]
P Pilot pressure for proportional valveDIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 O
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 O 4)
MSt Measuring pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 X
2)
3)
4)
567
EP.D with integrated pressure control

The pressure control overrides the EP-function i.e. below the Characteristic
setting of the pressure control the EP-function can be operated.
Δpmax 10 bar
It protects the pump against excessive pressure and subse-
350 1
quential damage.
Integr. press. control

Setting range
Upon reaching the set pressure control level the pump will
swivel towards a lower displacement.
Setting range of the pressure control _______ 50 to 350 bar 2
Standard setting at 350 bar. 50
If a different setting is required, please state in clear text.
q Vmin q Vmax
A recommended main line relief valve in the system to safe-
guard against excessive pressure spikes must have a cracking Flow
pressure at least 20 bar above the pressure control setting.
Note Schematic 3
– The beginning of control and the pressure control characte- Electric control with proportional pressure reducing valve
ristic are influenced by housing pressure. An increase in MB B R1 R2
housing pressure results in a higher beginning of control
(see page 7) and thus a parallel shift of the control characte-
ristic X2
– Standby operation see page 6. 4
Vgmax Vgmin
7 M
P
1 8 5
U S MSt
Sub assemblies
6
1 Pressure control
7 Pilot valve
8 Proportional pressure reducing valve
incl. conductor box (Hirschmann plug without
suppressor diode) see page 46
7
Ports for
P Pilot pressure
8

568
EP.G with remotely adjustable pressure control

The pressure control overrides the EP- function. Characteristic
Δpmax 10 bar

nected to port X3. This relief valve must be ordered separately to
the DRG control.
Setting range
pressure 25 bar.
As long as the the pressure is below the set pressure of the q Vmin q Vmax
pensator spool are equal and the additional spring force keeps Flow
this spool in a shifted position (Spool in equilibrium). Schematic
As soon as the set pressure of the relief valve is reached, this Electric control with proportional pressure reducing valve and
valve will start to open and the pilot flow will result in a differential remotely adjustable pressure control

pilot relief valve plus differential pressure at pressure control X2
mode.
The differential pressure at the pressure compensator spool Vgmax Vgmin
7
X3 of approx. 2 L/min. M
In case another setting (range 14 to 50 bar) is required, please P
1
As a seperate pilot relief valve we recommend: 8
(electric) see RE 29166 U S MSt X3
2
Note
– The beginning of control and the pressure control characte- Sub assemblies
housing pressure results in a higher beginning of control (see 1 Integrated pressure control compensator
page 7) and thus a parallel shift of the control characteristic. 2 Separate pressure relief valve
– Standby operation see page 6. (not in scope of supply)
7 Pilot valve
8 Proportional pressure reducing valve
Ports for
P Pilot pressure for proportional valve
X3 Separate pressure relief valve (EPG)

569

Dimensions EP.D and EP.G installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Clockwise rotation
Pressure control (or differential pressure EPG) NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

A10 A1 to mounting flange face 250 385 161 275 115 248 276
1
A15 355 432 181 300 116 275 315
M
M X3 500 492 200 325 123 300 359
X3
A2
NG A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A14
A12
250 238 241 36 112 380 74
355 268 286 36 131 425 82 2
A17
500 294 328 43 142 483 96
max. A3
A7
A5
B
MSt NG A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18
P X2 1)
250 377 116 14 248 210 49
A9 P
A4 A18 A8 to mounting flange face X2 MSt 355 425 132 20 278 234 54
A16 to mounting flange face 500 483 144 20 322 258 61.5 3
A6 to mounting flange face 1)
A11 to mounting flange face Cable connection M16x1.5 for
cable diameter 4.5 to 10 mm
Plug description and dimensions
see page 50
Pressure control (or differential pressure EPG)
A10 A15 A1 to mounting flange face
M M X3
X3
A2
A14
A12
5
A17
max. A3
A7
A5
S
MSt
P X2 1)
A9 P
A4 A18 A8 to mounting flange face X2 MSt
Ports
3)
[bar]
7
P Pilot pressure for proportional valve DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 O
X2 External control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep (NG250 a. 355) 400 O
DIN 3852 M18x1.5; 12 deep (NG500) 400 O
X3 (for EPG) Separate pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 400 O
MSt Measuring pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 12 deep 100 X
2)
For the max. tightening torques the general information on page 52 must be observed 8
3)
4)
570

Visual swivel angle indicator installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
The swivel angle is indicated by a pin at the side of the port

plate (the cap nut must be removed).
The protruding lenght of the pin varies in accordance with the
position of the lens plate.
The pump is at zero if the pin is flush with the port plate.
The lenght of the pin is approx. 8 mm when swivelled to max.
angle Vg max.
Schematic example LRD – intial position Vg max
Vg max
Vg min
s
MB B A R1 R2
Vg min Vg max
U S
Dimensions
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 *
A5 A1 A1 A5 250 136.5 73 238 11
355 159.5 84 266 11
500 172.5 89 309 11
* Dimension to remove the cap nut
SW 19
A3
B
for clockwise for counter clock-
rotation wise rotation

571

Electric swivel angle indicator installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
In this case the pump swivel angle is indicated via an inductive

position transducer.
It converts the displacement of the control device into an elec-
trical signal This signal can be used to feed the value of swivel
angle to an amplifier card for example. 1
Inductive transducer Type IW9 – 03 – 01
Schematic example EPD – intial position Vg min

2
U
MB B α R1 R2
X2
3
Vg max Vg min
M
P
4
U S MSt
5
Dimensions
General dimensions see page10 to 17
NG A2
250 182
for clockwise for counter clock- 355 205
6
rotation wise rotation 500 218
9 7
B
A2 A2
8
Sub assemblies
9 Inductive transducer IW9-03-01
with conductor box (mating plug) Hirschmann plug without suppressore diode,
with cable connection M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5 to 10 mm
Plug description and dimensions see page 50
572
Installation instructions standard version

General
During commissioning and operation the axial piston unit must be full with fluid at all times and must be deaerated. This is also
important after prolonged periods of standstill since the system can empty itself via the hydraulic lines
The leakage fluid in the housing must be drained to tank via the highest positioned case drain port.
Under all operating conditions the case drain line and the suction line inside the reservoir must be below the minimum fluid level
The minimum inlet pressure at port S may not fall below 0.8 bar absolute.
See examples below. Further installation positions are possible, please consult us.
Mounting below the reservoir (standard) Mounting above the reservoir

Pump below the minimum reservoir fluid level
Recommemded installation position: 1 and 2
1 2 4 5
L1 L1 L1 L1
U R1
R2
U R1
R2 S S
S
R2
S
R1 U
R2
R1 U
3
L1
R2
U
R1
Installation Installation
Deaerate Filling Deaerate Filling
position position
1 – R1 (L1) 4 – R1 (L1)
2 – R2 (L1) 5 – R2 (L1)
3 U R2 (L1)
573
Installation instructions High-Speed-version

General
During commissioning and operation the axial piston unit must be full with fluid at all times and must be deaerated. This is also
important after prolonged periods of standstill since the system can empty itself via the hydraulic lines
The leakage chamber and suction chamber are connected inside the pump housing. A case drain line to tank is not necessary.
1
The suction line inside the reservoir must end up below the minimum fluid level under all operating conditions.
The minimum inlet pressure at port S may not fall below 0.8 bar absolute.
See examples below. Further installation positions are possible, please consult us 2
Mounting below the reservoir (standard)

Pump below the minimum reservoir fluid level
Recommended installation position: 1 and 2.
1 2
L1 L1
U R1 R2
4
S
S
R2 R1 U
3 5
L1
R2 U
R1 6
Installation
Deaerate Filling
position 7
1 R1 S (L1)
2 R2 S (L1)
3 U S (L1)
8
574
Plug
On EP-control and electric swivel angle indicator E
HIRSCHMANN DIN EN 175 301-803-A /ISO 4400
Without bi-directional suppressor diode
Type of protection to DIN/EN 60529: IP65
The sealing ring in the cable connection is suitable for a cable
diameter of 4.5 mm to 10 mm.
The HIRSCHMANN-plug is included in the delivery of the
pump.
Fastening screw M3 Cable connection M16x1.5

Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
MA = 0.5 Nm MA = 1.5 – 2.5 Nm
575
Notes
8
576
Safety information
– The pump A7VO was designed for operation in open loop circuits
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being burned;
take suitable safety measures (wear protective clothing).
– Dependent on the operating conditions of the axial piston pump (operating pressure, fluid temperature) deviations in the perfor-
mance curves can occur.
– Pressure ports:
All materials and port threads are selected and designed in such a manner, that they can withstand the peak pressures.
The machine and system manufacturer must ensure, that all connecting elements and hydraulic lines are suitable for the actual
operating conditions (pressures, flow, fluid, temperature) in accordance with the necessary safety factors.
– All given data and information must be adhered to..
– The product has not been released as a component in the safety concept of a total machine system acc. to DIN EN ISO 13849.
– The following tightening torques are valid:
the maximum permissible tightening torques MGMax are maximum values for the female threads in the pump casting and may not
be exceeded. For values see table below. -
- Fittings:
please comply with the manufacturer‘s information regarding the max. permissible tightening torques for the used fittings.
- Fastening bolts:
for fastening bolts to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torques in each individual case to VDI 2230.
- Plugs:
for the metal plugs, supplied with the axial piston unit the following min. required tightening torques MV apply (see table)
Max. perm. tightening Required tightening torque Across the flats

Port thread size torque in female threads of plugs or fittings in Allan screws
MG max MV
M14x1.5 DIN 3852 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M18x1.5 DIN 3852 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22x1.5 DIN 3852 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M33x2 DIN 3852 540 Nm 225 Nm 17 mm
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
577
Axial Piston Variable Pump

A1VO Series 10
RE 92650
Issue: 02.2013
Replaces: 01.2012
▶ Size 35
▶ Nominal pressure 250 bar
▶ Maximum pressure 280 bar
▶ Open circuit
Features Contents
▶ Variable pump in axial piston swashplate design for Ordering code 2
hydrostatic drives in an open circuit Hydraulic fluid 4
▶ The flow is proportional to the drive speed and Operating pressure range 6
displacement. Technical data 7
▶ The volume flow can be infinitely varied by adjusting the DR – Pressure control 9
swashplate angle. D3/D4 – Pressure control with override 10
▶ A wide range of highly adaptable control devices with DRS0 – Pressure control with load sensing 11
different pilot and regulating functions, for all important Dimensions, size 35 12
applications. Dimensions through drives 14
▶ Compact design Overview of attachments 15
▶ High efficiency Combination pumps A1VO + A1VO 15
▶ High power density Connector for solenoids 16
▶ Low noise Installation instructions 17
RE 92650 Edition: 02.2013, Bosch Rexroth AG

578
2 A1VO Series 10 | Axial Piston Variable Pump

Ordering code
Ordering code
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A1V O 035 C 2 0 / 10 B V B2 1 0 – 0
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 250 bar, maximum pressure 280 bar A1V
Operating mode
Sizes (NG)
03 Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 7 035
Control devices
04 Pressure controller ● DR
with override, electrically proportional, negative control U = 12 V ○ D3
U = 24 V ○ D4
with load sensing ● DRS0
Controller design and mounting

05 Cartridge C
Setting
06 Adjustable 2
Connector for solenoids1)

07 Without connector (without solenoid, only for hydraulic control) ● 0
DEUTSCH – molded connector, 2-pin, without suppressor diode (see page 16) ○ P
Auxiliary function
08 Without additional function 0
Series
Configuration of ports and fastening threads

10 ANSI, port threads with O-ring seal according to ISO 11926, metric fastening thread on through drive version B
11 Viewed on drive shaft cw R
ccw L
Seals
12 FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) V
Mounting flange
13 SAE J744 101-2 B2
Drive shafts (for permissible input torque, see page 8)

14 Splined shaft, ANSI B92.1a 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP, not for through drive S4
1 in 15T 16/32DP S5
● = Available ○ = On request
1) Connectors for other electric components can deviate

579
Axial Piston Variable Pump | A1VO Series 10 3

Ordering code
Ordering code
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A1V O 035 C 2 0 / 10 B V B2 1 0 – 0
1
Service line ports
15 Threaded connections A/B and S on opposite sides 1
Through drives (for fitting options, see page 15)

16 Flange SAE J744 Coupling for splined shaft2)
Fitting variant
Diameter Symbol3) Designation Diameter Designation 2
Without through drive 0000
82-2 (A) A2 5/8 in 9T 16/32 DP S2 A2S2
3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP S3 A2S3
7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP S4 A2S4
101-2 (B) B2 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP S4 B2S4
1 in 15T 16/32 DP S5 B2S5
3
Auxiliary function
17 Without additional function 0

18 Standard version 0
4
● = Available ○ = On request
2) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a

3) Configuration of securing holes when viewed to through drive,
with service line port B on right.

580

Hydraulic fluid
Hydraulic fluid
Prior to project planning, please refer to the detailed infor- Notes on the choice of hydraulic fluid
mation in our data sheet RE 90220 (mineral oil) concerning Choosing the correct hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of
the choice of hydraulic fluid and application conditions. the operating temperature in relation to the ambient tem-
perature, in an open circuit the reservoir temperature.
Further hydraulic fluids only after approval examination. The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating
Please contact us. viscosity in the operating temperature range is within the
optimum range (νopt see shaded area of the selection
▼ Selection diagram diagram). We recommended that the higher viscosity class
-40° -20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100° be selected in each case.
1600 1600
1000 Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C the operating
600
400 temperature is 60 °C. In the optimum operating viscosity
VG
VG 68
VG 32
VG 46
VG 22
200 range (νopt, shaded area), this corresponds to the viscosity

Viscosity ν [mm2/s]
10
100 classes VG 46 or VG 68. To be selected: VG 68.

0
60
40 36 Note
νopt The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure
20
16 and speed, can be higher than the reservoir temperature.
10 At no point of the component may the temperature be
higher than 115 °C. The temperature difference specified
below is to be taken into account when determining the
5 5
-40° -25° -10° 0° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° 115° viscosity in the bearing.
Temperature t [°C] Please contact us if the above conditions cannot be main-
tmin = -40 °C Hydraulic fluid temperature range tmax = +115 °C tained due to extreme operating parameters.
Viscosity and temperature of hydraulic fluid

Transport and storage at ambient temperature Tmin ≥ -50 °C Factory preservation:
Topt = +5 °C to +20 °C up to 12 months with standard, up to 24 months with long-term
(Cold) start-up νmax = 1600 TSt ≥ -25 °C t ≤ 1 min, without load (p ≤ 30 bar), n ≤ 1000 rpm
Permissible temperature difference ΔT ≤ 25 K between axial piston unit and hydraulic fluid
Warm-up phase ν < 1600 to 400 At p ≤ 0.7 • pnom, n ≤ 0.5 • nnom and t ≤ 15 min
Operating phase
Temperature difference ΔT = approx. 5 K between hydraulic fluid in the bearing and at port L
110 °C measured at port L
Continuous operation ν = 400 to 10 T = -25 °C to +90 °C measured at port L,
νopt = 36 to 16 no restriction within the permissible data
Short-term operation νmin ≥ 10 Tmax = +110 °C measured at port L, t < 1 min, p < 0.3 • pnom
FKM shaft seal T ≤ +115 °C See page 5

581

Hydraulic fluid
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid

Finer filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic
fluid, which increases the service life of the axial piston unit.
To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit,
1
a gravimetric analysis of the hydraulic fluid is necessary to
determine the amount of solid contaminant and to determine
the cleanliness level according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness
level of at least 20/18/15 is to be maintained.
At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum
115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according
2
to ISO 4406 is necessary.
Shaft seal
The FKM shaft seal is permissible for case drain tempera-
tures of -25 °C to +115 °C.
3
Note
For the temperature range below -25 °C, the values in the
table on page are4 to be observed.

582

Pressure at service line port B Definition

Nominal pressure pnom 250 bar absolute The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design pressure.
Maximum pressure pmax 280 bar absolute The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operating pressure within
Single operating period 0.05 s the single operating period. The sum of the single operating periods must not
exceed the total operating period (maximum number of cycles: approx. 1 million).
Total operating period 14 h
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) 14 bar1) absolute Minimum pressure on the high-pressure side (B) that is required in order to prevent
damage to the axial piston unit.
Rate of pressure change RA max 16000 bar/s Maximum permissible rate of pressure builld-up and reduction during a pressure
change over the entire pressure range.
Minimum pressure pS min 0.8 bar absolute Minimum pressure at suction port S (inlet) that is required in order to prevent
damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum pressure depends on the speed and
displacement of the axial piston unit.
Maximum pressure pS max 5 bar absolute
Case drain pressure at port L1, L2
Maximum pressure pL max 2 bar absolute Maximum 0.5 bar higher than inlet pressure at port S, but not higher than pL max.
▼ Rate of pressure change RA max

Note
pnom Operating pressure range valid when using hydraulic
fluids based on mineral oils. Values for other hydraulic
Δt
fluids, please contact us.
Pressure p
Δp
Time t
▼ Pressure definition
t2
Pressure p
Time t
1) Please contact us about lower pressures

583

Technical data
Technical data
Size NG 35
Geometric displacement, per revolution Vg max cm3 35 1
Vg min cm3 0
Rotational speed, atVg max3) nnom rpm 3000
maximum1)2) at Vg ≤ Vg max4) nmax rpm 3000
Flow at nnom and Vg max qv L/min 105
Power At nnom, Vg max and Δp = 250 bar P kW 44
Torque at Vg max and Δp = 250 bar T Nm 139
2
Rotary stiffness Drive shaft S4 c kNm/rad 18.6
Drive shaft S5 c kNm/rad 22.9
Moment of inertia for rotary group JTW kgm2 0.00159
Angular acceleration, maximum5) α rad/s² 5000
Case volume V L 0.6
Weight (without through drive) approx. m kg 16.9
3
Formulas
Vg • n • ηv
Flow qv = [L/min]
1000
Vg • Δp
Torque T = [Nm] 4
20 • π • ηmh
2π•T•n qv • Δp
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • ηt
Key
Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3
Δp = Differential pressure in bar
5
n = Speed in rpm
ηv = Volumetric efficiency
ηmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
ηt = Total efficiency (ηt = ηv • ηmh)
Note
▶ Theoretical values, without efficiency and tolerances; 6
values rounded.
▶ Exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum
permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a
reduction in operational service life or total destruction
of the axial piston unit. We recommend testing the
loads by means of experiment or calculation / simulation 7
and comparison with the permissible values.
1) The following values apply:

‒ For the optimum viscosity range from νopt = 36 to 16 mm2/s 8
‒ For hydraulic fluid based on mineral oils
2) If pressure psuction < 1 bar absolute at suction port S, please 5) The data are valid for values between the minimum required and
contact us. maximum permissible speed. Valid for external excitation (e. g.
3) These values are applicable at absolute pressure psuction ≥ 1 bar at engine 2 to 8 times rotary frequency; cardan shaft twice the rotary
suction port S. frequency). The limit value applies for a single pump only. The load
4) Maximum rotational speed (limit speed) at Vg ≤ Vg max. capacity of the connection parts must be considered.

584

Technical data

Size NG 35 35
Drive shaft in 7/8 1
Maximum radial force Fq Fq max N Please consult us if radial and/or axial
at distance a a mm forces occur.
(from shaft collar) a
Maximum axial force + Fax max N

Fax +
– − Fax max N
Note
For drives with radial loading (pinion, V-belt drives),
please contact us!

Size NG 35
Torque at Vg max and Δp = 250 bar1) Tmax Nm 139
S4 7/8 in TE max Nm 198
S5 1 in TE max Nm 319
Maximum through-drive torque TD max Nm 1391)
▼ Torque distribution
T1 T2
TE
1st pump 2nd pump T3
TD
Torque at 1st pump T1

Torque at 2nd pump T2
Torque at 3rd pump T3
Input torque TE = T1 + T2 + T3
TE < TE max
Through-drive torque TD = T2 + T3
TD < TD max
1) Efficiency not considered

2) For drive shafts without radial force

585

The pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the ▼ Circuit diagram DR
pump outlet within the control range of the variable pump. B X

1
The variable pump only supplies as much hydraulic fluid as
is required by the consumers. If the operating pressure
exceeds the pressure setting at the pressure valve, the
pump will regulate to a smaller displacement to reduce
the control differential.
▶ Basic position in depressurized state:Vg max.
2
▶ Setting range1) for pressure control: 100 to 250 bar.
▼ Characteristic DR
max
Hysteresis/pressure rise Δp
250
3
S L1 L2
Controller data
NG 35 4
Hysteresis and repeat precision Δp Maximum 5 bar
Pilot fluid consumption Maximum
approx. 3 L/min
100
5
qv min Volume flow qV [L/min] qv max
Characteristic valid for n1 = 1500 rpm and tfluid = 50 °C.
1) In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, the

permissible setting range must not be exceeded. Lower values
on request

586

D3/D4 – Pressure control with override
D3/D4 – Pressure control with override
With electric pressure adjustment using a proportional

solenoid, the high pressure can be freely adjusted depending
on the solenoid current. When the load pressure is changed
at the consumer, the pump flow volume is adjusted so that
the specified pressure is achieved again. If the solenoid
current drops below the start of control, the unit will go to
the set maximum pressure. The same thing applies if the
pilot signal is lost.
▼ Current-pressure characteristic (negative characteristic)
250
D3/D4 Deactivation of control
Maximum adjustable controller

pressure
140
Minimum adjustable controller pressure
0 Current I/I max 1
Characteristic measured with pump in zero stroke.

Further information on request.

587

DRS0 – Pressure control with load sensing
DRS0 – Pressure control with load sensing
In addition to the pressure control function (DR), the load- ▼ Circuit diagram DRS0
sensing controller works as a flow controller that operates B X

1
as a function of the load pressure to regulate the pump
displacement to match the consumer flow requirement. The
load-sensing controller compares pressure before and after DR
the sensing orifice and keeps the pressure drop (differential
pressure Δp) across the orifice – and therefore the flow
constant. S0
2
The swiveling in due to the pressure or flow controller will
always take priority.
▶ Setting range1) for pressure control: 100 to 250 bar.
Note
The DRS0 version has no connection from X to the reser-
voir so the LS relief has to be incorporated into the system. 3
▼ Characteristic DRS0
max
250 S L1 L2
Hysteresis/pressure rise Δp
Differential pressure Δp
4
Standard setting: 14 bar. If another setting is required,
please state in clear text.
Controller data
For data for the pressure control DR, please refer to page
9. Maximum flow differential (hysteresis and increase)
5
measured at drive speed n = 1500 rpm and tfluid = 50 °C
NG 35
100 Volume flow difference ΔqV max 3 L/min

Maximum control fluid consumption, approx. 4 L/min

6
Characteristic valid for n1 = 1500 rpm and tfluid = 50 °C.
▼ Characteristic at variable speed
qV max
max
Volume flow qv [L/min]
Hysteresis ΔqV
qV min
n min Speed n [rpm] n max 8

the permissible setting range must not be exceeded.
Lower values on request

588
12 A1VO Series 10 | Axial Piston Variable Pump Dimensions [mm]

Dimensions, size 35
Dimensions, size 35
DR – Pressure control / DRS0 – Pressure control with load sensing,

clockwise rotation
max. 9.7
max. 6.4
203
163 74.5
Flange B2 ø 14.3
ISO 3019-1
86
ø101.6 -0.05
0
Y
73
146
X
S 174
View X View Y
182.5
L2 L1 149
57
X
61
69.5
61
(X, L1, B) 57
149 163
B

589
Dimensions [mm] Axial Piston Variable Pump | A1VO Series 10 13

Dimensions, size 35
Drive shafts
Splined shaft SAE J744
S4 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP1) S5 1 in 15T 16/32DP1)
1
33 38
1/4-20UNC-2B2) 4)
1/4-20UNC-2B2) 4)
16 16
5 5
Ø 25
Ø 25
Ø 56.9
Ø 56.9
2
18 23
41 46
Ports 3
Designation Port for Standard3) Size4) pmax [bar]5) State8)
B Service line ISO 11926 1 5/16-12UN-2B; 20 280 O
deep
S Suction line ISO 11926 1 5/8-12UN-2B; 20 5 O
deep
L1 Case drain fluid ISO 11926 3/4-16UNF-2B; 15 deep 10 O6) 4
L2 Case drain fluid ISO 11926 3/4-16UNF-2B; 15 deep 10 X6)
X Load sensing ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B; 12 280 O7)
deep
7
1) ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
3) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate
standard.
4) Observe the general instructions on page20 concerning the
maximum tightening torques.
5) Short-term pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. 8
Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and fittings.
6) Depending on the installation position, L or L1 L2 must be connected
(see also installation instructions on page 17).
7) Only if an S0 controller is present.

590

Dimensions, through drive
Dimensions, through drive
Flange SAE J744 Coupling for splined shaft1) Short designation

Diameter Fitting variant
Symbol2) Designation Diameter Designation
Without through 0000
drive
82-2 (A) A2 5/8 in 9T 16/32 DP S2 A2S2
3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP S3 A2S3
7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP S4 A2S4
101-2 (B) B2 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP S4 B2S4
1 in 15T 16/32 DP S5 B2S5
A3
A2
A4
A6
A5
to mounting flange A1
Short NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A63)
des.
A2S2 35 227.6 8 32 106.4 82.55 M10 x 1.5
A2S3 35 227.6 8 38 106.4 82.55 M10 x 1.5
A2S4 35 227.6 8 41 106.4 82.55 M10 x 1.5
B2S4 35 227.6 8 41 146 101.6 M12 x 1.75
B2S5 35 227.6 8 46 146 101.6 M12 x 1.75
1) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure

angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
2) Configuration of securing holes when viewed to through drive,
with service line port B on right.
3) Continuous thread according to DIN 13; observe the general
instructions on page20 concerning the maximum tightening
torques.

591
Dimensions [mm] Axial Piston Variable Pump | A1VO Series 10 15

Overview of fitting options
Overview of fitting options
Through drive1) Fitting options – 2nd pump

Flange Coupling Short A1VO A4VG A10VG A10VO A10VNO A10VWO A10V(S)O External gear 1
for des. BR10 BR32 BR10 BR52/53 BR52/53 BR52 BR31 pump
splined NG NG NG NG NG NG NG
shaft
82-2 (A) 5/8 in A2S2 – – – 10 (U), – – 18 (U) Series F2)
18 (U)
3/4 in A2S3 – – – 10 (S), 28 (R) – 18 (S, R) –
18 (S, R) 2
101-2 (B) 7/8 in B2S4 – – 18 (S) 28 (S, R) – 28 (S) 28 (S, R) Series N2)
Series G2)
1 in B2S5 35 (S5) 28 (S) 28 (S) – – – – –
3
Combination pumps A1VO + A1VO
Total length A
A1VO (1st pump) A1VO (2nd pump)
NG35
4
NG35 431
By using combination pumps, it is possible to have several

independent circuits without the need for splitter gearboxes.
When ordering combination pumps, the type designations
of the 1st and 2nd pumps must be linked by a "+".
5
Ordering example:
A1VO035DRS0C100/10BRVB2S51B2S500+
A1VO035DRS0C100/10BRVB2S51000000
It is permissible to use a combination of two single pumps
of the same size (tandem pump), considering a dynamic A
mass acceleration of maximum 10 g (= 98.1 m/s2) without

6
additional support brackets.
For combination pumps consisting of more than two
pumps, the mounting flange must be rated for the permis-
sible mass torque.
1) Additional through drives are available on request

2) Bosch Rexroth recommends special versions of the external gear
pumps. Please contact us.

592

DEUTSCH DT04-2P-EP04
36.7
Molded connector, 2-pin, without bidirectional suppressor
diode (2)
(1)
36.7
There is the following type of protection with mounted
mating connector:
ø37
▶ IP67 (DIN/EN 60529) and
▶ IP69K (DIN 40050-9)
50
▼ Circuit symbol
68.5

If necessary, you can change the connector orientation by
turning the solenoid housing.
Mating connector To do this, proceed as follows:
DEUTSCH DT06-2S-EP04 ▶ Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this,
Bosch Rexroth material number R902601804 turn the mounting nut (1) one turn counter-clockwise.
▶ Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired orientation.
Consisting of: DT designation
▶ Retighten the mounting nut.
1 housing DT06-2S-EP04
Tightening torque: 5+1 Nm.
1 wedge W2S
(size WAF 26, 12kt DIN 3124)
2 sockets 0462-201-16141
On delivery, the position of the connector may differ from
The mating connector is not included in the delivery con- that shown in the brochure or drawing.
tents. This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request.

593


1
The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and Below-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit
air bled during commissioning and operation. This must is installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum
also be observed following a relatively long standstill as the fluid level.
axial piston unit may drain back to the reservoir via the
1 2
hydraulic lines.
SB
Particularly with the "drive shaft up/down" installation SB
2
position, filling and air bleeding must be carried out com- ht min
ht min
pletely as there is, for example, a danger of dry running. hmin hmin
amin
amin
The case drain fluid in the case interior must be directed to
S L2
the reservoir via the highest available drain port (L1, L2).
When multiple units are combined, make sure that the case
pressure of each unit is not exceeded. In the event of pres- 3
sure differences at the reservoir ports of the units, the
L1 S
shared reservoir line must be changed so that the minimum
permissible case pressure of all connected units is not 3 4
exceeded in any situation. If this is not possible, separate
SB SB
reservoir lines must be laid as required.
To achieve favorable noise values, decouple all connecting ht min ht min
4
lines using elastic elements and avoid above-reservoir hmin hmin
amin amin
installation. L1 S
In all operating conditions, the suction line and case drain
line must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid
level . The permissible suction height hS results from the
overall loss of pressure. However, it must not be higher 5
L2
than hS max = 800 mm. The minimum suction pressure at
port S must also not fall below 0.8 bar absolute during S
operation and during cold start.

Installation position position
See the following examples 1 to 11. 1 L1 S + L1
6
Additional installation positions are available upon request. 2 L2 S + L2
Recommended installation positions: 1 and 2 3 L1 or L2 S + L1 or L2
41) L1 or L2 S + L1 or L2
Note
In certain installation positions, an influence on the control For key, see page 18.
characteristics can be expected. Gravity, dead weight and 7
case pressure can cause minor shifts in control characteris-
tics and changes in response time.
1) Because complete air bleeding and filling are not possible in

this position, the pump should be air bled and filled in a horizontal
position before installation.

594


Above-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit Inside-reservoir installation is when the axial piston unit is
is installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. installed in the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The
Observe the maximum permissible suction height axial piston unit is completely below the hydraulic fluid.
hS max = 800 mm.
If the minimum fluid level is equal to or below the upper
5 6
edge of the pump, see chapter "Above-reservoir installation".
L2
L1
S
Note
Axial piston units with electrical component must not be
hS max
SB hS max SB installed below the hydraulic fluid level.
S ht min ht min
9 10
hmin hmin
amin amin L1 SB L2
SB S
7 8 ht min
ht min
L1 S hES min
S amin hmin amin
L1 hmin
S
11
hS max
hS max
SB SB
ht min ht min
ht min L2
hmin SB
hmin amin
amin
hmin amin
S

position
5 L1 L1 position
6 L2 L2 9 L1 L1 or S
7 L1 or S L1 or S 10 L2 L2 or S
81) L1 L1 111) L2 L2 or S
Key
L Filling / air bleeding
S Suction port
SB Baffle (baffle plate)

hmin Minimum required spacing to reservoir bottom (100 mm)
hES min Minimum necessary height needed to protect the axial
piston unit from draining (25 mm).
amin When designing the reservoir, make sure that there is
sufficient spacing between the suction line and the case
drain line. This prevents the heated, return flow from
being drawn directly back into the suction line.
1) Because complete air bleeding and filling are not possible in this
position, the pump should be air bled and filled in a horizontal
position before installation.

595


596

▶ The A1VO pump is designed to be used in open circuit. ▶ Not all versions of the product are approved for use in a
▶ The project planning, installation and commissioning of safety function pursuant to ISO 13849. If you require
the axial piston unit requires the involvement of qualified characteristic values relating to reliability (e.g. MTTFd) for
personnel. functional safety, please consult the responsible contact
▶ Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corre- person at Bosch Rexroth.
sponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly. ▶ Pressure controls are not backups against pressure
If necessary, these can be requested from Bosch overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to be provided
Rexroth. in the hydraulic system.
▶ During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of ▶ The following tightening torques apply:
burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the – Fittings:
solenoids. Take appropriate safety measures (e.g. by Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding
wearing protective clothing). the tightening torques of the fittings used.
▶ Depending on the operating conditions of the axial – Mounting bolts:
piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according
the characteristic may shift. to DIN 13 or with thread according to ASME B1.1,
▶ Service line ports: we recommend checking the tightening torque for
– The ports and fastening threads are designed for the the individual case according to VDI 2230.
specified maximum pressure. The machine or system – Female threads of the axial piston unit:
manufacturer must ensure that the connecting The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max
elements and lines correspond to the specified are maximum values for the female threads and must
application conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic not be exceeded. For values, see the following table.
fluid, temperature) with the necessary safety factors. – Threaded plugs:
– The service line ports and function ports are only For the metallic threaded plugs supplied with the
designed to accommodate hydraulic lines. axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of
▶ The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to. threaded plugs MV apply. For values, see the follow-
▶ Before finalizing your design, request a binding installa- ing table.
tion drawing.

tightening torque of the female tightening torque Hexagon socket for the
Standard Thread size threads MG max of the threaded plugs MV threaded plugs
ISO 11926 7/16-20UNF-2B 40 Nm 18 Nm 3/16 in
3/4-16 UNF-2B 160 Nm 70 Nm 5/16 in
1 5/16-12 UN-2B 540 Nm 270 Nm 5/8 in
1 5/8-12 UN-2B 960 Nm 320 Nm 3/4 in
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations
An den Kelterwiesen 14 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent. The data specified
72160 Horb a.N., Germany above only serve to describe the product. No statements concerning a
Tel. +49-7451-92-0 certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived from
info.ma@boschrexroth.de our information. The information given does not release the user from the
www.boschrexroth.com/brm obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our

597
Axial piston variable pump

A7VK Series 10
Metering pump for polyurethane components RE 94010
Issue: 04.2013
Replaces: 03.2009
▶ Sizes 12, 28, 55, 107

▶ Nominal pressure 250 bar
▶ Maximum pressure 315 bar
▶ Open and closed design
Features Inhalt
▶ Compact design Ordering code 2
▶ Reduced dimensions and mass in comparison to A2VK Operating pressure range 3
▶ Mounting flange, drive shaft and functions identical to Hydraulic fluids 4
A2VK, thus easy to replace Technical data 4
▶ Increased corrosion protection through special surface MA control 5
treatment Dimensions size 12 – open design 6
▶ Manual adjustment with prescision display and clamp Dimensions size 12 – closed design 8
unit to prevent accidental adjustment Dimensions size 28 – open design 10
▶ Double shaft sealing made of special material and Dimensions size 28 – closed design 12
flushing chamber to identify damage and protect envi- Dimensions size 55 – open design 14
ronment Dimensions size 55 – closed design 16
▶ Improved volumetric efficiency through robust rotary Dimensions size 107 – open design 18
group using proven axial tapered piston technology Dimensions size 107 – closed design 20
▶ Optionally available with mounted high-pressure relief High-pressure relief valve direct operated 22
valve Installation instructions 23
▶ Low noise level General instructions 24
Closed design (A7VKG)

▶ High permissible filling pressure for highly-viscous media or
hydraulic fluid by separating the filling channel and pump
housing
▶ Case drain fluid must be discharged
Open design (A7VKO)
▶ The housing is connected to the suction chamber. A case drain
line between the housing and reservoir is not requires
Note
The axial piston pump is approved for pumping polyure-
thane components (polyol and isocynate).
598
2 A7VK Series 10 | Axial piston variable pump

Ordering code
Ordering code
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
A7VK MA / 10 M S 5 –
Axial piston unit

01 Variable bent-axis design, nominal pressure 250 bar, maximum pressure 315 bar A7VK
Operation modes
02 Pump, closed design G
Pump, open design O
Sizes (NG)
03 Geometric displacement, see table of values on page 4 012 028 055 107
Control device
04 Control, manual with handwheel MA
Series
Version of port and fixing threads

06 Metric, port threads with profile sealing ring according to DIN 3852 M
07 Viewed from drive shaft clockwise (standard) R
counter-clockwise (option) L
Seals
08 FKM (fluor-caoutchouc), shaft seal in PTFE (polytetrafluor ethylene) S
Mounting flanges 012 028 055 107

09 Similar to ISO 3019-2 – 4-bolt 80-4 ● – – – KG
(can be changed to A2VK) 100-4 – ● – – LG
125-4 – – ● – MS
160-4 – – – ● PS
Drive shafts 012 028 055 107

10 Parallel keyed shaft according to DIN 6885 ø20 ● – – – P3
ø25 – ● – – P5
ø30 – – ● – P6
ø40 – – – ● P9
Service line ports

11 Closed design: threaded ports A and B, at side, opposite side
5
Open design: threaded ports A and S, at side, opposite side
Pressure relief valves

12 Without pressure relief valves (standard) 0000
High-pressure relief valve, diret controlled, fixed setting, Δp-setting value [bar] optional 100 A100
150 A150
200 A200
230 A230
250 A250

13 Standard version 0
Special version S
● = Available ○ = On request – = Not available

599
Axial piston variable pump | A7VK Series 10 3

Pressure at the service line ports A or B Definition

(high-pressure side)
Nominal pressure pnom 250 bar absolute The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design pressure.
1
Maximum pressure pmax 315 bar absolute The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operating pressure within
Single operating period 10 s the single operating period. The sum of the single operating periods must not ex-
ceed the total operating period.
Total operating period 50 h
Minimum pressure 10 bar absolute Minimum pressure on the high-pressure side (A or B) that is required in order to
prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Rate of pressure change RA max 9000 bar/s Maximum permissible rate of pressure build-up and pressure reduction during a
pressure change over the entire pressure range.
2
Closed design
Pressure at the service line ports A or B (low-pressure side)
Minimum filling pressure > 1 bar absolute Depending on viscosity and flow, the filling pressure must be adjusted in such a
Maximum filling pressure 30 bar absolute way that a complete filling of the low pressure side of the pump is ensured.
Open design
Pressure on suction port S (inlet) 3
Minimum filling pressure 1 bar absolute Depending on viscosity and flow, the filling pressure must be adjusted in such a
Maximum filling pressure 6 bar absolute way that a complete filling of the low pressure side of the pump is ensured.
▼ Rate of pressure change RA max

Note
pnom Values for other hydraulic fluids, please contact us. 4
Δt
Pressure p
Shaft seal
Δp
Permissible pressure loading
The service life of the shaft seal is affected by the speed of 5
the pump, the case pressure (case drain pressure) and the
Time t
properties of the medium being pumped. Momentary (t <
0.1 s) pressure spikes of up to 10 bar absolute are permit-
▼ Pressure definition ted. The service life of the shaft seal decreases with an
increase in the frequency of pressure spikes.
t2 Note 6
For monitoring the shaft seal for zero leakage, we recom-
mend connecting a barrier fluid monitor at ports U1 to U4.
Pressure p
The minimum case pressure must be equal to or greater

than the barrier fluid pressure. The barrier fluid pressure
must be equal to or greater than the external pressure on 7
the outer shaft seal.
Time t
8

600

Hydraulic fluids
Hydraulic fluids
The pump is approved for pumping and metering polyure- The permissible operating temperature is dependent on the
thane components (polyol and isocynate). For other hydrau- lubricity of the respective hydraulic fluid.
lic fluids, consult with Bosch Rexroth Service. The maximum operating temperature must not be exceeded
even locally.
The limiting values for viscosity are as follows: Filtration of the hydraulic fluid
▶ νmin = 5 mm2/s The filter should be arranged so that only filtered fluid
▶ νmax = 1600 mm2/s enters the pump. The finer the filter, the longer the service
Please contact us if different values are required. life of the axial piston pump.
On applications with highly viscous fluids bearing flushing ▶ We recommend a filter grade ηabs d125 μm
is recommended. Recommended flushing flow:
Size [L/min] Case drain fluid at closed design
12 2.5 The pump ports A and B are separated from the housing.
28 4 The case drain fluid must be removed via port T1 or T2
55 4 using a separate line.
107 8 ▶ Maximum case drain pressure pL max = 6 bar
Case drain fluid at open design

Operating temperature range
The housing is connected to the suction chamber. The
▶ Optimum operating temperature range t = 10 bis 50 °C
pressure on port S is also applied in the housing and must
▶ Maximum operating temperature range tmax = 80 °C
not exceed 6 bar. A case drain line between the housing
and reservoir is not required (port T1, T2 plugged).
Technical data
Size NG 12 28 55 107
Displacement geometrical, per revolution Vg max cm3 11.6 28.1 54.8 107
Vg min cm3 0 0 0 0
Flow at Vg max and speed n n = 1500 min-1 qv L/min 17.4 42.2 82.2 160.5
n = 1800 min-1 qv L/min 20.9 50.6 98.6 192.6
Power at Vg max, Δp = 250 bar and n = 1500 min-1 P kW 7.3 17.6 34.2 66.9
speed n n = 1800 min-1 P kW 8.7 21.1 41.1 80.3
Torque at Vg max and Δp = 250 bar T Nm 46.2 111.8 218.0 425.7
Mass (approx.) m kg 11.7 22.1 31 55
Determining the operating characteristics

Formulas Key
Vg • n • ηv Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3
Flow qv = [L/min]
1000 Δp = Differential pressure in bar
Vg • Δp n = Speed in min-1
Torque T = [Nm]
20 • π • ηmh ηv = Volumetric efficiency
2π•T•n qv • Δp ηmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • ηt ηt = Total efficiency (ηt = ηv • ηmh)
Note
Theoretical values, without efficiency and tolerances;
values rounded

601

MA control
MA control
Turning the handwheel turns a threaded spindle which Flow direction

steplessly adjusts the pump’s rotary group, and thus the Direction of rotation, viewed from drive shaft 1
flow in the range from Vg min to Vg max. A manual locking Design clockwise counter-clockwise
device, which is fitted as standard equipment, prevents Closed A to B B to A
unintentional adjustment. The precision adjustment display
Open S to A S to A
is integrated in the handwheel.
Size 12 28 55 107
Rotation on the handwheel approx. 23 30 40 50 2
Vg min to Vg max Us
Maximum torque in the approx. 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
handwheel Tmax Nm
Closed design Open design

3
▼ Schematic clockwise ▼ Schematic clockwise
U3 U4 U3 U4
U1 U T1 B U1 U T1 A
Vg min Vg min
4
Vg max Vg max
U2 T2 A U2 T2 S
▼ Schematic counter-clockwise ▼ Schematic counter-clockwise
U3 U4 U3 U4 6
U1 U T1 B U1 U T1 A
Vg min Vg min
Vg max Vg max
U2 T2 A U2 T2 S
8

602
Dimensions [mm]
Dimensions size 12 – open design
Direction of rotation clockwise
210
171
145
125
45°
851) 45°
51
39 14
U4 U3
163
U1 U T1
.5°
74
5.51)
69
57
12
49
38.5 38.5
S A
ø80-0.074
ø79.8
53
16
5.5 100
U2 T2 A
49 51
80 M8
ø100
Direction of rotation counter-clockwise Direction of rotation clockwise

ø100 ø100
View Z
U3 U3
125
S A A S
Z
16
0.51) 0.51)
66 66 66 66
1) Center of gravity

603
Dimensions [mm]
▼ Parallel keyed shaft to DIN 6885

P3 ‒ A6x6x25.5
16
1
M6 x 11)2)
5 Key widht 6
ø20+0.002
+0.015
22.5
ø28
2
30
Ports Standard4) Size2) pmax [bar]3) State6)

A Service port DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 14 tief 315 O 3
S Suction/filling port DIN ISO 228 G1 1/4; 20 tief 6 O
T1 Case drain fluid DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 tief 6 X
U Bearing flushing DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 tief 6 X
U1, U2 Barrier fluid DIN 3852 M10 x 1; 8 tief 35) O
4
8
1) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13) 5) The minimum case pressure must be equal to or greater than the
2) Observe the general instructions on page 24 for the maximum barrier fluid pressure. The barrier fluid pressure must be equal to
tightening torques. or greater than the external pressure on the outer shaft seal.
3) Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. 6) O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery)
Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and fittings. X = Plugged (in normal operation)
4) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate standard.

604
Dimensions [mm]
Dimensions size 12 – closed design
Direction of rotation clockwise and counter-clockwise identical dimensions
210
171
145
125
45°
851) 45°
51
39 14
U4 U3
163
U1 U T1
.5°
74
5.51)
69
57
12
38.5 38.5
49
ø80-0.074
ø79.8
A B
53
16
100
U2 5.5 T2 B
49 51
80 M8
ø100
ø100
U3
B A
0.61)
66 66

605
Dimensions [mm]
▼ Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885

P3 ‒ A6x6x25.5
16
1
M6 x 11)2)
5 Key width 6
ø20+0.002
+0.015
22.5
ø28
2
30

A Service port DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 14 tief clockwise 30 O 3
counter-clockwise 315
B Service port DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5; 14 tief clockwise 315 O
T1 Case drain fluid DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 tief 6 O6)
T2 Case drain fluid DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 tief 6 X6)
U Bearing flushing DIN 3852 M12 x 1.5; 12 tief 6 X 4
1) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13) 5) The minimum case pressure must be equal to or greater than the 8
3) Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. 6) Depending on installation position, T1 or T2 must be connected
Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and fittings. (see also installation instructions page 23).
4) The spot face can be deeper than specified in the appropriate standard. 7) O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery)

606
Dimensions [mm]

239
199
173
163
94.61)
45°
61 45°
42 14
U1 U T1 U4 U3
163
.5°
75
5.51)
70
65
60
12
48
ø100-0.087
S A
ø99.8
48
70
23
111
8
U2
54 61 T2 A
100 M10
ø125

ø100 ø100
View Z
163
U3 U3
S A A S
23
S Z
0.71) 0.71)
82.5 82.5 82.5 82.5

607
Dimensions [mm]

P5 ‒ AS8x7x40
19 1
M8 x 1.251)2)
6 Key width 8
ø25+0.002
+0.015
ø35
28
2
44.5

A Service port DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 16 tief 315 O 3
4
8

608
Dimensions [mm]
239
199
173
163
94.61)
45°
61 45°
42 14
U1 U T1 U4 U3
163
.5°
75
5.51)
70
65
60
12
48
ø100-0.087
A B
ø99.8
48
70
23
111
8
U2
54 61 T2 B
100 M10
ø125
ø100
U3
B A
0.71)
82.5 82.5

609
Dimensions [mm]

P5 ‒ AS8x7x40
19 1
M8 x 1.251)2)
6 Key width 8
ø25+0.002
+0.015
ø35
28
2
44.5

A Service port DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 16 tief clockwise 30 O 3
B Service port DIN 3852 M27 x 2; 16 tief clockwise 315 O

610
Dimensions [mm]

277
237
211
199 45
45° °
1111)
75
59 16
173
U1 U T1 U4 U3
.5°
5.51)
85
79
75
74
61
12
ø125-0.1
ø124
61
79
27 S A
129
10
73 75 A
U2 T2 M16
123
ø160

ø100 ø100
View Z U3 U3
199
S A A S
Z
27
S
0.81) 0.81)
86 86 86 86

611
Dimensions [mm]

P6 ‒ AS8x7x43
28 1
M12 x 1.51)2)
9.5 Key width 8

+0.002
ø30+0.015
32.9
ø45 2
49

S Suction/filling port DIN ISO 228 G2; 27 tief 6 O
4
8

612
Dimensions [mm]
277
237
211
199 45
45° °
1111)
75
59 16
173
U1 U T1 U4 U3
.5°
5.51)
85
79
75
74
61
12
ø125-0.1
ø124
61
79
B
27
A
129
10
73 75
U2 T2 B M16
123
ø160
ø100
U3
B A
0.81)
86 86

613
Dimensions [mm]

P6 ‒ AS8x7x43
28 1
M12 x 1.51)2)
9.5 Key width 8

+0.002
ø30+0.015
32.9
ø45 2
49


614
Dimensions [mm]

322
282
256
253
45
1241) 45° °
90
78 17
U1 U T1 U4 U3
183
.5°
5.51)
95
89
87
78
12
ø160-0.1
ø158
78
97
36
154
S A
16
92 90 A
U2 T2
160 M16
ø200

View Z ø100 ø100
253
U3 U3
36
S A A S
Z
S
0.71) 0.71)
103 103 103 103

615
Dimensions [mm]

P9 ‒ AS12x8x63
28 1
M12 x 1.51)2)
9.5 Key width 12

+0.002
ø40+0.018
43
ø50 2
68

4
8

616
Dimensions [mm]
322
282
256
253
45
1241) 45° °
90
78 17
U1 U T1 U4 U3
183
.5°
5.51)
95
89
87
78
12
ø160-0.1
ø158
78
97
36
154
A B
16
92 90 B
U2 T2
160 M16
ø200
ø100
U3
B A
0.71)
103 103

617
Dimensions [mm]

P9 ‒ AS12x8x63
28 1
M12 x 1.51)2)
9.5 Key width 12

+0.002
ø40+0.018
43
ø50 2
68


618
Dimensions [mm]
High-pressure relief valve direct operated
High-pressure relief valve direct operated
Direction of rotation View Y

clockwise
E
F
Y
G
T3
C
H
D
View Z
counter-clockwise E1
Connection diagram for

high-pressure relief valve
A Z
F1
G
T3
B
C
H D
NG A2) B2) C D E E1 F F1 G H Service line port Return port

A, B1) T31)
12 32 32 89 112 93.5 142 42 53 131 25 M22 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5
28 40 40 107.5 132.5 127.5 181 54 67 143 26 M27 x 2 M22 x 1.5
55 48 48 114 142 157 221 65 79 162 31.5 M33 x 2 M27 x 2
107 60 60 135.5 168 208 272 86 100 206 38.5 M42 x 2 M33 x 2
Differential pressure setting Mounting

The following values are available for selection of the diffe- Mounting of the high-pressure relief valve depends on the
rential pressure setting (fixed setting): direction of rotation.
Preferred values [bar]: 100, 150, 200, 230, 250 With the closed design, the PRV is always mounted at
If not specified in the order, valves will be set to the diffe- pressure port A. As described, the position of port A
rential pressure Δp = 250 bar. depends here on the direction of rotation.
In the closed design, the PRV is mounted at pressure port B
(viewed on drive shaft – right side) for clockwise rotation.
For counter-clockwise rotation, it is mounted at pressure
port A (viewed on drive shaft – left side).
1) DIN 3852, observe the general instructions on page 24 for the 2) Fixing thread according to DIN 13; observe the general instructions
maximum tightening torques. on page 24 for the maximum tightening torques.

619

General Installation position

During commissioning and operation, the axial piston unit A standard installation shows the drive shaft in a horizontal
1
must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled. The barrier position. Further installation positions are available upon
liquid chambers must be filled with suitable barrier liquid. request.
This must also observed following a relatively long stand-
still as the axial piston unit may drain back to the reservoir Installation position Air bleed Filling
via the hydraulic lines. 1 Open design T1 S
2
lines using elastic elements.
In all operating conditions, the suction and case drain lines U4
U1 U T1
must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
U3
Closed design
The case drain fluid in the pump housing must be directed 3
to the reservoir via the highest available drain port (T1, T2).
U2 T2 S
Open design
2 Closed design T1 T1
The housing is internally connected to the suction chamber.
A case drain line between the housing and reservoir is not
required. 4
U1 U T1 U4
Note U3
For monitoring the shaft seals for zero leakage, we recom-
mend connecting a barrier fluid monitor at ports U1 to U4.
U2 T2 B 5
Key
B Service line port
S Suction/filling port
T1/T2 Filling/air bleeding case drain port 6
U1 bis U4 Barrier fluid port
U Bearing flushing

620

▶ The pump A7VK is designed for pumping polyurethane ▶ Before finalizing your design, request a binding installa-
components in open and closed design. tion drawing.
▶ The project planning, installation and commissioning of ▶ Not all versions of the product are approved for use in a
the axial piston unit requires the involvement of quali- safety function pursuant to ISO 13849. If you require
fied personnel. characteristic values relating to reliability (e.g. MTTFd)
▶ Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corre- for functional safety, please consult the responsible
sponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly. contact person at Bosch Rexroth.
If necessary, these can be requested from Bosch ▶ A pressure relief valve is to be fitted in the hydraulic system.
Rexroth. ▶ The following tightening torques apply:
▶ During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns – Fittings: Observe the manufacturer’s instructions
on the axial piston unit and pressure relief valve on the regarding the tightening torques of the fittings used.
service line port. Take appropriate safety measures (e.g. – Mounting bolts: For mounting bolts with metric ISO
by wearing protective clothing). thread according to DIN 13, we recommend checking
▶ Service line ports the tightening torque in individual cases in
– The ports and fastening threads are designed for the accordance with VDI 2230.
specified maximum pressure. The machine or system – Female threads in the axial piston unit: The maxi-
manufacturer must ensure that the connecting ele- mum permissible tightening torques MG max are maxi-
ments and lines correspond to the specified operating mum values of the female threads and must not be
conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, tempera- exceeded. For values, see the following table.
ture) with the necessary safety factors. – Threaded plugs: For the metallic threaded plugs
– The service line ports and function ports are only supplied with the axial piston unit, the required
designed to accommodate hydraulic lines. tightening torques of threaded plugs MV apply. For
▶ The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to. values, see the following table.
DIN 38521) M10 x 1 30 Nm 15 Nm2) 5 mm
M12 x 1.5 50 Nm 25 Nm2) 6 mm
M16 x 1.5 100 Nm 50 Nm 8 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
M33 x 2 540 Nm 225 Nm 17 mm
M42 x 2 720 Nm 360 Nm 22 mm
DIN ISO 228 G1 1/4 720 Nm − −
G1 1/2 960 Nm – –
G2 1200 Nm – –
G2 1/2 2000 Nm – –
1) The tightening torques apply for screws in the “dry” state as recei- 2) In the “lightly oiled” state, the MV is reduced to 10 Nm for M10 x 1
ved on delivery and in the “lightly oiled” state for installation. and to 17 Nm for M12 x 1.5.
Bosch Rexroth AG © Alle Rechte bei Bosch Rexroth AG, auch für den Fall von Schutzrechts-
Mobile Applications anmeldungen. Jede Verfügungsbefugnis, wie Kopier- und Weitergaberecht,
Glockeraustraße 4 bei uns. Die angegebenen Daten dienen allein der Produktbeschreibung.
89275 Elchingen, Germany Eine Aussage über eine bestimmte Beschaffenheit oder eine Eignung für
Tel. +49 7308 82-0 einen bestimmten Einsatzzweck kann aus unseren Angaben nicht abgeleitet
info.ma@boschrexroth.de werden. Die Angaben entbinden den Verwender nicht von eigenen Beurtei-
www.boschrexroth.com lungen und Prüfungen. Es ist zu beachten, dass unsere Produkte einem
natürlichen Verschleiß- und Alterungsprozess unterliegen.

621

RE 92100/05.11 1/68
A4VSG
Data sheet

Size 40 to 1000
Closed circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for standard program 2 – Flow and pressure side reversible (over centre operation)
– Motor mode possible
Technical data 5
– Low noise level
Summary of control devices 10
Dimensions, sizes 40 to 1000 16 – Drive shaft can absorb axial and radial forces
Through drive 34 – High power/weight ratio
– Modular design
Permissible mass bending moment 35
Overview of mounting options on A4VSG 36 – Through drive and pump combinations possible
Combination pumps dimensions 38 – Visual swivel angle indicator
– Optional installation position
– Operation on HF-fluids under reduced operational data
Auxiliary pumps H02, H04 and H06 54 possible
Complete schematic H02 56
The A4VSG axial piston variable pump in swashplate
Complete schematic H04 57 design is designed for hydrostatic drives in closed circuits.
Dimensions H02 and H04 58 Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement.
By adjusting the swashplate angle it is possible to steplessly
Complete schematic H06 60 vary the output flow.
Dimensions H06 62
Valve block SDVB 64
For descriptions of the control devices, see separate data sheets:
Filter mounted in boost circuit ...F 65
RE 92056, RE 92060, RE 92072,
RE 92076, RE 92080, RE 92084
622
2/68 Bosch Rexroth AG A4VSG Series 10, 11 and 30 RE 92100/05.11

A4VS G / – 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Hydraulic fluid 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Mineral oil and HFD-fluids (no code) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
01
HFA-, HFB and HFC-hydraulic fluids ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – E–
Axial piston unit

02 Swashplate design, variable A4VS
Operation mode
03 Pump, closed circuit G
Size (NG)
04 ^
= displacement Vg max [cm3] 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control devices
Manual control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – MA..
(RE 92072)
Electric motor control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – EM..
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HM..
Hydraulic control, with servo/proportional valve (RE 92076) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS..
Hydraulic control, with proportional valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EO..
05 Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent (RE 92080) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HD..1)
Electrohydraulic control
(RE 92084) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ EP..1)
with proportional solenoid
Pressure control, swiveling to one side of centre ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DR..1)2)
(RE 92060)
Pressure control for parallel operation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DP..1)2)
Secondary speed control (RE 92056) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DS..
Series
Series 1, index 0 (index 1) ● ● – – – – – – – 10(11)3)
06
Series 3, index 0 – – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 30
07 counter clockwise L
bi-directional W1)
Seals 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

NBR (nitrile-caoutchouc), shaft seal FKM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● P
08
FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) / HFD operation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● V
Drive shaft
Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 P
09
Splined shaft DIN 5480 Z
Mounting flange 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Based on ISO 3019-2 metric 4-hole ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – B
10
8-hole – – – – – – ● ● ● H
● = Available ❍ = On request – = Not available

1) Bi-directional rotation not possible in all cases, please observe separate data sheets for the controls
2) Operation only on one side of centre
3) Design with HD- and EP-controls in series 11
623
RE 92100/05.11 A4VSG Series 10, 11 and 30 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/68

A4VS G / – 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Service line ports 1

11 SAE flange ports A and B, located on same side, metric fastening thread 10
Through drive 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Without attachment pump, without through drive ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N00
With through drive for mounting an axial piston or gear pump ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● K...
Coupler for
Flange to mount 2
splined shaft
4)
125, 4-hole (ISO ) 32x2x14x9g A4VSO/G 40 ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 31
140, 4-hole (ISO4)) 40x2x18x9g A4VSO/G 71 – ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● 33
160, 4-hole (ISO4)) 50x2x24x9g A4VSO/G 125 – – ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ 34
160, 4-hole (ISO4)) 50x2x24x9g A4VSO/G 180 – – – ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ 34
224, 4-hole (ISO4)) 60x2x28x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 250 – – – – ● ● ● ● ● 35
224, 4-hole (ISO4)) 70x3x22x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 355 – – – – – ● ● ❍ ❍ 77 3
315, 8-hole (ISO4)) 80x3x25x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 500 – – – – – – ● ❍ ❍ 43
400, 8-hole (ISO4)) 90x3x28x9g A4VSO/G, A4CSG 750 – – – – – – – ● ● 76
400, 8-hole (ISO4)) 100x3x32x9g A4VSO/G 1000 – – – – – – – – ● 88
80, 2-hole (ISO4)) 3/4in 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10/52, 18/31 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B2
100, 2-hole (ISO4)) 7/8in 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO 28/31 ● ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B3
4
100, 2-hole (ISO4)) 1in 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO 45/31 ❍ ● ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B4
125, 2-hole (ISO4)) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71/31 – ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ B5
160, 4-hole (ISO4)) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71/32 – ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B8
12 125, 2-hole (ISO4)) 1 1/2in 38-4(SAE C-C) A10VSO 100/31 – – ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ B6
180, 4-hole (ISO4)) 1 1/2in 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO 100/32 – – ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B9
180, 4-hole (ISO4)) 1 3/4in 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO 140/31/32 – – – ● ● ● ● ● ❍ B7
5
82-2 (SAE A) 5/8in 16-4 (SAE A) AZPF-1X-004...022 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ 01
82-2 (SAE A) 3/4in 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10, 18/31/52(3) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ❍ 52
101-2 (SAE B) 7/8in 22-4 (SAE B) AZPN-1X-020...032,
A10VO 28/31/52(3) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ 68
101-2 (SAE B) 1in 25-4 (SAE B-B) PGH4, A10VO45/31 ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ 04
127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/4in 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO 71/31 – ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 07
6
127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/2in 38-4 (SAE C-C) PGH5, A10VO100/31 – – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 24
152-4 (SAE D) 1 3/4in 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO 140/31 – – ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ 17
with through-drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter
flange, closed with cover plate ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 99
Boost pump mounted

A piped auxiliary pump for the boost circuit ● ● ● ● ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ● H02
A common piped auxiliary pump for the boost and control circuit 7
(only for EO1 and EO1K) ● ● ● – ▲ – – – – H04
Separately piped auxiliary pumps for the boost circuit and the con-
trol circuit (only for HD1T and HD1U) including a pressure relief ● ● ● ● ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ● H06
valve for the control circuit
Combination pumps
1. Combination pumps consisting of axial piston units – for ordering example, see page 34; for summary of mounting options, see
8
page 36
2. If delivery with mounted gear pump is desired, please contact us
● = Available ▲ = Not for new projects, please contact us, replacement A4CSG see RE 92105
❍ = On request – = Not available
4) Acc. to ISO 3019-2 metric
624

A4VS G / – 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Valves 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Without valve block ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 0
13 Valve block SDVB mounted ● ● ● ● ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ● 9
Valve block SDVB 16/40 mounted5) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ – – – – – 4
Filtration
Without filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N
Filter mounted in boost circuit ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ F
14 Sandwich plate filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ●6) – – Z
(for HS- and DS-control, see RE 92076 and RE 92056)
Filter mounted in boost circuit and sandwich plate filter
● ● ● ● ● ● ●6) – – U
for HS- and DS-controls
● = Available ▲ = Not for new projects, please contact us, replacement A4CSG see RE 92105
❍ = On request – = Not available
5) With direct operated flushing spool and pilot operated high-pressure relief valve
6) For the size 500 only available for the DS-control, HS see RE 92076
625
Technical data
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data sheets The correct choice of hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of the
RE 90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (environmentally accept- operating temperature in relation to the ambient temperature:
able hydraulic fluids) and RE 90223 (HF hydraulic fluids) for in a closed circuit, the circuit temperature.
detailed information regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating 1
and conditions of use. viscosity in the operating temperature range is within the
The variable pump A4VSG is suitable for operation with HFA, optimum range (Qopt), see shaded area of the selection dia-
HFB, HFC and HFD fluids. gram. We recommend, that the higher viscosity class
When operating with HF or environmentally acceptable is selected in each case.
hydraulic fluids, restrictions of the technical data and seals
are required acc. to RE 90223 or RE 90221. Example: At an ambient temperature of X °C, an operating
When ordering, indicate the hydraulic fluid that is to be used. temperature of 60 °C is set in the circuit. In the optimum operat-
2
ing viscosity range (Qopt, shaded area), this corresponds to the
Selection diagram viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68; to be selected: VG 68.
Note
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100
1000 1000 The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure and
600 speed, is always higher than the circuit temperature. At no point
400 of the component may the temperature be higher than 90 °C,
however.
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG
200 3
Viscosity Q [mm2/s]
22
32
46
68
10

0
100 operating parameters, please contact us.

80
60
40
36
Qopt
20
16 4
10 10
–25 –10 10 30 50 70 90 Temperature
t [°C]
t min = –25°C Hydraulic fluid temperature range t max = + 90°C

in the circuit
5
Viscosity and temperature

Transport and storage Tmin t –50 °C up to 12 months with standard factory preservation
Topt = +5 °C to +20 °C up to 24 months with long-term factory preservation
(Cold) start-up1) Qmax = 1000 TSt t 40 °C t d 3 min, without load (p d 50 bar), n d 1000 rpm
Permissible temperature difference 'T d 25 K between axial piston unit and hydraulic fluid 6
Warm-up phase Q < 1000 to 100 T = –40 °C to –25 °C for pnom, 0.5 • nmax and t d 15 min
Operating phase
Maximum temperature 90 °C measured at the case drain port
Continuous operation Q = 100 to 15 T = –25 °C to +90 °C measured at the case drain port,
Short-term operation Qmin = < 15 to 5 Tmax +90 °C measured at the case drain port,
t < 3 min, p < 0.3 • pnom 7
1) At temperatures below –25 °C, an NBR shaft seal is required (permissible temperature range: –40 °C to +90 °C).
8
626
Technical data
Bearing flushing Shaft seal
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is Permissible pressure loading
required for a safe, continuous operation:
The service life of the shaft seal is influenced by the pump
– Applications with water-containing special fluids due to speed and the case drain pressure. It is recommended that
limited lubricity and narrow operating temperature range the average, continuous case drain pressure of 2 bar absolute
at operating temperature not be exceeded (maximum permis-
– Operation with limiting conditions for temperature and
sible case drain pressure 4 bar absolute at reduced speed,
viscosity
see diagram). Momentary (t < 0.1 s) pressure spikes of up
– With vertical installation (drive shaft facing upwards) to to 10 bar absolute are permitted. The service life of the shaft
ensure lubrication of the front bearing and the shaft seal. seal decreases with an increase in the frequency of pressure
spikes.
Bearing flushing is carried out at port "U" in the front flange
area of the variable pump. The flushing fluid flows through The case pressure must be equal to or greater than the
the front bearing and leaves the pump together with the case external pressure on the shaft seal.
drain fluid.
750
355
180
500
1000
Depending on pump size, the following flushing flows are rec-
250
125
71
40
ommended: Size
4
Size 40 71 125 180 250
recommended qSp L/min 3 4 5 7 10
Case drain pressure pL abs [bar]
flushing flow 3
Size 355 500 750 1000
recommended qSp L/min 15 20 30 40
flushing flow 2
These recommended flushing flows will cause a pressure drop

of approx. 2 bar (series 1) and 3 bar (series 3) between the ent-
rance to port„U“ and the pump case ( including the pipe fittings. 1
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Notes regarding series 30 Speed n [rpm]
When using external bearing flushing, the throttle screw in port U
must be turned in to the end stop. Temperature range
The FKM shaft seal is permissible for case drain temperatures
Filtration of the hydraulic fluid from -25 °C to +90 °C.
Finer filtration improves the cleanliness level of the hydraulic Note
fluid, which increases the service life of the axial piston unit. For application cases below -25 °C, an NBR shaft seal is
To ensure the functional reliability of the axial piston unit, a gravi-
See RE 90300-03-B.
metric analysis of the hydraulic fluid is necessary to determine
least 20/18/15 is to be maintained.
Depending on the system and the application, for the A4VSG,
we recommend
Filter cartridges E20 t100.
With an increasing differential pressure at the filter cartridges,
the E value must not deteriorate.
"A filter mounted in the boost circuit" is optionally available with
er designation F or U.
For description, see page 65
627
Technical data
Pressure at service line port (pressure port) A or B Definition
The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design 1
Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 400 bar absolute pressure.
Single operating period _____________________________ 1 s
Total operating period ____________________________ 300 h Maximum pressure pmax
The maximum pressure corresponds the maximum operating
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) __________ 15 bar pressure within the single operating period. The sum of the
Minimum pressure (low-pressure side) single operating periods must not exceed the total operating
The minimum pressure is speed related, see diagram period.
NG750 and 1000 Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) 2
20
18
Boost pressure pe [bar]
16 NG40 to 500
Minimum pressure (low-pressure side)
14
Minimum pressure at the low-pressure side (A or B), which is
12 required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit.
Min. recommended
10 setting (gauge reading) Rate of pressure change RA 3
8 Maximum permissible rate of pressure rise and reduction dur-
6 ing a pressure change over the entire pressure range.
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 t2
Speed n [rpm] Single operating period t1 tn
Pressure p

Rate of pressure change RA max _____________ 16000 bar/s Nominal pressure pnom
4
pA nom pA max
pnom
Pressure p
't
'p
Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) 5
Time t
Time t
Inlet
Flow direction 6
Recommended boost pressure pSp
Direction Swivel range*
NG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 of rotation
bar 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 25 25
clockwise counter-clockwise
Recommended boost pressure for a common auxiliary pump B to A A to B right hand
for boost and control fluid circuit (EO1...H04) A to B B to A left hand
pSp ____________________________________________ 25 bar 7
* cf. swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
Maximum boost pressure – auxiliary pump pSp max for right hand
MA-, EM-, HM-, HS-, EO-, DS-control ______________ 50 bar left hand
HD- and EP-control _____________________________ 25 bar

DR- and DP-control _______________________________16 bar
Auxiliary pump inlet pressure,see data sheet for the mounted
auxiliary pump.
8
Boost pump, see page 54.
Observe details on the control pressure from the respective,
separate data sheets for the control devices.
628
Technical data
Size NG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Displacement geometric, per revolution
Vg max cm3 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Speed
maximum at Vg max n max rpm 3700 3200 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1600
Flow
at nmax qv max L/min 148 227 325 432 550 710 900 1200 1600
at nE = 1500 rpm qVE L/min 60 107 186 270 375 533 750 1125 1500
Power
at nmax 'p = 350 bar Pmax kW 86 132 190 252 321 414 525 700 933
at nE = 1500 rpm PE kW 35 62 109 158 219 311 438 656 875
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 350 bar Tmax Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
'p = 100 bar T Nm 64 113 199 286 398 564 795 1193 1590
Rotary stiffness of drive shaft
P c kNm/rad 80 146 260 328 527 800 1145 1860 2730
Z c kNm/rad 77 146 263 332 543 770 1136 1812 2845
Moment of inertia for rotary group JGR kgm2 0.0049 0.0121 0.03 0.055 0.0959 0.19 0.3325 0.66 1.20
Maximum angular acceleration1) D rad/s2 17000 11000 8000 6800 4800 3600 2800 2000 1450
Case volume V L 2 2.5 5 4 10 8 14 19 27
Mass approx.
(Pump with HS4-control
m kg 42 60 107 112 220 235 335 500 644
without valve block)
1) The data are valid for values between zero and maximum permissible speed.
Valid for external excitation (e. g. engine 2 to 8 times rotary frequency; cardan shaft twice the rotary frequency).
The limit value applies for a single pump only.
The load capacity of the connection parts must be considered.
Note
Operation above the maximum values or below the minimum values may result in a loss of function, a reduced service life or in
the destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend testing the loads by means of experiment or calculation / simulation and
comparison with the permissible values.
Calculation of pump size
Vg • n • KV Vg = Displacement per revolution in cm3

Flow qV = [L/min]
Torque T = [Nm]
Power P = = [kW]
60000 600 • Kt Kt = Total efficiency (Kt = KV • Kmh)
For boost pump parameters, see page 54.

629
Technical data
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750* 1000

Maximum radial force Fq
for X/2 1
Fq max N 1000 1200 1600 2000 2000 2200 2500 3000 3500
X/2 X/2
X
Maximum axial force

r Fax ± Fax max N 600 800 1000 1400 1800 2000 2000 2200 2200
2
Note
Influence on the direction of the permissible axial force:
+ Fax max = Increase in bearing life
– Fax max = Reduction in bearing life (avoid)
3

Size NG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Torque
at Vg max and 'p = 350 bar1) Tmax Nm 223 395 696 1002 1391 1976 2783 4174 5565
Input torque at drive shaft, maximum2) 4

Splined shaft Z TE max Nm 446 790 1392 2004 2782 3952 5566 8348 11130
Shaft key P TE max Nm 380 700 1392 1400 2300 3557 5200 7513 9444
Maximum through-drive torque TD max = TE max
2) For drive shafts without radial force
5
Torque distribution
TA1 TA2
TE
6
1st pump 2nd pump
TD
8
630
Summary of control devices

MA – Manual control EM – Electric motor control
(see RE 92072) (see RE 92072)
Infinitely variable adjustment of displacement by means of a Infinitely variable adjustment of displacements via an electric
handwheel. motor.
Various intermediate displacement values can be selected with
a programmed sequence control by means of built on limit
switches and an optional potentiometer for feedback of the
swivel angle.
Characteristic Characteristic
s s
smax smax
Vg Vg Vg Vg
– + – +
Vg max Vg max Vg max Vg max
s s
smax smax
Schematic
Schematic
B A
MB MA B A
MB MA
E
E
Poti
U K2 K3 T R(L)
U K2 K3 T R(L)
631

HD – Hydraulic control, EP – Electrohydraulic control
pilot-pressure related with proportional solenoid
(see RE 92080) (see RE 92084)
Infinitely variable adjustment of the pump displacement in relation EP control adjusts the pump displacement proportionally to
to the pilot pressure. The control is proportional to the applied the current at the solenoid. Current-regulated controllers with 1
pilot pressure (difference between pilot pressure and case pres- pulse-width modulation are recommended for controlling the
sure). solenoids.
Optional: Optional:
Pilot pressure curves (HD1, HD2, HD3) Pressure control (EPA, EPB, EPD)1)
Pressure control (HD.A, HD.B, HD.D)1), Remote pressure control (EPGA, EPGB, EPG)1)
Remote pressure control (HD.GA, HD.GB, HD.G)1)
Overriding power control (HD1P) 2
Electric control of pilot pressure signal (HD1T)
pSt I
Vg Vg Vg Vg
– + – +
Vg max Vg max Vg max Vg max
pSt I 4
Schematic Schematic
P
X2 X1 B A
MB MA
B A 5
a b
MB MA
E
E
U K2 K3 T R(L)
U P K2 K3 T R(L) M
7
1) Bi-directional direction of rotation not possible.
8
632

HM 1/2 – Hydraulic control, HS – Control system
volume dependent with servo valve
(see RE 92076) (see RE 92076)
The pump displacement is infinitely variable in relation to the This infinitely variable displacement control is accomplished by
control oil volume in ports X1 and X2 means of a servo valve and electrical feedback of the swivel
angle.
Application:
– 2-point control Optional:
– Basic control device for servo or proportional valve control. Short circuit valve (HSK);
Without valves (HSE).
Schematic
Characteristic
B A U
+
MB MA Umax
E
Vg Vg
– +
Vg max Vg max
U
–
Umax
U X1 K2 K3 T R(L) X2
Schematic
B A
Flushing plate
MB MA
E RKV Sp
P
S
U
U M1 R5 R6 R7 K2 K3 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2
633

HS4 – Control system, EO1/2 – Control system
with proportional valve (see RE 92076)
(see RE 92076)
This infinitely variable displacement control is accomplished
The infinitely variable displacement control is accomplished by by means of a proportional valve and electrical feedback of the
means of a proportional valve and electrical feedback of the swivel angle. 1
swivel angle. This makes it suitable for electric control of displacement
The HS4P control system is equipped with mounted pressure
Optional:
transducers, which makes it suitable for electric
pressure and power control. Control pressure range (EO1, EO2)
Short circuit valve (EO1K, EO2K)
Optional:
With pressure transducer (HS4P);
Short circuit valve (HS4K, HS4KP); 2
For oil-immersed use (HS4M)
U
+p +
Umax
–D +D Vg Vg
– +
Vg max Vg max
4
–p U
–
Umax
Schematic Schematic
B A B A 5
MB MA T P
a
MB MA
b b a
B A
E RKV Sp E RKV Sp
P
P
I
P 6
S
U
I
P S
U
U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2 7
U M1 R5 R6 R7 K2 K3 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2
8
634

DR - Pressure control DP – Pressure control for parallel operation
(see RE 92060) (see RE 92060)
Swiveling to one side of centre Swiveling to one side of centre
The DR pressure control limits the maximum pressure at the Suitable for pressure control of multiple A4VSG axial piston
pump outlet within the control range of the pump. This max. units in parallel operation.
pressure level can be steplessly set at the control valve. Bi-directional rotation not possible.
Recommended setting range 50...350 bar
Bi-directional rotation not possible.
Optional:
Remote control (DRG)
p p
qv min qv max qv min qv max
Schematic Schematic
B A
MB MA
B A Mst
XD
MB MA
E
E
U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2 U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2
635

DS1 – Secondary speed control
(see RE 92056)
The speed control DS1 controls the secondary unit (motor)
in such a manner, that this motor delivers sufficient torque to
maintain the required output speed. When connected to a 1
constant pressure system, this torque is proportional to motor
displacement and thus also proportional to the swivel angle.
Characteristic
n (+)
2
n2(rpm)
n2(rpm)
n (-)
3
Schematic
B A Flushing plate 4
MB MA T T B A P
Sp
P
S
U
5
U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2
8
636

Series 1
Example: HM control; for exact dimensions of the control device, see separate data sheets
R(L) (296)
18 MB
140
135
E
K2
B
25
150
U K2 A 60
K3 ø1
91
110
ø15
T MA
8
150
10 90
45°
45°
Flange 125, 4-hole 83

based on E
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
View X
B
96.5
-0.063
30 (37*)
33 33
23.8
15 0 15
LR
ø125
A
79
100
R(L)
M10 ø20
U 17 deep 50.8
30 B(A)
144 25 (16*) X
227
282
* For HD and EP control

637

Drive shafts
P Keyed to DIN 6885 Z Splined shaft to DIN 5480
22 22 1
M10 x 1.5 1) 2)
M10 x 1.5 1) 2)
7.5
7.5
1.5
ø32+0.002
+0.018
35
ø40
ø40
2
28
58 36
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
A, B Service line (pressure port) SAE J5184) 3/4 in (high-pressure series) 400 O
Fastening thread A/B DIN 13 M10 x 1.5; 17 deep O
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure A/B DIN 3852 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X
T Drain DIN 38525) M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 4 X6) 4
E Boost pressure inlet DIN 3852 M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 50 O
K2, K3 Fill + air bleed DIN 38525) M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 4 X6)
R(L) Tank line(case drain port) 4 O6)

3) Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring devices and fittings.
5) The countersink may be deeper than specified in the standard.
6) Depending on the installation position, T, K2, K3 or R(L) must be connected (see also pages 66 and 67)
8
638

Series 1
R(L) (332)
18 MB
159
154
E
K2
25
B
170
U K2 A 80
112.5 K3 ø1
106
ø15
T 170
8
MA
10 101 45° 45°

based on
ISO 3019-2 (metric)
E View XX
Ansicht
B
100.5
34 (45*)
ø140 -0.063
37.5 37.5
27.8
L R
15 0 15
A
92
110
R(L)
M12 ø25
U 17 deep
17 tief 57.2
27 B(A)
166 27 (20*)
X
258.5
306
* For HD and EP control

639

Drive shafts
28 28 1
M12 x 1.75 1) 2)
M12 x 1.75 1) 2)
9.5
9.5
1.5
+0.018
ø40+0.002
43
ø50
ø40
2
28
70 45
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
A, B Service line (pressure port) SAE J5184) 1 in (high-pressure series) 400 O
T Drain DIN 38525) M27 x 2; 16 deep 4 X6) 4
K2, K3 Fill + air bleed DIN 38525) M27 x 2; 16 deep 4 X6)

8
640

Series 3
R(L) (402)
22
MB
191
186
E K2
35
B
200
U K2 A 00
K3 ø2
132.5
121
ø20
T
8 MA 200
10 125
45° 45°

based on
ISO 3019-2 (metric) X2 E
View X X
Ansicht
B
125
ø160 -0.063
50 (31*)
41.5 41.5
L R
31.8
15 0 15
A
112
130
R(L)
M14 ø32
U 19
19 tief
deep 66.7
33 X1 B(A)
X
203 14 (36*)
315
363
* For HM1-, EO1, MA- and EM-control

641

Drive shafts
36 36 1
M16 x 2 1) 2)
M16 x 2 1) 2)
12
12
1.5
+0.018
ø50+0.002
53.5
2
45
82 54
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
A, B Service line (pressure port) SAE J5184) 1 1/4 in (high-pressure series) 400 O
Fastening thread A/B DIN 13 M14 x 2; 19 deep O
E Boost pressure inlet DIN 3852 M22 x 1.5 14 deep 50 O

8
642

Series 3
(402)
R(L) R(L)
22 MB
E
191
186
K2
29
B
200
U K2 A ø2
00
K3
132.5
121
ø20
T MA 200
8
10 125
45° 45°

based on E
ISO 3019-2 (metric) X2
View XX
Ansicht
157.5
B
ø160 -0.063
50 (31*)
L R
41.5 41.5
15 0 15
31.8
112
A
140
R(L)
U M14 ø32
33 19 tief
deep 66.7
X1 B(A)
203 14 (36*) X
315
375
* For MA- and EM-control

643

Drive shafts
36 36 1
M16 x 2 1) 2)
M16 x 2 1) 2)
12
12
1.5
+0.018
ø50+0.002
53.5
2
45
82 54
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
R(L) Tank line (case drain port) 4 O6)

8
644

Series 3
(485)
R(L)
30 MB
238
233
E
K2
40
B
265
U K2 A K3 ø2 80
153
189
ø24
T
8
150
MA 265
10
45° 45°

based on
ISO 3019-2 (metric) E
X2 View X X
Ansicht
157.5
B
ø224 -0.072
55 (25*)
50.5 50.5
36.5
L R
15 0 15
A
144
160
R(L)
M16 ø38
U 21
21 deep
tief 79.4
43 X1 B(A)
X
17 (47*)
248
386
443
* For HM1-, EO1, MA- and EM-control

645

Drive shafts
AS18x11x100 W60x2x28x9g
42 42 1
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
15
15
3
ø60+0.030
+0.011
64
2
59
105 70
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
E Boost pressure inlet DIN 3852 M33 x 2; 18 deep 50 O

8
646

Series 3
R(L) (485)
30 MB
238
233
E
K2
33.5
B
265
U K2 A 80
K3 ø2
153
191
ø24
T
8
10 150 MA
265
45° 45°
Flange 224, 4-hole

based on 145
ISO 3019-2 (metric) E
X2
View X X
Ansicht
178
B
ø224 -0.072
50.5 50.5
36.5
L R
15 0 15
55
A
144
180
R(L)
M16 ø38
U 21
21 deep
tief 79.4
40
X1 B(A)
248 17 X
393
464
647

Drive shafts
AS20x12x100 W70x3x22x9g
42 42 1
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
15
15
4.5
ø70+0.030
+0.011
74.5
2
69
105 82
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)

8
648

Series 3
R(L) (555)
16+5
13 MB
B
283
280
U E
190
ø36
0 K2
48
K2
K3
05
190
ø4
225
A
ø24
8x4
MA
45
5°
T (=
°
36
0° 22°30'
)
47 155
50 435 190 190
Transport thread for

Flange 315, 8-hole eye bolt M16 x 2; 27 deep DIN
based on 580
ISO 3019-2 (metric) 146
16
U E
View X
B
189
172
ø315 –0.081
ø230 +5
60 60
44.5
ø225
L R
15 0 15
50
A
170
R(L)
M20 ø50
30 24 deep 96.8
B(A)
279 50 X
510
649

Drive shafts
AS22x14x125 W80x3x25x9g
42 42 1
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
M20 x 2.5 1) 2)
15
15
3
+0.030
ø80+0.011
85
2
76
130 90
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)

8
650

Series 3
R(L) (630)
16+5
13 MB
322
B
317
U E
232
ø4
50
K2
51
K2
K3
95
232
ø4
280
ø22
A
T
8x
45
MA 45
° (=
° 232 232
47 161 36
0°
50 591 ) 22°30'

Flange 400, 8-hole eye bolt M16 x 2; 27 deep DIN
based on 580
ISO 3019-2 (metric) 178.5
16
U E
View X
231
229
B
ø400 -0.089
ø263 +5
60 60
44.5
ø255
LR
150 15
50
A
210
R(L)
M20 ø50
24 deep 96.8
B(A)
32
301 50 X
478
651

Drive shafts
AS25x14x125 W90x3x28x9g
50 50 1
M24 x 3 1) 2)
M24 x 3 1) 2)
18
18
4.5
ø90+0.035
+0.013
95
2
91
130 105
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)

4) Only dimensions according to SAE J518, metric fastening thread is a deviation from standard..
8
652

Series 3
R(L) (670)
16+5
13
MB
349
344
258
B U E
232
ø45
0 K2
51
K2
K3
95
232
A
ø4
280
ø22
MA
T
8x
4
(= 5°
45
232 232
°
47 203 36
0°
50 655 ) 22°30'

Flange 400, 8-hole eye bolt M20 x 2.5; 30 deep DIN
based on 185 580
ISO 3019-2 (metric) View X
16 U E
ø50
B
229
231
ø400 –0.089
+5
75
ø322
44.5
LR
ø333
15 0 15
55
75
96.8
225
R(L)
A
M20 44.5
35 B(A) 96.8
X 30 deep
360 51
543
653

Drive shafts
AS28x16x160 W100x3x32x9g
50 50 1
M24 x 3 1) 2)
M24 x 3 1) 2)
18
18
4.5
+0.035
ø100+0.013
106
2
91
165 105
Ports
pressure
[bar]3)
MA1, M B1 Measuring operating pressure DIN 3852 M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 400 X

8
654
Through drive
The A4VSG axial piston unit can be delivered with a through Combination pumps
drive, as shown in the type code on page 3.
The through drive version is designated by codes K 31 Independent circuits are available for the user when further
through 99. pumps are built on.
The maximum number of units in a combination pump is deter- 1. If the combination pump consists of 2 Rexroth axial piston
mined by the permissible mass bending moment, see page 35. units and these are to be supplied pre-assembled, the two
model designations are to be linked with "+".
Single pump with through drive Ordering example:
A4VSG 125 EO1 / 30 R – PPB10K339F + A4VSG 71
If no further pumps are factory-mounted the simple type code HM1 / 10 R – PZB10N000N
is sufficient.
2. If a gear pump is to be factory mounted as attachment
The delivery contents include: pump, please contact us.
For all through drives except for K 99 3. Mounted and piped auxiliary pumps (see page 54)
Coupling, fixing screws, seal and, if applicable, an intermediate Depending on the application, various auxiliary pumps and/
flange or piping are available.
For K 99 Ordering example: A4VSG 125 EO1 / 30R – PPB10H029F

With through-drive shaft, without coupling, without intermedi- A4VSG with a mounted auxiliary pump piped for the boost
ate flange; unit is closed fluid tight with pressure-tight cover. circuit.
A4VSG 71EO1/10R – PPB10 H069F
A4VSG with two mounted auxiliary pumps; one is piped for
the boost circuit and the other for the control circuit.
Note for control units HD.P, HD.T and HD.U:
For combination pump in tandem design A4 + A4, some
combinations may result in dimensional restrictions for the
mounting of the power control valve or proportional pressure
relief valve.
In the following cases, we recommend to carry out the valve
mounted on the rear pump or to consult us:
NG40 + NG40
NG71 with pressure control + NG71
655
Permissible mass bending moment of inertia

Relative to the mounting flange of the main pump
m1 m2 m1, m2 [kg] Weight of pump
l1, l2 [mm] Distance center of gravity

2
1 1
Tm = m1 • l1 • + m2 • l2 • [Nm]
102 102
l1
l2
3
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Permissible mass moment Tm perm. Nm 1800 2000 4200 4200 9300 9300 15600 19500 19500
Permissible mass moment at
dynam. acceleration Tm perm. Nm 180 200 420 420 930 930 1560 1950 1950
10 g ^
= 98.1 m/sec2
Weight (A4VSG...EO2...9) m kg 47 60 100 114 214 237 350 500 630
Distance center of gravity l1 mm 120 140 170 180 210 220 230 260 290 4
8
656
Overview of mounting options on A4VSG

Through
Through drive - A4VSG Mounting option of 2nd pump
drive
Flange Coupling for Code A4VSO/G A4CSG A10V(S)O/31(2) 5) A10V(S)O/52(3) External/inter- available
splined shaft NG (shaft) NG (shaft) NG (shaft) NG (shaft) nal gear pump for NG
Flange ISO 3019-2 (metric)
80, 2-hole 19-4 (3/4in, 11T)3) KB2 – – 18 (S)/31 10 (S) – 71, 125
100, 2-hole 22-4 (7/8in, 13T)3) KB3 – – 28 (S)/31 – – 40 to 180
25-4 (1in, 15T)3) KB4 – – 45 (S)/31 – – 40 to 500
125, 2-hole 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T)3) KB5 – – 71 (S)/31 – – 71 to 500
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T)3) KB6 – – 100 (S)/31 – – 125 to 750
125, 4-hole W 32x2x14x9g2) K31 40 (Z) – – – – 40 to 500
140, 4-hole W 40x2x18x9g2) K33 71 (Z) – – – – 71 to 1000
160, 4-hole W 50x2x24x9g2) K34 125 (Z) – – – – 125 to 750
180 (Z) – – – – 180 to 750
32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T)3) KB8 – – 71 (S)/32 – – in preparation
180, 4-hole 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T)3) KB7 – – 140 (S)/31/32 – – 180 to 750
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T)3) KB9 – – 100 (S)/32 – – in preparation
224, 4-hole W 60x2x28x9g2) K35 250 (Z) 250 (Z) – – – 250 to 1000
W 70x3x22x9g2) K77 355 (Z) 355 (Z) – – – 355, 500
315, 8-hole W 80x3x25x9g2) K43 500 (Z) 500 (Z) – – – 500, 750
400, 8-hole W 90x3x28x9g2) K76 750 (Z) 750 (Z) – – – 750, 1000
W 100x3x32x9g2) K88 1000 (Z) – – – – 1000
K01 AZ-PF-1X-004
82-2 (A)1) 16-4 (5/8in, 9T)3) – – – – 40 to 750
to 0224)
19-4 (3/4in, 11T)3) K52 – – 18 (S)/31 10, 18 (S) – 40, 71, 355
K68 AZ-PN-1X-020
101-2 (B)1) 22-4 (7/8in, 13T)3) – – 28 (S)/31 28 (S) 40 to 750
to 0324)
25-4 (1in, 15T)3) K04 – – 45 (S)/31 45 (S) PGH4 40 to 500
127-2 (C) 1) 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T)3) K07 – – 71 (S)/31 – – 71 to 1000
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T)3) K24 – – 100 (S)/31 85 (S) PGH5 125 to 1000
152-4 (D) 1) 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T)3) K17 – – 140 (S)/31 – – 180 to 750
1) 2 = 2-hole, 4 = 4-hole
2) According to DIN 5480
3) Splined shafts acc. to SAEJ744 OCT83
4) Bosch Rexroth recommends special versions of the gear pumps. Please contact us.
5) If a through drive for an A10V(S)O with R-shaft is desired, please contact us.
657
Notes
8
658

Combination pumps dimensions installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSG + A4VSG
A4VSG A4VSG
1st pump
(1.Pumpe) 2nd pump
(2.Pumpe)
Overall length A
A4VSG A4VSG (2nd pump)
(1st pump) NG40 NG71 NG125 NG180 NG250 NG355 NG500 NG750 NG1000
NG40 570 – – – – – – –
NG71 598 622 – – – – – –
NG125 655 679 743 – – – – –
NG180 679 703 766 778 – – – –
NG250 713 737 832 844 912 – – –
NG355 * 766 861 873 941 962 – –
NG500 * 811 868 880 984 1005 1100 –
NG750 * * * * 1034 * * 1246
NG1000 * 934 * * 1107 * * 1319 1383
* on request
659

A4VSG + A4VSO
A4VSG A4VSO
1st pump
(1.Pumpe) 2nd pump
(2.Pumpe)
Overall length A
A4VSG A4VSO (2nd pump) 3
(1st pump) NG40 NG71 NG125 NG180 NG250 NG355 NG500 NG750 NG1000
NG40 554 – – – – – – –
NG71 582 611 – – – – – –
NG125 639 668 735 – – – – –
NG180 663 692 758 778 – – – – 4
NG250 697 726 824 844 904 – – –
NG355 * 755 853 873 933 962 – –
NG500 * 800 860 880 976 1005 1110 –
NG750 * * * * 1026 * * 1215
NG1000 * 923 * * 1099 * * 1288 1361
5
* on request
8
660

A4VSG + A10VSO
A4VSG A10VSO
1st pump
(1.Pumpe) 2nd pump
(2.Pumpe)
Overall length A
A4VSG A10VSO.../31 (2nd pump)
(1st pump) NG18 NG28 NG45 NG71 NG100 NG140
NG40 * 496 * – – –
NG71 * * 540 578 – –
NG125 * 584 * 635 707 732
NG180 * * 595 659 731 756
NG250 * 637 655 688 780 *
NG355 * * * 717 809 835
NG500 * * * 762 834 *
NG750 * * * * 884 917
NG1000 * * * * * *
* on request
661


NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 1
M-N 40 288 12.5 41.4 10 M12
71 316 12.5 33.6 10 M12
125 373 12.5 42 10 M12
A4 A3
M 180 397 12.5 42 10 M12
250 431 12.5 37.9 10 M12
A6 on request
355 2
1)
500 on request
750 on request
1000 on request
+0.07
ø125+0.02
NG A7 A8
A8
0
ø16 40 – –
71 – – 3
125 – –
180 – –
250 10 200
45º 355 on request
A5
500 on request
A1 to mounting face A7 750 on request 4
N
1000 on request

NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 5
71 316 12 44 9 M12
125 373 12.5 50 10 M12
A4 A3 180 397 12.5 43.8 10 M12
M 250 431 12.5 49 10 M12
A6 355 460 12.5 49 10 M12
1)
500 505 12.5 44 10 M12 6
750 on request
1000 628 12.5 64.5 10 M12
+0.07
ø140+0.02
NG A7 A8
A8
0
ø18 71 – –
125 – –
180 – – 7
250 10 200
355 – –
45º 500 – –
A5 on request
750
A1 to mounting face A7 1000 27 280
N 8
1) Fastening screws and O-ring seal are included in the delivery contents.
662


NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 125 380 12.5 58 10 M16
180 403 12.5 58 10 M16
M A4 A3
250 469 12.5 60 10 M16
A6 355 498 12.5 60 10 M16
1) 500 505 12.5 60 10 M16
750 on request
1000 on request
ø160 +0.02
+0.07
00
ø2
45º A5
A1 to mounting face
N

NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 250 469 12.5 75 9 M20
A4 A3 355 498 12.5 75 9 M20
M A6 500 541 12.5 74 10 M20
1)
750 591 12.5 74 10 M20
1000 664 12.5 69.5 10 M20
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2
A5
45º
A1 to mounting face
1) Fastening screws and O-ring seal are included in the delivery contents
663


NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 1
M-N 355 498 12.5 82 9 M20
500 541 12.5 82 10 M20
M A4 A3 750 on request
A6
1) 1000 on request
ø224 +0.03
+0.10
80
ø2
A5
45º
A1 to mounting face
4
N

NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 5
M-N 500 590 53.5 71.9 19 M20
750 on request
M A4 A3 1000 on request
1)
A6
6
ø315 +0.03
+0.10
60
ø3
8x4
7
5º
(=
45 º)
36
º
0
22º30 A5
´
A1 to mounting face
N
8
664


for mounting an A4VSO/G, A4CSG 750 splined shaft
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
750 655 104 53 19 M20
M-N
1000 728 109 53 19 M20
M A4 A3 1)
A6
ø400+0.03
+0.10
50
ø4
8x4
5º
(=
45
36
º
0º
)
22º30 A5
´
A1 to mounting face
N

M-N
M 106 53
1)
M20 2)
ø400+0.03
+0.10
50
ø4
8x4
5º
(=
45 º)
36
º
0
22º30 19
´
N
665


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 22-4 SAE B, 7/8 in, 16/32 DP; 13 T3)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 1
M-N
40 290 20.4 23 10 M12
A3 71 on request
A4
M 125 378 20.3 24.5 10 M12
A6
180 on request
250 431 20.5 23 10 M12
1)
355 on request
2
500 on request
ø100 +0.02
750 on request
+0.05
A8
1000 on request
NG A7 A8
40 – –
71 on request 3
125 – –
ø140 180 on request
A5 250 10 200
45º
355 on request
A1 to mounting face A7 500 on request
750 on request 4
N
1000 on request

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 25-4 SAE B-B, 1 in, 16/32 DP; 15 T3)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 5
40 on request
A4 A3 71 316 20.8 27.5 8 M12
M 125 on request
A6
180 371 21.8 27.9 10 M12
250 431 20.9 27.5 10 M12
1) 355 on request
6
500 on request
750 on request
ø100 +0.02
+0.05
1000 on request
A8
NG A7 A8
40 on request
71 – – 7
125 on request
ø140 180 – –
250 10 200
45º A5
355 on request
A1 to mounting face A7 500 on request
750 on request 8
N 1000 on request
1) 2 fastening screws and O-ring seal are included in the delivery contents
3) According to ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
666


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 32-4 SAE C, 1 1/4 in, 12/24 DP; 14 T3)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 71 321 23.1 38.1 10 M16
125 378 23.7 38.1 10 M16
M 180 402 23.7 38.1 10 M16
A6 A4 A3 250 431 22 36.1 10 M16
1) 355 460 22 36.1 10 M16
500 505 19.3 40.4 10 M16
750 on request
1000 on request
ø125 +0.02
+0.07
A8
NG A7 A8
80
ø1 71 – –
125 – –
180 – –
250 10 200
45º NG 250 to 500 A5 355 – –
A1 to mounting face A7 500 – –
750 on request
N
1000 on request

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 38-4 SAE C-C, 1 1/2 in, 12/24 DP; 17 T3)
for mounting an A10VSO 100/31 – see RE 92711
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
125 378 11.4 54 10 M16
M-N
180 402 11.4 54 10 M16
M 250 451 11 57.1 10 M16
for NG 500 and 750 A4 A3 355 480 11 57.1 10 M16
180 500 505 11 56 10 M16
1) 750 555 11 56 10 M16
1000 on request
+0.07
ø125 +0.02
A6
N A5
A1 to mounting face
667


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in, 8/16 DP; 13 T3)
for mounting an A10VSO 140/31/32 splined shaft S – see RE 92711 (RE 92714)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 1
M-N 125 395 10.5 45 10 M16
180 419 10.5 45 10 M16
A4 A3 250 on request
for NG 500 to 750
A6 355 498 11 69.3 10 M16
M
1) 500 on request
750 580 11 63 10 M16 2
1000 on request
+0.07
ø180 +0.02
24
ø2
3
45º
A5
4

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 16-4 SAE A, 5/8 in, 16/32 DP; 9T 3)
for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PF-1X-004...022 (see RE 10089)
Bosch Rexroth recommends a special version of the gear pumps, please contact us
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 5
M-N 40 263 9 25.9 10 M10
71 291 10.5 25.4 10 M10
for NG 180 to 500
A4 A3 125 347 10.3 28 10 M10
M 180 371 9 28 10 M10
A6
+0.05
–0.02
250 431 9 30 10 M10

355 460 10 30 10 M10
ø82.55
6
500 505 10 33 10 M10
750 555 10 33 10 M10
1000 on request
A8
NG A7 A8
40 18 130
1) 71 15 140 7
125 13 150
180 – –
ø106.5
250 10 200
45º A5 355 – –
750 – –
N 8
1000 on request
1) 2 or 4 fastening screws and O-ring seal are included in the delivery contents
668


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 19-4 SAE A-B, 3/4 in, 16/32 DP; 11T 3)
or A10VSO 10/52 or 18/53 splined shaft S (see RE 92703)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
40 on request
M-N 71 on request
A4 A3 125 on request
M 180 on request
A6
+0.05
ø82,55 +0.02
250 on request
355 460 11 32.4 10 M10
500 on request
750 on request
1000 on request
1)
ø106,5
45º A5
A1 to mounting face

for mounting an external gear pump AZ-PN-1X020...032 (see RE 10091) or an A10VO 28/31 and 52(53) splined shaft S
(see RE 92701 and 92703) Bosch Rexroth recommends special versions of the gear pumps, please contact us
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
M-N 40 290 11 33.2 10 M12
for NG 250 to 500 71 322 11 34.4 10 M12
A4 A3 125 347 11 35.3 10 M12
M
A6 180 371 11 38.7 10 M12
for NG 40 250 431 20.5 29.4 10 M12
and 71 and 1)
355 460 19.2 32.9 10 M12
180 to 500 500 505 11 41 10 M12
750 on request
+0.02
+0.05
1000 on request
A8
ø101.6
NG A7 A8
40 – –
71 – –
125 13 150
180 – –
ø146
250 10 200
45º A5 355 – –
500 – –
750 on request
N 1000 on request
669


for mounting an A10VO 45/31 and /52 (53) splined shaft S (see RE 92701 and 92703) or an
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 1
M-N 40 on request
for NG 180 to 500
71 322 11 35.1 10 M12
A4 A3
M 125 379 12.4 37.5 10 M12
A6 180 371 11 35.3 10 M12
for 250 431 11 41.4 10 M12
NG 125 1)
355 460 11 41.4 10 M12
to 500 2
500 505 11 44 10 M12
+0.02
+0.05
750 on request
1000 on request
A8
ø101.6
NG A7 A8
40 18 130
71 – – 3
125 – –
180 – –
ø146
250 10 200
45º A5 355 – –
750 on request
N on request 4
1000

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 32-4 SAE C, 1 1/4 in, 12/24 DP; 14 T3)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62) 5
M-N 71 on request
for NG 500 to 1000 125 377 10.4 50 13 M16
A4 A3
M 180 401 10.4 50 13 M16
A6 250 431 10.4 51 13 M16
1) 355 460 10.4 51 13 M16
500 505 11.3 51.7 13 M16 6
for 750 555 11.3 51.7 13 M16
+0.02
1000 628 10.4 54.6 13 M16

+0.07
NG 500
to 1000
A8
NG A7 A8
ø127
71 on request
125 – –
180 – – 7
for
NG 355 250 10 200
ø181 355 – –
A5 500 – –
45º
750 23 250
1000 25 280
8
N
670


Shaft coupler for splined shaft 38-4 SAE C-C, 1 1/2 in, 12/24 DP; 17 T3)
(see RE 92703) or a PGH5 internal gear pump (see RE 10223)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
125 377 10.4 53.7 13 M16
M-N
180 401 10.4 54 13 M16
A4 A3 250 451 10.5 57.6 13 M16
M for NG 500 to 1000 355 480 10.5 57.6 13 M16
500 505 10.3 56.7 13 M16
A6 1) 750 555 10.3 56.7 13 M16
1000 628 10.4 56.6 13 M16
NG A7 A8
+0.02
+0.07
125 – –
A8
ø127
ø18 180 – –
250 – –
355 – –
500 – –
750 23 250
45º 1000 25 280
A5
N
K17 Flange ISO 3019-1 152-4 (SAE D)

Shaft coupler for splined shaft 44-4 SAE D, 1 3/4 in 8/16 DP; 13 T3)
NG A1 A3 A4 A5 A62)
125 382 10.4 67 13 M16
M-N
180 406 10.4 67 13 M16
250 469 10.4 62 13 M16
A4 A3
M A6 355 498 10.5 62 13 M16
1) 500 530 10.4 63.6 13 M16
750 580 10.4 63.6 13 M16
1000 in preparation
ø152.4+0.02
+0.07
8.5
ø22
45º
A5
A1 to mounting face
N
1) 2 or 4 fastening screws and O-ring seal are included in the delivery contents
671

Notes installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
8
672

K99 Sizes 40 to 355

with through-drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange, closed with fluid-tight and pressure-tight cover
Shown without cover

M-N
M A17 A4
A10
A7 A7
A11
A8
1)
20°
A6
A14
A13
A12
A15
A6
Spline profile 4x A5
N to DIN 5480
see table
A9
A16
A1 to mounting face
A2 to mounting face
Depiction shows
NG 71
NG
Main pump A1 A2 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
40 263 280 51.3±1 M12x25 37±0.2 37±0.2 0 18 9 2.3+0.1 ø118 ø105g6
71 291 310 48±1 M12x25 42.3 ±0.15 45 ±0.15 15.4±0.15 18 9 2.7+0.1 ø130 ø116g6
125 347 368 49.7±1 M14x30 47 47 0 18 7 2.3+0.1 ø137 ø124g6
180 371 392 49.7±1 M14x30 47 47 0 18 7 2.3+0.1 ø137 ø124g6
250 431 458 61.4±1 M20x40 63 63 0 26 9 2.3+0.1 ø180 ø165g6
355 460 487 61.4±1 M20x40 63 63 0 26 9 2.3+0.1 ø180 ø165g6
NG Spline profile 1) O-ring for retrofitting

to DIN 5480 (not included in the delivery contents)
Main pump A14 A15 A16 A17
40 ø97.6–0.4 ø52 44 14 W25 x 1.25 x 18 x 9g 99 x 3 70 SH A
71 ø106.4–0.4 ø63 39 16 W30 x 1.25 x 22 x 9g 110.72 x 3.53 70 SH A
125 ø116–0.4 ø70 46 22 W35 x 1.25 x 26 x 9g 119 x 3 70 SH A
180 ø116–0.4 ø70 57 25 W35 x 1.25 x 26 x 9g 119 x 3 70 SH A
250 ø157–0.4 ø88 64 34.2 W42 x 1.25 x 32 x 9g 160 x 3 70 SH A
355 ø157–0.4 ø88 64 34.3 W42 x 1.25 x 32 x 9g 160 x 3 70 SH A
Sizes 500 to 1000, see page 53

673

K99 Sizes 500 to 1000

with through-drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter flange, closed with fluid-tight and pressure-tight cover
Shown without cover 1
M M-N
+0.2 +0.2
112 —0.2 112 —0.2
O-Ring
72 +0.2
—0.2
A7 165 x 3
72 +0.2
—0.2
M16; 24 deep included in supply 2
70.7 +0.2
—0.2
60 +0.2
—0.2
47 +0.2
—0.2
100 +0.2
—0.2
20°
ø169 +0.4
ø160 +0.2
+0.7
A6
100 +0.2
—0.2
3
+0.2
47 —0.2
60 +0.2
—0.2
70.7 +0.2
—0.2
Spline profile 4xM16x30

70.7 +0.2
—0.2 to DIN 5480
+0.2
70.7 —0.2 A5 see table 2.3
88 +0.2
—0.2 10
+0.2
88 —0.2 11 4
A4 A3
A2 to mounting face
5
NG
Spline profile
Main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 to DIN 5480
500 505 520 73 41 M20; 24 deep ø115 75 W55 x 1.25 x 42 x 9g
750 555 577 73 41 M20; 24 deep ø115 75 W55 x 1.25 x 42 x 9g
1000 628 653 75 50 M20; 30 deep ø142 65 W65 x 1.25 x 50 x 9g
6
Sizes 40 to 355 see page 52
8
674
Mounted and piped auxiliary pumps H02, H04 and H06

Factory mounted and piped are the following auxiliary pumps:
Code
desig- Size A4VSG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
nation
A piped auxiliary pump for the boost circuit
H02 Auxiliary pump type AZPF AZPN AZPG PGH4 PGH5
Size 11 16 25 32 38 80 100 160 200
A common piped auxiliary pump for the boost and control circuit (only EO1 and EO1K)
H04 Auxiliary pump type – AZPF AZPN – AZPG – – – –
Size – 16 25 – 38 – – – –
Separately piped auxiliary pumps for the boost circuit and the control circuit (only for HD1T and HD1U)
including a pressure relief valve for the control circuit 1)
Auxiliary pump
AZPF AZPN AZPG PGH4 PGH5
Boost circuit type
H06
Size 11 16 25 32 38 80 100 160 200
Auxiliary pump
Control AZPF PGF2
type
circuit
Size 08 11
Note: The different leakage rates of the gear pump at various speeds must be considered in all cases.
Additional technical data sheets are available for the technical data of the gear pumps:
AZPF: RE 10 089
AZPN: RE 10 091
AZPG: RE 10 093
PGF2: RE 10 213
PGH4 and PGH5: RE 10 223
Note: The AZPF, AZPN and AZPG series are special versions of gear pumps for mounting on axial piston pumps. They are
adapted to fit onto the through drive shaft end and the flange mounting pattern on axial piston pumps.
1) DB 10 K2-4X/50YV
pressure setting to 50 bar
675

Dimensions suction port - auxiliary pumps installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Ports S, S1 and S2 (for selection, see page 54)

Views Z and W from pages 58 and 62
AZPF, PGF2 AZPN AZPG PGH4, PGH5
A13 1
45° 45° A15
A14
A12
A13
A14
A12
2
(A17 for S2) A14 A15 A14 A15 A13 A15
(A16 for S2)
A12 A12
(A18 for S2)
RE 10089 or 10213 RE 10091 RE 10093 RE 10223
Ports1)
3
NG S, S1 S2 (2nd auxiliary pump - control pump)
40 Square flange Square flange
71 Square flange Square flange
125 SAE 1 in (standard pressure series) Square flange
250 SAE 1 in (standard pressure series) Square flange 4
5
Dimensions
(2nd auxiliary pump - control pump)
NG A12 A13 A14 A15 for S and S1 A16 for S2 A17 for S2 A18 for S2
40 ø40 – ø20 M6; 13 deep M6; 13 deep ø20 ø40
71 ø40 – ø20 M6; 13 deep M6; 13 deep ø20 ø40
125 52.4 26.2 ø26 M10; 14 deep M6; 13 deep ø20 ø40 6
180 52.4 26.2 ø26 M10; 14 deep M6; 13 deep ø20 ø40
250 52.4 26.2 ø26 M10; 16 deep M6; 13 deep ø20 ø40
355 77.8 42.9 ø51 M12; 10 deep M6; 10 deep ø20 ø40
500 77.8 42.9 ø51 M12; 10 deep M6; 10 deep ø20 ø40
750 106.4 61.9 ø76 M16; 10 deep M6; 10 deep ø20 ø40
7
1000 106.4 61.9 ø76 M16; 10 deep M6; 10 deep ø20 ø40
8
676
Complete schematic H02

A4VSG with an auxiliary pump for the boost circuit, valve block and filter
Example: H029F with EO2K

Sizes 40 to 180 (other sizes on request)
B K1 A
4.2
MB MA
4.1
MSp 4
4.3 b a
MA
MB
2.2
1.1
2.1
5.1 5 RkV Sp
2.4 P
1 2 2.3
S
U
3
U M1 R5R6R7 K2 K3 T R(L) R4R3R2 M2 S
Ports
Designation Port for State
A, B Service line (pressure port) O
S Suction - auxiliary pump O
K1 Outlet circuit flushing O
R(L) Fill and air bleed (case drain port) O
K2, K3 Fill and air bleed (case drain port) X
T Drain X
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure X
P Control pressure O
SP Accumulator - control pressure X
MSp Measuring flushing pressure X
M1, M2 Measuring control pressure X
RkV Control fluid return line X
U Bearing flushing X
R2...R7 Air bleeding of stroking chamber X
For components, see page 57; for dimensions, see pages 58 and 59
677
Complete schematic H04

A4VSG with a common auxiliary pump for boost and control circuit, valve block and filter
Example: H049F with EO1

Sizes 40, 71, 125 and 250
1
B K1 A
4.2
MB MA 2
4.1
MSp 4
4.3 3
MA
MB
b a
1.1
2.2
RkV 2.4 P
5.1 5
4
2 2.3
1 S
U
3
5
U M1 K3 K2 T R(L) M2 S
Component
Item Order designation Information
1 Variable pump A4VSG 40-180 A4VSG
1.1 Boost check valves standard for A4VSG 6
2 Hydraulic control device EO2K or EO1 See RE 92076
2.1 Short circuit valve (for EO.K)
2.2 4/3-directional proportional valve
2.3 Inductive pos. transducer (actual value transmitter)
2.4 Adapter plate
3 An auxiliary pump for the boost circuit only (mounted and piped) H 02 or For selection, see page 54 7
A common, mounted and piped auxiliary pump for the boost and H 04
control circuit (only for EO1 and EO1K)
4 Valve block SDVB 16 for A4VSG 40 to 180 9 For NG250 to 500 SDVB
4.1 Main high pressure relief 30, switching type 1 is used
and for NG750 and 1000,
4.2 Flushing valve 8
SDVB 50 is used acc. to
4.3 Check valve RE 95533
5 Boost circuit filter F See page 65
5.1 Optical contamination indicator
Control electronics are not included in delivery contents, please order separately
For dimensions, see page 58

678

Dimensions H02 9F and H04 9F installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSG with an auxiliary pump, valve block and filter

Example: sizes 40 to 180
2
Mounting -
5 clockwise rota-
MB tion
A2
K3 K2
A11
K2 B
A A11
A7
A1
S
T MA
K1 MA MB
4 Mounting -
A8 counter-clock- MB for NG180 MA for NG180
wise rotation Msp
A9
5 Pressure relief port A Pressure relief port B
(port B for NG 180) (port A for NG 180)
1
A6
A10
R(L) S
U
Z*
A3
A4
A5
* View Z, see page 55

Values and ports, see page 59; components, see page 57
679

Dimensions H02 9F and H04 9F installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSG with an auxiliary pump, valve block and filter
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Maximum pressure State
[bar]1) 1
S See data sheet for auxiliary pump; for selection, see page 54
K1 Flushing DIN 3852-1 5 O
M Sp Measuring flushing pressure DIN 3852-1 50 X
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure DIN 3852-1 400 X
1)Momentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring equipment
and fittings. 2
For other ports, see dimensions of base pump A4VSG beginning on page 16 and separate data sheet of the control unit.
Ports2)
NG K1 M SP MA , M B
3
40 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep M14 x 1.5; 12 deep M14 x 1.5; 12 deep
250 M33 x 2; 18 deep M22 x 1.5; 14 deep M14 x 1.5; 12 deep
355 M33 x 2; 18 deep M22 x 1.5; 14 deep M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 4
Dimensions 5
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
40 174 246 144 310 357 175 115 364 400 42 15.7
71 178 265 166 338 395 181 115 386 421 42 15.7
125 198 298 203 402 463 201 172(240)3) 448 481 46 18.75
180 198 298 203 430 495 234 178(233)3) 448 506 46 18.75
250 317 345 248 497 574 245 211 448 651 55 22.9 6
355 319 345 248 559 664 264 217 464 657 74.6 –
500 353 392 279 628 739 370 203 510 705 105.3 –
750 446 427 301 693 819 393 372 591 * 105.3 –
1000 446 456 360 775 910 427 372 655 * 105.3 –
* On request
3) With HD.D and HD.G control 7
8
680
Complete schematic H06 9F

A4VSG with a separately auxiliary double pump for boost and control circuit, valve block and filter
Example: H069F with HD1DT

B K1 A
4.2 2.5
a b
MB MA
X2
4.1 X1
2.4
MSp 4
4.3 2.1
MB MA 2.2
1.1
2.3
5.1 5
1 2
R
3.2
Pst
3 3.1
U K2 K3 T R(L) M S1 S2
Ports
Designation Port for State

A, B Service line (pressure port) O
S1, S2 Suction - auxiliary pump O
K1 Outlet circuit flushing O
R(L) Fill and air bleed (case drain port) O
K2, K3 Fill and air bleed (case drain port) X
T Drain X
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure X
M Measuring stroking chamber pressure X
PSt, X1, X2 Measuring pilot pressure X
R Return line O
MSp Measuring flushing pressure X
U Bearing flushing X
For components, see page 61; for dimensions, see pages 62 and 63.
681
Components H06 9F
A4VSG with a separate double auxiliary pump for boost and control circuit, valve block and filter
Example: H069F with HD1DT

1
Components
Item Ordering code Information
1 Variable pump A4VSG 40-180 A4VSG
1.1 Boost check valves standard for A4VSG
2 Hydraulic control device HD1DT See RE 92080
2.1 Control device 2
2.2 Pressure control valve, port A
(port B for counter-clockwise rotation)
2.3 Pressure control valve, port B
(port A for counter-clockwise rotation)
2.4 Sandwich plate for mounting proportional valve
2.5 Proportional pressure relief valve 3
Auxiliary pump for the boost circuit H 06
3 For selection, see page 54
(mounted and piped)
3.1 Auxiliary pump for the control circuit
(mounted and piped)
3.2 Pressure relief valve, control circuit DB 10 K2-4X/50YV
4 Valve block SDVB 16 for A4VSG 40-180 9 For NG250 to 500 SDVB
30, operating type 1 is used 4
4.1 Pressure relief
and for NG750 and 1000,
4.2 Flushing valve
SDVB 50 is used acc. to
4.3 Check valve RE 95533
5 Boost circuit filter F See page 65
5.1 Optical contamination indicator
5
For dimensions, see pages 62 and 63.

6
8
682

Dimensions H06 9F installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSG with a separate double auxiliary pump for the boost and control circuit, valve block and filter
Example: sizes 40 to 180
Mounting -
A8 clockwise rotation
MB X1
2 X2
5 K3
A2
3 3.1
R
K2
A11
A16
A18
K2 B
A A11
A16
A7
A1
S1 S2
T MA
4 K1 5
MA MB
Mounting -
MB for NG180 MA for NG180
counter clockwise
rotation Msp
A9
Pressure relief port A Pressure relief port B

(port B for NG 180) (port A for NG 180)
3.2
1
R
A6
A19
A17
A10
R(L) S1 S2
A3 Z* W*
A4
A5
* For views Z and W, see page 55

For values and ports, see page 63; for components, see page 61
683

Dimensions H06 9F installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
A4VSG with a separate double auxiliary pump for boost and control circuit, valve block and filter
Ports
Designation Port for Standard Maximum pressure State
[bar]1) 1
S1, S2 See data sheet for auxiliary pump; for selection, see page 54
K1 Flushing DIN 3852-1 5 O
M Sp Measuring flushing pressure DIN 3852-1 50 X
MA, M B Measuring operating pressure DIN 3852-1 400 X
1)Moomentary pressure spikes may occur depending on the application. Keep this in mind when selecting measuring equipment
and fittings. 2
For other ports, see dimensions of base pump A4VSG beginning on page 16 and separate data sheet of the control unit.
Ports2)
NG K1 M SP MA , M B
3
355 M33 x 2; 18 deep M22 x 1.5; 14 deep M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 4
Dimensions
5
NG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A16 A17 A18 A19
40 174 * 144 310 400 * 115 * * 42 15.7 15.7 42 * *
71 178 * 166 338 436 * 115 * * 42 15.7 15.7 42 * *
125 198 302 203 402 498 239 240 547 552 46 18.75 15.7 42 56.7 61.5
180 198 302 203 430 529 236 233 602 607 46 18.75 20.25 42 61.3 61.5
250 317 336 248 497 619 243 167 672 669 55 22.9 20.25 42 56.7 61.5 6
355 319 336 248 559 775 264 218 824 830 74.6 5.4 7.7 52.5 48.2 72
500 353 406 279 628 840 369 203 888 895 105.3 – 7.7 52.5 33.3 72
750 446 423 301 693 945 392 372 994 1000 105.3 – 7.7 52.5 48.2 72
1000 446 444 360 775 1036 426 372 1084 1091 105.3 – 7.7 52.5 48.2 72
* On request
7
8
684
Valve block SDVB

The following versions are mounted standard:
Valve block SDVB 16 for A4VSG sizes 40 to 180,
SDVB 30 operating type 1 for A4VSG sizes 250 to 500 and
SDVB 50 for A4VSG sizes 750 and 1000
For technical data and detailed information, see RE 95533
685
Filter mounted in boost circuit...F

If a filter is factory mounted in the boost circuit
(ordering code: F), the following filters (with electric optical
contamination indicator) are used depending on the size of the
axial piston units:
Sizes 40 and 71: _____________ LFBN/HC60G20D1.0/V-L24 1
Sizes 125 and 180: __________ LFBN/HC110G20D1.0/V-L24
Sizes 250 and 355: __________ LFBN/HC240G20D1.0/V-L24
Size 500: __________________ LFBN/HC330G20D1.0/V-L24
Sizes 750 and 1000: _________ LFBN/HC660G20D1.0/V-L24
Please contact us for further details on the filter 2
8
686
During commissioning and operation, the axial piston unit must Below-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is
be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled. This must also ob- installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.
served following a relatively long standstill as the axial piston
SB SB
The commissioning must be carried out at low speed and with-
out load until the system has been air bled completely. ht min ht min
hmin hmin
Especially when mounted with the "drive shaft upwards" (ex- amin amin
amples 6 and 12) , bearing flushing is necessary for lubrication
zu S*
to tozuS*
S*
of the front bearing and of the shaft seal at port U.
R(L) T
See page 6.
The case drain fluid in the pump housing must be directed to
K3
the reservoir via the highest available drain port (T, R(L), K2, K3).
K2
tive case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of T R(L)
pressure differences at the drain ports of the units, the shared
drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible 3 4
case pressure of all connected units is not exceeded in any SB SB
situation. If this is not possible, separate drain lines must be laid
if necessary. ht min ht min
hmin hmin
To achieve favorable noise values, decouple all connecting lines amin amin
using elastic elements and avoid above-reservoir installation. zu
to S*
S* tozuS*
S*
In all operating conditions, the suction and case drain lines must K2 B(A)
flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. At version K3
with mounted attachment pump the permissible suction height R(L)
15 0 15
hS results from the overall loss of pressure; it must not, however,
15 0 15
R(L)
be higher than hS max = 800 mm.
The minimum suction pressure at port S may not fall below K3 B(A) K2
0.8 bar absolute in operation.
With mounted attachment pumps, please refer to the data sheet 5 6
for details on the minimum suction pressure, see page 54. SB SB
ht min ht min
hmin hmin
See the following examples 1 to 12. amin amin
Further installation positions are available upon request. zu S*
to
zu S*
to
Recommended installation position: 1 and 2. T U
R(L)
Instructions
– Before installation, fill the pump case with the pump in a K2 R(L)
K2
horizontal position. Port T to the reservoir plugged. Filling op-
tion when mounted with shaft end upward: fill via R(L) and air T
bleed at T, then plug port R(L).
– To achieve an optimum control function, the stroking
chambers must be bled via the highest available air bleed port Installation Fill / air bleed case
R2 to R7 depending on the installation position for HM, HS, position
HS4 and EO. 1 R(L)
– At installation positions 3, 4, 9 and 10 an influence on the 2 T; plug R(L)
control characteristics can be expected. Gravity, unit weight 3 K2; plug R(L)
and case pressure can cause minor shifts in control charac- 4 K3; plug R(L)
teristics and changes in response time.
5 R(L)
6 T; plug R(L)
* With a mounted attachment pump, please observe the details
in the corresponding data sheet, see page 54
Key, see page 67.
687
Above-reservoir installation Installation Fill / air bleed case
Above-reservoir installation means that the axial piston unit is position
installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. 7 R(L)
A check valve in the case drain line is to be avoided. 8 T; plug R(L)
Exceptions maybe permissible, please consult us first. 1
9 K2; plug R(L)
10 K3; plug R(L)
7 8
11 R(L)
R(L) T 12 T; plug R(L)
B
K2 L1 Filling / air bleeding
2
K2 S Suction port
zuS*
to S* zu S*
to T, K2, K3, R(L) Fill + air bleed
T A SB R(L) SB (case drain port)
ht min A, B Pressure port
ht min
amin SB Baffle (baffle plate)
hmin amin hmin
ht min Minimum permissible immersion depth
3
(200 mm)
9 10 hmin Minimum permissible spacing from suction
port to reservoir bottom (100 mm)
K2 B(A) K3 amin When designing the reservoir, ensure
R(L) adequate spacing between the suction line
and the case drain line. This prevents the
15 0 15
heated, return flow from being drawn directly

15 0 15
R(L) 4
back into the suction line.
K3 B(A)
K2
to
zu S* to
zu S*
SB SB
ht min h t min
hmin amin amin h min
5
11 12
B A
T U
R(L)
K2
K2 6
R(L)
to
zuS*
S* T tozuS*S*
SB SB
h t min h t min
amin h min amin h min
7
* With a mounted attachment pump, please observe details on
suction height or minimum inlet pressure from the data sheet
for the attachment pump, see page 54
8
688
– The A4VSG pump is designed to be used in closed circuits.
– Project planning, installation and commissioning of the axial piston units requires the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Before using the axial piston unit, please read the general instruction manual (RE 90300-B) completely and thoroughly.
If necessary, these can be requested from Bosch Rexroth.
– Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteristics may shift.
– Service line ports (pressure ports):
ensure that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified application conditions (pressure, flow,
hydraulic fluid, temperature) with the necessary safety factors.
- The service line ports and function ports can only be used to accommodate hydraulic lines.
- Fittings:
Observe the manufacturer's instruction regarding the tightening torques of the fittings used.
- Mounting bolts:
For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to DIN 13, we recommend checking the tightening torque in individual
cases in accordance with VDI 2230.
- Female thread of the axial piston unit:
The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are maximum values of the female thread and must not be exceeded.
- Threaded plugs:
For the metallic threaded plugs, supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of threaded plugs MV apply.

Standard Size of thread female threads MG max threaded plugs MV threaded plugs
DIN 3852-1 M10 x 1 30 Nm 12 Nm 5 mm
M14 x 1.5 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M18 x 1.5 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27 x 2 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
M33 x 2 540 Nm 310 Nm 17 mm
M42 x 2 720 Nm 360 Nm 22 mm
M48 x 2 900 Nm 400 Nm 24 mm
Bosch Rexroth AG specifications and other information set

© This document, as well as the data, specifications
Hydraulics
Axial Piston Units set forth
forth in it,inare
it, are
the the exclusive
exclusive property
property of Bosch
of Bosch Rexroth
Rexroth AG.AG. It may
It may not not be
be repro-
Axial
An denPiston
Kelterwiesen
Units 14 reproduced
duced or given or given to parties
to third third parties without
without its consent.
its consent.
Glockeraustraße
72160 Horb a.N.,2Germany An den Kelterwiesen 14 specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
The data specified
89275
Phone Elchingen,
+49 (0)Germany
74 51 - 92 0 72160 Horb, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Phone
Fax +49 73
(0) 08
74 82-0
51 - 82 21 Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 derived
rived from
from ourour information.
information. TheThe information
information given
given does
does notnot release
release thethe
useruser
from
fromobligation
the the obligation
of ownof judgment
own judgment and verification.
and verification. It mustIt must be remembered
be remembered that our
Fax +49 73 08 72 74
info.brm-ak@boschrexroth.de Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21
that our products
products aretosubject
are subject to aprocess
a natural natural of
process
wear andof wear and aging.
aging.
Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.com/axial-piston-motors
689

Axial piston-compact unit A4CSG RE 92 105/11.03 1/32
closed loop circuit
Size 250...750
Series 3
Contents Features
Model code/standard program 2, 3 – Axialpiston pump-variable displacement, swashplate
Fluid 4 design for hydrostatic drives in closed circuits.
Technical data 5...7 – The flow is proportional to input speed and
Control- and adjustment devices 8, 9 displacement. It can be infinitely varied by adjustment of
the swashplate.
Unit dimensions size 250 10, 11
– The necessary boostpump and all required controlvalves
Unit dimensions size 355 12, 13 are integrated.
Unit dimensions size 500 14, 15 – One common auxiliary pump for boost and EP-control
Unit dimensions size 750 16, 17 pressure
Through drive 18 – Compact design (extremely small in length)
Overview combination options onto A4CSG 18 – Favourable power to weight ratio
Dimensions of pump combinations and through drives F/K99 19 – Low noise level
Dimensions through drives F/K99 and F/K34 20 – Long service life
Dimensions through drives F/K35 and F/K77 21 – High efficiency
Dimensions through drives F/K43 and F/K01 22 – New electro-hydr. control EP with proportional solenoid
Dimensions through drives F/K02 and F/K68 23 and zero displacement position at power loss
Dimensions through drives F/K04 and F/K07 24 – Throughdrive for multiple pumpcombinations also
possible with integrated boost pump
Dimensions through drives F/K17 and types of filtration 25
Integrated boost pump and valve technology - circuit diagram 26
– For further information on control- and regulating devices
Integrated boost pump and valve technology - description 27
see separate data sheets
Mounted boost pump filter - dimensions 28
RE 92 072, RE 92 076 und RE 92 080
Mounted boost pump filter - circuit diagram 29
External supply of boostpressure- without boost pump 30
Installation and commissioning instructions 31
Safety instructions 32
690
2/32 Bosch Rexroth AG | Industrial Hydraulics A4CSG | RE 92 105/11.03
Model code / standardprogram
Axial piston unit

Compact unit, swashplate design, variable A4CS
Type of operation
Pump, closed circuit operation G
Size
Displacement V g max(cm3) 250 355 500 750
Control and adjustment devices

Manual adjustment MA ❍ ❍ ❍ – MA ⎫ see RE 92072
Electric motor adjustment EM ❍ ❍ ❍ – EM..
⎬⎭
⎫⎬
Hydr. adjustment, control volume dependent HM ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ HM..
see RE 92076
⎭
Hydr. adjustment with servo-/ proportional valve HS ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ HS..
Electronic control EO ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ EO..
Hydr.control , pilot pressure dependent HD ● ● ● ❍ HD.. see RE 92080
Electro-hydr. control with proportional solenoid EP ● ● ● ● EP.. see RE 92084 in prep.
Series
30
viewing at shaft end clockwise R
counter-clockwise L
Seals
FPM (Fluorcarbon rubber) V
Shaft end 250 355 500 750

Metric keyed parallel shaft DIN 6885 ● ● ● ● P
Metric splined shaft DIN 5480 ● ● ● ● Z
Mounting flange similar to ISO 3019-2

4-hole ● ● – – B
8-hole – – ● ● H
Port connections
Ports A,B: SAE flanged opposite sides ⎫ 35
⎬ metric threaded bolt holes
Port S: SAE on side 90o offset ⎭
Boost pump 250 355 500 750

with integrated boost pump ● ● ● ● F
without integrated boost pump ❍ ❍ ● ❍ K
= Preferred program
● = available ❍ = in preparation – = not available

691
RE 92 105/11.03 | A4CSG Industrial Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/32
Model code / standardprogram

A4CS G / 30 – V 35
Axial piston unit

1
Type of operation
Size
Control and adjustment device
Series
Seals
Shaft end
Mounting flange
Port connections
3
Boost pump
Through drive 250 355 500 750

with through drive shaft, without coupler, without adapter flange, closed with cover ● ● ● ● 99
with through drive for mounting of second pump( for further options see page 18)
Flange ISO 3019-2 (metr.) coupler for shaft end DIN 5480 to mount
125, 4-hole W 32x2x30x14x9g A4VSO/H/G 40 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 31
4
140, 4-hole W 40x2x30x18x9g A4VSO/H/G 71 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 33
160, 4-hole W 50x2x30x24x9g A4VSO/H/G 125, 180 ● ● ❍ ❍ 34
224, 4-hole W 60x2x30x28x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/H/G 250 ● ❍ ❍ ❍ 35
224, 4-hole W 70x3x30x22x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/G 355 – ● ❍ ❍ 77
315, 8-hole W 80x3x30x25x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/G 500 – – ● ❍ 43
400, 8-hole W 90x3x30x28x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/G 750 – – – ❍ 76
Flange ISO 3019-2 (metr.) coupler for shaft SAE J744 to mount 5
80, 2-hole 19-4 3/4in 11T (A-B) A10VSO 10, 18 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B2
100, 2-hole 22-4 7/8in 13T (B) A10VSO 28 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B3
100, 2-hole 25-4 1in 15T (B-B) A10VSO 45 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B4
125, 2-hole 32-4 11/4in 14T C) A10VSO 71 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B5
125, 2-hole 38-4 11/2in 17T (C-C) A10VSO 100 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B6
180, 4-hole 44-4 13/4in 13T (D) A10VSO 140 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ B7
Flange SAE J 744 coupler for shaft SAE J744 to mount 6
82-2 (A) 16-4 5/8in 9T (A) AZPF, PGF2 ● ● ● ❍ 01
82-2 (A) 19-4 3/4in 11T (A-B) A10VSO 10, 18 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 52
101-2 (B) 22-4 7/8in 13T (B) AZPN/G ● ❍ ● ❍ 02
101-2 (B) 22-4 7/8in 13T (B) A10VO 28, PGF3 ● ● ● ❍ 68
101-2 (B) 25-4 1in 15T (B-B) A10VO 45, PGH4 ❍ ❍ ● ❍ 04
127-2 (C) 32-4 11/4in 14T (C) A10VO 71 ● ● ● ❍ 07
7
127-2 (C) 38-4 11/2in 17T (C-C) A10VO 100, PGH5 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 24
152-4 (D) 44-4 13/4in 13T (D) A10VO 140 ● ● ● ❍ 17
Valves
Boost-, control press. relief- and flushing valve integrated; direct operated mainline relief valves integrated ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 3
Boost-, control press. relief- and flushing valve integrated; pilot operated mainline relief valves integrated ● ● ● ● 4
8
Filtration
without filter ● ● ● ● N
with threaded connection for filter in boost circuit ● ● ● ● D
with built on filter (optical-electr. dirt indicator) in boost circuit ● ● ● ❍ M
with threaded connection f. filter in boost circuit (D) a. sandwichplate filter for HS-control (see RE 92076) ❍ ❍ – – Z
with built on filter in boost circuit (M) and sandwichplate filter for HS-control (see RE 92076) ❍ ❍ – – U
692
Technical data
Fluid
Prior to project design, please see our data sheets RE 90220 Notes on the selection of hydraulic fluid
(mineral oil ) and RE 90221 (environmentally acceptable fluids) In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
for detailed information on fluids and application conditions. operating temperature in the closed circuit in relation to the
The variable displacement pump A4CSG is suitable for ambient temperature.
operation on mineral oil. When using environmentally The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the
acceptable fluids attention must be paid to possible limitations operating temperature range, the viscosity lies within the
of the technical data. If necessary please contact us (when optimum range (νopt .; see shaded section of the selection
ordering, please state in clear text the fluid to be used). diagram). We recommend that the higher viscosity grade is
selected in each case.
Operating viscosity range Example: at an ambient temperature of X°C the operating

temperature in the circuit is 60 °C. In the optimum viscosity
For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the range νopt (shaded area), this corresponds to viscosity grades
operating viscosity (at oprating temperature) be selected in the VG 46 or VG 68, VG 68 should be selected.
range
Important: The leakage oil temperature is influenced by
pressure and speed and is typically higher than the circuit
νopt = optimum operating viscosity 16 .... 36 mm2/s temperature. However max. temperature at any point in the
system may not exceed 90 °C.
referred to circuit temperature (closed circuit) If the above mentioned conditions cannot be kept due to
extreme operating parameters or high ambient temperatures,
Viscosity range for operation with 100% duty cycle please consult us.
νoperating = 16 .... 100 mm2/s
Limit of viscosity range Filtration of fluid

For critical operating conditions the following values apply:
The finer the filtration, the better the achieved cleanliness of
νmin = 10 mm2/s
the fluid and the longer the life of the axial piston unit.
for short periods (t < 3 min.)
at max. leakage fluid temp. of 90 °C. To ensure a reliable functioning of the axial piston unit, a
minimum cleanliness of
νmax = 1000 mm2/s
for short periods on cold start (the optimum viscosity 20/18/15 acc. to ISO 4406 is necessary.
should be reached within 15 minutes) If above conditions cannot be met, we ask you to consult with
tmin ≥ – 25° C us. For notes on the types of filtration see page 25.
Temperature range (see selection diagram)

tmin = – 25° C
tmax = + 90° C
Selection diagram
– 20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
1000 1000
600
400
200
VG
VG
VG
VG
VG 8
22
32
46
6
10
Viscosity ν [mm2/s]
100
80
60
40
36
ν opt
20
15 16
10 10
- 25° - 10° 10° 30° 50° 70° 90° Temperature
t t(°[ C)
°C]
t min = – 25° C Fluid temperature range t max = + 90° C
693
Technical Data (valid for operation on mineral oil)

Inlet Outlet
(Pressures acc. to DIN 24312) (Pressures acc. to DIN 24312)
Required static boost pressure, depending on drive speed Variable pump:
1
Pressure at port A or B
16 nominal pressure pN _________________________________________ 350 bar
14 Peak pressure pmax __________________________________________ 400 bar
Static boost pressure pb [bar]
12
10
Case drain pressure
8
2
6 The service life of the shaft seal depends on the drive speed
and case pressure. The diagram shows permissible limiting
4
values at intermittent pressure loads on the shaft seal, which
2 may not be exceeded.
0 A static case pressure, close to the max. limit will result in
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 decreased service life of the shaft seal.
Drive speed ratio n/nmax 3
Permissible case pressure(housing pressure) depending
Required static boost pressure( at n/nmax=1) on the drive speed
pb min ____________________________________________________________ 16 bar*
750
500
355
250
Pump size
Minimum static boost pressure (short periods), relief valve
setting 4
at pb min ___________________________________________________________ 8 bar* 4
Case pressure pabs [bar]
Maximum static boost pressure 3

pb max (for MA, EM, HM2/3, HS, EO2, HD u. EP), _______ 20 bar*
pb max (for HM1 u. EO1), _____________________________________ 30 bar*
* absolute pressure at port ME3 with flushingvalve spool in 2
shifted position . 5
Permissible pressure spikes in boostcircuit min. ____ 4 bar abs. 1

max. ______________________________________ 40 bar abs. 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Speed n [rpm]
Depending on the behaviour of the transmitted hydraulic
energy in the system, boost pressure fluctuations can occur. In Max. case pressure (housing pressure)
order to prevent damage in the system, boost pressure 6
protection, which monitors the static boostpressure part is pL abs max _______________________________________________________ 4 bar
necessary. Ports ME3 or MK4 are suitable to monitor the boost
pressure. It is recommended to check regularly the boost
pressure for the permissible max. and min. spikes with suitable
measuring equipment.
In order to prevent excessive boost pressure spikes, a low
pressure accumulator can be connected to ports E2, E3 or K4 .
Accumulator sizing as well as the selection for the optimum 7
connecting location depend on the system behaviour and the
operating conditions under consideration of the available boost
flow. Depending on the total systems leakage fluid flow, it may
be necessary to increase the boost flow by means of a larger,
or additional boost pump.
With integrated auxiliary pump - Version F..

8
Inlet pressure at port S
pS min ____________________________________________________ ≥ 0,8 bar abs.
pS max ______________________________________________________ 30 bar abs.
694
Technical Data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering ηmh und ηv; values rounded)
Size 250 355 500 750
Displacement Variabe pump Vg max cm3 250 355 500 750
integr. boost pump Vg H cm3 63 80 98 143
Drive speed max. speed nmax rpm 2200 2000 1800 1600
min. speed nmin rpm 800 800 800 800
Max. flow (variable pump) at nmax qv max L/min 550 710 900 1200
at nE = 1500 rpm L/min 375 533 750 1125
Max. power at no max Po max kW 321 414 525 700
(Δp = 350 bar) at nE = 1500 rpm kW 219 311 438 656
Torque at Vg max Δp = 350 bar Tmax Nm 1391 1976 2783 4174
Variable pump (without boost pump) Δp = 100 bar T Nm 398 564 795 1193
Moment of inertia about drive axis J kgm2 0,0959 0,19 0,3325 0,66
Max. perm. angular acceleration rad/s2 775 600 540 400
Torsional stiffness Shaft end P kNm/rad 527 800 1145 1860
Shaft end Z kNm/rad 543 770 1209 1812
Case volume L 10 8 14 19
Weight approx.. (Pump with EP-control a. integr. boost pump)m kg 214 237 350 500
Calculation of size
Vg • n • ηv
Flow qv = [L/min] Vg = geometr. displacement per revolution in cm3
1000
Δp = Pressure differential in bar
1,59 • Vg • Δ p
Drive torque T= [Nm] n = Drive speed in rpm
100 • ηmh ηv = volumetriic efficiency
ηmh = mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
2π • T • n qv • Δ p
Power P= = [kW] ηt = Overall efficiency (ηt = ηv • ηmh)
60 000 600 •ηt
Permissible forces on drive shaft

Size 250 355 500 750
Permissible radial force Fq max N 2000 2200 2500 3000
Permissible axial force ± Fax max N 1800 2000 2000 2200
Application of forces Fq
± Fax
X/2 X/2
X
695
Technical Data
Bearing flushing
For the following operating conditions bearing flushing is required for reliable continuous operation :
– Applications with special fluids (non mineral oils), due to limited lubricity and narrow operating temperature range
– Operation with critical conditions of temperature and viscosity with mineral oil
– With vertical mounting position of pump (shaft upwards) in order to ensure lubrication of front bearing and shaft seal. 1
Flushing is carried out via port "U", which is located in the front flange area of the pump. The flushing oil flows through the front
bearing and leaves the system together with the leakage oil at the case drain port.
The following flushing flows are recommended for the various pump sizes:
Size 250 355 500 750

Flushing flow qsp L/min 10 15 20 30
2
These flushing flows create a pressure drop of approx. 3 bar between port "U" and pump housing (including fitting).
Notes regarding bearing flushing

When using bearing flushing at port "U" the throttle screw, which can be found at port "U", has to be turned in all the way to its
stop.
Maximum drive and through drive torques 4
TGes TD 5
The split in torque between the 1. and 2. pump is optional.

The max. permissible drive torque TGes as well as the max. permissible through drive torque TD may not be exceeded.
6
Size 250 355 500 750
Max. perm. drive torque on pump 1 with shaft "Z" TGes Nm 2782 3952 5566 8348
Max. perm. through drive torque TD Nm 1391 1976 2783 4174
7
Size 250 355 500 750
Max. perm. drive torque on pump 1 with shaft "P" TGes Nm 2300 3557 5200 7513
Max. perm. through drive torque TD Nm 1391 1976 2783 4174
8
TGes = Max.permissible drive torque on pump 1
TD = Max. permissible through drive torque
696
Summary of control and adjustment devices

Manuel adjustment MA Vg
+
Handwheel operated stepless adjustment of displacement Vgmax
s
-–
smax
s
+
smax
Vg
–
Vgmax
see RE 92072
Electric motor adjustment EM Vg

+
Stepless adjustment of displacement via an electric Vgmax
motor.
With a programmed sequence control, various inter- s
mediate displacements can be selected by means of -–
built-on limit switches or a potentiometer. smax
s
+
smax
Vg
–
Vgmax
see RE 92072
Hydraulic displacement control HM 1/2/3

control volume dependent
The pump displacement is infinitely variable in relation to the
pilot oil volume at ports X1 and X2
Application: – 2-point control

– basic control device for servo- or
proportional control
see RE 92076
Hydraulic displacement control Vg

HS, HS1, HS3 +
Vgmax
with servo- or proportional valve
The stepless displacement control is accomplished by U p
–
means of a servo- or proportional valve with electrical Umax
; HD
feedback of the swivel angle.

Electronic control
+
U p
; HD
Optional: servo valve (HS/HS1), proportional valve Umax
(HS3), short circuit valve (HS1K, HS3K), without valves
(HSE, HS1E, HS3E) The HS3P- control is fitted with a Vg
built-on pressure transducer so that it can be utilised for –
electrical pressure- and power control Vgmax see RE 92076
697
Summary of control and adjusment devices

Hydraulic-electronically operated displacement Vg
+
control EO 1/2 Vgmax
The stepless adjustment of the displacement is
accomplished by means of a proportional valve with
electrical feedback of the swivel angle. 1
Electronically controlled s s
– +
Optional: smax smax
Short circuit valve ( EO1K, EO2K)
Without valves (EO1E, EO2E)
Vg
– 2
Vgmax
see RE 92076
Vg
Hydraulic control HD1/2/3 +
pilot pressure dependent Vgmax
Stepless adjustment of pump displacement in relation to 3
pilot pressure.
The displacement is proportional to the applied pilot -Δ pSt
pressure.
+Δ pSt
Optional:
Pilot pressure curves (HD1, HD2, HD3)
Pressure control (HD.A, HD.B, HD.D) 4
Remote pressure control (HD.GA, HD.GB, HD.G) Vg
Power control (HD.P) –
Electric control of pilot pressure (HD.T) Vgmax
see RE 92080
Electro -hydraulic control EP 5

with proportional solenuid Vg
+
A valve with two proportional solenoids gives a pressure Vgmax
signal to one of the pumps pilot control chambers. The
pressure signal and also the displacement is proportional
to the solenoid current. Each solenoid operates one
direction of flow. -I
6
Voltage 24 V +I
Nominal current 800 mA
Resistance at 20°C 19 Ω
Optional:
with pressure control (EPA, EPB, EPD); Vg
–
with pressure control remote (EPGA, EPGB, EPG) Vgmax
7
see RE 92084
(in preparation)
8
698
Unit dimensions size 250 Before finalising your design, please

request a certified installation drawing
Example A4CSG250EPG/30R-XXB35F994N
R(L) 220 XA2 Pressure control side A

180 279 252
XB2 Pressure control side B
30 MABP
36 ME3
243
233
228
E3 K3 K2
ø28
0
78
55 55
K2
265
U Z
78
ø24
152,5
144.5
150
M12; 16 deep
8 T MB B XB1 S 18 265
143.5 143.5
90 51 E1 E2 45°
150 Port for filter in 45°
boost circuit
374
382 Y
477
509 23
Solenoid A
Flange 224 M1
similar to ISO 3019-2
Plug
DIN EN 175301-803-A/ISO 4400
Insulation IP 65
ø224h8
55 13
L R
144
192
43
U R(L)
17 M2 Solenoid B
248
Further views and ports on page 11
Ports Max. tightening torque 1)

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J518c 1 1/2 in –
fixing thread DIN 13 M16; 21 deep see safety instructions
S Inlet port, standard press. range SAE J518c 2 1/2 in –
MA,MB,MABP Test points press. ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
MS Test point inlet pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
T Oil drain DIN 3852 M42x2; 20 deep (closed) 720 Nm
E1 To filter DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (closed) 540 Nm
E2 From filter DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (closed) 540 Nm
K1 Flushing port DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep 540 Nm
1) Follow manufacturer's instructions of used fittings
699

View U View Z View X
Control press. relief valve Relief valve in A

MK4 36.5 XA1 1
M16; 21 deep E3 MK4

36.5 M16; 21deep
K4 MA K4
B A
79.4
79.4
X U
55
55
88.5
ø38
ø38
E2 B
A E1 2
K1 K1
Mounting hole for plug
between E1and E2 S MS
192.5 Flushing pressure relief valve
Relief valve in B
200 200
Through drive F99 shown without cover,
374 to pump mounting Dimensions see page19
477 face 3
View Y
to pump mounting face 382
M12; 17 deep 4
88.9
ø63
MS 50.8 S
Shaft ends
P Keyed DIN 6885 Z Splined DIN 5480
AS 18x11x100 W60x2x30x28x9g
3 100
M20
6
64–02
M20
42 42
ø60m6
105 11
70
115
80
7

K2, K3 Flushing port DIN 3852 M42x2; 20 deep (closed) 720 Nm
R(L) Oil fill and air bleed DIN 3852 M42x2; 20 deep 720 Nm
U Bearing flushing port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
E3 External boost flow port DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (closed) 540 Nm
ME3 Test point boost pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm 8
K4 Accumulator port DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep (closed) 540 Nm
MK4 Test point loop flushing press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
M1, M2 Test point control pressure DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 140 Nm
XA1 Pilot port relief valve in A DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
XB1 Pilot port relief valve in B DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
XA2, XB2 Pilot port for pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
700

Example A4CSG355EPG/30R-XXB35F994N
R(L) 220 XA2 Pressure control side A

180 279 252
XB2 Pressure control side B
30 MABP
36 ME3
243
233
228
E3 K3 K2
ø2
08
78
55 55
265
U K2 Z
ø24
144.5
78
152,5
150
M12; 16 deep 265
8 T MB B XB1 S 18
143.5 143.5
90 51 E1 E2 45°
150 45°
Ports for filter in
381 boost circuit
389 Y
484
516 23
Solenoid A
Flange 224
similar to ISO 3019-2 M1
Plug
DIN EN 175301-803-A/ISO 4400
Insulation IP 65
ø224h8
55 13
L R
144
192
U R(L)
40
17 M2
248
Solenoid B
Ports Max. tightening torque1)

A, B Pressure port,high press. range SAE J518c 1 1/2 in –
MA,MB,MABP Test points press. ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
701


Control press. relief valve Relief valve in A
MK4 36.5 XA1 1
M16; 21 deep E3 MK4 M16; 21 deep
36.5
K4 MA B A
79.4
79.4
X U
55
88.5
55
ø38
ø38
E2
B
E1 K1 2
K1 A
between E1 and E2 S MS
192.5 Flushing pressure relief valve
Relief valve in B
200 200
Through drive F99 shown without cover
381 to pump Dimensions see page19
484 mounting face 3

View Y
to pump mounting face 389
M12; 17 deep
4
88.9
ø63
50.8
S
MS
5
Shaft ends
AS 20x12x100 W70x3x30x22x9g
4.5 100
M20
6
74.5-02
M20
42 42
ø70m6
53 53
105 13
115 82
92
7
Ports Max. tightening torque. 1)
R(L) Oil fill +air bleed DIN 3852 M42x2; 20 deep 720 Nm
MK4 Test point loop flushing pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
M1, M2 Test point control pressure DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 140 Nm
XA2, XB2 pilot port pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
702

Example A4CSG500EPD/30R-XXH35F994N
332 306
110 110
MAB MB R(L)
M2
ME3
341.5
36
281
280
ø24
E3
190
78
55 55
Z
78
K3 K2
05
161
170
B
190
ø3
ø4
6
0
M12; 16 deep
8x
16+5 T XB1 S 155 155
45
18
°(
190
45 60
47 80 190
E 1 E2
=3
51
° °)
155
Ports for filter in 22° 30
415 boost circuit ´
425 Y
520
552 23
Threaded holes for eye Control oil filter A

bolts M16 DIN 580 Solenoid A
48
M1 Plug
16
DIN EN 175301-803-A/ISO 4400
13 U Insulation IP 65
Pressure control A
30
189
°
10°
ø230 +5
ø315 h8
ø225
L R
50
0
R1
30
Pressure control B
279 50
Flange 315 Solenoid B
similar to ISO 3019-2 Control oil filter B

A, B Pressure port, high press. range SAE J 518c 2 in –
S Inlet port, standardpress. range SAE J518c 2 1/2 in –
MA,MB,MAB Test points press. ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
703

MA
44.5 1
XA1 Control pressure relief valve Relief valve side A
MK4 M20; 24 deep 44.5
E3 K4
K4 M20;24 deep
ø50
B A
96.8
96.8
ø50
X U
55
E2 K1 B 2
K1 A E1 Flushing pressure relief valve
MS betwenn E1 and E2 S
Through drive F99 shown without cover
192.5 192.5
Relief valve side B Dimensions see page 20
205 205
415 to pump moun- 3

520 ting face
View Y
M12; 17 deep 4
88.9
ø63
50.8
S
MS
5
Shaft ends
AS 22x14x125 W80x3x30x25x9g
3 125
6
M20
85 –0.2
M20
ø80 m6
42 42
130 90
180 140
7
R(L) Oil fill +air bleed DIN 3852 M48x2; 22 deep 960 Nm
M1 Test point control chamber press. DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep (closed) 210 Nm
704

Example A4CSG750EPG/30R-XXH35F994N
332 315
110 110
MAB MB R(L) M2 XA XB
ME3
371.3
36
E3
345
334
317
319
ø22
ø4
232
50
K2
78 78
55 55
K2 Z
U
178
185
232
K3
95
ø4
T B XB1 S 18 M12;16 deep
182
182
8x
16+5 89 51
45
45
(= 232 232
47 161 E1 E2
°
36
°
467 Ports for filter in 0°
) 22° 30´
475 Y boost circuit
585
619 23
Threaded holes Control oil filter A

for eye bolts Solenoid A
M16 DIN 580 Pressure control A
58 200
18
13 U M1
XA
30° 5°
231
136 136
4
Plug
ø400 h8
ø263 +5
DIN EN 175301-803-A/ISO 4400

ø255
L R
Insulation IP 65
50
XB
32
301 50 Pressure control B
Flange 400 Solenoid B
similar to ISO 3019-2 Control oil filter B

A, B Pressure ports, high press. range SAE J 518c 2 in –
MA,MB,MAB Test points pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
E2 From filter DIN 3852 M33x2; 18deep (closed) 540 Nm
705

Control pressure relief valve Relief valve in A

MA 1
44.5
MK4 XA1
M20; 24 deep 44.5
K4 B A M20; 24 deep
96.8
96.8
X U
ø50
ø50
B 2
K1 A
Flushing pressure relief valve
MS 194 196.5 Through drive F99 shown without cover
205 205 Dimensions see page 20
467 to pump moun-
Relief valve in B
585 ting face 3
View Y
M12; 17 deep 4
88.9
ø63
50.8 S
MS
5
Shaft ends
AS 25x14x125 W90x3x30x28x9g
4.5 125
6
M24
95–0.2
M24
50
ø90m6
50
130 105
180 155
7

R(L) Oil fill + air bleed DIN 3852 M48x2; 22 deep 960 Nm
8
ME3 Test point boost pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
M1 Test point control chamber press. DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep(closed) 210 Nm
XA1 Pilot port relief valve A DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
XB1 Pilot port relief valve B DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (closed) 80 Nm
706
Through drive
Although the compact unit A4CSG has a built in boost pump, it Permissible moment of inertia
can be supplied with a through drive as per the model codes
on page 3.
For the various through drive versions see the codes on page 3
(codes 99 – 17).
This code designation is sufficient if no further pump has to be
factory mounted.
Included in this case are: m1 m2
for F/K 31 – 17:
Shaft coupler, mounting screws, seal, and if necessary an
adapter flange
for F/K 99: l1
with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler, without adapter
flange; unit closed with oiltight cover. l2
Combination pumps
m1, m2, m3 Weight of pumps in kg
Independent circuits are avilable for the user when further l1, l2, l3 Distance to center of gravity in mm
pumps are built on.
1
Tm = (m1 • l1 + m2 • l2 + m3 • l3) • 102 in Nm
1. If the combination consists of 2 Rexroth axial poston pumps
and if these 2 units have to be factory assembled together Size 250 355 500 750
both pump model codes should be joined by a "+".
Perm. moment of inertia Tm Nm 9300 9300 1560019500
Ordering example:
A4CSG 500 EPG/30 R–VPH35F434M + Perm. moment of inertia Tm Nm 930 930 1560 1950
with dyn. mass acc.2of
A4CSG 500 EPG/30 R–VZH35F994M 10g 98,1 m/sec
2. If a gear pump is to be factory mounted, please consult us. Weight m1 kg 214 237 350 500
Dist. to center of gravity l1 mm 210 220 230 260
Max. permissible input and through drive torques see page 7.
Overview mounting options onto A4CSG
Through drive - A4CSG Suitable for 2. Pumptype Available

Flange Shaft coupler Short A4CSG A4VSO/(H)G A10V(S)O/31 A10V(S)O/52 Ext./internal for pump-
code Size (shaft) Size (shaft) Size (shaft) Size (shaft) gear pump size
Flange ISO 3019-2 (metric)
80, 2-hole 19-4 (3/4in, 11T) 3) F/KB2 – – 18 (S, R) 10 (S) – in prep.
100, 2-hole 22-4 (7/8in, 13T) 3) F/KB3 – – 28 (S, R) – – in prep.
25-4 (1in, 15T) 3
) F/KB4 – – 45 (S, R) – – in prep.
125, 2-hole 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T) 3) F/KB5 – – 71 (S, R) – – in prep.
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T) 3) F/KB6 – – 100 (S) – – in prep.
125, 4-hole W 32x2x30x14x9g 2) F/K31 – 40 (Z) – – – in prep.
140, 4-hole W 40x2x30x18x9g 2) F/K33 – 71 (Z) – – – in prep.
160, 4-hole W 50x2x30x24x9g 2) F/K34 – 125, 180 (Z) – – – 250, 355
180, 4-hole 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T) 3) F/KB7 – – 140 (S) – – in prep.
224, 4-hole W 60x2x30x28x9g 2) F/K35 250 (Z) 250 (Z) – – – 250
W 70x3x30x22x9g 2) F/K77 355 (Z) 355 (Z) – – – 355
315, 8-hole W 80x3x30x25x9g 2) F/K43 500 (Z) 500 (Z) – – – 500
400, 8-hole W 90x3x30x28x9g ) F/K762
750 (Z) 750 (Z) – – – in prep.
82-2 (A) 1) 16-4 (5/8in, 9T) ) F/K01
3
– – – – AZPF 4)/PGF2 250...500
19-4 (3/4in, 11T) ) F/K52
3
– – 18 (S, R) 10 (S) – in prep.
101-2 (B) 1) 22-4 (7/8in, 13T) 3
) F/K02 – – – – AZPN/G 4) 250, 500
F/K68 – – 28 (S) 28 (S) PGF3 250...500
25-4 (1in, 15T) 3
) F/K04 – – 45 (S) 45 (S) PGH4 500
127-2 (C) 1) 32-4 (1 1/4in, 14T) 3) F/K07 – – 71 (S) – – 250...500
38-4 (1 1/2in, 17T) 3) F/K24 – – 100 (S) 85 (S) PGH5 in prep.
152-4 (D) 1) 44-4 (1 3/4in, 13T) 3) F/K17 – – 140 (S) – – 250...500
1
) 2 = 2-hole, 4 = 4-hole 2
) to DIN 5480 3
) Drive shafts acc. to SAE J744 OCT83
4
) Rexroth recommends special versions for the gear pumps. Please consult us.
707
Dimensions pump combinations and through drive F/K99

Pump combinations A4CSG + A4CSG
A4CSG A4CSG
(1st Pump) (2nd Pump)
A
2
Overall lenght A
A4CSG A4CSG (2nd Pump with through drive F/K99)
(1st Pump) 250 355 500 750
250 1041 – – – 3
355 1048 1055 – –
500 1084 1091 1127 –
750 1151 1158 1194 1261
4
F/K99 with through drive shaft, without shaft coupler,
without adapter flange, closed with cover
Size 250 and 355 Size A1

250 509
5
shown without cover Section M-N 355 516
Sizes 500 and 750 see page 20
M W 42x1.25x30x32x9g
DIN 5480
75 75 M16; 24 deep1)
42 42 95.7 6
M20; 24 deep1)
15
°
89
70
ø171+0.02
+0.07
ø115
ø78
ø56
70
89
N 3
30° 30° 10.3
46
95 8
137
A1 to mounting face
1) DIN 13, Tightening torque see
safety instructions
708
Dimensions through drive F/K99 and F/K34

F/K99 with through drive shaft,without shaft coupler,
without adapter flange, closed with cover
Size 500 and 750 Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
shown without cover Section M-N 500 552 ø115 3.4 41 95

750 619 ø115 3.4 45 116.6
M
75 75 M16; 24 deep1) W55x1.25x30x42x9g
DIN 5480
63 63 M20; 24 deep1)
42 42
15
°
102
89
+0.02
ø171 +0.07
70
ø78
A2
70
102
89
A3
N 10.3
30°
46
A4 50
A5
A1 to mounting face
F/K 34 Flange ISO 3019-2 160 4-hole

Shaft coupler for shaft to DIN 5480 N 50x2x30x24x8H
for mounting of A4VSO/H/G (shaft Z, see RE 92 050, 92 110 resp. 92 100)
Size 250 and 355 Size A1
Section M-N 250 531

355 538
M M16; 22 deep1)
ø2
00
+0.02
+0.07
12.5
ø160
45 10
°
66
1) DIN 13, Tightening torque see
safety instructions
709

F/K35 Flange ISO 3019-2 224 4-hole
for mounting of A4CSG 250 or an A4VSO/H/G 250 (shaft Z, see RE 92 050, 92 110 resp. 92 100)
Size 250
1
Section M-N
M M20; 30 deep1)
ø2
80
+0.03
ø224 +0.10
12.5
3
45 8
°
81
N 4

for mounting of A4CSG 355 or an A4VSO/G 355 (shaft Z see RE 92 050 resp. 92 100) 5
Size 355
Section M-N
M M20; 30 deep1) 6
ø2
80
+0.10
+0.03
12.4
ø224
45
° 8
92 8

N
1) DIN 13, tightening torque see
safety instructions
710

for mounting of A4CSG 500 or an A4VSO/G 500 (shaft Z, see RE 92 050 resp. 92 100)
Size 500
Section M-N
M M20; 26 deep1)
ø3
60
ø315 +0.10
+0.03
53.5
45
8x
°
45
(=
36 22° 30
°
0° ´
) 20
90

N
F/K01 Flange SAE J744 – 82-2 (SAE A-2-hole)

Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J744 16-4 (A) 5/8in 9T 16/32 DP 2)
for mounting of AZPF or PGF2 (shaft J, flange U2, see RE10 213)
Size 250, 355 and 500 Size A1 A2
Section M-N 250 531 10,5

355 538 10,5
500 574 9,3
M M10; 15 deep 1)
45°
+0.05
+0.02
A2
ø106.5
ø82.55
10
N
33 1) DIN 13, tightening torque see
A1 to mounting face safety instructions
2) 30° pressure angle, flat root,
side fit, class 5
711

F/K02 Flange SAE J744 – 101-2 (SAE B-2-hole)
Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J 744 22-4 (B) 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP 2)
for mounting of AZPN/G
Size 250 and 500 Size A1 A2

1
Section M-N 250 531 10,3
500 574 9,3
M
M12;18 deep 1)
45 2
°
+0.05
+0.02
ø146
ø101.6
A2
10
N
44
A1 to mounting face
4

Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J 744 22-4 (B) 7/8in 13T 16/32 DP 2)
5
for mounting of A10VO 28 (shaft S, see RE 92 701) or internal gear pump PGF3 (shaft J, flange U2, see RE 10 213)
Section M-N 250 531 10,3
355 538 10,3
500 574 9,3
M M12;15 deep 1)
6
45
°
+0.05
+0.02
ø146
ø101.6
A2 7
10
N 44 8
A1 to mounting face safety instructions
side fit, class 5
712

Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J 744 25-4 (C) 1 in 15T 16/32 DP 2)
for mounting of A10VO 45 (shaft S, see RE 92 701) or of an internal gear pump PGH4 (shaft R, flange U2, see RE 10 223)
Size NG 500
Section M-N
M
M12; 15 deep 1)
+0.05
+0.02
ø146
ø101.6
9.3
45 10
°
48
N 574 to mounting face
F/K07 Flange SAE J744 – 127-2 (SAE C-2-hole)

Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J 744 32-4 (C) 1 1/4in 14T 12/24 DP 2)
for mounting of A10VO 71 (shaft S, see RE 92 701)

250 545 19,9
Section M-N
355 552 19,9
500 588 10,3
M M16; 24 deep 1)
+0.07
+0.02
ø181
ø127
A2
45
° 13
58
safety instructions
side fit, class 5.
713
Dimensions through drive F/K17

F/K17 Flange SAE J744 – 152-4 (SAE D-4-hole)
Shaft coupler for shaft to SAE J 744 – 44-4 (D) 1 3/4in 13T 8/16 DP 2)
for mounting of A10VO 140 (shaft S, see RE 92 701)
Size 250, 355 and 500 Size A1

1
Section M-N 250 531
M 355 538
M16; 22 deep 1) 500 600
161.6
+0.02
+0.07
161.6
ø152.4
10.4
13
71 1) DIN 13, tightening torque see
N
safety instructions
A1 to mounting face
side fit, class 5 4
Types of filtration
Version N - without filter in boost circuit Version D - Threaded ports for external mounting
The ports E1 and E2 are closed with a pressure tight cover and of filter in boost pump outlet
internally connected (see circuit drawing page 26). 5
Ports E1 and E2 are provided to mount a filter externally .
If needed, a boost line filter can still be mounted later on at
these ports. These ports are open, and only temporarily closed with plastic
plugs for transport.
In this case, the internal connection between E1 and E2 must
The internal passage between E1 and E2 is plugged.
be plugged (please consult us).
6
Version M - with built on filter in the boost circuit Circuit drawing version D (example size 500/750)
B MB K1 MA A
In this case a filter is factory mounted into the boostpump
pressure line.
K4
Filter version: with bypass and electrical-optical dirt indicator
MK4
Filtermodel for pump sizes 250...500:
XA1 7
DFBN/HC330QE10D1.X/V-L24
For further information see pages 28 and 29. XB1
ME3 M2
E3 M1
MAB U K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS
714
Integrated boost pump and control valves (Version F..)

Circuit drawing
Example A4CSG 500 EPG/30R-XXB35F994N
750
do not belong to supply
B MB K1 MA A
Flushing valve Loop flushing relief valve
EPG Electro-hydr. control

K4
with proportional solenoid and
remote pressure control
MK4 XA XB
Mainline relief valves
(high pressure)
XA1
XB1
Bypassvalve
ME3 M2
M1
E3
Checkvalves for
boost inlet
Control press.
relief valve
MAB U K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS
integrated boost pump

control oil filter
Circuit drawing NG 500/750 with EPD-control and filter see page 29; without integrated boostpump see
page 30.
Ports
A, B Pressure ports U Bearing flushing port (closed)
S Inlet port E3 External boost flow port (closed)
MA,MB,MAB Test points pressure port (closed) ME3 Test point boost pressure (closed)
MS Test point inlet port (closed) K4 Accumulator port (closed)
T Oil drain (closed) MK4 Test point loop flushing pressure (closed)
E1 To filter (closed) M1,M2 Test point control pressure (closed)
E2 From filter (closed) XA1 Pilot port relief valve in A (closed)
K1 Flushing port XB1 Pilot port relief valve in B (closed)
K2, K3 Flushing port (closed) XA, XB Pilot port for remote pressure control
R(L) Oil fill + air bleed
715
Integrated boost pump and -control valves (Version F..)

High press. mainline reliefs (crossover relief valves) Control pressure relief valve (for EP and HD)
The 2 pilot operated crossover reliefs have pilot ports Direct operated, piloted open by circuit operating
for remote control. pressure.
The valves limit the max. pressure spikes to an acceptable Adjustment range ΔpSt 10 - 20 bar 1
safe level, and prevent damage to the main pump. Standard setting: ΔpSp + ΔpSt = 32 bar
Each pressure side has its own relief valve, which is vented At low operating pressure (i.e. main pump in center
to the low pressure side of the loop. position) the auxiliary pump pressure is limited to 32 bar.
The valves can be hooked up to pilot reliefs for remote This pressure level is required to make sure that the
setting of pressure at ports XA1, XB1. pump will stroke when using an HD or EP control. This
The valves are normally set to a pressure level of 350 feature eliminates the use of another pump for control 2
bar. pressure.
If another setting is required, please state that in clear
text.
As soon as the pressure level in one of the circuit
pressure sides exceeds the 32 bar, the control pressure
Flushing pressure relief valve is taken from this source via the check valves.At the same
direct operated time, the relief valve is piloted open.
3
Adjustment range ΔpSp 10...20 bar This brings the boost pump pressure to the level set at
Standard setting: 16 bar absolute the flushing relief valve, i.e. 16 bar.
This function enables saving of energy, and improves the
overall efficiency of the system.
Integrated boost pump
Standard sizes With the controls EO1 and HM1 the necessary control enrgy
4
Size 250 355 500 750 can always be taken out of the boost circuit (Port ME3).
cm3 63 80 98 143 Recommended setting: 25 bar
With all other control options, the control pressure relief

valve is not mounted, and the valve cavity is plugged.
Control pressure filter
Controls HD and EP in the size 500 and 750 with 5
internal supply of control pressure out of one of the high
pressure sides have always a 0,2 mm filter insert for
coarse particles (regardless of the model code for
filtration).
8
716
Subplate mounted filter in boost circuit (Version M..)

The filter is mounted in the auxiliary pump's pressure line Pickup pressure of dirt indicator
directly onto the pump
Δpa = 5 bar – 0,5 bar
Filter model DFBN/HC330QE10D1.X/V–L24

Filter with bypass and electrical-optical dirt indicator. Opening pressure of bypass valve
Δpö = 6 bar +0,6 bar
Dimensions size 250...500
347
B
258
S
A1
Size A1
250 699,5
355 706,5
500 742,5
717
Subplate mounted filter in boost circuit (Version M..)

Circuit diagram
Example A4CSG 500 EPD/30R-XXH35F994M
750
1
B MB K1 M A A
K4
2
MK4
XA1
XB1 3
ME3 M2
M1
5
E2 E1
MAB U K2 K3 T R(L) S MS
Mounting of filter onto size 250...500 Control oil filter

DFBN/HC330QE10D1.X/V-L24 Controls HD and EP in the size 500 and 750 with
with electrical-optical dirt indicator internal supply of control pressure out of one of the high
internal connection between E1 and E2 plugged
model code M
pressure sides have always a 0,2 mm filter insert for
coarse particles (regardless of the model code for 7
filtration).
Ports
A, B Pressure port U Bearing flushing port (closed)
S Inlet port ME3 Test point boost pressure (closed)
MA,MB,MAB Test points pressure port (closed) K4 Accumulator port (closed)
MS Test point inlet pressure (closed) MK4 Test point loop flushing pressure (closed) 8
T Oil drain (closed) M1,M2 Test point control pressure (closed)
K1 Flushing port XA1 Pilot port relief valve in A (closed)
K2, K3 Flushing port (closed) XB1 Pilot port relief valve in B (closed)
R(L) Oil fill + air bleed
718
External supply of boost flow - without integrated boostpump (Version K..)

This variation is used without the integrated boost pump. Size 500
Port E* is used for the connection of the external boost.

In order to guarantee a reliable function it is necessary to
maintain a boost flow with a cleanliness class as described on
page 4
92
* resp. E2 for version K...N/D without filter
B
270
519 E E
Position of port E2 see page 14
Circuit diagram
Example A4CSG 500 EPD/30R-XXB35K174M
750
Flushing valve B MB K 1 MA A
Loop flushing relief valve
K4 EPD Electro-hydraulic control

with proportional solenoid
High pressure MK4
relief valves
XA1
Bypass valve XB1
ME3 M2
M1
Check valves for
boost inlet
Control pressure
relief valve
E
E2
MAB U K2 K3 T R(L)
Filter
Ports
E resp. E2 Boost inlet DIN 3852 M33x2; 18 deep R(L) Oil fill + air bleed
540 Nm max. tightening torque U Port for bearing flushing
E2 Boost inlet for version without filter K4 Accumulator port
A, B Pressure port ME3 Test point for boost pressure
MA,MB,MAB Test points pressure ports MK4 Test point loop flushing pressure
T Oil drain M1,M2 Test point control pressure
K1 Flushing port XA1 Pilot port relief valve in A
K2, K3 Flushing port XB1 Pilot port relief valve in B
719
Installation and commissioning instructions

During commissioning and during operation the pump housing must be filled with oil. The commissioning must be carried out with
low speeds, and without load, until the system is completely deairated
During prolonged periods of standstill the housing can loose its oil via the service lines. At renewed start up, the pump housing
must be refilled.
The inlet pressure at the suction port S may not fall below 0,8 bar absolute 1
Mounting position:
Optional.
In order to achieve a low noise level, all hydraulic lines (suction, pressure, and drain lines)should be connected via flexible members
to the reservoir
A check valve in the pump drain line should be avoided. If desirable, please contact us.
1. Vertical installation 2. Horizontal mounting 2
With vertical installation and the shaft pointing upwards The highest of the ports T, K1, K2 , K3 resp.R/L must be
(fig. 1 and 2) bearing flushing is necessary, in order to used to fill/bleed the pump and afterwards be piped as case
provide lubrication for the front bearing and the shaft seal, drain.
see page 7. Prior to start up fill the pump housing.
1.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction
2.1 Mounting below the reservoir - flooded suction 3
Prior to mounting fill pump housing (pump in horizontal
position). Connect port T to reservoir , R/L closed. Case drain and inlet port S to be piped acc. to fig. 3 or4.
Option for filling in installed condition with shaft pointing

upwards: fill through port R and bleed via port T,
afterwards close port R.
Filling R(L) 4
S T
T
R(L)
T S
R(L) 5
S
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Fig. 1
2.2Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted
1.2 Mounting above reservoir - tanktop mounted
Case drain and inlet port S to be piped acc. to fig. 5 .
Prior to mounting fill pump housing(pump in horizontal
position. Connect port T to reservoir, R/L closed.
Option for filling in installed condition with shaft pointing R(L) 6
upwards: fill through R/L and bleed viaT, afterwards close
R(L) .
Important: Suction(inlet) pressure at port S may never fall
below 0,8 bar absolute
Avoid mounting above reservoir if low noise levels are
important. S h max = 800
Filling ht min = 200 7
T
Fig. 5
R(L)
S
h max = 800 8
ht min = 200
Fig. 2
720
Safety instructions
– The pump A4CSG was designed for operation in closed circuits.
– All hydraulic ports can only be used for the fastening of hydraulic service lines .
– Tightening torques: please comply with the manufacturer’s information regarding the max. permissible tightening torques for
the used fittings.
For fastening screws to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torques in each in-
dividual case acc. to VDI 2230 dated 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being burned!
any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG. In the
Plant Horb
An den Kelterwiesen 14
Telefon +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21 derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
www.boschrexroth.com that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
721
4FDPOEBSZDPOUSPMXJUI 3&
"740BYJBMQJTUPOVOJUT
5ZQF"740%4
4J[F
$PNQPOFOUTFSJFT9 9 4FDPOEBSZVOJU %JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ
UZQF"740%43 4:)/$4&,9
/PNJOBMQSFTTVSFCBS
OPUJODMVEFEJOUIFTDPQFPGEFMJWFSZ
1FBLQSFTTVSFCBS
5BCMFPGDPOUFOUT 'FBUVSFT
'FBUVSFT ¾ )JHIMZEZOBNJDSPUPSESJWF
0SEFSJOHDPEF ¾ .PUPSBOEHFOFSBUPSPQFSBUJPOGPSCPUIEJSFDUJPOTPGSPUBUJPO
'VODUJPO ¾ 8JUIFOFSHZSFDPWFSZBOEFOFSHZTUPSBHF
1BSUTPGUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJU ¾ 8JUIDMPTFEMPPQTQFFE QPTJUJPOPSUPSRVFDPOUSPMXJUIIJHI
5FDIOJDBMEBUB DPOUSPMRVBMJUZBOEEZOBNJDT
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN ¾ 5ISPUUMFGSFFDPVQMJOHBOEFOFSHZUSBOTGFSGSPNBOZOVNCFS
PGJOEFQFOEFOUMZXPSLJOHBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUT NPUPSPSHFOFSB
$MPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM%43
UPSPQFSBUJPO
UPPOFKPJOUTVQQMZMJOFXJUIDPOTUBOUPQFSBU
*ODSFNFOUBMFODPEFS(&- JOHQSFTTVSF
4XJWFMBOHMFTFOTPS"89' ¾ $PNQBDUEJHJUBMDPOUSPMFMFDUSPOJDT
&MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFDIFDLWBMWF37&"74
"OUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWF4"
%JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ4:)/$4&,9
722
#PTDI3FYSPUI"()ZESBVMJDT "740%43&
0SEFSJOHDPEF
"740 8 ¾

)ZESBVMJDGMVJE
.JOFSBMPJM
"YJBMQJTUPOVOJU
4XBTIQMBUFEFTJHO BEKVTUBCMF Q/CBS QNBYCBS "740
4J[F

%JTQMBDFNFOU7HNBY<DN>
$POUSPMBOEBEKVTUNFOUEFWJDF
$MPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM TFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMMFE XJUIBUUBDIFEIJHISFTQPOTFWBMWF %43
$MPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM TFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMMFE XJUIBUUBDIFETFSWPWBMWF
%44
$MPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM TFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMMFE XJUIPVUWBMWF %4&
-PBEIPMEJOHGVODUJPO
8JUIMPBEIPMEJOHWBMWF-4
-

8JUIPVUMPBEIPMEJOHWBMWF
$PNQPOFOUTFSJFT
4J[FBOETJ[F 9

4J[FUPTJ[F 9
%JSFDUJPOPGSPUBUJPO
$IBOHJOH 8
4FBMT
/#3 OJUSJMFSVCCFSBDDPSEJOHUP*40
XJUITIBGUTFBMSJOHNBEFPG',. 1

',. GMVPSPDBSCPOSVCCFSBDDPSEJOHUP*40
7
4IBGUFOE
$ZMJOESJDBMXJUIGJUUJOHLFZ %*/ 1

4QMJOFETIBGUQSPGJMF %*/ ;
.PVOUJOHGMBOHF

*40IPMF ¾ ¾ ¾ #

*40IPMF ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ )
$POOFDUJPOGPSXPSLJOHMJOFT
1PSUT#BOE44"& MBUFSBMMZEJTQMBDFECZm NFUSJDNPVOUJOHUISFBE

UIFBEEJUJPOBMQSFTTVSFQPSU#WJTWJT#JTDMPTFEVQPOEFMJWFSZCZNFBOTPGBGMBOHFQMBUF
"WBJMBCMF
¾ /PUBWBJMBCMF

/PTUBOEBSE QMFBTFDPOUBDUVTBUUIFGPMMPXJOH
FNBJMBEESFTTBQQMJDBUJPODFOUSF!CPTDISFYSPUIEF
723
3&"740%4 )ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(
"740 8 ¾

5ISPVHIESJWF 1

8JUIPVUCPPTUQVNQ XJUIPVUUISPVHIESJWF /
¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ,
5ISPVHIESJWF,PS6GPSBUUBDIJOHBOBYJBMQJTUPOVOJU
¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ 6
'MBOHF 4QMJOFETIBGU 'PSBUUBDIJOH
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 2
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
3
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
*40 IPMF YYYH "740 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
8JUIBUUBDIFEJODSFNFOUBMFODPEFSJNQS 5
8JUIBUUBDIFEJODSFNFOUBMFODPEFSJNQS 5
*ODSFNFOUBMFODPEFSDBOCFBUUBDIFE UISPVHIESJWF 4
5
DMPTFEXJUIDPWFS
4QFDJBMTQFFEPNFUFSBUUBDINFOU 5
&VSPGMBOHF UISPVHIESJWFDMPTFE 5
7BMWFT
8JUIPVUWBMWFCMPDL 5
&MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFDIFDLWBMWF37&BUUBDIFE
&MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFTIVUPGGCMPDLGPSDPNCJOBUJPOXJUIMPBEIPMEJOHWBMWF-4 PSEFSJOHDPEFÜ-Ü

'JMUSBUJPO
8JUIPVUGJMUFS / 6

8JUIBUUBDIFETBOEXJDIQMBUFGJMUFS 0OMZJODPOOFDUJPOXJUIPSEFSJOHDPEFÜ%44Ü
;
"WBJMBCMF
¾ /PUBWBJMBCMF

/PTUBOEBSE QMFBTFDPOUBDUVTBUUIFGPMMPXJOH
7
FNBJMBEESFTTBQQMJDBUJPODFOUSF!CPTDISFYSPUIEF
3FMBUFEFMFDUSPOJDT TFQBSBUFPSEFS
4FFQBHF
8
724
'VODUJPO
5IFTFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMJTBOFOFSHZTBWJOHESJWFDPODFQUXJUI 5IFTUPSFJTVTFEUPDPWFSGMPXQFBLT*UJTNPSFPWFSVTFEUP
IJHIEZOBNJDTGPSTFUUJOHVQDMPTFEMPPQTQFFE QPTJUJPOPS TUPSFUIFFOFSHZXIJDIJTGFECBDLCZUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJUJOUP
UPSRVFDPOUSPMTXJUIFOFSHZSFDPWFSZ UIFIZESBVMJDOFUXPSLJODBTFPGQVNQPQFSBUJPOJGUIFSFBSF
5IFTFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMMFEIZESPTUBUJDBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUTXPSL OPNPSFBDUVBUPST5PHFUIFSXJUIUIFQSFTTVSFDPOUSPMMFEQSJ
BUPOFTVQQMZOFUXPSLXJUIDPOTUBOUQSFTTVSF NBSZVOJUBOEUIFPQFSBUJOHTUBUFPGUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJU UIF
DIBSHJOHTUBUFPGUIFTUPSFBOEJUTQSFMPBEQSFTTVSFEFUFSNJOF
5IFQPXFSSFNPWBMPSSFUVSOGSPNPSUPUIFTVQQMZOFU
UIFDPOTUBOUIJHIQSFTTVSFPGUIFTZTUFN
XPSLJTUISPUUMFGSFFBOEJOMJOFXJUIUIFEFNBOECZBEKVTU
JOHUIFTUSPLFWPMVNFPGUIFBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUTUPUIFSFMFWBOU 5IFTQFDJGJDQSPQFSUJFTPGUIFTFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMTVDIBTUIF
MPBEDBTF SFEVDUJPOPGUIFOVNCFSPGEFWJDFTOFFEFEJOUIFQSJNBSZ
BSFB UIFQPTTJCJMJUJFTUPSFDPWFSFOFSHZBOETUPSFCSBLJOHFO
5PUIJTFOE BOZOVNCFSPGVOJUTXPSLJOHBTNPUPSPSQVNQ
FSHZBOEUIFBMNPTUMPBEJOEFQFOEFOUTQFFEBOEQPTJUJPOJOH
DBOCFDPOOFDUFEJOQBSBMMFM'PVSRVBESBOUPQFSBUJPOJTQPT
BDDVSBDZPQFOVQBCSPBESBOHFPGBQQMJDBUJPO
TJCMFXIFSFBTUIFVOJUTGPSTQFFEPSUPSRVFSFWFSTBMBSFTXJW
FMFEWJBÜ[FSPÜ5IJTBMTPSFWFSUTUIFEJSFDUJPOPGGMPX
#FUXFFOQSJNBSZBOETFDPOEBSZVOJUT BOFOFSHZTUPSFDBO
CFBSSBOHFE JGOFDFTTBSZ
4UPSF
1SFTTVSFDPOUSPMMFS
DR $POUSPM DS2
n
ODPNNBOE FMFDUSPOJDT
%SJWF 0VUQVU
OBDUVBM SYHNC100-SEK
1SJNBSZVOJU 4FDPOEBSZVOJU
1BSUTPGUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJU
"YJBMQJTUPOVOJU"740 )ZESBVMJDDJSDVJUEJBHSBNGPSTUBOEBSEDPOGJHVSBUJPO
XBZIJHISFTQPOTFWBMWF TFFEBUBTIFFU
"740%438¾5/
4J[FPGUIF"74 5ZQF
831)$#-9(,.
UP 831)$#-9(,.
4XJWFMBOHMFTFOTPS"89' TFFQBHF
T1
T P
T2
*ODSFNFOUBMFODPEFS(&- G 1.1
2
U
b a
PSEFSJOHDPEFÜ5ÜBOEPSÜ5Ü
TFFQBHF
B A
&MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFDIFDLWBMWF37& M2 P
B
PSEFSJOHDPEFÜÜ
TFFQBHF
Sp
Pst Rkv
"OUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWF TFQBSBUFPSEFS TFFQBHF
M1
MB MS 1.2
3FMBUFEFMFDUSPOJDT GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPOSFGFSUPQBHF

B1
S
¾ %JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ4:)/$4&,9 U
¾ "NQMJGJFS75733"7 3
GPS"74TJ[FTBOE
"NQMJGJFS75733"7 1.3
GPS"74TJ[FTUP
1
¾ $BSEIPMEFS759'
U S K1 K2 T R(L)
725
5FDIOJDBMEBUB"YJBMQJTUPOVOJU"740 BQQMJFTUPNJOFSBMPJM
1SFTTVSFT
0QFSBUJOHQSFTTVSFSBOHF QSFTTVSFTQFDJGJDBUJPOBDDPSE -FBLBHFQSFTTVSF
JOHUP%*/
5IFBENJTTJCMFMFBLBHFQSFTTVSF IPVTJOHQSFTTVSF
EF
1SFTTVSFBUQPSU# QFOETPOUIFTQFFE
1
/PNJOBMQSFTTVSFQ/
CBS 4J[F
1000
750
500
355
250
180
125
71
40
1FBLQSFTTVSFQNBY CBS
"CTPMVUFQSFTTVSFBUQPSU4 TVDUJPO 4
-FBLBHFQSFTTVSFQBCTJOCBSࣅ
PQFOJOH
QBCTNJO
ÚCBS
"UQPSU4 GFFEJOJTQPTTJCMFCZ
NFBOTPGBCPPTUQVNQ 3
2
#PPTUQSFTTVSFSBOHF
.BYJNVNCPPTUQSFTTVSFQ&NBY CBS
3FDPNNFOEFECPPTUQSFTTVSFQ& CBS 2
#PPTUQVNQJOMFUQSFTTVSF4VDUJPO
QSFTTVSFQ4BCTNJO ÚCBS
̉UPNNT
1 3
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
1JMPUQSFTTVSFSBOHF 4QFFEOJONJO¾ࣅ
.BYJNVNBENJTTJCMFQJMPUQSFTTVSF
QNBY CBS
.JOJNVNQJMPUQSFTTVSFSFRVJSFEQNJO 0QFSBUJOHQSFT 3FRVJSFEQJMPUQSFTTVSF
TVSFBOEPSCBS EFQFOEJOHPOUIFPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF
TFFEJBHSBN
4
-FBLBHFQSFTTVSF 315 .BYJNVN
1JMPUQSFTTVSFJOCBS
.BYMFBLBHFQSFTTVSF BENJTTJCMF
CBS 250
IPVTJOHQSFTTVSF
Q-BCTNBY
200
*OTUBMMBUJPOQPTJUJPO 150
"OZ%VSJOHDPNNJTTJPOJOHBOEEVSJOHPQFSBUJPO UIFIPVT
5
JOHNVTUCFGJMMFEXJUIIZESBVMJDGMVJE
/PUJDF 150 200 250 315

5IFWBMVFTJOUIFUBCMFBSFHVJEFMJOFT8JUITQFDJBMPQFSBU 0QFSBUJOHQSFTTVSFJOCBS
JOHDPOEJUJPOT QMFBTFDPOUBDUVTBUUIFGPMMPXJOHFNBJMBE
ESFTTBQQMJDBUJPODFOUSF!CPTDISFYSPUIEF
6

%VFUPUIFBENJTTJCMFEBUBPGUIFIJHISFTQPOTFWBMWFBOE
PUIFSTZTUFNDPNQPOFOUT
8
726
5FDIOJDBMEBUB
7BMVFUBCMF UIFPSFUJDBMWBMVFT XJUIPVUDPOTJEFSBUJPOPG̃NIBOẼWWBMVFTSPVOEFE
'PSBIJHIMZEZOBNJD FYBDUESJWFTZTUFN BQMBZGSFFNJOJNVNNBTTNPNFOUPGJOFSUJBEJSFDUBUUIFTIBGUPGUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJU

JTSFRVJSFE5IFSFMBUFEJOGPSNBUJPODBOCFGPVOEJOUIFMJOFÜ3FRVJSFENJOJNVNUPUBMNPNFOUPGJOFSUJBÜ)JHIFSNPNFOUTPGJO
FSUJBJNQSPWFUIFDPOUSPMCFIBWJPS
4J[F 4J[F

%JTQMBDFNFOU 7HNBY DN
.BYTQFFE
7HÙ7HNBY Q&ÚCBS ONBY NJO¾
7HÙ7HNBY Q&ÚCBS ONBY NJO¾
7HÙ7HNBY Q&ÚCBS OPNBY NJO¾
7HÙ7HNBY Q&ÚCBS OPNBY NJO¾
5PSRVFXJUI
5 /N
7HNBYBOEÑQCBS
1PXFSXJUI
1 L8
7HNBY ONBYBOEÑQCBS
"EKVTUNFOUWPMVNF
74NBY DN
GSPNUP7HNBY
"DUVBUJOHUJNF GSPNUP7HNBY
U4 T
.PNFOUPGJOFSUJB LHN
3FRVJSFENJOJNVNUPUBM
LHN
NPNFOUPGJOFSUJB
8FJHIUBQQSPY XJUI37&BOEJO
N LH
DSFNFOUBMFODPEFS
"740%4
"ENBYJBMGPSDFXJUIIPVTJOH
n'BYNBY /
QSFTTVSFQNBYCBSBCT
"ENBYJBMGPSDFXJUIIPVTJOH 'BYNBY /
QSFTTVSFQNBYCBSBCT ¾'BYNBY /
"ENJTTJCMFSBEJBMGPSDF 'RNBY /
Fq
'PSDFBQQMJDBUJPO
+Fax Fax
X/2 X/2
X
727
'MPXEJSFDUJPO
4XJWFMSBOHF
%JSFDUJPOPGSPUBUJPO
1SFTTVSF 0QFS
$MPDL $PVOUFS JO BUJOH
15° 0° 15°
$MPDLXJTF XJTF DMPDLXJTF NPEF
1
$PVOUFSDMPDLXJTF $MPDLXJTF #ࣅ4 ¾ ## .PUPS
$MPDLXJTF ¾ 4ࣅ# 1VNQ
$PVOUFSDMPDLXJTF ¾ #ࣅ4 ## .PUPS
$PVOUFSDMPDLXJTF 4ࣅ# ¾ 1VNQ

$GTXJWFMBOHMFEJTQMBZ 2

-PPLJOHBUUIFTIBGU
5FDIOJDBMQBSBNFUFST
.PUPSPQFSBUJPO 1VNQPQFSBUJPO 3
%JTQMBDFNFOU 'MPX
7HÈO 7HÈOÈƍW
R7 <MNJO> R7 <MNJO>
ÈƍW
0VUQVUUPSRVF MPBEUPSRVF
%SJWFUPSRVF
4
7HÈÑQÈƍNI 7HÈÑQ
5 </N> 5 </N>
È/ È/ÈƍNI
0VUQVUQPXFS %SJWFQPXFS
/ È5ÈO 5ÈO R7ÈÑQÈdU / È5ÈO 5ÈO R7ÈÑQ

1 <L8> 1 <L8>
ÈdU
5
7H (FPNFUSJDEJTQMBDFNFOUJODNQFSSPUBUJPO
ÑQ 1SFTTVSFEJGGFSFOUJBMJOCBS
O 4QFFEJONJO¾
dW 7PMVNFUSJDFGGJDJFODZ
dNI .FDIBOJDBMIZESBVMJDFGGJDJFODZ 6
dU 0WFSBMMFGGJDJFODZ dUdWÈdNI
8
129
78 260
W
P Rkv
276
18 W
Sp
3&"740%4
10h9 K1
B $FOUFSPG
135
5
128
1.5 56
108
Ø1
QVNQ 48 K2
60
35-0.2
150
Ø32k6
Ø15
22
M10
80
85
91
97
X 45°
45°
8 T M1 150
10 52
MS T1 M2 79 79
Ø40
69.9
MB X S
58 90
728
227 69 S 4"&ÜTUBOEBSEQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
420 35.7
.EFFQ
V
V
/BNFQMBUF B1 B1 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
50.8
Ø20.5
19
23.8 .EFFQ
80
M10
R
L
30
Ø125h8
Y
79
R
Ø18.5 .EFFQ
W32x2x14x9g 22 30
190
DIN 5480 36
U
50.8
144 25
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN"740%4398¾#5/ JONN
R(L)
T2 Pst 23.8 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(
(69)
Y

729
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv
M1 2
MS
MB
B1
S
U
U S K1 K2 T R(L)
4
%FTJHOBUJPOPGUIFQPSUT
# 1SFTTVSFQPSU 4"&Ü
# "EEJUJPOBMQSFTTVSFQPSU 4"&Ü
4 4VDUJPOQPSU 4"&Ü 5
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

.# .FBTVSJOHQPSUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF .Y
. . .FBTVSJOHQPSUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF (
4Q &YUFSOBMDPOUSPMQSFTTVSFQPSU .Y
3 -
'MVJEGJMMJOHBOECMFFEJOH .Y 6
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
5 5 -FBLJOHGMVJECMFFEJOH (
6 'MVTIJOHQPSU CFBSJOHGMVTIJOH
.Y
3,7 1JMPUGMVJESFUVSO QJQFE
.Y
.4 1JMPUGMVJESFUVSO QJQFE
.Y
1 $POUSPMQSFTTVSFQPSU QJQFE
.Y 7
1TU $POUSPMQSFTTVSFQPSU QJQFE
(
8
134

83 296
W
Rkv
P
292
18
W
Sp 12h9 K1
152
B 48
143
1.5 68
123
Ø1
K2
80
#PTDI3FYSPUI"()ZESBVMJDT
43-0.2
170
Ø40k6
U
Ø15
28 X
M12
97
97
92.5
106
45°
45°
Ø50
T M1 MB MS T1 170
77.8
10 61 93 93
S X
70 101
254 62 42.9 S 4"&ÜTUBOEBSEQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
457
.EFFQ
730
V
V
B1 B1 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
Ø25
57.2
/BNFQMBUF
19
.EFFQ
27.8
L
92.5
M12
15°
R
0
Y
15°
L
34
Ø140h8
Ø25
.EFFQ
92
R
W40x2x18x9g
211
28 27 U
DIN 5480
57.2
45
166 27
R(L) 27.8
(62)
B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
T2 M2 Pst
Y
"740%43&
731
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv
M1 2
MS
MB
B1
S
U
U S K1 K2 T R(L)
4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

3 -
'MVJEGJMMJOHBOECMFFEJOH .Y 6
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y
.Y
.Y
.Y 7
(
8
147
106 354

22 W
323
W P Sp
14h9
K1
186
B
148
1.5 80
Ø2
K2
00
39
Rkv
200
53.5 -0.2
Ø50k6
U
M16
36
121
45°
112.5
114.5
Ø20
X 45°
T MB MS M1 T1 M2 200
8
111.5 111.5
Ø63
70
88.9
10
125 238.5
82
S X MS2
310 (94)
578 50.8 S 4"&ÜTUBOEBSEQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
732
V .EFFQ
M4 B1
/BNFQMBUF V
19
Ø31
181
66.7
B1 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
L
112.5
.EFFQ
M16
31.8
R
L
Ø160h8
R 50 Y
112
Ø30
.EFFQ
W50x2x24x9g
237.5
36 U
DIN 5480 54 33
66.7
R(L) M3
203 14
31.8
T2 Pst 94 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
"740%43&
Y
733
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv 2
M1
MS2
MB
B1
S
U
4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

.4 .FBTVSJOHQPSUTVDUJPOQSFTTVSF .Y
. . .FBTVSJOHQPSUBDUVBUJOHQSFTTVSF .Y 6
3 -
'MVJEGJMMJOHBOECMFFEJOH .Y
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y
.Y 7
(
.Y
(
8
147 401
106

W
22 P Sp
323
W
14h9
186
B Ø2
148
1.5 80 K2 00
39
Rkv
200
53.5 -0.2
Ø50k6
U
M16
36
X
114.5
45°
45°
Ø20
110
116
45
121
200 K1
8 T M1 MS T1 MB M2
Ø75
111.5 111.5
106.4
10 70
82 125 S X MS2
318 94
586
S 4"&ÜTUBOEBSEQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
61.9
V .EFFQ
734
M4
B1
V
19
/BNFQMBUF
Ø31
66.7
L
120
.EFFQ
M16
R
31.8
Ø160h8
50
R
112
Y
Ø30 .EFFQ
245
W50x2x24x9g 36 33
DIN 5480 U
54
R(L) M3
66.7
203 14
T2 Pst 31.8 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
(94)
"740%43&
Y
735
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv
M1 2
MS2
MB
B1
S
U
4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

3 -
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y
.Y 7
(
.Y
(
8
123 424
30 W
358.9
W
P Sp
233
B K1
Ø2
K2 18h9
184
80
3 100
Rkv 39
M20
265
64 -0.2
Ø60m6
42 U
45°
45°
144
53
144.5
152.5
Ø24
8 T MS2 M2 X
M1 MB 265
105 90 T1 143.5 143.5
MS S X
115 150
75
380 (94)
106.4
648
61.9
.EFFQ
736
V
M4 B1 V
/BNFQMBUF
30
Ø40
L 79.4 .EFFQ
144
36.5
R
L
Ø224h8
55
M20
R Y
144
.EFFQ
36.5
269
W60x2x28x9g 42
U
DIN 5480 70 R(L) M3

79.4
80 43
248 17
T2 Pst Ø38 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
94
Y
"740%43&
737
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv
M1 2
MS2
MB
B1
S
U
4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

3 -
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y
.Y 7
(
.Y
(
8
123 424

R(L)
30 W
359
W
233
B K2 20h9 K1
184
4.5 100 P Sp
Ø2
80
265
74.5 -0.2
Ø70m6
U
M20
42 Rkv 39
45°
45°
144
53
144.5
152.5
Ø24
8
X
T M1 S M2 265
10 90 MS2
T1 143.5 143.5
105 150 X
393 94
661
Ø100
130.2
.EFFQ
738
77.8
V MS
M4 B1
V
/BNFQMBUF
30
Ø40
79.4
148
L .EFFQ
36.5
M20
R
L
Ø224h8
55
Y
R .EFFQ
36.5
144
MB
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN"740%498¾#5; JONN
273
42
W70x3x22x9g 53 U
79.4
DIN 5480 13
M3
82 40
248 17
Ø38
T2 Pst B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
Y (94)
"740%43&
739
T1 1
T P
T2 U G
b a
B A
M2 P
B
Sp
Pst Rkv
M1 2
MS2
MB
B1
S
U
4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

3 -
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y
.Y 7
(
.Y
(
8
265
109 R(L) 510

104 110 110

MP R2 R5
R3 R6
363
280
R4
281
Ø24
274
3 125 B R7
245
205
190
22h9
175
M20
Z
85-0.2
Ø80m6
05
K2
Ø4
Ø3
42
60
45°
161
180
190
MB1
8x4
T M1 4 155 155
16+5
5°
MB1 MS M2 MS2 (= 5° 190 190
130 47 80 36
0°
K1
180 155 T1 S )
X X 22°30‘
441 94
761
Ø125
152.4
740
'PSSJOHCPMU.%*/ V MA
48 109 .EFFQ
16 92.1
13 U B1
°
30 V
32
L
Ø50
10°
189
96.8
158
44.5
L R
Ø225
.EFFQ
Ø315h8
50
Ø230+5
M20
42
R Y
303 44.5 .EFFQ
0
R1
W80x3x25x9g
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN"740%4398¾)5/ JONN
90 30
DIN 5480 140 /BNFQMBUF
96.8
279 50
B
T2 MB2 50 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
"740%43&
Y (94)
741
T P
U G
b a
B A 1
T1
T2 MP
MB2 MA
M2
Rkv
B
2
M1 Pst P
MS2
B1
MB1
S
U
3
U S MS R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 4
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

." .# .FBTVSJOHQPSUBDUVBUJOHQSFTTVSF .Y
. . .FBTVSJOHQPSUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF ( 6
.1 &YUFSOBMDPOUSPMQSFTTVSFQPSU .Y
3 -
33 #MFFEJOHBEKVTUNFOU .Y
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y 7
.Y
.Y
.Y
(
8
275
132.5 582

R(L) 110 110

114 R2 R5
MP
R3 R6
Z
R7
401
25h9
B
304
22
317
4.5 125
275
R4 Ø4
235
232
50
205
M24
Z
95
Ø90m6
K2
50
178
200
05
232
Ø4
MB1
45
M2
°
8x4
16+5 T T1 182 182
5°
(= 45°
130 47 M1 S MS X 36
0° 232 232 K1
180 89 )
161 X 22°30‘
473 94
Ø125
152.4
'PSSJOHCPMU.%*/
742
16 58 119 V
13 U MA S 4"&ÜTUBOEBSEQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
92.1
32
30°
B1
.EFFQ
10°
V
232
L
182
Ø50
96.8
M24
L R
Ø255
Ø263
Ø400h8
50
44.5 .EFFQ
R Y .EFFQ
0 44.5
R1
327
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN"740%498¾)5; JONN
50 /BNFQMBUF
W90x3x28x9g 105
96.8
DIN 5480 155 32

301 50
793 MB2 T2
Ø50
B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
(94)
"740%43&
Y
743
T P
U G
b a
B A 1
T1
T2 MP
MB2 MA
M2
Rkv
B
2
M1 Pst P
MS2
B1
MB1
S
U
3
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

3 -
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y 7
.Y
.Y
.Y
(
8
282 622
126 140 140

R(L)
121 R5
MP R2
R6
R3
431
343
327
344
R7
298
Ø22
R4
258
B
232
K2 28h9
106
Ø100m6
95
Z
Ø4
Ø4
50
M24
50
63
225
232
45°
199
M2
8x
K1
4
45
5
T1
°
°
(=
36
T MB MB1 0°
)
16+5 98 22°30‘
165 47 M1 S MS MS2
215 203 X
X 201 201
548 94
232 232
744
'PSSJOHCPMU.%*/ V
62.5 126
Ø125
152.4
W100x3x32x9g 16
13 U MA B1
DIN 5480 .EFFQ
°
30
92.1
42
V
10°
L
231
210
M24
Ø50
96.8
L R
Ø322
400h8
Ø333+5
55 50
44.5 .EFFQ
50
63 R Y .EFFQ
44.5
355
4
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOTDJSDVJUEJBHSBN"740%4398¾)5/ JONN
R2
/BNFQMBUF
96.8
105
155 35
360 51 Ø50
Y T2 MB2 B 4"&ÜIJHIQSFTTVSFTFSJFT
868 (94)
"740%43&
745
T P
U G
b a
B A 1
T1
T2 MP
MB2 MA
M2
Rkv
B
2
M1 Pst P
MS2
B1
MB1
MB S
U
3
, , 'MVTIJOHQPSU .Y

.# .# .FBTVSJOHQPSUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF .Y
3 -
5 'MVJEESBJO .Y
.Y 7
.Y
.Y
.Y
(
8
746
$MPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM%43
8JUIDMPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM UIFTXJWFMBOHMFBOEUIVTUIF 4PUIBUJODBTFPGBOFNFSHFODZTUPQTJHOBM UIFDPBTUEPXO

TUSPLFWPMVNFPGUIFBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUBSFDIBOHFEXJUIDPO PSSVOEPXOPGUIFBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUEPFTOPUDBVTFDBWJUB
TUBOUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSFVTJOHUIF%4BEKVTUNFOUEFWJDF UJPOEBNBHF BOUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWFTBSFUPCFQSPWJEFEXIJDI
VOUJMUIFUPSRVFSFRVJSFEUPNBJOUBJOUIFTQFDJGJFETQFFEIBT IBWFUPCFGSFFMZQJQFEBUQPSU#5IFTFDIFDLWBMWFTXJUI
CFFOCVJMUVQ PVUTQSJOHBSFUPCFJOTUBMMFEWFSUJDBMMZBOEIBWFUPCFPS
*OBTVQQMZOFUXPSLXJUIDPOTUBOUPQFSBUJOHQSFTTVSF UIF EFSFETFQBSBUFMZ
UPSRVFJTQSPQPSUJPOBMUPUIFTXJWFMBOHMFBOEPSUPUIFTUSPLF 5IFGPMMPXJOHQBHFTEFTDSJCFUIFGPMMPXJOH
WPMVNFPGUIFBYJBMQJTUPOVOJU5IFTUSPLFWPMVNFJTSFDPSEFE ¾ *ODSFNFOUBMFODPEFS(&-UPSFDPSEUIFTQFFE
CZBOJOEVDUJWFQPTJUJPOUSBOTEVDFS UIFTQFFECZBOJODSF
¾ *OEVDUJWFQPTJUJPOUSBOTEVDFS"89'UPSFDPSEUIFTXJW
NFOUBMSPUBSZFODPEFS
FMBOHMF
5IFTUSPLFWPMVNFJTBEKVTUFECZNFBOTPGBIJHISFTQPOTF
¾ &MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFDIFDLWBMWF37&"74
WBMWF8JUIIJHIFSSFRVJSFNFOUTPOUIFEZOBNJDTPGUIFESJWF
TZTUFN UIFIJHISFTQPOTFWBMWFDBOCFSFQMBDFECZBTFS ¾ "OUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWF4"
WPWBMWF ¾ %JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ4:)/$4&,
*ODBTFPGFNFSHFODZTIVUPGG UIFFMFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMF
DIFDLWBMWF37& IZESBVMJDDPOOFDUPS
BUUIFQSFTTVSFQPSUJT
CSPVHIUJOUPCMPDLFEQPTJUJPO5IJTJOUFSSVQUTUIFFOFSHZTVQ
QMZUPUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJUPOMZHFOFSBUPSCBTFECSBLJOHXJUI
FOFSHZSFDPWFSZUPUIFIZESBVMJDOFUXPSLJTUIFOQPTTJCMF
747
*ODSFNFOUBMFODPEFS(&-
0SEFSJOHDPEFÜ5ÜPSÜ5Ü
5FDIOJDBMEBUB
3FTPMVUJPO 0SEFSJOHDPEFÜ5Ü JODSFNFOUTSPUBUJPO
0SEFSJOHDPEFÜ5Ü JODSFNFOUTSPUBUJPO
1
1SPUFDUJPODMBTTBDDPSEJOHUP&/ *1XJUINBUJOHDPOOFDUPSNPVOUFEBOEMPDLFE
1PXFSDPOTVNQUJPO3-Õ6#7 8 Ù
"NCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSFSBOHF m$ ¾UP
4JHOBMQBUUFSO5
4VQQMZWPMUBHF647nTJHOBMWPMUBHF64J7 2
5SBDL "
5SBDL "
4JHOBMQBUUFSOSPUBUJOHDMPDLXJTFXIFOMPPLJOHBUUIFTIBGU
5SBDL #
5SBDL #
3
&MFDUSJDBMDPOOFDUJPO
.BYJNVNDBCMFMFOHUIT
US = 5 V ± 5 % #FUXFFOJODSFNFOUBMFODPEFSBOEEPXOTUSFBNFMFDUSPOJDT
(SPVOEUIFDBCMFTIJFMEPOPOFTJEFBUUIFSFDFJWFS5IFTQFDJGJFEEBUB 4
BSFHVJEFMJOFTBOESFGFSUPUIFDBCMFUZQF-J:$:
YNN
T
5SBDL A+ G<L)[>
H I A MNBY<N>
G B 5SBDL A-
J 5SBDL B+
F C
E D 5SBDL B- 5
$MPDLXJTFSPUBUJPO
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOT JONN
6
ca. 80 Ø115
5IFNBUJOHDPOOFDUPSJTJODMVEFEJO
51,5
UIFTDPQFPGEFMJWFSZ
29,5
6TFPGPUIFSTQFFESFDPSEJOHTZTUFNTJTOPUQPTTJCMF*OUIJTDBTF QMFBTFDPOUBDUVTBUUIFGPMMPXJOH
FNBJMBEESFTTBQQMJDBUJPODFOUSF!CPTDISFYSPUIEF 8
748
4XJWFMBOHMFTFOTPS"89'
5FDIOJDBMEBUB
.FBTVSFNFOUTZTUFN %JGGFSFOUJBMUSBOTGPSNFS
$POUSPMTUSPLF nNN
-JOFBSJUZUPMFSBODF Ù
$BSSJFSGSFRVFODZ L)[
$PJMSFTJTUBODF 1SJNBSZDPJM ˵
BUm$
1FSTFDPOEBSZDPJM ˵
&MFDUSJDBMDPOOFDUJPO 1MVHJODPOOFDUJPO.Y QJO
1SPUFDUJPODMBTTPGUIFQMVHJODPOOFDUJPOBDDPSEJOHUP&/ *1XJUINBUJOHDPOOFDUPSNPVOUFEBOEMPDLFE
"NCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSFSBOHF m$ ¾UP
&MFDUSJDBMDPOOFDUJPO
2 1 AWXF004D02
1 3
prim. sec.
2 4
3
4
%FWJDFEJNFOTJPOT JONN
87
63
5IFNBUJOHDPOOFDUPSJTJODMVEFE
A
JOUIFTDPQFPGEFMJWFSZ
"EBQUFSSJOH EFQFOEJOHPOUIFTJ[F
4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F 4J[F

"
749
&MFDUSJDBMMZSFMFBTBCMFDIFDLWBMWF37&"74
0SEFSJOHDPEFÜÜ
5FDIOJDBMEBUB
FMFDUSJDBM DPOGFSEJSFDUJPOBMTFBUWBMWF.¾4&% EBUBTIFFU
%JSFDUWPMUBHF 7 1
1PXFSDPOTVNQUJPO 8
%VUZDZDMF $POUJOVPVTPQFSBUJPO
1SPUFDUJPODMBTTBDDPSEJOHUP&/ *1XJUINBUJOHDPOOFDUPSNPVOUFEBOEMPDLFE
IZESBVMJD DPOGFSDBSUSJEHFWBMWFTUZQF-$ EBUBTIFFU
.BYGMPXR7NBYJOMNJO 2
4J[F -PHJDFMFNFOU *OTUBMMFEJOUIFIPVTJOH
XJUIBQSFTTVSFESPQPGCBS
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
3
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
-$#%9 "(&7"#
4
"OUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWF4"
4FQBSBUFPSEFS TFMFDUJPOBDDPSEJOHUPUIFGPMMPXJOHUBCMF
5
0SEFSJOHDPEF
"OUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWF
'PS"740 TJ[F XJUIPVUGFFEJO XJUIGFFEJO
4" 4"
4" 4"
4" 4" 6
4" 4"
4" 4"
4" 4"
4" 4"
4" 4"
7
4" 4"
/PUJDF5IFTFBOUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWFTBSFQJQFEBUQPSU#
'PSEFUBJMTPOUIFBOUJDBWJUBUJPOWBMWFTSFGFSUPEBUBTIFFU
8
750
%JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ4:)/$4&,9
4FQBSBUFPSEFS TFMFDUJPOBDDPSEJOHUPEBUBTIFFU
'FBUVSFT .POJUPSJOHGVODUJPOT
5IF4:)/$4&,9EJHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZJTTVJU ¾ $BCMFCSFBLNPOJUPSJOHGPSJODSFNFOUBMBOE44*FODPEFS
BCMFGPSUIFDMPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM UIFDMPTFEMPPQUPSRVF ¾ $BCMFCSFBLNPOJUPSJOHGPSTXJWFMBOHMFTFOTPST
DPOUSPMBTXFMMBTUIFPQFOMPPQUPSRVFDPOUSPMPGTFDPOEBSZ
¾ "DDFMFSBUJPOUPPIJHI
DPOUSPMMFEBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUTUZQF"74%4 &

¾ 0WFSTQFFE NBYTQFFE
*UDPNQSJTFTJOUFSGBDFTGPSSFDPSEJOHUIFTXJWFMBOHMFQPTJ
UJPOPGJOEJWJEVBMPSUBOEFNVOJUTBTXFMMBTGPSUIFTQFFE ¾ 4QFFEEJGGFSFODFDPNNBOEBDUVBM
GFFECBDLXJUIJODSFNFOUBMFODPEFST5IFTPGUXBSFDPOUBJOT ¾ 4XJWFMBOHMFEJGGFSFODFDPNNBOEBDUVBM
DMPTFEMPPQDPOUSPM PQFOMPPQDPOUSPMBOENPOJUPSJOHGVOD
UJPOTFTQFDJBMMZEFTJHOFEGPSUIFTFDPOEBSZDPOUSPM
.PSFJOGPSNBUJPO
0UIFSGFBUVSFT
¾ 6QUPNPEVMFTGPSUIFBOBMZTJTPGUIFTJHOBMTPGVQ %BUBTIFFUÜ%JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ)/$4&,
UP-7%5TXJWFMBOHMFTFOTPST GPSUIFTFDPOEBSZDPOUSPMPGBYJBMQJTUPOVOJUT
UZQF4:)/$4&,
¾ 6QUPJODSFNFOUBMFODPEFSJOQVUTXJUINPOJUPSJOHGVODUJPO
GPSUIFTQFFESFDPSEJOH
¾ 6QUPBOBMPHJOQVUT WPMUBHFPSDVSSFOU
GPSDPNNBOE *OGPSNBUJPOPOUIFTZTUFNTFUVQ
WBMVFTQFDJGJDBUJPO 'PSUIFTFDPOEBSZVOJUXJUIPSEFSJOHDPEFÜ%43Ü XJUI
¾ 6QUPBOBMPHPVUQVUTUPDPOUSPMEPXOTUSFBNWBMWFBNQMJGJFST IJHISFTQPOTFWBMWF
UIFGPMMPXJOHJTSFRVJSFEJOBEEJUJPOBOE
¾ %JHJUBMJOQVUTBOEPVUQVUTGPSDPNNVOJDBUJPOXJUIBTVQF OPUJODMVEFEJOUIFTDPQFPGEFMJWFSZ
SJPSDPOUSPMTZTUFN ¾ %JHJUBMDPOUSPMMFSBTTFNCMZ4:)/$4&,9BDDPSE
¾ 1SPGJCVT%1PS$"/PQFOGPSUIFDPNNVOJDBUJPOXJUIBTV JOHUPEBUBTIFFU
QFSJPSDPOUSPMTZTUFN ¾ "NQMJGJFS75733"7BDDPSEJOHUP
¾ 4FUVQPGNBTUFSTMBWFBQQMJDBUJPOTWJBJOUFSOBM$"/JOUFSGBDF EBUBTIFFU GPS"74TJ[FTBOE

PS
¾ "TTFNCMZPOUPQIBUSBJMNN
"NQMJGJFS75733"7BDDPSEJOHUP
EBUBTIFFU GPS"74TJ[FTUP
4PGUXBSFGVODUJPOBMJUZ ¾ $BSEIPMEFS759'
#BTJDBMMZ UIFTPGUXBSFDPOUBJOTUIFDMPTFEMPPQDPOUSPMUZQFT .BUFSJBMOVNCFS BDDPSEJOHUP
DMPTFEMPPQTQFFEDPOUSPM DMPTFEMPPQUPSRVFDPOUSPMBOEPQFO EBUBTIFFU
MPPQUPSRVFDPOUSPM*UJTQPTTJCMFUPTXJUDICFUXFFOUIFDMPTFE
MPPQDPOUSPMUZQFTEVSJOHPQFSBUJPOJOBTIPDLGSFFGPSN
$POGJHVSBUJPO QBSBNFUFSJ[BUJPOBOEEJBHOPTJTPGUIF
4:)/$4&,9CZNFBOTPGUIF8*/1&%1$QSP
HSBN0OMZUIFÜ8*/1&%ÜWFSTJPOJTVTFE*UDBOCF
EPXOMPBEFEGSFFPGDIBSHFPOUIF*OUFSOFUBUXXXCPT
DISFYSPUIDPNIOD
4ZTUFNTQFDJGJDTPGUXBSFFYUFOTJPOTDBOCFQSFQBSFE
VQPOSFRVFTU
#PTDI3FYSPUI"( g5IJTEPDVNFOU BTXFMMBTUIFEBUB TQFDJGJDBUJPOTBOEPUIFSJOGPSNB

)ZESBVMJDT UJPOTFUGPSUIJOJU BSFUIFFYDMVTJWFQSPQFSUZPG#PTDI3FYSPUI"(*U
;VN&JTFOHJFFS NBZOPUCFSFQSPEVDFEPSHJWFOUPUIJSEQBSUJFTXJUIPVUJUTDPOTFOU
-PISBN.BJO (FSNBOZ 5IFEBUBTQFDJGJFEBCPWFPOMZTFSWFUPEFTDSJCFUIFQSPEVDU/PTUBUF
1IPOF
NFOUTDPODFSOJOHBDFSUBJODPOEJUJPOPSTVJUBCJMJUZGPSBDFSUBJOBQQMJDB
EPDVNFOUBUJPO!CPTDISFYSPUIEF UJPODBOCFEFSJWFEGSPNPVSJOGPSNBUJPO5IFJOGPSNBUJPOHJWFOEPFTOPU
XXXCPTDISFYSPUIEF SFMFBTFUIFVTFSGSPNUIFPCMJHBUJPOPGPXOKVEHNFOUBOEWFSJGJDBUJPO*U
NVTUCFSFNFNCFSFEUIBUPVSQSPEVDUTBSFTVCKFDUUPBOBUVSBMQSPDFTT
PGXFBSBOEBHJOH
751

RE 92 080/01.06 1/52
Hydraulic control, Replaces: 08.93
pilot pressure dependent

HD
Technical data sheet
for the variable pumps

A4VSO and A4VSG series 1 and 3
A4CSG series 3
open and closed circuits
Contents Features
Ordering code / Standard program 2 – Displacement control for the variable pumps A4VSO,
HD1/2/3 – Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent 4 A4VSG and A4CSG
Unit dimensions HD1/2/3 9 – Control is pilot pressure dependent
Pressure control 12 – Different pilot pressure ranges available

HD.A with pressure control, one side only, in port A 13 – Optional pressure control
HD.GA with remote pressure control, in port A only 15 – Optional hydraulic power control
Unit dimensions HD.A / HD.GA 17 – Optional electrical control of pilot pressure
HD.B with pressure control, one side only, in port B 20 – Mechanical limitation of Vg min and Vg max
HD.GB with remote pressure control, in port B only 22 – Standard spring centering of control cylinder
Unit dimensions HD.B / HD.GB 24 – Loss of pilot pressure signal causes swivel back to center
HD.D with pressure control in both ports A and B 27
– Mooring operation: enables swiveling over center and de-
HD.G with remote pressure control in both ports A and B 29 compression via the pump
Unit dimensions HD.D / HD.G 31
HD1P with power control 34
Unit dimensions HD1P 36
HD1T with electrical control of pilot pressure 39 Further information:
Unit dimensions HD1T 43 Variable pump A4VSO Size 40...1000 RE 92050
HD1U with power control and elec. control of pilot press. 46 Variable pump A4VSG Size 40...1000 RE 92100
Unit dimensions HD1U 47 Variable pump A4CSG Size 250...750 RE 92105
General notes 52
752
2/52 Bosch Rexroth AG HD | RE 92 080/01.06
Ordering code / Standard program

A4 . . . HD . / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
01 Hydraulic fluid (for detailed information see RE 92050, RE 92100 or RE 92105)
Axial piston unit / type of operation

Swash plate design, variable / pump, open circuit (see RE 92050) A4VSO
02 Swash plate design, variable / pump, closed circuit (see RE 92100) A4VSG
Compact unit swash plate design, variable / pump, closed circuit (see RE 92105) A4CSG
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Control and regulating devices

Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent HD
Pilot pressure characteristic
04 10...45 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1
10...28 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
5,5...19 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 3
Pressure control
without pressure control (no code)
with pressure control in A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A1) 2)
with remote pressure control in A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● GA1) 2)
05
with pressure control in B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B2)
with remote pressure control in B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● GB2)
with pressure control in both ports ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● D1) 2)
with remote pressure control in both ports ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● G1) 2)
Power control and/or electrical control of pilot pressure for HD1
without power control or electrical control of pilot pressure (no code)
06 Power control with power control valve LV 06 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● P
Electrical control of pilot pressure ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● T3)
Power control and electrical control of pilot pressure ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● U3)
Series
for A4VSO ● ● – – – – – – – 11
– – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 30
07 for A4VSG ● ● – – – – – – – 11
– – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 30
for A4CSG – – – – ● ● ● ● – 30
1)
not available on A4VSO
2)
not possible for bi-directional rotation
3)
for operation with HF-fluids please observe data sheet RE 29164 (Prop. pressure relief valve type DBEP);
for A4CSG please consult us
available – not available

753
RE 92 080/01.06 | HD Bosch Rexroth AG 3/52
A4 . . . HD . / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
08 Direction of rotation 1
09 Seals
10 Shaft end
for detailed data see:
11 Mounting flange RE 92050 – A4VSO
12 Connecting options for service ports RE 92100 – A4VSG
RE 92105 – A4CSG
13 Through drive
2
14 Valves
15 Filter options
8
754
HD1/2/3 – Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent

The HD1/2/3 control sets the pump displacement dependent on a pilot pressure signal.
One control chamber is permanently pressurized by control pressure. The pilot piston is shifted through the pilot pressure differen-
tial X1–X2 and controls the oil supply to the opposite control chamber. The resulting control stroke gives a spring pressure feed-
back signal to the pilot pressure piston. This enables a proportional control stroke movement, dependent on the pressure differenti-
al (X2–X1).
When determining the pilot pressure requirements, it must be considered, that on the A4VSO the effective pilot pressure com-
mand signal is equal to the difference between actual pilot pressure and housing pressure, in case of the A4VSG and A4CSG it is
the pressure differential between X1 and X2.
– Upon loss of pilot pressure signal the pump control system will swivel back to center through the built in spring centering.
– When loosing control pressure, the spring centering of the control piston will support the reset to center position.
Both features are standard.
Note The spring centering in the pilot control unit is not a safety device
Through contamination in the control unit – eg. in hydraulic fluid, wear particles, or particles out of a
system – the valve spool can get stuck in an undefined position. In this case, the pump flow does not
follow the command inputs of the machine operator anymore.
• Make sure that a proper emergency shut down function can bring the driven machine movements to
a safe position immediately (eg. stop).
• Adhere to the specified cleanliness level 20/18/15 (< 90 °C) or 19/17/14 (> 90 °C) to ISO 4406.
The mechanical swivel angle limitation can be set at both sides of center in the range of Vg max to 50 % of Vg max, on size 500 Vg max to
70% of Vg max.
The sizes 500...1000 offer the possibility to adjust the control time at the pilot unit. As standard the units are set at the long control
times (for times see table on page 5). This is necessary for the power control valve LV06 on HD1P and HD1U.
3 executions are available:
HD1 pilot pressure range 10...45 bar
HD2 pilot pressure range 10...28 bar
HD3 pilot pressure range 5,5...19 bar
An execution with inductive displacement transducer is available on request.
Supply of control and pilot pressure

On A4VSO and A4VSG the minimum required control pressure must be connected externally to P. This enables a control out of
center position without sufficient control pressure from the pump itself. The pump internal pressure output supplies the control
pressure as soon as pA, pB > p.
On A4CSG in standard execution (boost pump „F“) the control pressure comes internally out of the boost circuit. This eliminates
the need for a separate control pressure pump, that means port P is already hooked up internally.
Recommended setting on control pressure relief valve: double the boost pressure
Recommended:as separate control/pilot press. pump for the sizes 40...250 an auxiliary pump with 8 cm3
for the sizes 355...1000 an auxiliary pump with 11 cm3
Direct mounting at the through drive on A4VSO/G or A4CSG is possible, see the technical data sheet of the relevant pump.
755
HD1/2/3 – Technical data

Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Pilot pressure 1) (in X1, X2) HD1 pSt bar 10 2) – 45 3)
HD2 pSt bar 10 2) – 28 3)
HD3 pSt bar 5,5 2) – 19 3) 1
Control pressure (in P) pmin 5) 6) bar 2x boost press. but at least 32 bar
pmax 4) 5) bar 350
Control stroke smax mm 14,2 17,1 20,7 20,7 25,9 25,9 32,6 37 41,41
Control area A cm2 3,9 6,4 9 9 14,4 14,4 18,8 28,5 32,4
Control volume VS max cm3 5,5 11 18,7 18,7 37,3 37,3 61,4 105 134,1
2
Control time t s 0,08 0,09 0,10 0,10 0,15 0,15 0,75 1,0 1,5
(at 200 bar pressure output)
Setting range control time t s – – – – – – 0,15... 0,2... 0,3...
(at 200 bar pressure output) 0,75 1,0 1,5
Boost pressure A4VSG pSp min bar 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
pSp max 6) bar 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
3
A4CSG pSp min bar – – – – 16 16 16 16 –
pSp max bar – – – – 20 20 20 20 –
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HD. ...N00) kg 42 59 98 112 200 220 333 476 606
Hysteresis ± 3 % von Vg max
Repeatability 1 % von Vg max
1)
4
Pilot pressure characteristics see page 6.
2)
± 0,5 bar at open circuit; ± 1,5 bar at closed circuit
3)
± 1,5 bar at open citcuit; ± 2 bar at closed circuit
4)
with pressure control, the max. control pressure at port P must be below the pressure control setting
5)
with built on valve DBEP6 (HD1T and HD1U) max. pressure at port P for all sizes must be limited from min. 50 bar to max. 100 bar;
with built on power control valve (HD1P und HD1U) the max. pressure at port P must be below the beginning of control on the
power curve 5
6)
on execution H06 the boost pressure must be limited to max. 25 bar, since the control pressure is set at 50 bar.
8
756
Characteristics
A4VSO - open circuit
Please note: on the A4VSO for open circuit (swivel to one side of center only) the Vg min-stop is set so that pump pressure rea-
ches 20 bar when port B is closed.
Mooring or over center operation available on request.
Characteristic Relation between
Example: HD1 pilot pressure 10...45 bar Direction of rotation – Pilot pressure – Direction of flow
Pilot pressure in X1/2 [bar]
Direction Pilot Swivel Direction of Pressure

of rotation pressure range1) flow output port
clockwise in X2 left S to B B

counter in X1 right S to B B

clockwise
1)
6G compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
6GMAX left
Displacement
A4VSG and A4CSG - closed circuit

On the standard execution of the A4CSG (boostpump „F“) with HD, control fluid is taken internally out of the boost circuit. This
eliminates the need for a separate control pressure pump.
HD1 pilot pressure 10...45 bar Direction of rotation – Pilot pressure – Direction of flow
Pilot pressure in X1 [bar]
Direction Pilot Swivel Direction of Pressure
of rotation pressure range1) flow outlet port

clockwise in X1 right B to A A

in X2 left A to B B

counter in X1 right A to B B
clockwise in X2 left B to A A
?
6G 6G
1)
6GMAX 6GMAX compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
left

Pilot pressure in X2 [bar]
HD2 pilot pressure10...28 bar HD3 pilot pressure 5,5...19 bar
Pilot pressure in X1 [bar] Pilot pressure in X1 [bar]

6G 6G 6G 6G
n n
6GMAX 6GMAX 6GMAX 6GMAX

Pilot pressure in X2 [bar] Pilot pressure in X2 [bar]

757
Schematics A4VSO HD1/2/3

Size 40 and 71
Direction of rotation clockwise Direction of rotation counter clockwise
P X2
2 2
P X1
1
B1 B MB B1 B MB
1.1 1.1
2
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Size 125...355
Direction of rotation clockwise Direction of rotation counter clockwise 3
X2 2 X1 X2 2 X1
B1 B MB B1 B MB 4
1.1 1.1
5
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) P M U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) P M
Size 500...1000
X2 2 X1 X2 2 X1
6
M2 3 M2 3
M1 P M1 P
B1 B MB B1 B MB
7
1.1 1.1
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) 8
Ports
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports M; M1; M2 Gauging ports control chamber pressure
P Control pressure port Sub-assemblies see page 8.
758
Schematics A4VSG and A4CSG HD1/2/3

Size 40 and 71 Size 500...1000
Example: A4VSG Example: A4CSG
B MB K1 MA A
K4
P X2
2 X1
2
B A MK4 X2 X1
MB MA
3
E M2
ME3
E3 M1
1.2 1.3
U K2 K3 T R(L) MAB U K2 K3 T R(L) S MS
Size 125...355
Example: A4VSG
X2 2 X1
B A
MB MA
1.2
Sub-assemblies
1 Pump with hydraulic control device
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
1.3 A4CSG (see RE 92105)
U P K2 K3 T R(L) M 2 Pilot control unit

3 Sandwich plate
Ports
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports
P Control pressure port (at A4VSG)
M Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355)
M1 Gauging port small control chamber (Size 500...1000)
M2 Gauging port large control chamber (Size 500...1000)
759
Unit dimensions HD1/2/3 Before finalising your design please

request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSO – open circuit A4VSG – closed circuit
P P
1
1.1 2 1.2 2
(X1), X2 X2 X1
A2
A2
A9
A7
2
A7
B
A
B
A3 to pump mounting face
A6 to pump mounting face A3 to pump mounting face 3
X2 X2
P
P
A5
A5
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A8
(A5)
R(L) R(L)
5
(X1) X1
only at clockwise rotation
Sub-assemblies see page 8. 6

Ports max. tightening torques 1)
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
A4VSO in clockwise rotation shows only X2, A4VSO in counter clockwise rotation has only X1
P Control pressure port DIN 3853 S8 Form W 50 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
40 296 193 233 58 113 218 106 82,5 132,5 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the
variable pumps see the technical data sheets
71 332 209 260 58 113 245 122 82,5 148,5 A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100 8
1)
see general notes
760
Before finalising your design please

Unit dimensions HD1/2/3 request a certified installation drawing.
Size 125...355
A4VSO and A4VSG A4CSG in preparation, dimensions on request
P X1, X2
1.1
1.2 2
A2
A8
B
A 5 to pump mounting face
P X2
X1
A7
A6
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Sub-assemblies
R(L) 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M 2 Pilot control unit

3 Sandwich plate (size 500...1000)

on A4VSO in clockwise rotation X1 is plugged, on A4VSO in counter clockwise rotation X2 is plugged
P Control pressure port DIN 3853 S8 Form W (size 125 and 180) 50 Nm
S12 Form W (size 250 and 355) 90 Nm
M Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
125 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202
180 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 For detailed dimensions and technical data on the variable pumps
see the technical data sheets
250 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
355 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238
1)
see general notes
761

Unit dimensions HD1/2/3 request a certified installation drawing.
Size 500...1000
A4VSO and A4VSG A4CSG
1.1 3 2 1.3 3 2
1.2 P M2 M2
1
X1, X2 X1, X2
M1
A 10
A2
A8
A8
A5
2
B B
A 9 to pump mounting face A 9 to pump mounting face
P M1 X2 3
X2
A4
A7
A7
4
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)
A6
A6
5
X1
X1
3
Sub-assemblies see page 10.
Ports A4VSO and A4VSG max. tightening torques 1)
6
P Control pressure port DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep 210 Nm
M1 Gauging port small control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
M2 Gauging port large control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Ports A4CSG max. tightening torques 1) 7

Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 8
500 555 283 383 175 200 158 145 225 492 297 For detailed dimensions and technical data on the
750 630 322 415 175 230 158 145 280 524 355 variable pumps see the technical data sheets
A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or
1000 670 347 482 175 253 158 145 278 590 – A4CSG RE 92105
1)
see general notes
762
Pressure control
The pressure control is an additional function, which controls pump displacement as soon as a certain preset pressure level is rea-
ched. When this preset pressure level is exceeded, the pressure control valve opens and destrokes the pump till this set pressure
level is reached again. With control on both sides of center, this pressure control feature enables swiveling over center (pump
„swallows“ fluid) an thereby a fast decompression of the pressure line.
On rotary drives with inert, large rotating masses, the pressure control enables a smooth, controlled deceleration.
The pressure control is optionally available as: HD.A one side in port A (schematics see page 13 and 14)
HD.B one side in port B (schematics see page 20 and 21)
HD.D both sides in ports A and B (schematics see page 27 and 28)
Setting range 50...350 bar
Standard setting 350 bar. Other settings please state in clear text when ordering.
The settings must be 30 bar below the setting of the main line relief valves (A4CSG), since the system induced pressure spikes
should be limited through these relief valves.
Moreover, the setting must be higher than the control pressure level at port P.
Characteristic
Operating pressure pA,B
Main line relief valves (max. 380* bar)

Opening pressure of main line relief valves
30 bar
Pressure control
Setting directly at pilot control valve (HD.A, HD.B, HD.D)
or at remote pilot relief valves (HD.GA, HD.GB, HD.G)
(see note referring to setting)
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
Pressure rise 'p d 5 bar

Hysteresis d ± 5 bar
* only valid in combination with pressure control – without pressure control, max. main line relief settings 350 bar
Remote pressure control

Remote control is carried out via ports XA or XB.
The external pilot pressure relief valves are not included in the supply.
Recommended: DBD 6 (RE 25 402)
The max. line lenght should not exceed 2m.
The standard setting of the differential pressure at the pumps control valve is 30 bar. With this setting the pilot oil consumption
amounts to approx. 2 L/min. If another setting is required (range 14...50 bar) please state in clear text.
Notes about the setting of the remote pressure control level:
The setting on the remote pilot relief valves plus the value of the differential pressure on the pumps control valve constitutes the
overall pressure control level.
Example: external pilot relief valve setting 320 bar
differential pressure at control valve 30 bar
equals pressure control level of 320 + 30 = 350 bar
Remote pressure control available as : HD.GA one side in port A (schematics see page 15 and 16)
HD.GB one side in port B (schematics see page 22 and 23)
HD.G both sides in ports A and B (schematics see page 29 and 30)
763
HD.A with pressure control on one side for port A

The pressure control valve controls the pressure in port A. Description see page 12.
Not available on A4VSO.
Not possible on pumps for bi-directional rotation.
1
Schematics example A4VSG
Size 40 and 71
B A
P X2 2 X1 B A
P X2 2 X1
MB MA MB MA 2
4 4
E E
1.2 1.2
3
U K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L)
Size 125...355 4
X2 2 X1 X2 2 X1
B A B A
4
MB MA MB MA
5
E E 4
1.2 1.2
6
U P K2 K3 T R(L) M U P K2 K3 T R(L) M
Ports Sub-assemblies 7
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
P Control pressure port
2 Pilot control unit
4 Pressure control valve for port A
Size 500...1000 see page 14

764
HD.A with pressure control on one side for port A

Size 500...1000
X2 2 X1 4 X2 2 X1 4
B A B A
MB MA MB MA
3 3
E M2 E M2
M1 P M1 P
1.2 1.2
Ports Sub-assemblies
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M1 Gauging port small control chamber
3 Sandwich plate
M2 Gauging port large control chamber

765
HD.GA with remote pressure control for port A

The remote control is carried out via port XA. The external pilot relief valve (item 5) is not included in the supply.
Description on page 12.
1
Size 40 and 71
5 5 2
P X2 2 X1 XA P X2 2 X1 XA
4 4
MB B A MA MB B A MA
3
1.2 1.2
U K2 K3 T R(L)
4
U K2 K3 T R(L)
Size 125...355
5
5
X2 2 X1 XA X2 2 X1 XA 5
B A B
4
A
6
1.2
1.2
7
XA Pilot pressure port for 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
remote pressure control in A 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 2 Pilot control valve 8
P Control pressure port 4 Pressure control valve for port A
M Gauging port control chamber press. (Size 125...355) 5 External pilot relief valve
(not included in supply)
766
HD.GA with remote pressure control on one side for port A

The remote pressure control is carried out via port XA. The external pilot relief valve (item 5) is not included in the supply.
Description see page 12.
Not possible for bi-directional rotation.

Size 500...1000
5 5
X2 2 X1 4 X2 2 X1 XA
4
XA
B A B A
MB MA MB MA
3 3
E M2 E M2
P M1 P
M1
1.2 1.2
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 2 Pilot control unit
P Control pressure port 3 Sandwich plate
M1 Gauging port small control chamber 4 Pressure control valve for port A
M2 Gauging port large control chamber 5 External pilot relief valve

767

Unit dimensions HD.A / HD.GA request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSG
1.2 2 X1 P 4
XA 1
X2
A 13
A2
A 10
A9
2
A7
B
A
A 14
3

X2 P
4
A5
A4
A11
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
XA
A8
Sub-assemblies
R(L)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
X1 2 Pilot control unit

6

XA Pilot pressure port for
remote pressure control in A DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged on HDA 80 Nm
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
For detailed unit dimensions and 8
40 296 193 233 58 113 218 106 82,5 132,5 163 4 299 189 136
technical data on the variable pump
see the technical data sheet A4VSG
71 332 209 260 58 113 245 122 82,5 148,5 179 4 326 205 139
RE 92100
1)
see general notes
768

Size 125...355
A4VSG A4CSG in preparation, dimensions on request

P X1, X2 2
1.2 XA 4
A2
A8
A 11

P X2
X1
A 12
A7
A6
A9
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Sub-assemblies
XA
R(L) 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M 3 Sandwich plate (Size 500...1000)


P Control pressure port DIN 3853 S8 Form W (Size 125 and 180) 50 Nm
S12 Form W (Size 250 and 355) 90 Nm
M Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
125 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 224 392
For detailed dimensions and technical
180 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 224 394 data on the variable pumps see the
250 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 224 454 technical data sheets A4VSG RE 92100
or A4CSG RE 92105
355 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 224 454
1)
see general notes
769

Size 500...1000
A4VSG A4CSG
3 M2 4 XA 2 3 M2 4 XA 2 1
P 1.3
1.2 X1, X2
X1, X2
A 12
A2
A2
M1
A 12
2
A8
A8
A5
B
A 9 to pump mounting face B

A 3 to pump mounting face 3
P M1
XA X2 XA X2
A4
4
A7
A7
A11
A11
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)
A6
A6
5
X1
X1
3
Sub-assemblies see page 18. 6

P Control pressure port DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep (only on A4VSG) 210 Nm 7
M1 Gauging port small control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (A4VSG) 140 Nm
M22x1,5; 14 deep; plugged (A4CSG) 210 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A11 A12 A13
8
500 555 342 383 175 200 158 145 225 492 136 315 469 For detailed dimensions and technical data on
750 630 371 415 175 230 158 145 280 524 136 345 501 the variable pumps see the technical data sheets
1000 670 394 481 175 253 158 145 278 590 136 368 567 A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
1)
see general notes
770
HD.B with pressure control on one side for port B

The pressure control valve controls the pressure in port B. Description see page 12.
Schematics
Size 40 and 71
(Example A4VSO) (Example A4VSO)
P X2 P X1
4 4
B1 B MB B1 B MB 2
2
1.1 1.1
Size 125...355
(Example A4VSO) (Example A4VSG)
X2 2 X1
X2 2 X1
4
4 B A
B1 B MB
1.2
1.1
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) P M U P K2 K3 T R(L) M
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
4 Pressure control valve for port B

771
HD.B with pressure control on one side for port B
Schematics example A4VSO 1

Size 500...1000
X2 2 X1 4 X2 2 X1 4
2
M2 3 M2 3
B1 B MB M1 P B1 B M B M1 P
3
1.1 1.1
4
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050) 5
3 Sandwich plate

772
HD.GB with remote pressure control for port B

The remote pressure control is carried out via port XB . The external pilot relief valve (item 5) is not included in the supply.

Size 40 and 71
5 5
P X2 2 X1 XB P X2 2 X1 XB
4 4
MB B A MA MB B A MA
1.2 1.2
Size 125...355
5 5
X2 2 X1 XB X2 2 X1 XB
4 4
B A B A
1.2 1.2
XB Pilot pressure port for 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
remote pressure control in B 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
5 External pilot relief valve

773
HD.GB with remote pressure control for port B
Schematics example A4VSO 1

Size 500...1000
5 5
X2 2 X1 XB X2 2 X1 XB 2
4 4
M2 3 M2 3 3
B1 B MB M1 P B 1 B MB M1 P
1.1 1.1
4
XB Pilot pressure port for 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
remote pressure control in B 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050) 5
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 2 Pilot control valve

P Control pressure port 3 Sandwich plate
M1 Gauging port small control chamber 4 Pressure control valve for port B
M2 Gauging port large control chamber 5 External pilot relief valve
(not included in supply) 6

774

Unit dimensions HD.B / HD.GB request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSO A4VSG
1.1 2 4 1.2 2 X1 P 4
P XB XB
(X1), X2 X2
A 13
A 13
A2
A2
A 10
A 10
A9
A7
A7
A
B
A 14
A6 to pump mounting face A12 to pump mounting face
X2 P X2 P
A5
A5
A4
A11
A4
A11
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
XB
XB
(A5)
A8
R(L)
R(L)
(X1) X1
only on counter clockwise rotation
Sub-assemblies see page 25

XB Pilot pressure port for
remote pressure control in B DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged on HDB 80 Nm
on A4VSO clockwise rotation only X2 exists, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation only X1 exists
Unit dimensions
40 296 193 233 58 113 218 106 82,5 132,5 163 4 299 189 136 For detailed dimensions and technical
data on the variable pumps see the
technical data sheets A4VSO
71 332 209 260 58 113 245 122 82,5 148,5 179 4 326 205 139 RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
775

Size 125...355

1
P X1, X2 2
1.1
1.2 XB 4
A2
2
A8
A 11
B
3
P X2
X1
A 12 2)
4
A7
A6
A9
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Sub-assemblies
XB 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
R(L) 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100) 5
1.3 A4CSG (see RE 92105)
M 2 Pilot control unit
3 Sandwich plate (Size 500...1000)
A 13 to pump mounting face 4 Pressure control valve for port B
6
P Control pressure port DIN 3853 S8 Form W (Size 125 and180) 50 Nm 7
S12 Form W (Size 250 and 355) 90 Nm
M Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250a. 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A122) A13
125 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 224 392 8
For detailed dimensions and technical data
180 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 224 392 on the variable pumps see the technical
250 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 224 454 data sheets A4VSO RE 92050,
355 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 224 454 A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
1) 2)
see general notes Piping exists only on A4VSO
776

Size 500...1000
A4VSO and A4VSG A4CSG
3 M2 4 XB 2 3 M2 4 XB 2
P 1.3
1.1
1.2 X1, X2
X1, X2
A 12
A2
A2
M1
A 12
A8
A8
A5
B B
P M1
X2 X2
A4
A7
A7
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)
A11
A11
XB
A6
A6
X1 XB
X1
3

P Control pressure port DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep (only on A4VSG) 210 Nm
Unit dimensions
500 555 342 383 175 200 158 145 225 492 136 304 469 For detailed dimensions and technical data on
750 630 371 415 175 230 158 145 280 524 136 334 501 the variable pumps see the technical data sheets
A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or
1000 670 394 481 175 253 158 145 278 590 136 357 567 A4CSG RE 92105
1)
see general notes
777
HD.D with pressure control on both sides for ports A and B

Two pressure control valves enable a control of max. pressure in ports A or B independent of each other. Description see page 12.
1
Size 40 and 71
P X2 2 X1 4 6 P X2 2 X1 4 6 2
MB B A MA MB B A MA
1.2 1.2
4
Size 125...355
X2 2 X1 4 6 X2 2 X1 4 6
5
B A B A
1.2 1.2
7
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355) 8
(for port B on counter clockwise rotation)
(for port A on counter clockwise rotation)
778
HD.D with pressure control on both sides for ports A and B

Two pressure control valves enable a control of max. pressure in ports A or B independent of each other. Description see page 12.

Size 500...1000
2 4 6 X2 2 X1 4 6
X2 X1
B A
B A
MB MA
MB MA
3 3
E M2
E M2 P
M1 P M1
1.2
1.2
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
2 Pilot control valve

779
HD.G with remote pressure control on both sides for A and B

The remote pressure control is carried out via the ports XA and XB. The external pilot relief valves (item 5 and item 7) are not
included in the supply. Description see page 12.
1
Size 40 and 71
5 7 5 7 2
P X2 2 X1 4 XA 6 XB P X2 2 X1 4 XB 6 XA
MB B A MA MB B A MA
3
1.2 1.2
4
Size 125...355
5 7 5 7
X2 2 X1 4 XA 6 XB X2 2 X1 4 XA 6 XB
5
B A B A
1.2 1.2
7
XA; XB Pilot pressure ports for 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
remote pressure control 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 2 Pilot control unit
P Control pressure port 4 Pressure control valve for port A
(for port B on counter clockwise rotation) 8
M Gauging port control chamber pressure (size 125...355)
5; 7 External pilot relief valves
(for port A on counter clockwise rotation)
780
HD.G with remote pressure control on both side for A and B

The remote pressure control is carried out via the ports XA and XB. The external pilot relief valves (item 5 and 7) are not included in
the supply. Description see page 12.

Size 500...1000
5 7 5 7
X2 2 X1 4 6 X2 2 X1 4 6
XA XB XA XB
B A
B A
MB MA
MB MA
3 3
M2 E M2
E P P
M1 M1
1.2
1.2
XB Pilot pressure port for 2 Pilot control unit
remote pressure control in B
3 Sandwich plate
5; 7 External pilot relief valves
M1 Gauging port small control chamber (not included in supply)
M2 Gauging port large control chamber 6 Pressure control valve for port B

781

Unit dimensions HD.D / HD.G request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSG
XB
1
P 6
2 XA
X2 X1
1.2 4
A 14
A 13
A2
A 10
A9
2
B A7
A
A 15

X2
P 4
A5
Sub-assemblies
A4
A11

15° 0 15°
LR
5
A1
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)

Einschraubloch M33
1.3 A4CSG (see RE 92105)

A8

R(L) XB , XA
X1 (for port B on counter clockwise rotation size 40...355)
6
A12 to pump mounting face (for port A on counter clockwise rotation size 40...355)

XA; XB Pilot pressure ports for
remote pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged on HDD 80 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
8
40 296 193 233 58 113 218 106 82,5 132,5 163 4 299 203 229 165 For detailed dimensions and technical
data on the variable pump see the
technical data sheet
71 332 209 260 58 113 246 122 82,5 148,5 179 4 326 219 245 168
A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
782

Size125...355
A4VSG A4CSG

P X1, X2
1.3 2 XA XB
1.2 2 XA XB
4 6
A2
A2
A 11
4 6
A8
A 11
B
B

X1 X2
A 14 C.clockwise rotation
A 13 Clockwise rotation
P X1 X2
A7
A7
A6
A9
A6
A9
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
15° 0 15°
LR
Einschraubloch M33
A1
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) XA XB
R(L) XA XB

remote pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged on HDD 80 Nm
P Control pressure port DIN 3853 S8 Form W (Size 125 and 180) 50 Nm
only on A4VSG S12 Form W (Size 250 and 355) 90 Nm
M Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged(Size 125a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
125 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 406 239 224 432 For detailed dimensions and technical
180 402 245 251 67 293 71 111 202 13 366 192 406 239 224 432 data on the variable pumps see the
technical data sheets
250 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 468 239 224 494 A4VSG RE 92100 or
355 485 297,5 311 71 355 71 111 238 13 428 228 468 239 224 494 A4CSG RE 92105
1)
see general notes
783
Before finaliaing your design please

Size 500...1000
A4VSG A4CSG
3 M2 XA X B 2 3 M2 XA 2 1
P 1.3
1.2 X1, X2
X1, X2
A 12
A2
A2
A 14
M1
A 12
2
A8
A8
A5
B
B
P M1
XA X2 XA X2
4
4 4
A4
A7
A7
A11
A11
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
6
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
6
R(L) R(L)
A11
A11
A6
A6
XB
X1 XB X1
3
6
1)
Ports max. tightening torques
remote pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep plugged on HDD 80 Nm
P Control pressure port DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14deep (only on A4VSG) 210 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A11 A12 A13 A14 8
500 555 342 383 175 200 158 145 225 492 136 315 469 304 For detailed dimensions and technical data
750 630 371 415 175 230 158 145 280 524 136 345 501 334 on the variable pumps see the technical data
sheets A4VSG RE 92100 or
1000 670 394 481 175 253 158 145 278 590 136 368 567 357 A4CSG RE 92105
1)
see general notes
784
HD1P with power control

As the operating pressure rises, the pilot pressure (i.e. the command value for HD) is reduced by the power limiting valve LV 06,
thereby reducing the pump displacement in such a manner, that a certain preset drive torque cannot be exceeded.
On some pump combinations A4 + A4 dimensional restrictions can limit the mounting of the power limiting valve.
In the folowing cases we recommend the mounting of the power valve on the rear pump, or consult us for more information:
Size 40 + Size 40
Size 71 with pressure control + Size 71
Characteristic Technical data

Min. beginning of control for pump operating pressure must
be higher than the set control pressure at P or at the control
Operating pressure p
pressure relief valve on the A4CSG.
The power control curve is factory set
Please state in clear text when ordering
_ Vg e.g. 55 kW at 1500 rpm.
Vgmax
Examples of power control curves see RE 95546
Vg
+
Vgmax
Schematics
Size 40 and 71
(Example A4VSO in clockwise rotation; in counter clockwise
rotation only X1 exists and is connected to the power valve) (Example A4VSG)
8.2 8.2
X2 2 8 2
P
P X2 X1
8
B A
MB MA
8.1
8.1
B1 B MB E
1.1
1.2
S MS K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L)
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
8 Power limiting valve (see RE 95546)
LV 06 405 (on size 40 and 71)
8.1 Sandwich plate for mounting of power valve (size 40 and 71)
Schematics size 125...1000 see page 35 8.2 Shuttle valve (on A4VSG)
785
HD1P with power control

Schematics
On the A4VSG and A4CSG both ports X1 and X2 are connected to the shuttle valve (either internally or via a T–joint) and open.
On the A4VSO in clockwise rotation only port X2, and in counter clockwise rotation only port X1, is connected to the power
valve and open.
Size 125...355 1
Example A4VSO clockwise rotation Example A4VSO counter clockwise rotation
X2 X1 X2 X1
P P
8.2 8.2
8 8
2
2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB
3
1.1 1.1
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) M2 U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) M 4
Size 500...1000
Example A4VSO clockwise rotation Example A4VSG
X1
X2 X2
2 X1 2 8
B A
8 5
MB MA
E Mst
M2
M1 P
M2 Mst
B1 B MB M1 P 8.2
6
8.2
1.2
1.1
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L) 7
X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
P Control pressure port 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
Mst Gauging port pilot pressure (Size 500...1000) 2 Pilot control unit
M Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355) 8 Power valve (see RE 95546) 8
LV 06 205 (on size 125...1000)
M1 Gauging port small control chamber (Size 500....1000)
8.2 Shuttle valve assembly (on A4VSG and A4CSG)
M2 Gauging port large control chamber (Size 500...1000)
Size 40 and 71 see page 34
786
Before finalising your desigh please

Unit dimensions HD1P request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSO A4VSG
P 8.2 P 8.2
8 X2 X1 8
1.1 (X1), X2 2 1.2 2
A 10
A 10
A2
A2
A9
A7
A7
8.1 8.1
B
B
not on pumps for counter
clockwise rotation A3 to pump mounting face
X2 X2
P P
A12
A12
A5
A5
M14x1.5
M14x1.5
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
15° 0 15°
LR
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A8
R(L) R(L)
(A 5 )
A1
A1
X1
only on pumps for counter
(X1) clockwise rotation

X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports DIN 3853 S8 Form W 50 Nm
on A4VSO clockwise rotation only X2 exists, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation only X1 exists
Unit dimensions
40 148 222 233 58 128 203 106 82,5 147,5 222 323 175 For detailed dimensions and technical data
on the variable pumps see the technical data
sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or
71 166 240 260 58 128 203 122 82,5 147,5 238 350 175
A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
787

Size 125...355
P 8.2 X1, X2
1
8
1.1
1.2
2
A2
A 10
A8
2
B
A3 to pump mounting face 3
X2
Einschraubloch M14 (Form X)

A 11
P 4
A7
Sub-assemblies
A4
A6

15° 0 15°
LR
Einschraubloch M33
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)

X1 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
R(L) 8 Power valve (see RE 95546) 5
A1
LV 06 405 (on size 40 and 71)

LV 06 205 (on size 125...1000)
M 8.1 Adapter plate for power valve (Size 40 and 71)

8.2 Shuttle valve assembly
A9 to pump mounting face (on A4VSG and A4CSG)
6
on A4VSO clockwise rotation X1is plugged, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation X2 is plugged
M Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (size 125...180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
125 201 230 247 95,5 297 55,5 129,5 216 384 257 227
For detailed dimensions and technical data 8
180 201 230 247 95,5 297 55,5 129,5 216 384 257 227 on the variable pumps see the technical data
250 243 266 309 95,5 359 55,5 129,5 252 446 293 227 sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or
A4VSG RE 92100
355 243 266 309 95,5 359 55,5 129,5 252 446 293 227
1)
see general notes
788

Size 500...1000
A4VSO A4VSG (A4CSG on request)
8 8
MSt M2 MSt M2
1.1 8.2 P 2 1.2 8.2 P 2
X1, X2 X1, X2
A2
A2
A8
A8
A5
A5
M1 M1
B
B
P 2.1 P
X2 X2
A4
A4
M12 (x1.75)
A7
A7
15° 0 15°
LR
15° 0 15°
A1
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)
A6
A6
X1 X1
2.1

X1; X2 Pilot pressure ports DIN 3853 S8 Form W 50 Nm
on A4VSO clockwise rotation X1, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation X2 M14x1,5 plugged
Mst Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
500 555 406 383 251 206 158 145 225 521 For detailed dimensions and technical data on the variable
750 630 430 415 251 236 158 145 280 553 pumps see the technical data sheets
1000 670 459 481 251 259 140 140 278 619 A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
789
HD1T with electrical control of pilot pressure

The pilot pressure level in the X1 or X2 pilot channel is generated by means of a proportional current signal to to one of the
solenoids a or b at the proportional valve DBEP6 (acc. to RE 29164).
The pilot pressure is limited by the current signal.
In pumps for closed circuit operation each direction of swivel is controlled by its own proportional solenoid. In open circuit pumps
(one side of center) there is only one solenoid. 1
Control through an electrical command value. Current control through pulsewidth modulation.
Analog or digital amplifiers can be used for control of the solenoids e.g. proportional amplifier VT 3000 with 170 Hz
(see RE 29935). Please order separately.
For more information on the selection of available control electronics and hydraulic fluid, functional discription and manu-
al emergency override and further technical data please consult RE 29164.
2
Technical data – electrical
Operating voltage 24 V
Nominal solenoid current 700 mA
Control current
Beginning of control at Vg0 and 10 bar pilot pressure 300 mA 3
End of control at Vgmax and 45 bar pilot pressure 700 mA
Nominal resistance at 20°C (R20) 19,5 :
Max. duty cycle 100 % (S1)
Type of plug DIN EN 175 301-803/ISO 4400
with wiring screw joint M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
Type of protection DIN/EN 60529 IP 65 4
Manual emergency override exists, see RE 29164
Coil operating temperature up to 150 °C
Caution! Avoid being burned:
The pump and especially the solenoids are during and shortly after operation very hot!
Wear always suitable protective clothing.
5
Calculation formula for the resistance

at T > 20 °C
R20 x (235 + T)
RW =
255 6
Technical data – hydraulic

Control pressure (in P) pmin bar 50
pmax bar 100
Hysteresis ± 4 % of Vgmax 7
Repeatability 2% of Vgmax
Because of the restrictions in RE 29164 the control pressure in P is limited to 50...100 bar on the controls HD1T and HD1U.
The flow losses in the proportional valve (e.g. 4 L/min per de-energized solenoid at p = 50 bar) must be compensated for in the
calculation of the required control oil flow in P.
8
790

DBEP 6, Execution B resp. A
Characteristic
Relation between
Direction of rotation – Direction of flow at actuation of
45 700 solenoid
Pilot pressure pst [bar]
40
Current I [mA]
600 Direction of Swivel Direction of Pressure

30 rotation range1) flow outlet port
500
clockwise left S to B B
20 400
counter clockwise right S to B B
10 300 1)
compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
left
0 25 50 75 100
Vg
Displacement Vgmax [%]
A4VSG - closed circuit

DBEP 6, Execution C
Direction of rotation – Actuation of solenoid – Direction of flow
Pilot pressure pst [bar]
45 700
40 Direction of Actuation Swivel Direction of Pressure
Current I [mA]
600
rotation of solenoid range1) flow outlet port
30
500 clockwise b right B to A A
20 400 a left A to B B
Vg
+
10 300 Vgmax [%] counter b right A to B B
clockwise a left B to A A
25 50 75 100
25 50 75 100 1)
15° 0° 15°
right
10 Vg 300
–
Vgmax [%]
left
20 400
Current I [mA]
500
30
600
40
45 700
A4CSG with HD1T

is in preparation and can be supplied on request.
791

Schematics
Size 40 and 71
Example A4VSO in clockwise rotation, in counter clockwise Example A4VSG
rotation X1 connected to the prop. valve and X2 deleted
9.1 9.2 b a
2 2
P P
X2 X2 X 1
B A
MB MA
9.3 9.3 2
B1 B MB E
1.1
1.2
3
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L)
Size 125...355
Example A4VSO in counter clockwise rotation Example A4VSG
9.2
a b
4
9.1 b
X2 X1
X2 X1 P
P 9.3
9.3
5
2
B A
2
MB MA
E
B 1 B MB
6
1.1
1.2
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) M U K2 K3 T R(L) M 7
Ports Sub-assemblies see page 42

X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure
8

792

Schematics
Size 500...1000
Example A4VSO in clockwise rotation, in counter clockwise Example A4VSG
rotation X1 connected to the proportional valve
2 9.2
X1
X2
X2 2 9.1
X1 B A
MB MA b a
b E M2
M1 P
M2
M1 P
9.3
B1 B MB
9.3
1.2
1.1
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L)
Ports
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure
M1 Gauging port small control chamber (size 500...1000)
M2 Gauging port large control chamber (size 500...1000)
Subassemblies
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
9.1 Proportional-pressure relief valve

(open circuit) Solenoids with plugs
DBEP6 B06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 with inlet orifice dia. 1,0 mm to DIN EN 175 301-803 / ISO 4400
DBEP6 A06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 on size 125...355 clockwise rotation Type of protection IP 65
9.2 Proportional-pressure relief valve and wiring screw joint M16x1,5 for
(closed circuit ) cable dia. 4,5...10mm
DBEP6 C06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 with inlet orifice dia.1,0 mm
9.3 Sandwich plate to mount proportional valve

793

Unit dimensions HD1T request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSO in clockwise rotation A4VSG
(Counter clockwise rotation on request)
1
9.1 9.2
P P
1.1 2 1.2 2
A6
A6
2
A2
A2
M14x1.50
M6 (x1)
M6 (x1)
3
B Solenoid a with
manual override
X2 X2 P
P 4
A7
M14x1.5
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
5
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)
X1 6
Solenoid b with Solenoid b with
manual override manual override

7
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W plugged 50 Nm
on A4VSO clockwise rotation only X2 exists, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation only X1 exists (dimensions on request)
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
8
40 296 193 233 58 323 257 189
For detailed dimensions and technical data on the variable pumps see the
technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
71 332 209 260 58 350 273 189
1)
see general notes
794

Unit dimensions HD1T request a certified installation drawing.
Size 125...355
A4VSO A4VSG (A4CSG in preparation, dimensions on request)
9.1 9.2
P 9.3 P 9.3
1.1 X1, X2 1.2 X1, X2

2 2
A6
A6
A2
A2
A5 to pump mounting face B A5 to pump mounting face

on clockwise rotation Solenoid a with
solenoid a with manual manual override
override
X2 P X2
P
A7
A7
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
X1
Einschraubloch M33
X1
R(L) R(L)
on c. clockwise
M rotation solenoid b M Solenoid b with
with manual override manual override

pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (NG 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
125 402 230 247 96 360 302 236
180 402 230 247 96 360 302 236 For detailed dimensions and technical data on the variable pumps see
250 485 266 309 96 422 338 236 the technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
355 485 266 309 96 422 338 236
1)
see general notes
795
Unit dimensions HD1T Before finalising your design please

request a certified installation drawing.
Size 500...1000
9.1 9.3 9.2 9.3
M2 P M2 P 1
1.1 2 1.2 2
X1, X2 X1, X2
A2
A2
2
M1 M1
A5
A5
B
A 3 to pump mounting face Solenoid a with
A 3 to pump mounting face manual override
3
P P
X2 X2
A6
A7
A4
A4
4
15°0 15°
LR
15 °0 15°
LR
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R ( L) R(L )
5
A1
A1
X1 X1
6

M2 Gauging port large control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm 7
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W; plugged 50 Nm
on A4VSO clockwise rotation X1, c.clockwwise X2 DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
8
750 315 423 415 251 236 348 278 553 see the technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or
1000 335 444 481 251 259 348 278 619 A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
796
HD1U with power control and electr. control of pilot pressure

This version is a combination of HD1P (see page 34) and HD1T (see page 39)
Schematics
Size 40 and 71
Example A4VSG; on A4VSO clockwise rotation only X2, on Size 125...355
A4VSO counter clockwise rotation only X1 exists Example A4VSG
9.2
a b
9.2 X2 X1
P
b a 9.3
8
2 2
P
9.3 B A
X2 X1 8 MB MA
B A
MB MA
8.1 E
E
1.2 1.2
U K2 K3 T R(L) U K2 K3 T R(L) M
Size 500...1000
Example A4VSO clockwise rotation; on counter clockwise
rotation X1 is connected to the power valve
X2 2
X1
9.1 8
M2 Mst Sub-assemblies
B1 B MB M1 P
9.3 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
1.1
8 Power valve (see RE 95546)
LV 06 405 (on size 40 and 71)
U S MS K2 K3 T R(L) LV 06 205 (on size 125...1000)
8.1 Sandwich plate for mounting of power valve (size 40 a. 71)
Ports
9.1* Proportional-pressure relief valve (on A4VSO)
DBEP6 B06
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DBEP6 A06 (on size 125...355 clockwise rotation)
M Gauging port control chamber pressure (size 125...355) 9.2* Proportional-pressure relief valve DBEP6 C06
(on A4VSG and A4CSG)
M1 Gauging port small control chamber (size 500...1000)
9.3 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve
M2 Gauging port large control chamber (size 500...1000)
Mst Gauging port pilot pressure (size 500...1000) * detailed information see page 42
797

Unit dimensions HD1U request a certified installation drawing.
Size 40 and 71
A4VSO clockwise rotation A4VSG
(Counter clockwise rotation on request)
1
9.1 9.2
P 9.3 X1 P 9.3
1.1 2 8 1.2 2 8
A6
A6
2
A2
A2
M14x1.50
M6 (x1)
M14x1.50
M6 (x1)
8.1 8.1
B
3
B Solenoid a with
A5 to pump mounting face A5 to pump mounting face manual override
X2 X2
P P
4
A7
A8
A7
M14x1.5 M14x1.5
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33 Einschraubloch M33
R(L) R(L)

manual override X1 manual override 6

X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W plugged 50 Nm 7
on A4VSO clockwise rotation only X2 exists, on A4VSO counter clockwise rotation only X1 exists (dimensions on request)
Unit dimensions
8
see the technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050
71 332 209 260 58 350 282 175 189 or A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
798

Size 125...355
9.1 9.2
9.3 9.3
P P
8 8
1.1 X1, X2 1.2 X1, X2
2 2
A6
A6
A2
A2
A5 to pump mounting face B A5 to pump mounting face

at clockwise rotation
solenoid a with Solenoid a with
X2 X2
P P
A8 2)
A8
A7
A7
A4
A4
15° 0 15°
LR
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
X1 X1
R(L) R(L)
at c. clockwise rota-
M tion solenoid b with M
Solenoid b with
manual override
manual override

pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A82)
125 402 230 247 96 384 302 227 236
see the technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or
250 485 266 309 96 446 338 227 236 A4VSG RE 92100
355 485 266 309 96 446 338 227 236
1) 2)
see general notes deleted on counter clockwise rotation, since only solenoid b exists
799

Size 500...1000
A4VSO A4VSG has additional solenoid a (see dimension A6)
A4CSG in preparation, dimensions on request
8
9.3 1
1.1 M2 P
2
X 1, X 2
A2
A5
M1

B
only on A4VSG
9.2 solenoid a with
manual override P
9.1 solenoid b with Sub-assemblies
manual override
X2 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
A6
4
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
A7
A4

8 Power valve (see RE 95546)
LV 06 405 (on size 40 and 71)
15°0 1 5°
LR
Einschraubloch M33
LV 06 205 (on size 125...1000)
8.1 Sandwich plate for mounting of power valve 5
R(L)
9.1 Proportional-pressure relief valve (on A4VSO)
DBEP6 B06
A1
DBEP6 A06 (on size 125...355 clockwise rotation)

9.2 Proportional-pressure relief valve DBEP6 C06
X1 (on A4VSG and A4CSG)
9.3 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve 6

X1; X2 Gauging ports pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W; plugged 50 Nm 7
on A4VSO clockwise rotation X1, c. clockw. rot. X2 DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
8
750 315 430 415 251 236 348 278 553 see the technical data sheets
1000 335 459 481 251 259 348 278 619 A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
800
801
8
802
General notes
– The hydraulic control HD is, depending on the type of operation, suitable for open circuit (A4VSO) or closed circuit operation
(A4VSG, A4CSG).
– Project planning, assembly, and startup of the motor require the involvement of trained personnel.
– The working and functional ports are only designed to accommodate hydraulic piping.
– Tightening torques: The tightening torques specified in this data sheet are maximum values and may not be exceeded (maxi-
mum value for screw thread). Manufacturer specifications for the max. permissible tightening torques of the
used fittings must be observed!
For DIN 13 fastening screws we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI
2230 Edition 2003.
– The housing temperature rises during and shortly after operation. Take suitable safety precautions (e.g. wear protective clothing).
– The data and information contained herein must be adhered to.
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations set
Hydraulics forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their consent
Product Segment Axial Piston Units it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.
Plant Horb The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
An den Kelterwiesen 14 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
72160 Horb a.N., Germany rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0
Facsimile +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
803

RE 92 060/10.06 1/32
Control devices Replaces: 03.95
DR, DP, FR and DFR
for the variable pumps

A4VSO and A4VSG Series 1 and 3
open and closed circuits
Contents Features
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSO 2 – Control devices for the variable pumps A4VSO and A4VSG
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSG 3 – Control of pressure and flow
DR pressure control, swivel on one side 4 – Optional remote control
DRG remotely controlled pressure control 7 – Optional control for parallel operation
Unit dimensions DR / DRG 9 – Mechanical limitation of Vg min and Vg max
DP pressure control for parallel operation 12 – Special versions for mooring, over center operation and
decompression via the pump are possible
Unit dimensions DP 16
DPF with flow control 19
Unit dimensions DPF 21
FR/FR1 flow control 22
Unit dimensions FR/FR1 25
FRG/FRG1 with remote pressure control 26
Unit dimensions FRG/FRG1 28
DFR/DFR1 pressure and flow control 29
Unit dimensions DFR/DFR1 31
Further information:
General notes 32
Variable pump A4VSO Size 40...1000 RE 92050
Variable pump A4VSG Size 40...1000 RE 92100
804
2/32 Bosch Rexroth AG DR, DP, FR and DFR | RE 92 060/10.06
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSO

A4VS O / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
01 Fluid (for details see RE 92050)
Axial piston unit

Type of operation
03 Pump, open circuit operation (see RE 92050) O
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000


Pressure control DR DR
remotely controlled DR G DRG
Press. control for parallel operation DP DP
with flow control DP F – – – – – DPF
Flow control FR – – – FR
05
with remote pressure control FR G – – – FRG
FR no connection betw. XF to tank FR 1 – – – FR1
FRG no connection betw. XF to tank FRG 1 – – – FRG1
Pressure and flow control DFR – – – DFR
no connection between XF to tank DFR 1 – – – DFR1
Series
– – – – – – – 10
06
– – 30
07 Direction of rotation
08 Seals
09 Shaft end
For detailed information see:
10 Mounting flange
RE 92050 – A4VSO
11 Service port connections
12 Through drive
13 Filtration
available – not available
Ordering code – standard program of A4VSG see page 3

805
RE 92 060/10.06 | DR, DP, FR and DFR Bosch Rexroth AG 3/32
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSG

A4VS G / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
01 Fluid (for details see RE 92100) 1
Axial piston unit

Type of operation
03 Pump closed circuit operation (see RE 92100) G
2
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000


Pressure control for one side of center DR DR
3
remotely controlled DR G DRG
05
Pressure control for parallel operation DP
DP
for one side of center
Series
– – – – – – – 10
06 4
– – 30
with view on shaft end clockwise R
07
(no bi-directional rotation possible) counter clockwise L
5
08 Seals
09 Shaft end
10 Mounting flange
For detailed information see:
11 Service port connections
RE 92100 – A4VSG
12 Through drive
6
13 Valves
14 Filtration
available in preparation – not available
Ordering code – standard program of A4VSO see page 2

8
806
DR pressure control, swivel on one side

The pressure control keeps the pressure in the pumps pressure outlet constant within the control range of the pump. Therefore,
the pump only delivers as much fluid, as required by the actuators. The pressure can be steplessly set at the control valve.
Recommended setting range 50...350 bar
Standard setting 350 bar. If another setting is required, please state in clear text when ordering.
Home position in pressureless condition: Vg max
Min. and max. swivel angle limitation mechanically adjustable to 50 % of Vg max.
The Vg min-stop is set so that a pressure level of 15...20 bar is reached in a closed pressure port B.
The Vg max-stop is set to the nominal Vg max value. If another setting is required, please state in clear text when ordering.
The pressure control is available in A4VSO and A4VSG however only for swivel on one side of center.
On request also versions for mooring or over center operation are available.
For fast decompression of the pressurized outlet, the pump can swivel momentarily over center and swallow some fluid.
Remote adjustment of pressure control DRG see page 7, pressure control for parallel operation DP see page.12.

Static characteristic Direction of flow S to B
Pump direction Swivel range 1) Pressure port

of rotation
350
Pressure deviation
clockwise left hand B

Setting range
counter clockwise right hand B

d 3 bar
1)
15° 0° 15°
right
left
50
qv min qv max
Flow

Pressure control DR only for swivel on one side.
No bi-directional rotation possible.
Static characteristic Direction of flow A to B
of rotation
350
Pressure deviation

Setting range

d 3 bar
1)
15° 0° 15°
right
left
50
qv min qv max
Flow
807
DR pressure control, swivel on one side

Dynamic characteristics
The curves show measured average values.
Conditions: n = 1500/1800 rpm
toil = 50° C
Main line relief set at 400 bar 1
Load jump accomlished through sudden opening and closing of the pressure outlet with a relief valve as load valve, situated 1 m
downstream of the pressure port on the axial piston unit.
400
350 2
300
200
100
3
0
Vg max
(swivel angle)
Displacement
Vg min
Control time t 5
Stroking time tSA (0...Vg max) De-stroking time tSE (Vg max...0)
Size tSA [s] at 20 bar tSA [s] at 330 bar tSE [s] Standby at 350 bar
40 approx. 0,12 approx. 0,08 0,02
6
71 approx. 0,20 approx. 0,10 0,03
125 approx. 0,30 approx. 0,20 0,04
180 approx. 0,30 approx. 0,20 0,05
250 approx. 0,40 approx. 0,30 0,06
355 approx. 0,40 approx. 0,30 0,08
500 approx. 0,50 approx. 0,30 0,10 7
750 approx. 1,00 approx. 0,60 0,15
1000 approx. 1,50 approx. 0,90 0,20
The stroking time tSA (Vg mino Vg max) can be steplessly adjusted, without influencing the de-stroking time tSE.
Standard setting see table. If needed, these values can be reduced by a factor of 2...3 (please consult us).
8
808
Schematics DR
Control device (shown in area with white background) valid for A4VSO and A4VSG
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

Example: A4VSO Example: A4VSO
2
2
B1 B MB B1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2
Size 125...355 Size 500...1000

Example: A4VSG Example: A4VSO
2
B A
2
MB MA
3
E M2
B1 B MB M1
3
1.2 1.1
U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2 U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Ports Sub assemblies

M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
(Size 125...1000) 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
2 Pressure control valve
809
DRG remotely controlled pressure control

Function and execution as DR.
A pressure relief valve (item 4) can be piped externally to port XD, but it is not included in the supply of the DRG control.
A special version with a built on pressure relief valve is available upon request.
The differential pressure at the pressure control valve (item 2) is set as standard to 20 bar, which results in a pilot flow out of XD of
approx. 1,5 L/min. If a different setting (recommended range 20...50 bar) is required, please state in clear text when ordering. 1
As a separate pressure relief valve we recommend :

– DBD 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402.
– DBETR-SO 437 (electric) to RE 29166
The maximum line lenght should not exceed 2 m.
2
Notes to the setting of the remote pressure control:
The overall output pressure level is the result of the setting of the separate pressure relief valve plus the value of the control valve´s
differential pressure.
Example: setting external pressure relief valve 330 bar
differential pressure at control valve 20 bar
3
results in control pressure level of 330 + 20 = 350 bar
max.
350
Pressure deviation
Setting range
d 3 bar
external pressure
relief valve 4
20
'p Press. control valve
Flow qv
5
Function, description and stroking times of pressure control DR see page 4 and 5.
8
810
Schematics DRG
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

Example: A4VSO Example: A4VSO
2
2 4
XD
XD
4
B1 B MB B1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1
Size 125...355 Size 500...1000

Example: A4VSG Example: A4VSO
2 4 2 XD
B A
XD
MB MA
E 3 M2
3 B1 B MB
M1
1.2 1.1
U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) M2 U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)

XD Pilot pressure port for remote pressure relief valve 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
(Size125...1000) 2 Pressure control valvel
4 External pressure relief valve (not included in supply)
811
Before finalising your design, please

Unit dimensions DR / DRG request a certified installation drawing
Dimensions valid for A4VSO and A4VSG
Size 40 and 71
1
A7
Hydraulic control device
XD Pressure control valve
2
A2
A8
B
Pressure control valve 3
mounting for
clockwise rotation
XD
A3
4
A5
15 0 15
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
R(L) A4
Schl.weite:30mm
5
B
Pressure control valve XD

mounting for at counter clockwise rotation
6
counter clockwise rotation
Ports max. tightening torque 1)

XD Pilot pressure port for remote
pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged at DR control 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
40 260 140 147 137 47 67 209 128 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on 8
the variable pumps see the technical data sheets
71 298 157 142 142 42 72 236 144 A4VSO RE 92050 and A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
Size 125...1000 see page 10 and 11
812

Size 125...355
A7
Sandwich plate
Hydraulic control device
XD Pressure control valve
A2
A8
B
Pressure control valve

M2 mounting for
clockwise rotation
XD
A5
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
R(L) XD
Einschraubloch M14 (Form X)
at counter clockwise rotation

B
M1
mounting for

pressure relief valve DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged at DR control 80 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125...180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250...355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A5 A6 A7 A8
125/180 354 191 41 71 305 172 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data of the
variable pumps see the technical data sheets
250/355 424 238 41 71 367 208 A4VSO RE 92050 and A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
Size 40 and 71 see page 9; size 500...1000 see page 11

813

Size 500...1000
1
A7
Hydraulic control device Sandwich plate

XD
2
A2
A8
B
3
M2
mounting for
clockwise rotation
XD
4
A5
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
R(L)
XD
at counter clockwise rotation 5
B
M1
mounting for 6

pressure relief valver DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged at DR control 80 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep plugged 140 Nm
7
pressure
Unit dimensions
500 510 283 41 51 452 216 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data of the 8
750 582 322 41 51 484 235 variable pumps see the technical data sheets
1000 622 350 41 51 550 269 A4VSO RE 92050 and A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
Size 40 and 71 see page 9; size 125...355 see page 10

814
DP pressure control for parallel operation

Suitable for pressure control of several axial piston units A4VS in parallel operation (feeding into one common pressure header).
An external pressure relief valve (item 4) is used to control several axial piston units simultaneously via their X-ports. The relevant
throttle valve (item 5) ensures control of the required pressure increase, which is proportional to the actual pump displacement.
Setting of differential pressure for DP-control
The standard setting of the differential pressure over control valve (item 2) plus throttle valve (item 5) amounts to 33 bar, with port
XD unloaded to tank. The pilot oil flow out of port XD amounts to approx. 1,5 L/min.
The pressure setting of the external relief valve plus the overall differential pressure over item 2 and 5 determine the total pressure
control level. The pressure rise during the de-stroking of the pump is independent of the pressure relief valve setting and causes a
slight swivel angle deviation of all commonly controlled pumps.
Make sure that the lines between the ports XD and the pressure relief valve are as much as possible of the same lenght.
The pressure relief valve (item 4) is not included in the supply of the DP control - please order separately.
We recommend: DBD 6 (hydraulic) RE 25402
The max. number of commonly controlled pumps is limited by the flow capacity of the used pilot valve.
If needed, it is possible to unload individual pumps to the differential pressure level through an unloading valve (item 6). In this
case an additional check valve is necessary in the pump outlet (item 7) Both valves are not included in the supply of the DP
control.
On request it is possible to mount the unloading valve (item 6) directly onto the pump.
This pressure control is available on the A4VSO and A4VSG, however only for swivel on one side of center.
On request, it is also available for Mooring-or over center operation.
For fast decompression of the pressurized outlet, the pump can then swivel momentarily over center and swallow some fluid.
Stroking times like DR see page 5.
Flow control is optionally available – DPF see page 19
100%
10%
Swivel angle D
0
0 100%
Flow qv
Swivel angle deviation ± 10% of ideal curve

815
DP pressure control for parallel operation

Pump direction of Swivel range 1) Pressure port

rotation
350 1
Setting range
'p = 6,5±2 bar
external pressure 1)
15° 0° 15°
relief valve right
left
33
2
0 100%
Flow qv ges

Pressure control DP can swivel on one side of center only. 3
No bi-directional rotation possible.
Static characteristic Direction of flow A to B

rotation
350
clockwise left hand B 4
'p = 6,5±2 bar
Setting range

external pressure 1)
relief valve compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
left
33
0 100% 5
Flow qv ges
Dynamic characteristic see DR control page 5
8
816
Schematics DP
Size 40 and 71
Example: A4VSO
Actuators
Mounting of
4 further
pumps
Mst Mst
XD 6 XD 6
7 7
5 5
B1 B MB
2 B1 B MB
2
1.1 1.1
Size 125...355
Example: A4VSO
Actuators Mounting
of further
4 pumps
Mst Mst
XD 6 XD 6
7 7
5 2 5 2
B1 B MB 3 B1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2
Ports Sub assemblies see page 15

XD Pilot pressure port DP control
MSt Gauging port pilot pressure
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355)
817
Schematics DP
Size 500...1000
Example: A4VSO
1
Actuators Mounting
of further
4 pumps
Mst Mst
6 6
XD XD
2
7 7
2 2
5 5
B1 B MB M2 B1 B MB M2
M1 M1
3 3
3
1.1 1.1
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) 4

XD Pilot pressure port DP control 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
MSt Gauging port pilot pressure 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure
2 Control valve with pressure compensator 5

4 Pressure relief valve
5 Throttle valve
6 Unloading valve (not included in supply)
6
7 Check valve (not included in supply)
required only in conjunction with unloading valve
8
818

Unit dimensions DP request a certified installation drawing
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355
XD 5
XD 5
3
1.1 2
1.1 2 1.2
1.2
A2
A2
A7
A7
B B
Control valve mounting Control valve mounting
for clockwise rotation for clockwise rotation
M2
XD
XD
A3
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
A5
A5
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
at counter clockwise
R(L)
rotation
A4
MSt R(L) MSt

B
Schl.weite: 30 m
B
M1
Control valve mounting for
counter clockwise rotation Control valve mounting for
Sub assemblies see page 17

XD Pilot pressure port DP control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
MSt Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
40 260 210 147 137 39 133 170
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data
71 296 225 142 142 39 155 187 of the variable pumps see the technical data
125/180 354 261 – – 39 192 221 sheets A4VSO RE 92050
and A4VSG RE 92100
250/355 424 306 – – 39 237 268
1)
see general notes
819

Unit dimensions DP request a certified installation drawing
Size 500...1000
1
5
XD
3 2
1.1
1.2
2
A2
A7
MSt
B 3

for clockwise rotation
XD M2
4
A5
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
R(L) Sub assemblies 5

MSt 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
M1 B 2 Control valve with pressure compensator
counter clockwise rotation 5 Throttle valve 6

MSt Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm 7
pressure
Unit dimensions 8
Size A1 A2 A5 A6 A7
500 510 353 39 268 313 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps
750 582 392 39 290 352 see the technical data sheets
1000 622 419 39 349 379 A4VSO RE 92050 and A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
820
Notes
821
DPF with flow control

In addition to the pressure control function the flow from pumps to actuators may be varied via a differential pressure e.g. over an
orifice. The pumps supply only the amount of flow as required by the actuator.
The flow depends only on the size of cross section in the control orifice (item 9) mounted between pumps and actuator. Below
the setting of the pressure control and within the control range of the pumps, the flow is virtually independent of the actual opera-
ting pressure. 1
Description of the flow control see FR page 22.
Function and technical data of the pressure control for parallel operation DP see page 12.

Static characteristic Direction of flow S to B 2

rotation
350
'p = 6,5±2 bar
Setting range
1)
compare swivel angle indicator 3
15° 0° 15°
right
left
33
qv min qv max
Flow qv ges
4
8
822
Schematics DPF
Size 125...355
A4VSO
9 Actuator
Mounting
4 of further
pumps
Mst Mst
XF 6 XF 6
9.1 9.1
8 8
7 XD 7 XD
5 2 5 2
B1 B MB 3 B 1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2

XD Pilot pressure port DP control 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
XF Pilot pressure port flow control 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
MSt Gauging port pilot pressure DP control 2 Control valve with pressure compensator
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355) 3 Sandwich plate
4 Pressure relief valve (not included in supply)
5 Throttle valve
6 Unloading valve (not included in supply)
7 Check valve (not included in supply)
only required in conjunction with unloading valve
8 Flow control valve
9 External orifice (not included in supply)
9.1 is needed, when parallel stroking for flow control function
is necessary (not included in supply)
823

Unit dimensions DPF request a certified installation drawing
Dimensions valid for A4VSO
Size 125...355
1
XD 5 3 2 XF 8
2
1.1
A2
A10
A8
B
M2 for clockwise rotation
XD
MSt
4
XF
A5
15° 0 15°
LR
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
5
R(L)
XF at counter
clockwise
rotation
M1 B
counter clockwise rotation 6
XF Pilot pressure port flow control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
MSt Gauging port pilot pressure DP control DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm 7
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size125 a. 180) 80 Nm
M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
125 354 261 41 71 191,5 172 345 220,5 371 8
For detailed unit dimensions and technical
180 354 261 41 71 191,5 172 345 220,5 371 data of the variable pumps see the technical
250 424 306 41 51 236,5 208 407 267,5 433 data sheets
A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
355 424 306 41 51 236,5 208 407 267,5 433
1)
see general notes
824
FR/FR1 flow control

The flow control matches the pump displacement with the actual flow requirements of the actuators.
The pump flow depends only on the size of cross section in the orifice (item 4), mounted between pump and actuators. Within the
control range of the pump, the flow is virtually independent of the actual load pressure (see max. flow deviation below).
The cross section in the orifice determines the pump flow.
The flow controller compares the pressure upstream of the orifice with the pressure after the orifice and keeps the pressure drop
(differential pressure 'p) over the orifice constant, thereby controlling the flow.
An increase of differential pressure 'p causes the pump to de-stroke (direction to Vg min), and a decrease in differential pressure
'p results in a larger pump swivel angle (direction to Vg max), till the flow control valvespool is in balance again.
'porifice = ppump – pactuator
The standard 'p setting at the flow control spool (item 2) amounts to 14 bar. If another setting (recommended range 14...25 bar)
is required, please state in clear text when ordering. Higher values on request.
The stand by pressure at low pressure standby (orifice closed and pilot port XF pressureless) is slightly higher than the 'p-setting.
With the control version FR1 there is no connection from XF to tank.

rotation

1)
15° 0° 15°
right
left
Flow qv
Max. flow deviation

measured at drive speed of n = 1500 rpm
Static characteristic at variable drive speed Size 40 71 125 180 250 355
'qv [L/min] 2 3 5 6 8 10
Flow qv
Drive speed n
825
FR/FR1 flow control

Dynamic characteristics
The curves are measured average values.
Flow jump stand by / qv max through unloading of X-port to tank.
100 400 1
350
Load pessure [bar]

75 300
Displacement Vg [%]
50 200
2
25 100
50
stand by
0 Control time t
Stroking timet tSA (0...Vg max) De-stroking time tSE (Vg max...0) 3
Size tSA [s] stand by...350 bar tSE [s] 350 bar...stand by tSE [s] 50 bar...stand by
40 approx. 0,1 0,02 0,050
71 approx. 0,2 0,03 0,075
125 approx. 0,3 0,04 0,100 4
180 approx. 0,4 0,05 0,120
250 approx. 0,4 0,06 0,150
355 approx. 0,5 0,07 0,180
The stroking time tSA (Vg mino Vg max) can be steplessly adjusted, without influencing the de-stroking time tSE.
Standard setting see table. If needed, these values can be reduced by a factor of 2...3 (please consult us).
5
8
826
Schematics FR/FR1
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

A4VSO A4VSO
with FR1
with FR1
closed
closed B
B XF
XF
4 2
4
B1 B MB 2 B1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1

XF Pilot pressure port flow control 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
(Size 125...355) 2 Flow control valve
827

Unit dimensions FR/FR1 request a certified installation drawing
Size 40 and 71 Size125...355
1
3 XF
XF
1.1 2
1.1 2
2
A2
A8
A2
A8 B
B
Control valve mounting for Control valve mounting for 3
clockwise rotation clockwise rotation
M2
XF
XF
A3
4
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
M14x1.50
A5
A5
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A6
A6
R(L)
A4
R(L) 5
XF at counter
B
Schl.weite: 30 mm
clockwise
B rotation
M1
Control valve mounting for XF at counter Control valve mounting for
counter clockwise rotation clockwise counter clockwise rotation
rotation
6

M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
40 260 140 147 137 47 67 209 128
For detailed unit dimensions and tech-
71 298 157 142 142 42 72 236 144 8
nical data of the variable pumps see the
125/180 354 191 – – 41 71 305 172 technical data sheets A4VSO RE 92050
or A4VSG RE 92100
250/355 424 238 – – 41 71 367 208
1)
see general notes
828
FRG/FRG1 with remote pressure control

The pressure/flow control FRG is a combination of FR (FR1) and DRG.
The pressure control overrides the flow control. The pressure control level can be remotely set with a separate pressure relief
valve (item 4).
Function and technical data of the remotely adjustable pressure control see page 7.
Function and technical data of flow control FR see page 22 and 23.
With the control version FRG1 there is no connection from XF to tank.

Characteristic Direction of flow S to B

rotation
350
1)
15° 0° 15°
right
left
20
Flow qv
829
Schematics FRG/FRG1
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

A4VSO A4VSO
1
with FRG1
B closed
with FRG1 XF
B closed
XF 2
2
2
XD 6
4 5
4 XD 6
5
B1 B MB B1 B MB 3
3
1.1 1.1
4

XD Pilot pressure port remote pressure control 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
XF Pilot pressure port flow control 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050) 5
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125...355) 2 Flow control valve
6 External pressure relief valve (not included in supply)
6
8
830

Unit dimensions FRG/FRG1 request a certified installation drawing
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

3 5 XD XF
5
XD XF
1.1
1.1
A2
2
A2
A8
A8
B B
Control valve mounting for Control valve mounting for
clockwise rotation clockwise rotation
XD M2
XD
XF
XF
A3
A5
A5
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A6
A6
A4
R(L)
XD and XF R(L)
XD and XF
Schl.weite: 30 m Schl.weite: 30 m
at counter at counter
clockwise clockwise
rotation
B M1 B
rotation

counter clockwise rotation counter clockwise rotation

XD Pilot pressure port remote
pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
40 260 140 147 137 47 67 209 128 249 275 For detailed unit dimensions and
71 298 157 142 142 42 72 236 144 276 302 technical data of the variable
pumps see the technical data
125/180 354 191 – – 41 71 305 172 345 371 sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or
250/355 424 238 – – 41 71 367 208 407 433 A4VSG RE 92100
1)
see general notes
831
DFR/DFR1 pressure and flow control

Pressure and flow control DFR is a combination of pressure control DR and flow control FR.
Function and technical data see DR (page 4) and FR (page 22).
With the control version DFR1 there is no connection from XF to tank.
Min. and max. swivel angle limitation mechanically adjustable to 50 % of Vg max . 1
The Vg min-stop is set so that a pressure level of 15...20 bar is reached in a closed pressure port B
A4VSO - open circuit 2

rotation

3
1)
15° 0° 15°
right
left
4
Flow qv
8
832
Schematics DFR/DFR1
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355

A4VSO A4VSO
with DFR1
with DFR1 B closed
B closed
XF
XF
2
2
4 4 5
5
B1 B MB B1 B MB 3
1.1 1.1

XF Pilot pressure port flow control 1 Pump with hydraulic control device
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
(Size 125...355) 2 Flow control valve
833

Unit dimensions DFR/DFR1 request a certified installation drawing
Size 40 and 71 Size 125...355
1
3 5 XF
5 XF
1.1 1.1
2
A2
2
A2
A8
2
A8
B B 3

clockwise rotation Control valve mounting for
clockwise rotation
M2
4
XF
A3
XF
A5
A5
15° 0 15°
15° 0 15°
LR
LR
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A6
A6
5
R(L)
R(L)
A4
XF at counter
Schl.weite: 30 m Schl.weite: 30 m
XF at counter clockwise
clockwise rotation
rotation
B M1 B
counter clockwise rotation counter clockwise rotation 6

M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
40 260 140 147 137 47 67 249 128 275 For detailed unit dimensions and 8
71 296 157 142 142 42 72 276 144 302 technical data of the variable
pumps see the technical data
125/180 354 191 – – 41 71 345 172 371 sheets A4VSO
250/355 424 238 – – 41 71 407 208 433 RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
1)
See general notes
834
General notes
– The control devices DR, DP, FR and DFR are intended to be used together with the pump A4VSO in open circuit applications,
and the control devices DR and DP together with the pump A4VSG in closed circuit applications.
– Project planning, assembly, and commissioning of the pump require the involvement of qualified personnel.
– Tightening torques: The tightening torques specified in this data sheet are maximum values and must not be exceeded (maxi-
mum values for screw thread). Manufacturer´s instruction for the max. permissible tightening torques of the
used fittings must be observed!
For DIN 13 fixing screws we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230
Edition 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing can be extremly hot, avoid being burned! Take suitable safety precauti-
ons, e.g. wear protective clothing.
– The data and information contained herein must be adhered to.
Hydraulics forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their consent
Plant Horb The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
An den Kelterwiesen 14 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
72160 Horb a.N., Germany rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0
Facsimile +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
835

RE 92 064/11.07 1/68
Power control Replaces: 05.98
LR2, LR3, LR2N and LR3N
Data sheet
for variable pump A4VSO

Series 1 and 3
Size 40 to 1000
open circuit operation
Contents Features
Ordering code – Standard program LR2 and LR3 2 – Power control with hyperbolic characteristic
Ordering code – Standard program LR2N and LR3N 3 – The power control varies the pump displacement, dependent
on output pressure in such a manner, that a specified drive
LR2 Power control, with hyperbolic characteristic 4
power at constant speed cannot be exceeded
LR3 with remote control of power characteristic 11
– Power settings from min. to max. with one spring
LR.D with pressure control 15
– Supplementary functions in a modular system, eg.:
LR.G with remote pressure control 17
• hydraulic remote control
LR.F with flow control 21
• pressure control
LR.H with hydraulic stroke limiter 24
• flow control
LR.M with mechanical stroke limiter Vg max 30
• hydraulic stroke limiter
LR.Z Hydraulic two-point control 34
• mechanical stroke limiter
LR.Y Electric two-point control 39
• hydraulic two-point control
LR.S with Load-Sensing valve 42
• electric control of pilot pressure
LR.N Hydraulic stroke control, pilot pressure dependent 45
LR.NT with electric control of pilot pressure 51
Example of control combination LR2GN 58
Example of control combination LR2GNT 63
Installation notes 67 Further information:
General notes 68 Variable pump A4VSO Size 40 to 1000 RE 92 050
836
2/68 Bosch Rexroth AG LR2, LR3, LR2N and LR3N | RE 92 064/11.07
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSO LR2 and LR3

A4VS O LR / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
01 Fluid (Details see RE 92050)
Axial piston unit

Type of operation
03 Pump, open circuit (see RE 92050) O
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Control devices
05 Power control with hyperbolic characteristic, initial position Vgmax LR
Setting of power characteristic
06 mechanically adjustable 2 2
hydraulic remote control 3 3
Pressure control
without pressure control (no code letter)
07
with pressure control D D
with remote pressure control G G
Flow control /stroke limiter
without flow control /stroke limiter
(no code letter)
with flow control F – – – F1)
08 with hydraulic stroke limiter,
H H
inverse proportional
with hydraulic two-point control Z Z
with electr. unloading valve for easy start Y Y
with load sensing a. rem. press. control. – S – – – S2 )
Mechanical stroke limiter
without mechanical stroke limiter
09
(no code letter)
with mechanical stroke limiter M – – – M
1
) for a dynamic control we recommend to use the LR.S option
2
) cannot be combined with pressure control D or G
available in preparation – not available preferred program

837
RE 92 064/11.07 | LR2, LR3, LR2N and LR3N Bosch Rexroth AG 3/68
Ordering code – Standard program A4VSO LR2N and LR3N

A4VS O LR N / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Control devices
1
05 Power control with hyperbolic characteristic, initial position Vgmin, pilot pressure dependent LR
Setting of power characteristic 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
06 mechanically adjustable 2 N 2
hydraulic remote control 3 N 3
Pressure control
without press. control (no code letter) 2
07
with pressure control D N D
with remote pressure control G N G
08 Hydraulic stroke limiter, proportional N
Electric control of pilot pressure
without electr. control of pilot press. 3
09 N
(no code letter)
with electr. control. (DBEP 6) N T T3)
3
) only available for clockwise rotation;
for operation on HF-fluid please observe RE 29164 (Proportional pressure relief valve type DBEP)
Series 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

4
of A4VSO – – – – – – – 10
10
– – 30
12 Seals
13 Shaft end
5
For details see:
14 Mounting flange RE92050 – A4VSO
15 Port for service lines
16 Through drive
available in preparation – not available preferred program 6
8
838
LR2 Power control, with hyperbolic characteristic
Initial position in pressureless condition: Vg max

The power control LR2 changes the pump displacement with varying output pressures in such a manner, that a specified drive
power at constant drive speed cannot be exceeded.
p = Operating pressure
p • Vg = constant
Vg = Displacement
An exact control with a hyperbolic control characteristic enables an optimum utilisation of drive power.
The operating pressure acts together with a spring on the pump control piston towards Vg max. This force actuates via a lever arm
the valve spool in the power control assembly against the adjustment spring. As soon as the pressure force against the control
piston exceeds the set spring force at the valve spool, this spool shifts and fluid enters the large control chamber, forcing the
pump towards Vg min. At the same time the leverage of the lever arm is being reduced and increasing output pressure results in a
proportional decrease of displacement (p • Vg = constant).
The beginning of control is set mechanically.
With one spring and one adjustment screw it is possible to set the beginning of control within the whole control range.
Setting range of control begin: 35...350 bar
The power curve is factory set.
– Drive power P in kW
– Max. flow qv max in L/min (50...100 % Vg max)
The min. and max. swivel angle limitation (up to 50% Vg max) is factory set at a fixed value. When ordering please state in clear text
the desired value.
Characteristic
350
Control begin
Setting range
35
Vg min Vg max
Displacement
Direction of flow S to B
Direction of Swivel range 1) Pressure port
rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
) compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
left
839

Power characteristics in kW
Size 40 Size 71
at 1500 rpm1 at 1500 rpm
350 350
330 1
0 55
300 300 45

22
250 18 37
,5 250
30
15
200 200 2
11 18 2
15 ,5
150 7,5 150 2
11
5,5
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 20 40 60 80 100 107
3
Size 125 Size 180
at 1500 rpm at 1500 rpm
350 350
90 13
300 300 2
75
11
0 4
250 55 90
250
45 75
37
200 200 5
30
22 4 5
150 18 37 5
15 ,5 150 30
22
100 100 5
50 50
0 0
0 50 100 150 187 0 50 100 150 200 250 270
Size 250 Size 355
6
350 350
20 25
0 0
300 16 300
0 20
13 0
250 2 250 16
11
0 13 0
90 11 2 7
200 75 200 90 0
5 75
150 4 5 150 5
37 5 4 5
30 37 5
100 100
50 50
8
0 0
0 100 200 300 375 0 100 200 300 400 500 532
840

Power characteristics in kW
Size 500 Size 500 High-Speed-Version HA4VSO
350 350
25
20 0
300 300

0
16 29
0 25 0
250 13 250 22 0
2
11 18 0
200 0 200 1 0
90
13 60
75 11 2
150 55 150 9 0
37 75 0
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 0 200 400 600 750
Fow qv [L/min] Flow qv [L/min]
Size 750 Size 1000

350 350
35 50
0
300 5 300 40 450
31
5 0
25 35
250 0 250 31 5
20 5
0 25
16 200 0
200 0 20
13 16 0
11 2
150 9 0 150 13 0
75 0 2
90 1
55 1
100 100 75 0
50 50
0 0
0 200 400 600 750 0 200 400 600 800 1000
841
Schematics LR2
Size 40 and 71 Size 125 to 355

A4VSO LR2, Series 1 A4VSO LR2, Series 3
1
Rkv Rkv
2 2
B1 B MB B1 B M B 2
3
1 1 3
Size 500 to 1000 4

A4VSO LR2, Series 3
Mounting option Mounting option

N, Y, H or Z D or G
P
M1
B1 B MB M2
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
7
Subassemblies
Ports 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
Rkv External control fluid return (Size 40 to 355) (see RE 92050)
M1, M2 Gauging ports control chamber press. (Size 125 to 1000) 2 Power control valvel
P Control pressure port (Size 500 to 1000) 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
8
842

Unit dimensions LR2 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40 and 71, Series 1

Presentation right hand direction of rotation (left hand rotation)
hydraulic control device
A3
B
Stroke limiter
Vg max (Vg min)
(Power control valve
for left hand rotation)
Rkv
(A2)
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A2
R(L)
B
Stroke limiter
Vg min (Vg max)
Power control valve for
right hand rotation
Rkv External control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3
40 260 132 148 For detailed dimensions and technical data on the variable pump see the
71 296 132 165 technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
) please observe the general notes for the max. tightening torques on page 68
843

Unit dimensions LR2 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 125 to 355, Series 3

1
Hydraulic control device Sandwich plate
A3
B
3
Stroke limiter
Vg max (Vg min)
M2(M1) for left hand rotation)
Rkv
4
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33

right hand rotation 5
R(L)
B
M1(M2)
Stroke limiter
Vg min (Vg max) 6
Ports max.tightening torque 1)
Rkv external control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
pressure M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250 u. 355) 140 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A3
125 354 195
180 354 195 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump see technical data
250 424 238 sheet A4VSO RE 92050
8
355 424 238
1
844

Unit dimensions LR2 certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

hydraulic control device
A3
B
Stroke limiter
Vg max (Vg min) M2(M1)
P
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
R(L)

right hand rotation
Stroke limiter M1(M2)

Vg min (Vg max)

M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
P Control pressure port DIN 3852 M22x1,5; 14 deep; plugged 210 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A3
500 510 285
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump see technical data
750 582 322
sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 350
1
845
LR3 with remote control of power characteristic

The power control LR3 can be remotely adjusted by applying an external pilot pressure (pp) at port XLR to the spring chamber of
the power control valve.
1
The beginning of control can be changed in proportion to the applied pilot pressure.
The pilot pressure port XLR may not be plugged.
Maximum external pilot pressure 100 bar
Total range for beginning of control setting: 50... 350 bar
The basic power control curve is factory set, with a pilot pressure signal pp in XLR = 0 bar. 2

– Drive power P in kW with pilot pressure pp in XLR = 0 bar
Max. flow qv max in L/min (50...100 % Vg max)
Otherwise the LR3 and the LR2 controls feature the same properties.
The min. and max. swivel angle limitations (up to 50% Vg max) are factory set. When ordering please state the required values in 3
clear text.
Characteristic
4
Operating press. p [bar]
350
Pilot press. in XLR ppilot
Control begin
Setting range
50 5
Vg min Vg max
Power P
Displacement
Power increase through pilot pressure in port XLR
Direction of flow S to B Power increase / pilot pressure (kW/bar)
Direction of Swivel range 1) Pressure port Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 6
rotation n*=1000rpm 0,53 0,78 1,15 1,66 1,83 2,46 5,30 7,5 9,2
right hand left B n*=1200rpm 0,64 0,94 1,38 1,99 2,19 2,95 6,40 9,0 11,0
left hand right B n*=1500rpm 0,80 1,18 1,72 2,47 2,74 3,69 8,00 11,25 –
1
) Compare swivel angle indicator n*=1800rpm 0,96 1,41 2,07 2,98 3,29 4,42 9,60 – –
15° 0° 15°
right
left * Please observe speed limits and perm. flows acc. to RE 92050 7
8
846
Schematics LR3

A4VSO LR3, Series 1 A4VSO LR3, Series 3
Rkv Rkv
XLR XLR
2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB
3
1 1
Size 500 to 1000

A4VSO LR3, Series 3
XLR
2
P
B1 B MB M1
M2
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Ports Subassemblies
XLR Pilot pressure port for remote power control 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
Rkv External control fluid return (Size 40 to 355) (see RE 92050)
P Control pressure port (Size 500 to 1000) 2 Power control valve
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
(Size 125 to 1000)
847

Size 40 and 71, Series 1 Size 125 to 355, Series 3

Right hand direction of rotation (left hand) Right hand direction of rotation (left hand)
1
XLR 3 XLR
1 2
1 2
A3
A3
2
A4
A4
B B
Stroke limiter Vg max (Vg min) Stroke limiter Vg max (Vg min)
(Power control valve (Power control valve
(XLR) for left hand rotation) M2(M1) for left hand rotation) 3
(XLR)
Rkv
Rkv
(A2)
(A2)
4
L (R)
L (R)
15 0 15
15 0 15
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A2
A2
R(L) R(L)
5
XLR
XLR M1(M2)
A5 A5
to pump mounting face to pump mounting face
Power control valve for Power control valve for
Stroke limiter Vg min (Vg max) right hand rotation Stroke limiter Vg min (Vg max) right hand rotation
6
Subassemblies see page12

XLR Pilot pressure port for DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
remote power control 7
Rkv External control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 40 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
40 260 133 148 106 219 8
71 296 133 165 117 246 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump
125/180 354 133 195 147 315 see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
250/355 424 133 238 183 377
1
848


Right hand direction of rotation (left hand)
2
1 XLR
A3
A4
B
Stroke limiter Vg max (Vg min)
M2(M1)
(XLR)
(A2)
L (R)
A1
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
A2
R(L)
XLR
Subassemblies
M1(M2) 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
A5 to pump mounting face (see RE 92050)
2 Power control valve
Stroke limiter Vg min (Vg max) Power control valve for
right hand rotation 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)

XLR Pilot pressure port for DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
remote power control
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
pressure
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
500 510 125 285 207 468
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump
750 582 125 322 237 502
see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 125 350 260 566
1
849
LR.D with pressure control

The pressure control overrides the power control, i.e. below the set pressure control level the unit follows the power control
function.
1
As soon as the pump output pressure reaches the pressure control level, the pump turns into the pressure control mode and
delivers only the amount of fluid as required to maintain this pressure.
Setting range of the pressure control 20...350 bar
This pressure is set as standard to 350 bar.
If another setting is required please state in clear text when ordering.
2
Characteristic
350
pressure control
3
Setting range
20
Vg min Vg max 4
Displacement
rotation 5
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
) Compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right
left
8
850
Schematics LR.D

Example: A4VSO LR2D Example: A4VSO LR2D
2 2
B1 B MB
B1 B MB
4 3 4
1.1 1
Size 500 to 1000

Example: A4VSO LR2D
X X
P
B1 B MB M1
M2
1
Unit dimensions LR.D see page 19
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Subassemblies
1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
(see RE 92050)
Ports
(Size 125 to 1000) 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
P Control pressure port (Size 500 to 1000) 4 Pressure control valve
851
LR.G with remote pressure control

In order to enable a remote setting of the pressure control an external relief valve (item 5) can be piped to port XD. This relief valve
does not belong to the standard supply of the LR2G- or LR3G-control, if desired however it can be mounted depending on the
1
pump version.
As soon as the pressure control level (relief valve setting plus pressure differential over the pressure control valve spool) is rea-
ched the pump turns into the pressure control mode.
The pressure differential over the pressure control valve spool (item 4) is set as standard to 20 bar, this results in a pilot oil flow of
approx. 1.5 L/min. out of port XD
If another setting is desired (recommended range 20...50 bar), please state the desired value in clear text.
As separate pressure relief valve we recommend: 2
– DBD 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402.
– DBETR–SO 437 (electric) to RE 29166
Notes for the remote pressure control settings :

3
The overall level of the pressure control setting is a result of the separate relief valve setting plus the differential pressure 'p at
the pressure control valve spool-
Example: external pressure relief valve 330 bar
Differential pressure at pressure control valve 20 bar
results in pressure control of 330 + 20 = 350 bar
Please observe the following in control combinations with hydraulic stroke limiting (LR.GH or LR.GN): 4
With a pressure control setting below the pressure level of the external control pressure supply pcontr. all pumps up to size 355
will remain against the Vg min-mechanical stroke limiter and the sizes 500 to 1000 may experience oscillations
Characteristic
5
350
external pressure
Setting range
relief valve
6
20
Δp Control valve
Vg min Vg max
Displacement
Direction of flow S to B 7
rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1)
8
15° 0° 15°
right
left
852
Schematics LR.G

Example: A4VSO LR2G Example: A4VSO LR2G
XD
XD
2 2
5 5
B1 B MB
B1 B MB
4 3 4
1 1
Size 500 to 1000

Example: A4VSO LR2G
XD
5
4
X XX
P
B1 B MB M1
M2
1
Subassemblies
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
(see RE 92050)
Ports 2 Power control valve
XD Pilot pressure port remote pressure control 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 4 Pressure control valve
(Size 125 to 1000) 5 Pressure relief valve
P Control pressure port (Size 500 to 1000) (not in scope of supply)
853

Unit dimensions LR.D and LR.G certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Right hand rotation (left hand) Right hand rotation (left hand)
1
A6 to pump mounting face XD
XD 3 2 4
2 4
1
1 2
A3
A3
A5
A5
3
B B
(Valve mounting for M2(M1) (Valve mounting for
left hand rotation) (XD at left hand left hand rotation)
rotation)
(XD at left hand
rotation)
4
(A2)
(A2)
(A8)
(A8)
L (R)
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A7
A7
A2
5
XD
A2
R(L) R(L)
XD
B
Valve mounting for
right hand rotation
Valve mounting for
right hand rotation M1(M2) 6
Subassemblies see page 18

XD Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged at LR.D 80 Nm
remote pressure control 7
M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250 a 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 148 295 130 269 37 7
71 296 132 159 322 141 296 37 7 For detailed unit dimensions and technical 8
data on the variable pump see technical data
125/180 354 132 195 391 171 365 37 7 sheet A4VSO RE 92050
250/355 424 132 238 453 207 427 37 7
1
854

Unit dimensions LR.D and LR.G certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 500 to 1000

Right hand rotation (left hand rotation)
XD
4
1
2
A3
A5
B
A6 to pump mounting face Pressure control
valve for right hand
rotation
M2(M1)
XD
4
A8
L (R)
A1
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
(A8)
Subassemblies
R(L)
(see RE 92050)
(XD) 2 Power control valve
(Pressure control
M1(M2) valve for left hand 5 Pressure relief valve
(A7) to pump mounting face rotation) (not in scope of supply)

XD Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
500 510 320 311 430 441 125
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable
750 582 350 342 462 473 125
pump see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 373 364 528 539 125
1
855
LR.F with flow control

In addition to the power control function it is also possible to control the pump output flow by means of a differential pressure
i.e. over an orifice or valve opening between pump and actuator. The pump delivers only the amount of fluid as required by the
1
actuator.
The pump flow depends on the cross section of the orifice (item. 7), mounted between pump and actuator. Below the power
control and within the pump‘s control range the output flow is virtually independent of the actual load pressure.
The size of the orifice cross section determines the pump flow.
The flow controller measures the pressure before and after the orifice and keeps the pressure drop (differential pressure Δp)
constant and can thus control the flow. 2
With an increasing differential pressure Δp the pump swivels back (towards Vg min), and vice versa, if the Δp drops the pump incre-
ases the swivel angle (towards Vg max), till the valve spool is in balance again.
Δporifice = ppump – pactuator
The standard Δp setting at the flow control valve (item 6) amounts to 14 bar. If another setting is desired (recommended ran-
ge14...25 bar), please state in clear text. Higher values on request.
Note: 3
For dynamic control requirements we recommend to use the LR.S with Load-Sensing and remote pressure control (see page42).
Characteristic
4
Flow qV
6
rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
) compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right 7
left
8
856
Schematics LR.F

Example: A4VSO LR2F Example A4VSO LR2F
XF XF
6 6
2 2
B B
7 7
B1 MB B1 MB
3
1 1
Ports Subassemblies
XF Pilot pressure port flow control 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
(see RE 92050)
(Size 125 to 355) 2 Power control valvel
3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
6 Flow control valve
7 External orifice (not in scope of supply)
857

Unit dimensions LR.F certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Right hand rotation (left hand) Right hand rotation (lefthand)
1
XF 3 6 XF
6
2 1 2 2
1
A3
A3
A5
A5
3
B B
(Valve mounting for M2(M1)
left hand rotation) (Valve mounting for
left hand rotation)
(XF at left hand
rotation) (XF at left hand
rotation)
4
(A2)
(A8)
(A8)
L (R)
L (R)
15 0 15
15 0 15
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A7
A7
A2
XF 5
R(L)
A2
R(L) XF
B
Valve mounting for

Valve mounting for M1(M2) right hand rotation
right hand rotation 6

XF Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5 80 Nm
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 182 156 243 7 37
71 296 132 193 167 270 7 37 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on 8
the variable pump see technical data sheet A4VSO
125/180 354 132 223 197 339 7 37 RE 92050
250/355 424 132 259 233 401 7 37
1
858
LR.H with hydraulic stroke limiter

This control needs an external control pressure supply to port P.
The displacement is reduced in proportion to a pilot pressure in port PSt.
The hyperbolic power control is overriding the pilot pressure signal and keeps the max. drive power constant.
p • Vg = constant
Vg = Displacement
Limitation of displacement is possible via:
– Direct swivel angle limitation at the control piston (item 1) - mechanical
– Additional stroke limitation at the pilot valve (item 6.1) - hydraulic
Setting range
mechanical swivel angle limitation at the control piston:
Vg min 0...50 % of Vg max Vg max 100...50 % of Vg max
hydraulic stroke limitation at the pilot valve:

The min. and max. mechanical swivel angle limitations are factory set to a fixed value. Please state the desired value in clear text
when ordering.
The standard setting of the hydraulic stroke limitation is done in such a manner, that the above mentioned mechanical Vg min- and
Vg max settings can be achieved. Different settings please state in clear text.
Technical data
Min. required pilot pressure in P pcontr min bar 35

Max. permissible control pressure in P pcontr max bar 100
Control fluid consumption in P (at p = 50 bar) L/min max. 4
Pilot pressure range in PSt ppilot bar 10...45
Max. pressure in PSt ppilot max bar 100
Control begin of power curve, however above control press. pcontr in P p bar 50...350
Hysteresis d± 2% von Vg max
Please observe the following in control combinations with remote pressure control (LR2GH and LR3GH) :
With a pressure control setting below the pressure level of the external control pressure supply pcontr all pumps up to size 355 will
remain against the mechanical stroke limiter Vg min and the sizes 500 to 1000 may experience oscillations.
Table of values LR.H

Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control volume V1max cm3 11,4 21,5 37,5 37,5 73,2 73,2 125,0 210,0 263,3
Differential volume V1–V2 cm3 8,5 16,1 28,1 28,1 54,9 54,9 94,1 158,7 197,5
859
LR.H with hydraulic stroke limiter
Characteristic

45
10
2
Vg min Vg max Vg / Vg max

Displacement Displacement
3
rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
4
8
860
Schematics LR.H

Example: A4VSO LR2H Example A4VSO LR2H
MSt MSt
6.2
P
6.2 6.1 7.1
PSt
P
PSt
7.1 2
6.1
B1 B MB 2
B1 B M B
7.2 3
7.2
1 1
Size 500 to 1000

Example: A4VSO LR2H
MSt
6.2
6.1
PSt
2 7.1
P
B1 B MB 7.2 M1
M2
Vgmin Vgmax Subassemblies

1 (see RE 92050)
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
6.1 Pilot valve-stroke limiter
Ports
6.2 Pressure control valve for stroke limiter
7.1 Check valve
PSt Pilot pressure port (for size 40 and 71 external,
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure (plugged) integrated in sizes 125 to 1000 )
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure 7.2 Integrated check valve
(Size 125 to 1000)
861

Unit dimensions LR.H certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71
Right hand rotation (left hand)
1
A9 P
6.1 7.1 6.2
PSt
2
1
A3
A7
2
A8
3
B
(P at left hand rotation)
MSt 4
(A2)
Valve mounting for left hand rotation item 2, 6.2 and 7.1
PSt
each rotated 180°
(A6)
A10
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Subassemblies
5
A6

(see RE 92050)
A2
R(L)
P 6.2 Pressure control valve for stroke limiter
A4 to pump mounting face A5 7.1 Check valve
6
Ports max. tightening torque1)

PSt Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W plugged 50 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 254 144 34 83 198 163 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical
71 296 132 268 166 39 83 215 178 15 35 sheet A4VSO RE 92050
8
1
862

Unit dimensions LR.H certified installation drawing Dimensions in mm.
Size 125 to 355

A9
6.1 6.2
PSt
3
P
1 7.1
A3
2
A8
A7
MSt M2(M1)
P
PSt Valve mounting for left hand rotation item 2, 6.2 and 7.1
each rotated 180°
A6
A10
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Subassemblies
(A6)

R(L) (see RE 92050)
B 3 Sandwich plate
(P at left hand
M1(M2) rotation) 6.2 Pressure control valve for stroke limiter
A4 to pump mounting face A5 7.1 Integrated check valve in sandwich plate

MSt Gauging port pilot control press. DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm
Unit dimensions
125/180 354 304 203 112 88 192 214 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the
variable pump see technical data sheet
250/355 424 352 248 129 88 228 261 15 35 A4VSO RE 92050
1
863

Unit dimensions LR.H certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 500 to 1000

A9 1
6.1 7.2
PSt
6.2
1 P
2
A3
2
A8
A7
B 3
(Valve mounting item 2 and 6.2 for left hand rotation)
M2(M1)
PSt
P 4
A10
(A6) A6
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Subassemblies
R(L)
1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device 5
(see RE 92050)
(P at left hand
rotation) 2 Power control valve
M1(M2) MSt 6.2 Pressure control valve for stroke limiter
A4 to pump mounting face A5 7.2 Integrated check valve in item 2
Valve mounting item 2 and 6.2 for right hand rotation 6

MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
500 510 397 279 185 47 202 306 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical
750 582 435 301 196 47 232 345 15 35 data on the variable pump see technical
8
1000 622 463 360 202 47 255 372 15 35 data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
864
LR.M with mechanical stroke limiter Vg max

In addition to the power control function it is also possible to limit the max. displacement Vg max steplessly through adjustment of a
screw spindle. The setting must be done in a pressureless condition.
Adjustment data of stroke limiter Vg max

Setting range: 100% Vg max ...0% Vg max
(can go up to 104% of nominal displacement value)
Standard setting: Nominal-Vg max
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355

Vg-change/revolution cm3 4,3 6,3 9,1 13,1 14,4 20,6
Total adjustment stroke s mm 14,2 17,1 20,7 20,7 25,9 25,9
Right hand rotation (with view on screw spindle)–increase of displacement
Left hand rotation (with view on screw spindle)–decrease of displacement
Characteristic
Vg min Vg max
Displacement

of rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
865
Schematics LR.M

Example: A4VSO LR2M Example: A4VSO LR2M
1
RKV RKV
2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB 2
3
8 8
1 1 3
Ports Subassemblies 4
RkV External control fluid return 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (see RE 92050)
(Size 125 to 355) 2 Power control valve
8 mechanical stroke limiter Vg max
5
8
866

Unit dimensions LR.M certified installation drawing Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71
Example: left hand rotation
A3
B
Mechanical stroke limiter Vg max
Swivel angle limitation Vg min Key AS 5x5x12 DIN 6885
5h9
A1
18
A2
0 15
R
R(L)
A5
18
RkV 12
3
M6; 12 deep ø16f7
A4 8
to pump mounting face
For right hand rotation the Vg max - mechanical stroke limiter and Vg min - swivel angle limitation exchanged positions,
see presentation size125 to 355 page 33.

RkV External control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
40 130 132 148 144 172
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump see
71 148 132 159 166 188 technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
867

Unit dimensions LR.M certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 125 to 355

Example: right hand rotation
1
3 2
A3
Mechanical stroke limiter Vg max 2
Key AS 5x5x12 DIN 6885
M6; 12 deep ø16f7
B
12
3
8
18
3
M2 RkV
A5
5h9
4
15 0
Einschraubloch M33
L
18
A2
A1
R(L)
5
B
M1
A4 Swivel angle limitation Vg min
For left hand rotation the Vg max - mechanical stroke limiter and Vg min - swivel angle limitation exchanged positions, 6
see presentation size 40 and 71 page 32.

RkV External control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
125/180 177 132 195 203 213 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump
see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050 8
250/355 212 132 238 248 243
1
868
LR.Z Hydraulic two-point control

can be used as easy start option, external pilot pressure required
Initial position in pressureless condition and with RkV port unloaded: Vgmax
The LR2(3)Z is a simple 2-point displacement adjustment with overriding power control.
Pressurizing port Rkv brings the control device towards the adjustable Vgmin-stop. Unloading the port Rkv to tank enables the pump
to perform the LR2(3)-control functions.
For the power and pressure pressure control functions port Rkv must be unloaded to tank (by customer).
This feature enables a pump to be started against a reduced starting torque.
Recommended pilot pressure at port Rkv:
Output press. pHD

pp = however at least 20 bar.
2
The Vg min-stop will be factory set (between 0...50% Vg max).

Please state desired value in clear text when ordering.
For prolonged periods in standby we recommend to use LR.G with external unloading of pilot pressure.

of rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
869
Schematics LR.Z

Example: A4VSO LR2Z Example: A4VSO LR2Z
as easy start option with external pilot pressure supply as easy start option with external pilot pressure supply 1
6 RkV
for LR.DZ
and LR.GZ not in scope of not in scope of
supply supply
RkV RkV
2 2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB
3
1 1
Size 125 to 355 Size 500 to 1000 4

Example: A4VSO LR2DZ Example: A4VSO LR2Z
with adapter plate RkV with pressure control as easy start option with external pilot pressure supply
RkV not in scope

6 of supply
5
RkV
2
2
B 1 B MB
P
3 B1 B MB M1
M2 6
1 1
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
7
Ports Subassemblies
RkV External control fluid return 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
P Control pressure port (Size 500 to 1000) 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355) 8
6 Adapter plate RkV for LR.DZ and LR.GZ
(Size 40 to 355)
870

Unit dimension LR.Z certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71
LR.Z LR.DZ and LR.GZ

RkV RkV
6
1 2
A10
A3
A9
A6
B
(Power control valve mounting for

A5
left hand rotation)
RkV RkV
A8
A4
A7
L (R)
A1
15 0 15
(A7)
(A4)
A2
R(L)
(RkV on left hand
rotation)
Power control valve mounting for

right hand rotation

RkV External control fluid return DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 149 80 209 114 63 219 152 168 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on
the variable pump see technical data sheet A4VSO
71 296 132 159 80 236 125 63 246 163 184 RE 92050
1
871

Unit dimension LR.Z certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm..
Size 125 to 355

1
LR.Z LR.DZ and LR.GZ
3 RkV 6 RkV
1 2
2
A10
A9
A3
A6
B 3
A5
M2(M1)
RkV RkV
A8 4
A7
A4
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
(A7)
(A4)
R(L)
(RkV on
B left hand rotation)
M1(M2)
6

M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
125/180 354 195 80 305 155 63 315 193 209 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data
on the variable pump see technical data sheet
250/355 424 238 80 367 191 63 377 229 250 A4VSO RE 92050 8
1
872

Unit dimensions LR.Z certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 500 to 1000

RkV
1
2
A3
A6
B
M2(M1) (Power control valve mounting for
left hand rotation)
(RkV on left hand

rotation)
(A4)
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A4
R(L)
6
RkV
Power control valve mounting for

M1(M2) right hand rotation
A5

M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber press.DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6
500 510 285 94 433 277
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump
750 582 322 94 465 307
see technical dat sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 350 94 532 330
1
873
LR.Y Electric two-point control

with internal supply of pilot pressure
Initial position in pressureless condition and solenoid energized: Vgmax
The LR2(3)Y is an electric two-position displacement adjustment with overriding power control and internal pilot pressure supply,
i.e. the necessary pilot pressure is taken out of the pump pressure side.
1
Valve function:
a) Solenoid de-energized = easy start, pump swivels back towards Vgmin -stop as soon as an operating pressure of
approx. 4...10 bar is reached
b) Solenoid energized = pump operates in power control mode
2

of rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
3
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
8
874
Schematics LR.Y

Example: A4VSO LR2Y Example: A4VSO LR2Y
shown in energized 6 shown in energized

position position 6
7 7
2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB
1 1
Ports
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (size 125 to 355)
Subassemblies
1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device (see RE 92050)
3 Sandwich plate (size 125 to 355)
6 3/2-directional poppet valve see RE 22058 (for size 40 to 355)
Type Solenoid
M-3SEW6U3X/420MG24N9K4 Solenoid with junction box (Hirschmann) to DIN EN 175 301-803
cable joint M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
protection IP65
7 sandwich plate
875

Unit dimensions LR.Y certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Example: Right hand rotation Example: Right hand rotation
1
6 6
3
7 7
1 2 2
A3
A3
2
1
3
B
B
M2 RkV
4
A1
A1
15 0
Einschraubloch M33
15 0
L
L
A2
R(L) 5
A2
R(L)
B
M1
For left hand rotation mounting positions of items 2, 6 and For left hand rotation mounting positions of items 2, 6 and
7 are rotated 180° 7 are rotated 180° 6

Ports max. tightening torque1)
M18x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3
40 260 132 292
71 296 132 308 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable pump see technical data
125/180 354 132 338 sheet A4VSO RE 92050
8
250/355 424 132 374
1
876
LR.S with Load-Sensing valve

and remote pressure control
Initial position in pressureless condition: Vgmax
The LRS- control works as a load pressure independent flow controller and matches the pump output flow with the flow require-
ment from the actuator.
The pump output pressure at port B will always be higher by the set differential pressure Δp than the load pressure at the actuator.
The pump flow depends on the opening cross section of an orifice item 4.1 (throttle valve, proportional valve or valve block), and
below the power control curve the pump flow is not influenced by the actual load pressure.
The Load-Sensing valve compares the operating pressure upstream of the orifice item 4.1 (throttle valve, proportional valve or val-
ve block) with the operating pressure downstream of this orifice and keeps the pressure drop (differential pressure Δp) constant
at the set value, i.e. the pump flow remains constant.
At a change of the differential pressure Δp over orifice (item 4.1), caused by a change in orifice or valve opening cross section, the
pump flow adapts to this new condition, i.e. increase of differential pressure brings the pump to a smaller displacement.
Optional pressure control (item 5 and 5.1)
As soon as the load pressure reaches the level as set at pressure relief valve (item5), the system will go to the pressure control
mode, regardless of the actual differential pressure at orifice (item 4.1). This requires an additional orifice (item 5.1).
The standard setting of the differential pressure at the Load Sensing valve (item 4) amounts to Δp = 14 bar.
Actuation of relief valve (item 5) causes a pilot fluid consumption of approx. 1,3 L/min with an orifice dia. of 0,8 mm (item 5.1) and
a Δp =14 bar.
The max. line length to the separate pressure relief valve (item 5) should not exceed 2 m.
Notes to the setting of the remote pressure control:

The setting of the separate pressure relief valve (item 5) plus the pressure differential at the Load-Sensing valve determines the
overall pressure control level.
Example: external pressure relief valve 336 bar
Differential pressure at Load-Sensing 14 bar
results in pressure control of 336 + 14 = 350 bar
Characteristic
Vg min Vg max
Displacement

of rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
877
Schematics LR.S

Example: A4VSO LR2S Example: A4VSO LR2S
1
5.1 5
5.1 5
X
X
4.1
4.1 2 2
2
B1 B MB
B1 B MB
4 3 4
3
1 1
Ports Subassemblies 4
X Pilot pressure control 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device
4 Load-Sensing valve
5
4.1 Orifice for load sensing
5 Pressure relief valve optional
Recommended:
DBD 6 (hydraulic) to RE 25402
or DBETR-SO 437 (electric) to RE 29166 6
5.1 Orifice for remote pressure control optional

Recommended: 0,8 - 1mm
depending on the load sensing control the pressure
increase can amount to 14 bar
7
8
878

Unit dimensions LR.S certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Right hand rotation (left hand) Right hand rotation (left hand)

A6 to pump mounting face X
X 3 2 4
2 4
1
1
A3
A3
A5
A5
B B
(Valve mounting for left
hand rotation)
M2(M1)
(X on left hand
rotation)
(A2)
(A2)
(A8)
(A8)
L (R)
L (R)
15 0 15
15 0 15
A1
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A7
A7
A2
X
A2
R(L) R(L)
X
B
Valve mounting for right M1(M2)

hand rotation

X Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
M18x1,5; 12 deep plugged (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 148 295 130 269 37 7
71 296 132 159 322 141 296 37 7 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the
125/180 354 132 195 391 171 365 37 7 variable pump see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
250/355 424 132 238 453 207 427 37 7
1
879
LR.N Hydraulic stroke control, pilot pressure dependent
Initial position in pressureless condition: Vg min
The hydraulic stroke control needs an external control pressure supply to port P
1
The displacement is increased proportional to an external pilot pressure signal in port PSt.
The hyperbolic power control is overriding the pilot pressure signal and will keep the pre-determined drive power constant.
p • Vg = constant
Vg = Displacement
Limitation of displacement is possible via:
– Direct swivel angle limitation at the control piston (item 1) - mechanical 2
– Additional stroke limitation at the pilot valve (item 6.1) - hydraulic
Setting range
mechanical swivel angle limitation at the control piston:
hydraulic stroke limitation at the pilot valve:

3
The min. and max. mechanical swivel angle limitations are factory set to a fixed value. Please state the desired value in clear text
when ordering.
The standard setting of the hydraulic stroke limitation is done in such a manner, that the above mentioned mechanical Vg min- and
Vg max settings can be achieved. Different settings please state in clear text.
4
Technical data
Min. required control pressure in P pcontr min bar 35

Min. required control pressure in P with boosted inlet S of max. 20 bar pcontr min bar 50
Max. permissible control pressure in P pcontr max bar 100
5
Control fluid consumption in P (at p = 50 bar) L/min max. 4
Pilot pressure range ppilot bar 10...45
Beginning of power control curve, however must be above control press. pcontr p bar 50...350
Hysteresis d± 2% von Vgmax
6
Please observe the following in control combinations with remote pressure control (LR2GN and LR3GN):
With a pressure control setting below the pressure level of the external control pressure supply pcontr in P all pumps up to size 355
will remain against the mechanical stroke limiter Vg min and the sizes 500 to 1000 may experience oscillations.
Table of values LR.N

Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 7
Differential volume V1–V2 cm3 8,5 16,1 24,8 24,8 48,3 48,3 84,9 137,4 175,3
Control fluid required for de-stroking at
Control pressure pcontr = 50 bar; 8
Operating pressur p < 50 bar; L/min 5,16* 6,44* 7,44* 7,44* 9,66* 9,66* 10,13* 11,00* 10,50*
Beginnig of power control p > 50 bar
at de-stroking time s 0,10 0,15 0,20 0,20 0,30 0,30 0,50 0,75 1,00
* Note that the control pressure supply needs an additional 4 L/min flow to compensate for the flow losses in the pilot circuit
880
LR.N hydraulic stroke control, pilot pressure dependent
Characteristics

45
10
Vg min Vg max Vg /Vg max

Displacement Displacement

of rotation
right hand left B
left hand right B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
881
Schematics LR.N

Example: A4VSO LR2N Example: A4VSO LR2N
1
shown in actuated position, shown in actuated position, MSt
i.e. P is pressurized MSt i.e. P is pressurized
P 6.2
7.1
6.1 6.2 6.1 P
7.1 PSt PSt 2

2 2
B1 B MB B1 B MB
3
7.2
7.2
3
1 1
Size 500 to 1000 4

Example: A4VSO LR2N
Displacement
shown in actuated
position, i.e. P is pres- MSt
surized
6.2
6.1 2
7.1
PSt
P
B1 B MB 7.2 M1
M2 6
1 Subassemblies
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) A4VSO (see RE 92050) 7
Ports 3 Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
P Control pressure port 6.1 Pilot valve
PSt Pilot pressure port 6.2 Control valve
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure (closed) 7.1 Check valve (integrated in sizes 125 to 1000)
8
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber press. (Size 125 to 1000) 7.2 Integrated check valve
882

Unit dimensions LR.N certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71
A9 P
6.1 7.1 6.2
PSt
1
A3
A7
2
A8
B
(P on left hand rotation)
MSt
(A2)
Valve mounting position for left hand rotation item 2, 6.2 and
PSt 7.1 rotated by 180°
(A6)
A10
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Subassemblies
A6
(see RE 92050)
A2
R(L) 2 Power control valve

6.1 Pilot valve
P 6.2 Control valve
A4 to pump mounting face A5 7.1 check valve

MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W; closed 50 Nm
Unit dimensions
71 296 132 264 166 39 83 215 180 15 35 sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
883

Size 125 to 355

A9 1
6.1 6.2
PSt
3
P
1 7.1 2
A3
2
A8
A7
3
B
MSt M2(M1)
P
PSt
4
Valve mounting position for left hand rotation item 2, 6.2 and
A6
7.1 rotated by 180°

A10
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
(A6)
Subassemblies
R(L) 1 A4VSO with hydraulic control device 5
(see RE 92050)
B 2 Power control valve
6.1 Pilot valve
(P on left
M1(M2) hand rotation) 6.2 Pilot control valve
A4 to pump mounting face A5 7.1 Integrated check valve in sandwich plate
6

MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W closed 50 Nm
7
M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size 125 a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
125/180 354 298 203 112 88 192 214 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data
on the variable pump see technical data sheet
250/355 424 346 248 129 88 228 261 15 35 8
A4VSO RE 92050
1
884

Size 500 to 1000

A9
6.1 7.2
PSt
6.2
1 P
A3
2
A8
A7
B
(Valve mounting of item 2 and 6.2 for left hand rotation)
M2(M1)
P
PSt
(A6) A6
A10
L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Subassemblies
R(L) (see RE 92050)
(P on left
hand rota- 6.1 Pilot valve
tion) 6.2 Pilot control valve
M1(M2) MSt 7.2 Integrated check valve in item 2
A4 to pump mounting face A5
Valve mounting of item 2 and 6.2 for right hand rotation

Unit dimensions
500 510 392 279 185 47 202 306 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data
750 582 430 301 195 47 232 345 15 35 on the variable pump see technical data sheet
1000 622 456 360 203 47 255 372 15 35 A4VSO RE 92050
1
885
LR.NT with hydr. stroke control and electric control of pilot pressure
Only available in right hand rotation.

This control needs an external control pressure supply to port P 1
The proportional relief valve DBEP6 (to RE 29164) supplies a pilot pressure signal to the pilot pressure chamber at PSt proportio-
nal to the valve solenoid current.
The solenoid current controls and limits the pilot pressure.
Control through an electric command value. Current control through pulse width modulation.
Analogue or digital amplifiers can be used to drive the solenoids eg. proportional amplifier VT 3000 with 170 Hz (see RE 29935). 2
Please order separately.
For the selection of electronics and operating fluids, description of functions and emergency overrides and
further technical data please observe RE 29164.
Technical data – electric

3
Operating voltage 24 V
Nominal solenoid current 700 mA
Control current
Beginning of control at Vg0 and 10 bar pilot pressure 300 mA
End of control at Vgmax and 45 bar pilot pressure 700 mA
4
Nominal resistance at 20°C (R20) 19,5 :
Max. duty cycle 100 % (S1)
Solenoid plug Solenoid with cable box (Hirschmann)
DIN EN 175 301-803
with cable junction M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
Protection to DIN/EN 60529 IP 65
5
Emergency override yes, siehe RE 29164
Coil operating temperature to 150 °C
Technical data – hydraulic

Control pressure (in P) pmin bar 50 6
pmax bar 100
Hysteresis d ± 4 % of Vgmax
Repeatability d 2% von Vgmax
When calculating the required flow in port P it is necessary to consider the pilot flow losses in the proportional valve
(eg. 4 L/min. at p = 50 bar).
7
8
886
LR.NT hydr. stroke control and electric control of pilot pressure
Characteristic
45 700
Amperage I [mA]
40
600
30
500
20 400
10 300
0 25 50 75 100
Vg
Displacement [%]
Vgmax
only available in right hand rotation
of rotation
right hand left B
1
15° 0° 15°
right
left
887
Schematics LR.NT

Example: A4VSO LR2NT Example: A4VSO LR2NT
1
PSt
PSt
MSt
MSt 6.2 9
6.2
9
6.1 6.1
P P
2
7.1 7.1
2
2
B1 B MB B1 B M B
3
3
7.2 7.2
1 1
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 4
Ports
PSt Gauging port pilot pressure
5
Mst Gauging port pilot control pressure
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber pressure (Size 125 to 355)
Subassemblies
2 Power control valve 6
3 Sandwich plate (only on size 125 to 355)
6.1 Pilot valve
6.2 Pilot control valve (shown in actuated position, i.e. P is pressurized)
7.1 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve with check valve
7.2 Check valve, integrated in item 1 7
9 Proportional-pressure relief valve
DBEP6 B06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 Solenoid with cable box (Hirschmann)
with meter-in orifice dia. 1,0 mm to DIN EN 175 301-803 protection class IP 65
cable junction box M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
Size 500 to 1000 see page 54 8

888
Schematics LR.NT
Size 500 to 1000

Example: A4VSO LR2NT
9.1
9.2
PSt
MSt
6.2
6.1
2
7.1
P
B1 B MB 7.2 M1
M2
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Ports
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure
Subassemblies
6.1 Pilot valve
6.2 Pilot control valve (shown in actuated position i.e. P is pressurized)
7.1, 7.2 Check valve integrated in power control valve (item 2)
9.1 Proportional pressure relief valve
DBEP6 A06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 Solenoid with cable box (Hirschmann)
with meter-in orifice dia. 1,0 mm to DIN EN 175 301-803 protection class IP 65
cable junction box M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
9.2 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve
Size 40 to 355 see page 53

889

Unit dimensions LR.NT certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71
Right hand rotation
1
6.2 P
9
6.1
2
A3
1 7.1
A7
2 A8
B
A4 to pump mounting faceMSt
4
PSt P
A6
A10
A1
15 0
5
L
A2
R(L)
Subassemblies see page 53 6

PSt Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3853 S8 Form W; closed 50 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 248 144 297 173 256 151 219 88 For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on
the variable pump see technical data sheet
71 296 132 264 166 324 173 267 162 246 88 A4VSO RE 92050
8
1
890

Size 125 to 355

Right hand rotation

3 6.2 P
6.1 9
1 7.1
A3
A7
2
A8
B
MSt M2 P
PSt
A10
A1
15 0
Einschraubloch M33
L
R(L)
M1
A4 to pump mounting face Subassemblies see page 53

M1; M2 Gauging port control chamber press. DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged (Size125 a. 180) 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
125/180 354 298 203 393 297 192 315 88
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data on the variable
250/355 424 346 248 455 333 228 377 88 pump see technical data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
891

Size 500 to 1000

Right hand rotation
1
A9
6.1 9.1
PSt 7.1 9.2
6.2
1 P 2
A11
A3
2
A8
A7
3
B
M2
4
P
A10
A6
A1
15 0
Einschraubloch M33
L
5
R(L)
PSt
MSt
M1 Subassemblies see page 54
6

PSt Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
750 582 430 301 196 47 232 345 15 35 468 data on the variable pump see technical 8
1000 622 456 360 203 47 255 372 15 35 491 data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1
892
Example of control combination LR2GN

Hyperbolic power control with hydraulic stroke control and remote pressure control
For a description and the technical data in each case see:

– hyperbolic power control LR2 see page 4
– remote pressure control G see page 17
– hydraulic stroke control N see page 45
With control combinations LR2GN and LR3GN please note the following:
With a pressure control setting below the pressure level of the external control pressure supply pcontr in P all pumps up to size 355
will remain against the mechanical stroke limiter Vg min and the sizes 500 to 1000 may experience oscillations.
893
Schematics LR2GN

A4VSO LR2GN A4VSO LR2GN
shown in actuated position, MSt 1

shown in actuated position,
i.e. P is pressurized MSt
i.e. P is pressurized 6.2
P 6.2
7.1
6.1 6.1 P
2 2
XD XD
PSt PSt 2
7.1
5
B1 B M B B1 B MB
7.2 4 3 4
7.2
3
1 1
Size 500 to 1000 4

A4VSO LR2GN
shown in actuated position,

i.e. P is pressurized 6.2 4
MSt XD
5
5
6.1
2
7.1
PSt
P
B1 B MB 7.2 M1
M2 6
Subassemblies
1 (see RE 92050)
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) Sandwich plate (Size 125 to 355)
3 7
4 Pilot control valve for remote pressure control
Ports 5 Separate pressure relief valve
XD Pilot port for remote pressure control (not in scope of supply)
P Control pressure port 6.1 Pilot valve
PSt Pilot pressure port 6.2 Pilot control valve
8
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure 7.1 Check valve (integrated in size 125 to 1000 )
M1, M2 Gauging port control chamber press. (Size 125 to 1000) 7.2 Integrated check valve
894

Unit dimensions LR2GN certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 40 and 71

A12
P
6.1 7.1 6.2
PSt
2 XD
1
A3
A15
A13
A5
B
(XD on left hand rotation)
Valve mounting position for left hand rotation item 2, 4, 6.2 and
7.1 with piping rotated by 180°
MSt
(A2)
PSt Subassemblies
(A11)
(A8)

(see RE 92050)
A14
L (R)
15 0 15
A1

A7

A11
5 Separate pressure relief valve

A2
R(L) XD (not in scope of supply)

6.1 Pilot valve
P 6.2 Pilot control valve
A9 to pump mounting face A10 7.1 Check valve

XD Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
for remote pressure control
Unit dimensions
40 260 132 248 295 130 269 37 7 144 34 83 15 163 35 198 For detailed unit dimensions and
see technical data sheet
71 296 132 258 322 146 296 37 7 166 39 83 15 180 35 215 A4VSO RE 92050
1
895

Size 125 to 355

1
A14
6.1
PSt 6.2 P 7.1
3
2
XD
1
A3
A13
2 4
A12
A5
B Valve mounting position for left hand rotation item 2, 6.2 and
(XD on left hand rotation) 7.1 rotated by 180°
M2(M1)
MSt P 4
PSt Subassemblies
(see RE 92050)
A11
(A8)
A15

L (R)
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A7
3 Sandwich plate
(A11)
4 Pilot control valve for remote pressure control 5
R(L) 5 Separate pressure relief valve

XD
B 6.1 Pilot valve
M1(M2) 6.2 Pilot control valve
A9 to pump mounting face A10 7.1 Integrated check valve
6

XD Pilot port for remote DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
pressure control
PSt Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm 7
Unit dimensions
8
125/180 354 299 391 171 365 37 7 203 112 88 192 214 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and
see technical data sheet
250/355 424 346 453 207 427 37 7 248 129 88 228 261 15 35 A4VSO RE 92050
1
896

Size 500 to 1000

A14
MSt
6.1 7.1
PSt XD
6.2
1 P
A3
A5
2
A13
A12
B
M2(M1)
XD Valve mounting position for left hand rotation item 2, 4 and 6.2
rotated by 180° (mirror view around pump axis)
4
PSt P
A8
Subassemblies
(A11) A11
A15
L (R)
15 0 15
A1

Einschraubloch M33
(see RE 92050)
(A8)
R(L) 2 Power control valve

6.2 5 Separate pressure relief valve
MSt (not in scope of supply)
M1(M2) 6.1 Pilot valve

(XD on left
A9 to pump mounting face A10 hand rotation) 6.2 Pilot control valve
(A7) to pump mounting face 7.1 Integrated check valve

XD Pilot pressure port for DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A3 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
500 510 392 311 430 441 125 279 186 47 202 306 15 35 For detailed unit dimensions and technical
582 430 342 462 473 125 301 195 47 232 345 15 35 data on the variable pump see technical
750
data sheet A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 456 364 528 539 125 360 203 47 255 372 15 35
1
897
Example of control combination LR2GNT

Hyperbolic-power control with hydraulic stroke control, electric control of pilot pressure and

1
Only available in right hand rotation.
For the description and technical data see previous pages:

– hyperbolic power control LR2 page 4
– remote pressure control G page 17 2
– hydraulic stroke control N page 45

– electric pilot pressure control T page 51
3
With control combinations LR2GNT and LR3GNT please note the following:
With a pressure control setting below the pressure level of the external control pressure supply pcontr in P all pumps up to size
355 will remain against the mechanical stroke limiter Vg min and the sizes 500 to 1000 may experience oscillations.
8
898
Schematics LR2GNT
Size 125 to 355 Size 500 to 1000

A4VSO LR2GNT, right hand rotation A4VSO LR2GNT, right hand rotation
shown in actuated position i.e. shown in actuated

P is pressurized position i.e. 9.1
PSt P is pressurized
MSt 9.2
9.1
6.2 PSt
MSt XD
6.1 7.1 6.2
P 5
2 4
XD 6.1
2
5 7.1
B1 B MB 4
P
3 7.2 M1
B1 B M B
M2
7.2
1
1
U S MS M1 K1 K2 T R(L) M2 U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)
Ports
XD Pilot pressure port for remote pressure control
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure
Subassemblies
5 Separate pressure relief valve (not in scope of supply)
6.1 Pilot valve
6.2 Pilot control valve
7.1 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve with check valve (Size 125 to 355)
Check valve, integrated in item 2 (Size 500 to 1000)
7.2 Check valve, integrated in item 1 (Size 125 to 355)
Check valve, integrated in item 2 (Size 500 to 1000)
9.1 Proportional pressure relief valve
DBEP6 B06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 (Size 125 to 355) Solenoid with cable box(Hirschmann)
DBEP6 A06-1X/45AG24NZ4M-382 (Size 500 to 1000) to DIN EN 175 301-803 protection class IP 65
with meter-in orifice dia. 1,0 mm cable junction M16x1,5 for cable dia. 4,5...10 mm
9.2 Sandwich plate for mounting of proportional valve (Size 500 to 1000)
Size 40 and 71 available on request.

899

Unit dimensions LR2GNT certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

available on request Right hand rotation
1
9.1
3 6.2 P
6.1
7.1
XD 2
A3
A2
2 4
A12
A5
3
B
MSt M2 P
PSt
4
A11
A1
15 0
Einschraubloch M33
L
A7
5
R(L)
XD
M1
Subassemblies see page 64 A9 to pump mounting face A10 6

XD Pilot pressure port DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
7
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 8
125/180 354 297 194 393 171 365 37 7 203 112 88 192 For detailed unit dimensions and technical
data on the variable pump see technical dat
250/355 424 333 346 455 207 427 37 7 248 129 88 228
1
900

Unit dimensions LR2GNT certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.
Size 500 to 1000

Right hand rotation
XD
9.1
6.1 7.1 9.2
6.2
1 P
A2
A3
2 A5
A12
B
M2 4
XD
P
A8
A11
A1
15 0
L
R(L)
PSt
MSt
M1
9

XD Pilot pressure port for DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep 80 Nm
PSt Gauging port pilot pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep; plugged 80 Nm
MSt Gauging port pilot control pressure DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep plugged 80 Nm
Unit dimensions
500 510 438 392 311 430 441 125 279 185 47 202
For detailed unit dimensions and technical data
750 582 468 430 342 462 473 125 301 196 47 232 on the variable pump see technical data sheet
A4VSO RE 92050
1000 622 491 456 364 528 539 125 360 203 47 255
1
901
Installation notes
For mounting of pumps with control version LR.Y and LR.NT and combinations thereof inside the reservoir please consult us.
8
902
General notes
– The control devices LR2, LR3 and LR.N together with the pump A4VSO were designed for operation in open loop circuits.
– Systems design, installation and commissioning require trained technicians or tradesmen.
– All hydraulic ports and connections for control functions can only be used for the fastening of hydraulic lines.
– Tightening torques: The tightening torques mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and must not be exceeded
(Maximum values for thread). Manufacturers information concerning the maximum permitted tightening
torques of the various fittings is to be observed!
For DIN 13 mounting bolts, we recommend that tightening torques be checked on a case by case basis
in accordance with VDI 2230 published 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially the solenoids can be extremely hot, avoid being burned.
Wear protective clothing.
– All data, information and instructions mentioned in this data sheet must be adhered to.
Product Segment Axial Piston Units reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Plant Horb The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements
An den Kelterwiesen 14 concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be
72160 Horb, Germany derived from our information. The information given does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that
Phone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0
our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
Facsimile +49 (0) 74 51 82 21
Subject to change.
903

RE 92076/08.10 1/52
Control Systems Replaces: 03.05 and 05.10
HM, HS, HS4 and EO
Data sheet Position Foto

(oben links):
X = 147
Y = 93,9
For the axial piston variable pumps
A4VSO, A4VBO and A4VSG series 1 and 3
A4CSG series 3
Open and closed circuit
Contents Features
Ordering code for A4VSO 2 – Basis system to control the displacement of variable piston
pumps A4VSO, A4VBO, A4VSG and A4CSG
Ordering code for A4VBO 3
– Control with servo or proportional valve
Ordering code for A4VSG 4
– In conjunction with amplifier and PC-program BODAC free
Ordering code for A4CSG 5
programmable (HS4)
HM1 / HM2 – hydraulic control, control volume dependent 6
– High precision control of displacement, pressure and power
HS – control system with servo valve 14 (HS4P)
HS4(P) – control system with proportional valve 20 – Mechanical limitation of Vg min and Vg max
HS4M – for oil immersed (under fluid level) operation 28 – Electrical control system for oil immersed mounting inside
the reservoir (HS4M)
HS4V – with internal control pressure supply 32
– Special version for mooring, over centre operation and de-
EO1 / EO2 – control system with proportional valve 34
compression by means of the pump.
HSE without valve 44
– Optional with internal control pressure supply (HS4V)
HSK – short circuit valve 45
HS4K / EO1K / EO2K – short circuit valve 46
Z – sandwich plate filter for HS 49
Installation information 50
Variable pump A4VSO Size 40...1000 RE 92050
Variable pump A4VBO Size 71...450 RE 92122
Variable pump A4VSG Size 40...1000 RE 92100
Variable pump A4CSG Size 250...750 RE 92105
904
2/52 Bosch Rexroth AG HM, HS, HS4, EO series 1 and 3 RE 92076/08.10
Ordering code for A4VSO

A4VS(L)O / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
01 Fluid / version (detailed information see RE 92050)
Axial piston unit / Type of operation

02 Swash plate design, variable / pump, open circuit (see RE 92050) A4VS(L)O
Size
03 Displacement Vg max in cm3 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control device
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent
min. control pressure 20 bar ● ● ● – ● – – – – HM1
min. control pressure 50/100/125 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HM2
Hydraulic control, with servo valve
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS*
for electrical control of displacement with VT-SR7-1X
supply without valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HSE
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HSK*
Hydraulic control with proportional valve,
for electrical and electronic control of displacement- as well as ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4*
control of pressure and power with VT -VPCD-1X
04
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4K*
with pressure transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4P*
with short circuit valve and press. transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4KP*
suitable for oil immersed operation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4M*
with internal control pressure supply ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● – – – HS4V*
Hydraulic control with proportional valve
for electrical control of displacement with VT 5035-1X
min. control pressure 20 bar ● ● ● – ● – – – – EO1*
with short circuit valve ● ● ● – ● – – – – EO1K*
min. control pressure 50/100/125 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EO2*
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EO2K*
Series
● ● – – – – – – – 10
05
– – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 30
07 Seals
08 Drive shaft For detailed information
09 Mounting flange see RE 92050 – A4VSO
10 Service line connections
11 Through drive
Filtration (only for HS-control) 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Without filter (no code) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
12
Sandwich plate filter for HS-control ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – Z
* Operation with HF-fluids on request
● = available ❍ = on request – = not available

905
RE 92076/08.10 HM, HS, HS4, EO series 1 and 3 Bosch Rexroth AG 3/52
Ordering code for A4VBO

A4VBO HS4 / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

1
01 Swash plate design, variable / pump, open circuit (see RE 92122) A4VBO
Size
02 Displacement Vg max in cm3 071 125 450
Control device
Hydraulic control with proportional valve 2
03 ● ● ● HS4*
for electrical and electronic control of displacement and power with VT -VPCD-1X
Series
Series 1, Index 0 ● – – 10
04
Series 3, Index 0 – ● ● 30
3
06 Seals
07 Drive shaft For detailed information:
08 Mounting flange see RE 92122 – A4VBO
10 Through drive 4
* Operation with HF-fluids on request
● = available – = not available
8
906
Ordering code for A4VSG

A4VSG / –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
01 Fluid / version (detailed information see RE 92100)

02 Swash plate design, variable / pump, closed circuit (see RE 92100) A4VSG
Size
03 Displacement Vg max in cm3 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control device
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent
min. control pressure 20 bar ● ● ● – ● – – – – HM1
min. control pressure 50/100/125 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HM2
Hydraulic control with servo valve
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS*
supply without valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HSE
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HSK*
for electrical and electronic control of displacement- as well as ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4*
04 with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4K*
with pressure transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4P*
with short circuit valve and press. transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4KP*
suitable for oil immersed operation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HS4M*
min. control pressure 20 bar ● ● ● – ● – – – – EO1*
with short circuit valve ● ● ● – ● – – – – EO1K*
min. control pressure 50/100/125 bar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EO2*
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EO2K*
Series
● ● – – – – – – – 10
05
– – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 30
07 Seals
08 Drive shaft
For detailed information:
09 Mounting flange
see RE 92100 – A4VSG
11 Through drive
12 Valves
Filtration 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Without filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N
With filter, mounted in boost circuit ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● F
13 With sandwich plate filter for HS-control ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – Z
With filter, mounted in boost circuit and sandwich plate filter
● ● ● ● ● ● – – – U
for HS-control
* Operation with HF-fluids on request
907
Ordering code for A4CSG

A4CSG / 30 –
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Axial piston unit/ Type of operation

1
01 Compact unit swash plate design, variable / pump, closed circuit (see RE 92105) A4CSG
Size
02 Displacement Vg max in cm3 250 355 500 750
Control device
Hydraulic control, control volume dependent 2
min. control pressure 100/125 bar ● ● ● ● HM2
Hydraulic control with servo valve
● ● ● ● HS
supply without valve ● ● ● ● HSE
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● HSK
Hydraulic control with proportional valve 3
for electrical and electronic control of displacement- as well as ● ● ● ● HS4
03
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● HS4K
with pressure transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● HS4P
with short circuit valve and press. transducer HM 17 ● ● ● ● HS4KP
suitable for oil immersed operation ● ● ● ● HS4M 4
min. control pressure 100/125 bar ● ● ● ● EO2
with short circuit valve ● ● ● ● EO2K
Series
5
04 ● ● ● ● 30
06 Seals
07 Drive shaft
08 Mounting flange For detailed information: 6
09 Service line connections see RE 92105 – A4CSG
10 Boost pump
11 Through drive
12 Valves
Filtration 250 355 500 750

7
Without filter ● ● ● ● N
With threaded connection for filter in boost circuit ● ● ● ● D
13 With mounted filter in boost circuit (with optical-electrical dirt indicator) ● ● ● ● M
With threaded connection for filter in boost circuit (D) and sandwich plate filter for HS-control ● ● – – Z
With mounted filter in boost circuit (M) and sandwich plate filter for HS-control ● ● – – U
8

908
HM1 / HM2 – Hydraulic control, control volume dependent

For A4VSO and A4VSG: HM1, HM2
For A4CSG: only HM2
The HM 1/2- control adjusts the pump displacement, dependent on the control oil volume.
This control is used for 2-point control systems or as a base unit for controls with proportional valves (an additional electric feed
back device is required).
The minimum and maximum swivel angle limitation is mechanically adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max. For the size 500 Vg min is also
adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max but Vg max only up to 70% of Vg max.
Setting at the A4VSO and A4VBO (open cicuit):
The Vg min-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked pressure port B a pressure of 15...20 bar is reached.
The Vg max-stop is set to the nominal value of Vg max.
Setting at the A4VSG and A4CSG (closed circuit):
The Vg max-stops on both sides of centre are set to the nominal value of Vg max.
If other settings are desired, please state in clear text when ordering.
Spring centering of the control cylinder is standard. It is used for settings and adjustments in the unpressurized zero (centre)
position, however without a defined reset during high pressure operation.
2 versions are available:
HM1 Minimum control pressure 20 bar for sizes 40, 71, 125 and 250 see page 7
HM2 Minimum control pressure 50/100/125 bar for sizes 40...1000 see page 8
Over centre operation of the A4VSO is available on request.
Important
At the A4VSO for open circuit operation (one side of centre) the Vgmin-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked pressure
port B a pressure of approx. 20 bar is reached.
909
HM1
Size 40 to 125 and 250 for A4VSO and A4VSG
Technical data
Size 40 71 125 250
1
Control pressure (in X1, X2) pmin bar 20
pmax bar 100
Control stroke smax mm 14.2 17.1 20.7 25.9
Control area A cm2 16.6 24.6 36.3 56.7
Control volume VS max cm3 23.6 42.1 75.2 147
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HM1...N00) kg 38 55 92 194 2
Schematics
Size 40 and 71 Size 125 aund 250
Example: open circuit A4VSO Example: closed circuit A4VSG
A
3
B
MB MA
X2 X1
B1 B MB E
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U X1 K3 K2 T R(L) X2 5
Ports and direction of flow

X1 Control pressure port for pressure in B at clockwise rotation, swivel range* left
6
for pressure in A at counter clockwise rotation, swivel range* left
X2 Control pressure port for pressure in A at clockwise rotation, swivel range* right
for pressure in B at counter clockwise rotation, swivel range* right
* compare swivel angle indicator

15° 0° 15°
right
left
7
For example of schematic with proportional valve see page 29
8
910
HM2
Size 40 and 71 for A4VSO and A4VSG
Technical data
Size 40 71
Control pressure (in X1, X2) pmin bar 50 50
pmax bar 350
Control stroke smax mm 14.2 17.1
Control area A cm2 8.1 12.6
Control volume VS max cm3 11.4 21.5
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HM2...N00) kg 38 55
Schematic
Example: open circuit A4VSO
X2 X1
B 1 B MB
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L)


15° 0° 15°
right
left
Example of schematic with proportional valve see page 29

911

Dimensions HM1 / HM2 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40 and 71
Dimensions are valid for A4VSO and A4VSG
A5 Mounting face to bolt hole pattern 1

of DIN 24 340 A6
R(L)
A2
2
A4
B
3
X2
L R
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A3
X1 5
R(L)
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
40 296 136 24 102 217 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see data
71 332 157 28 120 245 sheets A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
Ports 7
[bar]2)
X1; X2 control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 100 (bei HM1) O
350 (bei HM2)
1) For the maximum tightening torques the general safety information on page 52 must be observed.
2) Depending on the application momentary pressure spikes can occur. To be considered when selecting the measuring equipment 8
and fittings.
O = Must be connected (plugged upon delivery)
912
HM2
Size 125 to 355 for A4VSO and A4VSG
Size 250 and 355 for A4CSG
Pump A4CSG with HM2-control does not need the control pressure relief valve and the cavity is plugged.
In order to minimize the control fluid consumption the control chambers on the sizes 125...1000 are sealed, and can be bled
through the ports R2...R7.
Technical data
Size 125 180 250 355
Control pressure (in X1, X2) pmin bar 50 100 100 100
pmax bar 350
Control area A cm2 18.1 18.1 28.3 28.3
Control volume VS max cm3 37.5 37.5 73.2 73.2
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HM2...N00) kg 92 106 194 214
Schematic
Example: open circuit A4VSO
B1 B M B
U S MS X1 R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 X2

R2...R7 Air bleed control chamber

15° 0° 15°
right
left

913

Dimensions HM1 / HM2 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 125 to 355

Dimensions are valid for A4VSO, A4VSG and A4CSG
R(L) 1
A2
A4
R 7/R 4
2
U
B
T S 3
A5
R2
R3 X2
A3
L R
A1
A3
5
R(L)
R6 X1
R5
6
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
125/1801) 402 191 67 186.5 251 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see data
250/3551) 485 238 71 233 311 sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
Ports
7
[bar]3)
X1; X2 Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (Size125 and 180) 100 (HM1) O
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep (Size250 and 355) 350 (HM2) O
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber DIN 3852-1 M10 x 1; 8 deep 350 (only at HM2) X
1) Size 180 and 355 only at HM2 8

3) Depending on the application momentary pressure spikes can occur. To be considered when selecting the measuring equipment
and fittings.
914
HM2
Pump A4CSG with HM2-control does not need the control pressure relief valve and the cavity is plugged.
In order to minimize the control fluid consumption the control chambers on the sizes 500 to 1000 are sealed, and can be bled
through the ports R2...R7.
.
Technical data
Size 500 750 1000
Control pressure (in X1, X2) pmin bar 125 125 125
pmax bar 350
Control stroke smax mm 32.6 37.0 41.4
Control area A cm2 38.2 56.8 63.6
Control volume VS max cm3 124.5 210 263.3
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HM2...N00) kg 327 470 600
Schematic
Size 500...1000
Examplel: closed circuit A4VSG
B A
MB MA
X1
X2
E MX
MX1 MX2
15° 0° 15°
rechts
links
U R5 R6 R7 K3 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2

MX; MX1; MX2 Measuring ports control pressure
R2...R7 Bleed ports control chamber

15° 0° 15°
right
left

915

Dimensions HM2 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 500 to 1000

A5 Mounting face to bolt hole pattern

1
X1, X2 MX of DIN 24 340 A10
MX1
A2
A4
2
R7/R 4
3
T S
R2
U R3
MX2
X2
4
A3
A1
LR
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
5
R(L)
X1
R6 MX1
R5
6
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
500 555 283 50 274 388
For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see data
750 630 320 50 304 420
sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92100
1000 670 347 50 327 486
Ports 7

[bar]2)
X1; X2 Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M27 x 2; 16 deep 350 O
MX; MX1; MX2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 X
R2...R7 Air bleed control chamber DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 350 X
8
and fittings.
916
HS – Control system with servo valve

For A4VSO, A4VSG und A4CSG
for electric control of displacement with VT-SR7-1X
The HS- control adjusts the pump displacement with a servo A4VSO - open circuit
valve proportional to a setpoint value.
Please note: On the A4VSO pump for open circuit appli-
The feed back of the actual pump swivel angle (pump displace- cations (swivel to one side only) the Vgmin-stop is set so
ment) is accomplished with a built on positional transducer. In that, when port B is plugged a pressure of approx. 20 bar is
conjunction with the compatible amplifier VT-SR7-1X we have reached.
a very accurate control of pump displacement.
Over centre operation of the A4VSO is available on request.
This amplifier VT-SR7-1X does not belong to the supply of the
HS-control. Please order separately acc. to RE 29993. Characteristic
Spring centering in the control cylinder is standard. It is used
for settings and adjustments in the unpressurized zero U
position, however without a defined reset during high pressure Umax
operation.
The spring centering is not a safety device.
The minimum and maximum swivel angle limitation is mecha- Vg
nically adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max. For the size 500, Vg min Vgmax
is also adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max but Vg max only up to
70% of Vg max. Direction of flow S to B
Setting at the A4VSO (open cicuit): Direction of rotation Swivel range*
The Vg min-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked clockwise left
pressure port B a pressure of 15...20 bar is reached.
The Vg max-stop is set to the nominal value of Vg max. counter clockwise right

The Vg max-stops on both sides of centre are set to the nominal A4VSG and A4CSG - closed circuit
value of Vg max.
Characteristic
If other settings are desired, please state in clear text when
ordering.
In order to minimize the control fluid consumption the control U
+
chambers in the sizes 125...1000 are sealed and can be bled Umax
through the ports R2 - R7.
_ Vg Vg
In order to protect the servo valve the pump is supplied with a +
Vgmax Vgmax
sandwich flushing plate (see schematic).
After the flushing process the flushing plate must be removed U
and the servo valve must be screwed directly onto the subplate –
Umax
(using the screws supplied). Please observe the commissio-
ning and flushing instructions in RE 07700 and RE 29583.
Direction of flow
Optional: HSE without servo valve or
HSK with short circuit valve Direction of rotation Swivel range*
clockwise counter clockwise
Important B to A A to B right
A to B B to A left
The valve spool in the control system can get stuck in a non
defined position (contaminated hydraulic fluid, wear partic-
les or contamination from the general system components).
15° 0° 15°
Through this, the pump flow will not follow the operators right
left
commands anymore
Check whether your machine needs safety measures to bring
the driven actuators in a safe position (i.e. immediate stop).
917

Technical data
Size NG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control pressure pmin bar 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 150
in P pmax1) bar 315 1
Cleanliness class of fluid1) 18/16/13 to ISO 4406 (C)
Optional sandwich plate filter see page 49
Control stroke smax mm 14.2 17.1 20.7 20.7 25.9 25.9 32.6 37.0 41.4
Control area A cm2 8.1 12.6 18.1 18.1 28.3 28.3 38.2 56.8 63.6
Control volume VS max cm3 11.4 21.5 37.5 37.5 73.2 73.2 124.5 210 263.3
Control time tmin2) s 0.04 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.15 0.2 * 2
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HS...N00) kg 42 59 98 112 200 220 333 476 606

Quality of hysteresis d 0.2 %
control loop
repeating accuracy d 0.2 %
swivel angle linearity deviation d 1.0 %
3
1) conditional upon permissible data of servo valve
2) at minimum control pressure
* on request
8
918

Size 250 to 355 for A4CSG
Schematics
Example: open circuit A4VSO Example: closed circuit A4VSG
2 B A 2
MB MA
6 6
SP E RKV Sp
B 1 B MB RKV 5 P 5 P
S S
U U
1.1 3 1.2 3
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U M1 R5 R6 R7 K3 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2
Ports
SP Port for control pressure accumulator
R KV Return line control fluid
M1; M2 Measuring port control pressure (plugged),
Size 125...355
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber (plugged),
Size 125...355
Components
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
2 4/3-way servo valve (see RE 29583)
Size Type
40 and 71 4WS2EM10-5X/20B11ET315K31EV
with cable box to DIN EN 175.201-804
125 and 180 4WS2EM10-5X/30B11ET315K31EV
for cable diameter 8...13.5mm
250 and 355 4WS2EM10-5X/45B11ET315K31EV
3 Inductive positional transducer IW9-03-01

with cable box (mating plug) to DIN EN 175 301-803-A / ISO 4400
cable connection M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
5 Sandwich plate
6 Flushing plate
919

Dimensions HS installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40 to 355
A7
A4 1
2
3
A3 without flushing plate

R(L) 6
A2 with flushing plate

R KV
1
A11
2
5
A5
A8
R7 /R 4 P
B
3
R2
Partial view W R3
RKV SP M2
RKV
4
A 10
A9
M6 (x1)
W
LR
15 0 15
A1
M4 (x0.7)
M4 (x0.7)
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A6
M6 (x1)
R(L)
P M1
U R6 5
P
R5
Components see page 16

40 296 269 254 222 108 43 273 128 35 53 246 For detailed dimensions and technical data
71 332 287 272 249 123 48 300 143 30 48 263 of the variable pumps see data sheets 6
125 / 180 402 304 289 309 148 39 350 148 0 39 298 A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or
250 / 355 485 341 326 371 184 39 412 184 0 39 345 A4CSG RE 92105
Ports
[bar]2) 7
P Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 315 O
Sp Accumulator control pressure DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 315 X
R KV Return line control fluid DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 100 O
M1; M2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 125 and 180) 315 X
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 250 and 355) 315 X
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber DIN 3852-1 M10x1; 8 deep 315 X
8
and fittings.
920

Schematic
Example: closed circuit A4VSG
2
B A
MB1 MA1
6
T B A P
RKV P
E 5 MP
MB2 MA2
S
U
1.2
3
U R5 R6 R7 K3 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2
Ports
MA2; M B2; M P Measuring ports control pressure (plugged)
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber (plugged)
Components
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
2 4/3-way servo valve (see RE 29583)
Size Type
500...1000 4WS2EM10-5X/75B11ET315K31EV with cable box to DIN EN 175.201-804
for cable diameter 8...13.5 mm

with cable box (mating plug) to DIN EN 175 301-803-A / ISO 4400
cable connection M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
5 Sandwich plate
6 Flushing plate
921

Dimensions HS installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 500 to 1000

A 3 with flushing plate

1
A 4 without flushing plate
3 R(L) P/RKV
MP 2
1
2
A2
A5
R7 /R 4
B 3
A6
R2
R3 MA2
RKV
A7
A1
LR
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
P
5
B
R6 MB2
R5
Components sehe page 18
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 6
500 555 392 527 512 274 388 50 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the
750 630 427 558 543 304 420 50 variable pumps see data sheets A4VSO RE 92050,
A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
1000 670 456 624 609 327 486 50
Ports 7
[bar]2)
P Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M27 x 2; 16 deep 315 O
R KV Return line control fluid DIN 3852-1 M27 x 2; 16 deep 100 O
MA2, M B2, M P Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 315 X
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 315 X 8
and fittings.
922
HS4(P) – Control system with proportional valve

For A4VSO, A4VBO, A4VSG and A4CSG
for electric and electronic displacement as well as pressure and power control with VT-VPCD-1X
Actual = 100 % Spring centering in the control cylinder is standard. It is used

pressure for settings and adjustments in the unpressurized zero position,
actual power
Desired power however without a defined reset during high pressure operati-
on.
Operating pressure

In order to minimize the control fluid consumption, the control
chambers in pump sizes 125...1000 are sealed and can be bled
via ports R2 - R7.
0 Actual swivel angle
Swivel angle in %
(DIst)
The HS4-control adjusts the pump displacement with a directly Important

controlled proportional valve proportional to a setpoint value.
Actual pump swivel angle (displacement) feedback is provided defined position (contaminated hydraulic fluid, wear partic-
by means of a position transducer. les or contamination from the general system components).
Control HS4P features a built on pressure transducer HM17 Through this, the pump flow will not follow the operators
which serves to detect and feed back system pressure, pumps commands anymore
A4VSG and A4CSG have a pressure transducer on each pres- Check whether your machine needs safety measures to bring
sure side. In conjunction with the compatible control module the driven actuators in a safe position (i.e. immediate stop).
VT-VPCD and the operating software BODAC the user has at
his disposal a highly accurate and free programmable control,
which offers a comfortable operating and diagnostics interface.
The digital control amplifier VT-VPCD-1X to drive the HS4-con-
trol does not belong to the scope of supply. It must be ordered
separately to RE 30028.
Programming the digital control amplifier VT-VPCD is executed
via the amplifier‘s serial interface with the PC-program BO-
DAC. For more information see RE 30028.
Optional: HS4P with pressure transducer for additional
pressure and power control
HS4K, HS4KP with short circuit valve
HS4M suitable for oil immersed operation
HS4V with internal control pressure supply
The minimum and maximum swivel angle limitation is mecha-
nically adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max. For the size 500, Vg min
is also adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max but Vg max only up to
70% of Vg max. (75% at the A4VBO 450)
Setting at the A4VSO and A4VBO (open cicuit):
The Vg min-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked
The Vg max-stops on both sides of centre are set to the nominal
value of Vg max.
If other settings are desired, please state in clear text when
ordering.
923

Technical data
Size NG 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control pressure pmin A4VSO, A4VSG, A4CSG bar 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 150
in P 1
pmin A4VBO bar – 130 130 – – – 190 – –
size 450
pmax1) bar 315
Control area A cm2 8.1 12.6 18.1 18.1 28.3 28.3 38.2 56.8 63.6
Control volume VS max cm3 11.4 21.5 37.5 37.5 73.2 73.2 124.5 210 263.3 2
Control time tmin2) s 0.04 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.15 0.2 0.25
Weight approx. (A4VSO...HS4...N00) kg 42 59 98 112 200 220 333 476 606
Quality of hysteresis d 0.2 %
control loop
repeating accuracy d 0.2 %
3
swivel angle linearity deviation d 1.0 %
pressure linearity deviation d 1.5 % of pmax3)
1) conditional upon the permissible data of the proportional valve
3) Pressure transducer value
4
A4VSO – open circuit A4VSG, A4CSG – closed circuit

p
5
p
A
A
A
p
6
Initial position at version without short circuit valve, de-ener- Initial position at version without short circuit valve, de-ener-
gized proportional valve and connected control pressure: gized proportional valve and connected control pressure:
Vg min (see table) Vg max (see table)
Direction of flow S to B Direction of flow

Direction of Direction of Swivel Direction of Initial 7
Swivel range* Initial position
rotation rotation range* flow position
clockwise left Vg min (from left) right B to A
clockwise Vg max right
counter clockwise right Vg min (from right) left A to B
Over centre operation is available on request. right A to B
counter clockwise Vg max left
left B to A
The Vg min-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked
pressure port B a pressure of approx. 20 bar is reached. 8

15° 0° 15°
right
left
924

Size 40 and 71 for A4VSO and A4VSG
Size 71 for A4VBO
Schematics
Example: A4VSO HS4P (with pressure transducer)
Clockwise rotation Counter clockwise rotation
2 T P 2
T P
b a
B A
b a
B A
SP SP
RKV
B1 B MB RKV 5 P B1 B MB 5 P
(6) (6)
I S I S
P U P U
1.1
1.1 3 3
Ports
Components
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050) or A4VBO (see RE 92122)
2 4/3-way proportional valve (see RE 29061) with electric positional feedback (incl. cable connector 4-pin Pg7-G4W1F)
Size Type
40 and 71 4WRE6V08-2X/G24K4/V-822 Solenoids with plugs to DIN EN 175.301-803 / ISO 4400 cable screw
connection M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
3 Inductive positional transducer AWXF004D01 with cable connector 4-pin Pg7-G4W1F

5 Sandwich plate
6 only on HS4P pressure transducer HM17-1X/450-C/VO/O (see RE 30269) with adaptor flange,
on A4VSG and A4CSG (closed circuit) each pressure side has a built on pressure transducer
925

Dimensions HS4(P) installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40 and 71 Example: A4VSO HS4P with a pressure transducer in port B

On A4VSO and A4VBO clockwise and counter clockwise rotation some dimensions are different („R“ and „L“).
For A4VSG the dimensions „R“. are valid for both directions of rotation
3 2
P
5
(SP)
--a
40 RKV
with pressure transducer item 6:
A3
Adapter flange with 30 mm through holes for 1 --
2
fixing screws
(For thread of fixing screws see relevant data
A8
sheets of pumps) Transport protection
A5
M12 (x1.75)
partial view W
B
3
(6) Valve position on
A4VSG
Schl.weite: 13 mm
Schl.weite: 36 mm
A4VSO clockwise rotation
--
A4VBO clockwise rotation
A2
RKV SP
4
A 10
A9
W
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
M5 (x0.8)
R(L)
P
A2
Valve position on
A1
5
30
1
A4VSO
Schl.weite: 36 mm

A4VBO
Size A1 A2R A2L A3R A3L A4R A4L A5 A6 A7R A7L A8R A8L A9R A9L A10 A11
6
40 296 174 166 245 226 230 222 108 43 273 253 128 94 35 5 54 16.5 For detailed dimensions and technical
data of the variable pumps see data
sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VBO
71 332 169 171 261 243 257 249 123 48 300 280 143 109 30 0 48 20.9 RE 92122 or A4VSG RE 92100
Ports
Designation Port for Standard1) Size2) Peak pressure State 7
[bar]3)
Sp Accumulator control press. DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 315 X
1) ISO 6149 on A4VBO 71

8
and fittings
926

Size 125 for A4VBO
Schematics
Example: A4VSO HS4P (with pressure transducer)
T P
T P b a
b a b B A a
b B A a 2
2
SP
RKV
SP RKV 5
(6) B 1 B MB 5 P (6) B1 B M B P
I S I S
P U P U
1.1 1.1
3 3
U S MS M1 R5R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2 U S MS M1 R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2 M2
Ports
M1; M2 Measuring ports control pressure
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber
Components
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
Size Type
125 and 180 4WRE6V08-2X/G24K4/V-822 Solenoids with plugs to DIN EN 175.301-803 / ISO 4400 cable
250 und 355 4WRE6V16-2X/G24K4/V-822 screw connection M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm

5 Sandwich plate
6 only on HS4P pressure transducer HM17-1X/450-C/VO/O (see RE 30269) with adapter flange,
on A4VSG and A4CSG each pressure side has a built on pressure transducer
927

Size 125 to 355 Example: A4VSG HS4P with a pressure transducer on port A and B
On A4VSO and A4VBO dimension A4 is different for clockwise and counter clockwise rotation.
On A4VSG und A4CSG the dimension A4R is valid for both directions of rotation.
3
2
5
RKV
--a
40
with pressure transducer item. 6: --

--
Adapter flange with 30 mm through holes for 1
A3
Einschraubloch M22
M10 (x1.5)
fixing screws
2
(For the thread of fixing screws see the relevant P
A5
data sheet of the pump) B
A8
Transport protection
R 7/R4 M14 (x2)
(6)
Partial viewW
A 3
M2 Valve position on:

R2 Schl.weite: 13 mm
A4VSG
R3
SP RKV A4CSG
4
A6
W
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M22
Einschraubloch M33
f
A6
R(L)
P Valve position on
30
R6 A4VSO 5
R5 M1
A4VBO
Size A1 A3 A4R A4L A5 A6 A7 A8

125/180 402 280 310 318.5 156 39 350 148 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable
6
pumps see data sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VBO
250/355 485 316 372 380.5 192 39 412 184 RE 92122, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
Ports
Designation Port for Standard1) Size2) Peak pressure State
[bar]3)
P Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 315 O 7
Sp Control pressure accumulator DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 315 X
M1; M2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep; (Size 125 and 180) 315 X
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep; (Size 250 and 355) 315 X
R2...R7 Bleed control chamber DIN 3852-1 M10 x 1; 8 deep 315 X
8
1) ISO 6149 on A4VBO 125
and fittings.
928

Size 450 for A4VBO
Schematic
Example: A4VSG HS4P (with pressure transducer)
B A T P
bb a
MB1 MA1
b B A a
2
MP
E RKV 5 P
MB2 MA2
6 I
1.2
P
S
U
I
P
U R5 R6 R7 K3 K2 T R(L) R4 R3 R2
Ports
MA2; M B2; M P Measuring port control pressure
Components
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
Size Type
500...1000 4WRE6V16-2X/G24K4/V-822 Solenoids with plug to DIN EN 175.301-803 / ISO 4400 cable screw

5 Adapter plate
6 only on HS4P pressure transducer HM17-1X/450-C/VO/O (see RE 30269) with adapter flange,
on A4VSG and A4CSG each pressure side has a built on pressure transducer
929

Size 500 to 1000

Example A4VSO HS4P with a pressure transducer in port B
Dimensions are valid for A4VSO, A4VBO, A4VSG and A4CSG
1
3 5 MP MB2
1
with pressure transducer item. 6:
02437369
A2
Adapter flange with 30 mm through holes for
fixing screws 2
A4
(For the thread of fixing screws see the relevant 2
data sheet of the pump) R7/R4 Transport protection
M12 (x1.75)
B
(6)
R3 R2 MA Valve position on:
A4VSG
A4CSG
02437369
Rkv
00988104
A6
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33 02422845

02437369
R(L) P
30
5
Valve position on
R6 R5 A4VSO
A4VBO
for counter clockwise rotation A3 = A5 counter clockwise rotation
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 6
500 (450 for A4VBO) 555 361 392 274 388 50 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable
750 630 400 424 304 420 50 pump see data sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VBO
1000 670 427 490 327 486 50 RE 92122, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
Ports
7
Designation Port for Standard1) Size2) Peak pressure [bar]3) State
MA2; M B2; M P Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 315 X
1) ISO 6149 on A4VBO 450 8

and fittings.
930
HS4M – for oil immersed (under oil level) operation

For A4VSO, A4VSG and A4CSG
Control option HS4M corresponds to the HS4 version however without proportional valve, but with control pressure ports X1
and X2.
The proportional valve can be mounted separately into the system and be connected to the relevant ports X1 and X2 of the pump.
The pump unit together with the attached positional transducer can be mounted inside the reservoir.
Approved for HLP-fluids DIN 51524.
Recommended: proportional valve 4WRE6-2X see RE 29061
electronic control VT-VPCD-1X see RE 30028
cable see RE 30028-B
Please note:
On the A4VSO pumps for open circuit applications (one side of centre) the Vg min-stop is set so that, when port B is plugged, a
pressure of approx. 20 bar is reached.
Over centre operation is available on request.
Technical data
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control pressure (in X1, X2) pmin bar 50 50 50 100 100 100 125 125 125
pmax bar 3501)
Control area A cm2 8.1 12.6 18.1 18.1 28.3 28.3 38.2 56.8 63.6
Weight approx. kg 38 55 92 106 194 214 327 470 600
(A4VSO...HS4M..N00)
1) Observe possible restrictions due to the used proportional valve
931
HS4M – for oil immersed operation

Example of schematic for open circuit

1
Example: A4VSO 500 and 750
not included in the supply of the

HS4M
T P
T P
b a
2
b a
b B A a
b B A a
5 5
X1 X2 X1 X2
B 1 B MB B 1 B MB
3
1.1 S
1.1 S
U U
3 3
U S MS R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3R2 U S MS R5 R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3R2 4
Ports and direction of the flow

5
X1 Control pressure port for pressure in B with clockwise rotation, swivel range* left
for pressure in A1) with c.clockwise rotation, swivel range* left
X2 Control pressure port for pressure in A1) with clockwise rotation, swivel range* right
for pressure in B with c.clockwise rotation, swivel range* right
R2...R7 Bleed port control chamber (size 125...1000)
1) only for closed circuit * compare swivel angle indicator
15° 0° 15°
right 6
left
Components
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
3 Inductive positional transducer AWXF004D01 with cable connector 4-pin Pg7-G4W1F, protection IP65
7
5 Subplate (size 40, 71, 500 and 750) or end plate (size 125 to 355)
8
932

Dimensions HS4M installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40, 71, 500 and 750

1.1 5
A2
A4
B
A5
Positional
transducer size
40 and 71
X2
LR
A1
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
A3
X1
R(L)
U
A6
40 296 221.5 28 102 217 16.5
71 332 243 28 120 245 20.9 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the
variable pumps see data sheets A4VSO RE 92050,
500 555 361 224 205 399 – A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
750 630 400 224 235 431 –
Ports
[bar]2)
X1; X2 Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 40 and 71) 350 O
M22 x 1.5; 14 deep (size 500) 350 O
and fittings.
933

Dimensions HS4M installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 125 to 355

3 1
1.1 5
A2
A4
B
3
A5
X2
A3
LR
A1
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
A3
5
R(L)
X1
Components see page 29 6
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
125/180 402 273 67 186.5 251 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps
see data sheets A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or
250/355 485 309 71 233 311 A4CSG RE 92105
7
Ports
[bar]2)
X1; X2 Control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (size125 and 180) 350 O
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep (size250 and 355) 350 O
8
and fittings.
934
HS4V – with internal control pressure supply

For A4VSO
The HS4V control type corresponds to the HS4-version however with internal control pressure supply, differential control piston
and an unpressurized initial position Vg max. This eliminates the need for an external control pressure supply. The control pressure
is taken directly out of the pump pressure outlet.
With a switched-off electric motor and an unpressurized control system a spring force will swivel the pump to it‘s maximum dis-
placement (Vg max).
For a reliable control, the system pressure must be at least 20 bar.
If the pump must be controlled below this 20 bar, it is necessary to use a pressure pre-charge block AGEV4-05728-AA/46
(see example of schematic). Please consult us.
Fail Safe-properties
With a de-energized proportional valve and a closed pump outlet, the unit will swivel to the minimum pressure (6 to 10 bar). This
will also happen in case of an error or without a control release.
Electronics: VT-VPCD-1X see RE 30028
Technical data Swivel range -100% tos +100%

Max. operating pressure pnom1) 315 bar As a special feature, the pump can reverse the direction of
Min. operating pressure pmin 20 bar flow. This possibility to swivel over centre enables a very fast
pressure decrease.
1) limited through the permissible data of the proportional valve,
higher pressure on request Dynamic characteristic of the sudden pressure drop via
the pump
Schematic
100
Example: A4VSO HS4V (size 250 and 355) Aactual
with pre-charge block AGEV4-05728-AA/46
A[%]
0
not included in the supply time
p
I -50
B
P T 240
a b pactual pactual
p [bar]
a A B b 160
2 pdesired1 pdesired1
80
T 5
0
time
1 S
U
Ports
Components
1 Pump with hydraulic control device A4VSO (see RE 92050)
Size Type
250 and 355 4WRE6V16-2X/G24K4/V-822 Solenoids with plug to DIN EN 175.301-803 / ISO 4400 cable screw
5 Sandwich plate
935

Dimensions HS4(V) installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 250 and 355
A4
1
3
5 2
1
A3
M12 (x1.75) M12 (x1.75)
Position of valve on: 3

M2
A1
4
LR
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
f
A2
R(L)
5
M1
Position of valve on:
Components see page 32 A4VSO counter clockwise rotation
Size A1 A2 A3 A4
6
For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pump see data
250/355 212 179 309 433
Ports
[bar]2)
M1; M2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M18 x 1.5; 12 deep 315 X 7
and fittings.
8
936
EO1 / EO2 – Control system with proportional valve

For A4VSO and A4VSG: EO1, EO2
For A4CSG: only EO2
For electric control of displacement with VT 5035-1X
The EO1/2 control adjusts the pump displacement proportional A4VSO - open circuit
to a command input value, by means of a built on directly driven
proportional directional valve. Please note: On the A4VSO pump for open circuit appli-
cations (swivel to one side only) the Vgmin-stop is set so
The feedback signal for the actual pump swivel angle (displace- that, when port B is plugged a pressure of approx. 20 bar is
ment) is provided by a positional transducer. reached.
The minimum and maximum swivel angle limitation is mechani- Over centre operation is available on request.
cally adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max. For the size 500, Vg min is
also adjustable up to 50 % of Vg max but Vg max only up to 70% Characteristic
of Vg max.
Setting at the A4VSO and A4VBO (open cicuit): U
The Vg min-stop is set in such a position, that, with a blocked Umax
Setting at the A4VSG and A4CSG (closed circuit): Vg
The Vg max-stops on both sides of centre are set to the nominal Vgmax
value of Vg max.
If other settings are desired, please state in clear text when Direction of flow S to B
ordering. Direction of
Swivel range* / or solenoid energized
Spring centering of the control cylinder is standard. It is used rotation
for settings and adjustments in the unpressurized zero clockwise left / a
position, however without a defined reset during high pressure counter clockwise right / b
operation.
A4VSG and A4CSG - closed circuit
The electric amplifier VT 5035-1X to control the pump dis-
placement does not belong to the supply of the EO, it must be Characteristic
ordered separately acc. to RE 29955.
2 versions are available: U
+
EO1 min. control pressure 20 bar for pump sizes 40...250 Umax
see page 35...38
_ Vg Vg
EO2 min. control pressure 50/100/125 bar for pump sizes +
Vgmax Vgmax
40...1000 see page 39...43
U
–
Important Umax
defined position(contaminated hydraulic fluid, wear partic- Direction of flow
les or contamination from the general system components).
Direction of rotation Swivel range* /
Through this, the pump flow will not follow the operators
commands anymore clockwise counter clockwise or solenoid energized
Check whether your machine needs safety measures to bring B to A A to B right / b
the driven actuators in a safe position (i.e. immediate stop). A to B B to A left / a

15° 0° 15°
right
left
937
EO1 – Control system with proportional valve

Technical data
Size 40 71 125 250
Control pressure in P pmin bar 20
pmax bar 100 1
Control area A cm2 16.6 24.6 36.3 56.7
Control volume VS max cm3 23.6 42.1 75.2 147
Control time tmin1) s 0.12 0.20 0.22 0.40
Weight approx. (A4VSO...EO1..N00) kg 42 59 98 200
2
maximum hysteresis 'Vg 2) d ± 2 % of Vg max
minimum repeating accuracy 2) d ± 1.5 % of Vg max
Linearity deviation 2) d 2.5 % of Vg max
1) at 50 bar control pressure
2) Values are valid for constant operating temperature of 50 °C
3
8
938

Size 40, 71, 125 and 250 for A4VSO and A4VSG
The external control fluid, which must be fed into port P is leaving the pump via the case drain port R(L).
For pump type A4CSG with EO1- control, the control is fed from the boost circuit (port M E3), that means port P is piped already.
Recommended setting of boost pressure relief valve: 25 bar.
Schematics
Size 40 and 71 Size 125 and 250
Example: closed circuit A4VSG Example: open circuit A4VSO
B A
MB MA
2
b a 2
b a
E
RKV SP
B 1 B MB 5 P
s
U s
U
1.1 3 1.2 3
U K2 K3 T R(L) P
Ports
Size 125 and 250
Size 125 and 250
Size 125 and 250
Components
1.1 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
1.2 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
2 4/3-way proportional valve
Size Type
40 and 71 4WRA6V15-2X/G24N9K4/V-589 with plug in connector to DIN EN 175 301-803 / ISO 4400
125 and 250 4WRA6V30-2X/G24N9K4/V-589 cable screw joint M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5..10mm

with plug in connector to DIN EN 175 301-803-A / ISO 4400
cable screw joint M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
5 Throttle plate
939

Dimensions EO1 installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 40 and 71
3 1
P
1.1
2
A2
2
A5
B 3
A3
A4
P
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
Einschraubloch M33
R(L)
6
Size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
40 296 246 279 178 135
For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see
A4VSO RE 92050, or A4VSG RE 92100
71 332 265 306 205 152
7
Ports
[bar]2)
1) For the maximum tightening torques the general safety information on page 52 must be observed. 8
and fittings.
940

Size 125 and 250

A4
3 2
R(L)
R KV
1.1
A2
A5
A7
P (SP)
R 7/R4 B
R2
M2 SP R KV
R3
A6
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
R(L)
R6
R5 M1 P
A8
125 402 298 312 156 39 148 352 For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see
250 485 345 372 192 39 184 412 A4VSO RE 92050 or A4VSG RE 92100
Ports
[bar]2)
R KV Return line control fluid DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 4 X
M1; M2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 125) 100 X
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 250) 100 X
R2...R7 Air bleed control chamber DIN 3852-1 M10 x 1; 8 deep 100 X
and fittings.
941

Technical data
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control pressure in P pmin bar 50 50 50 100 100 100 125 125 125
pmax1) bar 315 1
Control area A cm2 8.1 12.6 18.1 18.1 28.3 28.3 38.2 56.8 63.6
Control time tmin2) s 0.1 0.12 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 * *
Weight approx. (A4VSO..EO2..N00) kg 42 59 98 112 200 220 338 481 611
2
maximum hysteresis 'Vg3) d ± 2 % of Vg max
minimum repeating accuracy3) d ± 1.5 % of Vg max
Linearity deviation3) d 2.5 % of Vg max
1) limited by permissible data of proportional valve
3)
3
Values are valid for constant operating temperature of 50 °C
* on request
8
942

The external control fluid, which must be fed into port P leaves the pump via case drain port R(L).
On pump type A4CSG with EO2-control the control pressure relief valve is not needed and replaced by a plug.
In order to minimize the control fluid consumption the control chambers on the sizes 125...355 are sealed and can be bled via
ports R2 .... R7.
Schematics
Example: open circuit A4VSO Example: open circuit A4VSO
2 2
b a b a
SP SP
B1 B MB RKV 5 P B1 B M B RKV 5 P
S S
U U
1.1 3 1.1 3
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) U S MS M1R5R6R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4R3R2 M2
Ports
Size 125 to 355
size 125 to 355
Components
1.1 A4VSO (see RE 92050)
Size Typ
40 and 71 4WRA6V15-2X/G24N9K4/V-589 with plug in connector to DIN EN 175 301-803 / ISO 4400
125 to 355 4WRA6V30-2X/G24N9K4/V-589 cable screw joint M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5..10mm

with plug in connector (mating plug) to DIN EN 175 301-803-A / ISO 4400
cable screw joint M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
5 Sandwich plate
943

Size 40 to 355

A4 to pump mounting face 2
1
R KV
A3
A2
2
1.1 5
A8
A5
P
partial view W R 7/R4 B

3
R2
R3 M2
RKV SP
RKV
4
A 10
A9
A9
W
LR
15 0 15
A1
Einschraubloch M33
A6
A6
R(L)
P
R6 M1 P 5
R5
40 296 248 246 222 108 43 273 128 35 53
For detailed dimensions and technical
71 332 264 265 249 123 48 300 143 30 48 data of the variable pumps see A4VSO 6
125/180 402 281 298 310 156 39 350 148 0 39 RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG
RE 92105
250/355 485 317 345 372 192 39 412 184 0 39
Ports
[bar]2) 7
R KV Return line control fluid DIN 3852-1 M22 x 1.5; 14 deep 210 X
M1; M2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 125 and 180) 315 X
M18 x 1.5; 12 deep (size 250 and 355) 315 X
R2...R7 Air bleed control chamber DIN 3852-1 M10 x 1; 8 deep (size 125 to 355) 315 X 8
and fittings.
944

The external control fluid, which must be fed into port P is discharged via port R KV , which must be piped to tank.
On pump type A4CSG with EO2-control the control pressure relief valve is not needed and replaced by a plug.
In order to minimize the control fluid consumption the control chambers are sealed and can be bled via ports R2 .... R7.
Schematic
Example: closed circuit A4VSG
2
b a
B A
MB1 MA1 6
MB3 MA3
RKV MP
E MB2 5 P
MA2
S
U
1.2 3
U R5 R6 R7 K2 K3 T R(L) R4 R3 R2
Ports
MA2; M B2; M P; MA3; M B3 Measuring ports control pressure
Components
1.2 A4VSG (see RE 92100)
Size Type
with plug in connector to DIN EN 175 301-803 / ISO 4400
500 to 1000 4WRE10E25-2X/24K4/V-93
cable screw joint M16x1.5 for cable diameter 4.5..10mm
with plug in connector (mating plug) to DIN EN 175 301-803-A / ISO 4400
cable screw joint M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10mm
5 Sandwich plate
6 Throttle plate
945

Size500 to 1000
A2
1
3 P, RKV
MP
6
A3
5 2 2
A4
1
R7/R4
B
3
A5
R3 R2 MA2
MA3
RKV 4
P
A6
A1
LR
15 0 15
Einschraubloch M33
R(L)
5
MB3
R6 R5 MB2
6
500 555 559 392 274 388 50
For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pumps see
750 630 591 427 304 420 50
A4VSO RE 92050, A4VSG RE 92100 or A4CSG RE 92105
1000 670 657 456 327 486 50
Ports
7
[bar]2)
M P; MA2; M B2 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-1 M14 x 1.5; 12 deep 315 X
MA3; M B3 Measuring control pressure DIN 3852-2 G 1/4 in 315 X
8
and fittings.
946
HSE without valve

The HSE-version is being supplied without servo valve.
Apart from that, this version corresponds to the respective ba-
sic execution – technical data, respective schematics and unit
dimensions see basic control version HS page 14 ff.
The mounting pad for the servo valve for all pump sizes corre-
sponds to porting pattern DIN 24340-A10.
Schematic
Example A4VSO size 125 to 355
6
SP
B1 B MB RKV 5 P
S
U
1 3
U S MS R4 R3 R2 K1 K2 T R(L) R5 R6 R7
Ports
Components
3 Inductive positional transducer
Type IW9-03-01
5 Sandwich plate
6 Flushing plate
947

HSK – short circuit valve installation drawing. Dimensions in mm

A solenoid actuated 4/2-way shut off valve is mounted between the proportional valve and the control device.
This short circuit arrangement is used for settings and adjustments in the unpressurized zero position, however without a defined
1
reset during high pressure operation – this is not an emergency shut-down function.
Important:
With a de-energized short circuit valve the servo valve cannot be activated due to the interrupted connection.
Short circuit valve (4/2-way shut off valve) type Z4WEH10E68-4X/6EG24N9ETZ4/B10D3 (see RE 24753)
with plug in connector DIN EN 175301-803-A
cable screw joint M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10 mm.
2
Schematic Dimensions
Example: A4VSO size 125 to 355
on sizes 40 and 71 the ports R2...R7 are omitted Size 40 to 355
3
R(L)
b a
50

R KV

SP 4
B1 B MB RKV
P
S
U
P
B 5
A 4 to pump mounting flange face

U S MS M1R5R6R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4R3R2 M2
Size A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Size 500 to 1000

40 318 303 403 – – – – 50 6
71 336 321 430 – – – –
125 / 180 355 340 479 – – – – P
250 / 355 390 375 541 – – – –
500 – – – 577 562 401 392
750 – – – 608 593 431 427
A8
7
A7
1000 – – – 674 659 454 456
8
B
HS4K / EO1K / EO2K size 40 to 355 see page 46 and 47 A 5 with flushing plate to mounting flange face
A 6 without flushing plate to mounting flange face
EO2K size 500 to 1000 see page 48
948

HS4K / EO1K / EO2K – short circuit valve installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
HS4K size 40 to 1000

EO1K size 40 to 125 and 250
EO2K size 40 to 355
Important:
With a de-energized short circuit valve the proportional valve cannot be activated due to the interrupted connection.
Short circuit valve (4/2-way shut off valve) type Z4WEH10E68-4X/6EG24N9ETZ4/B10D3 (see RE 24753)
cable screw joint M16 x 1.5 for cable diameter 4.5...10 mm.
Please observe performance limits to RE 23193.
Schematics
Example: A4VSO EO2K size 125 to 355 Example: A4VSG HS4KP size 500 to 1000
T P
b a
b a
b B A a
B A
MB1 MA1
SP MP
B1 B MB RKV E RKV P
P
MB2 MA2
I
P
S
U S
I U
P
U S MS M1R5R6R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4R3R2 M2 U R5 R6R7 K3 K2 T R(L) R4R3R2

949

HS4K / EO1K / EO2K – Dimensions installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
HS4K size 40 to 355 EO1K size 40 and 71
A 3 to pump mounting flange face A 4 to pump mounting flange face
--a
40
50
--a
40
P
A2
2
--
P
R(L)
3
B
50
EO1K size 125 and 250

EO2K size 40 to 355 HS4K size 500 to1000
4
A 7 to pump mounting flange face A 8 to pump mounting flange face
P
50
5
50
A6
A5
B B
Size A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Size A8
40 295 296 324 298 246 295 500 551
71 311 323 351 314 265 322 750 583
125 / 180 330 381 – 331 298 379 1000 649
250 / 355 365.5 443 – 365 345 443
8
EO2K size 500 to 1000 see page 48

950

EO2K – short circuit valve installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Size 500 to 1000

Important:
With a de-energized short circuit valve the proportional valve cannot be activated due to the interrupted connection.
Schematic Dimensions
Example: A4VSG
b a 50
P
b a
B A
MB1 MA1
A3
MB3 MA3
A2
RKV MP
E MB2 P
MA2
S
U
B
U R5 R6 R7 K2 K3 T R(L) R4 R3 R2
Short circuit valve (4/2-way shut off valve) Size A2 A3 A4

type Z4WEH10E68-4X/6EG24N9ETZ4/B10D3 500 386 392 609
(see RE 24753)
750 417 427 641
cable screw joint M16 x 1.5 1000 439 456 707
for cable diameter 4.5...10 mm.
EO2K size 40 to 355 see page 46 and 47

951

Z – sandwich plate filter at HS installation drawing. Dimensions in mm
Indicated by the digit in the filtration option of the ordering code

This sandwich plate filter is used to filter the control fluid before entering the servo valve in the HS-control.
1
It is denoted with the letter Z in the pump model code.
HS4 with sandwich plate filter on request.
Sandwich plate filter Dimensions HS...Z

The contamination indicator is optical and electrical –
Indicator lamp voltage 24V
2
Size Type
40 and 71 DFBH/HC60Z10D2.0/V-L24
125 to 355 DFBH/HC110Z10D2.0/V-L24

3
Schematic
Example: A4VSG
RKV
P
4
T T B A P
SP 5
B1 B MB RKV
P
S
U
A1
6
U S MS M1R5R6 R7 K1 K2 T R(L) R4 R3R2 M2
Size A2 A3 A4 A5
7
40 216 342 327 300
71 212 350 335 312
125 / 180 272 374 359 376 R(L)
250 / 355 272 411 396 438

952
Basically the installation instructions for the respective variable pumps are applicable:
A4VSO – RE 92050
A4VBO – RE 92122
A4VSG – RE 92100
A4CSG – RE 92105
Only the control versions HM1, HM2 and HS4M are suitable for oil immersed (under fluid level) operation.
953
Notes
8
954
General safety information

– The control systems HM, HS, HS4 and EO were designed for operation in open loop circuits (A4VSO, A4VBO) or closed circuits
(A4VSG, A4CSG).
– Systems design, installation and commissioning of the axial piston unit require trained technicians or tradesmen.
– Before operating the axial piston unit make sure to read the relevant operating manuel carefully and completely. If needed, request
this information from Rexroth
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being burned; take
suitable safety measures (wear protective clothing).
– Pressure ports:
All materials and port threads are selected and designed in such a manner, that they can withstand the peak pressures.
The machine and system manufacturer must ensure, that all connecting elements and hydraulic lines are suitable for the actual
operating conditions (pressures, flow, fluid, temperature) in accordance with the necessary safety factors.
– All given data and information must be adhered to.
– The product has not been released as a component in the safety concept of a total machine system acc. to DIN EN ISO 13849
– The following tightening torques are valid:
- Fittings:
please comply with the manufacturer‘s information regarding the maximum permissible tightening torques for the used fittings.
- Fastening bolts:
for fastening bolts to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torques in each individual case to VDI 2230.
the maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are maximum values for the female threads in the pump casting and may not
be exceeded. For values see table below.
- Plugs:
for the metal plugs, supplied with the axial piston unit the following minimum required tightening torques MV apply (see table)
Maximum permissible Minimum required

Across the flats in socket
Thread size of ports tightening torque for female tightening torque of plugs
of Allan head screw
thread MG max MV
A4VSO, A4VSG, A4CSG
M10 x 1 DIN 3852-1 30 Nm 12 Nm 5 mm
M14 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 80 Nm 35 Nm 6 mm
M18 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 140 Nm 60 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 210 Nm 80 Nm 10 mm
M27 x 2 DIN 3852-1 330 Nm 135 Nm 12 mm
G 1/4 in DIN 3852-2 70 Nm 30 Nm 6 mm
A4VBO
M10 x 1 ISO 6149 30 Nm 20 Nm 5 mm
M14 x 1.5 ISO 6149 80 Nm 45 Nm 6 mm
M18 x 1.5 ISO 6149 140 Nm 70 Nm 8 mm
M22 x 1.5 ISO 6149 210 Nm 100 Nm 10 mm
M27 x 2 ISO 6149 330 Nm 170 Nm 12 mm
Axial piston units ced or given to third parties without its consent.
72160 Horb, Germany concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be de-
Telephone +49 (0) 74 51 92-0 rived from our information. The information given does not release the user from
Fax +49 (0) 74 51 82 21
Subject to change.
955

Electro-hydraulic control
RE 92 084/07.04 1/16
with proportional solenoid EP
for closed circuit operation
for variable pump

A4CSG series 3
A4VSG series 1and 3
Contents Features
Ordering code 2 – Electro-proportional control current dependent
EP-Electro-hydraulic control with proportional solenoid 3 – High control accuracy
Technical data and circuit drawing 4 – With fail-safe to zero flow (spring centered) on power loss
Pressure control 5 – Emergency manual override
EPA with pressure control for port A only 6 – Use of standard proportional amplifiers possible
EPGA with remote pressure control for port A only 7
EPB with pressure control for port B only 8
EPGB with remote pressure control for port B only 9
EPD with pressure control for both ports A and B 10 Further information:
EPG with remote pressure control for both ports A and B 11 Variable pump A4CSG Size 250...750 RE 92105
Unit dimensions EP 12 Variable pump A4VSG Size 40...1000 RE 92100
Unit dimensions EPA / EPGA 13
Unit dimensions EPB / EPGB 14
Unit dimensions EPD / EPG 15
Plug version 16
956
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG | Industrial Hydraulics A4CSG..EP | RE 92 084/07.04
Ordering code
A4 G EP... / –
Mounting flange
Through drive
Service ports
Boost pump
Shaft end
Filtration
Valves
Series
Seals
Axial piston unit
Compact unit, For detailed data see: RE 92105 – A4CSG
● A4CS RE 92100 – A4VSG
swash plate design, variable
Swash plate design, variable ❍ A4VS
Type of operation
Pump, closed circuit G
Size
Displacement Vg max (cm3) 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Control and adjustment devices

Electro-hydraulic control, with proportional solenoid EP...
Pressure control 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

without pressure control – without code ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍
with pressure control in A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ .. A
with remote pressure control in A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ..GA
with pressure control in B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ..B
with remote pressure control in B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ..GB
with pressure control both sides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ..D
with remote pressure control both sides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ..G
● = available ❍ = in preparation
957
RE 92 084/07.04 | A4CSG..EP Industrial Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/16
EP - Electro-hydraulic control with proportional solenoid

The EP control adjusts the pump displacement proportional to the solenoid current.
The mechanical feedback system ensures a reliable and secure center (zero flow) position on power loss. This push-back to zero
flow position is assited by the standard spring centering.
There are two solenoids: one for each swivel direction. 1
Standard is an emergency manual override on each solenoid. On actuation, these enable an adjustment of displacement from zero
to Vgmax (proportional to applied force).
To control the solenoids, we recommend the use of current controlled amplifiers with PWM-signal (pulse width modulation),
eg. VT 10159 (corresponds to VT 3000 but with 100 Hz see RE 29935). Please order separately.
Flows in both swivel directions can be limited by mechanical stops between Vgmax and 50% Vgmax, for the size 500 between Vgmax
and 70% Vgmax. 2

I in mA (solenoid a) Direction of rotation-solenoid-direction of flow
740 Direction Solenoid Swivel Direction Pressure

of rotation range1) of flow side 3
clockwise b right B to A A
280
a left A to B B
Vg 1,0 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 Vg
– c. b right A to B B
Vg max 280 Vg max
clockwise a left B to A A
1
) compare swivel angle indicator. 4
740
15° 0° 15°
right
rechts
I in mA (solenoid b) left
links
8
958
Technical data and circuit drawing

Circuit drawing EP Technical data – electrical
Example A4CSG250EP/30X-XXXXXF344N Operating voltage 24V
Nominal current 800 mA
B MB K1 MA A Control current
proportional valve Beginning of control at Vg0 280 mA
hydraulic End of control at Vgmax 740 mA
K4
control device Current limit at Umax 1,05 A
MK4 Nom. resistance at 20°C (R20) 19 Ω
Max. duty cycle 100% (S1)
Dither frequency 100 – 200 Hz
for PWM-signal (Recommended 100 Hz)
a b
Class of isolation F (Tmax = 155°C)

ME3 Type of plug DIN EN 175 301-803/ISO 4400
E3 see page 16
Protection to DIN/EN 60529 IP 65
Emergency override Pressure plate in rubber cap
Force to actuate 180 N for Vgmax
manual override
Operating temperature coils 130°C Danger: see
safety information page 16
Formula for calculation of resistance

at T > 20 °C
MABP U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS M2
R20 x (235 + T)
RW =
255
Technical data – hydraulics

Size 40 71 125/180 250/355 500 750
Travel of control piston smax mm 14,2 17,1 20,7 25,9 32,6 37
Area of control piston A cm2 3,9 6,4 9 14,4 18,8 28,5
Control volume VSmax cm3 5,5 11 18,7 37,3 61,4 105
Min. required control pressure pmin bar double boost pressure in M1 (measuring port small control chamber)
Control time* (at 200 bar high press.) t s 0,08 0,09 0,10 0,15 0,75 1,0
Hysteresis 5...7 % of Vgmax
Repeatability < 2 % von Vgmax
* with integrated pressure control longer control times are possible dependent on difference between actual operating pressure
and setting of pressure control.
959
Pressure control
The pressure control is an additional function, which regulates pump displacement as soon as a pre-set command value of
pressure is reached. This max pressure is set at a pilot pressure control valve, and if this pressure is exceeded the pressure
control valve opens and de-strokes the pump until this pre-set pressure is reached again.
The pressure control is available as an option: EPA in port A only (circuit drawings see page 6)
EPB in port B only (circuit drawings see page 8) 1
EPD in both ports A and B (circuit drawings see page 10)
Adjustment range 50...350 bar
Standard setting of pressure control is 350 bar, other settings please state in clear text when ordering. The pressure control
settings must be around 30 bar lower than the settings of the high pressure relief valves (A4CSG), in order to avoid that the high
pressure relief valves open before the pressure control is activated (heat development and loss of energy).
2
Characteristic
High press. relief setting (max. 380 bar)

Operating press. pA,B
Adjustment of relief valves at beginning of opening

30 bar
3
Pressure control
Adjustment directly at pressure control valve (EPA, EPB, EPD)
or at remote pressure relief (EPGA, EPGB, EPG)
(see instructions about setting)
Vg
Displacement
Vgmax
5
Remote pressure control
Remote setting of pressure control is accomplished via ports XA resp. XB.
The external pressure relief valves do not belong to the scope of supply.
Recommended: direct operated relief valve DBD 6 (RE 25 402)
Max. line lenght between pump and external relief valve not to exceed 2 m.
6
Standard setting of differential pressure at pressure control valve 30 bar. Pilot oil consumption in this case approx. 2L/min.
If a different setting is required please state in clear text (range 14 - 50 bar).
Information for adjustment of remote pressure control:

Setting of external pressure relief valve plus differential pressure at pressure control valve = pressure control setting.
Example: external pressure relief valve: 320 bar 7
differential pressure at pressure control valve: 30 bar
results in pressure control setting of 320 + 30 = 350 bar
Optional remote pressure control : EPGA in port A only (circuit drawing see page 7)
EPGB in port B only (circuit drawing see page 9) 8
EPG in both ports A and B (circuit drawing see page 11)
960
EPA with pressure control for port A only

The pressure control valve regulates the pressure in port A.
Circuit drawing sizes 250 and 355
B MB K1 M A A
K4
MK4
Press. control valve, Press. control valve,
direction of rotation direction of rotation
clockwise c. clockwise
a b
ME3
E3
Ports
M1 Measuring port small control chamber
MABP U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS M2 M2 Measuring port large control chamber
B MB K1 MA A
K4
MK4
a b clockwise c. clockwise
ME3 M2
E3 M1
Ports
MAB U K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS M2 Measuring port large control chamber
961
EPGA with remote pressure control in port A only

Remote setting of pressure control is accomplished via port XA. The external relief valve is not included in the supply.

1
B MB K1 MA A
External relief valve does
not belong to supply
K4
MK4 XA XA
Press. control valve, Press. control valve, 2
a b
ME3
E3 3
Ports
4
XA Pilot port remote pressure control in A

5
B MB K1 MA A Pressure relief valve

does not belong to
supply
K4
XA XA 6
MK4
ME3 M2
E3 M1 7
Ports
8
XA Pilot port remote pressure control in A
962
EPB with pressure control in port B only

The pressure control valve regulates the pressure in port B.
B MB K1 M A A
K4
MK4
a b
ME3
E3
Ports
B M B K1 M A A
K4
MK4
ME3 M2
E3 M1
Ports
963
EPGB with remote pressure control in port B only

Remote setting of pressure control is accomplished via port XB. The external relief valve does not belong to the supply.

1
B MB K1 MA A
Pressure relief valve
does not belong to
K4 supply
MK4 XB XB
Press. control valve, Press. control valve, 2
a b
ME3
E3 3
Ports
4
XB Pilot port remote pressure control in B

5
B MB K1 MA A Pressure relief valve

does not belong to
supply
K4
MK4 XB XB 6
ME3 M2
E3 M1 7
Ports
8
XB Pilot port remote pressure control in B
964
EPD with pressure control in both ports A and B

Two pressure relief valves control the pressure independently in ports A resp. B.
Circuit drawing EPD sizes 250 and 355
B MB K 1 M A A
K4
MK4
a b
ME3
E3
Press. control valves, Press. control valves,
Ports
M2 Measuring port large control chamber
MABP U M1 K2 K3 T R(L) E2 E1 S MS M2
Circuit drawing EPD sizes 500 and 750
B M B K1 M A A
K4
MK4
Press. control Press. control
valves, valves,
a b direction of direction of
rotation rotation
ME3 M2
E3 M1
Ports
965
EPG with remote pressure control in both ports A and B

The remote setting of pressure is accomplished via ports XA and XB. The external relief valves do not belong to the scope off supply.
Circuit drawing EPG sizes 250 and 355

1
B MB K1 MA A Pressure relief valves

do not belong
to supply
K4
MK4 XA XB XB XA 2
a b
ME3
3
E3
Press. control valves, Press. control valves,
Ports
XA Pilot port for remote pressure control in A 4
XB Pilot port for remote pressure control in B
Circuit drawing EPG sizes 500 und 750

5
Pressure relief valves
B M B K1 M A A do not belong
scope of supply
K4
MK4 XA XB XA XB
6
Press. control Press. control
valves, valves,
a b direction of direction of
rotation rotation
ME3 M2
E3 M1 7
Ports
XA Pilot port for remote pressure control in A
XB Pilot port for remote pressure control in B 8
966
Unit dimensions EP
Before finalising your design please
request a certified installation drawing.
Sizes 250 and 355
Hydraulic control
device
Proportional valve
A3
U K
T B S
Emergency override
solenoid A
A2
M1
R
L
R(L) M2
A1
Emergency override
solenoid B
Unit dimensions
Size A1 A2 A3
250 252 279 243 For detailed dimensions and technical data see the main data
sheets A4CSG RE 92105 or A4VSG RE 92100.
355 252 279 243

M1 Measuring port small control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
M2 Measuring port large control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep (plugged) 140 Nm
1
) see safety information
967
Unit dimensions EPA / EPGA

Sizes 250 and 355 Sizes 500 and 750

A4 to mounting flange
Press. control valve
XA 1
Press. control valve R(L) M2
XA
Schl.weite:
M36x2
55
mm
A3
A5
2
A3
A5
Schl.weite: 19 mm
M20 (x2.5) M20 (x2.5)
B B 3
Solenoid A Solenoid A
XA XA
M1
A2
4
A2
M1
M16 (x2)
M10x1.00
M8 (x1.25)
A6
A6
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
R(L) 5
R(L) M2 M16 (x2)

A1
A1 6
Solenoid B
Solenoid B
Unit dimensions
250 252 279 243 428 228 13 7
For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pump
355 252 279 243 428 228 13
see main data sheet A4CSG RE 92105 or A4VSG RE 92100.
500 306 332 342 469 315 136
750 315 332 372 501 345 136
XA Pilot port 8
for remote pressure control in A DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (with EPA plugged) 80 Nm
M1 Measuring port small control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep 2) (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
M22x1,5; 14 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 210 Nm
M2 Measuring port large control chamber DIN 3852 M18x1,5; 12 deep 2) (Size 250 a. 355) 140 Nm
M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 80 Nm
1 2
) plugged
968

Unit dimensions EPB / EPGB request a certified installation drawing.

XB
A4 to mounting flange R(L) M2
XB Pressure control valve
Schl.weite:
M36x2
55
mm
A3
A7
A3
A5
M20 (x2.5) M20 (x2.5)
B B
Solenoid A Solenoid A
XB M1
A2
A2
M1
A6
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
R(L)
R(L) M2 A6
A1
M16 (x2)
A1
XB
Solenoid B
Solenoid B
Unit dimensions
250 252 279 243 428 228 13 —
355 252 279 243 428 228 13 — For detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pump
see main data sheets A4CSG RE 92105 or A4VSG RE 92100.
500 306 332 342 469 — 136 304
750 315 332 372 501 — 136 304
XB Pilot port
for remote pressure control in B DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (with EPB plugged) 80 Nm
M22x1,5; 14 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 210 Nm
M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 80 Nm
1 2
) see safety information ) plugged
969
Unit dimensions EPD / EPG


XA XB
1
A7 to mounting flange R(L) M2
A4 to mounting flange XA XB
Schl.weite:
M36x2
55
mm
A3
A5
A7
2
A3
A5
Schl.weite: 19 mm
M20 (x2.5) M20 (x2.5)
B B 3
Solenoid A Solenoid A Press. control valve A
XA XB XA
M1
A2
A2
4
M1 M16 (x2)
M10x1.00
M8 (x1.25)
A6
A6
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
M5 (x0.8) M5 (x0.8)
R(L) 5
A6
R(L) M2
A1
M16 (x2)
A1
Press. control valve B
Press. control valve A XB 6

Press. control valve B
Solenoid B Solenoid B
Unit dimensions
250 252 279 243 428 228 13 468
7
Detailed dimensions and technical data of the variable pump
355 252 279 243 428 228 13 468
see main data sheets A4CSG RE 92105 or A4VSG RE 92100.
500 306 332 342 469 315 136 304
750 315 332 372 501 345 136 334
XA, XB Pilot ports 8

for remote pressure control DIN 3852 M14x1,5; 12 deep (with EPD plugged) 80 Nm
M22x1,5; 14 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 210 Nm
M14x1,5; 12 deep 2) (Size 500 a. 750) 80 Nm
1 2
) plugged
970
Type of connector
Hirschmann-connector
to DIN EN 175301-803/ISO 4400
Type of protection IP 65
Male plug: to DIN EN 175 301–803/ISO 4400 with screwed connection for cable joint M16x1,5 for cable ø 4,5...10mm does not
belong to supply of EP, is available however under the following Rexroth Material-Nr.: R902602623 (black)
or R902602622 (grey)
Safety information
– The pump A4V(C)SG was designed for operation in closed circuits.
– Tightening torques: all max. tightening torques, mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and cannot be exceeded
(they represent the max. permissible value for the female threads in the castings)
For fastening screws to DIN 13 we recommend to check the permissible tightening torques in each
individual case acc. to VDI 2230 dated 2003.
– Warning-high temperature hazard
During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being burned!
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations set
Mobile Hydraulics forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their consent
72160 Horb a.N., Germany derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
Tel. +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0
that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
Fax. +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
www.boschrexroth.com/bri
971

RE 92 088/08.04 1/12
Electro-hydraulic Additional to. RE 92 050
Control system DFE1
Size 125...355
Series 30
open circuit
Contents Features
Type code - standard range 2

The DFE1 control system is used for the electro-hydraulic
Components 4 control of
Functional description 5 – Pressure
DFE1 6 – Flow
DFE1Y 7 – Power (optional)
DFE1Z 8
The control system is used together with the axial piston pump
Transition at jump in command input for swivel angle 9 A4VSO in sizes 125, 180, 250, and 355 acc. to RE 92050.
Quality of control 10
Unit dimensions 10 350
Safety information 11 p
α
0
0 100
Swivel angle α [%]
972
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG | Industrial Hydraulics Electro-hydraulic Control system DFE1 | RE 92 088/08.04
Type code - standard range

Fluid/Version 125 180 250 355
Mineral oil (Without prefix)
HF-Fluids on request E
High speed - - H
Axial piston unit
Swashpate design, variable, industrial use 350 bar, peak pressure 400 bar A4VS
Mode of operation
Pump, open circuit O
Size
Displacement Vgmax [cm3] 125 180 250 355
Type of control
Electronic pressure-flow control
internal supply of control oil, swivel range -100% to +100% DFE1
external supply of control oil, swivel range -100% bis +100% DFE1Y
external supply of control oil, swivel range 0 bis +100% DFE1Z
Series
30
looking at shaft end clockwise R
c. clockwise L
Seals
NBR Nitrile-Rubber to DIN ISO 1629 (shaft seal in FKM) P
FKM Fluoro-Rubber to DIN ISO 1629 V
Shaft end
Cyl. with key DIN 6885 P
Splined end DIN 5480 Z
available
in preperation
- not available
973
RE 92 088/08.04 | Electro-hydraulic Control system DFE1 Industrial Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/12
A4VS O / 30 - B
Fluid/Version
Axial piston unit
Mode of operation
Size 1
Type of control
Series
Seals
Shaft end
2
Mounting flange
ISO 4-hole B
Port for service lines
Pressure port B, Inlet port S: SAE on side 90° offset, fixing screws metric 13
Pressure port B, Inlet port S: SAE on side 90° offset, fixing screws metric
2. Press. portB1 opposite B-, on delivery closed with blanking plate 25 3
Through drive 125 180 250 355

Without through drive N00
Flange ISO Coupler for splined shaft DIN 5480 Seal
125, 4-hole 32x2x30x14x9g radial K31
4
224, 4-hole 60x2x30x28x9g radial - - K35
224, 4-hole 70x3x30x22x9g radial - - - K77
Flange SAE J744 Coupler for splined shaft Seal
82-2 (A) 5/8 in (A) radial K01
82-2 (A) 3/4 in (A-B) radial K52
101-2 (B) 7/8 in (B) axial K02
101-2 (B) 7/8 in (B) radial K68
101-2 (B) 1in (B) radial K04 5
127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in (C) radial K07
127-2 (C) 1 1/2 in (C-C) axial K24
152-4 (D) 1 3/4 in (D) axial - K17
with through dr. shaft,without coupler,without adapter flange,closed with cover K99
Combination pumps
If a second Rexroth pump is to be factory mounted, then both type codes are to be connected wit a „+“ . Type code 1. Pump + Type
8
code 2. Pumpe
Example: A4VSO 250 DFE1/30R - PPB13K34 + A4VSO 125 DFE1/30R - PZB13N00
If an auxiliary pump is to be factory mounted , please contact us.

974
Components
The controlsystem DFE1 comprises the following components: – Analog amplifier VT 5041-2X to RE 30 240 (please order
– Well proven high pressure axial piston pump A4VSO in separately)
swashplate designfor use in heavy duty industrial applications The system contains the following features:
– Proportional valve VT-DFP-A-2X for exact control with feed
back of valve spool position (see RE 29 016) – Pump combinations are posible
– Inductive displacement transducer for feedback of – Control pressure internal or external via pilot pump (see
swashplate angle page 7 and 8)
– Pressure transducer HM 12-1X for feedback of system – Fast decompression of trapped fluid by letting the pump go
pressure to RE 29 933 (optional, only required with over center as a standard (see page 6)
pressure and power control functions, please order
– Rotary group optimised for long life in standby operation
separately)
IVent
To system
αactual
Sactual pactual
Error signal Release
Prequired αrequired prequired
Machine control
975
Functional description
The power,pressure and displacement control of pump A4VSO- The necessary oil to operate the hydraulic control system can be
DFE1 is accomplished by means of an electro-proportional control supplied in two different ways:
valve (4). A current to the proportional valve results in an oil flow to
1. Internal (DFE1) from own pump outlet (page 6)
the pump’s control piston (2), which determines via the displacement
transducer (3) the swashplate angle (1) and thus the pump flow. 2. External (DFE1Y, DFE1Z) from separate system (page 7/8) 1
The proportional valve is controlled with amplifier card VT

With the pump in standstill, and the control system without pressure,
5041-2X. This card processes all control signals which are
the bias spring will push the pump to max. displacement (Vgmax).
necessary to operate pump A4VSO.DFE1 Standard are input
signals for pressure and swivel angle as well as an optional
Standby pressure (DFE1):
signal for power control. The actual value for pressure is picked
up by a pressure transducer. A displacement transducer picks
With a de-energized proportional valve and a closed pump 2
up the actual pump swivel angle. The amplifier card compares
outlet the pump will go to Vgmin - Standby pressure.In this
these actual values with the command inputs. A minimum value
condition the pressure level will reach 4 to 8 bar. The same
generator assures the activation of the appropriate controller.
applies also in case of an error signal or missing control
The output signal of this generator is used as the input signal
release.
to the proportional valve solenoid. In order to achieve a better
quality of control, the proportional valve operates as a
If the standby pressure of 4 to 8 bar is not desired, it is possible to
secundary control loop.
use type DFE1Y, or DFE1Z . 3
1 2
3
5
8
976
DFE1
Control oil supply internal, Fail safe feature
Swivel range -100% to +100%
Below 4 to 8 bar the pump will stroke to larger displacement;
With DFE1 the control energy is taken out of the main pump an undesired operation with negative flow cannot occur.
flow. The min. pressure must be at least 4 to 8 bar. (see also
point „Standby pressure“on page 5 and „Fail safe feature“)
This min pressure is necessary for the control of flow, pressure 100
and power. Below this pressure, the pump tends to go to max. αist
displacement regardless of the input signals.
α [%]
0
time
As a special feature the pump is able to change the direction
-50
of flow.This capability to swivel over center enables a fast de-
compression of trapped oil volume. 240
p ist p ist
p [bar]
160
p soll1 p soll1
80
0
time
To system
Pressure transducer2)
P
I/U analog amplifier
Pressure command input 0 to 10V VT5041-2X/1
VT5041-2X/31)
Power command input1) 0V to 10V
System Flow command input ±10V
relief
Release
Error
U
S
Scope of supply
B1 B MB
S
U
1)
optional, power limiting
2)
only needed with pressure resp. power control
977
DFE1Y
External supply of control oil,
Swivel range -100% to +100%
With DFE1Y the control energy has to be supplied externally, This control version features a reversal of the direction of flow,
eg. a gear pump. An automatic change-over to internal supply also at pressures below 4 to 8 bar. This option enables a fast 1
is accomplished by means of a shuttle valve. decompression of trapped oil volume by swiveling over center.
To system
Press. transducer2)
P
I/U
analog amplifier
Press. command input 0 to 10V VT5041-2X/1 2
Power command input1) 0 to 10V VT5041-2X/31)
System Flow command input ±10V
relief
Release
Error
0,2 bar3)
3
20 to 50 bar
Anti cavitation valve
U
S 4
Scope of supply
B1 B MB Z
S
U
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) M
Caution!
– In the case of an externally supplied control system (Swivel – When an error is detected, the output stage switches off and
range ± 100%), the function, which swivels the pump to zero the external supply causes the pump to swivel towards the
7
stroke when the output stage of the control card is de- negative limit stop. Upon detection of an error message, it is
energized is inactive. essential that the machine control responds (e.g drive motor
of the pump must be switched off, external supply of the
– In the case of a de-energized output stage of the control card
control system must be interrupted).
(e.g. in case of an error), the external control pressure pushes
the variable pump's swashplate to the negative limit stop – The command values for pressure and flow must always be
(100% flow is delivered from the system to the tank). In order greater than zero (pcomm ≥ 3bar, α comm ≥ 5%), since, due to
to avoid cavitation the use of a checkvalve (anti cavitation drift or inaccurate control, there is no exact “zero“ pressure 8
valve with 0,2 bar spring) is required. or “zero“ swivel angle. Under unfavourable conditions,
smaller command values can cause cavitation.
1)
optional, Power limiting
2)
only needed with press. resp. power control
978
DFE1Z
Control oil supply external, Qmin-limiting screw which prevents the unit from going over
swivel range 0 to 100% center.
Version DFE1Z has an input port for external supply of control Therefore, the option of fast decompression of trapped oil
flow, e.g. from a gear pump. The DFE1Z control offers a volume does not exist with this version.
To system
Press. transducer2)
P
I/U
analog amplifier
VT5041-2X/1
Press. command input 0 to 10V
VT5041-2X/31)
Power command input1) 0 to 10V
System Flow command input 0 to 10V

relief
Relaese
Error
20 to 50 bar
U
S
Scope of supply
B1 B MB Z
S
U
U S MS K1 K2 T R(L) M
1)
optional, power limiting
2)
only needed with press. resp. power control
979
Transition at jump in command input for swivel angle

Size 125, p = 100 bar
Swivel angle actual value [%]

100 100
80 80
60 60
1
40 40
20 20
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
time [ms] time [ms]

2
Size 180, p = 100 bar

100 100
80 80
3
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200 4

time [ms] time [ms]
Size 250, p = 100 bar

5
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
6
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
time [ms] time [ms]
Size 355, p = 100 bar 7

Swivel angle actual valuet [%]
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
8
20 20
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
time [ms] time [ms]

980
Quality of control
Swivel angle control Pressure control
Linearity tolerance < 1,0% < 1,5%
Hysteresis < 0,2% < 0,2%
Repeatibility < 0,2% < 0,2%
(The above values are only valid when using the appropriate components acc. to the ordering code )
Unit dimensions
Sizes 125 to 355 (Shown: size 125 in clockwise rotation)
A6 A6
A3 A5
A7
R(L)
Z, M1
M, M2
A2
A8
K2 K1
A1
MB MS
T
X S
A4
125 [mm] 121 298 250,5 376 147 177 50 209
180 [mm] 121 298 250,5 376 147 177 50 209
250 [mm] 154 345 310,5 438 212 179 55 259
355 [mm] 154 345 310,5 464 212 179 55 259
Ports 125 180 250 355

Z Control press. port M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5
B Pressure port [in] 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2
T Case drain M33x2 M33x2 M42x2 M42x2
MB Gauging port system pressure M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5
MS Gauging port inlet pressure M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M14x1,5
S Inlet port [in] 21/2 3 3 4
K1, K2 Flushing port M33x2 M33x2 M42x2 M42x2
R(L) Oil fill or bleed port M33x2 M33x2 M42x2 M42x2
M1, M2 Gauging port control pressure M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M18x1,5 M18x1,5
981
Safety information
– Pump A4VSO was designed for operation in open loop circuits.
–Tightening torques: 1
The tightening torques mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and must not be exceeded (max. values for thread).
Manufacturers information concerning the maximum permitted tightening torques of the various fittings are to be observed!
For DIN 13 mounting bolts, we recommend that tightening torques be checked on a case by case basis in accordance with
VDI 2230, published 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being
burned!
2
8
982
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations set
72160 Horb am Neckar, Germany derived from our information. The given information does not release the user
Phone +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0 from the obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21 that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
info.brm-ak@boschrexroth.de Subject to change.
983

Differential pressure control, RE 92 709/05.04 1/8
electrically adjustable
open circuit
for variable pump A10V(S)O...EFx.../31 A10VO...EFx.../53

A10V(S)O series 31
A10VO series 53
Contents Features
Ordering code - standard range, series 31 2 – Electro-proportional differential pressure control, current
dependent
Ordering code - standard range, series 53 3
– High control accuracy
Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable 4
– Fail safe behaviour, e.g. for operation of brake or steering
Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable 5
functions
Unit dimensions, series 31 6
– Use of standard amplifiers possible
Unit dimensions, series 53 7
– Compact design
Connector options and electronic controls 8
Applications
– More resolution in fine metering range

– Provides easy control of max. flow
– Enables speed sensing power control
– Damping-end of cylinder travel
Variable pump A10VSO/31 size 18...140 RE 92 711
Variable pump A10V(S)O/31 size 18...140 RE 92 701
Variable pump A10VO/53 size 10...85 in preparation
984
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG | Mobile Hydraulics Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable | RE 92 709/05.04
Ordering code - standard range, series 31

A10V(S)O...EFx series 31
A10V(S) O / 31 -
see RE 92 711
RE 92 701
Axial piston unit

Swashplate design, variable, nom. pressure 280 bar, peak pressure 350 bar A10V(S)
Mode of operation
Size, resp. displacement Vgmax [cm3]
A10VO series 31 — 28 45 71 100 140
A10VSO series 31 18 28 45 71 100 140
Control devices
Pressure-flow control
12V EF 1 D F — EF1DF
24V EF 2 D F — EF2DF
Pressure-flow control, no connection between X-T
12V EF 1 D S — EF1DS
24 EF 2 D S — EF2DS
Series
31
Connector design
Deutsch-connector, permanently moulded P
available
in preparation
- not available
985
RE 92 709/05.04 | Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable Mobile Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth AG 3/8
Ordering code - standard range, series 53

A10VO...EFx(LAx) series 53
A10V O / 53 -
Data sheet in 1
preparation
Axial piston unit

Swashplate design, variable, nom. pressure 250 bar, peak pressure 315 bar A10V
Mode of operation
2
Size, resp. displacement Vgmax [cm3]
A10VO series 53 28 45 63 85
Control devices
Pressure-flow control
12V EF 1 D F EF1DF 3
24V EF 2 D F EF2DF
Pressure-flow control, no connection between X-T
12V EF 1 D S EF1DS
24 EF 2 D S EF2DS
Pressure-flow-torque control, no connection between X-T
12V beginning of control at 10...35 bar LA 5 S 1 LA5S1
4
36...70 bar LA 6 S 1 LA6S1
71...105 bar LA 7 S 1 LA7S1
106...140 bar LA 8 S 1 LA8S1
141...230 bar LA 9 S 1 LA9S1
24V beginning of control at 10...35 bar LA 5 S 2 LA5S2
36...70 bar LA 6 S 2 LA6S2
71...105 bar LA 7 S 2 LA7S2 5
106...140 bar LA 8 S 2 LA8S2
141...230 bar LA 9 S 2 LA9S2
Series
53
Connector design
Deutsch-connector, permanently moulded 6
P
8
available
in preparation
- not available
986
Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable
This control is based on a pressure-flow controller (see RE 92 Technical data - electrical

701 or RE 92 711 for series 31, data sheet for series 53 in
preperation). Version EF1.../LA...1 EF2.../LA...2
In addition to the pressure control, the flow control function Operating voltage 12V – 20% 24V – 20%
enables an adjustment of the pump output flow to match the Control range 0–1200 mA 0–600 mA
actual required flow of the hydraulic user through a controlled
Nominal resistance
differential pressure over an orifice (e.g. valve opening) bet- 5,5: 22,7:
at 20°C (R20)
ween pump and hydraulic user.
Limit current at Umax 1,54 A 0,77A
With the differential pressure control it is possible to reduce
the pressure difference by 10 bar via a solenoid onto the pump Max. duty cycle 100 %
control valve. To control the solenoid force a PWM signal is Operating temperature
-20°C to + 115°C
used (pulse width modulation). range (valve)
The electrically adjustable differential pressure control enables Ditherfrequency for
100 – 200 Hz
the following functions: PWM signal
– Wider range of fine control for delicate movements Solenoid class of material H (Tmax = 180°C)
– Adaptation of max. flow for each user Calculation formula for resistance
– Use as speed sensing power control at T > 20 °C
– Damping at end of cylinder travel
R20 • (235 + T)
Characteristic of differential pressure control RW =
255
Warning - avoid being burned:
Adjustment value 'p [bar]
40 The pump and especially the valve will be extremely hot during
. 'pmax = 10 bar and after operation!
. Wear appropriate protection.
.
.
.
22
min. 12
0 Current I [%] I/Imax = 1
On delivery the 'p value is set at 35 bar. If another setting is

required please state in clear text.
With the valve in the pump outlet closed, the X-port connected
to the tank, and the solenoid de-energized the pump outlet will
show a standby pressure value dependent on the 'p-setting.
This standby pressure will be approx. 3 bar higher than the
'p-setting.
Example:
With a 'p-setting of 25 bar, the standby pressure level will be
around 28 ± 2 bar.
Important:
With max. current to the solenoid the differential pressure 'p
may not fall below 12 bar.
987
Differential pressure control, electrically adjustable

Basic controller A10V(S)O...EFx series 31 Basic controller A10VO...EFx series 53
The controller is based on a pressure-flow control (see also RE The controller is based on a pressure-flow control (see also
92 701 or RE 92 711). data sheet A10VO/53, in preparatiom).
1
Dynamic characteristic — change in solenoid current (command value)
'p/'pmax [%]
100
0
Regelzeit t
Stroking time tSA De-stroking time tSE

Measured values to this characteristic are available upon request. 3
Circuit drawing A10V(S)O...EFx series 31 Circuit drawing A10VO...EFx series 53
X X
does not be-

long to scope does not be-
of supply long to scope
of supply
L L
B 5
B
S S
6
L1 L1
Connetions
B Pressure port
S Inlet port
L, L1 Case drain port (L1 plugged)
X Pilot pressure port 7
Control data
See RE 92 701 or RE 92 711 for A10V(S)O series 31. Data sheet for A10VO series 53 in preparation.
8
988

Unit dimensions, series 31 request a certified installation drawing.
Ports at rear - version 11N00
A9
A8 A7
11.5
7/16-20UNF-2B
X
A3
A2
Plug P
A4
Position of valve
L1 for c. clockwise
Solenoid can be rotated1) rotation Position of valve for
clockwise rotation
Ports on side - version 12N00
A1
11.5 Position of valve for
7/16-20UNF-2B
clockwise rotation
X
Position of valve
for c. clockwise
L rotation
A3
A2
Plug P
A4
Solenoid can be rotated1) A5

A6
size A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
18 166 40 105 124 109 133 — — —
28 176 40 105 124 119 142 74 209 232
45 192 40 105 124 129 153 82 228 251
71 220 40 105 124 143 167 93 262 285
100 286 40 105 124 148 172 100 327 350
Detailed unit dimensions and technical data of the pumps can be found in the main catalogs RE 92 701 (A10VO) and RE 92 711
(A10VSO).
1) The orientation of the plug is optional by rotation of the solenoid. After rotation the plastic cap must be re-tightened again with 5+1 Nm torque.
989

Unit dimensions, series 53 request a certified installation drawing.
Size 28
Plug P
1
Solenoid can
be rotated1)
180
150
7/16-20UNF-2B
2
16
X
X
106 106.5
123 3
130
Size 63
132 230
108.5 Plug P 168.5
7/8-14UNF-2B 4
X
Solenoid can
be rotated1)
X
11.5
48.2
7/16-20UNF-2B
5
Size 85
246.5
65
181.5 6
11.5
Plug P X
Solenoid can
X be rotated1)
7/16-20UNF-2B
7
147.02
123.5
Detailed unit dimensions and technical data of the pumps can be found in the main catalog (in preparation).
1) The orientation of the plug is optional by rotation of the solenoid. After rotation the plastic cap must be re-tightened again with 5+1 Nm torque.
990
Connector options and electronic controls

Connectors
Option P
Deutsch-connector DT 04-2P permanently moulded
Protection class IP 69K
Male plug: DT 06–2S–EP041)
Rexroth material no.: 02601804
Electronic controls
Control electronic function Electronics Further infromation

PV analog RF 95 023
Electric pressure control Regulated current output VT2000 analog RF 29 904
RC2-22) digital RF 95 200
1) Male plugs not included in scope of supply. Available upon request.
2) Current outputs for 2 valves, seperately controllable.
Safety information
– Pump A10V(S)O was designed for operation in open loop circuits.
The tightening torques mentioned in this data sheet are maximum values and must not be exceeded (max. values for thread).
Manufacturers information concerning the maximum permitted tightening torques of the various fittings is to be observed!
For DIN 13 mounting bolts, we recommend that tightening torques be checked on a case by case basis in accordance with VDI
2230, published 2003.
– During and shortly after operation of a pump the housing and especially a solenoid can be extremely hot, avoid being burned!.
Plant Horb The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements con-
An den Kelterwiesen 14 cerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived
72160 Horb a.N., Germany from our information. The given information does not release the user from the
obligation of own judgement and verification. It must be remembered that our
Telefon +49 (0) 74 51 - 92 0
Telefax +49 (0) 74 51 - 82 21
Subject to change.
991
RE 95533/03.96
Scavenging and Pressure RE

Relief Valve Block SDVB 95533/03.96
Control Elements of the A4VSG and A2P Replaces 01.82
The scavenging and pressure relief valve block serves to main- The set pressure value corresponds to the pressure drop be-
tain the feed pressure, to exhaust excess oil and to limit the tween high and low pressure side. This valve type is extremely
operating pressure in a closed hydraulic circuit. compact in relation to its flow capacity.
Both service ports A and B can be pressurised with high or low The SDVB can also be used as a double-acting pressure relief
pressure as required. The high pressure controlled scavenging valve. When used as a relief valve, the supply line to the sca-
spools ensure that upon changeover of the gigh and low pressure venging valve is closed.
sides the scavenging valve is connected to the low pressure By means of independently or direct mounted unloading valves,
side. the pilot valves can be connected externally with the tank or
Pilot operation of the double acting pressure relief valves allows internally with the low pressure side. With this function the SDVB
simple setting, with minimum force, of the required pressure 30 and 50 can serve as a bypass valve. For high dynamic swivel
value for both pressure sides of the circuit. These settings may operations with flushing and pressure relief valve block SDVB,
be carried out independent of one another. On sizes 30 and 50, when changing the high pressure side there will be free flow
remote control is also possible via external pilot oil connections between A and B for a short time. Direct operated valve blocks
(X and Y). When the relief valves are actuated, oil flows from are suitable for this application and are available in sizes 16
the high pressure to the low pressure side. and 30 on request.
Brueninghaus Hydromatik 1
992
RE 95533/03.96
Scavenging and Pressure Relief Valve Block SDVB
Ordering code
SDVB /
Description
scavenging and pressure relief valve block piloted SDVB
Size
size 16 16
size 30 30
size 50 50
Model (see unit dimensions)

without direct operated flushing valve without pre-load valve N
with direct operated flushing valve without pre-load valve S
with direct operated flushing valve without pre-load valve T*
without direct operated flushing valve with pre-load valve V
with direct operated flushing valve with pre-load valve W
with direct operated flushing valve with pre-load valve Z*
* Model T and Z only for SDVB 16 (in prep.) and SDVB 30
Control type
pilot oil pilot oil unloading
supply drain with / without
internal internal ● 1
internal external ● 2
external internal ● 3
external external ● 4
internal external ● 51)
(de-energised when closed)
internal internal ● 6
with external pilot ports
X-Y (plugged)
internal external ● 71)
(de-energised when open)
1
) both solenoids must be operated simultaneously
Model of port plate

port plate M 33 A
port plate M 42 B
port plate M 48 C
port plate SAE 1 1/2" D
without port plate N
Series
20 30
SDVB 16
Symbols for control type 5 SDVB 30/50
de-energised when closed A open B
Voltages types for control type 5

12 V DC voltage - A closed 1
24 V DC voltage - B open 2
110-R AC voltage 3
220-R AC voltage 4
220-50 AC voltage 5
2 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
993
RE 95533/03.96
Construction
SDVB 16 pre-load valve if A4VSG mounted
SDVB 30 pre-load valve if A4VSG and A2P directly mounted 6
SDVB 50 pre-load valve if A4VSG and A2P directly mounted
994
RE 95533/03.96
Control type (with pre-load valve)
Control Type 1 Control Type 2
K1 Y K1
MB MA MB MA
MSp MSp
B E A B E A
Control Type 3 Control Type 4
K1 Y K1
MB MA MB MA
XA XA
XB XB
MSp MSp
B E A B E A
Control Type 5 Control Type 6 Control Type 7
Y K1 Y K1 Y K1
MB MA MB MA MB MA
XA
XB
MSp MSp MSp
B E A B E A B E A
The types of control shown only apply to size 16.

With the SDVB 30 and 50 there are two X and two Y ports.
Control types for size 30 are same as those for sizes 16 and 50
but without gauge ports MA and MB.
995
RE 95533/03.96
Technical data (partly to VDI 3276)

Design: combined scavenging and pressure relief valves Pressure setting range:
controlled by operating pressure Operating pressure: pv min…pv max = 50…400 bar
Scavenging pressure at nominal flow QNSp: SDVB 16, 30 and 50
Mounting: flange model with O-ring seal (4 fixing holes in are infinitely adjustable. Please state the required pressure 1
housing) setting for operating pressure and scavenging pressure when
ordering. More details see RE 92100.
Pipe connections and connection sizes: see Unit Dimensions
Fluid temperature range
Weight (kg) ϑm min…ϑm max = –20° C…+80° C
Size 16 30 50
without subplate 6,5 23 61 Viscosity range νmin…νmax = 10…1000 mm2/s 2
with subplate 30 68 Nominal flow
Size 16 30 50
Mounting position: optional
Main circuit QN (L/min) 200 600 1200
Direction of flow: from A to B resp. B to A and from A to K1 resp. Scavenging circuit QNSp (L/min) 40 100 200
B to K1
3
Operating pressure range: pN = 0…400 bar
The pressure measured at port XA/B is only identical to the

pressure in the service line as long as the pressure relief valve
is not actuated. Once the pilot valve has begun to open, the
operating pressure in the main line can be around 15% higher.
It is therefore recommended to measure the operating pressure
4
direct at MA or MB resp. A or B.
Δp-Q-Characteristics
Operating pressure p = f (Q) Scavenging pressure pSp = f (QSp)

5
Pressure differential
Operating pressure p (bar)
Size 16
Size 30
Size 50
Δp (bar)
Size 16
Flow Q (L/min) Size 30…50

Size 16
7
Size 30
Size 50
Flow Q (L/min)
Pressure setting (Operating pressure)
Size 16 30 50
8
p (bar/Umdr.) approx. 150 105 105
996
RE 95533/03.96
SDVB 16 Switching pressure

In order to switch both sides of the circuit A and B to the
scavenging valve, a pressure differential between the high
Low pressure pSp (bar)
pressure and low pressure sides is required.

This pressure differential and therefore the switching pressure
on the high pressure side is dependent on the setting on the low
pressure side. With the SDVB 30 and 50, the spring force effect
must also be taken into consideration, since this requires a
pressure increase of around 9 bar until the valve poppet is fully
open (see diagrams on left).
Max. pilot oil volume

QSt max (taken from main circuit)
Size 16 30 50
QSt max (L/min) ≈4 ≈5 ≈6
pHD (bar)
Remote control
To allow the setting of different pressure values for the pressure
relief valves, external pilot oil connections "X" and "Y" are
SDVB 30 and 50
provided for remote control.
Functional variations
The SDVB 16 to 50 may also be used as a double acting pressure
Low pressure pSp (bar)
t
re
effec relief valve.
su If only the double acting pressure relief valve function is required,
es rc
e
pr fo the supply line to the scavenging valve is closed or the pressure
g g
kin rin setting of the scavenging valve is set higher than that on the
ac Sp
Cr relevant low pressure side.
pHD (bar)
Co-ordination with axial piston units
Direct mounting
SDVB Axial piston unit
A4VSG A2P, Series 5
40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 250 355 500 1000
16 ● ● ● ●
30 ● ● ● ● ● ●
50 ● ● ●
997
RE 95533/03.96
Before finalising your design, please request a certified drawing.
Scavenging and Pressure Relief Valve Block SDVB Subject to revision.
Unit Dimensions Size 16
Control Type 1
85 1
M14x1.5
209 12 80
O-Ring 22x3
A/B
44.5
ø25
Z
38.5
ø16
M10
2
ø34
89
129
M22x1.5
Pressure relief valve A
Pressure relief valve B
Model V
12 67 Model W
3
M14x1.5
Control Type 2; 3; 4; 6
50 100
ø25
10
XA XB
11
4
1.5 XA (XB)
Control Type 5; 7 221
5
Y
10
Plug
DIN 43650-AF2-Pg 11 6
is not included in supply
(see RE 08000)
View Z 112
90
50
C D
22.5
Section C-D
7.5
43.5
7
65
87
E
B
32.5
A ø9.5
O-Ring 19x2
70
998
RE 95533/03.96

148
Model N (V)
Control Type 1
Model T (Z)
263
51 173
O-Ring 39x3
B A
A/B
ø30
125
Model S (W)
76
51
M16
24 62
137.5
Pressure relief valve A Pressure relief valve B
Control Type 2; 3; 4; 6 26
ø25
225 M14x1.5
XA XB XA YA
YB
60
YA
60
XA/YA XB/YB XA YA
Control Type 5; 7 26
ø25
225 M14x1.5
XA XB XA YA
YB
60
YA
194
Plug
DIN 43650-AF2-Pg 11
(see RE 08000)
View Z 51
Section A-B Section C-D
33.5
D C pre-load valve
35
110
19
54
M33x2 ø16
8.3
M22x2
ø34
140
999
RE 95533/03.96

188.5
Control Type 1
378 Model N (V)

142
216 1
77 71 O-Ring 57x4
40 40 80 MSp
A/B 51
A B MA/MB
91
96
142
ø50
Z
2
71
97
M24
Model S (W)
92
Pressure relief valve A Pressure relief valve B 32 178
3
Control Type 2; 3; 4; 6 26
ø25
320 M14x1.5
XA XB XA YA
YA YB 80
4
80
XA/YA XB/YB XA YA
Control Type 5; 7 26 5
ø25
320 M14x1.5
XA XB XA YA
YB
80
YA
6
214
Plug
DIN 43650-AF2-Pg 11
(see RE 08000)
7
View Z
ø25
M14x1.5 Section A-B Section C-D
B MB MSp MA A pre-load valve
40 40 8
185
C D ø29
21
55
90
M48x2 O-Ring 50.47x2.62

M42x2 ø65
E
20
ø58
MSp
186
1000
RE 95533/03.96
Subplate
SDVB 16 (M33x2) SDVB 16 (M42x2)

164
164
150
150
92
78
92
78
40
46
60
7
64
7
ø16 ø9 ø16
17
27
35
45
18
20
M33x2
M42x2
ø9 ø47
ø58
SDVB 30 SDVB 50
20 20
20.5
96.8
224
122
72
22.25 22.25
ø140 62 62
ø24 ø30
ø50 M20
50
22
45
M48x2 ø50 ø14

ø56 ø14
ø250
1001
RE 95533/03.96
Unit Dimensions
A4VSG with scavenging block SDVB 16
Unit Dimensions Ports

Size A1 A2 A3 MA, MB MSP K1
40 174 144 approx. 364 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M22x1,5; 14 deep 8
71 177 166 389 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M22x1,5; 14 deep
125 196,5 203 442 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M22x1,5; 14 deep
180 196,5 203 442 M14x1,5 M14x1,5 M22x1,5; 14 deep
250 317 248 448 M14x1,5 M22x1,5 M33x2; 18 deep
355 319 248 455 M14x1,5 M22x1,5 M33x2; 18 deep
500 353 279 487 M14x1,5 M22x1,5 M33x2; 18 deep
1002
RE 95533/03.96
Plant Horb
www.boschrexroth.com/bri that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
1003
1004
1005
8
1006
1007
8
1008
1009
8
1010
Plant Horb
www.boschrexroth.com/bri that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.
1011
Universal Through Drive

for Variable Pump
A10VSO, A4VSO, A15VSO and A11V(L)O RE 95581
Issue: 11.2012
Replaces: 01.2012
▶ For A10VSO Series 32; Size 45 to 180

▶ For A11V(L)O Series 40; Size 110 to 280
Features Contents
▶ Flexibel universal through drive Adapter Kits 2
▶ The through drive are exchangeable without machining Material number for U00 at A10VSO series 32 2
the port plate Material number at A4VSO series 30 4
Material number at A15VSO series 10 8
Material number at A11V(L)O series 40 10
For more information see data sheet: General instructions 12
▶ RE 92050 Variable Pump A4VSO
▶ RE 92510 Variable Pump A11V(L)O
▶ RE 92705 Variable Pump A10VO
▶ RE 91485 Variable Pump A10VZO

1012
2 Universal Through Drive | Adapter Kits
Adapter Kits
A4VSO/30 A10VSO/32 A15VSO/10; A11V(L)O/40

Flange Flange Flange
O-Ring seal O-Ring seal O-Ring seal
Hub
Hub
Hub
Fixing screws
to pump to pump to pump

mounting face mounting face mounting face
Assembly Group
The through drive is delivered as assembly group. The assembly group „flange and hub“ includes flange, hub, cylinder head
screws and O-ring seal.
Fixing screws for the 2. pump will be delivered only for universal through drives of the A4VSO.
Material number for U00 at A10VSO series 32
Code Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Cover“

mounting flange [mm] with cover, cylinder head screw
U001) A10VSO45 254 R902496168
A10VSO71 289 R902496186
A10VSO100 350 R902496173
A10VSO140 367
A10VSO180 377
ISO 3019-2 Assembly group „Cover“
with cover, cylinder head screw
UB2 A10VSO45 264 R902496439
A10VSO71 299 R902496440
A10VSO100 360 R902496441
A10VSO140 377 R902496442
A10VSO180 387 R902496443
UB3 A10VSO45 264 R902492531
A10VSO71 299 R902512434
A10VSO100 360 R902496445
A10VSO140 377 R902496446
A10VSO180 387 R902496447
UE1 A10VSO 45 264 R902510125
A10VSO 71 299 R902510126
A10VSO 100 360 R902510127
A10VSO 140 377 R902510128
A10VSO 180 387 R902510129
UB8 A10VSO71 299 R902496458
A10VSO100 360 R902496459
A10VSO140 377 R902496460
A10VSO180 387 R902496461
ISO 3019-2
1)
Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“
Incompatible with U99. Use for new projects U00.
mounting flange [mm] with Flange, hub, cylinder screw
1013
Material number for U00 at A10VSO series 32 | Universal Through Drive 3
Material number for U00 at A10VSO series 32
UB9 A10VSO100 360 R902496462

A10VSO140 377 R902496463
A10VSO180 387 R902496464 1
UB7 A10VSO140 377 R902496465
A10VSO180 387 R902496466
ISO 3019-1 Assembly group „Flange and hub“

(SAE J744) with Flange, hub, cylinder screw
U01 A10VSO45 264 R902496467 2
A10VSO71 299 R902496468
A10VSO100 360 R902496469
A10VSO140 377 R902496470
A10VSO180 387 R902496471
U52 A10VSO45 264 R902496472
3
A10VSO71 299 R902496473
A10VSO100 360 R902496474
A10VSO140 377 R902496475
A10VSO180 387 R902496476
U68 A10VSO45 264 R902496477
A10VSO71 299 R902496478
4
A10VSO100 360 R902496479
A10VSO140 377 R902496480
A10VSO180 387 R902496481
U04 A10VSO45 264 R902496482
A10VSO71 299 R902496663
A10VSO100 360 R902496664
5
A10VSO140 377 R902496665
A10VSO180 387 R902496666
UE2 A10VSO 45 264 R902510131
A10VSO 71 299 R902510132
A10VSO 100 360 R902510133
A10VSO 140 377 R902510134 6
A10VSO 180 387 R902510135
U24 A10VSO 100 360 R902510136
A10VSO 140 377 R902510137
A10VSO 180 387 R902510138
U15 A10VSO 71 299 R902510139
A10VSO 100 360 R902510140 7
A10VSO 140 377 R902510141
A10VSO 180 387 R902510142
U96 A10VSO100 360 R902496667
A10VSO140 377 R902496668
A10VSO180 387 R902496669
U17 A10VSO140 377 R902496670 8
A10VSO180 387 R902496671

1014
4 Universal Through Drive | Material number at A4VSO series 30
Material number at A4VSO series 30

U99 A4VSO125 359 R902438778
AA4VSO125 361
A4VSO180 383
AA4VSO180 385
A4VSO250 443 R902444736
AA4VSO 250 445
A4VSO355 472
AA4VSO 355 474
with Flange, hub, cylinder screw
UB2 A4VSO125 369 R902446991
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902446993
A4VSO355 482
UB3 A4VSO125 369 R902446996
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902446998
A4VSO355 482
UB4 A4VSO125 369 R902447001
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447003
A4VSO355 482
UB5 A4VSO125 369 R902447006
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447007
A4VSO355 482
UB6 A4VSO125 369 R902447008
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447009
A4VSO355 482
U31 A4VSO125 369 R902447010
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447011
A4VSO355 482
U33 A4VSO125 369 R902447012
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447013
A4VSO355 482
UB8 A4VSO125 369 R902447014
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447016
A4VSO355 482
U34 A4VSO125 369 R902447019
A4VSO180 393
A4VSO250 453 R902447020
A4VSO355 482

1015
Material number at A4VSO series 30 | Universal Through Drive 5

with Flange, hub, cylinder screw
UB9 A4VSO125 382 R902447021
1
A4VSO180 406
A4VSO250 453 R902447022
A4VSO355 482
UB7 A4VSO180 406 R902447025
A4VSO250 453 R902447026
A4VSO355 482
2
U35 A4VSO250 469 R902447028
A4VSO355 498
U77 A4VSO355 498 R902447029
ISO 3019-1 (SAE J744)
(The lengths to the pump mounting face are valid for the SAE version. The metric pumps are 2mm shorter)
Code Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“ 3
U01 A4VSO125 369 R902447030
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447032 4
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U52 A4VSO125 369 R902447035
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393 5
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447037
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U68 A4VSO125 369 R902447040 6
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447042
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
7
AA4VSO355 484

1016
ISO 3019-1 (SAE J744)

Code Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“
U04 A4VSO125 369 R902447045
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447047
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U07 A4VSO125 369 R902447050
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447051
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U24 A4VSO125 369 R902447052
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447053
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U15 A4VSO125 369 R902447054
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447055
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U16 A4VSO125 369 R902447056
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447057
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484

1017
ISO 3019-1 (SAE J744)

Code Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“
1
U96 A4VSO125 369 R902447058
AA4VSO125 371
A4VSO180 393
AA4VSO180 395
A4VSO250 453 R902447059
2
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U17 A4VSO125 382 R902447062
AA4VSO125 384
A4VSO180 406 3
AA4VSO180 408
A4VSO250 453 R902447063
AA4VSO250 455
A4VSO355 482
AA4VSO355 484
U18 A4VSO250 479 R902447067 4
AA4VSO250 481
A4VSO355 508
AA4VSO355 510
U72 A4VSO250 479 R902453019
AA4VSO250 481
A4VSO355 508 5
AA4VSO355 510

1018

U000 A15VSO 110 285 R902473330
A15VSO 145 310 (Cover, O-Ring, cylinder head screw)
A15VSO 175 327

A15VSO 210 345
A15VSO 280 387
with Flange, hub, cylinder head screw
K2S3 A15VSO 110 1) – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
A15VSO 175 340 R902497159
1)
A15VSO 210 358 R902497159
1)
A15VSO 280 – –
1)
K5S3 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
A15VSO 175 340 R902497161
A15VSO 210 358 R902497161
1)
A15VSO 280 – –
1)
L5S4 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
A15VSO 175 354 R902497173
A15VSO 210 372 R902497173
1)
A15VSO 280 – –
1)
P4S7 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
1)
A15VSO 175 – –
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
A15VSO 280 414 R902512007
1)
R4S9 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
1)
A15VSO 175 – –
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
A15VSO 280 419 R902514299
1)
Material number of the through drives and length to pump mounting face on request.
1019
ISO 3019-1 Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“
(SAE J744) mounting flange [mm] with Flange, hub, cylinder head screw
A1S2 A15VSO 110 1) – –
1)
1
A15VSO 145 – –
A15VSO 175 340 R902480838
A15VSO 210 358 R902480838
A15VSO 280 400 R902511997
1)
B3S4 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
2
A15VSO 175 354 R902510920
A15VSO 210 372 R902510920
A15VSO 280 414 R902512054
B3S5 A15VSO 110 312 R902512157
A15VSO 145 337 R902512157
1)
A15VSO 175 – – 3
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
1)
A15VSO 280 – –
C3S7 A15VSO 110 323 R902511033
A15VSO 145 348 R902511033
A15VSO 175 354 R902514325
A15VSO 210 372 R902514325 4
A15VSO 280 414 R902515215
1)
C3S9 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
1)
A15VSO 175 – –
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
A15VSO 280 414 R902514098 5
1)
D4A1 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
1)
A15VSO 175 – –
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
A15VSO 280 414 R902515220
1) 6
E4A2 A15VSO 110 – –
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
A15VSO 175 363 R902495006
A15VSO 210 381 R902495006
A15VSO 280 423 R902495955
1)
E4A4 A15VSO 110 – –
7
1)
A15VSO 145 – –
1)
A15VSO 175 – –
1)
A15VSO 210 – –
A15VSO 280 423 R902495953
1)
1020
10 Universal Through Drive | Material number at A11V(L)O series 40
Material number at A11V(L)O series 40

U000 A11VO 110 285 R902473330 (cover, O-Ring, cylinder head screw)
A11VO 145 310 R902473330
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 175 327 R902473330
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 210 345 R902473330
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 280 387 R902473330
A11VLO 2801) – –
(SAE J744) with Flange, hub, cylinder head screw
A1S2 A11VO 1101) – –
A11VO 1451) – –
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 175 340 R902480838
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 210 358 R902480838
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 280 400 R902511997
A11VLO 2801) – –
B3S4 A11VO 1101) – –
A11VO 1451) – –
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 175 354 R902510920
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 210 372 R902510920
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 280 414 R902512054
A11VLO 2801) – –
B3S5 A11VO 110 312 R902512157
A11VO 145 337 R902512157
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 1751) – –
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 2101) – –
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 2801) – –
A11VLO 2801) – –
C3S7 A11VO 110 323 R902511033
A11VO 145 348 R902511033
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 175 354 R902514325
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 210 372 R902514325
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 280 414 R902515215
A11VLO 2801) – –
1)
1021
Material number at A11V(L)O sries 40 | Universal Through Drive 11
Material number at A11V(L)O sries 40
ISO 3019-1 Available for pump Length to pump Assembly group „Flange and hub“
(SAE J744) mounting flange [mm] with Flange, hub, cylinder head screw
C3S9 A11VO 1101) – –
1
A11VO 1451) – –
1)
A11VLO 145 – –
A11VO 1751) – –
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 2101) – –
A11VLO 2101) – –
2
A11VO 280 414 R902514098
A11VLO 2801) – –
E4A4 A11VO 1101) – –
A11VO 1451) – –
A11VLO 1451) – –
A11VO 1751) – – 3
A11VLO 1751) – –
A11VO 2101) – –
A11VLO 2101) – –
A11VO 280 423 R902495953
A11VLO 2801) – –
4
1)
1022
12 Universal Through Drive| General instructions
▶ The project planning, installation and commissioning of

the axial piston unit requires the involvement of quali-
fied personnel.
▶ Before using the axial piston unit, please read the corre-
sponding instruction manual completely and thoroughly.
If necessary, these can be requested from Bosch Rex-
roth.
▶ During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of
burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the
solenoids. Take appropriate safety measures (e. g. by
wearing protective clothing).
▶ Before finalizing your design, request a binding installa-
tion drawing.
▶ For mounting bolts with metric ISO threads according to
DIN 13, we recommend checking the tightening torque
in individual cases in accordance with VDI 2230.
▶ Please note and find further information in the data
sheets to the products on page 1.
Bosch Rexroth AG © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
An den Kelterwiesen 14 reproduced or given to third parties without its consent. The data specified
72160 Horb a.N., Germany above only serve to describe the product. No statements concerning a
Tel. +49 7451 92-0 certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived from
Fax +49 7451 8221 our information. The information given does not release the user from the
info.brm@boschrexroth.de obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our
www.boschrexroth.com/axial-piston-pumps products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging.

1023
Contents | External gear pumps | Pumps
External gear pumps

Component pmax
Designation Type Size series in bar Data sheet Page
Displacement pump, series B AZPB 1 … 71 280 10087 1025

1
Displacement pump, series F AZPF 4 … 28 1X; 2X 280 10089 1053
Displacement pump, series N AZPN 20 … 36 250 10091 1121
Displacement pump, series G AZPG 22,5 … 100 280 10093 1145
Displacement pump, series S, AZPS 4 … 28 1X; 2X 280 10095 1209
SILENCE Version
Displacement pump, series T, AZPT 20 … 36 280 10092 1241
SILENCE Version 2
Displacement pump, series U, AZPU 22,5 … 63 280 10098 1263
SILENCE Version
Displacement pump, series J, AZPJ 12 … 16 280 10094 1289
SILENCE PLUS Version

1024

1025
External gear pump RE 10 087/11.09

Replaces:
RE 10 087/08.07
Series B
AZPB-22...
Fixed pumps
V = 1.0...7.1 cm3/rev
Overview of contents Features

Contents Page – Nominal pressure 280 bar (up to 5 cm3/rev)
General 2 – Slide bearings for heavy duty applications
Product overview 3 – Standardized drive shafts
Ordering code single pumps 4 – Line ports:
Ordering code multiple pumps 5 Connection flange or internal thread
Drive shaft 6 – Long service life thru reinforced design
Front cover 6 of shafts and gray cast iron cover
Line ports 7 – Consistent high quality thru mass production
Gear pumps with integrated pressure-relief valve 7 – Numerous configuration variants available
Performance charts 8
Noise charts 11
Design calculations for pumps 12
Specifications 13
Drive Arrangements 14
Multiple gear pumps 15
Unit dimensions 16
Fittings 23
Notes for commissioning 24
Spare parts, schematic diagram 25
Ordering-No. 27
1026
2/28 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics AZPB-22... RE 10 087/11.09
General
Rexroth external gear pumps are available as standard gear
pumps in the 4 series of B, F, N and G and as SILENCE gear
pumps in the series of S, T and U, in which the displacements
are graded by different gear widths. Further configuration
variants are given by different flanges, shafts, valve
arrangements and multiple pump combinations.
Construction
The external gear pump consists essentially of a pair of gears The internal sealing is achieved by forces which are
supported in bearing bushings and the case with a front and proportional to delivery pressure. This ensures optimum
a rear cover. The drive shaft protrudes from the front cover efficiency. The bearings provide the seal at the ends of the
where it is sealed by the shaft seal ring. The bearing forces gaps between the teeth which carry the pressurized oil. The
are absorbed by special slide bearings with sufficient elasticity sealing zone between the gear teeth and the bearings is
to produce surface contact instead of line contact. They also controlled by the admission of operating pressure to the rear
ensure excellent resistance to galling – especially at low speed. of the bearings. Special seals form the boundary of the zone.
The gears have 12 teeth. This keeps both flow pulsation and The radial clearance at the tips of the gear teeth is sealed by
noise emission to a minimum. internal forces pushing them against the case.
Axial and radial compensation for gear pump

Axial seal External pressure zone Internal pressure zone Radial seal
Sealing zone
Cover Flange Compensation forces
Schematic representation
1 Retaining ring 8 Case seal

2 Shaft seal ring 9 Pump case
3 Front cover 10 Bearing
4 Slide bearing 11 Axial zone seal
5 Centering pin 12 Support
12 3 12 5 10 7 9 10 5 12 13 14 6 Gear 13 End cover
8 11 4 6 11 8 7 Gear (frictional) 14 Fixing screws
1027
AZPB-22... RE 10 087/11.09 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/28
Overview of “Series B” standard types
Version Page Version Page Version Page

16 19 22
17 20
2
18 21 3
8
1028
Ordering code
External gear units Single pumps Standard
AZ P B – x x – 4.0 R C P 02 M D 200 xx S xxxx
Function Special
P = Pump design *)
Series
2 = 2nd generation Valve adjustment
Version 200 xx = PRV 200 bar
2 = corrosion-resistant,
pinned
Rear cover
Size (B)
B = Standard
1.0 = 1.00 cm3/rev
D = DBV, internal residual
2.0 = 2.00 cm3/rev
current
2.5 = 2.50 cm3/rev
3.1 = 3.15 cm3/rev Seals
4.0 = 4.00 cm3/rev M = NBR
4.5 = 4.50 cm3/rev K = NBR, shaft seal ring in FKM
5.0 = 5.00 cm3/rev P = FKM
6.3 = 6.30 cm3/rev
7.1 = 7.10 cm3/rev
R = Clockwise
L = Counterclockwise
*) Some of the special designs shown on pages
16–22 are not covered in the illustration of the
ordering code.
Drive shafts Front cover Line ports

Suitable
front cover
Tapered key 2-bolt mounting Pipe thread

C shaft 1: 5
P P Centering Ø 32 mm 01 ISO 228/1
Tapered key Square flange Thread, metric

H shaft 1: 8
O O Centering Ø 25.28 mm 02 ISO 9974-1
2-bolt mounting
Two-surface Rectangular
N M Y M Centering Ø 32 mm, 20
Claw flange
with seal ring
2-bolt mounting
Centering Ø 32 mm,
Y with seal ring,
mounting on series F
Not all variants can be selected by using ordering code!
Please select the required pump by using the selection tables (standard types) or after consultation with Bosch Rexroth!
Special options are possible upon request.
1029
Ordering code
External gear units, Multiple pumps, Standard
AZ P BB – x x – 4.0/4.0 R H O 20 20 K B
1
Function
P = Pump
Series Rear cover
B = 1.0...7.1 cm3/rev relates to last
S = 4.0...28 cm3/rev pump stage
F = 4.0...28 cm3/rev B = Standard
T = 20.0...36 cm3/rev 2
Seals
N = 20.0...36 cm3/rev
M = NBR
U = 22.5...63 cm3/rev
K = NBR, shaft seal ring
G = 22.5...63 cm3/rev pump stage 1 in FKM
Series, relates to pump P = FKM
section 1
2 = Case width 110 mm
Version, relates to 3
pump section 1
2 = corrosion-resistant,
pinned
Size
as per individual
Series
R = Clockwise
L = Counterclockwise
relates to pump stage 1 relates to pump stage 1 every pump stage
Series B: Suitable
front cover
Tapered key shaft Square flange Pipe thread 5
H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 25.38 mm 01 ISO 228/1
Rectangular
20 flange
Series F, S:
Tapered key shaft Square flange Rectangular
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 80 mm 20 flange 6
H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 36.47 mm 30 flange
Splined shaft SAE SAE J 744 82-2 A

R J 744 16-4 9T R R Centering Ø 82.55 mm
2-hole mounting
Series N, T:
Tapered key shaft Square flange Square flange SAE 7
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 100 mm 07 thread, metric
Splined shaft SAE SAE J 744 101-2 B

Rectangular
D J 744 22-4 13T C C Centering Ø 101.6 mm 20 flange
2-hole mounting
Series G, U:
Tapered key shaft Square flange Square flange SAE
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 105 mm 07 thread, metric
8
Rectangular
D J 744 22-4 13T C C Centering Ø 101.6 mm 20 flange
2-hole mounting
H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 50.78 mm 30 flange

1030
Drive shafts
C 26±0.5 H 29±0.5 DIN 128-A12-FSt

18±0.4 20±0.4 2.4x4.6 DIN 6888
DIN 128-A6-FSt
2x2.6 DIN 6888
10.55±0.5
10.55±0.5
2.4–0.025
5.3+0.1
–0.05
Ø8–0.02
–0.4
0.9
–0.05
Ø8–0.02
2–0.025
1:5 1:8
DIN 936-M6
DIN 936-M7x1
N
–0.027
Ø12–0.016
10.550.5
5–0.05
–0.08
Shaft inset
dimension 0.2+0.5 Pump without
4.7+0.3 shaft seal ring
Front cover
P 7±0.1 20 20 O 68.4±1.5
52.4±0.2
4–0.1
10.55±0.5
7.2
Ø25.38–0.05
10.55±0.5
30.55
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
87.9±1.5
71.9±0.2
25.95±1
26.2±0.1
9.45
16±0.1 0.6
8.5
16±0.1
2 x M8–10.9
M Y 20 20
20 20 8.50.1
O-ring in delivery 7.5 O-ring in delivery 0.6
7.5
contents contents 2x M8–10.9
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
Ø28.8–0.1
30.55
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
Ø28.8–0.1
30.55
Ø23
Ø23
25.951
Pump without
25.951
9.45
shaft seal Pump without

2.50.1
9.45
ring 8.5 shaft seal

2.5+0.2 0.6 2.50.1
ring
70.1 2.5+0.2
2x M8–10.9
70.1
1031
Line ports
Pipe thread Limited service life
G 01 ISO 228/1 compared to line port 20
F
1
Ordering Size Pressure side Suction side
code G F G F
01 1...3.15 cm3 G 3/8 13 G 3/8 13
4.0...7.1 cm3 G 3/8 G 1/2 13
2
Pipe thread Limited service life
M 02 ISO 9974-1 compared to line port 20
F
3
code M F M F
02 1...3.15 cm3 14 x 1.5 13 M18 x 1.5 13
4...7.1 cm3 M22 x 1,5
4 Rectangular flange 4
45° 5° 20
C E
D
Ordering Size Pressure side Suction side 5

code C D E C D E
20 2...3.5cm3 12 30 M 6 depth 13 12 30 M 6 depth 11.5
3.15...7.1 cm3 15 35 15 35
Gear pumps 6
with integrated
pressure-relief valve
In order to reduce external pipework it is possible
to incorporate a pressure-relief valve in the cover of the
7
gear pump.
p1
8
Pressure-relief valve.
Discharge returned to suction line
p1 = 5...250 bar
1032
Performance charts
ν = 35 mm2/s, = 50 °C
30
p = 20 bar
p2 = Max. inter-6,3 m 3/ reU
v
25 mittent pressure
c
7,1
V=
20
4,5
Q [l/min]
15
3,1
5 2,5
10 2
1
5
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 Q = f ( n,V ) incl. ηv
P = f ( n, p) incl. ηt
n [min-1] M = f ( n, p) incl. ηhm
V = 1 cm3/Urev V = 2 cm3/Urev
3,5 6 7 12
ar
p = 280 bar
0b
p = 280 bar
28
3,0 5 6 10
p=
250
250
0
25
r
ba
2,5 4 5 8
0
200
28
200
p=
0
20
0
25
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
2,0 150 3 4 6
150
0
15
0 20
1,5 100 2 3 4
100
0
15
0
10
50 50
1,0 1 2 0 2
10
50
0,5 0 1 50 0
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
1033
Performance charts (continued)
V = 2,5 cm3/Urev V = 3,15 cm3/Urev
10 14 10 18
p = 280 bar 1
p = 280 bar
9 12 9 16
250
250
8 10 8 14
200
7 8 7 12
200
r
ba
150
r
ba
2
0
28
6 6 6 10
28
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
p=
P [kW]
p=
0
100 25 150
0
25
5 4 5 8
0
50 20 0
4 2 4 100 20 6
0
15 15
0 3
3 0 3 4
50
100 100
2 2 2
50 50
1 1 0
0 0
4
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
V = 4 cm3/ Urev V = 4,5 cm3/ Urev
10 25 10 5
25
p = 280 bar
r
ba
p = 280 bar 250
9 20 9 20
0
250 28
p=
200
ar
0b
8 200 15 8 15
0
25
28
150
p=
150
7 10 7 10 6
0
100
25
100
0
20
6 50 5 6 50 5
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
0
20
5 0 5 0 0
15
0
4 15 4 7
0
10
3 0 3
10
2 2
50
50
1 1
8
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
1034
V = 5 cm3/ Urev V = 6,3 cm3/Urev
12 30 12 35
p = 280 bar
11 25 11 p = 255 bar 30
250
r
ba
0
10 20 10 25
ar
28
200
5b
200
p=
25
9 150 15 9 20
0
p=
25
150
8 100 10 8 15
100
0
50
0
20
7 5 7 10
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
20
P [kW]
P [kW]
50
6 0 6 5
0 0
15 15
5 5 0
4 0 4 0
10 10
3 3
2 50 2 50
1 1
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
V = 7,1 cm3/ Urev
12 35
11 p = 230 bar 30
200
ar
10 25
0b
23
9 150
p=
20
0
20
8 15
100
7 10
M [Nm]
P [kW]
50 0
6 15 5
5 0
0
4 10
3
50
2
0
0 1000 2000 3000
n [min-1]
1035
Noise charts
Noise level dependent on rotational speed, pressure These are typical characteristic values for the respective model.
range between 10 bar and pressure value p2 (see page 13 They describe the airborne sound emitted solely by the pump.
Specifications table). Environmental influences (installation site, piping, further
Oil data: ν = 32 mm2/s, = 50 °C. system components) are not taken into consideration.
1
Sound pressure level calculated from noise measurements Each value applies for a single pump.
made in the sound absorbent measuring room compliant with
DIN 45635, Part 26.
Spacing between measuring sensor – pump: 1 m.
V = 1 cm3/Urev V = 2 cm3/Urev
65 65
2
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
3
30 30
25 25
20 20
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
4
V = 2,5 cm3/Urev V = 3,15 cm3/Urev
65 65
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45 5
40 40
35 35
30 30
25 25
20 20 6
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
V = 4 cm3/Urev V = 4,5 cm3/Urev

65 65
60 60
55 55 7
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
30 30 8
25 25
20 20
1000 2000 3000 4000 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
1036
Noise charts (continued)
V = 5 cm3/Urev V = 6,3 cm3/ Urev

65 65
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
30 30
25 25
20 20
1000 2000 3000 4000 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [min-1] n [min-1]
V = 7,1 cm3/ Urev

65
60
55
50
LpA [dB(A)]
45
40
35
30
25
20
1000 2000 3000 4000
n [min-1]
Design calculations for pumps

The design calculations for pumps are It is also necessary to allow for different The following formulas describe the
based on the following parameters: efficiencies such as: various relationships.
They include correction factors for
V [cm3/rev] Displacement ηv Volumetric efficiency adapting the parameters to the usual
Q [l/min] Delivery ηhm Hydraulic-mechanical efficiency units encountered in practice.
p [bar] Pressure ηt Overall efficiency
M [Nm] Drive torque Caution: Diagram for approximate
n [rev/min] Drive speed selection data can be found
P [kW] Drive power on pages 8...10.
Q Q = V · n · ηv · 10–5
Q Q
V = n · η · 105 n= · 105
v V · ηv
p M · ηhm
p= M · ηhm
1.59 · V 1.59 · V · p
V= M= ηhm
n
P M 159 · p
V
p·Q
P= 6 · P · ηt 6 · P · ηt
6 · ηt
Q= p=
p Q
[%]
n ηv Q V [cm3/rev] Q [l/min] p [bar] Caution: η [%] e.g. 95 [%]
M ηhm p
P ηt p·Q n [rev/min] P [kW] M [Nm]
1037
Specifications
General *) During the application of
Construction External gear pump control systems or devices with
critical counter-reaction, such as
Mounting Flange or through-bolting with spigot
steering and brake valves, the
Line ports Internal thread, flange type of filtration selected must
Direction of rotation Clockwise or counterclockwise, 1
be adapted to the sensitivity of
(looking on shaft) the pump may only be driven in the direction these devices/systems.
indicated
Installation position Any Safety requirements pertaining
Load on shaft Radial and axial forces after consulting to the whole systems are to be
Ambient temperature range –30 °C...+80 °C with NBR seal observed.
–20 °C...+110 °C with FKM seals 2
Fluids – Mineral oil compliant with DIN 51 524, 1–3, In the case of applications with
however under higher load at least HLP compliant high numbers of load cycles
with DIN 51 524 Part 2 recommended. please consulting.
– Comply with RE 90220
– Further operating fluids possible after consultation
Viscosity 12...800 mm2/s permissible range
20...100 mm2/s recommended range 3
...2000 mm2/s permissible range for start up
Fluid temperature range max. +80 °C with NBR seals
max. +110 °C with FKM seals
Filtration *) At least cleanliness level 20/18/15 compliant with
ISO 4406 (1999)
4
Definition of direction of rotation Definitions of pressures
Always look on the drive shaft.
Caution: Dimensions drawings always show clockwise-rotation bar

pumps. On counterclockwise-rotation pumps the positions of p3
the drive shaft and the suction and pressure ports are different. p2
5
p1
Pump pressure
max. 20 s
Time t
6
p1 max. continuous pressure
p2 max. intermittent pressure
p3 max. peak pressure
Clockwise Counterclockwise
AZPB-22
Displacement V cm3/rev 1 2 2.5 3.15 4 4.5 5 6.3 7.1
Suction pressure pe 0.7...3 (absolute)
max. continuous pressure p1 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 225 200
bar
max. intermittent pressure p2 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 255 230 8
max. peak pressure p3 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 275 250
min. rotational speed rpm 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
max. rotational speed at p2 6,000 5,000 5,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 3,500 3,500
1038
Drive arrangement
The coupling must not transfer any radial
or axial forces to the pump.
1. Flexible couplings
Refer to the fitting instructions provided
by the coupling manufacturer for
details of the maximum permitted shaft
misalignment.
The maximum radial runout of pump shaft

spigot is 0.2 mm.
2. Drive shaft with tang

For the close-coupling of the pumps to
electric motor or internal-combustion
engine, gear, etc. The pump shaft has 1
a special tang and driver 3 (not included
in supply).
There is no shaft sealing.
3
The recommended arrangements and
dimensions for the drive end and sealing
are as follows.
2
Transferrable torque:
AZPB-22 = 25 Nm.
Suitable couplings for AZPB-22:
1 510 001 002 for AZPFB,
1 510 240 001 for AZPBB.
A
0.2 A
1 Drive shaft
Case-hardening steel DIN 17 210
e.g. 20 MnCrS 5
case-hardened 1.0 deep; HRA 83±2
Surface for sealing ring
ground without rifling Rt ⱕ 4μm
2 Radial shaft seal

with rubber covered seal
(see DIN 3760, Type AS, or
double-lipped ring).
Please take note of the seal ring manu-
facturer’s guidelines for arrangement of
the installation space.
1039
Multiple gear pumps

Gear pumps are suitable for multiple setups,
whereby the drive shaft for the 1st pump is extended to
a second and even a 3rd pump. A coupling is fitted between Mmax.
each pair of pumps.
In most cases each pump is isolated from its neighbor, i.e. the
1
suction ports are separate from one another. A common suction
port is also possible as an option.
Caution: Basically, the specifications for the single pumps F B
apply, but with certain restrictions:
Max. speed: This is determined by the highest rated pump
speed in use.
Pressures: These are restricted by the strength of the drive Combinations
Series Mmax. [Nm] Series 2
shaft, the through drives and the drivers. Appropriate data is
given in the dimensional drawings. Pump 1 Pump 2
F 25 B
Pressure restrictions B 25 B
In the case of series B (AZPB-22), the driver for the second For configuration of multiple pumps we recommend the pump
pumping stage can carry a load of up to Mmax. = 25 Nm, i.e. is positioned with the largest displacement on the drive side.
there is a pressure restriction for the second stage and any
further stages. 3
Drive shaft max. transferrable

drive torque *
[Nm]
C 1: 5 26
H 1: 8 30 4
N Claw 25
* These values only apply when the conditions
described above are complied with. Bosch Rexroth is
to be consulted if the stated values are exceeded.
5
If the first stage is driven through a tang (driver) or outboard
bearing type 1, pressure restrictions apply as indicated in the
formula below.
Reinforced through drives are available for applications

with higher transfer torques and/or rotational vibrations.
Customized designs available on request. 6
p1 V1 p2 V2 p3 V3
M 7
Mmax. ⭌ Δp1 · V1 · 0.0177 + Δp2 · V2 · 0.0177 + Δp3 · V3 · 0.0177

Δp [bar] V [cm3/rev]
8
1040
Unit dimensions
Standard range
68.4±1.5
B±1.3 52.4±0.2
4–0.1 A±0.4 7.2
Ø25.38–0.05
45°
45°
10.55±0.5
5.3+0.1
–0.4
73±10.6
71.9±0.2
87.9±1.5
26.2±0.1
1:8
16±0.1 M6
min. 11.5 deep
29 ±0.5
20±0.4
As shown in drawing
61–0.2
2.4–0.025
Inlet and outlet port changed

–0.05
Ø8–0.02
D±0.15
DIN 128-A12-FSt M6
C min. 11.5 deep
DIN 936-M7x1
2.4x4.6 DIN 6888

A 510 160 328
45° 45°
Ordering code:
AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 H O 20 M B
n N
Displacement Ordering-No. max. max. rotation Mass Dimension
operating speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B C D
2 0 510 120 310 0 510 120 012 280 5,000 1.5 32.8 67.9 12 30
2.5 0 510 120 311 0 510 120 013 280 5,000 1.5 33.8 69.8 12 30
3.15 0 510 120 312 0 510 120 014 280 4,000 1.5 35.0 72.3 15 35
4 0 510 120 313 0 510 120 015 280 4,000 1.6 36.6 75.5 15 35
4.5 0 510 120 314 0 510 120 016 280 4,000 1.6 37.8 77.4 15 35
5 0 510 120 315 0 510 120 017 280 4,000 1.6 38.6 79.5 15 35
6.3 0 510 120 316 0 510 120 018 255 3,500 1.7 41.0 84.2 15 35
7.1 0 510 120 317 0 510 120 019 230 3,500 1.7 42.5 87.3 15 35
1041
Unit dimensions
Standard range
1
68.4±1.5
B±1.3 52.4±0.2
4–0.1 A±0.4 7.2

Ø25.38–0.05
10.55±0.5
5.3+0.1
–0.4
73±10.6
87.9±1.5
71.9±0.2
26.2±0.1
1:8
16±0.1 G3/8 3
min. 13 deep
29±0.5
20±0.4
As shown in drawing 4
61–0.2

2.4–0.025
–0.05
Ø8–0.02
Version 1 Version 2
DIN 128-A12-FSt G3/8 G1/2 5
min. 13 deep min. 13 deep
DIN 936-M7x1
6
2.4x4.6 DIN 6888
A 510 160 312
7
Ordering code:
AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 H O 01 M B
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B Version
1 0 510 020 302 0 510 020 002 280 6,000 1.4 30.9 64.1 1
8
2 0 510 120 302 0 510 120 004 280 5,000 1.5 32.8 67.9 1
2.5 0 510 120 303 0 510 120 005 280 5,000 1.5 33.8 69.8 1
3.15 0 510 120 304 0 510 120 006 280 4,000 1.5 35.0 72.3 1
4 0 510 120 305 0 510 120 007 280 4,000 1.6 36.6 75.5 2
4.5 0 510 120 306 0 510 120 008 280 4,000 1.6 37.8 77.4 2
5 0 510 120 307 0 510 120 009 280 4,000 1.6 38.6 79.5 2
6.3 0 510 120 308 0 510 120 010 255 3,500 1.7 41.0 84.2 2
7.1 0 510 120 309 0 510 120 011 230 3,500 1.7 42.5 87.3 2
1042
Unit dimensions
Standard range
B±1.3
7±0.1 A±0.4 20 20
45°
45°
10.55±0.5
0.9
30.55
73±10.6
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
25.95±1
9.45
1:5 8.5
M6 0.6
min. 11.5 deep
26 ±0.5
2x M8–10.9
18±0.4
As shown in drawing
61–0.2
–0.05
Ø8–0.02
Ø18

2–0.025
C±0.5
D±0.15
DIN 128-A6-FSt
C M6
DIN 936-M6 min. 11.5 deep
2x2.6 DIN 6888

45°
45°
A 510 150 074
Ordering code:
AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 C P 20 M B
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B C D E
2 0 510 110 318 0 510 110 012 280 5,000 1.2 32.8 67.9 12 30 59.0
2.5 0 510 110 319 0 510 110 013 280 5,000 1.3 33.8 69.8 12 30 60.9
3.15 0 510 112 314 0 510 112 011 280 4,000 1.3 35.0 72.3 12 30 63.4
4 0 510 114 312 0 510 114 009 280 4,000 1.3 36.6 75.5 15 35 66.6
4.5 0 510 114 313 0 510 114 010 280 4,000 1.4 37.8 77.4 15 35 68.5
5 0 510 114 314 0 510 114 011 280 4,000 1.4 38.6 79.5 15 35 70.6
6.3 0 510 122 308 0 510 122 006 255 3,500 1.4 41.0 84.2 15 35 75.3
7.1 0 510 122 309 0 510 122 007 230 3,500 1.5 42.5 87.3 15 35 78.4
1043
Unit dimensions
Standard range
B±1.3 1
7±0.1 A±0.4 20 20
10.55±0.5
0.9
30.55
73±10.6
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
25.95±1
9.45
1:5 8.5
M14 x 1,5 0.6
min. 13 deep
26±0.5
2x M8–10.9
18±0.4 3
As shown in drawing
61–0.2

–0.05
Ø8–0.02
Ø18
2–0.025
C±0.5
Version 1 Version 2
DIN 128-A6-FSt
M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
min. 13 deep min. 13 deep 5
DIN 936-M6
2x2.6 DIN 6888

6
A 510 150 092
7
Ordering code:
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B C Version
1 0 510 010 309 0 510 010 006 280 6,000 1.2 30.9 64.1 56.4 1
8
2 0 510 110 314 0 510 110 008 280 5,000 1.2 32.8 67.9 59.0 1
2.5 0 510 110 315 0 510 110 009 280 5,000 1.3 33.8 69.8 60.9 1
3.15 0 510 112 313 0 510 112 010 280 4,000 1.3 35.0 72.3 63.4 1
4 0 510 114 309 0 510 114 006 280 4,000 1.3 36.6 75.5 66.5 2
4.5 0 510 114 310 0 510 114 007 280 4,000 1.4 37.8 77.4 68.5 2
5 0 510 114 311 0 510 114 008 280 4,000 1.4 38.6 79.5 70.6 2
6.3 0 510 122 306 0 510 122 004 255 3,500 1.4 41.0 84.2 75.3 2
7.1 0 510 122 307 0 510 122 005 230 3,500 1.5 42.5 87.3 78.4 2
1044
Unit dimensions
Standard range
B±1.3
A±0.4 20 20
45°
45°
–0.027
Ø12–0.016
10.55±0.5
5–0.05
–0.08
30.55
73±10.6
25.95±1
9.45
Shaft inset dimension 0.2+0.5 8.5
M6 0.6
4.7+0.3 min. 11.5 deep
2x M8–10.9
7,5
O-ring in delivery contents
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
Ø28.8–0.1
As shown in drawing
61–0.2
Ø23

Pump
Ø18
without shaft seal ring

2.5±0.1
2.5+0.2
7±0.1
E±0.5
D±0.15
M6
C min. 11.5 deep
A 510 B32 022
45°
45°
Ordering code:
AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 N M 20 M B
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B C D E
2 0 510 110 320 0 510 110 015 280 5,000 1.2 32.8 67.9 12 30 59.0
2.5 0 510 110 321 0 510 110 016 280 5,000 1.3 33.8 69.8 12 30 60.9
3.15 0 510 112 316 0 510 112 013 280 4,000 1.3 35.0 72.3 15 35 63.4
4 0 510 114 318 0 510 114 015 280 4,000 1.3 36.6 75.5 15 35 66.6
4.5 0 510 114 319 0 510 114 016 280 4,000 1.3 37.8 77.4 15 35 68.5
5 0 510 114 320 0 510 114 017 280 4,000 1.4 38.6 79.5 15 35 70.6
6.3 0 510 122 312 0 510 122 010 255 3,500 1.4 41.0 84.2 15 35 75.3
7.1 0 510 122 313 0 510 122 011 230 3,500 1.5 42.5 87.3 15 35 78.4
1045
Unit dimensions
Standard range
B±1.3
A±0.4 20 20 1
–0.027
Ø12–0.016
10.55±0.5
5–0.05
–0.08
30.55
73±10.6
25.95±1
2
9.45
Shaft inset dimension 0.2+0.5 8.5
0.6
4.7+0.3 M14 x 1.5
min. 13 deep
2x M8–10.9
7.5
O-ring in delivery contents 3
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
Ø28.8–0.1
As shown in drawing
61–0.2
Ø23

Ø18
Pump
4
2.5±0.1
2.5+0.2
7±0.1
C±0.5
Version 1 Version 2
5
M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
6
A 510 132 032
7
Ordering code:
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B C Version
1 0 510 010 310 0 510 010 007 280 6,000 1.2 30.9 64.1 55.2 1
8
2 0 510 110 316 0 510 110 010 280 5,000 1.2 32.8 67.9 59.0 1
2.5 0 510 110 317 0 510 110 011 280 5,000 1.3 33.8 69.8 60.9 1
3.15 0 510 112 315 0 510 112 012 280 4,000 1.3 35.0 72.3 63.4 1
4 0 510 114 315 0 510 114 012 280 4,000 1.3 36.6 75.5 66.6 2
4.5 0 510 114 316 0 510 114 013 280 4,000 1.3 37.8 77.4 68.5 2
5 0 510 114 317 0 510 114 014 280 4,000 1.4 38.6 79.5 70.6 2
6.3 0 510 122 310 0 510 122 008 255 3,500 1.4 41.0 84.2 75.3 2
7.1 0 510 122 311 0 510 122 009 230 3,500 1.5 42.5 87.3 78.4 2
1046
Unit dimensions
Standard range
B±1.3 20 20
A±0.4 8.5±0.1
0.6
2x M8–10.9
–0.027
Ø12–0.016
10.55±0.5
5–0.05
–0.08
30.55
73±10.6
25.95±1
9.45
Shaft inset dimension 0.2+0.5
4.7+0.3 M14 x 1.5
min. 13 deep
7.5
O-ring in delivery contents
As shown in drawing
Ø32–0.025
–0.064
Ø28.8–0.1
61–0.2
Ø23

Ø18
Pump
2.5±0.1
2.5+0.2
7±0.1
C±0.5
Version 1 Version 1
M18 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
A 510 132 051
Ordering code:
AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 N Y 02 M B
n N
[cm3/rev] L R pressure [bar] [rpm] kg A B Version
1 1 519 222 214 1 519 222 213 280 6,000 1.2 30.9 64.1 1
2 1 519 222 216 1 519 222 215 280 5,000 1.2 32.8 67.9 1
2.5 1 519 222 218 1 519 222 217 280 5,000 1.3 33.8 69.8 1
3.15 1 519 222 220 1 519 222 219 280 4,000 1.3 35.0 72.3 1
4 1 519 222 222 1 519 222 221 280 4,000 1.3 36.6 75.5 2
4.5 1 519 222 224 1 519 222 223 280 4,000 1.4 37.8 77.4 2
5 1 519 222 226 1 519 222 225 280 4,000 1.4 38.6 79.5 2
6.3 1 519 222 228 1 519 222 227 255 3,500 1.4 41.0 84.2 2
7.1 1 519 222 230 1 519 222 229 230 3,500 1.5 42.5 87.3 2
1047
Fittings
Gear pump flange, straight, for rectangular flange 20 see page 7
1
LA
L4 S1
Ø D1
Ø D3
LA
Ø D1
2
LK
Ø DB L2
L1
LK D1 D3 L1 L2 L4 LA S1 DB
Screws (metr.) Seal ring Mass Part number p 3
4 pieces kg (bar)
35 10L 8 30 23.0 39.0 40 19 6.4 M 6x22 20x2.5 0.09 1 515 702 064 315
35 12L 10 30 23.0 39.0 40 22 6.4 M 6x22 20x2.5 0.10 1 515 702 065 315
35 15L 12 30 23.0 38.0 40 27 6.4 M 6x22 20x2.5 0.10 1 515 702 066 250
Complete fittings with seal ring, metric screw set, nuts and olive.
Gear pump flange, 90° angle, for rectangular flange 20 see page 7
L4
5
LA L3
Ø DB
LA
S1
L2
L5
L1
LK
Ø D3 Ø D1
Ø D1
LK D1 D3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 LA S1
DB Screws Seal Mass Part number p
2 pieces 2 pieces ring 7
kg (bar)
35 10L 8 38 31.0 16.5 26.5 47.0 40 19 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x35 20x2.5 0.16 1 515 702 070 315
35 12L 10 38 31.0 16.5 26.5 47.0 40 22 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x35 20x2.5 0.16 1 515 702 071 315
35 15L 12 38 31.0 16.5 26.5 46.0 40 27 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x35 20x2.5 0.15 1 515 702 072 250
35 16S 12 38 29.5 20.0 31.0 48.0 40 30 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x40 20x2.5 0.18 1 515 702 002 315
35 18L 15 38 29.5 20.0 31.0 47.0 40 32 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x40 20x2.5 0.18 1 545 702 006 250
35 20S 16 45 34.5 25.0 38.0 56.0 40 36 6.4 M 6x22 M 6x45 20x2.5 0.24 1 515 702 017 315 8
Complete fittings with seal ring, metric screw set, nuts and olive.
1048
Notes for commissioning

Filter recommendation Technical data
The major share of premature failures in external gear pumps is All stated technical data is dependent on production tolerances
caused by contaminated pressure fluid. and is valid for specific marginal conditions.
As a warranty cannot be issued for dirt-specific wear, we re- Note that, as a consequence, scattering is possible, and at
commended filtration compliant with cleanliness level 20/18/15 certain marginal conditions (e.g. viscosity) the technical data
ISO 4406, which reduces the degree of contamination to may change.
a permissible dimension in terms of the size and concentration
of dirt particles. Characteristics
When designing the external gear pump, note the maximum
We recommend that a full-flow filter always be used. possible service data based on the characteristics displayed
Basic contamination of the pressure fluid used may not on pages 13 to 15.
exceed class 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406. Experience has
shown that new fluid quite often lies above this value. In such Additional information on the proper handling of hydraulic
instances a filling device with special filter should be used. products from Bosch Rexroth is available in our document:
“General product information for hydraulic products”
General RE 07 008.
– The pumps supplied by us have been checked for function
and performance. No modifications of any kind may Contained in delivery
be made to the pumps; any such changes will render the The components with characteristics as described under
warranty null and void! device measurements and ordering code, pages 19 – 27,
– Pump may only be operated in compliance with permitted are contained in delivery.
data (see pages 15 – 18).
You can find further information in our publication:
Project planning notes “General Operating Instructions for External Gear Units”
Comprehensive notes and suggestions are available in RE 07 012-B1.
Hydraulics Trainer, Volume 3 RE 00 281, “Project planning
notes and design of hydraulic systems”. Where external gear
pumps are used we recommend that the following note be
adhered to.
1049
Spare parts, schematic diagram

Single pump
Multiple pump
31
5
Seal kit “B”
Item 800 Shaft seal ring
Page Ordering code NBR Item 3 Dimension Material
16 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 H O 20 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
17 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 H O 01 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
18 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 C P 20 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
19 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 C P 02 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR 6
20 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 N M 20 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
21 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 N M 02 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
22 AZPB – 22 – 씲 씲 씲 씲 N Y 02 M B 1 517 010 238 1 510 283 074 22 x 12 x 6 NBR
NBR = Perbunan®
For multiple pumps Seal ring 1 900 210 127

7
Item 31
NBR
8
1050
The AZ configurator at www.boschrexroth.com/azconfigurator

The AZ configurator
assists you to configure
The AZ configurator assists you to your individual external
configure your individual external gear gear unit easily and user-
unit easily and user-friendly. You only friendly – all data needed
for project planning are
need to specify your requirements: From acquired thru menu
the displacement, direction of rotation, guidance.
drive shaft, connection flange right up to
the required rear cover. You immediately
receive a project drawing (PDF format) if
a configuration already exists. You receive
the price of the configured external gear
unit upon request.
Selection is made either

on an ordering code
or your technical
requirements. This means
that you can search for
external gear units that
have already been
configured, or you specify
the configuration variant
of the external gear unit
based upon the operating
parameters you require.
If the external gear unit

you selected has been
released you will receive
the part number, ordering
code and a detailed
installation drawing. If
your special configuration
is not available please
send your specification to
Rexroth. One of our
employees will then
contact you.
1051
Ordering-No.
Ordering-No. Page Ordering-No. Page Ordering-No. Page
0 510 010 006 19 0 510 114 016 20 0 510 120 312 16

0 510 010 007 21 0 510 114 017 20 0 510 120 313 16 1
0 510 010 309 19 0 510 114 309 19 0 510 120 314 16
0 510 010 310 21 0 510 114 310 19 0 510 120 315 16
0 510 020 002 17 0 510 114 311 19 0 510 120 316 16
0 510 020 302 17 0 510 114 312 18 0 510 120 317 16
0 510 110 008 19 0 510 114 313 18 0 510 122 004 19
0 510 110 009 19 0 510 114 314 18 0 510 122 005 19 2
0 510 110 010 21 0 510 114 315 21 0 510 122 006 18
0 510 110 011 21 0 510 114 316 21 0 510 122 007 18
0 510 110 012 18 0 510 114 317 21 0 510 122 008 21
0 510 110 013 18 0 510 114 318 20 0 510 122 009 21
0 510 110 015 20 0 510 114 319 20 0 510 122 010 20
0 510 110 016 20 0 510 114 320 20 0 510 122 011 20 3
0 510 110 314 19 0 510 120 004 17 0 510 122 306 19
0 510 110 315 19 0 510 120 005 17 0 510 122 307 19
0 510 110 316 21 0 510 120 006 17 0 510 122 308 18
0 510 110 317 21 0 510 120 007 17 0 510 122 309 18
0 510 110 318 18 0 510 120 008 17 0 510 122 310 21
0 510 110 319 18 0 510 120 009 17 0 510 122 311 21
0 510 110 320 20 0 510 120 010 17 0 510 122 312 20 4
0 510 110 321 20 0 510 120 011 17 0 510 122 313 20
0 510 112 010 19 0 510 120 012 16 1 519 222 213 22
0 510 112 011 18 0 510 120 013 16 1 519 222 214 22
0 510 112 012 21 0 510 120 014 16 1 519 222 215 22
0 510 112 013 20 0 510 120 015 16 1 519 222 216 22
0 510 112 313 19 0 510 120 016 16 1 519 222 217 22 5
0 510 112 314 18 0 510 120 017 16 1 519 222 218 22
0 510 112 315 21 0 510 120 018 16 1 519 222 219 22
0 510 112 316 20 0 510 120 019 16 1 519 222 220 22
0 510 114 006 19 0 510 120 302 17 1 519 222 221 22
0 510 114 007 19 0 510 120 303 17 1 519 222 222 22
0 510 114 008 19 0 510 120 304 17 1 519 222 223 22 6
0 510 114 009 18 0 510 120 305 17 1 519 222 224 22
0 510 114 010 18 0 510 120 306 17 1 519 222 225 22
0 510 114 011 18 0 510 120 307 17 1 519 222 226 22
0 510 114 012 21 0 510 120 308 17 1 519 222 227 22
0 510 114 013 21 0 510 120 309 17 1 519 222 228 22
0 510 114 014 21 0 510 120 310 16 1 519 222 229 22
7
0 510 114 015 20 0 510 120 311 16 1 519 222 230 22
8
1052
Produktbereich Drives Außenzahnradmaschinen reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Robert-Bosch-Straße 2 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
D-71701 Schwieberdingen ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
Telefon +49 (0) 711-811 10 63 can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
Telefax +49 (0) 711-811 17 98 the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
brm-az.info@boschrexroth.de remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
www.boschrexroth.com/brm aging.
1053
RE 10 089/02.12
External Gear Pumps Replaces:
RE 10 089/12.10
Series F
AZPF-...
Fixed pumps
V = 4.0...28 cm3/rev
Overview of contents Features

Contents Page – Nominal pressure 280 bar
General 2 – Slide bearings for heavy duty applications
Product overview 3 – Drive shafts to ISO or SAE
Ordering code single pumps 4 – Combination of several pumps possible
Ordering code multiple pumps 5 – Line ports:
Drive shaft 6 connection flange or screw thread
Front cover 7 – Consistent high quality thru mass production
Line ports 9 – Numerous configuration variants available
Pumps with integral valves 10
Design calculations for pumps 10
Performance charts 11
Noise charts 14
Specifications 16
Drive arrangements 17
Multiple pumps through drives 19
Dimensions 20
Notes for commissioning and maintenance 59
Service parts 60
Fittings 62
Ordering-No. 64
1054
2/68 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics AZPF RE 10 089/02.12
General
Rexroth external gear pumps are available as standard gear
pumps in the 4 series of B, F, N and G and as SILENCE gear
pumps in the series of S, T and U, in which the displacements
are graded by different gear widths. Further configuration
variants are given by different flanges, shafts, valve arrange-
ments and multiple pump combinations.
Construction
The external gear pump consists essentially of a pair of gears The internal sealing is achieved by forces which are propor-
supported in bearing bushings and the case with a front and tional to delivery pressure. This ensures optimum efficiency. The
a rear cover. The drive shaft protrudes from the front cover bearings provide the seal at the ends of the gaps between the
where it is sealed by the shaft seal ring. The bearing forces are teeth which carry the pressurized oil. The sealing zone between
absorbed by special bearing bushings with sufficient elasticity the gear teeth and the bearing is controlled by the admission of
to produce surface contact instead of line contact. They also operating pressure to the rear of the bearing bushings. Special
ensure excellent resistance to galling – especially at low speed. seals form the boundary of the zone. The radial clearance at the
The gears have 12 teeth. This keeps both flow pulsation and tips of the gear teeth is sealed by internal forces pushing them
noise emission to a minimum. against the case.
Gear pump axial compensation

Axial seal External pressure zone Internal pressure zone Radial seal
Sealing zone
Cover Flange Compensation forces
1 Retaining ring 8 Case seal

2 Shaft seal ring 9 Pump case
3 Front cover 10 Bearing
4 Slide bearing 11 Axial zone seal
5 Centering pin 12 Support
6 Gear 13 End cover
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 Gear (frictional) 14 Fixing screws
1055
AZPF RE 10 089/02.12 Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 3/68
Product overview of “Series F” standard types
Version Page Version Page Version Page Version Page

20 29 38 52
21 30 40 53
22 31 42 54
23 32 44 55
4
24 33 46 56
5
25 34 48 57
26 35 49 58 6
27 36 50
7
28 37 51
8
1056
Ordering code
External gear units, single pumps, standard
AZ P F – x x – 016 R C B 20 M B 18009 S xxxx
Function Special
P = Pump design *)
Series
1 = Standard bearing Valve adjustment
2 = Reinforced bearing 200 xx = PRV 200 bar
Version xxx 11 = FCV 11 l/min
0 = Phosphatized 18009 = PRV + FCV
1 = Phosphatized, pinned 180 bar, 9 l/min
2 = Chromatized, pinned
Rear cover
Size (F)
B = Standard
004 = 4.0 cm3/rev
005 = 5.5 cm3/rev D = PRV residual flow
008 = 8.0 cm3/rev internal
011 = 11.0 cm3/rev E = FCV residual flow
014 = 14.0 cm3/rev external
016 = 16.0 cm3/rev S = FCV residual flow
019 = 19.0 cm3/rev internal
022 = 22.5 cm3/rev V = PRV + FCV
025 = 25.0 cm3/rev
Seals
028 = 28.0 cm3/rev
M = NBR
P = FKM
R = Clockwise
L = Counterclockwise K = NBR, SSR in FKM
*) Some of the special designs shown on

pages 18–55 are not covered in the
illustration of the ordering code.

Suitable front cover
Tapered key shaft B P Square flange
C 1: 5
B Centering Ø 80 mm
20 Rectangular flange
SAE J 744 82-2 A Thread (UNF-2B)

Tapered key shaft O
H 1: 8
R 2-bolt flange 12 SAE
Ø 82.55 mm Seal ring BOSS
M 2-bolt mounting
N Dihedral claw P Centering Ø 50 mm
Straight keyed shaft R Square flange Pipe thread

Q SAE J 744 16-1 A
O Centering Ø 36.47 mm
01 ISO 228/1
SAE J 744 101-2 B Thread, metric
Splined shaft R C
R SAE J 744 16-4 9T
C 2-bolt flange 03 ISO 6149
Ø 101.6 mm with seal ring
2-bolt mounting
Splined shaft R C
P SAE J 744 19-4 11T
M Centering Ø 52 mm
with seal ring
Splined shaft B P Outboard bearing
F DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
A Ø 80 mm, Type 1
Tapered key shaft A 2-bolt mounting

S 1: 5 for flange A
N Centering Ø 50 mm
Straight keyed shaft B 4-bolt mounting

A ISO Ø 18 mm
T Ø 52 mm with seal ring
Outboard bearing
G Ø 80 mm, Type 2

1057
Ordering code
External gear units, multiple pumps, standard
AZ P GGFF – x x – 032/022/016/005 R C B 20 20 20 20 K B
1
Function
P = Pump
Series Rear cover
B = 1.0...7.1 cm3/rev relates to last pump section
S = 4.0...28 cm3/rev B = Standard
F = 4.0...28 cm3/rev Seals
T = 20.0...36 cm3/rev 2
M = NBR
N = 20.0...36 cm3/rev
U = 22.5...63 cm3/rev P = FKM
G = 22.5...63 cm3/rev K = NBR, SSR in FKM
Series, relates to pump Shaft seal relate to pump
section 1 section 1
1x = Standard bearing
2x = Reinforced bearing
3
Version, relates to pump
section 1
1 = Phosphatized, pinned
2 = Chromatized, pinned
Size
corresponding to each series
4
R = Clockwise,
L = Counter-clockwise
relates to pump part 1 relates to pump part 1 every pump parts
Series B: Suitable front cover
Tapered key shaft Square flange Thread, metric
H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 25.38 mm 02 DIN 3852 T1
5
Series F, S:
Tapered key shaft Square flange
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 80 mm 20 Rectangular flange

H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 36.47 mm
Splined shaft SAE SAE J 744 82-2 A

R J 744 16-4 9T R R Centering Ø 82.55 mm 6
2-bolt mounting
Series N, T:
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 100 mm 07 Thread, metric

D J 744 22-4 13T C C Centering Ø 101.6 mm 20 Rectangular flange
2-bolt mounting
7
Centering Ø 52 mm with
N Dihedral claw M M seal ring
Series G, U:
C 1: 5 B B Centering Ø 105 mm 07 Thread, metric

D J 744 22-4 13T C C Centering Ø 101.6 mm 20 Rectangular flange 8
2-bolt mounting
H 1: 8 O O Centering Ø 50.78 mm

1058
Drive shafts
C 38±0.6*) H
40.2±0.6**) DIN 128-A12-FSt 39.5±0.6 DIN 128-A12-FSt
7.8±0.35 3x5 DIN 6888 27.4±0.5 3x5 DIN 6888
17
9.5–0.2
8"
Ø17–0.027
5°42'3
1.8
Ø16.65
1:5 1:8
M12x1.5-m-06 M12x1.5-m-06
12±0.35
N 6.5+0.3 Q 32±0.5 8±0.4

2.7+0.5
Ø17–0.027
–0.025
8–0.083
15,875–0.025
Ø17–0.027
17.73–0.13
Pump without shaft seal,
see page 14
4x20 DIN 6885
31.5±0.4 31.5±0.4
R 8±0.5
P 8±0.5
Ø15.456–0.127
Ø18.62–0.13
Ø17–0.027
Ø20–0.33
Min. 21.8 ANSI B 92,1 Min. 21 ANSI B 92.1
usable shaft 9T 16/32 SP usable shaft 11T 16/32 SP
length Tooth thickness s = 2.357–0.030 length 30° pressure angle
23.5–0.8*) 45+0.5
F 26–0.8**) S –1
9.5±0.7 for
2±0.5 reference-Ø 20.00 DIN 128-A14-FSt
Ø16,5–0.27
19.2 4x6.5 DIN 6888

"
–0.0265
' 38
Ø20–0.117
5°42
2
1:5
Min. 14.9 B 17x14 M14x1.5-8-A
usable shaft DIN 5482
length Tooth thickness sw = 3.200–0.030
A 7.2±0.1
22
3
20.5
6–0.03
Ø18–0.016
–0.027
36±0.4
*) in combination with front cover B

**) in combination with front cover P
1059
Front cover
B O
7,2 ± 0,1 ±5 4,8 ± 0,1 71,4 ±0,2
R9 8,5 ±0,11
R8
34,5 ±0,1
44,5 ±1,5
Ø36,47–0,05
1
Ø80–0,060
–0,106
15,7 ±1
15,7 ±1
32,5 ±0,1
96,1±0,2
120 ±1,5
112+1,5
100 ± 0,2
–1
9 ± 0,11
Ø18
12,5–0,4 72 ±0,2 19 ± 0,1 87+1,5

–1
90 ±1,5 2
R P
12,5–0,5 60 ±0,2
±1
6,2 ±0,1
R47
min. 10,6
SAE-A 3
11+0,27 7,2 ± 0,1 30 ±0,1
Ø21
±1
2
34,3 ±1,5
R1
Ø82,55–0,05
Ø50–0,020
–0,064
10°10°
15,7 ±1
15,7 ±1
14,3 ±0,1
60 ± 0,2
4
106,4 ±0,15
2xM10–10.9
127 ±1,5
A C
4x6,5 DIN 6888 14,5–0,5 172 ±1,3 5
DIN 128-A14-FSt 9,5± 0,1
146 ±0,15
±5 max. 3
R9
±1
8–0,2
Ø26
R 58
34,5 ±0,1
R1
3 ±1
Ø80–0,060
–0,106
15,7 ±1
100 ±0,2
120 ±1,5
Ø101,6
25 ±0,2
15,7 ±1
Ø41
M14x1,5-8-A
9,5 ±0,2
72 ±0,2
SAE - B 14,3 ±0,27
12,5+1 90 ±1,5
M N
7
60 ±0,2 60 ±0,2
7,2 ±0,1
min. 10,6
min. 10,6
30 ±0,1 7,2 ± 0,1 30 ±0,1

9,9 ± 0,2
14,3 ±0,1
34,3 ±1,5
34,3 ±1,5
Ø47,8–0,2
Ø50–0,020
–0,064
–0,076
Ø32+0,16
Ø52–0,030
15,7 ±1
15,7 ±1
60 ±0,2
60 ± 0,2
14,3 ± 0,1
8
2 ±0,2
3,2 ±0,2
Pump without 2xM10–10.9 2xM10–10.9
shaft seal,
see page 17
1060
Front cover (continued)
T 10.3+0.3
G 53.8±0.3 for reference-
min. 10.6
60±0.2
7.2±0.1 30±0.1 50±1.5 Ø 20.00 . 5
±0
13.5±1.5 9
34.3±1.5
90±1.5
8–0.025
–0.083
15.7±1
R
Ø17–0.027
Ø47.9–0.1
Ø52–0.030
–0.076
44.5±1.5
36–0.5
9±0.11 34.5±0.1
60±0.2
2
14.3±0.1
–0.106
Ø80–0.060
15.7±0.1
100±0.2
120±1.5
Ø20–0.065
–0.117
1.8+0.2 4xM10–10.9
3+0.2
2.7+0.5 20–0.2 72±0.2
6.5+0.2
1061
Line ports
G Pipe thread At pressures p2 > 210 bar

01 ISO 228/1 limited fatigue strength
F
1
code G F G F
01 4...16 cm3 G 1/2 16 G 3/4 16
19...28 cm3 G 3/4 G1 19
D Thread, metric At pressures p2 > 210 bar

03 2
M ISO 6149 limited service life
E
with seal ring

F

code M D E F M D E F 3
03 4...5.5 cm3 M 18 x 1.5 29 0.5 16 M 18 x 1.5 29 0.5 16
8...16 cm3 M 22 x 1.5 34 18 M 27 x 2 40 19
19...28 cm3 M 33 x 2 46 22
Thread At pressures p2 > 210 bar

D 12 (UN-2B, UNF-2B) SAE limited service life
G 4
E
seal ring BOSS

F

code G D E F G D E F
5
12 4...5.5 cm3 9/16–18 UNF-2B 25 0.5 13 9/16–18 UNF-2B 25 0.5 13
8 cm3 7/8–14 UNF-2B 35 16 7/8–14 UNF-2B 35 16
11...28 cm3 1 1/16–12 UN-2B 45 19
45° 5° 20
6
C E
D *) Dimension of Series 2

code C D E C D E
20 4...5.5 cm3 15 35 M 6, depth 13 15 40 M 6, depth 13
7
8...22.5 cm3 20
19...28 cm3 *) 26 55 M 8, depth 13
Rectangular flange
30
8
C E
D

code C D E C D E
30 4...8 cm3 13.5 30.2 M 6, depth 13 13.5 30.2 M 6, depth 13
11...28 cm3 20.0 39.7 M 8, depth 13
1062
Gear pumps with

integral valves
In order to reduce external pipework it is possible to incor-
porate a flow-control valve or pressure-relief valve in the rear
cover of the gear pump. A typical application of this is in the
supply of hydraulic oil in power steering systems. The pump
delivers a constant flow irrespective of the speed at which it is
driven. The excess flow is either returned internally to the suc- upon request
tion port or distributed externally to other items of equipment.
Qconst. Qconst. Qconst.
p1
p1
3-way flow-control valve. 3-way flow-control valve. 3-way flow-control valve with Pressure-relief valve.
Excess flow returned to Excess flow distributed externally; pressure-relief valve. Discharge returned to
suction line loadable Excess flow returned to suction line
Qconst. = 2...30 l/min Qconst. = 2...30 l/min suction line p1 = 5...250 bar
Qconst. = 2...30 l/min
p1 = 100...180 bar
Ordering code
S xxx17 E xxx12 V 15011 D 180xx
Design calculations for pumps

The design calculations for pumps It is also necessary to allow for different The following formulas describe the
are based on the following parameters: efficiencies such as: various relationships.
They include correction factors for
V [cm3/rev] Displacement ηv Volumetric efficiency adapting the parameters to the usual
Q [l/min] Delivery ηhm Hydraulic-mechanical units encountered in practice.
p [bar] Pressure efficiency
M [Nm] Drive torque ηt Overall efficiency Caution: Diagrams providing approxi-
n [rev/min] Drive speed mate selection data will be found on
P [kW] Drive power subsequent pages.
Q Q = V · n · ηv · 10–5
Q Q
V = n · η · 105 n= · 105
v V · ηv
p M · ηhm
p= M · ηhm
1.59 · V 1.59 · V · p
V= M= ηhm
n
P M 159 · p
V
p·Q
P= 6 · P · ηt 6 · P · ηt
6 · ηt
Q= p=
p Q
[%]
n ηv Q V [cm3/rev] Q [l/min] p [bar] Caution: η [%] e.g. 95 [%]
M ηhm p
P ηt p·Q n [rev/min] P [kW] M [Nm]
1063
Performance charts
ν = 32 mm2/s, = 50 °C
90
p = 20 bar 1
v
/ reU
p2 = max. intermittent
cm 3
80
28
25
Q=
70
.5
22
60
2
19
50
Q [l/min]
16
40 14
11
30 3
8
20
5.5
4
10
0 4
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Q = f ( n,V ) incl. ηv
P = f ( n, p) incl. ηt
n [rpm] M = f ( n, p) incl. ηhm
V = 4 cm3/ Urev V = 5.5 cm3/ Urev

5
10 13 30
r
p = 280 ba
r
12 p = 280 ba
9 20
r a
11 250 25
0b
250
28
8
ar
10
0b
p=
0
28
25
7 15 200
6
p=
200 9 20
0
25
8
6
0
20
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
150 7 150 15
0
20
5 10
0
6 15
100 0
4 15 5 100 10 7
0
3 5 4 10
0
50 10
50
3 5
2 50
50
2
1 0
1 0 8
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
1064
V = 8 cm3/ Urev V = 11 cm3/ Urev
20 25 60
p = 280 bar
18 p = 280 bar 40 50
250
16 250
20 200 40
ar
ar
0b
0b
28
28
14 30 150 30
p=
p=
0
200
25
0
25
12 15 100 20
M [Nm]
0
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
20
0
150
20
10 50 10
20
0
15 0
8 100 10 15 0
0
6 10 10 0
50 10
4 5
50 50
2 0
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
25 80 30 90
p = 280 bar 80
p = 280 bar 70
ar
25 250
70
0b
250
ar
20 60
28
0b
60
p=
28
200
200
p=
50
20 50
0
0
25
25
15 40 150
150 40
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
0
0
20
20
30 15 100 30
100
0 0 20
10 15 20 50 15
50 10 10
0 10 0
10 10
0
5 0
50 5 50
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
1065
V = 19 cm3/ Urev V = 22.5 cm3/Urev
30 90 30 100
1
80 90
p = 230 bar
p = 210 bar
25 70 25 80
ar
200
b
ar
210
0b
60 70
23
p=
p=
20 150 50 20 150 60
2
0
20
40 50
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
P [kW]
0
100
15
15 30 15 100 40
0
15
50 20 30
0
50 10
10 0 10 10 20 3
10
0 10
50
5 50 5 0
4
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
V = 25 cm3/Urev V = 28 cm3/ Urev
35 35 5
p = 225 bar 100

p = 200 bar 100
ar
30 90
r
30 90
a
200
0b
5b
20
80
22
80
p=
p=
150
25 70
0
25 70
20
150 6
60 60
0
15
M [Nm]
M [Nm]
P [kW]
20 50
P [kW]
20 100 50
100
0
15
40 40
15 30 15 0 30
50 10
50 0 7
10 20 20
10 10 10 10
0 50 0
50
5 5
8
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
1066
Noise charts
Noise level dependent on rotational speed, pressure range These are typical characteristic values for the respective model.
between 10 bar and pressure value p2 (see page 16 Speci- They describe the airborne sound emitted solely by the pump.
fications table). Environmental influences (installation site, piping, further
Oil data: ν = 32 mm2/s, = 50 °C. system components) are not taken into consideration.
Sound pressure level calculated from noise measurements Each value applies for a single pump.
made in the sound absorbent measuring room compliant with
DIN 45 635, Part 26.
Spacing between measuring sensor – pump: 1 m.
V = 4 cm3/ Urev V = 5.5 cm3/ Urev

75 75
70 70
65 65
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]

75 75
70 70
65 65
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
1067
Noise charts (continued)

75 75
70 70 1
65 65
60 60
55 55
50 50 2
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
40 40
35 35
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
n [rpm] n [rpm] 3
V = 19 cm3/Urev V = 22.5 cm3/Urev

75 75
70 70
65 65 4
60 60
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
5
45 45
40 40
35 35
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
6
V = 25 cm3/Urev V = 28 cm3/ Urev
75 75
70 70
65 65
60 60 7
55 55
50 50
LpA [dB(A)]
LpA [dB(A)]
45 45
8
40 40
35 35
0 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000
n [rpm] n [rpm]
1068
Specification
General *) NBR = Perbunan®
Construction External gear pump **) FKM = Viton®
***) During the application of
Mounting Flange or through-bolting with spigot
control systems or devices with
Line ports Screw, flange critical counter-reaction, such as
Direction of rotation (looking Clockwise or counter-clockwise, steering and brake valves, the
on shaft) the pump may only be driven in the direction indicated type of filtration selected must
Installation position Any be adapted to the sensitivity of
Load on shaft Radial and axial forces after consulting these devices/systems.
Ambient temperature range –30 °C...+80 °C
or max. 110 °C with FKM seal Safety requirements pertaining
Hydraulic fluid – Mineral oil compliant with DIN 51 524, 1–3, to the whole systems are to be
however under higher load at least HLP compliant observed.
with DIN 51 524 Part 2 recommended.
– Comply with RE 90220 In the case of applications with
– Further operating fluids possible after consultation high numbers of load cycles
Viscosity 12...800 mm2/s permitted range please consulting.
20...100 mm2/s recommended range
...2000 mm2/s range permitted for starting
Hydraulic fluid temperature max. +80 °C with NBR seals*)
range max. +110 °C with FKM seals**)
Filtration ***) At least cleanliness level 20/18/15 compliant
with ISO 4406 (1999)
Definition of direction of rotation Definitions of pressures

Always look on the drive shaft.
Caution: Dimensions drawings always show clockwise-rotation
bar
pumps. On counter-clockwise-rotation pumps the positions of p3
the drive shaft and the suction and pressure ports are different. p2
p1
Pump pressure
max. 20 s
Time t
p1 max. continuous pressure

Clockwise rotation Counter-clockwise rotation p2 max. intermittent pressure
p3 max. peak pressure
AZPF-1x *)
Displacement V cm3/rev 4 5.5 8 11 14 16 19 22.5 22.5
Suction pressure pe 0.7...3 (absolute), with tandem pumps: pe ( p2) = max. 0.5 > pe ( p1)
Max. continuous pressure p1 250 210 180 210
bar
Max. intermittent pressure p2 280 230 210 230
Max. peak pressure p3 300 250 230 250
Min. rotational speed < 100 rpm 600 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
at bar 12 mm2/s 100...180 1200 1200 1000 1000 800 800 800 800 800
180... p2 1400 1400 1400 1200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25 mm2/s p2 700 700 700 600 500 500 500 500 500
Max. rotational speed at p2 4000 3500 3000 3000 3000 2500 3000
*) Version with extended bearings
AZPF-2x
Displacement V cm3/rev 4 5.5 8 11 14 16 19 22.5 25 28
Suction pressure pe 0.7...3 (absolute), with tandem pumps: pe ( p2) = max. 0.5 > pe ( p1)
Max. continuous pressure p1 250 220 195 170
bar
Max. intermittent pressure p2 280 250 225 200
Max. peak pressure p3 300 290 265 240
Min. rotational speed < 100 rpm 600 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
at bar 12 mm2/s 100...180 1200 1200 1000 1000 800 800 800 800 800 800
180... p2 1400 1400 1400 1200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25 mm2/s p2 700 700 700 600 500 500 500 500 500 500
Max. rotational speed at p2 4000 3500 3000 3000 3500 3500 3000 3000
1069
Drive arrangements
1. Flexible couplings
The coupling must not transfer any radial
or axial forces to the pump.
The maximum radial runout of shaft 1

spigot is 0.2 mm.
Refer to the fitting instructions provided

by the coupling manufacturer for details
of the maximum permitted shaft misalign-
ment.
2
2. Coupling sleeve Splined Mmax V pmax
Used on shafts with DIN or SAE splining. 34 shaft [Nm] [cm3/ [bar]
Caution: There must be no radial or rev]
axial forces exerted on the pump shaft DIN 100 4...28 pmax
Ø 25 h11
or coupling sleeve. The coupling sleeve SAE 9t 110
must be free to move axially. The dis- SAE 11t 180
3
tance between the pump shaft and drive
shaft must be 2+1 . Oil-bath or oil-mist 2+1
lubrications is necessary.
3. Drive shaft with tang

For the close-coupling of the pumps
to electric motor or internal-combustion 4
min. 8 12
engine, gear, etc.
30°
The pump shaft has a special tang and
driver 3 (not included in supply). 1
There is no shaft sealing.
+0,3
Ø52+0,046
Ø30
The recommended arrangements and
Ø52,7
dimensions for the drive end and sealing 5

are as follows.
A
Drive shaft
Case-hardening steel DIN 17 210 2 2,5–0, 5 0,2 A 3
e.g. 20 MnCrS 5
case-hardened 0.6 deep; HRC 60 ±3.
Surface for sealing ring 6
ground without rifling Rmax. 울 4μm
Drive with tang
Radial shaft seal ring
Rubber-covered seal (see DIN 3760, AZPF-1x AZPF-2x
Type AS or double-lipped ring). Mmax. V pmax. Mmax. V pmax.
Cut 15° chamfer or fit shaft seal ring [Nm] [cm3/rev] [bar] [Nm] [cm3/rev] [bar]
with protection sleeve. 65 4...14 280 85 4...14 280 7
16 230 16 280
65 19 190 19 250
22.5 160 22.5 210
25 190
28 170
8
1070
4. V-belts and straight gearwheels or

helical toothed gear drives without
outboard bearing
When proposing to use V-belt or gear
drive, please submit details of the
application for our comments (especially
dimensions a, dm, dw and angle α).
For helical toothed gear drives, details
of the helix angle β are also required.
0° 0°
α α
dm
dw
180° 180°
a a
5. Outboard bearing
Outboard bearing eliminate possible Mmax. V pmax.
problems when the pumps are driven by [Nm] [cm3/rev] [bar]
V-belts or gearwheels. The diagrams 65 16 230
below show the maximum radial and axial 19 190
loads that can be tolerated based on 22.5 160
a bearing life of LH = 1000 hours.
Type 1 a N
1200
Fr
1000
n=
15
Fr
00
Fa
20
800 00
30
00
40
00
600
400
10 20 30 40 50 mm
a
Type 2 a
Fr
Fa
1071
Multiple gear pumps Standard through drive

Gear pumps are well-suited to tandem combinations of
pumps in which the drive shaft of the first pump is extended to Mmax. = 65 Nm
drive a second pump and sometimes a third pump in the same
manner. A coupling is fitted between each pair of pumps.
In most cases each pump is isolated from its neighbor, i.e. the
1
suction ports are separate from one another. A common suction
port is also possible as an option.
Caution: Basically, the specifications for the single pumps F F
apply, but with certain restrictions:
Max. speed: This is determined by the highest rated pump
speed in use.
Pressures: These are restricted by the strength of the drive Combinations
Series Mmax. [Nm] Series 2
shaft, the through drives and the drivers. Appropriate data is
given in the dimensional drawings. pump 1 pump 2
F 65 F
Pressure restrictions during standard through drive F 65 S
In the case of series S, the driver for the second pumping F 12 B
stage can carry a load of up to Mmax. = 65 Nm, i.e. there is a
pressure restriction for the second stage and any further stages. Max. transferrable drive torque *
3
Function Code Designation Max. transferrable
Mmax. [Nm] V [cm3/rev] pmax. [bar] letter drive torque *
65 16 230 [Nm]
19 190
R SAE J744 16-4 9T 110
Splined
shafts
22.5 160
25 140
SAE J744 19-4- 4
28 130 P 180
11T
If the first stage is driven through a tang (driver) or outboard
C 1:5 155
key shaft
Tapered
bearing type 1, pressure restrictions apply as indicated in the

formula below.
H 1:8 160
Reinforced through drives are available for applications with
higher transfer torques and/or rotational vibrations. Customized 5
designs available on request. G Shafts Ø 15.875 55
Cylinder
shafts
Reinforced through drive A Shafts Ø 18 75
Mmax. = 160 Nm
Claw
N Dihedral claw 65 6
* These values only apply when the conditions described

on page 16 are complied with. Bosch Rexroth is to be con-
sulted if the stated values are exceeded.
F F
p1V1 p2V2 p3V3
Mmax. ⭌ Δp1 · V1 · 0.0177 + Δp2 · V2 · 0.0177 + Δp3 · V3 · 0.0177

Δp [bar] V [cm3/rev]
1072
Dimensions
Standard range
38±0.6 B±0.7
.5
7.2±0.1 A±0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5±0.1
45°
45°
–0.060
Ø80–0.106
15.7±1
1.8
100+1.5
100±0.2
–1
±1.5
120
9±0.11
1:5
Ø18
15
12.5–0.4 72±0.2
35±0.15
M6 90±1.5
7.8±0.35
'
" ±1
38
Ø17–0.027
'
5°42
84–0.2
As shown in drawing

17
D
DIN 128-A12-FSt C
E
DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
A 510 240 021
45°
45°
3x5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – C B 20 M B
AZPF – 11 – C B 20 M B*
Displace- Ordering-No. Max. Max. kg Dimension
n N
ment operating rotation
pressure speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R [bar] [rpm] A B C D E
4 0 510 225 306 0 510 225 006 280 4000 3.2 39.9 85.0 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 325 306 0 510 325 006 280 4000 3.2 41.1 87.5 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 425 307 0 510 425 009 280 4000 3.3 43.2 91.6 20 40
11 0 510 525 311 0 510 525 009 280 3500 3.5 47.0 96.6 20 40
14 0 510 525 319 0 510 525 018 280 3000 3.7 47.5 101.6 20 40
16 0 510 625 315 0 510 625 022 280 3000 3.7 47.5 105.0 20 40
19 0 510 625 314 0 510 625 013 230 3500 3.8 47.5 110.0 20 40
22.5 0 510 725 330* 0 510 725 030 210 2500 3.8 55.1 115.4 20 40
1073
Dimensions
Standard range
23.5–0.8 B± 0.7
5
7.2± 0.1 0.
A± 0.4 ± 1
9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5± 0.1
45°
45°
–0.106
Ø80–0.060
15.7±1
100+1.5
100± 0.2
± 1.5
–1
120
2
9± 0.11
Ø18
15
12.5–0.4 72±0.2
35± 0.15 M6
90±1.5
3
Ø16.5–0.27
84–0.2
As shown in drawing
4
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
D
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
Tooth thickness C
sw = 3.200–0.030
E 5
A 510 241 021

45°
45° 6
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – F B 20 M B
AZPF – 11 – F B 20 M B*
7
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 225 307 0 510 225 007 280 4000 3.1 39.9 85.0 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 325 307 0 510 325 007 280 4000 3.2 41.1 87.5 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 425 308 0 510 425 010 280 4000 3.3 43.2 91.6 20 40 8
9 0 510 425 336* – 280 4000 3.4 43.7 92.4 20 40
11 0 510 525 312 0 510 525 010 280 3500 3.5 47.0 96.6 20 40
14 0 510 525 328 0 510 525 030 280 3000 3.6 47.5 101.6 20 40
16 0 510 625 317 0 510 625 015 280 3000 3.65 47.5 105.0 20 40
19 0 510 625 316 0 510 625 014 230 3000 3.8 47.5 110.0 20 40
22.5 0 510 725 349 – 230 3000 4.4 61.1 127.4 20 40
22.5 – 0 510 725 062 210 2500 4.0 55.1 115.4 20 40
1074
Dimensions
Standard range
B±0.6 71.4 ±0.2

4.8 ±0.1 A±0.4 8.5 ±0.11
R
8
9.5 –0.2
40.5 ±1.5
32.5 ±0.1
Ø36.47–0.05
96.1 ±0.2
100 +1.5
112 +1.5
–1
–1
15.7 ±0.1
1:8
13.5
19 ±0.1 87 +1.5
–1
30.2 ±0.15
39.5 ±0.6 M6
27.4 ±0.5
3–0.025
As shown in drawing
84 –0.2

Ø16.65
12 ±0.35
D
DIN 128-A12-FSt C E
DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
A 510 840 309 / 315
3x5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPF – 12 – H O 30 K B
AZPF – 22 – H O 30 K B*
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 225 317 0 510 225 022 280 4000 3.1 41.4 84.1 13.5 30.2 M6
5.5 0 510 325 320 0 510 325 025 280 4000 3.2 42.6 86.6 13.5 30.2 depth 13
8 0 510 425 334 0 510 425 043 280 4000 3.3 44.7 92.5 13.5 30.2
11 0 510 525 374 0 510 525 074 280 3500 3.4 48.5 97.5 13.5 30.2 M8
14 0 510 525 375 0 510 525 075 280 3000 3.6 49.0 102.5 13.5 30.2 depth 13
16 0 510 625 381 0 510 625 075 280 3000 3.6 49.0 105.9 13.5 30.2
19 0 510 625 386* 0 510 625 076* 280 3500 4.1 59.9 121.1 20.0 39.7
22.5 0 510 725 410* 0 510 725 112* 250 3500 4.2 62.6 126.5 20.0 39.7
25 0 510 725 411* 0 510 725 113* 225 3000 4.4 64.7 132.5 20.0 39.7
28 0 510 725 412* 0 510 725 114* 200 3000 4.5 67.1 137.3 20.0 39.7
1075
Dimensions
Standard range
B± 0.7 71.4± 0.2

4.8± 0.1 A± 0.4 8.5± 0.11 1
R
8
40.5±1.5
32.5± 0.1
Ø36.47–0.05
96.1± 0.2
100+1.5
112+1.5
–1
–1
15.7±1
13.5
19± 0.1 87+1.5
–1
30.2± 0.15 M6
22± 0.4
0.5± 0.5 3
Ø16.5–0.27
As shown in drawing
84–0.2

4
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
D
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14 C
Tooth thickness E
sw = 3.200–0.030
5
A 510 241 101 / 301

6
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – F O 30 M B
AZPF – 10 – F O 30 P B*
7
n N
pressure speed [mm]
8 0 510 425 315 0 510 425 021 280 4000 3.3 44.7 93.1 13.5 30.2 M 6, depth 13
11 0 510 525 323 0 510 525 024 280 3500 3.4 48.5 98.1 20.0 39.7 M 8, depth 13
11 0 510 525 331* – 210 3500 3.3 48.5 98.1 20.0 39.7 8
14 – 0 510 525 034* 210 3000 3.4 49.0 103.1 20.0 39.7
16 0 510 625 327* 0 510 625 039* 210 3000 3.5 49.0 106.5 20.0 39.7
19 – 0 510 625 049* 210 3000 3.7 49.0 111.5 20.0 39.7
19 0 510 625 332* – 210 3000 4.0 59.9 123.5 20.0 39.7
22.5 0 510 725 348* 0 510 725 076* 210 3000 4.2 62.6 127.8 20.0 39.7
1076
Dimensions
Standard range
B±0.7 71.4 ±0.2

4.8 ±0.1 A±0.4 8.5 ±0.11
R
8
9.5 –0.2
40.5 ±1.5
32.5 ±0.1
Ø36.47–0.05
96.1 ±0.2
100 +1.5
112 +1.5
–1
–1
15.7 ±0.1
1:8
19 ±0.1 87 +1.5
–1
G1/2" - ISO 228
39.5 ±0.6
27.4 ±0.5
3–0.025
As shown in drawing
84 –0.2

Ø16.65
12 ±0.35
DIN 128-A12-FSt
DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
A 510 240 335
3x5 DIN 6888

G3/4" - ISO 228
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – H O 01 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R [bar] [rpm] A B G
4 – – – – – – – ISO 228
5.5 – 0 510 325 018 280 4000 3.1 42.6 89.0 depth 16
8 – 0 510 425 027 280 4000 3.15 44.7 93.1
11 – 0 510 525 039 280 3500 3.3 48.5 98.1
14 – 0 510 525 040 280 3000 3.4 49.0 103.1
16 – 0 510 625 047 280 3000 3.58 49.0 106.5
19 – 0 510 625 052 230 3000 3.6 49.0 111.5
22.5 – 0 510 725 084 210 2500 3.8 56.6 116.4
1077
Dimensions
Standard range
B± 0.7
.5
7.2± 0.1 A± 0.4 ±0
9 1
R
34.5± 0.1
100± 0.2
100+1.5
120± 1.5
–1
20.5
–0.027
Ø18–0.016
9± 0.11
Ø18
12.5–0.4 ISO 228 72± 0.2

90±1.5
22
3
3
84–0.2
As shown in drawing
6–0.03
4
36± 0.4
ISO 228
5
15.7± 1
–0.106
Ø80–0.060
A 510 840 024

6
Shaft key 1 902 300 287 incl.
Ordering code
AZPF – 11 – A B 01 M B
n N
7
pressure speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R [bar] [rpm] A B G
4 0 510 225 318 0 510 225 023 280 4000 3.3 39.9 84.3 G 1/2 – ISO 228
5.5 0 510 325 321 0 510 325 026 280 4000 3.3 41.1 85.2 depth 16
8 0 510 425 335 0 510 425 044 280 4000 3.4 43.2 89.3
11 0 510 525 376 0 510 525 076 280 3500 3.6 45.6 94.3 G 3/4 – ISO 228 8
14 – – – – – – – depth 16
16 0 510 625 382 0 510 625 077 250 3000 3.8 49.9 102.7
19 – – – – – – –
22.5 0 510 725 418 0 510 725 120 180 2500 4.1 55.1 114.7
1078
Dimensions
Standard range
40.2± 0.6
min. 10.6
7.2± 0.1 A± 0.4 30 30
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
Ø50–0.064
–0.020
14.3
15.7± 1
100+1.5
1.8
–1
45.7
1:5 15
M6 2 x M10 –10.9
35± 0.15
10.3± 0.35 B± 0.5 max. 9
'
" ±1
Ø21
' 38
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Ø17–0.027
M12x1.5
17
D
C
A 510 230 021
45°
45°
3 x5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – C P 20 M B
AZPF – 10 – C P 20 K B*
AZPF – 11 – C P 20 M B**
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 215 009 0 510 215 309 280 4000 2.5 37.7 73.7 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 315 307 0 510 315 006 280 4000 2.65 38.6 76.2 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 415 316** – 280 4000 2.7 40.6 80.3 20 40
11 0 510 515 309 0 510 515 007 280 3500 2.75 44.5 85.5 20 40
14 0 510 515 316 0 510 515 018 280 3000 3.1 45.0 90.3 20 40
16 0 510 615 317 0 510 615 010 280 3000 2.9 45.0 93.7 20 40
19 0 510 615 318 0 510 615 005 230 3000 3.2 45.0 98.7 20 40
22.5 0 510 715 306* – 210 2500 3.3 52.5 104.1 20 40
1079
Dimensions
Standard range
40.2±0.6
min. 10.6
7.2±0.1 A±0.4 30 30 1
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
Ø50–0.020
–0.064
14.3
15.7±1
100+1.5
1.8
–1
45.7
2
1:5 15
M6 2x M10–10.9
35±0.15
±0.35
10.3 B±0.5
max. 9
3
'
" ±1
Ø21
' 38
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Ø17–0.11
Inlet and outlet port changed 4
17
D
DIN 128-A12-FSt C
E 5
DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
A 510 230 061

45°
45° 6
3x5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – C N 20 M B
AZPF – 11 – C N 20 M B*
7
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 215 306 0 510 215 006 280 4000 2.6 37.4 73.7 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 315 304 0 510 315 004 280 4000 2.6 38.6 76.2 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 415 313 0 510 415 005 280 4000 2.8 40.7 80.3 20 40 8
11 0 510 515 310 0 510 515 004 280 3500 2.9 44.5 85.3 20 40
14 – 0 510 515 015* 280 3000 3.0 45.0 90.3 20 40
16 0 510 615 314 0 510 615 006 280 3000 3.1 45.0 93.7 20 40
19 0 510 615 341 – 230 3000 3.2 45.0 98.7 20 40
1080
Dimensions
Standard range
7.2±0.1 A±0.4 30 30
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
–0.064
Ø50–0.020
14.3
15.7±1
100+1.5
–1
45.7
15 2x M10–10.9
M6
35±0.15
26–0.8 B ±0.5
max. 9
4.5±0.5
Ø21
Ø16.5–0.27
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
D
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
Tooth thickness C
sw = 3.200 –0.030
E
A 510 231 043

45°
45°
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – F N 20 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
5.5 – 0 510 315 007 280 4000 2.55 38.6 76.2 15 40 M6
8 – – – – – – – – depth 13
11 – 0 510 515 011 280 3500 2.85 44.5 85.3 20 40
14 – – – – – – – –
16 – – – – – – – –
19 – 0 510 615 009 230 3000 3.2 45.0 98.7 20 40
19 – – – – – – – –
22.5 – – – – – – – –
1081
Dimensions
Standard range
min. 10.6
7.2±0.1 A±0.4 30 30 1
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
–0.064
Ø50–0.020
14.3
15.7±1
100+1.5
–1
45.7
2
15 2x M10–10.9
M6
35±0.15
26–0.8 B±0.5
max. 9
4.5±0.5 3
Ø21
Ø16.5–0.27
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
D
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
Tooth thickness C
sw = 3.200–0.030
E 5
A 510 231 101

45°
45° 6
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – F P 20 P B
AZPF – 12 – F P 20 P B*
7
AZPF – 12 – F P 20 P B S xxxx**
n N
pressure speed [mm]
5.5 – – – – – – – – – M6
8 0 510 415 328 – 210 4000 2.7 40.7 80.3 20 15 depth 13 8
11 0 510 515 337* 0 510 515 012 280 3500 2.8 44.5 85.3 20 15
14 0 510 515 338 0 510 515 013 210 3000 3.0 45.0 90.3 20 15
16 – – – – – – – – –
19 – – – – – – – – –
22.5 0 510 715 320** 0 510 715 008** 210 3000 3.6 58.6 116.1 20 15
1082
Dimensions
Standard range
B±0.5 4±0.8 60 ±0.2
min. 10.6
7.2 ±0.1 A±0.4 30 ±0.1
15.7 ±1
–0.083
8–0.025
34.3 ±1.5
45 °
45 °
Ø21
Ø17 –0.027
100 +1.5
–1
60 ±0.2
14.3 ±0.1
2.7 +0.5 15 4 x M10–10.9
6.5 +0.2 35 ±0.15
M6
10.3 +0.3
Ø47.9 –0.02
As shown in drawing
Ø52 –0.030
–0.076
+0.3
Ø36 –0.5
84 –0.2
1.8 +0.2
3+0.2
D
C
E
incl. 1 900 210 145

incl. 1 510 240 000
A 510 232 021
or 1 510 240 009
45 °
45 °
Ordering code
AZPF – XX – N T 20 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 215 307 0 510 215 007 280 4000 2.5 37.4 73.7 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 315 305 0 510 315 005 280 4000 2.5 38.6 76.2 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 415 314 0 510 415 006 280 4000 2.5 40.7 80.3 20 40
11 0 510 515 311 0 510 515 005 280 3500 2.6 44.5 85.3 20 40
14 0 510 515 340 0 510 515 019 280 3000 2.38 45.0 90.3 20 40
16 0 510 615 315 0 510 615 007 230 3000 3.0 45.0 93.7 20 40
19 0 510 615 321 0 510 615 008 190 3000 3.0 45.0 98.7 20 40
22.5 0 510 715 307 0 510 715 004 160 2500 3.2 52.6 104.1 20 40
1083
Dimensions
Standard range
7.2± 0.1 B± 0.7 104±0.2

max. 4.9
17–0.027 A± 0.4 11±0.135 1
8–0.025
–0.083
34.5±1.5
45°
45°
Ø52+0.030
–0.076
15.7±1
Ø41
100+1.5
–1
R
12
–0
1
6.5 +0.2 2
11.9–0.5 15
35± 0.15
M6
11
3
Ø22.5
As shown in drawing
Ø47.8–0.15
Ø30+0.4
–0.2
8+0.058
84–0.2

12–0.2
2+0.2
3.2+0.2 D
C
5
E
1 900 210 145 incl.

1 510 000 004 incl.
A 510 232 222

6
45°
45°
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – N L 20 K B
7
AZPF – 11 – N L 20 K B*
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 – 0 510 225 012 280 4000 2.8 37.4 81.7 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 325 312 0 510 325 012 280 4000 2.82 38.6 84.4 15 40 depth 13 8
8 0 510 425 331* 0 510 425 019 280 4000 3.0 40.7 88.5 20 40
11 – 0 510 525 025 280 3500 3.1 44.5 93.3 20 40
16 0 510 625 358* 0 510 625 027* 230 3000 3.3 45.0 101.9 20 40
19 0 510 625 368 0 510 625 032 190 3000 3.5 45.0 106.9 20 40
22.5 – 0 510 725 044* 160 3000 4.0 58.6 122.5 20 40
1084
Dimensions
Standard range
32 ±0.5 B±0.7
±1
6.2 ±0.1 A±0.4 SAE-A flange
7.5
11 +0.27
–0.13
R4
17.73
–0.05
10 ° 10 °
±1
Ø82.55
100 +1.5
15.7
–1
±1
12
R
±0.15
106.4
12.5 –0.5
G - UNF-2B / F 127 ±1.5
8±0.4
–0.025
Ø21
–0.027
Ø15.875
Ø17
As shown in drawing
84 –0.2
A 510 240 801
KEY.156 SQ x.750 LG
Shaft key 4 x 20 G - UNF-2B / F
DIN 6885
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – Q R 12 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R [bar] [rpm] A B G쒃 G쒆 F쒃 F쒆
4 – 0 510 225 011 260 4000 3.3 39.9 85.0 9/16-18 9/16-18 13 13
5.5 – 0 510 325 011 260 4000 3.3 41.1 87.5 9/16-18 9/16-18 13 13
8 – 0 510 425 016 260 4000 3.4 43.2 91.6 7/8-14 7/8-14 16 16
11 – 0 510 525 015 260 3500 3.6 47.0 96.6 7/8-14 7/8-14 16 16
14 – 0 510 525 031 230 3000 3.65 47.5 101.6 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
16 – 0 510 625 021 200 3000 3.7 47.5 105.0 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
19 – 0 510 625 041 170 3500 3.9 47.5 110.0 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
22.5 – 0 510 725 059 140 2500 4.0 55.1 115.4 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
1085
Dimensions
Standard range
B± 0.7
. 5 ±1
6.2± 0.1 A± 0.4 SAE-A flange
1
47
11+0.27
R
Ø82.55–0.05
10° 10°
15.7±1
100+1.5
–1
2
±1
12
R
106.4±0.15
31.5± 0.4 12.5–0.5 G - UNF-2B / F 127±1.5
8± 0.5
3
Ø15.456–0.127
Ø21
Ø17–0.027
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
4
Min. 21.8
usable shaft length
5
Splined shaft ANSI B 92.1
9T 16/32 SP
Tooth thickness
sw = 2.357–0.030
G - UNF-2B / F A 510 241 801
7
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – R R 12 M B
Dis- Ordering-No. Max. Max. kg Dimension
n N
place- operating rotation
ment pressure speed [mm]
[cm3/rev] L R [bar] [rpm] A B G쒃 G쒆 F쒃 F쒆
4 – 0 510 225 010 280 4000 3.15 39.9 82.7 9/16-18 9/16-18 13 13 8
5.5 – 0 510 325 010 280 4000 3.2 41.4 85.2 9/16-18 9/16-18 13 13
8 – 0 510 425 015 280 4000 3.3 43.2 91.1 7/8-14 7/8-14 16 16
11 0 510 525 315 0 510 525 014 280 3500 3.4 47.0 96.1 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
14 – 0 510 525 041 280 3000 3.5 47.5 101.1 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
16 – 0 510 625 020 280 3000 3.75 47.5 104.5 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
19 0 510 625 346 0 510 625 048 230 3000 3.9 47.5 109.5 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
22.5 – 0 510 725 063 210 2500 4.0 55.1 114.9 11/16-12 7/8-14 19 16
1086
Dimensions
Standard range
B± 0.7
. 5 ±1
6.2± 0.1 A± 0.4 SAE-A flange
47
11+0.27
R
45°
45°
Ø82.55–0.05
10° 10°
15.7±1
100+1.5
–1
±1
12
R
15 106.4±0.15
31.5± 0.4 35± 0.15 127±1.5

M6
8± 0.5 12.5–0.5
(7–0.3 / Ø18.5) 4/5.5 cm3 / Urev
Ø15.456–0.127
Ø21
Ø17–0.027
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Min. 21.8
usable shaft length D
C
9T 16/32 SP
Tooth thickness E
sw = 2.357–0.030
A 510 241 201
45°
45°
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – R R 20 M B
AZPF – 11 – R R 20 K B*
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 225 314 0 510 225 013 280 4000 3.15 39.9 85.0 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 325 313 0 510 325 013 280 4000 3.2 41.1 87.5 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 425 314 0 510 425 020 280 4000 3.3 43.2 91.6 20 40
11 0 510 525 324* 0 510 525 019 280 3500 3.5 47.0 96.6 20 40
14 0 510 525 325 0 510 525 020 280 3000 3.6 47.5 101.6 20 40
16 0 510 625 329 0 510 625 028 280 3000 3.8 47.5 105.0 20 40
19 0 510 625 330* 0 510 625 029* 230 3000 3.9 47.5 110.0 20 40
22.5 0 510 725 361 0 510 725 077* 210 2500 4.1 55.1 115.4 20 40
1087
Dimensions
Standard range
32±0.5 B±0.7
±1
6.2±0.1 A±0.4 SAE-A flange
1
.5
47
17.73 –0.13 11 +0.27
R
45°
45°
Ø82.55–0.05
10 ° 10 °
15.7 ±1
100 +1.5
–1
2
±1
12
R
15 106.4 ±0.15
35±0.15 127 ±1.5
7–0.3 M6
8±0.4 3
Ø15.875 –0.025
Ø18.5
Ø17 –0.027
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
D
5
C
45° A 510 240 215

45°
KEY.156 SQ x.750 LG
Shaft key 4 x 20
DIN 6885
7
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – Q R 20 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 – 0 510 225 014 280 4000 3.2 39.9 84.5 15 40 M6 8
5.5 – 0 510 325 016 280 4000 3.3 41.1 87.0 15 40 depth 13
8 – 0 510 425 025 280 4000 3.3 43.2 91.1 20 40
11 – 0 510 525 033 280 3500 3.5 47.0 96.1 20 40
16 – 0 510 625 042 200 3000 3.8 47.5 104.5 20 40
19 – 0 510 625 043 170 3000 3.9 47.5 109.5 20 40
22.5 0 510 725 396 0 510 725 060 140 2500 3.9 55.1 114.9 20 40
1088
Dimensions
Standard range
45+0.5
–1 B±0.7
. 5
±0.4 ±0
8–0.2 A 9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5±0.1
2
45° 45°
–0.060
Ø80–0.106
15.7±1
100±0.2
120±1.5
100+1.5
–1
9.9±0.4
1:5
15
12.5+1 72±0.2
35±0.15
M6 90±1.5
9.5±0.7
'
" ±1
38
4–0.03
Ø20–0.065
–0.117
'
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
19.2
D
DIN 128-A14-FSt C at 4 and 5 cm 3
(15)
E
DIN 936-
M14x1.5-m-06
A 510 243 021
45°
45°
4x6.5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPF – 11 – S A 20 M B
AZPF – 11 – S A 20 K B*
n N
pressure speed [mm]
4 0 510 245 300 0 510 245 001 280 4000 3.1 71.1 114.2 15 40 M6
5.5 0 510 345 300 0 510 345 001 280 4000 3.1 72.3 116.7 15 40 depth 13
8 0 510 445 300 0 510 445 001* 280 4000 3.3 74.4 120.8 20 40
11 0 510 545 300 0 510 545 001 280 3500 3.5 78.2 125.8 20 40
14 280 3000 78.7 130.8 20 40
16 0 510 645 300 0 510 645 004 230 3000 3.6 78.7 134.2 20 40
19 0 510 645 002 190 3000 3.9 78.7 139.2 20 40
22.5 160 2500 92.3 156.6 20 40
1089
Dimensions
Standard range
88.6+0.5
–1 B±0.7 .5
±0
13.5±1.5 A±0.4 90±1.5 9 1
R
44.5±1.5
45°
34.5±0.1
2 45°
–0.060
Ø80–0.106
15.7±0.1
100±0.2
100+1.5
–1
120±1.5
2
9±0.11
1:5
15
20–0.2 72±0.2
35±0.15
M6
53.8±0.3 3
for reference-Ø 20.00
'
" ±1
38
'
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
4
4–0.03
Ø20–0.065
–0.117

19.2
50±1.5 D
DIN 128-A14-FSt
C
E 5
DIN 936-
M14x1.5-8-A
±1,5
Ø68
45° 6
45°
A 510 243 043
4x6.5 DIN 6888
26.5
7
Ordering code
AZPF – 10 – S G 20 M B
n N
pressure speed [mm]
11 – 0 510 545 003 280 3500 3.8 64.5 113.8 20 40 M6 8
14 0 510 545 302 0 510 545 002 280 3000 4.0 65.0 118.8 20 40 depth 13
16 – 0 510 645 005 230 3000 4.1 65.0 122.0 20 40
19 – 0 510 645 003 230 3000 4.3 65.0 127.0 20 40
1090
Dimensions
Standard range
40.2±0.6 A2±1 60±0.2
min. 10.6
7.2±0.1 A1±0.4 30±0.1
14.3±0.1
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
–0.064
Ø50–0.020
15.7±1
100+1.5
1.8
–1
45.7
1:5 15
35±0.15 M6 2x M10–10.9
10.3±0.35 B+0.5
–1 max. 8.5
Pump section I Pump section II
'
" ±1
Ø21
'38
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Ø17–0.027

M12x1.5
17
D
C E
A 510 234 501
45°
45°
3x5 DIN 6888
1091
Ordering code
AZPFF – 12 – / C P 20 20 K B
Displace- Ordering-No. Max. Max. kg Dimension 1
n N
pressure speed
[cm3/rev] [bar] [rpm] [mm]
PI PII L R PI PII A1 A2 B C 1) D E
5.5 4 0 510 365 305 – 280 280 4000 4.8 38.6 121.6 157.9 15 40 M6
8 4 0 510 465 324 0 510 465 011 280 280 4000 4.4 40.7 125.7 162.0 20 40 depth 13
8 5.5 0 510 465 344 0 510 465 032 280 280 4000 4.4 40.7 126.9 164.5 20 40 2
8 8 0 510 465 320 0 510 465 023 280 280 4000 5.4 40.7 129.0 168.6 20 40
11 4 0 510 565 387 – 280 280 3500 4.5 44.5 130.7 167.0 20 40
11 5.5 0 510 565 319 0 510 565 095 280 280 3500 4.5 44.5 131.9 169.5 20 40
11 8 0 510 565 389 0 510 565 014 280 280 3500 4.6 44.5 134.0 173.6 20 40
11 11 0 510 565 376 0 510 565 061 280 280 3500 4.8 44.5 137.8 178.6 20 40
14 4 0 510 565 406 – 280 280 3000 4.6 45.0 135.7 172.0 20 40 3
14 8 0 510 565 335 0 510 565 072 280 280 3000 4.8 45.0 139.0 178.6 20 40
14 11 0 510 565 393 – 280 280 3000 5.0 45.0 142.8 183.6 20 40
14 14 – 0 510 565 417 280 280 3000 5.0 45.0 143.3 188.6 20 40
16 4 0 510 665 348 – 280 280 3000 4.75 45.0 139.1 175.4 20 40
16 5.5 0 510 665 337 – 280 280 3000 4.8 45.0 140.3 177.9 20 40
16 8 0 510 665 328 0 510 665 135 280 280 3000 6.0 45.0 142.4 182.0 20 40
4
16 11 0 510 665 382 0 510 665 152 280 280 3000 5.0 45.0 146.2 187.0 20 40
16 14 0 510 665 381 0 510 665 144 280 280 3000 5.1 45.0 146.7 192.0 20 40
16 16 0 510 665 330 0 510 665 052 280 230 3000 6.4 45.0 146.7 195.4 20 40
19 4 0 510 665 369 – 230 280 3000 4.9 45.0 144.1 180.4 20 40
19 5 0 510 665 442 – 230 280 3000 4.8 45.0 145.3 183.2 20 40
19 11 0 510 665 368 – 230 280 3000 5.2 45.0 146.2 192.0 20 40
19 14 0 510 665 418 – 230 280 3000 5.0 45.0 151.7 197.0 20 40 5
19 19 0 510 665 336 – 230 190 3000 6.6 45.0 151.7 205.4 20 40
22 8 0 510 765 345 0 510 765 045 210 280 2500 5.1 52.6 152.8 192.4 20 40
22 11 0 510 765 309 0 510 765 049 210 280 2500 5.2 52.6 156.7 197.7 20 40
22 16 0 510 765 343 0 510 765 028 210 230 2500 5.5 52.6 157.1 205.8 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
8
1092
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
23.5–0.8 A2±1
.5
7.2± 0.1 A1± 0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5± 1.5
34.5± 0.1
45°
45°
Ø80–0.106
–0.060
15.7± 1
100+1.5
100± 0.2
–1
120± 1.5
9± 0.11
Ø18
15
12.5–0.4 36± 0.1
35± 0.15 M6
72± 0.2
Pump section I Pump section II 90±1.5

2± 0.5
Ø16.5–0.27
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14 D
Tooth thickness sw = 3.200–0.030 C E
A 510 245 501 / 531
45°
45°
1093
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / F B 20 20 M B
AZPFF – 11 – / F B 20 20 M B* 1
Displace- Ordering-No. Max. oper- Max. kg Dimension
n N
ment ating pres- rotation
sure speed
8 5.5 0 510 465 345 – 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 129.4 174.0 20 40 M6
8 8 0 510 465 326* – 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 131.5 178.1 20 40 depth 13 2
11 4 – 0 510 565 032 280 280 3500 6.3 47.0 133.2 176.5 20 40
11 5.5 0 510 565 332 0 510 565 034 280 280 3500 6.35 47.0 134.4 179.0 20 40
11 8 0 510 565 334* 0 510 565 018 280 280 3500 6.4 47.0 136.5 183.1 20 40
11 11 0 510 565 328 0 510 565 035 280 280 3500 6.5 47.0 140.3 188.1 20 40
14 4 0 510 565 367 – 280 280 3000 6.4 47.5 138.2 181.5 20 40
14 5.5 0 510 565 069 – 280 280 3500 6.5 47.5 139.4 183.7 20 40 3
14 8 0 510 565 356 0 510 565 019 280 280 3000 6.5 47.5 141.5 188.1 20 40
16 4 – 0 510 665 058 280 280 3000 6.7 47.5 141.6 184.9 20 40
16 8 0 510 665 333 0 510 665 064 280 280 3000 6.8 47.5 144.9 191.5 20 40
16 11 0 510 665 347 0 510 665 036 280 280 3000 6.9 47.5 148.7 196.5 20 40
16 16 0 510 665 334 0 510 665 029 280 230 3000 7.3 47.5 149.2 204.9 20 40
19 4 – 0 510 665 115 230 280 3000 5.5 47.5 146.6 189.0 20 40
4
19 11 0 510 665 375* – 230 280 3000 5.9 47.5 153.7 201.5 20 40
19 19 0 510 665 420 0 510 665 097 230 190 3000 6.3 47.5 154.2 214.9 20 40
22.5 5.5 0 510 765 317 0 510 765 022 210 280 2500 5.8 61.1 165.2 209.8 20 40
22.5 8 0 510 765 331 – 210 280 2500 6.18 61.1 167.3 213.9 20 40
22.5 16 0 510 765 341 – 210 230 2500 6.4 61.1 171.6 227.3 20 40
22.5 22.5 0 510 765 338 – 210 160 2500 7.05 61.1 185.2 249.7 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15 5
8
1094
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
38±0.6 A2±1
.5
7.2±0.1 A1±0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5±0.1
45°
45°
–0.060
Ø80–0.106
15.7±1
100+1.5
1.8
100±0.2
120±1.5
–1
±0.11
9
1:5
Ø18
15
12.5–0.4 72±0.2
35±0.15 M6
90±1.5
7.8±0.35 Pump section I Pump section II

'
" ±1
38
Ø17–0.027
'
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
17
D
DIN 128-A12-FSt
C E
A 510 244 533 / A 510 844 524

DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
45°
45°
3x5 DIN 6888
1095
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / C B 20 20 M B
AZPFF – 11 – / C B 20 20 M B*
n N
pressure speed
[cm3/rev] [bar] [rpm] [mm] 1
4 4 0 510 900 002* 0 510 900 001* 280 280 4000 4.5 39.9 121.6 164.4 15 40 M6
5.5 4 0 510 900 005* – 280 280 4000 4.9 41.1 124.1 166.9 15 40 depth 13
5.5 5.5 0 510 900 004* 0 510 900 003* 280 280 4000 5.0 41.1 125.3 169.4 15 40
8 16 – 0 510 900 042* 280 230 3000 5.6 43.2 135.8 191.0 20 40
8 4 0 510 900 008* 0 510 900 051* 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 128.2 171.0 20 40
2
8 5.5 0 510 900 009* 0 510 900 007* 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 129.4 173.5 20 40
8 8 0 510 900 010* 0 510 900 006* 280 280 4000 5.2 43.2 131.5 177.6 20 40
11 4 0 510 900 015* 0 510 900 012* 280 280 3500 5.2 47.0 133.2 176.0 20 40
11 5.5 0 510 900 017* 0 510 900 046* 280 280 3500 5.2 47.0 134.4 178.5 20 40
11 8 0 510 900 016* 0 510 900 044* 280 280 3500 5.4 47.0 136.5 182.6 20 40
11 11 0 510 900 018* 0 510 900 039* 280 280 3500 5.5 47.0 140.3 187.6 20 40
14 4 0 510 900 036* – 280 280 3000 5.3 47.5 138.2 181 20 40 3
14 5.5 – 0 510 900 060* 280 280 3000 5.4 47.5 139.4 183.5 20 40
14 8 0 510 900 020* 0 510 900 011* 280 280 3000 5.5 47.5 141.5 187.6 20 40
14 8 0 510 565 364 0 510 565 012 280 280 3000 5.6 47.5 141.5 188.1 20 40
14 11 0 510 900 019* 0 510 900 013* 280 280 3000 5.6 47.5 145.3 192.6 20 40
14 11 0 510 565 353 0 510 565 033 280 280 3000 5.7 47.5 145.3 193.1 20 40
14 14 – 0 510 900 014* 280 280 3000 5.8 47.5 145.8 197.6 20 40 4
14 14 – 0 510 565 037 280 280 3000 5.9 47.5 145.8 198.1 20 40
16 4 0 510 900 059* 0 510 900 021* 280 280 3000 5.5 47.5 141.6 184.4 20 40
16 5.5 0 510 900 028* – 280 280 3000 5.5 47.5 142.8 186.9 20 40
16 8 0 510 900 035* 0 510 900 022* 280 280 3000 5.6 47.5 144.9 191.0 20 40
16 11 0 510 900 029* 0 510 900 023* 280 280 3000 5.7 47.5 148.7 196.0 20 40
16 14 – 0 510 900 061* 280 280 3000 5.9 47.5 149.2 201.0 20 40
5
16 16 0 510 900 030* 0 510 900 024* 280 230 3000 6.0 47.5 149.2 204.4 20 40
19 4 0 510 900 043* 0 510 900 049* 230 280 3000 5.6 47.5 146.6 189.4 20 40
19 5.5 – 0 510 665 067 230 280 3000 5.6 47.5 147.8 192.4 20 40
19 5.5 – 0 510 900 027* 230 280 3000 5.6 47.5 147.8 191.9 20 40
19 8 0 510 900 031* 0 510 900 047* 230 280 3000 5.8 47.5 149.9 196.0 20 40
19 8 0 510 665 325* 0 510 665 024 230 280 3000 6.7 47.5 149.9 196.5 20 40
19 11 0 510 900 032* 0 510 900 052* 230 280 3000 5.9 47.5 153.7 201.0 20 40 6
19 11 0 510 665 326 – 230 280 3000 6.9 47.5 153.9 201.5 20 40
19 14 0 510 900 053* – 230 280 3000 6.0 47.5 154.2 206.0 20 40
19 16 0 510 665 327 0 510 665 053 230 230 3000 7.1 47.5 154.2 209.9 20 40
19 16 0 510 900 033* 0 510 900 026* 230 230 3000 6.1 47.5 154.2 209.4 20 40
19 19 0 510 900 034* 0 510 900 025* 230 210 3000 6.2 47.5 154.2 214.4 20 40
19 19 0 510 665 400 0 510 665 025 230 190 3000 6.2 47.5 154.2 214.9 20 40 7
22.5 4 – 0 510 900 050* 210 280 2500 5.8 55.1 152.0 194.8 20 40
22.5 5.5 0 510 900 055* 0 510 900 045* 210 280 2500 5.8 55.1 153.2 197.3 20 40
22.5 8 0 510 900 057* 0 510 900 040* 210 280 2500 5.9 55.1 155.3 201.4 20 40
22.5 8 – 0 510 765 023 230 280 3000 5.9 61.0 167.3 213.9 20 40
22.5 11 – 0 510 900 054* 210 280 2500 6.0 55.1 159.1 206.4 20 40
22.5 11 0 510 765 320 – 210 250 3000 6.3 61.0 171.1 218.9 20 40 8
22.5 14 0 510 900 048* 0 510 900 058* 210 280 2500 6.2 55.1 159.6 211.4 20 40
22.5 16 0 510 900 041* 0 510 900 037* 210 230 2500 6.2 55.1 159.6 214.8 20 40
22.5 16 0 510 765 340 – 210 230 3000 6.55 61.0 171.6 227.3 20 40
22.5 22.5 0 510 900 056* 0 510 900 038* 210 180 2500 6.5 55.1 167.2 225.2 20 40
22.5 22.5 – 0 510 765 012 210 160 3000 6.5 61.0 185.2 249.7 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1096
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
A2±1
4.8±0.1 A1±0.4 8.5±0.11
R
8
9.5–0.2
40.5±1.5
45°
45°
32.5±0.1
Ø36.47–0.05
96.1±0.2
100+1.5
112+1.5
–1
–1
15.7±1
1:8
15
19±0.1 M6 71.4±0.2
35±0.5 ±1.5
87–1
39.5 ±0.6
12±0.35
3–0.025
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Ø16.65
D
DIN 128-A12-FSt
C E
DIN 936-
M12x1.5-m-06
A 510 844 313
45°
45°
3x5 DIN 6888
1097
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / H O 20 20 M B
AZPFF – 10 – / H O 20 20 K B* 1
n N
pressure speed
4 4 – 0 510 901 500 280 280 4000 4.7 41.4 123.1 165.9 15 40 M6
8 5.5 0 510 901 512 280 280 4000 4.9 44.7 130.9 175.0 20 40 depth 13 2
8 8 – 0 510 901 504 280 280 4000 5.0 44.7 133.0 179.1 20 40
11 4 – 0 510 901 509 280 280 3500 5.0 48.5 134.7 177.5 20 40
11 5.5 0 510 565 436* 0 510 901 503 280 280 3500 5.1 48.5 135.9 180.0 20 40
14 5.5 0 510 565 435* – 280 280 3000 5.2 49.0 140.9 185.0 20 40
14 11 – 0 510 901 513 280 280 3000 5.5 49.0 146.8 194.1 20 40
16 5.5 – 0 510 901 510 280 280 3000 5.3 49.0 144.3 188.4 20 40 3
16 8 0 510 901 514 – 280 280 3000 5.4 49.0 146.4 192.5 20 40
16 14 – 0 510 901 515 280 280 3000 5.7 49.0 150.7 202.5 20 40
16 16 – 0 510 901 501 280 230 3000 5.8 49.0 150.7 205.9 20 40
19 8 – 0 510 901 507 230 280 3000 5.5 49.0 151.4 197.5 20 40
19 11 – 0 510 901 508 230 280 3000 5.6 49.0 155.2 202.5 20 40
19 16 – 0 510 901 502 230 230 3000 5.9 49.0 155.7 210.9 20 40
4
19 19 0 510 901 506 – 230 190 3000 6.0 49.0 155.7 215.9 20 40
22.5 16 0 510 901 511 – 210 230 2500 6.1 56.6 161.1 216.3 20 40
22.5 19 – 0 510 901 505 210 190 2500 6.2 56.6 161.7 220.3 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
8
1098
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
A2±1
6.2± 0.1 A1± 0.4 SAE-A flange
1
47 ±
11+0.27
R
45° 45°
Ø82.55–0.05
10° 10°
15.7±1
100+1.5
–1
±1
12
R
15 106.4±0.15
35± 0.15 M6 127±1.5
31.5± 0.4 12.5–0.5
8± 0.5
Ø15.456–0.127

Ø21
Ø17–0.027
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
Min. 21.8 D
A 510 245 201 / 231 / A 510 845 270

usable shaft length C
E
9T 16/32 SP
Tooth thickness
sw = 2.357–0.030
45°
45°
1099
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / R R 20 20 M B
AZPFF – 11 – / R R 20 20 M B* 1
AZPFF – 11 – / R R 20 20 K B**
n N
pressure speed
5.5 4 0 510 901 029* – 280 280 4000 4.9 41.1 124.1 166.9 15 40 M6 2
5.5 5.5 – 0 510 901 042* 280 280 4000 5.0 41.1 125.3 169.4 15 40 depth 13
8 4 0 510 901 032* 0 510 901 034* 280 280 4000 5.0 43.2 128.2 171.0 20 40
8 5.5 0 510 901 018* 0 510 901 030* 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 129.4 173.5 20 40
8 8 – 0 510 901 021* 280 280 4000 5.1 43.2 131.5 177.6 20 40
11 4 – 0 510 901 024* 280 280 3500 5.1 47.0 133.2 176.0 20 40
11 4 – 0 510 565 022 280 280 3500 5.2 47.0 133.2 176.5 20 40 3
11 5.5 0 510 901 015* 0 510 901 000* 280 280 3500 5.2 47.0 134.4 178.5 20 40
11 5.5 – 0 510 565 023 280 280 3500 5.2 47.0 134.4 179.0 20 40
11 8 0 510 901 031* 0 510 901 037* 280 280 3500 5.3 47.0 136.5 182.6 20 40
11 11 0 510 901 009* 0 510 901 035** 280 280 3500 5.5 47.0 140.3 187.6 20 40
14 5.5 0 510 901 033* – 280 280 3000 5.4 47.5 139.4 183.5 20 40
14 8 – 0 510 901 016* 280 280 3000 5.5 47.5 141.5 187.6 20 40
4
14 11 0 510 565 346 – 280 280 3000 5.7 47.5 145.3 193.1 20 40
14 11 0 510 901 001* 0 510 901 011* 280 280 3000 5.6 47.5 145.3 192.6 20 40
14 14 – 0 510 901 036* 280 280 3000 5.7 47.5 145.8 197.6 20 40
16 4 – 0 510 901 028* 280 280 3000 5.4 47.5 141.6 184.4 20 40
16 5.5 0 510 901 014* 0 510 901 008* 280 280 3000 5.4 47.5 142.8 186.9 20 40
16 8 0 510 901 006* 0 510 901 005* 280 280 3000 5.5 47.5 144.9 191.0 20 40
16 11 0 510 901 012* 0 510 901 002* 280 280 3000 5.7 47.5 148.7 196.0 20 40 5
16 11 0 510 665 354 0 510 665 042 280 280 3000 5.8 47.5 148.7 196.0 20 40
16 16 0 510 901 027* 0 510 901 022* 280 280 3000 5.9 47.5 149.2 204.4 20 40
19 4 – 0 510 901 044* 230 280 3000 5.5 47.5 146.6 189.4 20 40
19 5.5 0 510 901 041* 0 510 901 043* 230 280 3000 5.6 47.5 147.8 191.9 20 40
19 8 0 510 901 017* 0 510 901 003* 230 280 3000 5.7 47.5 149.9 196.0 20 40
19 8 – 0 510 665 126** 230 280 3000 5.6 47.5 149.9 196.0 20 40 6
19 8 – 0 510 665 047 230 280 3000 5.8 47.5 149.9 196.0 20 40
19 11 0 510 665 435 0 510 901 004* 230 280 3000 5.8 47.5 153.7 201.0 20 40
19 14 0 510 901 040* 0 510 901 025* 230 280 3000 5.9 47.5 154.2 206.0 20 40
19 16 0 510 901 039* 0 510 901 045* 230 230 3000 6.0 47.5 154.2 209.4 20 40
19 19 0 510 901 010* – 230 190 3000 6.2 47.5 154.2 214.4 20 40
19 19 – 0 510 665 132 230 190 3000 6.1 47.5 154.2 214.4 20 40
7
22.5 4 – 0 510 901 023* 210 280 2500 5.7 55.1 152.0 194.8 20 40
22.5 5.5 – 0 510 901 020* 210 280 2500 5.7 55.1 153.2 197.3 20 40
22.5 8 – 0 510 765 016 180 280 2500 7.6 55.1 155.3 201.4 20 40
22.5 11 0 510 901 019* 0 510 901 026* 210 280 2500 5.9 55.1 159.1 206.4 20 40
22.5 14 0 510 901 013* 0 510 901 007* 210 280 2500 6.1 55.1 159.6 211.4 20 40
22.5 22.5 0 510 901 038* – 210 180 2500 6.4 55.1 167.2 225.2 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15 8
1100
Dimensions
Standard range
A2±1 60±0.2
min. 10.6
7.2±0.1 A1±0.4 30±0.1
15.7±1
–0.025
8–0.083
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
Ø17–0.027
100+1.5
–1
60±0.2
14.3±0.1
2.7+0.5 15
6.5+0.2 35±0.15 M6 4 x M10–10.9
B+0.7
–1.2 max. 9
Ø21
As shown in drawing
Ø47.8–0.2
Ø52–0.030
–0.076
Ø32+0.16
84–0.2
2+0.2
3.2+0.2
D
C E
incl. 1 900 210 145

incl. 1 510 240 000
A 510 236 501
45°
45°
Mmax. = 65 Nm, see page 17
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / N M 20 20 M B
n N
pressure speed
5.5 4 0 510 365 314 0 510 365 010 280 280 4000 4.2 38.6 121.6 157.9 15 40 M6
8 4 – 0 510 465 012 280 280 4000 4.4 40.7 125.7 162.0 20 40 depth 13
8 5.5 0 510 465 346 – 280 280 4000 4.4 40.7 126.9 164.5 20 40
8 8 – 0 510 465 008 280 380 4000 5.6 40.7 129.0 168.6 20 40
11 4 0 510 565 329 0 510 565 015 280 280 3500 4.5 44.5 130.7 167.0 20 40
11 5.5 – 0 510 565 016 280 280 3500 4.6 44.5 131.9 169.5 20 40
11 8 0 510 565 379 0 510 565 078 280 280 3500 4.65 44.5 134.0 173.6 20 40
16 16 0 510 665 339 0 510 665 030 280 230 3000 5.2 45.0 146.7 195.4 20 40
22.5 8 0 510 765 312 – 210 280 2500 5.2 52.5 152.8 192.4 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1101
Dimensions
Standard range
A2±1 60 ±0.2
1
min. 10.6
7.2 ±0.1 A1±0.4 30 ±0.1
34.3 ±1.5
45 °
45 °
–0.020
Ø50 –0.064
15.7 ±1
100 +1.5
–1
60 ±0.2
14.3 ±0.1
2
15
35 ±0.15 M6 2x M10–10.9
26 –0.8 B+0.7
–1.2 max. 9 3
4.5 ±0.5 Pump section I Pump section II
Ø21
Ø16.5 –0.27
As shown in drawing
84 –0.2
4
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
Tooth thickness sw = 3.200 –0.030 D
Min. 14.8 usable shaft length
C E 5
A 510 235 501

6
45 °
45 °
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / F P 20 20 M B
7
AZPFF – 10 – / F P 20 20 K B*
n N
pressure speed
8 4 0 510 465 355 – 280 280 4000 4.4 40.7 125.7 162.0 20 40 M6 8
11 8 0 510 565 385 – 280 280 3500 4.6 44.5 134.0 173.6 20 40 depth 13
16 8 – 0 510 665 071 280 280 3000 4.85 45.0 142.4 182.0 20 40
16 11 – 0 510 665 076 280 280 3000 4.98 45.0 146.2 187.0 20 40
16 14 0 510 665 404* – 280 280 3000 5.12 45.0 146.7 192.0 20 40
16 16 0 510 665 376 0 510 665 062 280 230 3000 5.2 45.0 146.7 195.4 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1102
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
45+0.5
–1 A2±1
.5
8–0.2 A1±0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5±0.1
45°
45°
–0.060
Ø80–0.106
15.7±1
100+1.5
2
100±0.2
120±1.5
–1
9.5±0.2
1:5
15
12.5+1 35±0.15 M6 72±0.2
90±1.5

'
" ±1
38 '
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2
4–0.03
–0.117
Ø20–0.065
19
D
DIN 128-A14-FSt
C E
DIN 936-
M14x1.5-8-A
45°
45° A 510 246 001
4x6.5 DIN 6888
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / S A 20 20 M B
n N
pressure speed
4 4 0 510 255 300 – 280 280 4000 4.8 71.3 153.0 197.0 15 40 M6
5.5 4 0 510 355 301 – 280 280 4000 5.0 72.6 155.5 199.5 15 40 depth 13
8 5.5 0 510 455 300 0 510 455 001 280 280 4000 5.2 74.6 160.8 206.1 20 40
8 8 0 510 455 301 0 510 455 002 280 280 4000 5.3 74.6 163.0 210.2 20 40
11 5.5 0 510 555 300 0 510 555 001 280 280 3500 5.3 79.0 165.8 211.1 20 40
11 8 0 510 555 301 0 510 555 002 280 280 3500 5.4 79.0 168.0 215.2 20 40
11 11 0 510 555 302 0 510 555 003 280 280 3500 5.5 79.0 172.3 220.2 20 40
16 4 0 510 655 300 0 510 655 001 280 280 3000 6.4 79.0 173.0 217.0 20 40
16 5.5 0 510 655 301 0 510 655 002 280 280 3000 5.5 79.0 174.2 219.5 20 40
16 8 0 510 655 302 0 510 655 003 280 280 3000 5.6 79.0 176.3 223.6 20 40
16 11 0 510 655 303 0 510 655 004 280 280 3000 5.7 79.0 180.7 228.6 20 40
16 16 0 510 655 304 0 510 655 005 280 230 3000 6.0 79.0 180.7 237.0 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1103
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
88.6+0.5
–1 A2±1 1
.5
13.5±1.5 A1±0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5±1.5
34.5±0.1
45°
45°
–0.106
Ø80–0.060
Ø68±1.5
15.7±1
100+1.5
100±0.2
118±1.5
–1
2
9±0.11
1:5
15
20–0.2 72±0.2
35±0.15 M6
50±1.5 90±1.5 3

'
" ±1
'38
5°42
As shown in drawing
84–0.2 4
Inlet and outlet port
4–0.03
–0.065
Ø20–0.117
changed
19.2
D
DIN 128-A14-FSt
C E 5
DIN 936-
M14x1.5-8-A
6
45°
45° A 510 246 111
4x6.5 DIN 6888
26.5
7
Ordering code:
AZPFF – 10 – / S G 20 20 P B
n N
pressure speed
PI PII L R PI PII A1 A2 B C 1) D E 8
16 16 – 0 510 655 007 280 280 3000 6.2 65.0 166.7 221.9 20 40 M6
19 19 – 0 510 655 011 230 190 3000 6.6 65.0 171.7 231.9 20 40 depth 13
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1104
Dimensions
Standard range
B+0.7
–1.2
7.2± 0.1 A2±1 104±0.2

max. 4.9 A1± 0.4 11±0.135
8–0.083
–0.025
Ø17–0.27
34.3±1.5
45°
45°
–0.076
Ø52–0.030
Ø41
15.7±1
100+1.5
R
–1
12
–1
6.5+0.2 15
11.9–0.5 35± 0.15 M6
11
Ø22.5
8+0.058
Ø47.8–0.15
As shown in drawing
+0.4
Ø30–0.2
84–0.2
12–0.2 Inlet and outlet port changed
2+0.2 D
3.2+0.2 C E
incl. 1 900 210 145

incl. 1 510 000 004
A 510 246 201
45°
45°
Ordering code
AZPFF – 10 – / N L 20 20 K B
n N
pressure speed
5.5 5.5 – 0 510 365 009 280 280 4000 4.65 38.6 122.8 169.2 15 40 M6
11 11 – 0 510 565 043 280 280 3500 5.2 44.5 137.5 187.4 20 40 depth 13
16 8 0 510 665 449 – 280 280 3000 5.2 45.0 142.4 188.4 20 40
16 22.5 0 510 665 068 – 280 160 2500 6.17 45.0 160.3 226.6 20 40
1) 4 and 5.5 cm3 Ø 15
1105
Dimensions
Standard range
Version y = B2±1.2
B1±1
23.5–0.8 A2±1 1
.5
7.2± 0.1 A1± 0.4 ±0
9
R
44.5± 1.5
34.5± 0.1
45°
45°
–0.106
Ø80–0.060
15.7±1
100± 0.2
100+1.5
120± 1.5
–1
2
9± 0.11
Ø18
15
12.5–0.4 36± 0.1
35± 0.15
M6 72± 0.2
90±1.5
Version x = B2±0.2
2 ± 0.5 Pump section I Pump section II Pump section III

Ø16.5–0.27
As shown in drawing
4
84–0.2
Min. 14.8
usable shaft length
DIN 5482 B 17 x 14
Tooth thickness sw = 3.200–0.030 5
D
C E

Hydraulic Pump PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hydraulic Pump PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product catalog

Product catalogs Industrial hydraulics of Bosch Rexroth at a glance:

Part 1: Pumps RE 00112-01

Part 2 Motors RE 00112-02

Part 3: Cylinders RE 00112-03

Part 4: On/oﬀ valves RE 00112-04

Part 5: Proportional servo valves RE 00112-05

Part 6: Electronics RE 00112-06

Part 7: Systems RE 00112-07

Part 8: Power units, Manifolds and plates, Accumulators RE 00112-08

Part 9: Filters RE 00112-09

Part 10: ATEX units for potentially explosive atmospheres RE 00112-10

RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

Publisher Bosch Rexroth AG

Catalog No. Document no.: RE 00112-01

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08

Axial piston pumps 69 2

External gear pumps 1023 3

Internal gear pumps 1317 4

Gerotor pumps 1379 5

Vane pumps 1393 6

Radial piston pumps 1463 7

Electro-hydraulic pumps 1489 8

RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08

Designation Data sheet Page

Installation, commissioning and maintenance

RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08, Bosch Rexroth AG

Bosch Rexroth AG, RE 00112-01, edition: 2013-08

maintenance of hydraulic systems

1. General • For hydraulics fluids:

of hydraulic pumps and motors

1. General – Suction vacuum pressure or feed pressure must be

2.3.3 Installation instructions 3.3 Filling

Hydraulic fluids based on mineral RE 90220/05.12

oils and related hydrocarbons

Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components

Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922

2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

Particles per 100 ml

3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

40° 20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°

3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.6 Air separation ability (ASA)

3.2 Classification and fields of application 3

Table 4: Classification and fields of application

Table 4: Classification and fields of application (continued from page 7)

4 Hydraulic fluids in operation

4.8 Corrosion 4.11 Fluid servicing, fluid analysis and filtration

5 Disposal and environmental

6 Other hydraulic fluids based on mineral oil and related hydrocarbons

– To be used only after confirmation!

Environmentally acceptable RE 90221/05.12 1/14

Application notes and requirements for Rexroth hydraulic components

Hydraulic fluids based Environmentally Fire-resistant, Fire-resistant,

Standard DIN 51524 ISO 15380 ISO 12922 ISO 12922

2 Solid particle contamination and cleanliness levels

Table 1: Cleanliness levels according to ISO 4406

Particles per 100 ml

3 Selection of the hydraulic fluid

20 For comparison HLP

3.1.3 Wear protection capability 3.1.5 Aging resistance

40° 20° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°

40q 20q 0q 20q 40q 60q 80q 100q